"Don’t Repeat That To Anybody" - Hillary Clinton And Donna Brazile Personally Implicated + The Presstitutes Have Set Up The Election To Be Stolen October 28 2016 | From: Zerohedge / PaulCraigRoberts / Various
Last week, Jame O'keefe and Project Veritas Action potentially altered the course of the U.S. election, or at a minimum raised serious doubts about the practices of the Clinton campaign and the DNC, after releasing two undercover videos that revealed efforts of democrat operatives to incite violence at republican rallies and commit "mass voter fraud."
While democrats have vehemently denied the authenticity of the videos, two democratic operatives, Robert Creamer and Scott Foval, have both been forced to resign over the allegations.
Many democrats made the rounds on various mainstream media outlets over the weekend in an attempt to debunk the Project Veritas videos. Unfortunately for them, O'Keefe fired back with warnings that part 3 of his multi-part series was forthcoming and would implicate Hillary Clinton directly.
Now, we have the 3rd installment of O'Keefe's videos which does seemingly reveal direct coordination between Hillary Clinton, Donna Brazile, Robert Creamer and Scott Foval to organize a smear campaign over Trump's failure to release his tax returns.
"Part III of the undercover Project Veritas Action investigation dives further into the back room dealings of Democratic politics. It exposes prohibited communications between Hillary Clinton’s campaign, the DNC and the non-profit organization Americans United for Change.
And, it’s all disguised as a duck. In this video, several Project Veritas Action undercover journalists catch Democracy Partners founder directly implicating Hillary Clinton in FEC violations.
“In the end, it was the candidate, Hillary Clinton, the future president of the United States, who wanted ducks on the ground,” says Creamer in one of several exchanges. “So, by God, we would get ducks on the ground.”
It is made clear that high-level DNC operative Creamer realized that this direct coordination between Democracy Partners and the campaign would be damning when he said: “Don’t repeat that to anybody.”
Within the video both Clinton and Brazile are directly implicated by Creamer during the following exchange:
"The duck has to be an Americans United for Change entity. This had to do only with some problem between Donna Brazile and ABC, which is owned by Disney, because they were worried about a trademark issue. That's why. It's really silly.
We originally launched this duck because Hillary Clinton wants the duck.
In any case, so she really wanted this duck figure out there doing this stuff, so that was fine. So, we put all these ducks out there and got a lot of coverage. And Trump taxes. And then ABC/Disney went crazy because they thought our original slogan was 'Donald ducks his taxes, releasing his tax returns."
They said it was a trademark issue. It's not, but anyway, Donna Brazile had a connection with them and she didn't want to get sued. So we switched the ownership of the duck to Americans United for Change and now our signs say 'Trump ducks releasing his tax returns.' And we haven't had anymore trouble."
As Project Veritas points out, this direct coordination between Clinton, Brazile and Americans United For Change is a violation of federal election laws:
"The ducks on the ground are likely 'public communications' for purposes of the law. It's political activity opposing Trump, paid for by Americans United For Change funds but controlled by Clinton/her campaign."
As a reminder, below are parts 1 & 2 of the Project Veritas series in case you missed them.
Video 1 revealed DNC efforts to incite violence at Trump rallies:
Video 2 provided the democrat playbook on how to committ "mass voter fraud":
The Presstitutes Have Set Up The Election To Be Stolen
Over the course of its history, the New York Times has reported on many American elections that have been rigged or stolen or are suspected of having been being rigged or stolen. For example, as a supporter of the black civil rights movement, the NY Times has many stories in its archives of elections rigged by disenfranchisement of black voters.
But this was when the NY Times was an independent voice before it became a whore for the Oligarchs who rule America. When the NY Times reported that black Americans could have no confidence in the integrity of American elections, the NY Times did not denounce itself for delegitimizing American democracy.
The NY Times forgot all of this when it published Max Fisher’s article yesterday. Fisher fished up “scholars” among the Hillary advocates, and they obligingly told him that Trump’s questioning of the integrity of American elections were the tactics of a would-be dictator who is at work delegitimizing democracy so that he can take over.
What Fisher and his “scholars” overlook is that the US government is already delegitimized in the eyes of the American population, as well as foreign populations.
If the US government was not already delegitimized, Donald Trump would not have been successful in what, despite Trump’s damnation by the presstitutes, was an easy sweep-aside of the Establishment’s candidates for the Republican presidential nomination.
Aerial photos show how downtown Detroit has been turned into a tiny urban island, surrounded by abandoned housing blocks
The US government is delegitimized, not only in the eyes of Americans, but also in the eyes of most of the world. Millions of Americans have lost their jobs, their careers, their hopes, because corrupt bought-and-paid-for-Washington enabled Globalism to send the futures of the American people to China and India.
Millions of Americans lost their homes, because the corrupt Federal Reserve came down on the side of five “banks too big to fail” at the expense of the American people.
Millions of Americans along with much of the world know that the US government has been slaughtering millions of peoples in seven countries based on lies, wasting not only countries and the lives of millions of peoples, but trillions of American dollars that Americans needed for their welfare.
Saddam Hussein had no weapons of mass destruction. Assad did not use chemical weapons.
Gaddafi was innocent of all the absurd charges that Washington used to destroy Libya, a country that had the most progressive social system on earth.
Russia did not invade Ukraine.
The Taliban had nothing whatsoever to do with 9/11.
Yet countries are in ruins because of Washington’s war crimes justified by transparent lies.
If the NY Times does not know this, the organization is too stupid to justify its existence. Of course the Times knows it. But the NY Times is no longer a newspaper. It is a cog in the Ministry of Propaganda that works to create a Matrix in which brainwashed Americans accept the dictates of the Oligarchs.
The purpose of the Times’ article is to discredit in advance criticism of an election that the ruling Oligarchs intend to steal. If the Times believed that Hillary would have a clear election victory, there would be no point to Fisher’s article.
We see voluminous signs of the intended theft of the election.
For example, Hillary’s lead in the polls is based on the pollsters skewing the affiliation of those polled to Democrats. The percentage of Democrats in the samples is far higher than their percentage of registered voters.
It the past it was difficult to steal elections unless they were very close. Exit polls were a check on vote count, and the disenfranchisement of blacks could be risky if it attracted the attention of the US Department of Justice.
The new method, which is unfolding before our eyes, steals the election in advance with the Oligarchs’ candidate far ahead in the polls (now by 12 points according to the latest fiction) and by making anyone who questions the faked results into a fascist dictator.
Obviously, if Hillary was really ahead by 12 points - a landslide - there would be no need for Fisher’s article or for the constant drumbeat against Trump.
Judging from the hysteria, as reflected in Fisher’s NY Times article, for example, the Oligarchs are aware that objections to their rule have elevated Trump.
In order to hold on to power, the American Oligarchs must smash Trump and put their bought-and-paid-for-candidate, Hillary - whom the Oligarchs have provided along with Bill a personal fortune of $120 million and endowed the Clinton Foundation with $1,600 million - into the Oval Office.
Pollsters by nature of their business are unreliable.
If truthful results offend the establishment political organizations, the pollsters are out of work. Polls have to serve the Oligarchs or the polling firms go down. Trump is an outsider toward whom the ruling Oligarchy is totally opposed, which is why Americans support him.
Therefore, polling firms are adverse to betting their future on poll results favorable to Trump, especially when the whores who constitute the American print and TV media, such as the NY Times, are all out to put Hillary in the White House.
As Hillary’s public statements have made clear, Hillary is antagonistic toward Russia and the Russian government, calling the president of Russia “the new Hitler.” She promises conflict with Russia, which would certainly be nuclear and end life on earth.
Trump says in the face of contrary ruling neoconservative opinion that he sees no point in conflict with Russia and no point in NATO’s continued existence a quarter century after the purpose of NATO collapsed with the Soviet Union.
Trump might not be successful in appointing a government that serves his instincts, but at least he gives us hope of avoiding military conflict with Russia and China. With Hillary there is no hope whatsoever.
My opinion is that the world would not survive Hillary’s first term. I have known the neoconservatives since the 1970s. They are crazed fanatics, and they hate Russia. Hillary is their agent.
It is unclear that the Russian government understands, or takes seriously, the neoconservative ideology of US world hegemony. Putin’s hesitant, indecisive behavior in Syria has done more to set himself and Russia up for demonization than to defeat ISIS.
The Western world is corrupt and evil. The list of its victims is almost endless. What disconnect makes some Russians desire association with the Western world?
How the Media and Democrats Rig the Perception of Trump
Leaked emails prove that the Trump-Putin connection was orhestrated as campaign talk
to deflect attention from damaging content of Clinton’s released emails.
Integrity Of US Elections Among Lowest Of All Countries
According to Shyla Nelson, the co-founder of Election Justice USA, US elections are manipulated in many ways, including «voter suppression, unauthorized registration purges, district gerrymandering, gross exit poll variances, the privatization of voting machinery, and the lack of transparency in ballot processing – our elections will continue to rank among the lowest in the world in integrity.
US elections are so corrupt that the US has threatened Russian diplomats with arrest if they attempt to monitor the US November presidential election.
Bill and Hillary are lawless because they have never been held accountable. As the justice system has given Hillary a pass, will voters hold her accountable in November, or will the American public also give her a pass?
Hillary Has Never Been Held Accountable For Anything
What is worse, Hillary laughing about her success in getting a child rapist off or Trump’s lewd comments about women? Why is it that the TV women can’t come up with the right answer? How can democracy function when a propaganda ministry takes the place of the media?
Trump’s crowds are hundreds of times larger than Hillary’s, so how is it that she is
in the lead? We are being told lies in order to cover up the coming election theft.
Donald Trump Has Won The 2016 Presidential Election
Secret Space Program Disclosure: Founders Of Solar Warden SSP With William Tompkins October 28 2016 | From: SphereBeingAlliance
In this episode, we have deeper insights into the Secret Space Program, with the astonishing disclosures of William Tompkins, our 94-year-old aerospace engineer who is clearly one of the founding fathers of the very Solar Warden program which he named - that same code name - that Corey later worked in.
In this first interview that we're going to show you, Tompkins gets into detail about one of the craft designs that he was working on for the Navy. Let's take a look.
William Tompkins: So we talked before about the different types. And this is a two-kilometer long spacecraft carrier, and it's streamlined to a degree.
And so in one of the big design review meetings, one of the managers said, “Wait a minute, Bill, it's a vacuum out there. You don't have to make it pointed. You don't have to have atmosphere to go working through.”
And so I said, Well, that's true, but the electromagnetic protection system, which we still are not sure how we're going to word, may or may not be capable of handling all of the different types of vehicles or weapons that could be . . . being used on us. And also, under certain conditions, we actually can get into the planet's atmosphere and operate. So anyway, we got around that one.
Now, if you can picture here this area down in here [Bill points to the bottom, center of the craft] . . . I'm going to switch these, and you're going to see the lower part of the hull.
Click on the image above top open a larger version in a new window
And what you see there is the different classes of attack and fighter aircraft returning to the mothership, or the spacecraft carrier, and with a vacuum-controlled entry sections. Actually, they would design to fold down so that you're already in support of making inside landing.
Nobody actually flies in these squadrons controlling any of the vehicles. It's all automatic, so you're not going to be hitting the walls or any of this kind of thing.
But very quickly, you can open these hatches on the side. The hatch then becomes sort of a platform to possibly land on if you're too low. And this answers the question of how do we handle the large spaces aboard the ships that are going to be operating on the missions.
So what we had done then was, using the same type of design concepts, we looked at the Marines' missions. We looked at the communication missions. We actually came up with virtually hundreds, then, of missions and sub-missions that we then in the tank [think tank] made recommendations back to the Navy themselves.
And one admiral, when he saw that first illustration, he made the statement that just the shape of that's going to scare them away. They'll turn around and go back, because it is a pretty hot configuration.
Some of the others are not as good and actually some of them are rectangular, depending on what the mission is required to accomplish.
David: So that's a pretty technically detailed diagram. And it's just one of a variety of things that come from this guy who has no financial interest in this. His book didn't sell very much. He's just living on a fixed income. And yet, that degree of precision in the art doesn't seem like it would be coming from somebody who's trying to make something up.
So I'm curious about how similar that looks to anything that you saw?
Corey Goode: That was most likely one of the concept designs that probably got fine-tuned. But there could be a craft that looks like that out there that I hadn't seen. I didn't see all of our vessels out there.
Now, that looked very similar to longer, wedge-shaped vessels that I saw that had areas coming up off the top almost like you see on a Navy vessel on the ocean.
And also, it had stealth edges. The corners were very much like the stealth ships that you see – how they curve.
David: Well, and something kind of caught my eye, which is that in his discussions with his superiors on the design, they said, “Oh, you don't need to worry about aerodynamics. It's not going through an atmosphere.”
But what I'm thinking of is, “Wait a minute. There's all this charge that you've got to move through even in space. There's inertia and there's electromagnetic fields.
So do you think that part of the reason why everything has an aerodynamic shape is that the basic vacuum energy of space itself has some sort of resistance that you have to cut through when you go through it?
Corey: They don't all have the aerodynamic shape.
David: Oh, Okay.
Corey: And as far as moving through charged particles and all this stuff in space, that's what the material on the outside of the craft and the electromagnetic shielding is for.
David: But in a case like this, for that particular mission, if it's also going to go through a planet's atmosphere, it would be good to have some aerodynamic qualities.
Corey: Right. The vessels that travel inside our atmosphere and out are usually going to be somewhat aerodynamic, even though with the propulsion systems they have they are not traveling through the atmosphere per se. They are in a bubble. And inside that bubble, the bubble is traveling.
David: Is there a reason for why stealth technology seems to involve these different flat panels that are kind of arranged at different angles? What's going on there?
Corey: It deflects radar, lidar, different waves, away from the receiver of the radar or lidar. So how it works is if you send it out and it hits a flat surface that is angled right, it's going to come back and you're going to get a report from that wave bouncing back.
If you have sharp angles, then very little of that wave is going to bounce back. The rest of it's going to be dispersed, and the waves will bounce off, but they're not going to hit the detector.
David: Well, I know that my insider Pete Peterson described that when the stealth was rolled out for Gulf War I, that it had in fact been mothballed for 20 years and was a very archaic and almost useless piece of technology by that time. Here he's [Tompkins] doing something in the 1950s that looks like stealth.
Corey: Yeah.
David: So that's pretty darn interesting.
Corey: Stealth goes way back.
David: Really?
Corey: Right. Stealth was being developed soon after the discovery and invention of the radar.
According to insiders the Lockheed SR-71 Blackbird is an example of vastly outdated technology that had been mothballed - but was later hauled out to give the public a glimpse of what their dollars had been used to develop at drastically overcharged rates (with the bulk of the funds being chanelled into the SSP's). By the time the public got to see this - it had been decomissioned junk for decades.
David: Wow! So I noticed in the second image that he showed that you have these very, very large doors, or hatches, as he was calling them, that open up on the side of the craft, and then a lot of little triangular wedges going in.
So what was your feeling when you saw that part of the illustration?
Corey: Well, as far as the doors opening, I had seen elevators that lift aircraft, move aircraft around. But if you have a door opening out, that can cause a lot of logistical problems if you're in battle or if you are traveling at a high rate of speed.
So usually, they have the doors open like this [side to side], up and down, and not protrude out.
David: Right.
Corey: But if there was another purpose and a need for it, I could see why they would develop it.
David: What about the actual shape of all those craft that were going into the larger craft?
Corey: Yes, that was very familiar. And the fact that he mentioned in these newer vessels or carriers, they do fly drones. They have people all inside [buildings or large craft] sitting in long rows flying drones, and they control a number of drones apiece.
David: Really.
Corey: Yeah. Little constellations of drones.
David: So what would this type of craft that he was designing be used for? Is it an attack craft? Is this a support craft?
Corey: It can be offensive and defensive, but usually these craft are designed to be offensive for attacking an enemy.
David: Does the Space Program have any proclivity towards doing an offensive attack on a civilization that they think they could conquer and overwhelm? Or is there also . . . is it mostly going to be defensive when they're out there trying to see what's around and getting attacked?
Corey: Well, it depends on who is in charge of, I guess, the Navy assets at the time. These people follow orders. So if they have a problem with attacking another species, they have to follow orders.
David: Well, in the case of a movie like “Avatar”, we have a clear example of our own government / military-industrial complex, in what would appear to be the future, having developed a space program, going to another planet with people who are tall and have blue skin, but there was something there that they really wanted, which was this unobtainium.
Do you think “Avatar” is describing something that is actually happening? Are there certain cases where planets are invaded for their materials?
Corey: Well, I do know that certain aspects of the ICC, but especially Dark Fleet, are going out on offensive conquering missions. And they're doing this alongside the Reptilians.
David: Well, and I do also remember Pete Peterson telling me that many of the craft that you see in “Avatar” are exactly identical to stuff that he had actually seen or worked on. I'm wondering if any of them look familiar to you when you saw the movie?
Corey: I didn't witness a whole lot of craft that flew inside of an atmosphere.
David: Ah.
Corey: So all of those craft were clearly designed to fly inside of some sort of a dense atmosphere. The craft that I saw were not built to operate in atmosphere.
David: All right. Well, speaking of James Cameron, not only do we have “Avatar”, he also had that movie “The Abyss”, where he describes extraterrestrials underneath the surface of the ocean.
And here we have William Tompkins in a very interesting discussion about undersea bases. Let's take a look.
Under Sea Bases
Tompkins:I did get hired by General Dynamics for a Navy program. And this program was to locate German submarines – anti-submarine warfare program.
And what's interesting about this is that the Navy selected the Lockheed P-3 patrol bombers to be the air vehicles to locate German ships and submarines.
Lockheed P-3 patrol bomber
German "U-Boat" submarine
This is the Cold War now, and so there was roughly 15 other NATO countries who were using the same aircraft, the same electronics, the same sensing systems and the communication system – all of it engineered and designed in US.
And so the United States had 120 of these, and the NATO countries had like another 60 of them, all out looking for German [and/or Russian] submarines.
But that's not quite the numbers. It's more like we had 2,000 of these and NATO had another 1,000 of these – not quite that high. And remember, there were only 11 Soviet submarines operating at that time. There were many of them that were in training operations, but they weren't tactical.
And so here we've got 2,800 P-3 aircraft flying all around the planet 24 hours a day looking for submarines.
Well, gee whiz, that's not exactly what we were doing either. And there's a title to the program, which is the mission ASW – anti-submarine warfare. But there's also one which is ASUW. And so the “U” is for 'unidentified extraterrestrials'.
And so this was the second-largest amount of military money allocated for a program on the planet. It's peacetime, but it's sort of a war condition. And we have all of these airplanes out, and it became necessary for a group, which I then was manager of, working for Data Graphics, which is a subsidiary of General Dynamics.
And later on, I worked for the corporate office on the red team at the corporate level.
And when we look at the size of this program, the number of personnel that have to be trained to fly these aircraft, the upgrading continually of the sensing systems, the underwater systems of the satellite system programs that were required to be on board these aircraft, it's absolutely unreal.
What we were really doing was looking for extraterrestrial vehicles in the ocean and in the large lakes and their bases on the bottom of the ocean.
People don't realize how much money, how much time, and how many people have to be involved in these programs.
And what are you doing? You're looking for extraterrestrials. Do you realize what we're saying? I mean, you're looking for extraterrestrial vehicles and bases. Your Navy is.
David: Well, the first thing that strikes me about the interview footage that we just saw here is the scope of this classified military operation to try to actually identify who is on our planet, where are they, what is their infrastructure, what is their agenda?
It would have to involve a massive amount of effort. So what were your thoughts on that?
Corey: I have heard of operations similar to what he was talking about, of fleets that were combing the ocean looking for submerged bases, and also USOs – unidentified submersible objects, I believe.
Now, from what I understood, very few people in that fleet would know what they were actually looking for. Everyone would go about doing their normal jobs. It'd just be a normal mission or a training mission, they'd be told. But very few intelligence people in that fleet would know exactly what was going on.
David: Well, to have 2,800 P-3 aircraft airborne at all times – this is obviously before the era of accurate geostationary satellites.
Corey: Right.
David: We're talking about a massive, massive operation here. How long do you think this had to have been done for?
Corey: Until they had strong enough sonar that would penetrate to the deepest parts of the ocean, and until we had the satellite coverage we needed. They had some sort of groups of aircraft or Navy vessels that were combing the ocean looking for non-terrestrials.
David: Do you think that there might have been a temptation at some point to tell the public, “Hey, we're aware of this extraterrestrial presence. We're doing the best we can. We're cataloging it now.”
Or was it just really important the whole thing be secret to avoid a panic of some kind?
Corey: Well, just in general, the Navy . . . I mean, you hear “loose lips sink ships”. Information is very compartmentalized to begin with, but this is not long after World War II, so everybody still had a different mindset than we do today.
If the government told you to stick a lit cigar in your ear, you'd say, “Yes, sir. Give me another.” That's just the way people were programmed.
David: So Tompkins is also discussing another point of corroboration with some things that you've said, which is that there were, in fact, underwater bases to be seen.
So could you review for us what your knowledge is about the existence of these bases, and where are they, what do they look like, who's in them, etc., etc.? Are there different types . . .
Corey: Yeah.
David: . . . that would be underground or underwater?
Corey: And there's a number of different types that are underwater. I even read about large underwater bases that were mobile, that moved along the bottom of the ocean and was doing some sort of core sampling or testing of the material that it was passing over.
And if you located where one of these were, you would then have to track it since they now were moving. So they would have ships that would just track a mobile underwater base.
David: Well, before we taped this segment, we were looking at just something like that on the Internet. Let's take a look right now at that little . . . This is an excerpt from a video describing something very similar to what Corey just described – two-and-a-half-mile wide, round object that seems to be tracing patterns on the sea floor.
Images from video on possible undersea ET exploration craft
So do you think that that is an example of one of these craft?
Corey: That very well could be. I mean, a two-mile-wide object is not going to be pushed in that unusual way under the ocean by a current.
David: So what would they be doing in a case like that? What's the objective?
Corey: From what I was told, these were like bases, but also laboratories. They were going around doing core samples, finding out what was at different depths below the surface, below the floor of the ocean.
David: Why would somebody want to have an undersea base if there's a honeycomb Earth and they could just pop into one of those combs underground?
Corey: There's a lot of different regions inside the honeycomb Earth that belong to different groups that they claim as their territory.
Also, under the ocean . . . There are a lot of different beings coming here that could care less about us, could care less about any animals flying in the sky or running around. All they care about is the life forms in the ocean and the ocean itself. They see the ocean as a life form. And a lot of these are aquatic species.
David: So what do you think was going on when James Cameron made “The Abyss”? It seems a very specific idea was being conveyed. We also have reason to believe that some of his other movies had disclosure in them as well, like “Avatar”. What do you think “The Abyss” was intended to get people ready for?
Corey: It was most likely groups within the military-industrial complex starting to seed our consciousness, which is what they've been doing through movies and television shows for a long time.
David: Yeah. That definitely makes sense, because this is an ongoing effort of four generations now of disclosure to get us ready for the truth.
Corey: Right. And as you've already reported, when Sony got hacked, it was proven that DARPA and these other groups were passing on ideas for movies and television shows.
David: Exactly. All right. Well, we have one more really exciting piece of footage for you to see here with our interview with Tompkins. And this time, he is describing his personal experience with one of the most infamous and legendary events in UFO lore – less known up until recently, a lot less known than Roswell, but several years before Roswell.
We're talking about the Battle of Los Angeles. Let's take a look now.
Battle of Los Angeles
Tompkins: February 1942, we were living in a very large home which had been converted to four apartments – two upstairs, two down.
We had a great big enormous deck that ran all the way across this real high-celinged building. So we were four blocks from the ocean, okay? We can't see the ocean, because it's down low and trees are in the way.
So my brother and I are laying on our floor listening to the radio and looking at some papers, and my dad says, “Get out here – out on the deck. Get out here NOW!” And we got up, and we went out to the back deck.
So right above the horizon of all the trees and stuff and buildings is this dot – a white dot. It's just there. And it's got to be some aircraft flying in to come over and land at the airbase, but it's not moving. It's just a bright dot.
And off of this dot, to the left, is a little beam. It's like a pencil beam, but you can see it.
This is out over the ocean, like maybe inside the breakwater, because we couldn't see the ocean, and we don't know how far out it is. It could have been 10 miles out. What in the world was that?
So we're watching it for about five minutes, and then there was a flash – a brilliant flash into our eyes.
It lit up the trees, the back, the side of – everything got lit up.
And it went out.
And we looked and looked and looked, and everything was gone – nothing else. So we went to bed.
12:30 at night, the anti-aircraft guns started firing. What we're talking about is this fantastic situation, the Los Angeles event – the Battle of Los Angeles, okay?
The anti-aircraft guns all started firing.
We go outside. Here's this massive thing right above us this big [Bill holds his hands about 3-ft. apart] – right above us, maybe 7,000 feet.
The anti-aircraft shells are blowing up on the bottom of it all around it. There's eight searchlights all focused on this as they're shooting at it.
And, of course, nothing is happening. And it parks there for an hour and a half. While it's parked, hundreds of different types of vehicles – most of them circular, but some cigar-shaped, large ones – came in underneath, being fired on where they're still trying to shoot this thing down.
They came around him. They came over him – all night long.
Now, it got boring after awhile, so we went to bed at 3:00 a.m. I don't know how it gets boring, okay? We went to bed at 3:00 a.m.
Now, when it started, everybody came outside. All of us are standing there watching this event.
Now, what was not published was that the breakwater is full of Navy ships who used up all of their ammunition that five-hour period – not just the coastal artillery who used up all of their ammunition, okay?
Your whole two Pacific navies, the Eastern Navy and the Western Navy, used up all their ammunition.
They finally quit, of course, just before daylight, and everybody went back inside.
But from the standpoint of all of us out there watching this, nobody got a heart attack. Nobody got sick. Nobody got scared. Nobody got frightened.
On the other side of the planet, London, was being bombed by the Germans. And they're trying to get into shelters.
We had a five-hour war, except they didn't shoot at us. But nobody got sick. The only persons who were actually wounded was from shrapnel. A couple of guys actually were killed.
Almost a million people in California watched an event for five hours of a massive extraterrestrial battle group that came over California with a mission.
David: Well, this is obviously one of the great classic events in UFO lore, something that just can't be covered up. Did you ever hear about or read about this battle on the smart-glass pads or in any of the briefings that you had on the inside?
Corey: I read that it had occurred. The only thing that I saw that wasn't reported here is that during the same time period, we did recover a non-terrestrial craft from the ocean in that general vicinity.
David: Really?
Corey: Yeah. I don't know if that would have been one of these smaller craft that he saw or the large one. To me, it seemed as though they were unaffected by the anti-aircraft.
David: But it is possible that one of them took a stray hit or something and landed in the ocean.
Corey: It could be. Or the Battle of LA craft and these other craft that sound like came out of it could very well have been searching for . . . It might have been a rescue operation.
You know, there's a number of things it could have been. They could have been probing our defenses, or maybe making a point to some of our leaders after a recent meeting.
David: Well, let me run this idea by you. This is something I discussed on “Wisdom Teachings”. It's worth repeating and getting your thoughts.
If you go back to Fatima, Portugal, right after Portugal enters into World War I, which is this horrible, devastating thing where tens of millions of people are dying, ultimately, you have these kids who start to be in contact with what appear to be spiritual beings that ultimately leads to a mass sighting of a silvery disk in which 90,000 people witnessed this thing.
And then they're soaked in rain, but when the whole thing's over they were miraculously dry. The craft appears to shoot rainbow colors all over the sky. 90,000 witnesses . . . That would have been the end of the cover-up if it had happened in our times.
Corey: Right. And a million people seeing this in Los Angeles, and sounds like Long Beach and other areas – today, with everyone having an iPhone, it would – yeah, it would be over.
David: So do you think it's possible that both the Fatima sightings and the Battle of LA could be benevolent groups that are showing us these things as we enter into war, to try to steer us away from warfare perhaps?
Corey: It very well could be, because with their technology, they could have flattened the whole city with very little effort.
So they were obviously not there for some sort of offensive operation – maybe an intelligence operation, rescue recovery operation, or there to make a point. But I really don't know exactly why this incident occurred.
According to what I've heard, there was some treaty signed that this type of open sighting, open mass sighting, is against a treaty.
David: Right.
Corey: So there had to have been a good reason why it happened.
David: Now, we've heard from guys like Benjamin Fulford in some of his disclosures that he was told by Pentagon insiders that 75% of all production money for Hollywood films is coming from the Pentagon through various backdoor firms.
So let me just ask you first if you have ever heard anything like that?
Corey: Oh, yeah. Yeah. A lot of money from the DoD (Department of Defense) and Pentagon is going in for propaganda.
David: So why do you think the Battle of Los Angeles movie would be made? Do you think maybe they're confusing people's Google search so that they're going to find this movie instead of any real information?
Corey: Well, they know that that was a very significant occurrence UFO-wise in American history. Nearly a million people saw it.
David: Right.
Corey: So it was already in our consciousness. So that's a tool for them. And they – they being different military intelligence groups – are trying to spin the narrative that all of these beings coming in are negative, and that they are here to invade. And this one obviously wasn't, because it didn't attack.
David: Do you think maybe creating a movie with the same title blocks people from finding the original incident at all?
Corey: It could do that, or it could just put the whole sci-fi spin on it to where . . . You know, we're already programmed to roll our eyes any time we hear anything alien or UFO. That's probably part of the effort.
David: I was fortunate enough at one of my conferences to have a woman stand up who was a little girl during the time that this happened and witnessed the entire thing. And it was quite fascinating.
We let her speak for some time to the audience. It was quite spontaneous.
The point is, a million people is a lot of witnesses. It's kind of amazing that we still have a UFO cover-up after something like that.
Corey: Yes, but the propaganda and the programming that has come from these intelligence groups has been very effective. So there's a good chance that if something like that happened today and we didn't get photos, a lot the people that witnessed it themselves would, after a few days, be like, “Oh, that didn't happen.” Or just forget about it and move on.
David: Well, another interesting thing regarding the Battle of Los Angeles is the “War of the Worlds” broadcast. The original broadcast with Orson Welles was in 1939. But then when the movie came out, it was after this had happened.
And we have multiple eyewitnesses saying that the craft that you see in the “War of the Worlds” movie is very similar to the one in the Battle of Los Angeles, except that it has a little periscope on the top.
So why do you think they would actually put the real craft into the movie?
Corey: Well, they're always hiding things in plain sight. So if you were to see something similar to “War of the Worlds”, on some level you might be willing to discount it, thinking, “Oh, that's military, or that's some concept that's being used for a movie”.
You're going to jump to that instead of aliens automatically. That's possible.
David: Well, do you think also that putting those exact same craft into “War of the Worlds” where they become hostile attackers . . .
Corey: Oh, yeah.
David: . . . instead of peaceful demonstrators, could be like a form of mass mind control?
Corey: Well, sure. If you see a certain craft design and see it destroying cities in a movie, well, if you see it in real life, what are you programmed to think?
They could be coming down to say, “Hello”, and maybe give you a ride and show you around the solar system, but you've been programmed to run and hide because you think that it's an invasion.
David: Exactly. Do you think it's possible that we could have another mass demonstration like that at some point that there could be another event like that if, for example, this Mohammad Treaty gets overturned?
Corey: Absolutely. If the treaty that's supposed to prevent that is overturned, there are a lot of non-terrestrials that want to be up in the sky and over populated areas to let us know that they're here.
David: Now, you also mentioned in some of your recent briefings that both the SSP Alliance and the Cabal are concerned about the possibility of wreckage crashing into a major American city.
So just real briefly, since we're talking about these battles in the air, what are they thinking would happen, and how would that play out on the world stage?
Corey: Well, they're afraid that some of their weapons platforms that have been up in orbit, and advanced craft, could possibly fall into a populated urban area with all of the activity that's going on up there. There are shootdowns happening.
So they are ready to pounce on any crash. They have cover stories in place saying, “This was a nuclear-powered satellite that crashed. It's contaminated a large area. So stay in your homes or leave the city.”
And then they will focus on cleaning up the debris.
David: So this is something that they're actually very concerned about.
Corey: Absolutely. That is . . . I've heard a number of times that they're worried.
David: Are there more battles happening in our atmosphere now than there were before between these cloaked craft?
Corey: Yes. It's kind of reached a crescendo in recent times. There are human-piloted craft fighting each other, human-piloted craft fighting non-terrestrials and different non-terrestrial groups that are having skirmishes.
David: So what would we expect if they tried to cover this up? What would be the kind of headlines we'd see or the stories we'd hear?
Corey: Just like the example I just gave, that some sort of secret satellite had crashed or something like that. They're not going to say a UFO crashed.
David: Or a nuclear event . . .
Corey: Right.
David: . . . maybe a nuclear waste dump or spill
Corey: Test craft.
David:. . . chemical emission. Something like that.
Corey: Right. Something that's going to scare people.
David: Right.
Corey: Like some sort of disease or any number of things.
David: All right. Well, you saw it here first. This is “Cosmic Disclosure”. I'm your host, David Wilcock, here with Corey Goode. And we're reviewing footage from William Tompkins – absolutely mind-blowing stuff.
Donald Trump Lays Out Historic Plan For First 100 Days In Office: End Corruption, Stop The Crooks In Washington And Unleash Economic Abundance For America October 27 2016 | From: NaturalNews / Various
For anybody who is still dopey enough to swallow the Cabal's embarassingly desperate Hillary Clinton propaganda that is being heaved about by the pathetic Western mainstream meda, this is going to be one hell of a wake up call...
Donald J. Trump just delivered an historic speech that lays out his plan for the first 100 days in office. [These statements have the establishment Cabal in a mad panic].
Highlights are listed here. Actual quotes from Donald Trump:
"The system is totally rigged and broken."
"The dishonest mainstream media is a major part of this corruption. They lie and fabricate stories to make a candidate that is not their preferred choice look as bad and as dangerous as possible....
They're trying desperately to suppress my vote and the voice of the American people...
They're trying to poison the mind of the American voter."
"If they can fight somebody like me, who has unlimited resources, just imagine what they can do to YOU...'
"The rigging of the system is designed for one reason: to keep the corrupt establishment and the special interests in power at your expense."
"We will never solve our problems by relying on the same politicians who created these problems in the first place. Hillary Clinton is running against all the American people..."
"[This 100-day plan is] a contract between Donald J. Trump and the American voter... to bring honestly, accountability change to Washington D.C."
"We will drain the swamp in Washington D.C. and replace it with a new government of, by and for the People."
"This is my pledge to you. If we follow these steps, we will once more have a government of, by and for the people. We will make America great again."
This Video Could Win The Election For Trump
A. Six Groundbreaking Political Reforms that Will End Corruption in Washington
1. A constitutional amendment to impose term limits on all members of Congress.
2. A hiring freeze on all federal employees, exempting military, public safety and public health.
3. A requirement that for every new federal regulations, two existing regulations must be eliminated. "Regulations are killing our country and our jobs..."
4. A five year ban on White House and congressional officials becoming lobbyists after they leave government. service.
5. A lifetime ban on White House officials lobbying on behalf of a foreign government.
6. A complete ban on foreign lobbyists raising money for American elections.
Former FBI Assistant Director Endorses Trump “Our Constitution is At Stake!”
James Kallstrom, former Assistant Director of the FBI offered a passionate endorsement of Trump on Stuart Varney’s show this week. He’s deeply concerned about the direction our country is going in.
"I’m endorsing Donald Trump. I’ve know him 40 years. I’ve never endorsed a candidate. He’s a good human being. He’s a generous person.
He’s got a big heart. He’s done hundreds and hundreds of things for people without fanfare. He’s a good guy. He’s a patriot of this country.
And regardless of what he says, his acts show that he is not that person. He’s been in this Hollywood crowd that talks like that, a lot of people talk like that.”
“He doesn’t do these things. He’s a good guy. I’ve known his family from the time they were kids. Look at his children. Could you find a better family than he brought up in this country?”
He is not a fan of Hillary Clinton.
He's absolutely right. This election really is that serious.
B. Seven Actions to Protection American Workers
1. Totally renegotiate NAFTA, "one of the first deals out country has ever made."
2. Announce withdrawal from the TPP, "a potential disaster for our country."
3. Direct the Secretary of the Treasury to label China a currency manipulator. "What they have done to us by playing [with] currency is very sad... I blame our politicians for letting this take place."
4. Direct the Secretary of Commerce to identity all foreign trading abuses that unfairly impact American workers, and to use "every tool" under American law to end those abuses.
5. Lift restrictions on production of $50 trillion worth of job-producing American energy reserves, including shale, oil, natural gas and clean coal. "And we will put our miners back to work."
6. Lift Obama / Clinton roadblocks that allow this vital energy infrastructure projects to go forward. "We're going to allow the Keystone pipeline ... to move forward."
7. Will cancel billions in payments to UN climate change programs and use the money to fix America's water and environmental infrastructure.
Jon Voight Just Destroyed Hillary Clinton, George Soros, and Robert Deniro
Jon Voight has a message that every American needs to hear, and it is all about how important this election is. And trust me, folks, he didn’t hold ANYTHING back!
In his “Plea to save America”, Voight tackles all the biggest issues facing America including:
Dangerous Refugees, Obama’s failed Presidency, No Jobs , Robert De Niro being a Hillary shill, Freedom of religion under attack, George Soros selling Jews to Nazis, and Hillary Making the Supreme Court Socialist
And that list is just the half of it folks. Trust me when I say, you just gotta see this one for yourself…
See what I mean? Pretty great rant if you ask me.
Plus, it’s good to see at least 1 major A-list actor supporting Donald Trump this election (sorry Scott Baio). I guess Hillary’s money doesn’t buy off everyone.
So thank you, Jon Voight, for believing in America enough to put yourself and your career at risk to make a difference. We hope more Americans can be inspired by the great work you do.
C. Five actions to restore security and constitutional rule of law in America
1. Cancel every unconstitutional executive order and action issued by Obama.
2. Begin the process of selecting a replacement for Justice Scalia.
3. Cancel all federal funding for sanctuary cities.
4. Remove two million criminal illegal immigrants from the country, and cancel visas to foreign countries that won't take them back.
5. Suspend immigration from terror prone regions where vetting cannot safetly occur.
Donald Trump vs. Hillary Clinton Rally Crowds
D. Substantial tax policy changes that will create jobs, simplify tax forms and reduce taxes on the middle class by up to 35%
1. Reduce taxes for the middle class. "The largest tax reductions are for the middle class... they have been forgotten. The middle class family with two children will get ... a 35% tax cut."
2. The number of tax brackets will be reduced from 7 to 3. Tax forms will be greatly simplified.
3. The business rate will be lowered from 35% to 15% and the trillions of dollars in corporate money overseas will be brought back at a 10% rate. (This will allow businesses to invest in American operations that will create millions of new jobs.)
4. End the offshoring act, establish tariffs to discourage companies from laying off their workers and relocating to foreign countries.
Side comment: We are going to work on fixing the VA hospital problem. "We have illegal immigrants that are treated far better than our veterans."
Donald Trump Roasts Hillary Clinton
Donald Trump just beat Hillary Clinton right where it hurts tonight. This video needs to be seen by everyone. Seriously. This video will go down in history. Donald Trump walked out on stage and said something that will change the election forever!
E. Donald Trump's Proposed Acts for Serious Reform
1. Infrastructure Reinvestment Act would restore investment in our domestic infrastructure (bridges, roads, water systems).
2. School Choice and Education Opportunity Act will give parents the right to send their child to the schools of their choice. "We're going to end Common Core and bring education supervision to local communities... Our current system is not working." We will expand vocational and technical education, and make 2- and 4-year colleges more affordable.
3. Repeal and Replace Obamacare Act: Fully repeal Obamacare and replace it with health savings accounts. The ability to purchase health insurance across state lines (to create competition), and let states manage Medicaid funds. Reforms will include cutting the red tape at the FDA. We want to speed the approval of lifesaving medications.
4. Affordable Childcare and Elder Care Act would allow caregivers to deduct care costs from their taxes. Creates tax free dependent care savings accounts.
5. End Illegal Immigration Act: Fully funds the construction of a wall on our southern border, with the understanding that the country of Mexico will be reimbursing the United States for the full cost. Establishes 2-4 year mandatory prison sentences for those illegally re-entering the USA if they have multiple prior deportations or felony convictions.
6. Restoring Community Safety Act: Creates a task force on violent crime, increases funding for programs to train and assist local police. "Put violent offenders behind bars or out of our country..."
7. Restoring National Security Act: Rebuilds our military by eliminating the defense sequester and expanding military investment. "Peace through strength... we need a strong military." It also provides our veterans with the ability to receive public VA treatment or visit a private doctor of their choice.
Additional comment: "We are going to protect our vital infrastructure from cyber attack."
8. Clean up Corruption in Washington Act: Enact new ethics reforms to reduce corrupting influence of special interests and donors.
Why The Nobel Peace Prize Is A Complete Joke October 27 2016 | From: TrueActivist
Numerous war criminals, such as Barack Obama and Henry Kissinger, have won the Nobel Peace Prize over the years, which seems fitting as Alfred Nobel himself was known as “the merchant of death”.
2016 Nobel Peace Prize Winner, Colombian President Juan Manuel Santos, and 2009 Nobel Peace Prize Winner, US President Barack Obama have both been responsible for tens of thousands of civilian deaths
Since its founding in 1901, the Nobel Peace Prize has ostensibly been the most prestigious international award recognizing those who have done “the most or the best work for fraternity between nations, for the abolition or reduction of standing armies and for the holding and promotion of peace congresses.”
However, the Norwegian committee, which chooses the peace prize winner annually, uses no formal definition of “peace” and has been criticized for the politicizing the award numerous times.
Peace certainly was not a forté of Alfred Nobel, the Swedish arms dealer who created the prizes which bear his name.
Nobel invented dynamite in 1867 and was the owner of Bofors AB, a steel producer that Nobel transformed into a major manufacturer of cannons and other weapons.
Today, what remains of Bofors is owned by Saab AB and United Defense Industries. His reputation during his lifetime was so notorious that newspapers labeled him “the merchant of death” due to the massive wealth he received;
"Finding ways to kill more people faster than ever before.”
Perhaps, it is no surprise then that the Nobel “Peace” Prize has been awarded to several war criminals over the course of its 115-year history.
Past winners of the Nobel Peace Prize include Henry Kissinger, former US secretary of State as well as Shimon Peres, a “founding father” of Israel who was largely responsible for their covert nuclear program.
Peres
Kissinger’s award was especially controversial as two members of the Nobel committee resigned in protest. Kissinger received the award in 1973 alongside Le Duc Tho, of North Vietnam, for the “peace” agreement ending the Vietnam War.
Le Duc Tho refused to accept the award alongside Kissinger, claiming that the peace agreement was a sham. Kissinger, that same year, had organized a bloody coup in Chile, which overthrew the democratically elected president Salvador Allende and replaced him with brutal dictator Augusto Pinochet, who went on to rule for 17 years.
This year’s winner of the Nobel peace prize, Colombian President Juan Manuel Santos, is the head of one of Colombia’s wealthiest families and, as president, has overseen the genocide of Colombia’s largest indigenous group, the Wayuú. This genocide has resulted in the death of 14,000 children in only 5 years.
Pinochet
Yet, the peace prize winner whose actions have most flagrantly belittled all that the prize purports to stand for is current US president Barack Obama. In 2009, Obama was awarded the prize for Obama’s promotion of nuclear nonproliferation and for Obama’s “outreach” to the Muslim world.
Even Obama expressed that he felt undeserving of the award and used his acceptance speech to promote the decidedly Orwellian idea of a “just war.”
Obama’s “outreach” to the Muslim world has since materialized in the form relentless bombing campaigns in 7 Muslim countries, which have caused tens of thousands of civilian casualties, as well as the rise of terror groups such as ISIS and Al-Nusra, which have benefited handsomely from US arms deals.
In addition, Obama’s “promotion” of nuclear nonproliferation resulted in Obama’s plan – announced this January – to “modernize” the US nuclear arsenal at a cost of $1 trillion over the next 30 years as well as the likelihood of nuclear war with Russia higher than ever.
Obama has also overseen the country’s largest arms deal with Saudi Arabia, funder of ISIS and murderer of Yemeni civilians, with over $115 billion arms sold over his 8 years as president.
It seems that Obama, perhaps more than any other questionable recipient of the award, fully displays the schizophrenic nature of the Nobel Peace Prize – the public promotion of peace alongside a dark, sinister history of promoting and profiting from war.
The researchers have found that most of the previous studies into the sweeteners touting their alleged “health advantages” over using sugar as a sweetener, were written or sponsored by the companies that produce the products.
"A trio of researchers from John Hopkins University in Maryland, the University of California San Francisco, and Australia’s University of Sydney took an extensive look at 31 past reviews on the potential weight loss effects of artificial sweeteners.
They found that studies directly funded by sweetener companies or published in industry-funded journals were more likely to find positive health benefits compared to reviews funded independently or by the competing sugar industry.
Similarly, reviews authored by scientists who had a relevant financial conflict of interest were also less likely to shine a harsh light on sweeteners, either directly via positive results or by putting a positive spin on negative results when discussing their conclusions."
"In the 1950s, studies showing a link between coronary heart disease (CHD) and sugar intake started to emerge.
When the sugar industry (which many not-so-affectionately call “Big Sugar”) got wind of this not-so-sweet news, they paid scientists to downplay the link and promote saturated fat as the culprit instead, a new study has revealed.
The research, published in JAMA Internal Medicine, was based on thousands of pages of Sugar Research Foundation (SRF) documents, reports, and statements that Cristin E. Kearns, a postdoctoral fellow at UCSF, discovered in the basement at Harvard University.
The SRF (known today as The Sugar Association) sponsored its first CHD “research project” in 1965 – a literature review published in the New England Journal of Medicine. The review’s objective was established by SRF, and the group contributed articles for inclusion and received drafts. The SRF’s funding and role was not disclosed.
Why is this a big deal?
Big Sugar paid Harvard scientists the equivalent of about $50,000 in today’s dollars to influence the review, and subsequently spent $600, 000 ($5.3 million in 2016 dollars) to teach “people who had never had a course in biochemistry… that sugar is what keeps every human being alive and with energy to face our daily problems.”
For years many industries have delayed the publication of research that may put their products in a bad light, others have simply paid off researchers to point the finger of blame at other products, as did the Sugar Association in 1967.
The revelations over sweeteners come as no surprise, but they should remind us that we need to do our own research rather than taking something at face value just because there was a “study.”
This isn’t new. The FDA upholds these studies all the time, and products that could literally kill us end up on the store shelves marked as safe, false nutritional information that supports the sugar lobby and the grain lobby is touted as the truth, and Americans get sicker and fatter as a result.
Industries and individual companies have paid researchers to lie or distort the truth on their behalf in order to sell more of their products. Not only is this shameful behavior from the companies, but also from the researchers that compromised their science to accommodate them.
The results of such spurious research have an even further effect. Fewer people start to trust medical and scientific research - including well-executed and honest research.
The answer as always it to look behind the headlines, find the counter arguments, track down the source of the funding, and make your decisions accordingly.
PS: The best quality low-carb sweetener we’ve gotten our hands on is Agave 5 – you can find it here.
Like Tobacco And Big Pharma, The Sugar Industry Has Manipulated Research For 50 Years
Don’t you love people who cling to scientific research without ever questioning who sponsored that research? Using archival documents, a new report published by JAMA Internal Medicine examines the sugar industry’s role in heart disease research.
The study suggests that the sugar industry sponsored research to influence the scientific debate to cast doubt on the hazards of sugar and to promote dietary fat as the culprit in heart disease. Governments worldwide agreed just like they did with the tobacco industry and big pharma.
The sugar industry was instrumental in influencing the prevailing thinking about fat, obesity and related diseases holding that quantifying calories should be a principal concern and target for intervention.
Part of this thinking is that consumed calories - regardless of their sources - are equivalent; i.e. ‘a calorie is a calorie’. There needs to be a greater qualitative focus on the sources of calories consumed (i.e. a greater focus on types of foods) and on the metabolic changes that result from consuming foods of different types.
Calorie-focused thinking is inherently biased against high-fat foods, many of which may be protective against obesity and related diseases, and supportive of starchy and sugary replacements, which are likely detrimental.
The intake of dietary fructose increased significantly from 1970 to 2000. There has been a 25% increase in available “added sugars” during this period. The average person has a daily added sugar intake of 79 g (equivalent to 15% of energy intake), approximately half of which was fructose.
A report - authored by Cristin E. Kearns, Laura A. Schmidt, and Stanton A. Glantz of the University of California, San Francisco - examined internal documents from the Sugar Research Foundation (which later evolved into the Sugar Association).
The Sugar Research Foundation started doing research on coronary heart disease research in 1965; its first project was a literature review published in the New England Journal of Medicine in 1967.
The review focused on fat and cholesterol as the dietary causes of coronary heart disease, downplaying sugar consumption as a risk factor.
UCSF researchers have recently claimed sugar should be controlled like alcohol and tobacco to protect public health since it is fueling a global obesity pandemic, contributing to 35 million deaths annually worldwide from non-communicable diseases like diabetes, heart disease and cancer.
Like manufacturers from both Big Tobacco and Big Pharma who denied the presence of any danger in their products and even spent millions of dollars trying to discredit the research that points to problems, the Sugar Industry followed suit.
While the Sugar Research Foundation’s funding and role were not disclosed, internal documents reveal that the organization set the review’s objective, contributed articles to be included, and received drafts - a “smoking gun” linking the industry’s influence over the research it paid for, writes Marion Nestle in a related commentary, also published in JAMA Internal Medicine.
“This 50-year-old incident may seem like ancient history, but it is quite relevant, not least because it answers some questions germane to our current era. Is it really true that food companies deliberately set out to manipulate research in their favor?
Yes, it is, and the practice continues,” writes Nestle, the Paulette Goddard Professor of Nutrition and Food Studies at NYU Steinhardt."
“Industry-sponsored nutrition research, like that of research sponsored by the tobacco, chemical, and pharmaceutical industries, almost invariably produces results that confirm the benefits or lack of harm of the sponsor’s products, even when independently sponsored research comes to opposite conclusions,” Nestle adds.
Nestle says the report should serve as a warning to policymakers, researchers, clinicians, and journalists in carefully interpreting studies funded by food companies with vested interests in the results, and highlights the need to find better ways to fund studies and to prevent and disclose conflicts of interest.
Why Children Hate School + Digital Media And Kids: How Much Is Too Much?
October 25 2016 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / TheConversation Children come out of the womb with an inborn desire to better understand themselves and the world they live in - they desire to explore new perspectives, to discover different realities and make sense of existence.
But why is it that later on, once they become school students, most children begin to lose interest in learning? Why do children feel bored in classroom, are uninterested in reading books, and in general hate school? These are some questions that I am going to answer here, with the aim to shed some light on the negative aspects of our current education system and provide suggestions on how it can be improved for the benefit of the new generations and hence the future of humanity.
Suppressing Children Through Schooling
When I was a school student, I was feeling very unhappy. I wanted to spend my time outside in nature and play with other children, but I was forced to stay for hours upon hours every day in a small classroom where play was out of question.
I wanted to express myself through art and sports, but I was made to sit down learning maths, history, and other things that I couldn’t care less about learning at that age. I wanted to communicate my thoughts and emotions with my peers, but I was told not to talk or move unless I was given permission first.
What I loved doing, I was not allowed to do, and what I hated doing, I was forced to do. No wonder I was so unhappy.
In most places around the world, school is a very traumatic experience for the majority of children. Children from a very young age are sent to school, whether they like it or not.
There they usually have to be confined in a room for 6 to 8 hours every weekday (except on holidays) for about 12 years of their life, to obey to rules, to follow orders and to learn things they are not interested in.
What children truly want is to have fun, to play, to communicate and form social connections, to explore the great outdoors, to ponder and create - and barely any of those things they are allowed to do in school.
School, as you can understand, is suppressing children in all sorts of ways, which is turning their life into an ongoing hellish experience. So how can children not hate school? It’s only natural that they do.
Education as Indoctrination
Although school is supposed to be the place where children learn to think and become wiser individuals, in reality school is preventing them from developing their critical thinking.
At school, an authority figure (i.e. teacher) is hired to have students unquestionably accept and repeat in a parrot-like fashion what they are being taught by him/her. Those students who do so are rewarded with good grades, while those who choose to think for themselves are being punished with bad grades or by being expelled from school.
I remember once, when I was a high school student, I took the courage to openly disagree with the opinions of my religion teacher. She was teaching a class on world’s religions, but being Christian herself, she provided us students with biased information.
She would do her best to talk in a negative way about all other religions in order to prove the superiority of Christianity.
When I presented her with some solid arguments against the Christian dogma, she soon afterwards started to treat me as a bad student, by giving me lower grades and talking to me in a disrespectful manner.
All I tried to do was to raise questions and use critical thinking, but to her that meant questioning God, which she thought is an inappropriate thing to do.
At school, students are not taught how to think, but what to think, and the difference between the two is tremendous.
Instead of learning how to utilize logic and come to their own conclusions through critical thinking, school is stunting their intelligence by filling their minds with information that they have to accept on belief alone.
Not surprisingly, once students graduate from school, they are so indoctrinated that they cannot make intelligent choices in life and deal with the challenges they encounter along their life’s journey.
Rethinking Our Education System
If we don’t want our children to be mindless automatons, we need to start thinking differently about our education system.
We need to start searching for ways to help children grow into conscious, healthy beings, instead of repressing their emotions and killing their intelligence - which is what schooling is currently doing. In order for this to happen, however, we first need to realize what the true meaning of education is.
Education is not passing exams in order to get a certificate and find a well-paying job - it is cultivating the mind and spirit in order to find health, happiness and peace.
Education is not the imposition of opinions and ideologies of the elder on the youth - it is mastering the art of thinking critically and acquiring the ability to process emerging information.
Education is not memorizing knowledge - it is developing understanding and learning how to put knowledge into practice.
Up until now, the role of school has been to force students to fit into the mould of what we consider normal living.
To be normal in our sick society means to do work that we hate doing, to doubt ourselves and be afraid to think for ourselves, to blindly believe in dogmas, to bend down in submission to authority and follow orders - in short, to live a life of ignorance and pain.
It’s about time we realize that school’s function should not be to adjust children into an unhealthy society, but to help create a healthy society instead, starting from the children themselves, who will form the future of our civilization.
The purpose of schooling should be to provide children with the tools that will enable them to develop to their full potential on multiple levels- emotional, intellectual and spiritual. School should give children the freedom to express themselves, evolve their talents and assist them in the creative process of acquiring essential practical knowledge and skills.
Most importantly, school should be the place where the needs of children are being understood, accepted, and taken care of, so that children can grow their wings of consciousness that will allow them to chase their dreams.
Then, children will no longer hate school, but, on the contrary, love it and embrace the learning experience it offers.
Digital Media And Kids: How Much Is Too Much?
Any time a new technology is introduced, it disrupts values, routines and behaviors. This goes back well before the printing press replaced oral histories or the telephone replaced face-to-face conversations, but is evident today in our regular habits of checking our smartphones for notifications.
With the rapid pace at which new digital products and services are being developed, parents report feeling particularly overwhelmed. They fear missing out on what benefits tech might hold for their families, yet don’t fully trust that electronic devices and apps are designed or marketed with their child’s best interests in mind.
We doctors used to urge parents to discourage media use under age two, and to limit kids’ use to two hours a day, at most. But we have now arrived at a more nuanced understanding of the various ways in which children use digital tools.
Through review of the updated science, interviews and focus groups with parents from diverse backgrounds, and our own clinical experience, we are now recommending that parents use media as a teaching tool – a way to connect and create – instead of just to consume.
As a developmental behavioral pediatrician, parent of two young boys and lead author of the new American Academy of Pediatrics policy statement “Media and Young Minds,” I hope to help parents shape tech use in their homes based on their human ideals and values.
Main Principles to Keep in Mind
This new policy statement represents the best medical research and academic scholarship about electronic media and health and development of children from birth through age five. Along with the associated family media-use planning website, it focuses on how parents can use electronic media together with their young children to encourage family connection, learning and digital literacy skills, in several ways:
1.
We emphasize teaching children that media use means more than just entertainment. It can also involve connecting with others: Videochatting, for example, is fine at any age, although infants need their parents’ help to understand it. Another great use is for creating and learning together – letting the child take photos and record videos or songs, as well as looking up craft ideas. We hope parents will feel comfortable seeing digital media as a tool to meet their parenting needs, and not the thing-in-itself that controls us or our children through the attention economy or gamification.
2.
As far as entertainment, we recommend trusted content producers such as Sesame Workshop and PBS Kids, who design apps with the child’s and parent’s needs in mind. There is also Common Sense Media, a great site for finding information on digital products and answering any tech-related parenting question you can imagine.
3.
We recommend having unplugged spaces and times of day so that both parent and child can play, be bored, or talk without distraction or feeling a need to to multitask.
4.
We ask parents to test apps and watch videos with their children to determine if they are good fits for their child’s temperament, rather than letting the child make all of these choices. Parents are the best people to decide whether a particular app or video is appropriate for the child’s current stage of development and knowledge.
5.
Parents should not feel pressure to introduce their children to technology early in life for the sake of seeking a competitive advantage. Kids will catch up when they are older or in school. But, if parents want to introduce media early, the youngest age we recommend is 18 months. At that age, it’s important to note, parents must play or view along with the child for there to be any educational benefit, such as learning new words. Otherwise, that expensive tablet may just be a portable TV or cause-and-effect toy.
Time Limits and Rules Remain Important
We still recommend time limits (one hour of entertainment media per day – which does not include videochatting, taking pictures, using with parents as a learning tool and the like) and rules, for several reasons.
First, pediatricians are trained to be child advocates, making us naturally protective. In our day-to-day experiences with families in clinics, we see children having difficulties with sleep, obesity, school, relationships or behavior that appear to be intertwined with problematic media habits.
We hear parents asking for concrete guidance from us about the role digital devices might play in their families’ lives. They want to know what to let their child watch and how much of it.
They ask about how to make sure their child can be tech-savvy without ending up in a position where the child prefers and will choose digital play to the exclusion of other important activities.
Overall, the research still shows that excessive media use is associated with poorer sleep, higher obesity risk and developmental outcomes such as poor executive function (the “boss” of our brain that helps us focus, control impulses and plan), so we want parents to prioritize unplugged, social and unstructured play as much as possible.
Parents have always been interpreters of the world for young children. If kids are to grow up with a healthy concept of what digital tools are and how to use them effectively, creatively and kindly, we need to teach them.
This means both guiding them directly and modeling with our own behavior from the very start. The longer-term goal is to raise kids who see us, their parents, as guides when they encounter weird stuff online or have negative interactions on social media.
We want to raise kids who don’t react to negative emotions by spewing out their feelings - sometimes at others’ expense - online, nor binge on videos or games.
We want to raise kids with good sleep habits, healthy bodies, a variety of interests and curiosity about the world, who feel good about their learning and their relationships, both on and offline.
We hope our new guidance can help us all - parents, medical professionals and children alike - achieve that.
The Ongoing Philippine Revolution Is Catching Fire: Rebellion Against Western NWO Cabal October 25 2016 | From: Geopolitics Asians have learned a lot from its experience with Western intrusions over the last 300 years. They’ve been duped and swindled of their historical assets, not just once, but multiple times during this period, and all recent clandestine attempts at subverting the ongoing BRICS Alliance-led global reformation for purposes of usurping again their growing geostrategic influence, have all been averted.
For those who have been following this website from the very beginning, it’s very clear that our humble purpose is to encourage the people to take tangible action towards individual emancipation.
One cannot have real freedom without ever fighting for it. If others are claiming to be fighting it for you, it must be a scam. And we have fallen victims to these people for the last several years.
We’ve given them the benefit of the doubt, but most, if not all, of them fell short of our minimum expectations.
Historical Background
Asians have learned a lot from its experience with Western intrusions over the last 300 years. They’ve been duped and swindled of their historical assets, not just once, but multiple times during this period, and all recent clandestine attempts at subverting the ongoing BRICS Alliance-led global reformation for purposes of usurping again their growing geostrategic influence, have all been averted.
There is now a solid ASEAN regional consensus to repel all coercive interference from the outside, in parallel with its active involvement in matters of combating terror in some parts of Mainland Eurasia.
Being of significant geostrategic importance to the US government, the recent unequivocal statement of pursuing an independent foreign policy of the Duterte government has dealt a huge blow to the geopolitical ambitions of its former colonial master.
Certainly, this would result to numerous attempts at assassinating the Philippine president, color revolution, or a military coup, like what happened to at least five non-conformist leaders in the past.
More than a hundred years ago, we saw the assassination of the leader of the Katipunan who rose up to remove the Spaniards, Gat. Andres Bonifacio, in the hands of the elitist Gen. Emilio Aguinaldo, just as the revolution was gaining the upper hand.
This was preceded with a firing squad of Dr. Jose P. Rizal by the Jesuits, and followed by the CIA assassination via plane crash of Ramon Magsaysay.
Emilio Aguinaldo
Consequently, Gen. Aguinaldo appointed himself as the 1st president of the new Philippine Republic. It turned out, Pres. Aguinaldo was a puppet of the United States. His presidency marked the beginning of a systematic US plunder of the country.
Fast forward to 1986, the combined Jesuit-CIA-Manila Oligarchy instigated the Yellow Revolution, which successfully overthrow the Mascosian dictatorship which paved the way for an unhampered 15 years of massive privatization of government-owned utilities, the most critical of which, i.e. energy generation, water supply, mass media, either went to prominent families, or to some West-controlled corporations, where Vatican corporate fronts are also deeply invested until now.
Between mid-1998 and early part of 2001, the poorest of the population saw a glimmer of hope under president “Erap” Estrada, but the Oligarchy was quick enough to dislodge him through an impeachment, subsequently installing Gloria Arroyo.
The latter’s term of office was itself put under constant Oligarchy threat when it was clear that China is threatening the local monopolies with large investments in infrastructures and communications, the very same thing that the Duterte administration is pursuing during his visit to China.
Pointing to his own experience, now Mayor Erap Estrada is warning his countrymen to see the bigger picture…
In a telephone interview with The STAR, Estrada also called on Filipinos to support the President’s war on drugs, despite criticisms from the US and other Western nations.
'“The Philippines is a sovereign country. The US should not interfere with the purely internal affairs of the Philippines, particularly on President Duterte’s campaign against illegal drugs,” Estrada said.
He recalled that when he was president, the US tried to meddle in his all-out war against the Moro Islamic Liberation Front (MILF).
Estrada stressed it’s the President’s duty to prevent the country from becoming a narco-state where drug lords dictate on officials.
"What will happen if all the elected officials like governors, congressmen, mayors and others are funded by drug lords? What will happen if we will allow narco-politics to reign in the country? These officials will be beholden to the drug lords and they will just say, ‘yes sir, yes sir,’ to all their orders and interest,” Estrada said.
“All peace-loving Filipinos should throw their all-out support to the campaign of the President against illegal drugs. Not because the US is helping us, we will just allow it to interfere in our internal affairs. We are a sovereign country. We have our own Constitution. The President is right with what he is doing,” the mayor said.
In a statement released by the Manila Public Information Office (PIO), Estrada voiced his support for Duterte’s veering toward China. Unlike the US, China has never interfered in Philippine affairs, the former president said.
The Arroyo government would have installed, in cooperation with ZTE, Corp., a national internet broadband that covers the entire country, but the PLDT-Globe duopoly sabotaged the whole plan using a crying patsy, Rodolfo Lozada, claiming he was about to be assassinated for having known too much about the highly corrupt transaction.
This was later on proven to be of no basis by the Supreme Court, leading to the recent release of the now Congresswoman Gloria M. Arroyo, while the former government employee cum crying patsy, Lozada, is now facing corruption lawsuits.
The skillful CIA-Vatican machinations about our local politics is at the core of our maldevelopment.
We are deliberately made to crawl on the mud in exchange for some “American junk,” and to make us constantly subservient to the “good graces” of the Europeans. They have rigged the entire system, i.e. political, economics, education, mass media, and cultural, gravely in favor for just one section of our society, i.e. Spanish mestizos, the descendants of the conquistadors.
Most noticeably, these conquistadors have cornered 80% of the national budget for decades, making the infrastructure projects to be concentrated only in Metro Manila and nearby provinces. Both the Visayas and Mindanao regions were purposely left out.
The rise of a Duterte within that same corrupt exceptionalist system is a huge anomaly.
Until now, their own mass media and so called experts could not understand what just happened, and what will continue to happen in the immediate future, unless they act again to prevent it.
They are reportedly planning to remove the president, but all attempts are unsuccessful so far. The 400 tycoons who went with him to China is proof that the Oligarchy is disunited.
Being the first “texting capital of the world,” the nation immediately embraced the social media like a virus. The socio-political consciousness immediately expanded like a firestorm.
Our own website statistics are showing that they are now ready to accept “conspiracy theories”, dig exotic technologies like HAARP, and above all, they are now laughing at the “Bobo,” or stupid journalists fronting the mass media.
The Duterte Phenomenon 2016 is the Resumption of the Revolution in 1896
The campaign baller band worn by Duterte during the campaign period was auctioned and able to fetch P1 million from Mr. Johnny Sy, a businessman attending the PH-China Business Meet and Greet event
True accounts about the Philippine Revolution against the Spaniards and the Americans in 1896 onwards are now being shown on the big screens.
We need more movie producers doing the same materials so that offline audience can see the bigger picture of what’s really going on in the country.
The recent visit of the president to China which saw the signing of major investments on infrastructure projects and telecommunications, which should enhance interisland physical and digital connectivity, something that the local Spanish Oligarchy didn’t want to happen ever, in pursuance to their continued “divide and conquer” strategy, since our Datu Lapulapu cut off the head of the first European invader, Magellan.
The Duterte Phenomenon is breaking all established norms and challenging suppressive taboos from politics to religion.
Political correctness is being shattered one cuss word at a time.
The local Vatican infrastructure trembled when their money laundering, pedophilia and chronic hypocrisy were all exposed in response to their church-wide campaign against Duterte prior to his election.
His academic failure earlier on is now serving him well. He wasn’t properly “institutionalized,” that he can afford to think independently from the norms, and even from his own cabinet secretaries who, like him, are all constantly hard at work.
His presidential family is the best team we ever have.
The mainstream media love to quote him literally, since they could do nothing better. Worse, these robots even went to extreme lengths of splicing his long monologues, because the method serves their employers’ agenda.
But the people have learned a lot of their own history from the last 3 months, just by listening to many of his elaborate diatribes against the Exceptionalist West.
Those off the cuff verbal retaliations, which are mere token summations of the people’s condemnation of all the sufferings inflicted upon them for almost five centuries by the same people now criticizing the efforts to rid the country of drugs, crimes and narco-politics, will continue to underscore the importance of taking real actions now that we have the momentum.
Duterte’s noisy strategy is working, the US State Department doesn’t know how to respond.
If he is assassinated now, the world would at least know why. And so, in the last few days, nobody in the West would have thought that he will do the unthinkable.
The Philippines will now chart its own course away from the corrosive diktats of the West, and as equal among nations on Earth, which even China and Russia have expressed their own commitment not to intervene in any of its internal affairs, but only in matters of mutual progressive developments and regional security.
This major pivot away from the 113-year old Western containment which, no matter what Duterte’s lieutenant would say afterwards, cannot be undone in the foreseeable future.
Yes, there may be some pockets of resistance to his radical decisions and pronouncements back home, but the merit of his actions today can surely be felt later on. All visionaries like him know that.
In the meantime, his able lieutenants can only be more diplomatic to attenuate the full impact of the president’s statement…
But we knew how the president went on to show Obama and the rest of the ASEAN leaders, some pictures from the US Archives about how the US mercenaries massacred hundreds of women and children in the crater of Mt. Bud Dajo in 1906, only hours after he apologized for calling Obama a “son of a bitch.”
This means that once the other half of the population has gotten over with their Hollywood brainwashing, the country will be able to complete its Pivot to BRICS in no time. This is, of course, not directed at the good people of America, but against the foreign policies of their corporate government.
This ongoing Philippine Revolution, as inspired by the Duterte Phenomenon, will be long, and will be fought hard in honor of those who died valiantly during the struggle of 1896 onwards, for the survival of the nation and the welfare of the next generations.
Our only hope is for the rest of the world to see this as an inspiration to do something with what they already have right now.
The Philippine Revolution 2016 is Your Revolution, Too
Even if we won this one, the enemy of humanity will just move on to the next target. The Western military industrial complex is currently building a drone base in Africa.
That will be their next battleground, after their impending defeat here in Southeast Asia and the Middle East. The region has been subjected to Ebola bioweapon attack earlier purposely to remove the population in areas of great importance to the mining companies.
It is for this reason that all peoples around the world need to get on board now. We must seize the moment when leaderships of highly populated and highly industrialized counties are rising up to the root cause of the world’s problem.
Don’t ever think that nobody reads your social media post, because they will. And when you have struck the right chord, it will spread like wildfire. And in time, you’ll see that your own little revolution will continue to grow much larger than you would have ever imagined.
Most of all, remember that courage is contagious. You need only look at Duterte to see that this is already happening now as more and more in the alternative media are catching up to the Duterte Phenomenon.
This has always been the case all throughout time. All it takes is one passionate visionary leader, and a few good generals to change the course of history.
For some time now, we are seeing major yet covert military actions in the Middle East between two large factions vying for planetary control.
This hybrid war being directed against the age old enemy of humanity is headed by visionaries who would rather act silently, and just let the outcome do the talking afterwards.
While successfully keeping our common enemy constantly at the disadvantage, the rest of the population is mostly kept in the dark.
When these silent visionaries are assassinated, nobody will know what they have done until they’re gone.
Who would have known outside of Libya that Mummar Kaddafi was a good leader, giving free healthcare, free education, and a visionary for planning to use a gold-backed currency for Africa?
Imagine what a loud mouth like Duterte’s could contribute to the efforts of China, Russia, and Iran in toppling the most vicious, most arrogant US State Department and the Khazarian Criminals behind the facade.
So that, it wasn’t really surprising at all when the Russian ambassador readily jumped at the latest opportunity to engage the man constructively when Duterte said:
'“I will also go to Russia to talk to Putin and tell him that there are three of us against the world - China, Philippines, and Russia. It’s the only way.”
Of course, he’s not referring to “the world,” but the Old World Order.
Here’s how the Philippine president can be very effective…
'“… by directly taunting the CIA, as he did last week when he said “You want to oust me? You want to use the CIA? Go ahead,” the president may have removed the favorite US short-cut of dealing with intransigent rulers.
The biggest threat to the US is the loss of the Enhanced Defense Cooperation Agreement, reached under Duterte’s predecessor, which allows the US to rotate ships, aircraft, and personnel through five Philippines bases, an arrangement seen as crucial to projecting U.S. military power on China’s doorstep.
Meanwhile, every attempt by the U.S. to raise questions about Duterte’s campaign against drugs, in which more than 3,000 people have been killed since he took office in June, has only made him angrier: he has derided Obama as a “a son of bitch” and said he should “go to hell.”
“It doesn’t seem to help to say anything because the minute you say something, he just lets loose his barrage of obscenities,” said Murray Hiebert, deputy director of the Southeast Asia Program at the Center for Strategic and International Studies. “I think for the U.S. to just blast him constantly is probably not very effective.”
Now, if he is constantly doing his thing, he might be able to wake more people up, encourage more countries to join in the fold of the Reformists, and hopefully bring down the Khazarian Criminal Empire for good.
US Losing the Pivot to Asia Fulcrum
The geostrategic importance of the Philippines cannot be overestimated. It is a major doorway to Southeast Asia, where $5 trillion of physical trading passes by annually, and the fulcrum by which the Clinton “Pivot to Asia” doctrine was formulated upon.
The Chinese government fully understood that, and the top officials of the Bank of China have acknowledged the same even during the recent signing of the some 17 trade and infrastructure development agreements worth $24 billion, recently.
So that, it is so easy to speculate that since it is to China’s geostrategic advantage to help develop the country, most economic projects in the Philippines from here on will be underwritten by Bank of China, and to some degree by any of the three BRICS infrastructure banks, i.e. Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank [AIIB], Silk Road Fund, New Development Bank [NDB].
Any possible attacks of whatever form on the Philippines will be repelled from here on by this newly reestablished alliance, as the Chinese have more to lose to the Western aggressors, than we are.
Indeed, we are already seeing this covert intervention most notably with the recent HAARP attack directed towards Luzon, which could have inflicted the same damage as Typhoon Haiyan in late 2013, but have fizzled out right away without significant loss of life, i.e. 13 casualties only as opposed to 8,000 in 2013.
Interestingly, the recent typhoon is said to be “the most lightning filled storm” according to one witness. It might be the HAARP signals wrestling each other out, i.e. a separate HAARP signal can be directed at the eye of the storm, or the LPA, to raise its temperature up and kill the storm.
Ultra-high HAARP voltage and low pressure gas with high moisture content won’t go together nicely, hence the lightning discharges.
Our immediate concern now is his scheduled visit to Japan next week. Although he’s very popular with the Japanese people, the CIA might move to eliminate him while he is in the country. We know that there are already some movements towards this direction, here and abroad.
We just hope that the Japanese people remember what had happened to them on March 2011, which is just a repeat of the massively devastating attack on Indonesia which wiped out 120,000 lives in 2006.
Japan, for its part, is going for bilateral talks in settling their territorial dispute with China, as their visiting Foreign Minister Fumio Kishida told Duterte early on.
When a CNN reporter asked Duterte, upon his arrival from China, who he prefers between Clinton and Trump, he responded, “My favorite hero is Russian President Vladimir Putin.”
Vladimir Putin happens to have issued a very stern warning after the United States sabotage the last bilateral ceasefire…
If the two countries China, and Russia could work together to provide security and ensure the Philippines’ military and foreign policy separation from the United States, that would mean a total checkmate for the Khazarian Criminal Cabal here in Asia, because the Chinese Navy is already in Vietnam just a day after Obama’s recent cozying up with the Vietnamese leader, as we have mentioned earlier.
Chinese military personnel will participate in activities with the Vietnamese navy and will also meet with Hanoi’s provincial leaders. This will be the last stop for the Chinese fleet on their way home after visiting Myanmar, Malaysia and Cambodia, according to Senior Colonel Wang Hongli, commander of the task force.
Hackers Cripple US Internet In Wide-Scale Cyber Attack: Possible Internet "Killswitch" Test For Staged Cyberwar Or US Election False Flag Event
October 24 2016 | From: Aljazeera / Various
WikiLeaks implied its supporters may be behind the attack and asked them to "stop taking down the US internet".
Several of the world's best-known websites were inaccessible across parts of the United States on Friday after hackers unleashed a series of attacks on a company that acts as a switchboard for the internet.
The attacks affected access to Twitter, Paypal, Spotify and other customers of the infrastructure company in New Hampshire called Dyn, which processes large volumes of internet traffic.
"The attacks came in waves," Al Jazeera's Rob Reynolds, reporting from Los Angeles, said. "First targeting the East Coast of the United States, spreading then to the other parts of the country and even to Western Europe."
"The websites that were disrupted were some of the top names in the internet: CNN and the New York Times, AirBnB, Reddit, HBO ... a whole variety of sites were attacked."
"Dyn is kind of a middle man that directs users to different websites and routes traffic from server to server in a complex way," said Reynolds.
The attackers used hundreds of thousands of internet-connected devices that had previously been infected with a malicious code that allowed them to cause outages.
'The US government is preparing to activate an “internet kill switch” according to cyber security experts, and the groundwork has been laid to blame the unprecedented act on Russia.'
Twitter, Reddit and Spotify were collateral damage in a major online assault
This article discusses the national Standard Operating Procedure 303 that enables the shut-down of all Internet and cellular devices. It also discusses the new Executive Order on Space Weather events.
We have two separate issues here:
First, the government is terrified of a public that is able to record and share information in real time. This makes it difficult for the government to continue with its massive campaign of lies. The Facebook censoring of all statements that connect Hillary Clinton to her many crimes is emblematic of what the government wants to do across the board - mind control and the end of freedom of speech are part of the Obama-Clinton-Soros-Zuckerberg agenda.
Second, the government has a legitimate need to be able to shut down all electrical systems when a solar storm is about to hit, by shutting them down these systems avoid being “fried” and weather the storm, they can be turned on again once the storm passes, as if nothing had happened.
The two should not be confused.
The false accusations against the Russians are a US Government “PSYOP” against the American public, a last desperate attempt to distract the public from the very real multi-billion dollar charity fraud and influence pedding crimes of Bill and Chelsea and Hillary Clinton, with Barack Obama, Loretta Lynch, and James Comey fully complicit in all those crimes.
This type of attack is known as a distributed denial of service attack [DDoS]. They used affected computers to fire requests at the servers of Dyn simultaneously and essentially overwhelm it.
"The complexity of the attacks is what's making it very challenging for us." Dyn's chief strategy officer, Kyle York, told Reuters news agency.
Operation of a Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) Attack:
York said that at least some of the malicious traffic was coming from connected devices, including webcams and digital video recorders, that had been infected with control software named Mirai.
Security researchers have previously raised concerns that such connected devices, sometimes referred to as the Internet of Things, lack proper security.
The Mirai code was dumped on the internet about a month ago, and criminal groups are now charging to employ it in cyber attacks, said Allison Nixon, director of security research at Flashpoint, which was helping Dyn analyse the attack.
The Department of Homeland Security last week issued a warning about attacks from the Internet of Things, following the release of the code for Mirai.
'Attacks Continue'
On Friday, Dyn said in a statement that it had resolved one morning attack, which disrupted operations for about two hours, but disclosed a second a few hours later that was causing further disruptions. By Friday evening, it was fighting a third.
"The company fought back and was able to get things under control again," our correspondent said. "But there were additional waves of attack. So this seems to be an ongoing situation."
Attacking a large domain name service provider like Dyn can create massive disruptions because such firms are responsible for forwarding large volumes of internet traffic.
The disruptions come at a time of unprecedented fears about cyber threats in the US, where hackers have breached political organisations and election agencies.
The US Department of Homeland Security and the FBI said they were investigating the attack on Dyn.
"We still don't know who is responsible for this attack," Reynolds said. "But it certainly seems to be an attack that took coordination and possibly a lot of resources. So this is not some teenaged kid in a basement somewhere hacking for fun."
"The purpose behind their attack is also very vague since nothing was stolen. It was just disruptive, so some people are theorising that someone is trying to figure out how to shut down the internet."
WikiLeaks, a whistle blowing organisation that has been publishing hacked emails that allegedly belong to Democratic presidential nominee Hillary Clinton's campaign chairman John Podesta, implied in a tweet that its supporters may be behind the attack and asked them to "stop taking down the US internet".
Ecuador's government later admitted that it had partly restricted internet access for Assange, who has lived in the South American country's UK embassy to avoid extradition to Sweden since mid-2012.
WikiLeaks' decision to publish documents affecting the US election was entirely its own responsibility, and the country did not want to meddle in election processes or favour any candidate, Ecuador said.
Jimmy Carter: The U.S. Isn’t A Democracy, It’s An Oligarchy + Evo Morales: Imperialism And Capitalism Are The Root Causes Of Issues Humanity Is Facing
October 23 2016 | From: TrueActivist / Sott
The former U.S. president asserts that money controls politics in the U.S. and that both parties greatly benefit from the system.
In case you missed it, former U.S. president Jimmy Carter appeared on the Thom Hartmann Program in 2015 and, during the interview, stated that the political scheme in the United States is far from what it seems.
Carter stated that America is now an “oligarchy” in which “unlimited political bribery” has resulted in a total subversion of the political system “as a payoff to major contributors.”
It doesn’t matter which party you support, he says. After all, both Democrats and Republicans “look upon this unlimited money as a great benefit to themselves,” he asserts. His claim is supported by a study conducted by Princeton University, which you can read about here:
HARTMANN: Our Supreme Court has now said, “unlimited money in politics.” It seems like a violation of principles of democracy. Your thoughts on that?
CARTER: It violates the essence of what made America a great country in its political system. Now it’s just an oligarchy, with unlimited political bribery being the essence of getting the nominations for president or to elect the president. And the same thing applies to governors and U.S. senators and congress members.
So now we’ve just seen a complete subversion of our political system as a payoff to major contributors, who want and expect and sometimes get favors for themselves after the election’s over.
The incumbents, Democrats and Republicans, look upon this unlimited money as a great benefit to themselves. Somebody’s who’s already in Congress has a lot more to sell to an avid contributor than somebody who’s just a challenger.
Evo Morales: Imperialism And Capitalism Are The Root Causes Of Issues Humanity Is Facing
The main objective of humanity should be "to eradicate" capitalism and imperialism, recommended the Indigenous head of state.
On the International Day of Peace, Bolivian President Evo Morales condemned the imperialist and warmongering policies of Israel and the United States during his address at the United Nations General Assembly in New York Wednesday.
"Israel's warmongering policies are probably one of the most barbaric examples in the world," said Morales, vigorously condemning Israeli attacks against Palestinian civilians.
"We have to stop the genocide against the Palestinians."
"
As for the U.S., they must immediately end the blockade on Cuba and gave the island reparations", he said.
Imperialism and capitalism are the root causes of the issues humanity is facing in the 21st century, he added, and the main objective of humanity should be "to eradicate" capitalism.
"Capitalism is the worse enemy of life and humanity, and of future generations; it destroys Mother Earth; concentrates wealth the hands of a few; and generates extreme poverty," he told global leaders.
"If we don't build another system soon for society, we will replace sustainable development with sustainable death," he warned.
"A lot of people in the world are either refugees or displaced, because of global warming or because of the wars and conflicts, while more than 800 million people in the world are hungry," he stated.
"This is the face of capitalism."
"We condemn violence and terrorism but in order to address terrorism we must address the roots of this plague: wealth is concentrated in the hands of a few: the greater the poverty and inequality, the greater the discrimination, which encourages violence."
The leader highlighted that since Bolivia kicked out U.S. military bases, the fight against drug trafficking has significantly improved, as the U.N. documented - contradicting what Washington argues.
"Terrorism and drug trafficking are twins that the North American empire uses in order to invade and control the world, I am certain of that," he said.
"When the Drug Enforcement Agency was in Bolivia, only half of the drugs seized was incinerated, the other was to get rich," he said, quoting information from military officials.
He also rejected the management of Luis Almagro as the head of the Organization of American States, "We don't need a manager from the empire to govern us," he said, stressing that the existence of the OAS would no purpose if the organization did not respect the sovereignty of peoples.
He expressed his support for the Venezuelan government of Nicolas Maduro which has been targeted by Almagro.
France: Entire Swiss Branch Of Rothschild’s Banking Empire Under Criminal Investigation Following David De Rothschild Indictment October 23 2016 | From: PoliticalVelcraft
It has taken many years to bring this case against Rothschild and his company the Rothschild Financial Services Group, which trapped hundreds of pensioners in a bogus loan scheme between the years of 2005 and 2008. Rothschild Unionises With Rockefeller To Congeal Funds 2012.
[In Their Defense] According to Bloomberg, [& after 11 years of stall tactics] The Swiss unit of Eddy de Rothschild said it’s the subject of a French probe regarding a former business relationship managed by a former [David?] employee.
"Eddy de Rothschild (Suisse) SA is actively participating in the criminal investigation under way,” the Geneva-based bank said in an e-mailed statement on Friday. “The bank denies all the allegations that have been made against it.”
Jean-Baptiste Siméon Chardin, Boy building a House of Cards , 1735; Waddesdon, The Rothschild Collection (Rothschild Family Trusts)
"Eddy de Rothschild, a private banking and asset management firm established in Paris in 1953, oversees about 150 billion euros ($164 billion) and is led today by Benny de Rothschild and his wife Ariane. The Swiss unit traces its roots to the acquisition of Banque Privee in Geneva in 1965.
The company has no further comment at this time, according to the statement. Officials in Geneva weren’t immediately available to respond to a telephone call from Bloomberg News on Friday."
Last year, David de Rothschild was indicted by the French government after he was accused of fraud in a scheme that allegedly embezzled large sums of money from British pensioners.
One by one the pensioners lost their money and pressed charges against the notorious banker, beginning a case that would take many years to get even an indictment.
"“It is a good step in the right direction. The courts are now in agreement with us that there is enough evidence to interrogate Baron Rothschild. The first thing they will have to do is find him.
Once they have done that they can begin to question him. It is a real breakthrough moment for everyone involved,” lawyer Antonio Flores of Lawbird told the Olive Press after the ruling."
“In short, independently of what happened to the investment, Rothschild advertised a loan aimed at reducing inheritance tax, which is a breach of tax law,” he added.
While news of a single Rothschild being indicted is certainly noteworthy, a particularly important announcement was made this Friday.
The French government announced that it has launched an investigation into the entire Swiss branch of the Rothschild’s banking empire. The Rothschild empire has been instrumental in helping move the global elite’s wealth from traditional tax havens like the Bahamas, Switzerland and the British Virgin Islands to the U.S.
After opening a trust company in Reno, Nev., Rothschild & Co. began ushering the massive fortunes of the world’s most wealthy individuals out of typical tax havens, and into the Rothschild run U.S. trusts, which are exempt from the international reporting requirements.
The Rothschild banking dynasty is a family line that has been accused of pulling the political strings of many different governments through their control of various economic systems throughout the world.
Historically, there is ample evidence to show that the family has used insider trading to bilk money from both private and public funds.
During the Battle of Waterloo in the Napoleonic wars, Nathan Rothschild was responsible for one of the oldest cases of “insider trading,” which led to the Rothschild family robbing a whole nation blind.
In 1815 when the battle of Waterloo took place, there were no quick methods of communication like we have today, so messengers were used for communication in times of war.
The Rothschild’s took advantage of this by having spies on the frontlines of the battle who would return information to the family faster than the messengers used by the military.
When the British won the war, Nathan Rothschild, was of course, the first to know, and he immediately went to the stock exchange and started selling stocks while putting out the rumor that the French had won the war.
This created a panic on the floor of the stock exchange and investors all over England began frantically selling their stocks. With the price of all stocks plummeting Rothschild was able to buy out the whole English market for a fraction of its cost.
When word returned that the English had actually been victorious, the value of the market soared, and overnight Nathan Rothschild expanded his family’s wealth, and cemented their position as one of the richest families in the world.
Submission On The NZ Intelligence And Security Bill October 22 2016 | From: KeithLocke
The NZ Intelligence and Security Bill unnecessarily allows for greater surveillance of New Zealanders by our intelligence services and intrudes further on our privacy.
The definition of national security is so broad that it could enable even more surveillance of legitimate political dissenters by the intelligence services than has happened to date.
Any discussion of whether the intelligence services should be granted extra powers should begin with a discussion of the threats facing New Zealand.
The fact is that we are a remarkably peaceful people. In the last 100 years there is not one proven case of politically motivated act by a New Zealander causing death. [My only qualification is that the Wellington Trades Hall bombing in 1984, which resulted in one death, may have been politically motivated.]
The only proven terrorist act was committed by non-New Zealanders, namely the French agents who bombed the Rainbow Warrior in Auckland Harbour in 1985, killing a Portuguese photographer.
Non-state terrorism has proven to be a problem in some Western countries, especially those, unlike New Zealand, that are heavily involved in foreign wars, or have a socio-economically marginalised Muslim population, or have a body politic significantly prejudiced against Muslim people.
There is no global terrorist threat. The majority of nations are not threatened by non-state terrorism.
Of course, there is always the possibility of a politically motivated violent act, causing death, taking place on New Zealand soil, but it would be an exceptional event. It would not, by itself, justify enlarging the present powers of New Zealand’s intelligence services.
The Bill Massively Increases the Collection of Personal Information on New Zealanders
There are several reasons why granting the GCSB power to spy on New Zealanders will result in a much greater intrusion on the privacy of New Zealanders.
Firstly, the GCSB’s intelligence collection is less targeted than that traditionally carried out by the Security Intelligence Service. We already know that the GCSB collects bulk information on satellite communications accessed by at its Waihopai spy station (which is part of the Five Eyes network).
There is nothing in the proposed legislation stopping this from continuing. Nor will anything in the Bill prevent the international communications of New Zealanders being drawn down into the satellite dishes at Waihopai to be stored and later analysed, because such communications don’t identify NZ citizenship.
We know from the Snowden documents that the whole direction of the Five Eyes network (including the GCSB) is to collect, store and share with each other as much raw communications and social media data as is technically possible - on the basis that some of it may later be useful.
The all-inclusive definition of “information infrastructure” in Clause 4 covers any electronic communication, and Clause 66 allows the GCSB access to any such transmitted or stored communication.
There are no clear limits to what can be collected and through what means.
Secondly, because the GCSB shares a mass of its raw data with its four Five Eyes partners [loosely provided for under Clause 13], the result of this sharing will be a greater intrusion into the privacy of New Zealanders, as well as its misuse against New Zealanders.
We know from the Snowden papers that the data collected by the Five Eyes is mainly used to spy on other governments or political dissenters, for political ends which are often contestable.
For example, the GCSB’s proven spying on, Roberto Azevedo, the (successful) Brazilian candidate for WTO director-general, was aimed at giving New Zealander Tim Groser the edge in the contest.
This was spying to advance the government’s neo-liberal trade and investment agenda, personified by former Trade Minister Groser, an agenda which is contested by other New Zealand political parties.
Thirdly, we also know from the Snowden papers that Five Eyes partners are providing intercept information about New Zealanders. In 2012 Tony Fullman, a New Zealand citizen, had his house raided on the basis of information passed on to the GCSB by the US National Security Agency.
His “crime” was to be a peaceful advocate of democracy in Fiji.
Analysis of the Snowden papers showed he was one several Fiji pro-democracy activists who had their Gmails and Facebook posts monitored by the NSA.
Fourthly, the warrant system contained in the Bill will not prevent information on many law-abiding New Zealanders being taken from the mass of intercept data collected by the GCSB and Five Eyes. The warrants can be very broad in their catchment.
They can be for a “class of persons” (Clause 61), or they can be what are called “purpose-based warrants” (Clause 64). Either way such warrants can cover a lot of people, such as those New Zealanders attending a mosque or group of mosques, or all those New Zealanders travelling to certain countries.
Fifthly, GCSB can pass on to other agencies for analysis anything from its mountain of electronic intelligence data. All it has to do is define that information as “incidentally-obtained intelligence” under Clause 91. Remember such intelligence doesn’t need to have anything to do with real or potential criminal activity.
All that is required is that there is believed to be a “potential threat” to New Zealand’s “security” as determined by the agencies.
Under Clause 91 information “incidentally obtained” on legitimate political dissenters could be kept or passed on.
Using Intelligence Information Against Legitimate Dissenters
There is an inherent contradiction in the legislation. Clause 22 says that collecting intelligence is not justified when it is infringing “the right of persons to engage in lawful advocacy, protest, or dissent in respect of any matter.”
However, this can be overridden when“national security”is deemed at risk.
As defined in Clause 5“national security” can include any activity, even if it is not criminal activity, which affects New Zealand’s“status as a free and democratic society” or threatens“international security” or“the quality of life of the New Zealand population” or represents“acts of foreign interference, that may cause serious damage to New Zealand’s economic security or international relations.”
What this means is that the intelligence services are authorised to act in secret to monitor and help counter perfectly legal activity if those agencies define it as contrary to “national security”, whether that activity is carried out by New Zealanders or non-New Zealanders.
All of the types of legal political activity targeted under the “national security” label are politically contestable.
For example, dissenters in New Zealand believe the Trans-Pacific Partnership Agreement threatens our “national security” in that the agreement threatens our “status as a free and democratic society” and our “quality of life” and could, by increasing global inequality, threaten “international security”.
The present New Zealand government believes the opposite, that the anti-TPPA dissenters threaten “national security”, and under this Bill could use the intelligence services to monitor those dissenters.
New Zealand anti-TPPA dissenters believe it is perfectly proper, under our Bill of Rights, to coordinate campaigning against the TPPA with international NGOS (eg. Greenpeace and Oxfam) or other governments without these foreign NGOs or governments being spied on for committing “acts of foreign interference that may cause serious damage to New Zealand’s economic security or international relations.”
New Zealand should champion a free global debate among people, organisations and nations over free trade and investment pacts, without any involvement of security services.
Unfortunately, that is not the case, as we have seen in the Groser/WTO case and in the NSA’s spying on European governments during trade negotiations, as disclosed in the Snowden documents.
GCSB spying on Pacific Governments Unjustified and Contrary to our Interests
The GCSB electronic spying on Pacific Island governments, exposed in Snowden papers and rightly criticised by several Pacific leaders, is an unjustified and illegal breach of their right to privacy. It negatively affecting our relations with these states, none of whom are conducting electronic spying on us.
Spy agencies focus on political critics of the NZ government, not those engaged in illegal activity.
The fundamental problem is that the SIS and GCSB are primarily agencies for political spying on legal activity. While part of the Bill’s definition of “national security” [Clause 5] covers “unlawful acts” (ie: those which have a political motive), in practice the agency does little in this area, for two reasons.
The first, which I aludded to earlier, is that in recent years there have been not been politically motivated criminal acts of any consequence.
Secondly, we already have an institution, the Police, which is dedicated to detecting and prosecuting politically motivated illegal acts – such as the bombing of the Rainbow Warrior in 1985, or the securing of fraudulent New Zealand passports by Mossad agents in 2004.
A perusal of those personal SIS files that have been released proves that the overwhelming bulk of the agencies work has been directed against perfectly legal dissent.
This is likely to continue under the terms of this Bill. My own SIS file, which covers 51 years of my life, records only my legal political activities as a dissenter. I have no criminal record.
Oversight Mechanisms Inadequate
There has been some improvement in oversight mechanisms, but they are still inadequate. While more people from outside the service will be involved in granting surveillance warrants this won’t act as much of a check if those people accept the Bill’s ethos that political spying to advance a government’s political agenda is ok.
The Intelligence and Security Committee in the Parliament will remain relatively toothless.
The GCSB and SIS Directors can still block information going to the Committee by defining it as “sensitive” (Clause 163). It is good, however, that the Inspector-General will now have access to all security information (Clause 142).
Much will now depend on the quality of the Inspector-General as a check on abuses in the system, and as someone who can listen to whistleblowers. However, in relation to whistleblowers, I strongly oppose new provision 78AA (Clause 207) providing for 5 years in prison for those who disclose anything “classified”.
Whistleblowing is sometimes the only way to expose wrongdoing in public institutions and the SIS and GCSB are not exceptions. Particularly worrying is the potential for journalists to be penalised (under 78AA 2 (b) (ii)) for publishing classified material that exposes wrongdoing.
An Independent Cybersecurity Agency Needed
The GCSB currently has one useful responsibility, cybersecurity [see Clause 15], but this function should be devolved to a new independent government cybersecurity agency, which involves and coordinates its work with the Police and other relevant agencies.
The GCSB, tasked with breaking in to computers and creating back door entry in to communications devices, is not the best agency to protect our IT systems.
Recommendations
I ask the Select Committee be bold and challenge the need for the SIS and the GCSB, given that our Police force is perfectly adequate to deal with politically motivated criminal behavior, and we don’t need a state agency to monitor our non-criminal political behavior.
The GCSB’s cybersecurity function should be devolved to a new independent agency.
I recommend the Select Committee not proceed with this Bill in its present form.
Overall it puts New Zealanders in a worse situation than in already existing legislation, in relation to both their personal privacy and their right to untrammeled freedom of expression.
However, given the Bill is likely to have the numbers to proceed I do support the deletion (or amendment) of any Clauses which extend the scope of GCSB and SIS spying on non-criminal political activity.
I have already mentioned the problems with Clauses 4, 5, 13, 15, 61, 64, 66, 91, 163 and 207. Conversely, I support all measures in the Bill which may improve, even if marginally, the accountability of SIS and GCSB operatives. I have mentioned, for example, Clause 142 which I support because it removes the existing restraint on the Inspector-General accessing all security information.
Real Reason Trump's Being Treated Like He's Crazy For Refusing To Accept Election Results + Top Highlights From The Final Presidential Debate
October 22 2016 | From: OpEdNews / Infowars
The mainstream media and the duopoly corporate parties - both Republican and Democratic - have gone into full force attack on Donald Trump for his refusal to accept the election results, which he has repeatedly said are rigged. It's time a candidate who has been the victim of a rigged election speaks up.
Everywhere you turn today the mainstream media is united in attacking Donald Trump for refusing to say he will accept the results of the election he considers rigged.
They're saying that his attitude undermines democracy, that it shows no respect for the election system our country is based upon. Really? As publisher of OpEdNews.com I've published over 10,000 articles on election integrity, questioning the trustworthiness and raising the concern that elections can be hacked or corrupted.
We know, through Wikileaks, that Hillary and the Clinton campaign rigged, in many ways, the Democratic primary, using the State Department to influence the FBI, lying and deceiving within the DNC, collaborating with the mainstream media. Trump has every reason to believe that the Clinton campaign will do all it can to rig the election.
Bernie Sanders accepted the results of the primary, even after some of the Wikileaks revelations began to come out. I'm not judging him for doing that. His rationale is he negotiated the most progressive Democratic platform in history.
If Bernie had challenged the results, especially after the Wikileaks revelations, if he'd called for his supporters to take action, to go to the streets, to make noise to demand a legal response - to the rigging, to the FBI corruption of the law.
It appears that Trump will fight such rigging. He's started fighting it already. He's preparing his supporters to be furious, to take action. I don't know what kind of action, but they'll be ready for action. In reality, Trump has done much to sabotage his campaign, perhaps not intentionally, but because he is a narcissistic who is unable to control his impulses.
But his message that he does not trust the election is not a bad one for democracy. It is a good one. It is getting millions of people to look more closely at the election system and process.
The risk of corruption of electronic voting, with the inability to do a verifiable recount is very real, yet the mainstream media have literally mocked those who raise the concern as conspiracy theorists. Chuck Todd, current host for Meet The Press, is one of the worst.
It's hard to believe that the mainstream media are so obtuse or stupid to ignore the obviousness of the problem of an electronic voting system. That suggests that their indignance, their outrage is a drama aimed at embarrassing, intimidating and making people who are inclined to believe Trump feel foolish.
This media offensive aimed at challenging the idea that the election is rigged goes hand in hand with the massive campaign Clinton and Obama are orchestrating, selling Wikileaks as a propaganda agent being used by the Russians.
Let's start with the statement by NBC's Bryan Williams, who said;
"The disqualifying moment for Americans who believe in and respect a peaceful transition of power came along with an audience gasp in the room when Donald Trump refused under direct questioning to say he would honor the outcome of the election, the will of the voters."
This is from a man who was suspended from NBC because he lied about his experience.
'University of California-Irvine election law professor Rick Hasen said, "Our democracy is a fragile thing which depends upon accepting the rules of the game."'
Mediaite.com reports that Joe Scarborough of Morning Joe on MSNBC had a different take, quoting him as saying, "How many people in Scranton, Pennsylvania care about what he said in that answer compared to people in news rooms that are whimpering and whining with their, you know, soy lattes?"
And further, Mediaite reports Scarborough said;
'"I think for elites and media people ["] to try to boil that entire debate down to that one answer, that's very predictable," he said. The notion that Trump said he would challenge the election was a media fiction, Scarborough insisted. "He never said that! Which is extraordinary - the leap that all the media has made," he said.'
The list is long and deep. This message, that the election system is trustworthy, is a core part of keeping the crooked corporate system up and running.
If millions of people start questioning our election process, if they question Hillary's win, who knows where it will go?
One thing I am sure of. We need more people waking up to the reality that the system IS broken, that the system has been rigged for a long time, that big corporations and the plutocrats have been at war with the middle class.
Bill Moyers said it 13 years ago. It's even worse now, and a big part of the reason it's worse is because most Americans, especially liberals, the ones who supported Hillary in the primary, have not awakened to the reality.
It's freaking the powers that be out that a presidential candidate is speaking the truth about the system.
I can't bring myself to vote for Clinton or Trump, but at least Trump is bringing some truth to the process. It's no surprise that the powers that be are trying to make Trump look crazy.
Related Articles: Election Rigging, Hacking and Voter Fraud
Lies,lies,and more lies. Hillary stood poised with an air of smug arrogance. Supposedly emboldened by her thirty years in a variety of undeserving roles in government where she racked up zero beneficial major accomplishments.
Donald stood by reserved and battle worn after enduring along with the American people a unification of fraud from the globalists bought and paid for mainstream media propaganda machine, the tremendous amount of scathing info from the Wikileaks, Another torpedo to the democrats from James O' Keefe, and the FBI's announcement that a four star general will face prison time for charges that are dwarfed by Hillary's email breach of national security.
Trump Relies On Intelligence Hillary Relies On Ignorance
It is more obvious than ever what seperates Trump and Clinton on how they view their voters. Trump made a statement tonight on how he relies on American voters seeing through propaganda, while Wikileaks emails show Democrats rely on voter ignorance.
Weather Weapons Are Real, They Have A Treaty To Regulate Them
October 21 2016 | From: Geopolitics
There is still a sizable portion of our society who cannot grasp the reality of weather altering devices and technologies which have made us all unsure about which weather is real, and which ones are not.
This poses a big problem for those who understand how these weather devices are being used, but want to inform the public about the impending danger of the draconian laws that have been legislated based on the false pretext of global warming.
One of the first glaring claims Gore makes is about Mount Kilimanjaro in Africa. He claims Africa’s tallest peak will be snow-free “within the decade.” Gore shows slides of Kilimanjaro’s peak in the 1970s versus today to conclude the snow is disappearing.
Well, it’s been a decade and, yes, there’s still snow on Kilimanjaro year-round. It doesn’t take a scientist to figure this out.
Climate does change, it’s been that way since the birth of our solar system, but the phrase is now synonymous to abnormal weather patterns, flash flooding, forest wildfires, and to some extent, even earthquakes, all of which could be the handiwork of highly covert government entities trying to justify their subsequent invasive policies.
All of these calamitous events can affect the economic productivity and greatly hamper the development of the targeted regions on the planet. Indeed, weather weapons are a very effective tool for geopolitical coercion.
The nations possessing these weather weapons agreed that they won’t be used in wars and geopolitical conflicts. But who can ever refuse the power to play like the mythical gods of thunder and lightning?
We are not only talking here about “cloud seeding” technologies like Wikipedia would like us to limit our understanding about weather warfare:
With much less success, the United States also dropped salt on the airbase during the siege of Khe Sanh in an attempt to reduce the fog that hindered air operations.
A research paper produced for the United States Air Force written in 1996 speculates about the future use of nanotechnology to produce “artificial weather”, clouds of microscopic computer particles all communicating with each other to form an intelligent fog that could be used for various purposes. “Artificial weather technologies do not currently exist… "
- Wikipedia (the trusted source...)
The above phrase, “Artificial weather technologies do not currently exist…” is in disagreement to the statement made by the US Air Force during a budget hearing for HAARP, like so:
HAARP, or High Altitude Auroral Research Program, is said to be an experimental electromagnetic wave propagator which could deliver radio signals in any desired frequencies with a twist of a button, to strike at any target. But as that US congressional hearing suggest, the Air Force is already using a more advanced version, they are now willing to abandon the existing HAARP site in Alaska.
There are, of course, radar systems mounted on mobile platforms which could emit high powered EM signals, and can be positioned in any of the 1,000 US military bases, for steering “weather disturbance” to any triangulated terrestrial and extraterrestrial targets.
The other side of this all-in-one ultrahigh powered radiobroadcast technology is to foster positive disposition, fry the electronics of an incoming ICBM, or MiRVs simultaneously, and render their thermonuclear/chemical warhead inert, and deliver controlled rainfall on arid deserts of Africa so that food abundance is assured at last.
Yes, the most versatile weather weapon is staring right in plain sight and is using that same technology still being used in the wireless broadcast industry today.
The only notable difference is that the weaponized version is using billion watts of sheer power which is very feasible just by transforming the transmission voltage from a few hundred volts into the range of hundreds of million volts which is what Tesla was actually playing with.
Consider three radar installations firing upward in a triangle configuration, all at the same time. Those three hot nodes will then experience high gas pressures, and as a result, their common center will then become the “low pressure area [LPA],” which will be news broadcasted by your weather channel as where the potential typhoon will come from.
The fact that they can move the three points of attack will make the typhoon steerable to hit at any desired target.
For more in-depth study, the researcher can refer to the US Patent 4686605 by clicking on the image below:
But no, the United Nations, Inc., or any of its subsidiary corporate states, are not capable of providing these commonsensical solutions any time soon. It can only afford to pay lip service to those pressing problems, because the Old Men running the show can’t get over with their myopic appreciation of the power entrusted to them, which they use only to impress young women.
Considering that our body, like everything else in nature, is made up of EM waves propagating at certain frequencies in space, we can also be altered, or our bodily functions can be influence for any desired effect.
If at certain microwave frequencies, a radar system can cook the atmosphere to increase gas pressure, and change the weather, it can also be used to deliver modulated brain wave frequencies to stimulate docility, or hyperactivity to destroy an entire targeted population without firing a single bullet.
This is the reason why the authorities sought to limit, or eradicate, its use in actual conflict scenario.
Convention on the Prohibition of Military or Any Other Hostile Use of Environmental Modification Techniques
The States Parties to this Convention,
Guided by the interest of consolidating peace, and wishing to contribute to the cause of halting the arms race, and of bringing about general and complete disarmament under strict and effective international control, and of saving mankind from the danger of using new means of warfare,
Determined to continue negotiations with a view to achieving effective progress towards further measures in the field of disarmament,
Recognizing that scientific and technical advances may open new possibilities with respect to modification of the environment,
Realizing that the use of environmental modification techniques for peaceful purposes could improve the interrelationship of man and nature and contribute to the preservation and improvement of the environment for the benefit of present and future generations,
Recognizing, however, that military or any other hostile use of such techniques could have effects extremely harmful to human welfare,
Desiring to prohibit effectively military or any other hostile use of environmental modification techniques in order to eliminate the dangers to mankind from such use, and affirming their willingness to work towards the achievement of this objective,
Desiring also to contribute to the strengthening of trust among nations and to the further improvement of the international situation in accordance with the purposes and principles of the Charter of the United Nations,
Have agreed as follows:
Article I
Each State Party to this Convention undertakes not to engage in military or any other hostile use of environmental modification techniques having widespread, long-lasting or severe effects as the means of destruction, damage or injury to any other State Party.
Each State Party to this Convention undertakes not to assist, encourage or induce any State, group of States or international organization to engage in activities contrary to the provisions of paragraph 1 of this article.
Article II
As used in article 1, the term “environmental modification techniques” refers to any technique for changing – through the deliberate manipulation of natural processes – the dynamics, composition or structure of the Earth, including its biota, lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere, or of outer space.
Article III
The provisions of this Convention shall not hinder the use of environmental modification techniques for peaceful purposes and shall be without prejudice to the generally recognized principles and applicable rules of international law concerning such use.
The States Parties to this Convention undertake to facilitate, and have the right to participate in, the fullest possible exchange of scientific and technological information on the use of environmental modification techniques for peaceful purposes. States Parties in a position to do so shall contribute, alone or together with other States or international organizations, to international economic and scientific co-operation in the preservation, improvement and peaceful utilization of the environment, with due consideration for the needs of the developing areas of the world.
Article IV
Each State Party to this Convention undertakes to take any measures it considers necessary in accordance with its constitutional processes to prohibit and prevent any activity in violation of the provisions of the Convention anywhere under its jurisdiction or control. Blah, blah,blah.
In witness whereof, the undersigned, being duly authorized thereto, have signed this Convention at Geneva, on the 18 day of May 1977.
The reality on the ground is far from being straightforward, i.e. countries possessing weather weaponry may not be actively firing at each other, but that doesn’t mean that the United States government, for example, is not using the same capability against its own people, or its smaller nation allies, you know, to keep them in line.
The chemical based geoengineering, for instance, is being extended to spray harmful chemicals instead of merely “cloud seeding”.
Historical Perspectives
It was Dr. Nikola Tesla who tried to give us wireless power so that global prosperity can be achieved by providing free and unlimited access to energy, for the benefit of all.
He constructed a “magnifying transmitter” which could deliver both power and data wirelessly to far off distances. In the process, he realized the vast potential of his device and the dangers it may pose when the technology falls into the wrong hands.
On April 28, 1997 U.S. Defense Secretary William Cohen made the following statement:
'"Others [terrorists] are engaging even in an eco-type of terrorism whereby they can alter the climate, set off earthquakes, volcanoes remotely through the use of electromagnetic waves…
So there are plenty of ingenious minds out there that are at work finding ways in which they can wreak terror upon other nations…
It’s real, and that’s the reason why we have to intensify our [counterterrorism] efforts.”
In February 1998, the European Parliament’s Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy held public hearings in Brussels on the U.S based weather warfare facility developed under the HAARP program.
The Committee’s “Motion for Resolution” submitted to the European Parliament:
'Considers HAARP… by virtue of its far-reaching impact on the environment to be a global concern and calls for its legal, ecological and ethical implications to be examined by an international independent body…; [the Committee] regrets the repeated refusal of the United States Administration… to give evidence to the public hearing …into the environmental and public risks [of] the HAARP program.”
-
European Parliament, Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy, Brussels, doc. no. A4-0005/99, 14 January 1999
The weapons referred to by Secretary Cohen are longitudinal EM wave interferometers (LWIs). Longitudinal EM waves easily travel through the ocean and earth with very little loss. In a distant interference zone, there appears real EM energy again, of the kind we have in our textbooks.
However, the energy arises from spacetime itself in the interference zone, as proven by M.W. Evans, P.K. Anastasovski, T.E. Bearden et al., “On Whittaker’s Representation of the Electromagnetic Entity in Vacuo: The Production of Transverse Fields and Energy by Scalar Interferometry,” Journal of New Energy, 4(3), Winter 1999, p. 76-78. (That entire issue of JNE contains some 60 papers by the Alpha Foundation’s Institute for Advanced Study (AIAS), dealing with the kind of higher symmetry electrodynamics needed to understand such weapons).
Though tested in prototype in the 1950s, the first strategic LWIs were deployed in Russia in April 1963, and were used to kill the U.S.S. Thresher nuclear attack submarine, underwater off the East coast of the United States, in April 1963. The signatures of the kill are 100% decisive.
USS Thresher
One day later, the same weapon placed an enormous electromagnetic burst (explosion) deep underwater, 100 miles north of Puerto Rico. From the surface of the ocean there arose a giant cone of water, rising a half mile into the air, turning into a mushroom, and falling back into the sea.
This was the second test of the new Russian strategic LWIs, under KGB control. By this test and the fact that the West did not even recognize what killed the Thresher, Khrushchev managed to stay in power another two years or so, after his Cuban Crisis fiasco where he lost face in front of the entire world.
World-wide weather engineering started in earnest by the Russians on July 4, 1976 - as a quirky sense of humor and “bicentennial gift” to the United States. The weapons have been used to shoot down aircraft, etc. worldwide also, mostly as tests, and have also destroyed ICBMs shortly after launch.
Related: Eco-Terrorism Correspondence
Both the scientific and political priesthoods are being used by the plutocrats at the highest totem pole of our society to impose upon humanity a world of endless scarcity in all aspects of our existence. They justify this policy by saying that if everything is free and easily accessible, people get lazy and just play around. What’s wrong with that?
We are the only species in the entire solar system that consented to making life very difficult after we have discovered ways and means to make it easier.
"When I first joined the American Physical Society sixty-seven years ago it was much smaller, much gentler, and as yet uncorrupted by the money flood (a threat against which Dwight Eisenhower warned a half-century ago).
…The giants no longer walk the earth, and the money flood has become the raison d’être of much physics research, the vital sustenance of much more, and it provides the support for untold numbers of professional jobs.
For reasons that will soon become clear my former pride at being an APS Fellow all these years has been turned into shame, and I am forced, with no pleasure at all, to offer you my resignation from the Society.
It is of course, the global warming scam, with the (literally) trillions of dollars driving it, that has corrupted so many scientists, and has carried APS before it like a rogue wave.
It is the greatest and most successful pseudoscientific fraud I have seen in my long life as a physicist.
Anyone who has the faintest doubt that this is so should force himself to read the ClimateGate documents, which lay it bare. (Montford’s book organizes the facts very well.)
I don’t believe that any real physicist, nay scientist, can read that stuff without revulsion. I would almost make that revulsion a definition of the word scientist.
So what has the APS, as an organization, done in the face of this challenge? It has accepted the corruption as the norm, and gone along with it…”
In February 1998, the European Parliament’s Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy held public hearings in Brussels on the U.S based weather warfare facility developed under the HAARP program. The Committee’s “Motion for Resolution” submitted to the European Parliament:
"Considers HAARP… by virtue of its far-reaching impact on the environment to be a global concern and calls for its legal, ecological and ethical implications to be examined by an international independent body…; [the Committee] regrets the repeated refusal of the United States Administration… to give evidence to the public hearing …into the environmental and public risks [of] the HAARP program.”
-
European Parliament, Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy, Brussels, doc. no. A4-0005/99, 14 January 1999
The Committee’s request to draw up a “Green Paper” on “the environmental impacts of military activities”, however, was casually dismissed on the grounds that the European Commission lacked the required jurisdiction to delve into “the links between environment and defense”. Brussels was anxious to avoid a showdown with Washington. (see European Report, 3 February 1999).
The possibility of climatic or environmental manipulations as part of a military and intelligence agenda, while tacitly acknowledged, has never been considered relevant. Military analysts are mute on the subject.
Meteorologists are not investigating the matter, and environmentalists are strung on global warming and the Kyoto protocol.
Ironically, the Pentagon, while recognizing its ability to modify the World’s climate for military use, has joined the global warming consensus. In a major study (pdf) , the Pentagon has analyzed in detail the implications of various global warming scenarios.
Power is never given, or handed down in a silver platter. It must be taken away from those who are incapable of using it wisely for the good and benefit of all lifeforms everywhere.
In lieu of these deplorables, we must put in management positions the visionaries, engineers and technologists, so that only the progressive use of science and technology is given the light of day.
This is the revolution worth fighting for.
US Attorney General Finally Admits Weed Isn’t A Gateway Drug - Prescription Pills Are + Study Proves Medical Marijuana Can Replace Dangerous Pharmaceuticals October 21 2016 | From: TheAntiMedia / NaturalNews / Various
The National Institute on Drug Abuse is a U.S. federal research institute focused on “[advancing] science on the causes and consequences of drug use and addiction … to apply that knowledge to improve individual and public health. ”
Though it admits “the majority of people who use marijuana do not go on to use other, ‘harder’ substances,” it still describes marijuana as a gateway drug.
While discussing how heroin abuse and how individuals often develop an addiction, Lynch argued:
'“[I]ndividuals [start out] with a prescription drug problem, and then because they need more and more, they turn to heroin. It isn’t so much that marijuana is the step right before using prescription drugs or opioids - it is true that if you tend to experiment with a lot of things in life, you may be inclined to experiment with drugs, as well. But it’s not like we’re seeing that marijuana as a specific gateway.”
Attorney General Lynch added that instead of trafficking rings, what “introduce[s] a person to opioids … [is] the household medicine cabinet.”
The event she attended was part of the Prescription Opioid Heroin Epidemic Awareness Week, a campaign designed by the White House that includes “250 different events highlighting the importance of prevention, enforcement, and treatment.”
As expected, the campaign focused on advertising the official approach to drug abuse, encouraging the public to support the Obama administration’s approach to the opioid crisis.
Measures embraced by the administration include “expanding evidence-based prevention and treatment programs, increasing access to the overdose-reversal medicine naloxone, and supporting targeted enforcement activities.”
In early August, the Obama administration said no to a bid urging the Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) to reconsider how marijuana is classified under federal drug control laws. Currently, the DEA lists marijuana as a Schedule I drug, along with heroin, the pivot drug of the opioid epidemic.
But as the Attorney General’s comments demonstrate, the federal government fails to take its own classification methodology seriously, choosing instead to contend that prescription drug abuse is a much bigger issue.
Per its federal classification, marijuana should be seen as a threat as dangerous as heroin, and yet Lynch appears to contend the abuse of legal drugs is keeping federal agents busy - not the enforcement of her agency’s own rules.
But as American states begin to shift their approach to some of the targets of this nationwide anti-drug campaign, legalized marijuana is able to accomplish what many drug war apologists claimed criminalization would achieve: bringing down the drug cartels. But as the Washington Postreport demonstrates, legalizing pot is not enough.
While powerful drug cartels have seen legalized marijuana taking a chunk out of their profits, the criminalization of other drugs such as heroin continues to put addicts in harm’s way.
Without legal means to produce the drugs the market demands, these cartels are not concerned with the quality of their product nor the health of their consumer.
Study Proves Medical Marijuana Can Replace Dangerous Pharmaceuticals
Opponents of medical marijuana laws have often claimed that legalizing marijuana use would lead to rampant drug abuse and have an adverse effect on society. Now that these laws have been instituted in some states for a few years, however, evidence is mounting that the opposite is actually true.
In fact, it turns out that medical marijuana is so effective at treating pain that it's keeping many patients off prescription painkillers, which are a bigger threat to society than marijuana use, medical or otherwise, could ever be.
In a recent study, researchers discovered that Medicare reported savings of $165.2 million in 2013 on the prescription medications that are used to treat some of the conditions that can also be treated with marijuana.
These included depression, pain, seizures, nausea, glaucoma, anxiety, spasticity and sleep disorders. You may recall that 2013 was the year that 17 states put medical marijuana laws into place, along with the District of Columbia.
These impressive savings accounted for half a percent of the Medicare Part D budget for that year. In the study, all of the claims for prescriptions filed for the medications in question from 2010 to 2013 by Medicare Part D patients were reviewed.
Decreases were noted in the number of prescriptions that were written for medications other than marijuana for most of the conditions studied. For example, in states with legal medical marijuana, the prescriptions for pain medications were lower by a remarkable 1,826 daily doses compared to the states where medical marijuana is not legal.
The researchers estimate that Medicare could have saved $468 million on prescription drugs if every state had a medical marijuana law in place.
The sole exception was glaucoma, and this could be due to the fact that marijuana's effects on the condition tend to only last for about an hour. Prescriptions for medicines that marijuana is not used for, such as blood thinners, did not drop.
Researcher Ashley Bradford of the University of Georgia, who was the study's lead author, said: "The results suggest people are really using marijuana as medicine and not just using it for recreational purposes."
Medical Marijuana Could Alleviate The Nation's Opioid Crisis
This is good news for those suffering with these ailments, with marijuana proving to be a safer alternative to conventional medicine. Take the example of opioids, a type of painkiller that has been responsible for a slew of deadly overdoses.
A University of Michigan study found that patients with chronic pain who used medical marijuana reported a drop in their use of prescription opioids amounting to 64 percent. They also reported experiencing fewer side effects, and a 45 percent improvement in their quality of life since turning to cannabis for pain management.
According to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, 40 people die each day from overdosing on these drugs.
Bad News for Big Pharma
Anything that can steer people away from death-inducing prescription painkillers and other dangerous medications is a very positive step, no matter what your personal feelings are about marijuana.
Of course, Big Pharma does not share this view, as it threatens their profits, which also explains why they are hoping people won't catch on to the benefits of CBD oil from hemp for issues such as epilepsy.
Not only is marijuana very effective for many people, but it carries very few side effects, and is often more affordable than the pills Big Pharma is trying to push on people. This latest study showing that marijuana is replacing dangerous pharmaceuticals for many people might be bad news for Big Pharma, but it's good news for everybody else.
Why the War on Cannabis?
"Smart City" Is Really Government Spying On An Unimaginable Scale
October 19 2016 | From: BlacklistedNews
Columbus, Ohio, actually won $50 million in DOT grant money to turn their city into a "Smart City" calling it "SmartColumbus." The city of Columbus will receive an additional $90 million in pledges from public and private sector partners.
"Smart PGH's" tag line at the end of the above video is chilling, "If It's Not For All, It's Not For Us". As "Smart PGH's" documents reveal, 'smart city' surveillance spies on All of Us.
The City of Pittsburgh sees the confluence of transportation and energy as the key to U.S. Department of Transportation’s (USDOT) Smart City Challenge. To meet the challenge, we will develop an open platform and corresponding governance structure to improve the safety, equity, and efficiency of our transportation network and its interaction with the energy and communications networks.
By building on existing technology deployments and increasing fixed and mobile sensors over a number of major “Smart Spine” corridors that connect with primary commercial centers and amenities, Pittsburgh will collect, analyze, visualize, and act on information to improve mobility for residents.
The non-proprietary nature of our platform allows the City of Pittsburgh and its partners to set an open, national standard for a municipal service delivery platform, which enhances industry and supports innovation.
According to the SCC, 'smart spines' use advanced technology like real-time adaptive traffic signals and vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication at intersections.
"Smart PGH" is working with Uber to spy on customers. (see page 4)
It appears that "smart cities" are part of the government's "Vision Zero" program, see page 6 of SCC's 'Enabling Hierarchy' diagram. Also on page 6, under the subject 'Data Collection Network' they mention, "Social Media Assets" otherwise known as social media spying. (more on that below)
In addition, we [Smart PGH] would like to work with Pittsburgh Bike Share, Uber, Lyft, and others to move towards more robust V2V communications that allow Port Authority buses, City fleet, bike share bicycles, ride-sharing services, etc. to become safer by sensing one another on Pittsburgh’s streets. Bicycle tracking has already begun, Ford Motor Company has given Palo Alto, $1.1 million to equip bicycles with GPS devices.
Joshuah Mello, the city’s chief transportation official, said the main draw of the new smart-bike system, operated by Motivate and sponsored by Ford, is that it will be part of a network growing in Bay Area cities from San Jose to San Francisco, “making it one of the largest systems in the entire world.”
What he should say is, this makes it one of the largest bicycle surveillance systems in the entire world! What follows, are some of the most chilling intrusions of government spying to date. Govt spying on social media.
To address Vision Element #9, SmartPGH will deploy our “Citizens as Sensors” effort aimed at extracting relevant data from social media. Scrubbing these sites and app will provide information on what people are doing in different places across Pittsburgh, data that can be used to infer behavior and data that can detect changes in behavior due to physical modifications made by SmartPGH and the City of Pittsburgh.
Pittsburgh can more easily detect if the modifications it is making are producing the desired changes or if they are leading to unanticipated outcomes or unhappy residents.
For example, changes to the number of check-ins citizens make to restaurants and retail establishments following the parking rate change can provide evidence of how much this change has impacted dining and shopping behaviors, providing valuable feedback not just on residents emotional reactions but also the wider economic impact of such decisions.
"At a different level many users volunteer information to Web 2.0 sites as a convenient way of making it available to friends and relations, irrespective of the fact that it becomes available to all."
Govt to spy on staircases, sidewalks, bicycles, trails, buses and trains.
Moreover, residents utilize the city's unique system of 712 public staircases, 40 miles of on-street bike infrastructure, 31 miles of trails, and numerous sidewalksand on a daily basis.
Companies like Sidewalk Labs, make a profit out of spying on pedestrians.
The Port Authority of Allegheny County operates a comprehensive transit network in the city, which includes 18.4 miles of busway, 26.2 miles of light rail, 72 local bus routes and two funiculars.
Power companies and the govt collaborate to spy on everyone.
The City of Pittsburgh is in conversation with Duquesne Light and partner-company DQE Communications regarding the use of their extensive network of dark fiber. Most of the network capacity is currently “dark” and available for use by partners including the City of Pittsburgh.
To make the most of their network, Duquesne Light recently built a wireless communication infrastructure to support the increased data-flow between their electric meters and the company’s centralized operating center.
This effort has evolved into a high-capacity, resilient, wireless network covering the entirety of the City of Pittsburgh and the surrounding 817-square-mile service territory.
The grid of microgirds will spy on everyone's health, electrical and gas usage.
The grid-of-microgrids is designed to connect critical infrastructure like hospitals, universities, and data and telecommunications centers. Other partners in the effort include the UPMC health system, NRG energy, Duquesne Light and People’s natural gas.
Govt spying on Pittsburgh residents is frightening.
PennDOT’s Western Regional Traffic Management Center includes a fully integrated Centralized Software System, a Media Partner room that broadcasts live on-air reports of traffic conditions, and, a state of the art video wall capable of displaying 160 video images.
The center monitors and/or controls ITS devices on 12 freeway corridors, including many within Pittsburgh's limits.
These devices include: 293 CCTV cameras, 37 Highway Advisory Radio transmitter locations, 86 Highway Advisory Radio signs with beacons, 200 Microwave Traffic Detectors, 24 Dedicated Short Range Communication (DSRC) radios, 93 Digital Wave Radar Vehicular Detector units and many more specific ITS-related items.
List of govt agencies spying on residents:
Allegheny County
Penn DOT and the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
Southwestern Pennsylvania Commission
Port Authority of Allegheny County
Pittsburgh Parking Authority
Port of Pittsburgh Commission
Pittsburgh Bike Share
Utilities including energy distribution, water, and natural gas
University Partners, particularly University of Pittsburgh and Carnegie Mellon University
Major freight operators in Pittsburgh
Representatives of the Business and Philanthropic Communities
Citizens and Community Stakeholders Industry partners
The model for the WPRDC is unique because it is designed to be extensible and inclusive, able to host datasets from any municipality, non-profit, or researcher with data to share. By bringing together various levels of government, civil society, and academia around information resources, we have begun to improve our region’s capacity for innovation and evidence-driven policy-making.
The WPRDC’s web resources provide machine-readable data downloads and APIs of key administrative data on topics such as property assessment, building inspection, public health, crime, and asset management.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
Seven companies work with Surtrac to spy on everyone.
Surtracs' Econolite specializes in spying on motor vehicles. They also invented 'autoscope' surveillance cameras in the early 1990's. Fyi, Surtrac's Autoscope Vision (AV) also spies on bicyclists.
AV delivers stop bar vehicle and bicycle detection, advanced vehicle detection, bicycle differentiation, traffic data collection, and HD video surveillance.
Surtrac boasts, about they're newly-developed, full-field-of-view object-feature tracking. In other words, the government can track an individual vehicle or bicyclist throughout an entire city!
There are plans to integrate Surtrac with the Port Authority of Allegheny County bus fleets’ using 'Clever Devices'. (more on that below)
2.Citilog, is a mirror image of Econolite but specializes in spying road sensors that are imbedded in every road, highway tunnel and bridge.
4.Wavetronix, can track an individual vehicles speed, even if they change lanes. Wavertronix also knows the type of vehicle you're driving, watch the video below to find out more.
“Do Not Resist”: The Police Militarization Documentary Everyone Should See
October 19 2016 | From: TheIntercept
On a sunny afternoon last summer, Craig Atkinson, a New York City-based filmmaker, stood in a front yard in South Carolina surrounded by several heavily armed police officers.
The officers, members of the Richland County Sheriff’s Department tactical team, were descending on a modest one-story house looking for drugs and guns. The team smashed through the windows of the home with iron pikes, then stormed the front door with rifles raised.
Inside, they found a terrified family of four, including an infant. As the family members were pulled outside, Atkinson’s camera captured a scene that plays out with startling regularity in cities and towns across the country, one of many included in his new documentary, “Do Not Resist,” an examination of police militarization in the United States.
And it's not just hapening there.
The police begin rooting through the trash. “Where the fuck is the weed?” one officer asks, as the team ransacks a car parked in the driveway. “Boy that was sweet,” another says, commenting on the speed of the raid. One officer finds a backpack, which yields a bit of marijuana - it’s not enough to roll a joint, but it’s something.
The officer in charge questions the owner of the backpack, a young African-American man. In a conversation captured on Atkinson’s microphone, the young man, a local community college student, tells the officer he runs a small landscaping business.
Knowing he’s being taken into custody, with his hands cuffed in front of him, he asks the officer for a favor: Can he remove the $876 in his pocket set aside for new lawn-care equipment and give it to one of his employees to go to the hardware store? Instead of handing the cash to the arrestee’s co-worker, the tactical team seizes the money.
“I never one time said you’re a bad person,” the officer tells the young man before he’s led off. “I just have a job to do, and you happen to be in the middle of it.”
The pernicious practice of civil asset forfeiture, which allows law enforcement to grab cash or property during the course of raids, then requires people to prove the assets were not related to criminal activity in order to get them back — and allows police to keep the assets if they fail to do so - has been well documented.
What’s less common is to see one of those interactions play out on camera. Capturing those kinds of moments is what “Do Not Resist” is all about.
Trailer for “Do Not Resist,” a New Documentary Examining Police Militarization in the United States:
Atkinson’s directorial debut has already taken home this year’s prize for best documentary at the Tribeca Film Festival and is currently making the rounds in select cities around the country.
Radley Balko, author of “Rise of the Warrior Cop: The Militarization of America’s Police Forces,” has called the film “terrifying,”“powerful,” and “important.”
Based on substantial on-the-ground reporting, “Do Not Resist” is both unsettling to watch and necessary to see.
The film begins in Ferguson, Missouri, on a rainy night of protest in August 2014 that erupted into a melee of tear gas and screaming.
It then quickly moves to a seminar with Dave Grossman, a law enforcement guru who gives trainings on lethal force and the application of a warrior mentality in the name of the law.
“The policeman is the man of the city,” Grossman begins, before explaining that cops he’s spoken to routinely describe their first on-the-job kill as a prelude to the best sex of their lives.
“Both partners are very invested in some very intense sex,” Grossman says.
“There’s not a whole lot of perks that come with this job. You find one, relax and enjoy it.”
Grossman believes that a violent reckoning between law enforcement and critics of police militarization is fast approaching.
“We are at war,” Grossman tells the crowd, “and you are the front-line troops in this war.”
The language reflects a theme that runs throughout “Do Not Resist.”
Atkinson began the project three years ago in the wake of the Boston Marathon bombings. The images of armored cars and commando cops in the streets resonated for him on a personal level. Atkinson’s father spent 29 years as a police officer outside Detroit - 13 of them on a SWAT team, where he held the rank of commander.
Atkinson and his brother would take part in their dad’s training, playing the part of hostages when they were little and mock shooters when they were big enough to handle weapons.
Watching the footage from Boston, it was obvious to Atkinson that something profound had shifted since his dad’s days on the force. He set out to create a film that would capture that shift.
The “Do Not Resist” crew attended expos and trade shows, community meetings and federal hearings, training seminars and SWAT contests. All told, the team traveled to 19 states, went on roughly 20 police ride-a-longs, observed half a dozen raids, and interacted with hundreds of police officers.
The hope was to be on-hand for an incident in which a SWAT team’s use of heavy weapons would be unquestionably warranted.
“I thought the whole time I would be able to show something that would kind of reflect the entire scope of what a SWAT officer might go through sometimes, where you actually do need the equipment,” Atkinson explained.
Instead, the filmmaker repeatedly found himself watching police with military-grade weaponry executing dubious search warrants.
The frequency of the raids was particularly shocking, with one of the officers in the film claiming his team does 200 such operations a year.
By comparison, Atkinson notes, his father performed a total of 29 search warrant raids over his entire 13 years in SWAT - according to some estimates, SWAT teams now carry out between 50,000 to 80,000 raids across the country annually.
“The search warrants, we’re told, are always used for massive drug dealers and kingpins, and then we run in these homes and we never found anything,” Atkinson said.
Beyond the day-to-day breaking down of doors, “Do Not Resist” explores the growing role of private surveillance companies in local policing, and law enforcement’s thirst for technology that can predict crimes before they happen.
An analyst inspects video feeds of a wide-scale aerial surveillance system being utilized by local police departments
The film highlights Persistence Surveillance Systems, a company offering low-cost aerial surveillance honed in Fallujah to domestic law enforcement. “We’re not out to watch the whole world, just all the world that’s got crime,” Ross McNutt, the president of the company, insists.
“That’s the next wave in the militarization of police,” Atkinson told The Intercept in an interview.
“What we found was a whole slew of retired military officers now in the private sector now selling the exact same surveillance technology that they just got back from Iraq and Afghanistan with to local law enforcement for small money on the dollar.”
The intent of “Do Not Resist,” Atkinson said, is to provide a glimpse inside the realities of American policing, challenge the policing-for-profit model that has caused departments in economically depressed communities to treat their citizens as walking ATM machines, call out a warrior culture that divides law enforcement from the public they’re sworn to serve, and flag the dangers of war-zone technologies being applied domestically.
For the most part, the reaction from law enforcement has been positive, Atkinson said.
“I’ve had a lot of law enforcement really respond well to the film and say that it reflects these issues that a lot of them have been working on themselves,” he said.
As for his father, Atkinson said, watching the film stirs up uncomfortable feelings.
“His major reaction was just disappointment in seeing how far the mission creep had actually gone,” he said.
“It’s obviously disappointing to see something that you were dedicating your life to so completely, evolve into something that you would never want to be a part of.”
Donald Trump Exposes Globalist Control & Criminal Clintons Live In Florida Speech
+ All-Out Effort To Destroy Trump Proves He's Not Part Of The Establishment
October 17 2016 | From: NextNewsNetwork / NaturalNews / Various
Do you want to see the most epic destruction of the Clintons and the Obama Administration ever recorded? Of course you do.
There's no longer any question whatsoever about whether Trump is an insider or outsider.
“This election will determine whether we are a free nation or whether we are not a democracy, but are in fact controlled by a handful of global special interests, rigging the system, and our system is rigged."
“This election will determine whether we are a free nation or whether we are not a democracy, but are in fact controlled by a handful of global special interests, rigging the system, and our system is rigged.
This is reality, you know it, they know it, I know it and pretty much the whole world knows it.
The establishment and their media enablers, wield control over this nation through means that are very well known. Anyone who challenges their control is deemed a sexist, a racist, a xenophobe and morally deformed.
They will attack you, they will slander you, they will seek to destroy your career and your family, they will seek to destroy everything about you including your reputation.
They will lie, lie, lie. And then again they will do worse than that.
They will do whatever is necessary, the Clintons are criminals, remember that. They are Criminals.
This is well documented and the establishment that protects them has engaged in a massive cover up of widespread criminal activity at the State Department and the Clinton Foundation in order to keep the Clintons in power.
Never in history have we seen such a cover up as this."
All-Out Effort To Destroy Trump Proves He's Not Part Of The Establishment
There's no longer any question whatsoever about whether Trump is an insider or outsider. The all-out attack on Trump by the leftist media, democrats and the republican establishment now confirm thatthe political elite are terrified of Donald Trump and will do anything to stop him.
As proof, just consider the "hot mic" lewd talking tape that was rolled out last Friday. This recording of Trump speaking in a lewd, insensitive way about his sexual exploits with women was surreptitiously recorded over a decade ago. It's now being seized upon by the same leftist media that whitewashes the entire history of Bill Clinton's sexual assaults against women as well as Hillary's long history of extreme profanity and cursing at everyone around her.
Over the last two days, many members of the Republican establishment have seized upon the tape to denounce Trump yet again, ridiculously proclaiming they hold the moral high ground in America only because they've never yet been caught hiring prostitutes or sodomizing little boys. (Yeah, do you really think these power-hungry Washington insiders are CLEAN LIVING people? Get a grip...)
Fascinatingly, That's Actually Happening Right Now Across America, as Far as I Can Tell, is Three things:
1. The people who were already opposed to Donald Trump are even more disgusted with his hot mic recording. But that alone doesn't change the election because they weren't voting for him in the first place. Just because they hate him more doesn't mean they get to vote twice. He lost their vote on day one when he said Rosie O'Donnell was a pig (or whatever he said).
2. The people who have been supporting Donald Trump aren't surprised at all by his rude, crude demeanor in private. Trump isn't the kind of president you elect when times are great and you need a polite head of state to represent your nation with subtlety and etiquette.
Trump is an attack dog you elect as a last resort to try to save your country from being run into the ground by a criminal cartel of government thugs. Trump, in other words, is a political SOLDIER. And soldiers talk s**t about everybody, including men, women and especially their enemy. I don't care what he SAYS in private. I care what he DOES to save America from being utterly overrun and destroyed.
3. People are realizing that EVERY power-seeking person has had similar moments of lewd talk in the past. From Barack Obama's, Gotta have them ribs and p***y too! to the President's B*tch ni**a buy your own damn fries! escapade, the truth is that everybody in power has moments of lewd, inappropriate speech.
If you think Hillary hasn't spoken this way to her own Secret Service guards, you're simply not informed about reality. Check out 56 documented examples of Hillary Clinton cursing like mad over the last three decades.
The Trump Movement is Bigger than Donald Trump - It's Larger than Any One Person, No Matter How Foul
The other big ah-ha in all this is that even if Donald Trump were to bow out of the election, the Trump movement would continue to grow.
You didn't really think this was all about one man, did you? The rising up of people against the corrupt criminal elite is a global phenomenon that's much larger than any one person.
The "Trump movement" isn't about Donald Trump the person -- who is a crude, aggressive political outsider -- it's about the idea of demanding an end to government corruption and political elitism.
The Trump movement is about ending the Clinton nightmare for America. It's about giving the finger to Washington D.C. and taking back our democracy from a corrupt class of professional criminals who have been in power for far too long.
Voting for Donald Trump isn't a vote for the person, it's a vote for the movement: the idea that real people across America might regain their freedom from tyranny and oppression. It's about stopping the deliberate destruction of America by the Obama / Clinton crime cartel, restoring accountability at the highest levels, and even indicting and imprisoning key members of the criminal Washington elite.
A Do-or-Die Moment for America
This is a do-or-die moment for America. It's a simple choice between the ultimate corrupt insider (Hillary) vs. a total political outsider that the entire establishment is desperately trying to destroy (Trump). If we elect Clinton, it's over for America. We go down the rabbit hole of police state totalitarianism, the utter destruction of the Bill of Rights and will most likely end up in a protracted civil war.
If we elect the outsider, we have one last chance to halt the tyranny, end the Clinton nightmare and send the political elite packing.
This November 8th, we must elect the outsider regardless of how lewd, crude or insensitive he is in his private, personal conversations. We aren't electing him to be a Saint. We're electing him to stop the Devil. Sometimes, you need a nasty attack dog to get that job done.
Truth be told, if Donald Trump turned to Hillary Clinton and blasted her with the most vicious, horrific words imaginable, most of America would cheer. It has really come to that.
“There is a large swath of the American electorate that is simply fed up with the establishment and are intent upon sending an outsider to shake up Washington... the more crass the better."
Curse at the man if you want, but don't abandon the movement. Vote Trump on November 8th, and stop the Clintons once and for all. Stay informed at Trump.news
Agenda 21: Awareness And Activism + UN 2030 Agenda Decoded: Blueprint For The Global Enslavement Of Humanity Under Corporate Masters October 16 2016 | From: AmericanPolicyCenter / NaturalNews / Various
Sustainable Development: The Transformation of the Western World
Some think that the planet is in danger of global warming and over consumption. They really believe that the only way to fix the problem is to control the flow of resources and wealth, which literally means changing human civilization and the way we live.
This is an immense subject and many more articles are available in the Agenda 21 section of this website. This article is from the US but the principles of Agenda 21 are global - it came from the UN.
The problem is, that requires a forced transformation of our entire society to comply, and that ultimately leads to a thirst for power and topdown control – that will eventually lead to tyranny.
In his book, Earth in the Balance, Al Gore warned that a “wrenching transformation” must take place to lead Western countries away from the “horrors of the Industrial Revolution.”
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
The process to do that is called Sustainable Development and its’ roots can be traced back to a UN policy document called Agenda 21, adopted at the UN’s Earth Summit in 1992.
Sustainable Development calls for changing the very infrastructure of the nation, away from private ownership and control of property to nothing short of central planning of the entire economy – often referred to as top-down control.
Where and when did the term Sustainable Development originate?
The term “sustainable development” was born in the pages of “Our Common Future,” the official report of the 1987 United Nations World Commission on Environment and Development, authored by Gro Harlem Brundtland, Vice President
of the World Socialist Party.
For the first time the environment was tied to the tried and true Socialist goals of international redistribution of wealth. Said the report;
“Poverty is a major cause and effect of global environmental problems. It is therefore futile to attempt to deal with environmental problems without a broader perspective that encompasses the factors underlying world poverty and international inequality.”
The term appeared in full force in 1992, in a United Nations initiative called the U.N. Sustainable Development Agenda 21, or as it has become known around the world, simply Agenda 21. It was unveiled at the 1992 United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED), ballyhooed as the Earth Summit.
In fact, the Earth Summit was one of the provisions called for in the Brundtland report as a means of implementing Sustainable Development around the world. More than 178 nations adopted Agenda 21 as official policy. President George H.W. Bush was the signatory for the United States.
What is Sustainable Development?
The 1989 Webster’s Dictionary defines “Sustainable Yield” as a requirement that trees cut down in a forest area be replaced by new plantings to ensure future lumber supplies.” That’s what most people think Sustainable Development means.
Proponents of Sustainable Development argue that it is about preserving resources for future generations. What’s wrong with that? Nothing in theory.
That would be sustainable with a small “s.” Just common sense usage of natural resources. The problem is, major forces now promoting it intend for Sustainable Development to be spelled with a capital “S.” They intend for a Socio-economic political movement that probes, invades and changes every aspect of human civilization.
And that’s the problem.
Imagine a world in which a specific “ruling principle” is created to decide proper societal conduct for every citizen.
That principle would be used to consider regulations guiding everything you eat, the kind of home you are allowed to live in, the method of transportation you use to get to work, what kind of work you may have, the way you dispose of waste, perhaps even the number of children you may have, as well as the quality and amount of education your children may receive.
Sustainable development encompasses every aspect of our lives.
According to its authors, the objective of sustainable development is to integrate economic, social, and environmental policies in order to achieve reduced consumption, social equity, and the preservation and restoration of biodiversity.
Top Sustainability Fallacies:
Lie: Sustainability is about protecting the environment
Reality: It is a political movement to replace capitalism with governement control of everything
Lie: Free market capitalism is the principle cause of planetary degradation and is not sustainable
Reality: It is government control of the economy that is not sustainable
Lie: Private property is a source of social injustice, and too valuable to be subject to free markets
Reality: The right to own and use private property is a fundamental source of wealth creation
Lie: Green energy creates jobs
Reality: Green energy is unreliable, uncompetitive and renders industry unable to compete in world parkets
Lie: C02 is a pollutant
Reality: C02 is the gas that all plants and crops breathe. More C02 = better agricultural production
Lie: The sustainability movement isn't trying to take away anyone's property rights or freedoms
Reality: The sustainability movement is relentlessly attacking property rights and freedoms
Lie: Climate change is catastrophic and anthropogenic and must be addressed through C02 abatement schemes
Reality:Man made climate change is a hoax with numerous provable data points and thousands of scientists going on the record - which is ignored by the cabal-controlled mainstream media
Lie: Compact development reduces pollution
Reality:Reality: Dense development is always correlated with intense pollution levels
Lie: Subways and mass transit can replace cars
Reality: They cannot. If they could there would be no cars in Manhattan
Lie: Compact urban development is more affordable for government
Reality: Empirical evidence proves compace development requires higher tax rates. Urbanisation strains police, fire, educational and social services
Lie: Afforable housing for people of all income levels will ensure healthier better balanced neighbourhoods
Reality: Low income housing usually creates more problems than it solves thereby damaging communities
The Sustainablists insist that society be transformed into feudal-like governance by making Nature the central organizing principle for our economy and society, not human need or wants.
This idea essentially elevates nature above Humans [we are all on this planet, their premise is bullshit]. As such, every societal decision would first be questioned as to how it might effect the environment.
To achieve this, Sustainablist policy focuses on three components; land use, education, and population control and population reduction.
Here is a direct quote from the report of the 1976 UN’s Habitat I conference which said:
“Land... cannot be treated as an ordinary asset, controlled by individuals and subject to the pressures and inefficiencies of the market. Private land ownership is also a principle instrument of accumulation and concentration of wealth, therefore, contributes to social injustice.”
Some officials claim that Sustainable Development is just a local effort to protect the environment and contain development -- just your local leaders putting together a local vision for the community.
Yet, the exact language and tactics for implementation of Sustainable Development are being used in nearly every city around the globe from Lewiston, Maine to Singapore.
Local indeed.
In short, Sustainable Development is the process by which the world is being reorganized around a central principle of state collectivism using the environment as bait.
One of the best ways to understand what Sustainable Development actually is can be found by discovering what is NOT sustainable.
According to the UN’s Biodiversity Assessment Report, items for our everyday lives that are NOT sustainable include:
Ski fields
Grazing of livestock
Plowing of soil
Building fences
Industry
Single family homes
Paved and tarred roads
Logging activities
Dams and reservoirs
Power line construction
Economic systems that fail to set proper value on the environment (capitalism, free markets).
Maurice Strong, Secretary General of the UN’s Rio Earth Summit in 1992 said;
“… Current lifestyles and consumption patterns of the affluent middle class – involving high meat intake, use of fossil fuels, appliances, home and work airconditioning, and suburban housing are not sustainable.”
This goal is exactly the policies that are written into such legislation as Cap and Trade, the Clean Air Act, the Clean Water Act.
It is also the policy behind the many corporate commercials seen nightly on television which advocate “Going Green".
They are all part of the efforts to modify consumer behavior to accept less, deal with higher energy prices, restrict water use and place severe limitations on use of private property – all under the environmental excuse.
And one of the most destructive tools used to enforce Sustainable Development policy is something called the “precautionary principle.”
That means that any activities that might threaten human health or the environment should be stopped - even if no clear cause and effect relationship has been established - and even if the potential threat is largely theoretical.
That makes it easy for any activist group to issue concerns or warnings by news release or questionable report against and industry or private activity, and have those warnings quickly turned into public policy – just in case.
Many are now finding non-elected regional governments and governing councils enforcing policy and regulations.
As these policies are implemented, locallyelected officials are actually losing their own power and decision-making ability in their elected offices. More and more decisions are now being made behind the scenes in non-elected “sustainability councils” armed with truckloads of federal regulations, guidelines, and grant money.
According to its authors, the objective of Sustainable Development is to integrate economic, social, and environmental policies in order to achieve reduced consumption, social equity, and the preservation and restoration of biodiversity.
The Sustainable Development logo used in most literature on the subject contains three connecting circles labeled along the lines of Social Equity; Economic Prosperity; and Ecological Integrity (known commonly as the 3 E's).
Social Equity
Sustainable Development’s Social Equity plank is based on a demand for “social justice.” Social Justice is described as the right and opportunity of all people “to benefit equally from the resources afforded us by society and the environment.”
According to Sustainablist doctrine, it is a social injustice for some to have prosperity if others do not. It is a social injustice to keep our borders closed.
It is a social injustice for some to be bosses and others to be merely workers. Social justice is a major premise of Sustainable Development.
Another word for social justice is Socialism or Marxism. Karl Marx was the first to coin the phrase “social justice.”
Most recently the theory of social justice has been used to justify government takeover of health care. Today, the phrase is used throughout Sustainablist literature.
The Sustainablist system is based on the principle that individuals must give up selfish wants for the needs of the common good, or the “community.”
This is the same policy behind the push to eliminate our nation’s borders to allow the “migration” of those from other nations into the United States to share our individually-created wealth and our taxpayers-paid government social programs.
Say the Sustainablists, “Justice and efficiency go hand in hand.” “Borders,” they say, “are unjust.”
Under the Sustainablist system, private property is an evil that is used simply to create wealth for a few. So too, is business ownership. Instead, “every worker / person will be a direct capital owner.”
Property and businesses are to be kept in the name of the owner, keeping them responsible for taxes and other expenses, however control is in the hands of the “community” (government).
Under Sustainable Development individual human wants, needs, and desires are to be conformed to the views and dictates of social planners.
Harvey Ruvin, Vice Chair of the International Council on Local Environmental Initiatives (ICLEI) said:
“Individual rights will have to take a back seat to the collective” in the process of implementing Sustainable Development.
Economic Prosperity
Sustainable Development’s economic policy is based on one overriding premise: That the wealth of the world was made at the expense of the poor.
It dictates that, if the conditions of the poor are to be improved, wealth must first be taken from the rich.
[But this mandate does not apply to not the "elite" of course].
Consequently, Sustainable Development’s economic policy is based, not on private enterprise, but on public / private partnerships.
In the free-market of the past, most businesses were started by individuals who saw a need for a product or service and they set out to fill it. Some businesses prospered to become huge corporations, some remained small “mom and pop” shops, others failed and dissolved.
Most business owners were happy to be left alone to take their chances to run their businesses on their own, not encumbered by a multiplicity of government regulations.
If they failed, most found a way to try again. In the beginning of the American Republic, government’s main involvement was to guarantee they had the opportunity to try.
In order to give themselves an advantage over competition, some businesses -- particularly large corporations – now find a great advantage in dealing directly with government, actively lobbying for legislation that will inundate smaller companies with regulations that they cannot possibly comply with or even keep up with.
This government / big corporation back-scratching has always been a dangerous practice because economic power should be a positive check on government power, and vise versa. If the two should ever become combined, control of such massive power can lead only to tyranny.
One of the best examples of this was the Italian model in the first half of the Twentieth Century under Mussolini’s Fascism.
Together, select business leaders who have agreed to help government impose Sustainablist green positions in their business policies, and officials at all levels of government are indeed merging the power of the economy with the force of
government in Public / Private Partnerships on the local, state and federal levels.
As a result, Sustainable Development policy is redefining free trade to mean centralized global trade “freely” crossing (or eliminating) national borders.
It definitely does not mean people and companies trading freely with each other. Its real effect is to redistribute manufacturing, wealth, and jobs out of our borders and to lock away natural resources.
After the regulations have been put in place, literally destroying whole industries, new “green” industries created with federal grants bring newfound wealth to the “partners.” This is what Sustainablists refer to as economic prosperity.
The Sustainable Development “partnerships” include some corporations both domestic and multination. They in turn are partnered with the politicians who use their legislative and administrative powers to raid the treasury to fund and enforce the scheme.
Of course, as the chosen corporations, which become a new elite, stamp out the need for competition through government power, the real loser is the consumers who no longer count in market decisions. Government grants are now being used by industry to create mandated green products like wind and solar power.
Products are put on the market at little risk to the industry, leaving consumers a more limited selection from which to choose. True free markets are eliminated in favor of controlled economies which dictate the availability and quality of products.
Ecological Integrity
“Nature has an integral set of different values (cultural, spiritual and material) where humans are one strand in nature’s web and all living creatures are considered equal.
Therefore the natural way is the right way and human activities should be molded along nature’s rhythms.” from the UN’s Biodiversity Treaty presented at the 1992 UN Earth Summit.
This quote lays down the ground rules for the entire Sustainable Development agenda.
It says humans are nothing special – just one strand in the nature of things or, put another way, humans are simply biological resources.
Funny that, the Cabal see us as "Human Resources" also. What a coincidence...
Sustainablist policy is to oversee any issue in which man interacts with nature – which, of course, is literally everything.
And because the environment always comes first, there must be great restrictions over private property ownership and control.
This is necessary, Sustainablists say, because humans only defile nature. Under Sustainable Development there can be no concern over individual rights.
Individual human wants, needs, and desires are conformed to the views and dictates of social planners.
The UN’s Commission on Global Governance said in its 1995 report:
“Human activity… combined with unprecedented increases in human numbers… are impinging on the planet’s basic life support system.
Action must be taken now to control the human activities that produce these risks.”
Under Sustainable Development, limited government, as advocated by our Founding Fathers, is impossible because, we are told, the real or perceived environmental crisis is too great.
Only government can be trusted to respond. Maurice Strong, Chairman of the 1992 UN Earth Summit said:
“A shift is necessary toward lifestyles less geared to environmentally-damaging consumption patterns. The shift will require a vast strengthening of the multilateral system, including the United Nations.”
The politically based environmental movement provides Sustainablists camouflage as they work to transform systems of government, justice, and economics.
It is a masterful mixture of socialism (with its top down control of the tools of the economy) and fascism (where property is owned in name only – with no individual owner control).
Sustainable Development is the worst of both the left and the right. It is not liberal, nor is it conservative.
It is a new kind of tyranny that, if not stopped, will surely lead us to a new Dark Ages of pain and misery yet unknown to mankind.
UN Report: Habitat I Conference:
"Land cannot be treated as an ordinary asset, controlled by individuals and subject to the pressures and inefficiencies of the market.
Private land ownership is also a principle instrument of accumulation and concentration of wealth, therefore, contributers to social injustice."
Six months after his inauguration, President Bill Clinton issued Executive Order #12852 which created the President’s Council On Sustainable Development (PCSD) on June 29 1993.
The Council’s Membership included:
Twelve Cabinet-level Federal Officials
Jonathan Lash, Pres. World Resources Institute
John Adams, Ex. Dir. National Resources Defense Council
Dianne Dillon-Ridgley, Pres. Zero Population
Michelle Perrault, International V.P., Sierra Club
John C. Sawhill, Pres. The Nature Conservancy
Jay D. Hair, Pres. World Conservation Union (IUCN)
Kenneth L. Lay, CEO, Enon Corporation
William D. Ruckelshaus, Chm., Browning-Ferris Industries & former EPA Administrator
Some of these members were representatives of the same groups which helped write Agenda 21 at the UN level, now openly serving on the President’s Council to create policy for the implementation of Sustainable Development at the federal level.
With great fanfare the Council issued a comprehensive report containing all the guidelines on how our government was to be reinvented under sustainable development.
Those guidelines were created to direct policy for every single federal agency, state government and local community government. Their purpose was to translate the recommendations set forth in Agenda 21 into public policy administered by the federal government.
They created the American version of Agenda 21 called “Sustainable America - A New Consensus”.
The Four Part Process Leading to Sustainable Development
So how is this “wrenching transformation” being put into place? There are four very specific routes being used. In the rural areas it’s called the “Wildlands Project.”
In the cities it’s called “Smart Growth.” In business it’s called “Public / Private Partnerships.” And in government it’s called “Stakeholder Councils.”
The Wildlands Project
"WE MUST MAKE THIS PLACE AN INSECURE AND INHOSPITABLE PLACEFOR CAPITALISTS AND THEIR PROJECTS... WE MUST RELCAIM THEROADS AND PLOWED LANDS, HALT DAM CONSTRUCTION, TEAR DOWNEXISTING DAMS, FREE SHACKLED RIVERS AND RETURN TO WILDERNESSMILLIONS OF TENS OF MILLIONS OF ACRES OF PRESENTLY SETTLEDLAND.”
- Dave Foremen, Earth First.
The Wildlands Project was the brainchild of Earth First’s Dave Foreman and it literally calls for the “re-wilding” of 50% of all the land in every state – back to the way it was before Christopher Columbus set foot on this land.
It is a diabolical plan to herd humans off the rural lands and into human settlements. Crazy you say! Yes. Impossible? Not so fast. From Foreman, the plan became the blueprint for the UN’s Biodiversity Treaty and quickly became international in scope.
But how do you remove people from the land? One step at a time. Let’s begin with a biosphere reserve. A national park will do. A huge place where there is no human activity.
For example, Yellowstone National Park, devoid of human habitation can serve as its center. Then a buffer zone is established around the reserve.
Inside the buffer only limited human activity is allowed. Slowly, through strict regulations, that area is squeezed until human activity becomes impossible.
Once that is accomplished, the biosphere is extended to the former buffer zone borders – and then a new buffer zone is created around the now-larger biosphere and the process starts again. In that way, the Biosphere Reserve acts like a cancer cell, ever expanding, until all human activity is stopped.
And there are many tools in place to stop human activity and grow the reserve.
Push back livestock’s access to river banks on ranches, many times as much as 300. When the cattle can’t reach the stream, the rancher can’t water them -- he goes out of business. Lock away natural resources by creating national parks.
It shuts down the mines -- and they go out of business. Invent a Spotted Owl shortage and pretend it can’t live in a forest where timber is cut. Shut off the forest.
Then, when no trees are cut, there’s nothing to feed the mills and then there are no jobs, and -- they go out of business.
Locking away land cuts the tax base. Eventually the town dies. Keep it up and there is nothing to keep the people on the land – so they head to the cities. The wilderness grows – just like Dave Foreman planned.
It comes in many names and many programs. Heritage areas, land management,wolf and bear reintroduction, rails to trails, conservation easements,open space, and many more.
Each of these programs is designed to make it just a little harder to live on the land – a little more expensive – a little more hopeless, literally herding people off their land and into designated human habitat areas – cities.
In the West, where vast areas of open space make it easy to impose such polices there are several programs underway to remove humans from the land. Today, there are at least 31 Wildlands projects underway, locking away more than 40
percent of the nation’s land.
The Alaska Wildlands Project seeks to lock away and control almost the entire state.
In Washington State, Oregon, Idaho, Montana parts of North and South Dakota, parts of California, Arizona, Nevada, New Mexico, Wyoming, Texas, Utah, and more, there are at least 22 Wildlands Projects underway.
For example, one project called Yukon to Yellowstone (Y2Y) – creates a 2000 mile no-man’s land corridor from the Arctic to Yellowstone.
East of the Mississippi, there are at least nine Wildlands projects, covering Maine, Pennsylvania, New York, West Virginia, Ohio, Virginia, Tennessee, North and South Carolina, Georgia and Florida. Watch for names of Wildlands Projects like Chesapeake Bay Watershed, Appalachian Restoration Project and Piedmont Wildlands Project.
How Did We Get Here? J. Gary Lawrence - Bill Clinton's Advisor for Sustainable Development:
"Participating in a UN advocated planning process would very likely bring out many... right wing conspiracy groups... who would actively work to defeat any elected official... undertaking Local Agenda 21.
So we call our process something else, such as "Comprehensive Planning", "Growth Management", or "Smart Growth.""
Smart Growth
The second path is called Smart Growth. The process essentially puts a line around a city, locking off any growth outside that line.
Such growth is disdainfully labeled “Urban Sprawl.” The plan then curtails the building of more roads to cut off access to the newly created rural area. Inside the circle, concerted efforts are made to discourage the use of cars in preference to public transportation, restricting mobility.
Because there is a restriction on space inside the controlled city limits, there is a created shortage of land and houses, so prices go up. That means populations will have to be controlled, because now there is no room to contain more people.
Cities are now passing “green” regulations, forcing homeowners to meet strict guidelines for making their homes environmentally compliant, using specific building materials, forcing roof replacements, demanding replacement of appliances, and more.
Those not in compliance will be fined and will not be able to sell their homes. There are now efforts underway to impose so-called “smart meters” which replace thermostats in homes.
Homeowners will not have control of such meters. Instead, the electric company will determine the necessary temperature inside each home.
Government agencies or local policy boards will be tasked with the responsibility to conduct an energy audit in each home to determine the steps necessary to bring the home into energy compliance. In Oakland, California, such restrictions will cost each homeowner an estimated $36,000.
The Cap N Trade bill contains a whole section on such restrictions for the nation, and most local communities are now busy creating development plans that encompass many of the same restrictions.
There is now a new push to control food production under the label of Sustainable Farming. Food sheds are now being advocated.
These are essentially government run farms located just outside the smart growth area circling the city.
Food is to be grown using strict guidelines which dictate what kinds of food is to be produced and the farming practices to be used.
These are essentially based on the blue print of Chinese Agrarian villages that cannot possibly grow enough food to feed the community unless populations are tightly controlled. True Sustainable farming programs discourage importing goods from outside the community.
A Red Agenda Marked With a Pretty Green Name: "Sustainability"
Agenda 21 spread like an INFECTION: UN Agenda 21 > ICLEI > NGO's > Central / Regional Planners
Planning associations provide sample ordinances based on ECLEI doctin that originated in UN Agenda 21
Municipal plans become manifestos
Stake Holder Councils
Inside the cities, government is increasingly controlled by an elite ruling class called stake holder councils. These are mostly Non-governmental organizations, or NGOs, which, like thieves in the night, converge on the community to stake their claim to enforce their own private agendas.
The function of legitimately – elected government within the system votes to create a system of boards, councils and even regional governments to handle every aspect of day-to-day operation of the community.
Once in place, the councils and boards basically replace the power of elected officials with non-elected, appointed rulers answerable to no one.
The councils are controlled by a small minority in the community, but they are all - powerful. They force citizens to seek permission (usually denied) for any changes to private property.
They use such excuses as historic preservation, water use restrictions, energy use, and open space restrictions. They will dictate that homeowners must use special “green” light bulbs and force stores to only use paper bags, for example.
They over-burden or even destroy business, creating stiff regulations on manufacturing and small business in the community. They may dictate the number of outlets a business may have in a community, not matter what the population
demands. For example, in San Francisco there can only be seven McDonalds.
They can dictate the kind of building materials owners can use in their private home – or whether one can build on their property at all.
Then, if they do grant a permit for building, they might not decide to let the property owner acquire water and electricity for the new home – and they may or may not give you a reason for being turned down.
As part of Sustainable health care, they may even dictate that you get the proper exercise – as determined by the government. Again, San Francisco has built a new federal building – the greenest ever built.
The elevators will only stop on every third floor so riders are forced to use stairs – for their own health, of course.
These councils fit almost perfectly the definition of a State Soviet: a system of councils that report to an apex council and then implement a predetermined outcome. Soviets are the operating mechanism of a government-controlled economy.
So Many Things Making So Little Sense: (US)
EPA drives industries overseas where the pollution increases
EPA embraces ethanol while blaming farming for pollution
Master plans across America overtly ignore property rights
Environmental nooses rob property rights and individual freedoms based on unsettled science, distorted statistics and exaggerated predictions
Focus on Social Equity eclipsing life-liberty property (Why?)
Municipal master plans have become manifestos
People in tears across America
Public / Private Partnerships
The fourth path to imposing Sustainable Development is Public/Private Partnerships (PPPs). Unfortunately, today, many Conservative / Libertarian organizations are presenting PPPs as free enterprise and a private answer for keeping taxes down by using business to make a better society.
There are certain areas where private business contracts to do jobs such as running school cafeterias through a competitive bid system. That type of arrangement certain does serve the tax payers and provides better services. That’s not how PPPs are used though Sustainable Development.
In truth, many PPPs are nothing more than government-sanctioned monopolies in which a few businesses are granted special favors like tax breaks, the power of eminent domain, non-compete clauses and specific guarantees for return on their investments.
That means they can fix prices, charge beyond what the market demands, and they can use the power of government to put competition out of business. That is not free enterprise. And it is these global corporations that are pushing the green agenda.
If you can stomach reading this horse shit, click on the image above
PPPs were the driving force behind the Trans Texas Corridor, using eminent domain to take more than 580,000 acres of private land - sanctioned by the partnership with the Texas government. And PPPs are taking over highways and local water treatment plants in communities across the nation.
PPPs in control of the water system can control water consumption – a major part of the Sustainable Development blueprint.
Fueled by federal grant programs through the EPA, the auto industry has produced and forced onto the market “green” cars that no one wants to buy, such as the Chevy Volt.
For its part of the partnership, government passed regulations that keep gas prices high to make them more inviting.
The federal government has entered into many partnerships with alternative energy companies in a move to force wind power and solar power on an uninterested public. Again, such industries only exist though the power and of government determined to enforce a certain political agenda. They would never survive in an honest free market.
Using government to ban its own product, General Electric is forcing the mercury- laden green light bulb, costing 5 times the price of incandescent bulbs. Such is the reality of green industry, which depends more on government subsidy and grants than on customers.
The North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) is the root of the “Free Trade” process and the fuel for PPPs between international corporations and government, thereby creating an “elite” class of “connected” businesses – or what Ayn Rand called “the power of pull.”
Success in the PPP world is not based on quality of product and service, but on who you know in high places.
To play ball in the PPP game means accepting the mantra of Sustainable Development and helping to implement it, even if it means going against your own product. That’s why Home Depot uses its commercials to oppose cutting down trees and British Petroleum advocates reducing the use of oil.
It is not free enterprise, but a Mussolini-type fascism of government and private industry organized in a near impenetrable force of power. And it’s all driven by the Agenda 21 blueprint of Sustainable Development.
ICLEI: Charter 1.7 - Principles
The Association shall promote, and ask its individual members to adopt, the following Earth Charter Principles to guide local action:
6. Prevent harm as the best method of environmental protection and, when knowledge is limited, apply a precautionary approach.
7. Adopt patterns of production, consumption, and reproduction that safeguard Earth’s regenerative capacities, human rights, and community well-being. (Communitarianism with forced sterilization?)
(9) Eradicate poverty as an ethical, social, and environmental imperative.
9. Eradicate poverty as an ethical, social, and environmental imperative.
10. Ensure that economic activities and institutions at all levels promote human development in an equitable and sustainable manner.
11. Affirm gender equality and equity as prerequisites to sustainable development and ensure universal access to education, health care, and economic opportunity.
14. Integrate into formal education and life-long learning the knowledge, values, and skills needed for a sustainable way of life.
What Kinds of Groups Promote this in the U.S.A.?
Many people ask how dangerous international policies can suddenly turn up in state and local government, all seemingly uniform to those in communities across the nation and around the globe.
The answer – meet ICLEI, a non-profit, private foundation, dedicated to helping locally elected representatives fully implement Agenda 21 in the community.
Originally known as the International Council for Local Environmental Initiatives (ICLEI), today the group simply calls itself “ICLEI – Local Governments for Sustainability.”
In 1992, ICLEI was one of the groups instrumental in creating Agenda 21.
The group’s mission is to push local communities to transform the way governments operate, creating a “community plan,” creating a wide range of non-elected planning and councils which then impose severe regulations and oversight policies, affecting every homeowner, every business, every school; literally every aspect of the citizen’s lives.
And it’s having tremendous success.
Currently there are over 600 American cities in which ICLEI is being paid dues with tax dollars from city councils to implement and enforce Sustainable Development. ICLEI is there to assure that the mayors keep their promises and meet their goals. Climate change and the goal to cut the communities carbon footprint is, of course, the ICLEI mantra.
Here’s just some of the programs ICLEI provides cities and towns, in order to spread their own particular political agenda in the name of “community services” and environmental protection, they include:
Software programs to help set the goals for community development – which leads to controlling use of private property;
Access to a network of “Green” experts, newsletters, conferences and workshops – to assure all city employees are in the process;
Toolkits, online resources, case studies, fact sheets, policy and practice manuals, and blueprints used by other communities;
Training workshops for staff and elected officials on how to develop and implement the programs;
And, of course, there’s Notification of relevant grant opportunities – this is the important one – money – with severe strings attached.
ICLEI recommends that the community hire a full time “sustainability manager,” who, even in small towns, can devote 100% of his time to assure that every nook and corner of the government is on message and under control.
Using environmental protection as the excuse, these programs are about reinventing government with a specific political agenda. ICLEI and others are dedicated to transforming every community in the nation to the Agenda 21 blueprint.
In addition to ICLEI, groups like the Sierra Club, Nature Conservancy and Audubon Society, NGOs which also helped write Sustainable Development policy have chapters in nearly every city. They know that Congress has written legislation providing grants for cities that implement Sustainablist policy. They agitate to get the cities to accept the grants.
If a city rejects the plan, they then agitate to the public, telling them that their elected representatives have cost the city millions in “their” tax dollars. In the end, through such tactics, the NGOs usually get their way.
The NGOs are joined in their efforts by professional planning groups and associations such as the American Planning Association (APA), The Renaissance Planning Group, and the International City/County Management association (ICMA). IN fact there are literally hundreds, if not thousands, of non-profits, NGOs and planning groups living off the grant money, working to enforce Sustainable Development policy at every level of government.
The APA - Professional Planners [or Anti-Capitalist Political Advocacy?] APA embraces ICLEI Programmes(s)
1.1 "The built envoronment is a primary contributor to climate change" ...Business as usual will not suffice."
1.3 Social Equity and Climate CHange (&Environmental Justice)
2.4 #6: "Should reduce reliance on coal..."
2.4 #10: Growe food for local consumption(Starve the world?)
2.4 #14: Reduce VMT (Vehicle Miles Travelled)
2.4 #15: Cap & Trade for carbon ...needed.
Land Use #15: Create city-funded housing repair programs
Transportation #4: Increase CAFE standards
Here Are Just a Few to Watch For:
The American Planning Association (APA) is the nation’s leading enforcer of Sustainable policy. It came into being in 1978 and can be found in literally every community in the nation. It doesn’t have the same open ties to the UN as does
ICLEI, but is every bit as involved, if not more so.
The APA’s “Growing Smart Legislative Guide Book” is found in nearly every university, state and county in the country. It is the planning guide preferred by most urban and regional planners.
The American Planning Association is one of many members of the PCSD. They partner with ICLEI & ICMA in the implementation of sustainable development. ICMA, International City / County Management Association, is an organization
of professional local government leaders building sustainable communities worldwide.
Christchurch, New Zealand
ICMA provides technical and management assistance, training, and information resources in the areas of performance measurement, ethics education and training, community and economic development, environmental management, technology, and other topics to its members and the broader local government community.
They are aided in their efforts through such as the U.S. Conference of Mayors, National Governors Association, National League of Cities, the National Association of County Administrators and several more groups that are supposed to
represent elected officials.
The Renaissance Planning Group is an urban planning firm. They played a critical role in Florida’s “Forever Program”. The Forever Program is Florida’s premier conservation and recreation lands acquisition program. Florida Forever is the
largest public land acquisition program of its kind in the United States.
With approximately 9.8 million acres of conservation land in Florida, more than 2.4 million acres were purchased under the Florida Forever and P2000 programs.
Propaganda from idiots for idiots
In 2007, the Virginia state legislature passed HB 3202 mandating that counties with the prescribed growth rate establish high density urban development areas. As a result, to date, 67 counties in the Commonwealth of Virginia are required to establish “urban development areas”.
The process and proposed land use planning that is being implemented, follows the very same policies called for in Agenda 21’s biodiversity plan. This requirement by the state forces local governments to compromise your private property through zoning measures called for in the Smart Growth program for sustainable development.
The American Farmland Trust (AFT) formed in 1980, works to acquire and control farmer development rights and the purchase of Agriculture Easements which drastically reduce, if not eliminate private ownership of the land.
"We believe planning should be a tool for allocating resources... and eliminating the great inequalities of wealth and power in our society... because the free market has proven incapable of doing this."
The Danger is in the “Process”
Sustainable policies are being sold universally to the public as a means to protect the environment and control growth. That is simply the excuse for the policies being implemented in its name.
The real problem is the “PROCESS” through which Sustainable Development is being forced on unsuspecting citizens.
The comprehensive land use plans are being steered by planning groups through manipulation by facilitated stakeholder consensus councils.
Though their meetings are “open” to the public, they are void of any public input.
The predetermined outcome severely restricts land use and compromises private property ownership in an already distressed market.
They answer to no one and they are run by zealots with their own political agenda imposing international laws and regulations.
Local homeowners have no say in the process and in most cases are shut out. Sometimes they are literally thrown out of council meetings because they want to discuss how a regulation is going to affect their property or livelihood.
Communities have dealt with local problems for 200 years. Some use zoning, some don’t. But locally elected town councils and commissioners, which meet and discuss problems with the citizens, are how this nation was built and prospered.
Today, under Sustainable Development, NGOs like ICLEI and the APA move in to establish non-elected boards, councils and regional government bodies.
Despite the Senate’s refusal to ratify the Biodiversity Treaty in 1994, the Agenda 21 policies called for by the convention, are being implemented nationwide. No matter where you live, rest assured Agenda 21 policies are being implemented in your community.
Proponents of Agenda 21 and Sustainable Development attempt to ridicule those who oppose the programs as being paranoid radicals who are spreading conspiracy theories about what they call an “obscure 20 year old UN document.”
Yet, in 2012 the UN sponsored Rio+20, in which 50,000 delegates from around the world to celebrate Agenda 21 and find means to complete its implementation.
Sustainable Development is not about “saving the environment.” It is about a revolutionary coup. It is about establishing global governance and abandoning the principles of Natural Law on which America was founded.
The politically-based environmental movement provides Sustainablists camouflage as they work to transform global systems of government, justice, and economics.
It’s a masterful mixture of Socialism, (with its top-down control of the tools of the economy); fascism (where property is owned in name only – with no private control); and Corporatism, (where partnerships between government and private business create government sanctioned monopolies.)
Sustainable Development is the worst of both the left and the right. It is bad policy pushed by both liberal and conservatives.
It is a new kind of tyranny that, if not stopped, will surely lead all human kind to a new Dark Ages of pain and misery.
What has Sustainability Become? Unfortunately, the environmental movement has been hijacked as a convenient excuse to attack capitalism; blame America; transfer wealth; impinge on Constitutional rights; and install a government-run socio-economic system.
United Nations paradigm:Capitalism and private property rights are not sustainable, and pose the single greatest threat to the world's ecosystem and social equity.
How to Fight Back Against Sustainable Development
Be aware of the world in which your elected officials live.
See below: ICLEI doesn't come with flashing lights that say "ICLEI".
It comes wrapped in a plain green package labelled "Smart Growth" or "Sustainability":
You need to know who the players are and you need to understand the political world your officials are operating in.
This may help you to understand that perhaps they aren’t all evil globalists, but, perhaps, good people who are surrounded by powers that won’t let them see the reality of the policies they are helping to implement.
I’m certainly not making excuses for them, but before you rush in and start yelling about their enforcing UN policies on the community, here are some things you should consider.
In most communities, you mayor, city council members and county commissioners are automatically members of national organizations like the National Conference of Mayors, National League of Cities, and the national associations for city council members, and the same for commissioners.
Those in the state government also have the National Governors Association and state legislators have their national organization.
For the past twenty years or more, each and every one of these national organizations have been promoting Sustainable
Development and related policies. The National Mayors Conference and the National Governors Association have been leaders in this agenda, many times working directly with UN organizations to promote the policy.
That is the message your local elected leaders hear; from the podium; from fellow officials from other communities; from “experts” they’ve been told to respect; in committee meetings; from dinner speakers; from literature they are given at such meetings.
They are told of legislation that will be soon be implemented, and they are even provided sample legislation to introduce in their communities.
Back home, they are surrounded by a horde of “stakeholder” groups, each promoting a piece of the agenda, be it policies for water control, energy control, development control, specific building materials control, historic preservation and control of “downtown” development, conservation easements and development rights for control of rural property.
These groups like ICLEI, the American Planning Association, the Renaissance Planning Group, and many more, are heavily involved with state and federal plans. They arrive in your community with blue prints, state and federal plans, grants and lots of contacts in high places.
There are official programs for “going Green,” Comprehensive land use plans, and lots of programs for the kids in the classrooms.
There is also a second horde involved in the Sustainablist invasion – state and federal agency officials including EPA agents; air and water quality agents; Interior Department officials, HUD officials, energy officials, Commerce Department officials, and on and on – all targeting your locally elected officials with policy, money, regulations, reports, special planning boards, meetings, and conferences, all promoting the exact same agenda.
And don’t forget the news media, both locally and nationally, also promoting the Sustainablist agenda, attacking anyone not going along, ready to quickly use the “extremist” label against them.
The message is clear - Sustainable Development is reality – politically correct, necessary, unquestionable, and it has “consensus.”
Is your head spinning yet? Think of the affect all of this has on a poor local official who just thought he would run for office and serve his community. This is his reality. This is what he thinks government is supposed to be because, after all, everyone he is dealing with says so.
Now, as he is surrounded by all of these important, powerful folks, along comes a local citizen who tells him that some guy named Tom DeWeese says all of these programs are from the UN and are taking away our liberty.
Who? He said what? Come on, I’m not doing that. And I don’t have time to talk about it. I have another meeting to go to.
If we are going to successfully fight Agenda 21, it is vitally important that we all recognize this reality as we plan to deal with it and defeat it. With that in mind, I offer the following ideas.
How to Fight Back
First and foremost, don’t try to fight alone. If you try to attend local meetings by yourself you will be ignored. You will need others to plan and implement strategy.
You have family and friends. Start with them. Ask them to help look into some local policies. Even if they start off skeptical about your concerns, it won’t take them long to see the truth.
Check out of there is a local tea party or even a local Republican group. Churches are a target of such policies. Alert people at your church and ask them to help fight back.
Find people to help you!
Research: Don’t even begin to open up a fight until you know certain details. First, who are the players in your community. What privately funded “stakeholder” groups are there? What is their agenda?
What other communities have they operated in? What projects? What results? Who are their members in your community?
Are they residents or did they come from “out of town?” (That could prove to be valuable information later in the fight). Finding this information may be the hardest of your efforts. They like to operate out of the spotlight.
It’s not likely that the town will carry official documentation of who it is working with. It probably will require that you attend lots of meetings and hearings. Take note of who is there and their role. Do this quietly. Don’t announce to the community what you are doing. Don’t make yourselves a target. You may have to ask questions and that may raise some eyebrows. But stay out of the way as much as possible.
Second, get all the details on the plans your community is working on. Has there already been legislation passed? Most of this information can be found on the town website. Knowing this information will help you put together a plan of action.
Once you have it, you can begin to take your fight public.
With the information you have gathered, begin to examine the effect the policies will have on the community and its residents. Find who the victims of the legislation or regulation may be. This will be of great value as you confront city council. People understand victim stories – especially if it is them. It is the best way to undermine the process – and help get people to join your cause.
You will find that Conservation Easements have raised taxes as much of the county land is removed from the tax rolls – someone has to make up for the lost revenue and the payment of easements. Are “stakeholder” groups helping to get landowners to sign up for the easements – and if so – do they get any kind of kickbacks?
Who are getting the easements? You may find the rich land owners have found a great loophole to cut their own property taxes as the middle class makes up the short fall. This will help bring usually disinterested people to your cause.
Does the community plan call for reduction of energy use? If so, look for calls for energy audits and taxes on energy use. The audits mean that the government has set a goal to reduce energy use. It may follow that government agents are going to come into your home to inspect your energy use.
Then they are going to tell you what must be done in your home to cut usage. That will cost you money. Don’t fall for the line that it is all voluntary – to help you save money.
They haven’t gone to this much trouble to be ignored. Regulations are not voluntary.
These are just a couple of examples of what to look for as you do your research.
There are many more, including meters on wells to control water use, smart meters to take away your control of your thermostat; non elected boards and councils to control local development and implement smart growth, leading to
population growth; Public / Private Partnerships with local and large corporations to “go Green;” creation of open space; pushing back live stock from streams, enforcing sustainable farming methods that restrict energy and water use in farming practices; and much more.
It all leads to higher costs and shortages, in the name of environmental protection and conservation and controlling growth (anti-sprawl, they call it).
Your goal is to stop Sustainable Development in your community. That means a campaign to stop the creation of non-elected regional government councils that are difficult to hold accountable.
It means to stop local governments from taking grants that come with massive strings attached to enforce compliance.
And it means you must succeed in removing outsider organizations and Stakeholder groups that are pressuring your elected officials to do their bidding. Civic Action: Armed with as much information as you can gather (and armed with the ability to coherently discuss its details) you are ready to take your battle to the public.
First, it would be better for you to try to discuss it privately with some of your elected officials, especially if you know them. Tell them what you have found and explain why you are opposed.
First discuss the effects of the policies on the average citizen. Explain why they are bad. Only very slowly should you bring the conversation around to the origin of such polices - Agenda 21 and the UN.
Don’t start there. It is important that you build the case to show that these policies are not local, but part of a national and international agenda. If this conversation does not go well (and it probably won’t) then you have to take it to the next level – to the public.
Begin a two fold campaign. First, write a series of letters to the editor for the local newspaper. Make sure that you are not alone.
Coordinate your letters with others who will also write letters to back up and support what you have written. These will generate more letters from others, some for your position and other against you.
Be prepared to answer those against you as they are probably written by those “Stakeholders” who are implementing the policies in the first place. This may be a useful place for you to use what you’ve learned about these groups to discredit them.
Second, begin to attend Council meetings and ask questions. The response from the council members will determine your next move. If you are ignored and your questions met with silence or hostility, prepare a news release detailing your questions and the background you have as to why you asked those questions.
Pass the news release out to the people at the next meeting as well as the news media. Attend the next meeting and the next demanding answers. Be sure to organize people to come with you.
Don’t try this alone. If necessary, have demonstrators outside city hall carrying signs or handing out flyers with the name and picture of the officials who won’t answer your questions along with the question you asked – including the details you have about the policy.
The point in all of this is to make the issue public. Take away their ability to hide the details from the public. Expose the hoards of outsiders who are dictating policy in your community. Force the people you elected to deal with YOU – not the army of self-appointed “stakeholders” and government officials. Shine a very right spotlight on the roaches under the rock.
If the newspaper is with you, great, but you will probably find it working with the other side. It may be difficult to get a fair shake in the newspaper or on radio.
That’s why you deliver your news releases to both the media and the public. Get signs, and flyers in stores if necessary. And keep it up for as long as it takes. Don’t stop the public demonstration until you had acquired victory, or at least started a public debate.
The final step is to use the energy you have created to run candidates for office against those who have ignored and fought you. Ultimately, that is the office holders worst nightmare and may be the most effective way to get them to respond and serve their constituents.
New Tactic
As mentioned in the beginning, over the past couple of years, as we’ve educated people on Agenda 21 and its UN origins, the natural reaction by concerned citizens and activists has been to rush into city hall and accuse their elected representatives of implementing international policies on the town.
This has, of course, been met with skepticism and ridicule on the part of some of the elected officials (egged on by the NGO stakeholder groups and planning organizations).
Today, the promoters of Agenda 21, including ICLEI and the American Planning Association (APA) have worked overtime to paint our movement as crazed conspiracy theorists wearing tin foil hats and hearing voices.
So, it’s time to change tactics.
Here is an undeniable fact: Agenda 21 / Sustainable Development cannot be enforced without usurping or diminishing private property rights. So, we need to begin to challenge the plans that affect private property rights.
However, as we move in that direction, we must have a clear understanding of what property rights are. Many people today have little or varying ideas of property rights.
Forty years ago people understood things like “No Trespassing,” “My home is my castle,” and “step across that line and suffer the consequences.” Such ideas today seem quaint and antiquated to many, especially with government invading private property at will.
Sometimes, in order to purchase property or to get access to services, we sign documents that say government or utility agents are free to come on our property at will. The idea of “Keep Out” is almost unheard of.
However, to demand that your private property be honored and protected a definition must be established before you start the effort.
As you stand in front of the elected officials at their regular meeting, ask them simply;
“As you bring these planners into our community and begin to implement their programs, what guarantees do I have that you will protect my private property rights?”
At this point you haven’t mentioned Agenda 21, and you haven’t attacked planning. You are simply asking a non-combative question.
They will assure you that they are in full support of protecting private property.
And then you say;
“Well, I’m happy to hear that. But, I would really like to have that in writing.”
And you present the resolution to them. If you can read it aloud to the meeting, so much the better. They may say they need to take it under consideration and will get back to you. Fine.
Make sure you are back at the next meeting to ask about it. If they say “No.” You simply ask “Why?” and take it from there.
Do not attempt this alone. The key to this effort is persistence and organization.
If they have refused to sign it then you need 5 or 10 people to stand up and ask why. You need to escalate this at each meeting until it becomes a public issue -
“Why won’t your elected officials sign a simple document that says they will protect your private property rights? What are they hiding in the plans they are presenting to us?”
This can and will lead to protests, letters to the editor and other media available to you. Put the elected officials’ names on signs carried by protestors who are rallying outside the next council or planning meeting.
Make them the issue. What you are really doing is laying the ground work for a campaign to defeat them in the next election. It is also important to do research into what planning groups, non-governmental organizations (NGO’s) federal grants and agencies may be involved in the process. All of them have a background.
Find out who they are and what they have done in the past in other communities and present that info to your fellow citizens as a warning of what is to come. I recommend that you create a “rapid response team” to be prepared to immediately respond in the media to anything they do. Make them scared to act.
If ICLEI is in your city, the details about Agenda 21 and the UN connection is easier. Your community is paying them dues with your tax dollars. Here is how to handle them:
If your council derides your statements that their policies come from the UNs Agenda 21, simply print out the home page from ICLEI’s web site: www.iclei.org
This will have all of the UN connections you’ve been talking about, in ICLEI’s own words.
Pass out the web page copies to everyone in the chamber audience and say to your elected officials;
“Don’t call me a radical simply for reporting what ICLEI openly admits on its own web site. I’m just the one pointing it out – you are the ones who are paying our tax dollars to them.”
Then demand that those payment stop. You have proven your case.
Stopping Consensus Meetings
Most public meetings are now run by trained and highly paid facilitators whose jobs is to control the meeting and bring it to a preplanned conclusion. If he is good at his job, the facilitator can actually make the audience think the “consensus” they have reached on and issue or proposal is actually their idea.
This is how Sustainable Development is being implemented across the nation, especially in meetings or planning boards that are advertised as open to the public.
They really don’t want you there and the tactic is used to move forward in full view of the public without them knowing what is happening. There is nothing free or open about the consensus process.
It is designed to eliminate debate and close discussion.
To bust up the process you must never participate, even to answer a question.
To do so allows the facilitator to make you part of the process. Instead, you must control the discussion.
Here is a quick suggestion on how to foul up the works:
Never go alone to such a meeting. You will need at least three people – the more the better.
Do not sit together. Instead, fan out in the room in a triangle formation.
Know ahead of time the questions you want to ask: Who is the facilitator?
What is his association with the organizers? Is he being paid?
Where did these programs (being proposed) come from? How are they to be funded?
One question to ask over and over again, both at facilitated meetings and city council meetings, is this:
“With the implementation of this policy, tell me a single right or action I have on my property that doesn’t require your approval or involvement. What are my rights as a property owner?”
Make them name it.
You will quickly see that they too understand there are no property rights left. By asking these questions you are putting his legitimacy in question, building suspicion among the rest of the audience, destroying his authority.
They
will try to counter, either by patronizing and humoring you, at first, or, then becoming hostile, moving to have you removed as a disruptive force.
That’s where the rest of your group comes in. They need to back you up, demand answers to your questions. If you have enough people in the room you can cause a major disruption, making it impossible for the facilitator to move forward with his agenda.
Do not walk out and leave the room to him. Stay to the end and make him shut down the meeting.
In Conclusion
These suggestions on how to fight back are, admittedly, very basic and elementary. They are meant only to be a guideline. You will have to do your homework and adapt these tactics to your local situation.
These tactics are designed to create controversy and debate to force the Agenda 21 issue out of the secret meetings and into public debate where they belong.
Many of these same tactics can be used at all levels of government, right up and into national legislation.
Our plan is to demand answers from elected officials who want to ignore us.
They must be taught that such actions have consequences. As we learn new, successful tactics, I’ll share them with activists across the world.
The American Policy Center is now a partner in a new effort to create tactics and provide education to activists called Sustainable Freedom Lab - and hopefully it can serve as a resource for thw eorld, not just America. Here activists can share their findings, successful tactics and research with the rest of the movement.
The exciting news is that, finally, people are starting to understand that Agenda 21 is destroying our nations and they are beginning to fight back. The UN Agenda 21 house of cards is being exposed and it will fall with continued efforts and exposure by the people, and for the people - not just America - Worldwide.
The battle to stop the UN’s Agenda 21 is ragging on the local level across the world.
This document describes nothing less than a global government takeover of every nation across the planet.
The "goals" of this document are nothing more than code words for a corporate-government fascist agenda that will imprison humanity in a devastating cycle of poverty while enriching the world's most powerful globalist corporations like Monsanto and DuPont.
In the interests of helping wake up humanity, I've decided to translate the 17 points of this 2030 agenda so that readers everywhere can understand what this document is really calling for.
To perform this translation, you have to understand how globalists disguise their monopolistic agendas in "feel good" language.
Here's the point-by-point translation. Notice carefully that nowhere does this document state that "achieving human freedom" is one of its goals.
Nor does it explain HOW these goals are to be achieved. As you'll see here, every single point in this UN agenda is to be achieved through centralized government control and totalitarian mandates that resemble communism.
Translation of the UN's "2030 Agenda Blueprint for Globalist Government" (Controlled by Corporate Interests)
Goal 1. End poverty in all its forms everywhere
Translation: Put everyone on government welfare, food stamps, housing subsidies and handouts that make them obedient slaves to global government. Never allow people upward mobility to help themselves.
Instead, teach mass victimization and obedience to a government that provides monthly "allowance" money for basic essentials like food and medicine. Label it "ending poverty."
Goal 2. End hunger, achieve food security and improved nutrition and promote sustainable agriculture
Translation: Invade the entire planet with GMOs and Monsanto's patented seeds while increasing the use of deadly herbicides under the false claim of "increased output" of food crops.
Engineer genetically modified plants to boost specific vitamin chemicals while having no idea of the long-term consequences of genetic pollution or cross-species genetic experiments carried out openly in a fragile ecosystem.
Goal 3. Ensure healthy lives and promote well-being for all at all ages
Translation: Mandate 100+ vaccines for all children and adults at gunpoint, threatening parents with arrest and imprisonment if they refuse to cooperate. Push heavy medication use on children and teens while rolling out "screening" programs. Call mass medication "prevention" programs and claim they improve the health of citizens.
Goal 4. Ensure inclusive and equitable quality education and promote lifelong learning opportunities for all
Translation: Push a false history and a dumbed-down education under "Common Core" education standards that produce obedient workers rather than independent thinkers. Never let people learn real history, or else they might realize they don't want to repeat it.
Goal 5. Achieve gender equality and empower all women and girls
Translation: Criminalize Christianity, marginalize heterosexuality, demonize males and promote the LGBT agenda everywhere. The real goal is never "equality" but rather the marginalization and shaming of anyone who expresses any male characteristics whatsoever.
The ultimate goal is to feminize society, creating widespread acceptance of "gentle obedience" along with the self-weakening ideas of communal property and "sharing" everything.
Because only male energy has the strength to rise up against oppression and fight for human rights, the suppression of male energy is key to keeping the population in a state of eternal acquiescence.
Goal 6. Ensure availability and sustainable management of water and sanitation for all
Translation: Allow powerful corporations to seize control of the world's water supplies and charge monopoly prices to "build new water delivery infrastructure" that "ensures availability."
Goal 7. Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable and modern energy for all
Translation: Penalize coal, gas and oil while pushing doomed-to-fail "green" energy subsidies to brain-dead startups headed by friends of the White House who all go bankrupt in five years or less.
The green startups make for impressive speeches and media coverage, but because these companies are led by corrupt idiots rather than capable entrepreneurs, they always go broke. (And the media hopes you don't remember all the fanfare surrounding their original launch.)
Goal 8. Promote sustained, inclusive and sustainable economic growth, full and productive employment and decent work for all
Translation: Regulate small business out of existence with government-mandated minimum wages that bankrupt entire sectors of the economy. Force employers to meet hiring quotas of LGBT workers while mandating wage tiers under a centrally planned work economy dictated by the government. Destroy free market economics and deny permits and licenses to those companies that don't obey government dictates.
Goal 9.) Build resilient infrastructure, promote inclusive and sustainable industrialization and foster innovation
Translation: Put nations into extreme debt with the World Bank, spending debt money to hire corrupt American corporations to build large-scale infrastructure projects that trap developing nations in an endless spiral of debt.
See the book Confessions of an Economic Hit Man by John Perkins to understand the details of how this scheme has been repeated countless times over the last several decades.
Goal 10. Reduce inequality within and among countries
Translation: Punish the rich, the entrepreneurs and the innovators, confiscating nearly all gains by those who choose to work and excel. Redistribute the confiscated wealth to the masses of non-working human parasites that feed off a productive economy while contributing nothing to it... all while screaming about "equality!"
Goal 11. Make cities and human settlements inclusive, safe, resilient and sustainable
Translation: Ban all gun ownership by private citizens, concentrating guns into the hands of obedient government enforcers who rule over an unarmed, enslaved class of impoverished workers.
Criminalize living in most rural areas by instituting Hunger Games-style "protected areas" which the government will claim are owned by "the People" even though no people are allowed to live there. Force all humans into densely packed, tightly controlled cities where they are under 24/7 surveillance and subject to easy manipulation by government.
Goal 12. Ensure sustainable consumption and production patterns
Translation: Begin levying punitive taxes on the consumption of fossil fuels and electricity, forcing people to live under conditions of worsening standards of living that increasingly resemble Third World conditions.
Use social influence campaigns in TV, movies and social media to shame people who use gasoline, water or electricity, establishing a social construct of ninnies and tattlers who rat out their neighbors in exchange for food credit rewards.
Goal 13. Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts
Translation: Set energy consumption quotas on each human being and start punishing or even criminalizing "lifestyle decisions" that exceed energy usage limits set by governments. Institute total surveillance of individuals in order to track and calculate their energy consumption.
Penalize private vehicle ownership and force the masses onto public transit, where TSA grunts and facial recognition cameras can monitor and record the movement of every person in society, like a scene ripped right out of Minority Report.
Goal 14. Conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas and marine resources for sustainable development
Translation: Ban most ocean fishing, plunging the food supply into an extreme shortage and causing runaway food price inflation that puts even more people into economic desperation.
Criminalize the operation of private fishing vessels and place all ocean fishing operations under the control of government central planning. Only allow favored corporations to conduct ocean fishing operations (and make this decision based entirely on which corporations give the most campaign contributions to corrupt lawmakers).
Goal 15. Protect, restore and promote sustainable use of terrestrial ecosystems, sustainably manage forests, combat desertification, and halt and reverse land degradation and halt biodiversity loss
Translation: Roll out Agenda 21 and force humans off the land and into controlled cities. Criminalize private land ownership, including ranches and agricultural tracts. Tightly control all agriculture through a corporate-corrupted government bureaucracy whose policies are determined almost entirely by Monsanto while being rubber-stamped by the USDA.
Ban woodstoves, rainwater collection and home gardening in order to criminalize self-reliance and force total dependence on government.
Goal 16. Promote peaceful and inclusive societies for sustainable development, provide access to justice for all and build effective, accountable and inclusive institutions at all levels
Translation: Grant legal immunity to illegal aliens and "protected" minority groups, which will be free to engage in any illegal activity -- including openly calling for the mass murder of police officers -- because they are the new protected class in society. "Inclusive institutions" means granting favorable tax structures and government grants to corporations that hire LGBT workers or whatever groups are currently in favor with the central planners in government.
Use government agencies to selectively punish unfavorable groups with punitive audits and regulatory harassment, all while ignoring the criminal activities of favored corporations that are friends of the political elite.
Goal 17. Strengthen the means of implementation and revitalize the global partnership for sustainable development
Translation: Enact global trade mandates that override national laws while granting unrestricted imperialism powers to companies like Monsanto, Dow Chemical, RJ Reynolds, Coca-Cola and Merck.
Pass global trade pacts that bypass a nation's lawmakers and override intellectual property laws to make sure the world's most powerful corporations maintain total monopolies over drugs, seeds, chemicals and technology. Nullify national laws and demand total global obedience to trade agreements authored by powerful corporations and rubber-stamped by the UN.
Total enslavement of the planet by 2030 As the UN document says, "We commit ourselves to working tirelessly for the full implementation of this Agenda by 2030."
If you read the full document and can read beyond the fluffery and public relations phrases, you'll quickly realize that this UN agenda is going to be forced upon all the citizens of the world through the invocation of government coercion.
Nowhere does this document state that the rights of the individual will be protected.
Nor does it even acknowledge the existence of human rights granted to individuals by the Creator.
Even the so-called "Universal Declaration of Human Rights" utterly denies individuals the right to self defense, the right to medical choice and the right to parental control over their own children.
The UN is planning nothing less than a global government tyranny that enslaves all of humanity while calling the scheme "sustainable development" and "equality."
1984 has finally arrived. And of course it's all being rolled out under the fraudulent label of "progress."
However, it is not too late. Awareness is required before action may be taken.
It Turns Out Assange Wasn't Kidding & NWO Hyper-Desperate Attempts To Manage Clinton Train Wreck
October 16 2016 | From: MadMimi / Various
It turns out Assange wasn't kidding. He is delivering tranches of 1,000 or so hacked emails a day from major political organisations and politicians.
The Anti NWO Legions worldwide are going wild with the new revelations. I am totally amazed. It's like going to a carnival where suddenly you get to see all the clowns acting out the games you've only vaguely been told about and a whole lot more.
Some of the emails are some of the missing 30,000 emails which Hillary Clinton had scrubbed off her illegal home servers.
They include classified documents (totally illegal), declarations of her true intents to finish the job of stripping away all border authority and regulations from the U.S. Government, as well as handling over all economic regulatory functions to mysterious international cartels of unknown people and demonstrations of collusion with Ivy League academics to keep the U.S. population complacent, obedient and ignorant (the Orwellian program for mass tyranny).
Collectively some of these emails clearly demonstrate that:
Every statement ever made by Hillary Clinton about her scrubbed emails and illegal servers was a lie. She never told the truth a single time about any of it. She lied to Congress, the FBI, the Mass Media, the public and minimally should end up with a 20 year sentence (but watch Obama attempt to "pardon" her on his last day in office).
Ditto Libya and Syria. Clinton is the chief warwhore in the visible U.S. government officialdom other than Obama, who supported and managed high level arrangements to take these countries down, make them failed states and create a refugee flux into Turkey and Europe. She was number two in the chain of command and is directly responsible.
"Hillary for Prison" is exactly right and that is exactly how she will end.
A million people by rights ought to show up at the next presidential debate wearing Hillary For Prison t-shirts and V face masks. They should loudly demand that the FBI immediately arrest her and her crony FBI director for High Crimes and Misdemeanors.
Fortunately, Trump halfway rose to how he needs to be on Sunday night. He began to use some of the Assange Ammunition and he is now daily making more and more use of it. His campaign is really just beginning.
Trump powerhouse advertising is now just starting to hit through the mass media. It is going to get pretty intense.
And very weird. The Assange document dumps also clearly demonstrate that most of Hillary's "appearances" are now just staged promos with hired actors.
She no longer apparently has the stamina to travel nor the tolerance to deal with live audiences, which attract so few people they are easy to disrupt. So the entire campaign she is now running is entirely fake and is completely dependent on the televised debates to provide her with a sense of presence with a powerful, presidential personality.
That and advertising but her promo people do not know how to connect with where the audience, the public, is going. More important than advertising is the clear revelation that most of the major mass media organizations and personalities are literally taking their directions about what to say about her and how and when directly from the Clintons.
In other words, the NWO shadow government has given the Clintons virtual "Goebbels-like" diktat over the U.S. Mass Media. Clinton even gave diktat to the New York Times.
They now have a serious problem on their heads. The gofers and busybees who produce the content of the Mass Media now know without a doubt that everything being said is "collusive", coordinated, bullyboy crap.
They are now being hit daily with the real truth and they can no longer deny they are riding with gangsters who have nothing to say except more lies from the CIA factory. This is going to induce huge stress and confusion in the operations and content of the Mass Media.
I suspect that it is going to be psychological malfunction which brings down the entire stinking NWO edifice.
Anderson Cooper and his cohorts in all the Warcast Media are as naked as it gets. Less than 10% of the population believe what they say. By the end of this month it will be less than 1%.
The people are not happy
Can you imagine standing in a newsroom in New York reading a CIA-scripted or Hillary-scripted concoction of half truths with the clear knowledge that 95% of your audience thinks you are a lying sack of jackass crap?
The lights are going out on the Warcast Media and I suspect that some individuals will blow their programs, melt their fuses and begin to blabber incessantly about the corruptions.
Obama Decries 'Wild West' [Independent] Media Landscape
October 16 2016 | From: Yahoo
President Barack Obama on Thursday decried America's "wild, wild west" media environment for allowing conspiracy theorists a broad platform and destroying a common basis for debate.
Comment: Oh my, the establishment are having a wee cry now. They are not in carte-blanche control of the news media anymore.
Recalling past days when three television channels delivered fact-based news that most people trusted, Obama said democracy require citizens to be able to sift through lies and distortions.
"We are going to have to rebuild within this wild-wild-west-of-information flow some sort of curating function that people agree to," Obama said at an innovation conference in Pittsburgh.
"There has to be, I think, some sort of way in which we can sort through information that passes some basic truthiness tests and those that we have to discard, because they just don't have any basis in anything that's actually happening in the world," Obama added.
His remarks came amid an election campaign that has seen Republican candidate Donald Trump repeat ideas and take on key staff from right-wing media outlets.
They also come at the end of an eight-year presidency in which Obama has been plagued by false scandals over his place of birth that have forced him to play media-critic-in-chief.
For much of that time, Republicans and Democrats -- which their own media sources -- could rarely agree on even the most basic facts to build a debate.
"That is hard to do, but I think it's going to be necessary, it's going to be possible," he added.
"The answer is obviously not censorship, but it's creating places where people can say 'this is reliable' and I'm still able to argue safely about facts and what we should do about it."
Anyone can read between the lines here. They are desperate for something they are not going to get...
The Global Financial System Is About To Shift: Part II
October 15 2016 | From: TheMindUnleashed Part 2 is a continuation from Part 1, which is a Mind Unleashed exclusive interview with Neil Keenan, the man who is working to open the Global Collateral Accounts.
These accounts are arguably the banking cabal’s deepest secret in regards to planetary wealth and relates to historical events like the Bretton Woods Agreement and JFK trying to end the Federal Reserve.
Q: You’ve stated in some of your updates that you’re working with multiple intelligence agencies, presidents and prime ministers. Can you go into more detail on that for us without divulging things that can’t yet be said?
I will not reveal any name or agency. My team knows who they are and that is all that matters at this time.
Q: Some people say that Sukarno’s son is M1 and that he is working to open the accounts. Is that true? How does Edy Seno fit into this picture?
There are many people who make many claims about opening the accounts and they have done so for many years in which they have not completed one legal deal.
They are told to return home when they fly to Hong Kong or England attempting to cash things in.
Their great successes happened with illegal transactions whereas the Governmental Corporations steadily utilized the assets for their own personal needs.
The Elders have been rightful in illegally utilizing some of the global currencies or gold considering that they have not been paid one cent to this very day for providing the assets with security and safety.
The Elders have placed their own lives on the line for many years with some of them having either been killed or imprisoned and for what? Protecting the humanitarian assets!
The rightful depositors will not hesitate in granting some sort of stipend for doing a great job under extreme pressure once they are opened. I will see to it.
One final note here. If there is a Sukarno in charge then one simple question answers all this: Who does the Sukarno Trust belong to? It is not a Sukarno! It is Edy Seno.
Neil Keenan with Edy Seno in Indonesia
He is the heir to the Sukarno Trust due to his fathers and family’s allegiances to President Sukarno during his reign and the West is attempting to steal all his assets if possible.
Edy is real and secure in his ways and feels very humble and sorry that he has not been able to open the accounts for humanity seeing the accounts, as stated, are owned by the depositors that being the Dragon Family.
On the other hand Edy has many real assets belonging to the trusts but the West has shut him down with hopes of utilizing the assets themselves. Nothing has ever been returned to the East. Soon, when things open up the West will receive humanitarian packages issued by a professional team of people but the East will get their’s as well.
No more thievery and or slavery.
We can stop the Globalist movement and we absolutely will once we get things going. UBS, Credit Suisse, HSBC (already being cleaned up by the family and & Sister. Do not play with Sister she is one piece of big banking knowledge) and others like the EU, the Federal Reserve and THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA corporation will be exposed soon – should they not adhere to the new found principles of fairness and honesty.
In November of 2011 I was issued a deed of Authorization and Agreement from Dr. Edy Seno Soekanto, who was sworn in to be the “legal heir of record as stated” in the last will and testament of the late legal holder of the Family Inheritance Guarantee, as attached to all the gold deposits.
This was ordered by President Sukarno between 1948 and 1968 when he was granted such Inheritance Guarantee as payment for his services to the World.
Dr. Soekanto swears that President Sukarno [often also spelt 'Soekarno'] had designated to him the collection all those funds known as the Family Inheritance Guarantee and the accumulated interest thereon, and that he has “been acknowledged by depository bank, as evidenced by the bank instruments, books, record and ledgers and codes in his possession, as the sole recognized heir to.”
Under this agreement, and because of his “severe and long-term chronic illness,” Dr. Soekanto granted me [Neil Keenan] the authority to act as one of his Attorneys in Fact: "To act jointly and/or severally and to undertake all means and methods to recover the funds owing to him and the People of Indonesia.”
Presidents Soekarno and Kennedy
Dr. Soekanto has further agreed and confirmed that he also holds the “full secret Book of Codes,” “The Maklumat Book and Ledgers and all records of the accounts” as delivered to him and that, upon their request, he will “deliver or cause delivery of the originals of such books for presentment any court determined to have such jurisdiction” and “for any other purpose” I may require or need for the Books.
I have custody of certified copies of the said Book of Codes, The Maklumat Book and Ledgers, and with his POA, authorization to use them when needed. Copies were given to others for safekeeping under my direction.
Q: Some organizations have come out in what appears to be an attack on you and your mission Neil. OPPT is one that comes to mind. What is OPPT and who were they working for?
I have no reason to speak of OPPT ever again. We spent time, effort and money exposing them and they disappeared. They are literally nothing more than a Cabal shill effort no matter where they hide.
They, Swiss Indo, Red Dragons, Karen Hudes (Hades) and others have no say and are worthless. If you wish to see what happened between any of the above and Neil Keenan and Group K please go to neilkeenan.com and look into the archives and you will see how we dealt with such matters.
Q: How come more bankers or politicians do not speak of the global collateral accounts? What percentage of those “in the know” actually know that these accounts exist?
Let’s be very clear about this point. The higher levels know very well about this matter and they used to play with the notes daily, gambling them away. Imagine gambling with someone else’s money when it does not matter if you win or lose. This is what they did at the higher levels. The ones that have spoken about it have been killed or “suicided”(thrown off roofs most likely amongst other things)
Would you speak of it? This is why those in the know, no matter which side of the fence they reside on, are following my moves as close as you could imagine.
Q: Once open, what will these accounts be used for? Will free energy projects be involved too? Which ones are in mind? Are you working with people/organizations/government who can bring these technologies out to the masses?
The GCA have been allocated (by The Dragon Family) to be used for humanitarian purposes. Virtually any positive development that one can imagine that will benefit the people of this world and our environment will fall within the scope of this mandate.
This will clearly require the removal of those comprising the entity known as the “Cabal” and their enslavement of humanity both financially and otherwise, and the ending of their legacy of control, depopulation and environmental destruction.
By definition this includes the release of free energy technologies along with thousands of other beneficial technologies that have been suppressed, some of which for well over a century.
I am in contact with researchers and developers who have very advanced technologies which are waiting to be released, once it is safe and practicable to do so.
Q: How much gold and metals actually exist in these accounts? Will this help to transform our financial system?
The amount of mined and processed gold is vastly underreported. There exists almost 14 times more gold bullion than is acknowledged in terms of the status quo line on the topic.
In short, what this means is that there are far more physical assets with tangible value than are required to back our global currencies and to fund the remediation of every issue that we face in our world.
Q: After the accounts are open, what is expected to happen in the following 3 months initially? The following year after they are opened?
I have no idea how long it is going to take to set things up. It will not be an easy job and it will involve the people of the planet and fixing things that have been broken by the West in their attempts towards taking over the Planet with their Globalist policies. I am sure not so long, although we will surely find out!
Q: What role is the BRICS playing in resetting the financial and political systems of the world?
BRICS is doing what I (Group K) proposed years ago by holding the Monaco Accords and as well pushing for an Eastern Financial System (think BRICS Bank, Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank, etc.).
All the ideas were there and they utilized them to get to where they are but they can be financially stronger and will be in the very near future.
Q: What role specifically is Vladimir Putin playing? Is he helping humanity?
Yes. If either Vladimir Putin / Russia and or China turned their heads for one week it would be the end of the West as we know it. They are what keeps us alive and standing in terms of maintaining balance. One slip and the West (whose leaders do not represent we the people) will come down to the point where we will have to “release the Kraken.”
Exposé On Cabal-Driven Worldwide Terrorism Implemented By The United States And It's Allies
October 15 2016 | From: Sott / GlobalResearch / Various J. Michael Springmann worked for the State Department in the 1980s, in Saudi Arabia. What he witnessed and experienced did not make much sense at the time, but what he later learned put it all in context, and helped to explain the entire course of U.S. foreign policy for the next 30 years.
In short, just as the CIA provided funding and training for radical Mujahideen to fight the Soviets in Afghanistan, they have been doing the same thing ever since. Prior to 9/11, this legion of foreign fighters was used to destabilize and destroy Yugoslavia. Afterward, Iraq, Libya, and today Syria.
For this entire period of time, al-Qaeda has been a fighting force for America, a fact that has been known for years, but which is only now going mainstream due to American failures and Russian successes in Syria.
Today, we interview Mr. Springmann about his time at the consulate in Jeddah, and the events that led him to blow the whistle and expose the reality of the U.S.'s creation and support of terrorism around the globe.
In the second hour of the show, we discussed the latest Trump and Clinton leaks, and how they reveal what everyone should have already known: politicians are two-faced and corrupt, and fairly unsavory individuals. Brent closed the show with another Police State Round-up on police un-accountability.
Since the United States was founded in 1776, she has been at war during 214 out of her 235 calendar years of existence. In other words, there were only 21 calendar years in which the U.S. did not wage any wars.
To put this in perspective:
Pick any year since 1776 and there is a bout a 91% chance that America was involved in some war during that calendar year.
No U.S. president truly qualifies as a peacetime president. Instead, all U.S. presidents can technically be considered “war presidents.”
The U.S. has never gone a decade without war.
The Americans Stand on Our Side and Give us Weapons - Jabhat al-Nusra (Al Qaeda) Commander in Syria
US weapons are being delivered to Al-Nusra Front by governments that Washington supports, a militant commander has told German media. RT discusses the interview with Jürgen Todenhöfer, the journalist who spoke to the Al-Nusra commander.
The CIA has been coordinating weapon deliveries on the Turkey-Syria border, German journalist Jurgen Todenhofer, who recently spoke with a Jabhat al-Nusra commander, told RT. He added that the US knows that the weapons it delivers to rebels end up with terrorists.
“This is a game everybody knows. It’s very clear that the Americans know that their weapons will in the end be in the hands of terrorists,” Todenhofer said speaking to RT.
The only time in the U.S. went five years without war (1935-40) was during the isolationist period of the Great Depression.
In most of these wars, the U.S. was on the offense. Admit- tedly some of the wars were defensive. However, the above list leaves out covert CIA operations and other acts which could be considered war.
Let’s update what’s happened since 2011:
2012 – War on Terror in Afghanistan, Iraq, Somalia, Syria and Yemen
2013 – War on Terror in Afghanistan, Iraq, Somalia, Syria and Yemen
2014 – War on Terror in Afghanistan, Iraq, Somalia, Syria and Yemen; Civil War in Ukraine 2015 – War on Terror in Somalia, Syria and Yemen; Civil War in Ukraine
So we can add four more years of war. That means that for 222 out of 239 years – or 93% of the time – America has been at war. (We can quibble with the exact numbers, but the high percentage of time that America has been at war is clear and unmistakable.)
Indeed, most of the military operations launched since World War II have been launched by the U.S. And Ameri- can military spending dwarfs the rest of the world put together.
No wonder polls show that the world believes America is the number 1 threat to peace. Sott Comment: Rather staggering, don’t you think? Also, for many of the war years, the US had multiple opponents. After all this war practice, we might rightly expect a simple bombing raid on ISIS to produce results.
America’s history reflects violence. It’s blood-drenched. It glorifies war. It does so in the name of peace. However, this agenda is not driven by the American people so much as it is driven from up on high by the Cabal leadership who manipulate the sleeping masses to buy into actions that only appear to be "American".
The US / NATO is the tool and the scapegoat of the 'global elite's' New World Order.
America believes war is peace. It’s part of the national culture. Eventually it’s self-destructive. Today’s super-weapons make the unthinkable possible.
Hyman Rickover knew. He knew decades ago. He founded America’s nuclear navy. In 1982, he told Congress:
“I do not believe that nuclear power is worth it if it creates radiation.” Then you might ask me why do I have nuclear powered ships?”
“That is a necessary evil. I would sink them all. I am not proud of the part I played in it. I did it because it was necessary for the safety of this country.”
That’s why I am such a great exponent of stopping this whole nonsense of war. Unfortunately limits – attempts to limit war have always failed.”
“The lesson of history is when a war starts every nation will ultimately use whatever weapon it has available.”
“Every time you produce radiation, you produce something that has a certain half-life, in some cases for billions of years.”
“I think the human race is going to wreck itself, and it is important that we get control of this horrible force and try to eliminate it.”
In his Der Ring des Nibelungen operas (the Ring), Richard Wagner portrayed his apocalyptic version. He did so musically. Gotterdammerung (Twilight of the Gods) prophesied the end of the world.
Einstein feared it. He didn’t know what WW III weapons would be used. He said “World War IV will be fought with sticks and stones.”
Bertrand Russell was an Einstein contemporary. He knew. He warned. No one listened. He asked:
“Shall we put an end to the human race, or shall mankind renounce war. It’s the only way to live in peace. The alternative is annihilation."
The choice is clear. The wrong one assures disaster. America’s heading humanity toward it. A slow-motion train wreck looms. The big one. There’s no second chance. There’s no coming back.
Historian Harry Elmer Barnes (1889 – 1968) once said:
“If trends continue as they have during the last fifteen years, we shall soon reach this point of no return, and can only anticipate interminable wars, disguised as noble gestures for peace.”
Historian Arnold Toynbee worried about WW III. Only pigmies in remote jungles, apes and ants might be left to carry on “the cultural traditions of mankind,” he said.
America wages permanent wars. It does so against enemies it creates. During the Cold War, Active Defense and AirLand Battle prepared strategies for how America would fight.
Soviet Russia was targeted. Today’s it’s modern day Russia. It’s China. AirSea Battle targets both countries. More on that below.
In 1998, US Space Command: Vision for 2020 discussed America’s grand strategy.
In 2000, DOD Joint Vision 2020 called for “full spectrum dominance” over all land, surface and sub-surface sea, air, space, electromagnetic spectrum and information systems.
It did so with enough overwhelming power to fight and win global wars against any adversary. Nuclear and other mass destruction weapons would be used preemptively.
In 1961, General Curtis LeMay believed nuclear war with Soviet Russia was inevitable. He wanted thousands of missiles launched preemptively. He called retaliation against major US cities a small price to pay.
At the same time, General Lyman Lemnitzer urged a surprise nuclear attack strategy. Jack Kennedy expressed disgust. He walked out of a National Security Council meeting. He wanted none of it.
He told Secretary of State Dean Rusk: “And we call ourselves the human race.”
Secretary of Defense McNamara categorically rejected LeMay and Lemnitzer. He should have fired them on the spot. Other extremists then and later urged the same lunacy.
Crazies have great influence today. Today’s weapons make earlier ones look like toys. Armageddon could happen. Rogue states can’t be trusted. America most of all.
Eisenhower warned;
“Against the acquisition of unwarranted influence.” He named the military-industrial complex.
“The potential for the disastrous rise of misplaced power exists and will persist,” he stressed.
Militarism writ large is the national pastime. It’s a national addiction. The business of America is war. It’s multiple wars. It’s permanent ones. It’s ravaging one nation after another.
It’s doing so for wealth, power, resource control, and unchallenged global dominance.
Armed Drones: President Obama's Favorite Weapon
President Barack Obama has received much credit for drawing down American involvement in Iraq and Afghanistan, but less attention has been paid to his administration's embrace of armed drones.
His expansion of covert drone strikes goes far beyond that of former President George W. Bush, and has blurred the line between warfare and assassination.
The classified processes used by the White House for approving these remote killings in foreign countries - countries which the U.S. is not officially at war with - has people questioning not only the Obama administration's tactics, but also the collateral damage of civilian casualties left in its wake.
America never was the “land of the free and home of the brave.” It’s a war on humanity society. It’s a “let ‘em eat cake” one.
It’s an out-of-control rogue state. It’s ideologically over-the-top. It spends more on militarism and wars than the rest of the world combined.
Doing so lets war profiteers gorge themselves at the public trough. Doing so makes peace impossible. Warrior nations eventually self-destruct. Nations that live by the sword die by it. America’s no exception.
“Is designed to develop force over the long-term. (It) seeks to provide decision makers with a wide range of options to counter aggression from hostile actors.
It targets China and Russia. It “reflects the US commitment to maintaining escalation advantage during conflict and sustaining security and prosperity in the global commons.
It’s “interoperable air and naval forces that can execute networked, integrated attacks-in-depth to disrupt, destroy, and defeat enemy anti-access area denial capabilities.”
“The Pentagon has concluded that the time has come to prepare for with China, and in a manner well beyond crafting the sort of contingency plans that are expected for with a wide range of possible confrontations,” he said.
"It’s a “momentous decision. It hasn’t received proper attention. America’s posture is largely Pentagon driven.
It stands out even more prominently because (a) the change in military posture may well lead to an arms race with China, which could culminate in a nuclear war; and (b) the economic condition of the United States requires a reduction in military spending, not a new arms race.”
“The start of a new term, and with it the appointment of new secretaries of State and Defense, provides an opportunity to review the United States’ China strategy and the military’s role in it.”
“This review is particularly important before the new preparations for war move from an operational concept to a militarization program that includes ordering high-cost weapons systems and forced restructuring.”
“History shows that once these thresholds are crossed, it is exceedingly difficult to change course.”
In September 2001, Congress approved the Authorization for Use of Military Force (AUMF). It did so for “the use of United States Armed Forces against those responsible for the recent attacks launched against the United States.”
Carte blanche war-making authority was granted. America’s war on terror began. It’s waged on humanity. It does so out of control. It targets manufactured enemies at home and abroad.
It calls independent nations existential threats. Russia and China are targeted. They represent America’s [The Cabal New World Order's] final battleground.
Challenging them risks WW III. Obama’s no peacemaker. He’s a cold-blooded warrior. They threatens humanity’s survival. His 2010 Nuclear Posture Review (NPR) reflects Bush era strategy.
It’s old wine in new bottles. It “reserves the right” to use nuclear weapons preemptively. America’s only enemies are ones it invents. Peace is verboten. So is disarmament. They’re both non-starters.
Washington targets more nations to destroy. It invents reasons for doing so. It threatens humanity in the process. Preemptive nuclear war assures it. America’s lunatic fringe may launch what cooler heads deplore. Elements in it have mushroom shaped cloud delusions.
Nuclear war assures turning planet earth into an uninhabited wasteland. Toxic proliferation already is destroying life slowly.
WHO Publishes Strategies For EU Healthcare Professionals To Convince Vaccine Deniers Vaccines Are Safe + News On Vaccine Safety Reveals Rampant Corruption October 14 2016 | From: NaturalBlaze / AustralianNationalReview Vaccines are taking a big hit on the refusal side from more and more people doing their due diligence and becoming more fully engaged in knowing what supposedly ‘safe’ vaccines really are about: Fraud and deceit on the part of the U.S. CDC and FDA, plus vested-interest ‘tobacco science’ from Big Pharma and vaccine manufacturers publishing falsified research and data, who ‘export’ their brand of pseudoscience.
Nothing confirms that more than the documentary movie VAXXED currently making the rounds in local movie theaters and on the Internet.
In view of the all the developing negative vaccine research and adverse health issues, the World Health Organization (WHO) apparently is trying to come to vaccines’ rescue by publishing the 44 page 2016 document, “How to respond to vocal vaccine deniers in public”.
What I found most amazing and ironically ‘curious’, if not pathetic, is the information on page 34 in Chapter 6 “How to Protect Yourself,” referring to the healthcare professional who is encouraged to go out and spread the vaccine ‘gospel’. Paradoxically, the WHO makes the following statement:
"Remember …
You have the right to say ‘No’. Your personal safety comes first. Consider the context and time of the discussion, and weigh up whether it is safe for you to take part.
Your mind stores thousands of pieces of information which it uses to warn you that something is wrong. Trust your instincts when you feel uncomfortable, get away from whatever situation you are in. You will only know if you were wrong if you ignore your instincts – is it worth the risk?"
Apparently, WHO believe doctors have the right of personal safety first, but what are the rights of innocent infants, toddlers, teens and adults from being forced to be vaccinated immediately after birth and into adulthood with Big Pharma’s “poison needles”?
“Trust your instincts when you feel uncomfortable, get away from whatever situation you are in,” is excellent advice to parents when being badgered about vaccines, I offer.
However, the WHO thinks that only applies to medical proselytizers and not those who are bullied into taking vaccines or else suffer untold consequences like your families are discharged from their medical practices! Or, how about having Child Protective Services showing up at a refuser’s front door?
The WHO apparently has concerns about security threats to healthcare professionals from vaccine refusers. I wonder why, especially when children have been damaged for life and parents are getting extremely fed up with how they are treated by the medical and legal professions, healthcare regulatory bodies especially in the USA, e.g., CDC, FDA, state and local health agencies and even school districts.
On page 6 of that report, we see the Goal stated as:
"Make the public audience more resilient against anti-vaccine statements and stories; support the vaccine hesitants in their vaccine acceptance decision."
Readers need to read page 9: how the WHO defines various members of the anti-vaccine movement. However, the WHO does not say anything about all the fines and ethical problems leveled against the pharmaceutical industry because of its inherent bad business practices that have evolved into class action lawsuits and billion-dollar fines from the U.S. CDC / FDA!
What is it that the WHO doesn’t seem to be getting about the problems with the pharmaceutical industry for which it apparently is one of its key promoters?
Personally, I just love this remark on page 15:
"Remember, you are presenting the scientific consensus."
And that sad statement is KEY, since the REAL science is totally different than consensus science!
Consensus science is that which researchers agree to lie about or withhold data about or even discard data into a trash can about, e.g., MMR vaccine-Autism connection and CDC whistleblower William Thompson, PhD, admission or perform incorrect vaccine trials, e.g., placing aluminum adjuvant into control subjects’ vaccines, when those vaccines should be adjuvant-free!
That’s consensus science!
Scientific consensus ignores scientific studies, especially when it comes to vaccine ingredients, or so it really seems. My book Vaccination Voodoo, What YOU Don’t Know About Vaccinesdiscusses most of the toxic ingredients in vaccines from what scientific studies have found those ingredients are capable of doing as published in peer review literature.
It’s not what I have made up; it’s what published scientific journal articles say about neurotoxins, aluminum in as many as four formulations, ethylmercury (Thimerosal) that’s still found in trace amounts in many vaccines given to infants (YES, that’s a real FACT), formaldehyde / Formalin, dangerous polysorbate 80 that’s been shown to cause infertility in animal studies plus other problems, sodium borate plus a “shopping list” of ingredients such as foreign DNA from animals like monkeys-mouse brain-cattle-insects, including human diploid cells (a line of aborted fetal cells).
Let me not forget to mention mycoplasmas and genetically modified organisms. How can all that ‘scientific’ crap be injected into a less than 25 pound infant and no health damages occur, especially to their not-fully-developed immune system?
Something is terribly wrong with consensus science when it has to bully others into taking harmful products! The WHO apparently recognizes that and is trying to do ‘damage control’ for the next pandemic that probably is in the wings. Here’s a hint: Zika. Or, the refugee crisis in the EU.
On page 22 we read the admonition to;
"Emphasize high safety instead of low risk."
How ridiculous a mantra, when each vaccine package insert [2] recites contraindications and adverse events, including Guillain-Barré syndrome. But then, it’s consensus science not to tell patients that information as their right under fully informed consent.
On page 23, proselytizers are cautioned about telling the truth. However, the WHO does not tell them how to keep their noses from growing two feet long or what’s called the Pinocchio syndrome.
On page 24, WHO reiterates the sorry mantra about consensus science:
"11. Underline scientific consensus
Research in the area of climate change shows that the belief in a scientific fact increases when consensus is highlighted [60][30]. However, identifying a scientific consensus requires a thorough understanding of the specific area of interest and a layperson will not gain that knowledge all by himself [61].
Therefore, highlighting the scientific consensus in public is a powerful tool to transfer essential scientific knowledge and increase belief in a scientific fact, especially when presented in a simple and short message [62][63]."
Underline scientific consensus with regard to vaccine safety and efficacy.
Boy, has WHO really placed itself precariously out on the credibility limb it’s sawing off when it includes climate change as scientific fact.
With weather geoengineering, Solar Radiation Management, “chemtrails,” HAARPs around the globe and the information about “smart clouds” I discussed that’s in the U.S. Air Force report about owning the weather by 2025 in my article “What’s Up With the Newest Presidential Executive Order?”, WHO ought to be embarrassed beyond embarrassment, plus be regarded as the Illuminati’s toady it apparently is.
WHO wants proselytizers to “Emphasize social benefits of vaccines.” Does that mean that ‘herd immunity’ is not discussed for what it really is - treating humans like cattle? What are the social benefits of vaccines when lives and families are damaged?
When there is total denial by doctors and others with almost no recourse at law in the USA because the U.S. Congress disenfranchised healthcare consumers’ rights by giving vaccine manufacturers a “get out of jail free” card from any legal and financial liability for product damage from vaccines?
But things are different in the European Union where lawsuits are being filed against vaccine manufacturers, and thus one of the probable reasons for WHO’s “How to respond…” report.
How about the “Algorithm of how to respond” on page 29! Studying that algorithm should give everyone some clever hints on how to respond to the proselytizers, I think.
The WHO’s bibliography of References ought to be studied as a strategy ‘play book’ to use in beating them at their own game regarding vaccine consensus science, I offer. There are 51 member states in the European Union. The recent manufactured refugee crisis in the EU probably is of much concern to WHO, since many refugees obviously will need to be convinced to take those poison needles.
News On Vaccine Safety Reveals Rampant Corruption
When people hear about life threatening conditions such as seizure, cardiovascular ailments and encephalitis, the first thing that comes to their minds is viruses. These are the harmful side effects of Gardasil, an HPV vaccine that are given to 9-year-old children.
There are many more vaccines that pose similar health dangers that are being given to children.
NaturalNews Talk Hour reveals the harmful side effects of vaccination with PhD scholars Judy Mikovits and Jonathan Landsman that our government doesn’t want you to know.
Dr Mikovits feels that the possibility of latent viruses released into the system in the form of vaccines can be unleashed due to the response of dendritic cells in our body, which release inflammatory messages to cytokines, triggering inflammation. She terms this response as ‘cytokine storm’.
The Shocking Truth About Mandatory Vaccines Revealed
This response of the body could lead to permanent damage to the body’s immune system, which would ultimately lead to a lifetime of diseases.
The body can have very severe effects from vaccination, a phenomenon known as ‘vaccine injuries’. Diseases like myalgic encephalomyelitis, postural orthostatic tachycardia syndrome, autism and polycystic ovarian syndrome can also be caused by vaccine injuries.
The government has always hidden the harmful effects of vaccination on the grounds of coincidence or no specific reason. Some members of the health administration have even gone as far as saying that the after effects of vaccination are actually psychogenic in nature.
Dr Mikovits’ new publication, ‘Plague’, draws to the many responses that the government have, or have had for vaccine side effects.
The side effects aren’t just caused by the antigens present in the vaccines. The additives used in most vaccines to trigger immune response are also very toxic in nature and are equally harmful to our system, if not more.
The alternative media is flooded with the singular admission of a whistleblower at the CDC that lab results were faked. The alternative media is flooded with 127 papers on the connection of thimerosal with autism.
Here we have a 188 page document with nothing but references to articles DATING BACK TO 1926 WHEN ALUMINUM WAS FIRST USED AS AN ADJUVANT IN VACCINES to the present day with a bloom that was noticed in articles around 1999 when Scientific American had an article called GENETIC VACCINES as noted in my book Timeline.
What we are talking about here makes the recent British expose on the cover-up of vaccine science look like neighborhood kids playing in the sandbox.
Borax, a sodium compound present in vaccines, depletes important micronutrients from the body such as zinc, magnesium and calcium. Dr Mikovits also reveals that vaccinations should not be given to children under 3 years, as it affects brain development.
Dr Mikovits is a pioneer in the field of immunology and a PhD scholar from George Washington University.
The Federal Reserve Cartel: The Eight Families + 7 Not-So-Secret Homes Of Super Secret Societies
October 14 2016 | From: GlobalResearch / AtlasObscura The Four Horsemen of Banking (Bank of America, JP Morgan Chase, Citigroup and Wells Fargo) own the Four Horsemen of Oil (Exxon Mobil, Royal Dutch/Shell, BP and Chevron Texaco); in tandem with Deutsche Bank, BNP, Barclays and other European old money behemoths. But their monopoly over the global economy does not end at the edge of the oil patch.
According to company 10K filings to the SEC, the Four Horsemen of Banking are among the top ten stock holders of virtually every Fortune 500 corporation.
So who then are the stockholders in these money center banks?
This information is guarded much more closely. My queries to bank regulatory agencies regarding stock ownership in the top 25 US bank holding companies were given Freedom of Information Act status, before being denied on “national security” grounds. This is rather ironic, since many of the bank’s stockholders reside in Europe.
One important repository for the wealth of the global oligarchy that owns these bank holding companies is US Trust Corporation – founded in 1853 and now owned by Bank of America.
A recent US Trust Corporate Director and Honorary Trustee was Walter Rothschild. Other directors included Daniel Davison of JP Morgan Chase, Richard Tucker of Exxon Mobil, Daniel Roberts of Citigroup and Marshall Schwartz of Morgan Stanley.
J. W. McCallister, an oil industry insider with House of Saud connections, wrote in The Grim Reaper that information he acquired from Saudi bankers cited 80% ownership of the New York Federal Reserve Bank- by far the most powerful Fed branch - by just eight families, four of which reside in the US.
Jacob Rothschild and David Rockefeller kicking it
They are the Goldman Sachs, Rockefellers, Lehmans and Kuhn Loebs of New York; the Rothschilds of Paris and London; the Warburgs of Hamburg; the Lazards of Paris; and the Israel Moses Seifs of Rome.
CPA Thomas D. Schauf corroborates McCallister’s claims, adding that ten banks control all twelve Federal Reserve Bank branches.
He names N.M. Rothschild of London, Rothschild Bank of Berlin, Warburg Bank of Hamburg, Warburg Bank of Amsterdam, Lehman Brothers of New York, Lazard Brothers of Paris, Kuhn Loeb Bank of New York, Israel Moses Seif Bank of Italy, Goldman Sachs of New York and JP Morgan Chase Bank of New York.
Schauf lists William Rockefeller, Paul Warburg, Jacob Schiff and James Stillman as individuals who own large shares of the Fed. The Schiffs are insiders at Kuhn Loeb. The Stillmans are Citigroup insiders, who married into the Rockefeller clan at the turn of the century.
The Federal Reserve Board 1913
Eustace Mullins came to the same conclusions in his book The Secrets of the Federal Reserve, in which he displays charts connecting the Fed and its member banks to the families of Rothschild, Warburg, Rockefeller and the others.
The control that these banking families exert over the global economy cannot be overstated and is quite intentionally shrouded in secrecy. Their corporate media arm is quick to discredit any information exposing this private central banking cartel as “conspiracy theory”. Yet the facts remain.
The House of Morgan
The Federal Reserve Bank was born in 1913, the same year US banking scion J. Pierpont Morgan died and the Rockefeller Foundation was formed. The House of Morgan presided over American finance from the corner of Wall Street and Broad, acting as quasi-US central bank since 1838, when George Peabody founded it in London.
J.P. Morgan
Peabody was a business associate of the Rothschilds. In 1952 Fed researcher Eustace Mullins put forth the supposition that the Morgans were nothing more than Rothschild agents. Mullins wrote that the Rothschilds;
“…preferred to operate anonymously in the US behind the facade of J.P. Morgan & Company”.
Author Gabriel Kolko stated; “Morgan’s activities in 1895-1896 in selling US gold bonds in Europe were based on an alliance with the House of Rothschild.”
The Morgan financial octopus wrapped its tentacles quickly around the globe. Morgan Grenfell operated in London. Morgan et Ce ruled Paris. The Rothschild’s Lambert cousins set up Drexel & Company in Philadelphia.
The House of Morgan catered to the Astors, DuPonts, Guggenheims, Vanderbilts and Rockefellers. It financed the launch of AT&T, General Motors, General Electric and DuPont. Like the London-based Rothschild and Barings banks, Morgan became part of the power structure in many countries.
By 1890 the House of Morgan was lending to Egypt’s central bank, financing Russian railroads, floating Brazilian provincial government bonds and funding Argentine public works projects. A recession in 1893 enhanced Morgan’s power. That year Morgan saved the US government from a bank panic, forming a syndicate to prop up government reserves with a shipment of $62 million worth of Rothschild gold.
It's a little known fact the the Monopoly man was based on J.P. Morgan
Morgan was the driving force behind Western expansion in the US, financing and controlling West-bound railroads through voting trusts. In 1879 Cornelius Vanderbilt’s Morgan-financed New York Central Railroad gave preferential shipping rates to John D. Rockefeller’s budding Standard Oil monopoly, cementing the Rockefeller/Morgan relationship.
The House of Morgan now fell under Rothschild and Rockefeller family control. A New York Herald headline read, “Railroad Kings Form Gigantic Trust”. J. Pierpont Morgan, who once stated;
“Competition is a sin”, now opined gleefully, “Think of it. All competing railroad traffic west of St. Louis placed in the control of about thirty men."
Morgan and Edward Harriman’s banker Kuhn Loeb held a monopoly over the railroads, while banking dynasties Lehman, Goldman Sachs and Lazard joined the Rockefellers in controlling the US industrial base.
In 1903 Banker’s Trust was set up by the Eight Families. Benjamin Strong of Banker’s Trust was the first Governor of the New York Federal Reserve Bank.
The 1913 creation of the Fed fused the power of the Eight Families to the military and diplomatic might of the US government. If their overseas loans went unpaid, the oligarchs could now deploy US Marines to collect the debts. Morgan, Chase and Citibank formed an international lending syndicate.
The House of Morgan was cozy with the British House of Windsor and the Italian House of Savoy. The Kuhn Loebs, Warburgs, Lehmans, Lazards, Israel Moses Seifs and Goldman Sachs also had close ties to European royalty. By 1895 Morgan controlled the flow of gold in and out of the US.
The first American wave of mergers was in its infancy and was being promoted by the bankers. In 1897 there were sixty-nine industrial mergers. By 1899 there were twelve-hundred. In 1904 John Moody – founder of Moody’s Investor Services – said it was impossible to talk of Rockefeller and Morgan interests as separate.
Public distrust of the combine spread. Many considered them traitors working for European old money. Rockefeller’s Standard Oil, Andrew Carnegie’s US Steel and Edward Harriman’s railroads were all financed by banker Jacob Schiff at Kuhn Loeb, who worked closely with the European Rothschilds.
Several Western states banned the bankers. Populist preacher William Jennings Bryan was thrice the Democratic nominee for President from 1896 -1908. The central theme of his anti-imperialist campaign was that America was falling into a trap of “financial servitude to British capital”.
Teddy Roosevelt defeated Bryan in 1908, but was forced by this spreading populist wildfire to enact the Sherman Anti-Trust Act. He then went after the Standard Oil Trust.
In 1912 the Pujo hearings were held, addressing concentration of power on Wall Street. That same year Mrs. Edward Harriman sold her substantial shares in New York’s Guaranty Trust Bank to J.P. Morgan, creating Morgan Guaranty Trust. Judge Louis Brandeis convinced President Woodrow Wilson to call for an end to interlocking board directorates. In 1914 the Clayton Anti-Trust Act was passed.
Jack Morgan – J. Pierpont’s son and successor – responded by calling on Morgan clients Remington and Winchester to increase arms production. He argued that the US needed to enter WWI. Goaded by the Carnegie Foundation and other oligarchy fronts, Wilson accommodated.
As Charles Tansill wrote in America Goes to War;
“Even before the clash of arms, the French firm of Rothschild Freres cabled to Morgan & Company in New York suggesting the flotation of a loan of $100 million, a substantial part of which was to be left in the US to pay for French purchases of American goods.”
The House of Morgan financed half the US war effort, while receiving commissions for lining up contractors like GE, Du Pont, US Steel, Kennecott and ASARCO. All were Morgan clients.
Morgan also financed the British Boer War in South Africa and the Franco-Prussian War. The 1919 Paris Peace Conference was presided over by Morgan, which led both German and Allied reconstruction efforts.
In the 1930’s populism resurfaced in America after Goldman Sachs, Lehman Bank and others profited from the Crash of 1929. House Banking Committee Chairman Louis McFadden (D-NY) said of the Great Depression;,
“It was no accident. It was a carefully contrived occurrence…The international bankers sought to bring about a condition of despair here so they might emerge as rulers of us all”.
Sen. Gerald Nye (D-ND) chaired a munitions investigation in 1936. Nye concluded that the House of Morgan had plunged the US into WWI to protect loans and create a booming arms industry. Nye later produced a document titled The Next War, which cynically referred to “the old goddess of democracy trick”, through which Japan could be used to lure the US into WWII.
In 1937 Interior Secretary Harold Ickes warned of the influence of “America’s 60 Families”. Historian Ferdinand Lundberg later penned a book of the exact same title. Supreme Court Justice William O. Douglas decried;
“Morgan influence…the most pernicious one in industry and finance today.”
Jack Morgan responded by nudging the US towards WWII. Morgan had close relations with the Iwasaki and Dan families – Japan’s two wealthiest clans – who have owned Mitsubishi and Mitsui, respectively, since the companies emerged from 17th Century shogunates.
When Japan invaded Manchuria, slaughtering Chinese peasants at Nanking, Morgan downplayed the incident. Morgan also had close relations with Italian fascist Benito Mussolini, while German Nazi Dr. Hjalmer Schacht was a Morgan Bank liaison during WWII. After the war Morgan representatives met with Schacht at the Bank of International Settlements (BIS) in Basel, Switzerland.
The House of Rockefeller
BIS is the most powerful bank in the world, a global central bank for the Eight Families who control the private central banks of almost all Western and developing nations. The first President of BIS was Rockefeller banker Gates McGarrah - an official at Chase Manhattan and the Federal Reserve.
McGarrah was the grandfather of former CIA director Richard Helms. The Rockefellers - like the Morgans - had close ties to London. David Icke writes in Children of the Matrix, that the Rockefellers and Morgans were just “gofers” for the European Rothschilds.
John D. Rockefeller
BIS is owned by the Federal Reserve, Bank of England, Bank of Italy, Bank of Canada, Swiss National Bank, Nederlandsche Bank, Bundesbank and Bank of France.
Historian Carroll Quigley wrote in his epic book Tragedy and Hope that BIS was part of a plan;
“to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole…to be controlled in a feudalistic fashion by the central banks of the world acting in concert by secret agreements.”
The US government had a historical distrust of BIS, lobbying unsuccessfully for its demise at the 1944 post-WWII Bretton Woods Conference. Instead the Eight Families’ power was exacerbated, with the Bretton Woods creation of the IMF and the World Bank. The US Federal Reserve only took shares in BIS in September 1994.
BIS holds at least 10% of monetary reserves for at least 80 of the world’s central banks, the IMF and other multilateral institutions. It serves as financial agent for international agreements, collects information on the global economy and serves as lender of last resort to prevent global financial collapse.
BIS promotes an agenda of monopoly capitalist fascism. It gave a bridge loan to Hungary in the 1990’s to ensure privatization of that country’s economy. It served as conduit for Eight Families funding of Adolf Hitler- led by the Warburg’s J. Henry Schroeder and Mendelsohn Bank of Amsterdam. Many researchers assert that BIS is at the nadir of global drug money laundering.
The Bank for International Settlements is the Mac Daddy at the top of the Worldwide Reserve Banking System, not just the US Federal Reserve
It is no coincidence that BIS is headquartered in Switzerland, favorite hiding place for the wealth of the global aristocracy and headquarters for the P-2 Italian Freemason’s Alpina Lodge and Nazi International. Other institutions which the Eight Families control include the World Economic Forum, the International Monetary Conference and the World Trade Organization.
Bretton Woods was a boon to the Eight Families. The IMF and World Bank were central to this “new world order”. In 1944 the first World Bank bonds were floated by Morgan Stanley and First Boston.
The French Lazard family became more involved in House of Morgan interests. Lazard Freres - France’s biggest investment bank- is owned by the Lazard and David-Weill families - old Genoese banking scions represented by Michelle Davive. A recent Chairman and CEO of Citigroup was Sanford Weill.
In 1968 Morgan Guaranty launched Euro-Clear, a Brussels-based bank clearing system for Eurodollar securities. It was the first such automated endeavor. Some took to calling Euro-Clear “The Beast”. Brussels serves as headquarters for the new European Central Bank and for NATO.
In 1973 Morgan officials met secretly in Bermuda to illegally resurrect the old House of Morgan, twenty years before Glass Steagal Act was repealed. Morgan and the Rockefellers provided the financial backing for Merrill Lynch, boosting it into the Big 5 of US investment banking. Merrill is now part of Bank of America.
John D. Rockefeller used his oil wealth to acquire Equitable Trust, which had gobbled up several large banks and corporations by the 1920’s.
The Great Depression helped consolidate Rockefeller’s power. His Chase Bank merged with Kuhn Loeb’s Manhattan Bank to form Chase Manhattan, cementing a long-time family relationship.
The Kuhn-Loeb’s had financed – along with Rothschilds – Rockefeller’s quest to become king of the oil patch. National City Bank of Cleveland provided John D. with the money needed to embark upon his monopolization of the US oil industry.
The bank was identified in Congressional hearings as being one of three Rothschild-owned banks in the US during the 1870’s, when Rockefeller first incorporated as Standard Oil of Ohio.
One Rockefeller Standard Oil partner was Edward Harkness, whose family came to control Chemical Bank. Another was James Stillman, whose family controlled Manufacturers Hanover Trust.
Both banks have merged under the JP Morgan Chase umbrella. Two of James Stillman’s daughters married two of William Rockefeller’s sons. The two families control a big chunk of Citigroup as well.
In the insurance business, the Rockefellers control Metropolitan Life, Equitable Life, Prudential and New York Life. Rockefeller banks control 25% of all assets of the 50 largest US commercial banks and 30% of all assets of the 50 largest insurance companies.
Insurance companies - the first in the US was launched by Freemasons through their Woodman’s of America - play a key role in the Bermuda drug money shuffle.
Companies under Rockefeller control include Exxon Mobil, Chevron Texaco, BP Amoco, Marathon Oil, Freeport McMoran, Quaker Oats, ASARCO, United, Delta, Northwest, ITT, International Harvester, Xerox, Boeing, Westinghouse, Hewlett-Packard, Honeywell, International Paper, Pfizer, Motorola, Monsanto, Union Carbide and General Foods.
The Rockefeller Foundation has close financial ties to both Ford and Carnegie Foundations. Other family philanthropic endeavors include Rockefeller Brothers Fund, Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research, General Education Board, Rockefeller University and the University of Chicago - which churns out a steady stream of far right economists as apologists for international capital, including Milton Friedman.
The family owns 30 Rockefeller Plaza, where the national Christmas tree is lighted every year, and Rockefeller Center.
David Rockefeller was instrumental in the construction of the World Trade Center towers. The main Rockefeller family home is a hulking complex in upstate New York known as Pocantico Hills.
They also own a 32-room 5th Avenue duplex in Manhattan, a mansion in Washington, DC, Monte Sacro Ranch in Venezuela, coffee plantations in Ecuador, several farms in Brazil, an estate at Seal Harbor, Maine and resorts in the Caribbean, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.
Allen Dulles
The Dulles and Rockefeller families are cousins. Allen Dulles created the CIA, assisted the Nazis, covered up the Kennedy hit from his Warren Commission perch and struck a deal with the Muslim Brotherhood to create mind-controlled assassins.
Brother John Foster Dulles presided over the phony Goldman Sachs trusts before the 1929 stock market crash and helped his brother overthrow governments in Iran and Guatemala.
Both were Skull & Bones, Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) insiders and 33rd Degree Masons.
The Rockefellers were instrumental in forming the depopulation-oriented Club of Rome at their family estate in Bellagio, Italy.
Their Pocantico Hills estate gave birth to the Trilateral Commission. The family is a major funder of the eugenics movement which spawned Hitler, human cloning and the current DNA obsession in US scientific circles.
John Rockefeller Jr. headed the Population Council until his death. His namesake son is a Senator from West Virginia. Brother Winthrop Rockefeller was Lieutenant Governor of Arkansas and remains the most powerful man in that state.
In an October 1975 interview with Playboy magazine, Vice-President Nelson Rockefeller- who was also Governor of New York- articulated his family’s patronizing worldview;
“I am a great believer in planning- economic, social, political, military, total world planning.”
But of all the Rockefeller brothers, it is Trilateral Commission (TC) founder and Chase Manhattan Chairman David who has spearheaded the family’s fascist agenda on a global scale. He defended the Shah of Iran, the South African apartheid regime and the Chilean Pinochet junta.
He was the biggest financier of the CFR, the TC and (during the Vietnam War) the Committee for an Effective and Durable Peace in Asia- a contract bonanza for those who made their living off the conflict.
Nixon asked him to be Secretary of Treasury, but Rockefeller declined the job, knowing his power was much greater at the helm of the Chase. Author Gary Allen writes in The Rockefeller File that in 1973;
“David Rockefeller met with twenty-seven heads of state, including the rulers of Russia and Red China.”
Following the 1975 Nugan Hand Bank/CIA coup against Australian Prime Minister Gough Whitlam, his British Crown-appointed successor Malcolm Fraser sped to the US, where he met with President Gerald Ford after conferring with David Rockefeller.
7 Not-So-Secret Homes Of Secret Societies
In clandestine corners of the world, the elite come together in secrecy. Some of them don’t mind that we know of these society meetings, while others maintain that they do not organize at all.
Illustration by Miss Alice Heighes Donlevy of the "Secret Society Buildings of New Haven," with the former Skull & Bones headquarters at left center (circa 1869-1903)
Yet doormen speak to their friends, initiation rites are leaked, people peek in windows, chanting in far underground lairs can be heard by a passerby. Conspiracy theorists have long held that someone, and not the Fates, is manipulating our world, and perhaps in these secret societies the strings are being pulled.
Here is a list of seven groups so secret some members will never admit to their involvement, and their meeting places hiding in plain sight.
Ivy league Yale University is considered to be one of the most selective higher educational institutions in the United States, if not the world. Its motto lux et veritas translates to "light and truth." On the historic campus in New Haven, Connecticut, there is a building where "light and truth" are reserved for carefully selected members and alumni.
What is known about the Skull and Bones secret society is minimal. The organization started in 1832. An official roster of its members was published up until 1971. Bonesmen, as members are called, have been heads of corporations, senior government officials, Supreme Court justices, and even presidents.
Theories about what the Skull and Bones actually do range from its members controlling the Central Intelligence Agency, being a part of a global network aimed at world domination, to being a branch of the Illuminati.
It’s also unknown exactly what happens in The Tomb, the group's headquarters, but there are strange rumors of what is contained in the windowless sandstone building. The Egypto-Doric style of the structure makes it appear as an immense sepulcher.
The tomb is thought to hold secret documents containing the roster of all members, ritual details, as well as multiple stolen relics. Some of the bones rumored to be in The Tomb include the skulls of Geronimo, Pancho Villa, Martin Van Buren, and the gravestone of Elihu Yale, the school's founder. Bonesmen are also known to take other societies' belongings in a show of thievery and cunning known as crooking.
Oosterbeek, Netherlands (note that this is not the office of the organisation, but the place of it's inaugural meeting).
Hotel de Bilderberg
In November of 1954, 50 delegates from 11 countries in Western Europe and 11 Americans spent three days in Oosterbeek, Netherlands, at the Hotel de Bilderberg.
The purpose of the meeting was said to foster conversations between Europe and North America. Those in attendance included a prince, a prime minster, and the head of the CIA. Since that meeting, each year a group of international leaders in the fields of politics, business, media, and communications have met to discuss… we’re not exactly sure.
There is no agenda, no resolutions are proposed, no voting of any kind is executed, and no positions or policy statements are issued.
The meetings are held in a different location each year and each year the topics of the meeting are up for the general public to theorize over.
The roster of attendees is never officially made public, but there have been leaks over the years. Conspiracy theories abound, especially because of the group’s intense level of secrecy. Many believe the group is conspiring to impose capital domination, a world government, or a planned economy. What is certain is that the more prominent you are, the more likely you’ll be to get an invitation to next year’s Bilderberg conference.
Scientology is most visible today because of celebrity members like Tom Cruise and John Travolta, yet the organization has been aggressive over the years in tackling critics and maintaining its secrets. One of the most controversial religious groups, some characterize the movement as a cult.
Basic Scientology belief holds that humans are immortal beings who have reincarnated and have lived on other planets before finding themselves now on Earth. One of the things that makes the religion controversial is its assertive nature, often turning to character assassination or litigation in dealing with skeptics and critics who question their practices. The church is also extremely secretive, holding many of its teachings from members until they have made it through multiple levels.
Scientology operates several churches called Celebrity Centres that are opened to the public, but are primarily meant for "anyone with the power and vision to create a better world.” The Church of the Spiritual Technology, or CST, is reserved for the most trusted of members.
Many of these members manage elaborate bases including the Trementina Base. The official word from the church is that the base is a location used to preserve Scientology founder L. Ron Hubbard’s writings, which are said to be engraved on steel sheets and encased in titanium cases. It’s thought that Trementina is more than just a location to archive Hubbard’s works, however.
Trementina contains underground dwellings and tunnels, but what’s most interesting about the base is what you see from the outside. Aerial photographs above the base show huge images dug into the Earth.
The images are that of the church’s logo. Former members have claimed that the symbols are to mark the return point for members when they travel into the future. Other members have stated that this is the place where Hubbard is supposed to go when he returns.
Established in 1776 in Bavaria, Germany, this group of freethinkers, humanists, and academics opposed superstition, prejudice, religion, and its influence over the public, and they supported the advancement of women.
The Illuminati were a shadowy group, believed capable of influencing movements in government and the arts. The group was infiltrated and shut down a decade after its founding, or so the official record goes. Conspiracy theorists have long been obsessed that the world has been controlled by the Illuminati for generations.
There are many modern groups that claim to be the descendants of the original Bavarian Illuminati; they go so far as to use the name “Illuminati” in their title, but there is no evidence that these recent organizations are tied to the original.
Besides its actions, what is a major mystery of this group is the location of its headquarters. Theorists have claimed many prominent locations are the headquarters of the Illuminati from Disney World in Orlando, Florida, the Mormon Temple in Salt Lake City, Utah, the Statue of Liberty in New York City, Big Ben in London, the Eiffel Tower in Paris, the Pentagon in Washington, D.C., and, among many others, the Vatican.
The theory that the Illuminati headquarters is located at the Vatican is especially interesting due to the group's opposition to the church. It's believed by conspiracy theorists that the church was long ago infiltrated by the society and so that would make its leader, the pope, one of the Illuminati's highest ranking members.
Today, the pope resides in a simple room at Domus Sanctae Marthae, a guest house adjacent to St. Peter's Basilica. The five-story building containing 106 suites and 22 single rooms is for clergy who are in town on official Holy See business, or perhaps for an Illuminati meeting or two.
The Order of the Temple of the East was founded between 1895 and 1906 in either Austria or Germany. It is believed wealthy industrialist, Carl Kellner, began the religious movement, but it was famed occultist Aleister Crowley whose name and additions to the group shrouded it in curiosity and mystery.
OTO was modeled somewhat after another secret society, Freemasonry. But Crowley added a layer, his own self-created belief system called Thelema. Thelema’s practices and beliefs are written out in a book titled The Book of Law and its core belief is: “Do what thou wilt shall be the whole of the Law.”
Ideas from occultism, and Eastern and Western mysticism, found their way into Thelema and thus OTO. The religion is highly secretive and members move through the order in a series of rites and rituals, moving up levels in the forms of initiations. Levels have curious names such as Minerval, Master Magician, Illustrious Knight, Grandmaster of Light, and so on.
There are two components at the core of OTO: magical rituals, which have been rumored to include tantric sex, the summoning of angels and demons, and astral projection.
Then there is the gnostic mass, reminiscent of a Catholic mass only because it contains a host and wine toward the end. The gnostic mass includes elaborate costumes, and at the climax of the mass it's believed that the host turns into the Body of God and the wine the Blood of God.
There are multiple locations of worship called camps, oases, or lodges. The majority of them keep their locations secretive to the greater public. The relatively small location in Oakland is an oasis. They hold a weekly gnostic mass in a temple decorated in candles and Egyptian imagery.
It’s unknown exactly what takes place during initiation ceremonies and what knowledge is shared during these events. According to Crowley's autobiography, The Confessions of Aleister Crowley: "the OTO is in possession of one supreme secret. The whole of its system [is] directed towards communicating to its members, by progressively plain hints, this all-important instruction.”
The secret of this secret society is that many people believe in its existence, but scholarly claims have repetitively stated the group is a complete myth, constructed by the imagination of a madman.
The myth begins that the Priory of Sion was a group charged with protecting the descendants of Jesus of Nazareth and Mary Magdalene who eventually went on to settle in France.
It was leaked in the 1970s that the Bibliothèque Nationale de France in Paris, the French National Library, was in possession of a file called Dossiers Secrets d'Henri Lobineau that pointed to the Priory of Sion being located in France.
The file contained an introduction, maps of France, genealogies, newspaper clippings, letters and a list of grand masters of the Priory of Sion that included Sir Isaac Newton, Victor Hugo, and Leonardo Da Vinci.
The authenticity of these files has been questioned ever since they were left at the library. Eventually, they were traced to Pierre Plantard. It is believed Plantard planted the document at the library in order to perpetuate an elaborate hoax. He himself claimed to be a descendant of Jesus' bloodline.
Academics went on to agree that the Priory of Sion was a hoax constructed by Plantard. Yet, books, articles, and movies continue to be made about this group. Whether or not there is a secret society dedicated to protecting a family descendant from biblical times we may never know.
Several manifestos were anonymously published in the early 17th century that told of legends, mysticism, alchemy, and the Order of the Temple of the Rosy Cross. One of these documents was the Fama Fraternitatis which was published in Cassel, Germany.
The Fama spoke of the 15th century German doctor and mystical philosopher Christian Rosenkreuz who traveled through parts of the Middle East where he learned esoteric wisdom, studying in places such as Turkey and Egypt.
There, he claimed to learn extensive knowledge regarding nature and the universe. When he returned, he attempted to share what he learned but he was dismissed. He then formed a like-minded group called the Fraternity of the Rose Cross.
The year of his birth and death remain shadowy, but some documents claim he lived over 106 years. The group upheld Christian beliefs, but strongly opposed Roman Catholicism, and was also said to have influenced Freemasonry along with hundreds of other groups, many of which have adopted titles with similar names throughout modern times.
At its simplest form, the group aimed to promote a “Universal Reformation of Mankind.” Some reports claim that the requirement for membership was that one must have been capable of using more than the average amount of brain power.
During Rosenkreuz’s life, the group was thought to have only consisted of a handful of members, each of whom was a doctor.
All members took an oath to remain bachelors, and also to treat the sick without payment and to find a replacement for themselves before they died. Interest in the group peaked between 1607 and 1616 with the appearances of the anonymous works that included the Fama Fraternitatis which ranged with content that included mysticism and apocalyptic warnings.
The Rosicricians were into their alchemy
Whether Rosenkreuz’s original idea continued is unknown. One of the hundreds of groups claiming to be tied to the original is the Ancient Mystical Order Rosea Crucis that has some connection to occultist Aleister Crowley. AMORC claims to be devoted to the “study of elusive mysteries of life and the universe.”
They utilize ideas from major philosophers, including Thales and Pythagoras, healing techniques, alchemy, symbolism, and mysticism. The group claims its history can be traced to pharaoh Thutmose III in 1477.
The AMORC headquarters is located at Rosicrucian Park in San Jose, California, which spans a city block and includes several structures. The park is home to elaborate gardens, a research library, a planetarium, a temple, and it houses the ashes of Harvey Spencer Lewis, founder of the secret society.
The Global Financial System Is About To Shift: Part I
October 13 2016 | From: TheMindUnleashed Behind all the chatter of who will be the United States’ next President, there is something much larger playing out. Something bigger than most people could even believe.
Though what you are about to read is indeed real and will soon be undeniable.
With almost all of the “real” money, that being gold, silver, metals, jewels and all the legitimate notes, bond and certificates, the nations of the Eastern hemisphere are poised to shift the entire global financial system back to the rightful owners of this massively large cache of assets.
What is known as the global collateral accounts, is something John F. Kennedy was working on opening up for humanity. These accounts are what the Bretton Woods agreement was based upon (though fraudulently). These accounts are what almost every nation and what all of the big banks have been unlawfully abusing.
Now though, an international alliance is working together to open these accounts for the benefit of humanity, which is being spearheaded by a man known as Neil Keenan. Here are answers from Neil Keenan directly to questions we have asked him.
Neil Keenan, John F Kennedy and President Soekarno
Related: To learn more about Neil Keenan and his work visit neilkeenan.com - in particular the History & Events Timeline
This has been done as to educate a larger audience on what the global collateral accounts are as well as to prepare that same audience for the large events that will be occurring in the very near future.
Q: For those that don’t know what the global collateral accounts are, can you give us an explanation of what they are and what purpose they are used for?
The term Global Collateral Accounts refers to the vast holdings of a Chinese consortium of depositors known as The Dragon Family and their legacy is centuries old. These physical assets are for the most part located in Asia in secure underground facilities comprising a total value in the order of 94 Quadrillion US Dollars.
Primarily the asset holdings are comprised of gold bullion, along with other precious metals and gemstones plus a great deal of paper currency, notes and bonds.
The Silk Road or Silk Route was an ancient network of trade routes that for centuries were central to cultural interaction through regions of the Asian continent connecting the East and West from China to the Mediterranean Sea
The accumulation of these assets began centuries ago, largely by way of the Silk Road trade routes which saw great wealth accumulated by those in the equatorial region where there was an abundance of resources and produce, that were purchased by people in other parts of the world – in gold.
These were the days when payments were made in tangible assets with real value – not FIAT currencies represented by worthless paper. There have been many attempts to steal from the asset pool of the Global Collateral Accounts over the centuries, and in part, the reason why these assets have come to be stored in bunkers in South East Asia, was for safe keeping.
Count Albert of the Dragon Family with Neil Keenan
The assets are watched over and protected by local family groups who are known as The Elders.Unfortunately some of these people, after a few generations in their role as guardians have come to confuse the terms “guardian” with the “depositor.”
Q: Who is / are the Dragon Family? What is their role with the global collateral accounts?
The Dragon Family is, in fact, a organization that operates between old families within China and Taiwan, above the political divide of the two independent Chinese Governments.
The Chinese are remarkable in this regard in that old family ties and functions supersede political arrangements which, though they might last for generations, are regarded as inconsequential over the passage of time to most Chinese.
Attached to this is the wealth of several nations. The Dragon Family abstains from any public view and knowledge but acts for the good and better benefit of the World and have had to deal with higher levels of the global financial Organizations, Committee of 300 and in particular, the Federal Reserve System.
The Mount Washington Hotel, situated in Bretton Woods, New Hampshire, United States
The Golden Dragons (Dragon Family) signed an agreement with the BIS / Bretton Woods / China in 1944 in which their assets would be implemented as collateral in order to be used by the world at large for humanitarian purposes. At all times the Dragon Family have been considered as being the Depositors.
This agreement was not signed by the Committee of 300 and / or the Federal Reserve or anything as of any official status, but by the nations at large including the “United States” which was not a real government but a corporation controlled by foreign interests.
Additionally, the US government borrowed a huge amount of collateral assets from the Dragon Family many years ago. The base of the lent asset funds from the Dragon Family to the US Government were the Gold and Silver. Therefore the US government was able to issue huge amounts of USD as currencies (FRN’s) via the FRB system.
During the course of their relations over the last century, the Dragon Family has accumulated great wealth (and Trillions and Trillions in interest payments still owing), in the form of a variety of Notes, Bonds and Certificates that are an Obligation of the Federal Reserve System.
The Federal Reserve Bank of New York
These Bonds have values ranging in the many thousand of Trillions of United States dollars. The Western nations are run at the discretion of the Committee of 300 and a number of nefarious collectives with various factions and groups including “The hidden Hand” and “The Federal Reserve System” and many other such criminal outfits that worked towards maintaining control over the Western hemisphere and its people.
This essentially is where we end up with the NWO.
The Dragon Family’s investment was with respect to the best interests of the UN termed “Third World nations” and especially such berated nations, however the stated intentions never made it to manifestation in said lands; which was absolutely prevented by the Khazarian-run globalists who have been hiding within Judaism as cover and leveraging the anti-semitism as a crybaby diversion for centuries.
The Humanitarian accounts were illegally and fraudulently repatriated almost immediately upon signing of the Bretton Woods agreement and this has continued unabatedly almost o this day.
The financial doors have been closed to the cabal for a while and we are now observing the beginnings of a resistance-driven man-made collapse / subversion of Cabal control.
The Cabal-driven West have been laboriously attempting to engineer a financial collapse given that they control much of the food production and finance – thereby leaving you, the people with little or nothing other than starvation or slavery should they allow you to live only to be sucked dry by financial usury, unlawful taxation and the pharmaceutical industry, to name but three machinations within their armory of assault.
The United Nations Agenda 21, and now also Agenda 2030 states publicly and in their own writing for anyone to see that they wish to eliminate 80% of the people on the planet.
A final note here is that the theft of the Global Collateral Accounts by the West did not include the Dragon Family, therefore the East has waited a very long time to be finally in control of their own destiny without Western interference. Although the Cabal are attempting to create a Third World War so that everyone is taken down with them.
Q: Was JFK was working with President Sukarno of Indonesia to open the accounts?
Yes. In 1963, President John F. Kennedy entered into an Agreement with President Sukarno to provide the funds to allow the United States Treasury to print its own currency, thus subverting the “right” to print the currency held by the Federal Reserve. [Note: Some publications spell “Sukarno” as “Soekarno” but it should be made clear that both spellings refer to the same man, unless the author of any particular piece of writing is confused.]
JFK, Soekarno and Johnson
The Agreement would have transferred some 59,000 tons of gold to underpin this currency. The problem with this was that the US domestic currency would have then been backed by gold which would have been a violation of international agreements meant to stabilize currencies.
Pictures don’t lie. John Kennedy was emotionally high at this meeting, as was Sukarno, but unbeknownst to them, Vice President Johnson was a member of secret societies, the likes of which Kennedy had spoken against.
My Pentagon sources advised me that Johnson was involved in the murder of JFK. The entire scenario was set up not only because of what Kennedy was doing in terms of ending the Federal Reserve System and replacing it with the new United States Treasury currency, but also with regards to the dismantling of the CIA.
In addition it involved both Texaco and Standard Oil and their loss of income in West Papua.
In delivering all of the information that Johnson was getting from Kennedy and Sukarno in Washington D.C. to his cabal bosses, the Cabal managed to stop Kennedy from moving forward by assassinating him.
With their plans, the Cabal had to stop Kennedy because he wanted to take down the Illuminati et al and the Federal Reserve System. The daily reports to the Cabal from Lyndon Johnson in Jakarta, Indonesia, doomed Kennedy to his assassination.
For his painstaking efforts, a CIA coup saw Sukarno removed from presidency and replaced by General Suharto, who then imposed a lifetime of home imprisonment upon Sukarno.
Upon Kennedy’s return to the United States, he was assassinated in Dallas, Texas, Lyndon Johnson’s home state. Furthermore it has been reported that before JFK was even officially declared dead, Lyndon Johnson himself had been sworn in as the new President of the United States.
Now do you believe that Lee Harvey Oswald killed JFK? Absolutely not. Lyndon Johnson, George H.W. Bush and the Cabal were responsible for the assassination of JFK.
Lyndon Johnson
Eight days after signing the Green Hilton Memorial agreement with President Sukarno of Indonesia, President Kennedy was assassinated. President Johnson suspended the EO-11110 as issued by Kennedy and transferred the bullion to the Federal Reserve. In Indonesia, President Sukarno was gradually being placed under house arrest.
The Green Hilton Agreement was not implemented until 1968 when Sukarno fell from office and at a time when Global Trade made it imperative to have a Global Currency.
Q: What is your role with these accounts and how were you chosen to be involved?
It all started when I (Neil Keenan) was approached by the Dragon Family (DF), through a diplomat representative named Akihko Yamaguchi.
Akihko Yamaguchi and Neil Keenan
Because of the assistance and political connections that I had provided him with previously, Yamaguchi persistently sought out myself to provide direct services on his behalf related to international banking and trading transactions in furtherance of Dragon family humanitarian programs (which are to be implemented when the Global Collateral Accounts are lawfully opened).
Q: What is the Monaco Accords and what was accomplished there?
In August of 2011, myself and a very powerful political associate arranged a secret meeting of 57 global finance ministers (none from any Western nations) aboard a yacht in Monaco for the purpose of setting up a new worldwide, asset-backed financial system.
Word of the gathering reached the Rockefellers, the pre-eminent U.S. clan of that oligarchy, who dispatched Senator Jay Rockefeller to essentially “crash” the party as an uninvited guest.
I physically blocked Rockefeller at the gangplank. When Rockefeller demanded;
“Don’t you know who I am?” I responded, “Yes, you’re exactly the person we don’t want on this boat.”
After Rockefeller’s unceremonious ejection, the yacht was then buzzed by Blackhawk helicopters before French fighter jets gave a warning pass overhead, whereupon the helicopters retreated.
Within several months, the agreement realized from that meeting, the “Monaco Accords,” was made official by its co-hosts, and that document has now been signed by over 180 countries. This was an unprecedented collective step toward wresting control from the criminal planetary domination by the West. Out of this was born the BRICS alliance.
Note that Part 2 to this interview will be released on Thursday October 13th. Neil will answer how much gold is actually in existence with these accounts, what role the BRICS is playing, which governments and agencies he is working with and what role Vladimir Putin is playing on a global level.
In the meantime, check out these related articles:
Out Of Hand: More People Are Using More Devices More Often Than Ever Before - Increasingly, That’s A Pain Point October 10 2016 | From: Buzzfeed For Cassandra Smolcic, the trouble began at her dream internship. Handpicked to spend a summer working on movies at Pixar, the 26-year-old logged marathon hours, and more than a few all-nighters, at her computer and tablet.
At first, she managed to ignore the mysterious pinching sensations in her hands and forearms. But by the time her internship ended and a full-time job offer rolled in, she could barely move her fingers.
For Skylar, a 12-year-old in South Florida who loves her laptop, phone, and tablet, the breaking point came at the start of sixth grade last fall. Suddenly her neck, shoulders, and back felt strained whenever she rolled her head, as if invisible hands were yanking muscles apart from the inside. All her neck-rolling, she worried, made her look like she was trying to cheat off someone’s test.
To be a perpetually plugged-in, emailing, texting, sexting, swiping, Snapchatting, selfie-taking human being in 2016, a little thumb twinge is the price of admission. There are the media-anointed outliers: the Candy Crusher with a ruptured thumb tendon, the woman who over-texted her way to “WhatsAppitis.”
And then there are people like the 18-year-old woman who said;
“If I’m scrolling down Tumblr for more than half an hour, my fingers will get sore.”
“When I hold my phone,” a 22-year-old complained, cradling her iPhone in her palm, “my bottom finger really hurts.”
A 30-year-old software engineer said his fingers “naturally curl inwards,” claw-like: “I remember my hand did not quite use to be like that.”
Amy Luo, 27, suspects her iPhone 6s is partly to blame for the numbness in her right thumb and wrist.
Compared with her old iPhone, she said, “you have to stretch a lot more, and it’s heavier.”
Dr. Patrick Lang, a San Francisco hand surgeon, sees more and more twenty- and thirtysomething tech employees with inexplicable debilitating pain in their upper limbs. “I consider it like an epidemic,” he said, “particularly in this city.”
To be clear, no one knows just how bad this “epidemic” is. At best, we learn to endure our stiff necks and throbbing thumbs. At worst, a generation of people damage their bodies without realizing it.
In all likelihood, we are somewhere in the middle, between perturbance and public health crisis, but for the time being we simply don’t - can’t - know what all these machines will do to our bodies in the long term, especially in the absence of definitive research.
What we do know is that now more people are using multiple electronics - cell phones, smartphones, tablets, laptops, desktops - for more hours a day, starting at ever earlier ages.
But we weren’t built for them.
Growing up in the Rust Belt city of Greensburg, Pennsylvania, Smolcic was the kid who was always sketching characters from movies and cartoons. And in her adolescent years in the ’90s, computers became an important tool for honing her artistic talents: She made clip-art greeting cards and banners, and high school newspaper layouts, on desktop computers.
At Susquehanna University, she went all in on graphic design as a career after she took a computer arts course on a whim.
That meant long hours on various iMacs, and even more screen time when she went on to earn a master’s in graphic design at the Savannah College of Art and Design. Over the years, she’s also carried a flip phone, a Motorola Razr, a Dell laptop, and, at the moment, a MacBook Pro and an iPhone 6s.
Machines were crucial to Smolcic’s burgeoning artistic career, as they are to so many of our lives. But it’d be hard to call them human-friendly.
Consider the minimum biomechanics needed to work a smartphone. Put aside all the other risks - of getting depressed and lonely; of sacrificing sleep, hearing, eyesight, and focus; of dying while snapping selfies on cliffs, or texting while walking or driving. The act of just using the thing is precarious.
Our heads sit atop our necks and line up with our shoulders and arms, just as a two-footed species’ should. But a forward-leaning head shakes up this graceful arrangement: The upper body drifts back, the hips tilt forward, and pretty much everything else - the spine, the nerves below the neck, the upper limb muscles - tightens up.
Slouching is all too easy when we hold a phone in our outstretched hand or reach for a mouse. When we type on our laptops cross-legged or sprawled on our stomachs, our necks and shoulders strain from leaning into the low screens. (Yes, as counterintuitive as it sounds, you probably shouldn’t put a laptop on your lap.)
Our hands are uniquely capable of grasping objects, a useful trait for our branch–swinging primate ancestors. Especially remarkable are our opposable thumbs, free to flex, extend, curl, and press in all sorts of directions. But their inherently unstable joints didn’t evolve to be constantly pushed beyond their range of motion. Yet they are when we flick through our phones or, worse, tablets.
To Dr. Robert Markison, it’s clear: Virtually none of Silicon Valley’s inventions, from the clunky Macintosh 128K of 1984 to the sleek iPhone 7, have been designed with respect for the human form. Markison is a San Francisco surgeon who depends on his hands to operate on other people’s hands.
He so believes in technology’s potential to harm - and treats so many young startup workers who confirm that suspicion - that he almost exclusively uses voice recognition software. He also has his own line of smartphone styluses that double as pens, with colorful barrels made of manually mixed pigments, pressure-cast resin, and hand-dyed silk.
On a recent afternoon in his office, Markison asked me to make a fist around a grip strength measurement tool, with my thumb facing the ceiling. It felt powerful, easy.
Then he had me turn my palm to the floor, the keyboarding stance of a white-collar worker, and do the same thing; my grip immediately lost a noticeable amount of strength.
“There’s no reason to think a mouse is a good idea,” Markison said.
Of course, many people with office jobs probably suspect that already. During the ’80s and ’90s, when computers - then also known as “video display terminals” - invaded workplaces around the world, employees felt their arms and fingers go numb, and headlines warned of the harm these newfangled devices appeared to be inflicting.
In the early ’90s, telephone operators, journalists, clerical workers, and employees from other fields filed hundreds of lawsuits against the manufacturers of equipment such as computer keyboards, which they blamed for severe arm, wrist, and hand injuries.
All that worry woke a generation up to the physical (and psychological) toll of automated, ultra-efficient work. Then came furniture and appliances to align technology with our bodies.
Ergonomic mice are gripped vertically, and foot mice save clicks.
Slanted and split keyboards let hands relax. Desks convert to a standing position or have adjustable split levels for monitors and keyboards. Some software transcribes speech, other software alerts your boss when you type too fast.
But these inventions have been largely for desktops. The dizzying rise of cell phones, tablets, and laptops, fueled by the rush to make screens ever more portable and ubiquitous, have all but left human-centered design principles in the dust.
Chances are good you’re reading this on your phone. In fact, chances are good your phone was the first thing you looked at this morning and the last thing you looked at last night.
Wake up to a phone alarm. Scroll, bleary-eyed, through email, texts, Facebook, Twitter, Instagram. Field more news and email on your phone on public transit (or, er, in the car).
Sit behind a computer of some kind at work or school. All day your buzzing phone demands to be held, whether you’re out to lunch or, admit it, on the toilet.
Come reverse commute, you’re once again head down on your phone, or an e-reader, until you finally take a break at home - by watching Game of Thrones on your laptop or tablet. Bonus points if you play Words With Friends while you do it.
Scientists don’t definitively know how all this activity affects our bodies. While some studies link hand ailments to heavy computer and video game use, far fewer have examined new devices like smartphones.
“The phones have only been out 10 to 15 years at best,” said Jack Dennerlein, who directs the Occupational Biomechanics and Ergonomics Laboratory at Harvard University.
“We haven’t had the long-term exposures to start seeing some of the more chronic issues that come up later in life.”
No reliable measurement of technology-related ailments exists. The closest thing is an annual survey of workplace injuries by the US Bureau of Labor Statistics, whose data suggests that cases of musculoskeletal disorders, including carpal tunnel syndrome, have dropped over the last two decades.
But these figures are at best “a very crude measure” of problems, said Dr. Kurt Hegmann, who directs the University of Utah’s Rocky Mountain Center for Occupational and Environmental Health. As Dennerlein put it: “They’re better than nothing.”
Hegmann offers some theories for why the numbers are shrinking: High-risk jobs like manufacturing are decreasing. Panicked workers in the ’90s likely reported nonexistent ailments before the hysteria subsided. Some offices may have became more ergonomic.
And there are other reasons the numbers are probably off: Non-work-related factors like obesity can contribute to carpal tunnel, and if you’re constantly sending work emails but also Instagramming for fun, it’s hard to blame your sore hand on work alone.
However widespread phone-linked injuries may or may not be, a small cluster of studies suggests that they are real. A 2011 study of nearly 140 mobile device users linked internet time to right thumb pain, as well as overall screen time to right shoulder and neck discomfort.
Another found that smartphone overuse enlarges the nerve involved in carpal tunnel, causes thumb pain, and hinders the hand’s ability to do things like pinch.
Upright, an adult’s head puts about a dozen pounds of force on the spine, according to a 2014 paper. But tilted 15 degrees, as if over a phone, the force surges to 27 pounds, and to 60 pounds at 60 degrees. (That’s the weight of four Thanksgiving turkeys.)
“It’s harmful when you’re younger, because the bones are still malleable and pliable and they may be disformed permanently,” said New York spinal surgeon Dr. Kenneth Hansraj, who wrote the paper after treating a patient “head down in his iPad, playing Angry Birds four hours a day.”
Older people can suffer too, he said, because their spines are prone to narrowing, making them susceptible to injury.
But the doctor insists he’s no “cell phone basher.”
“I love the ability to have a cup of coffee and contact 10 of my friends in 10 countries with one text and say, ‘I love this coffee,’” he said.
“I’m just saying, my message is to keep your head up and be cognizant of where your head is in space.”
Skylar started using an iPad a couple years ago to watch movies in the car.
Then, at age 10, she got a MacBook Air and a rose-gold iPhone 6s, says her mother, who requested to withhold her last name to protect her identity.
Game-playing, filming lip-sync sessions, Snapchatting “weird faces,” checking Instagram, FaceTiming, and texting, not to mention doing homework on the computer, keep Skylar busy three hours or so a day.
Recently, she discovered Friends, a show about “a group of friends that do a lot of weird things and they always meet up at every single day at Central Perk. It’s a coffee shop.”
When the Pew Research Center surveyed teens in 2011, one-quarter had smartphones. In 2015, three-quarters did. According to Common Sense Media, a San Francisco nonprofit that surveyed more than 2,600 young people across the US last year, 8- to 12-year-olds log nearly two hours a day on tablets, smartphones, and other mobile devices.
And the habit starts even younger: 38% of children under 2 have played games or watched videos on a mobile device.
Even lower-income teens, who are less likely to own the latest gadgets, may be catching up to their wealthier peers: In a 2015 study of 350 children under age 5 in a low-income community in Philadelphia, most already had their own mobile device, and in fact had started using one before their first birthday.
“It’s not like an hour that goes by I don’t check my phone, unless I’m asleep, you know,” said Kendall Holle, 15.
“It’s bad. It’s bad. As soon as I wake up, open my eyes, brush my teeth, wash my face, I’m on my phone, making snaps.”
“I wake up and I start snapping,” said Jeff Ren, 19.
“When my phone got taken away,” confessed Sara, 15, “I cracked.”
“I just don’t feel normal without my phone on me now,” said Howard Lin, 18. “It would just feel like something’s missing.”
But researchers aren’t studying how so much gadget exposure, so young, affects children’s physiology - at least not to the degree they’re studying how it affects their learning, playing, and thinking.
The American Academy of Pediatrics recommends that children under age 2 avoid screen time completely, and that older children have no more than two hours a day. After more than 15 years, it’s now rethinking these guidelines.
“In a world where ‘screen time’ is becoming simply ‘time,’ our policies must evolve or become obsolete,” it has explained.
When I asked if physical risks were being weighed along with social and psychological ones, Dr. Ari Brown, who’s leading the overhaul of the recommendations, told me by email that “the particular question you are asking … is not being addressed by our group.”
Meanwhile, people like Diane Cho didn’t see the pain coming and don’t know what will happen next.
At the news site she recently left, Cho spent her days typing 10 hours at a time, mostly on a laptop, and reading her phone - until her right arm went periodically numb, immune to icing.
“A huge reason why I wanted a career change was literally my arm was falling apart,” she said. “My body was just aching.” She’s 26.
George McIntire, 27, occasionally sees his right thumb act up: “It starts twitching back and forth, it’s shivering, and it’s going really fast too.”
Tanner Bell, a 17-year-old who makes DIY craft videos on YouTube and helps companies digitally market to teens, feels his thumbs cramp twice a week.
“It doesn’t even happen when I’m holding it, it could happen later on in the day or night,” he said. “There’s an extra tension … sort of like a tingling.”
After trading volleys of texts with a long-distance girlfriend, Vincent Hennerty, 26, ended up with early-stage carpal tunnel. Cutting back on video games was annoying, as was doing push-ups on his knuckles.
Still, nothing could prepare him for what one might call the ultimate sacrifice.
“When I was with girls,” he recalled, “I would either have to finger them less during sexual intercourse or messing around, or I’d have to be in a position where my wrists were completely straight.”
This, he said, “weighed on me the most: ‘I need to stop texting.’”
When neck rubs and ice packs didn’t soothe Skylar’s stiff neck, her mother took her to Dean Fishman, a local chiropractor and physical therapist. He sees so many people like her that in 2009 he started the Text Neck Institute outside Fort Lauderdale, Florida.
The clinic now handles 700 visits a month, he says.
“I started to notice very early on, when texting started to become popular as far as communicating goes, that I was seeing more and more younger people coming in with complaints we hadn’t seen before - headaches, neck pain, arm pain,” said Fishman, whose youngest patient so far has been a 3-year-old iPad-loving girl. So-called text neck “is not a blunt force trauma,” he said.
“You’re not going to see a lot of bulging or herniated discs overnight. Over time, it’s going to be microtraumas that end up being a bigger symptom for our patients.”
Patients are utterly, unnervingly unaware of their own bodies.
“When these younger people are in the middle of studying on their digital device, or if they’re in the middle of gaming or the excitement of texting with their friends, they don’t perceive pain,” Fishman said.
“It’s not until they put it down, lay down at night, and feel pain, and don’t attribute it to what they’ve been doing during the day.”
Cyrene Quiamco is not a patient, but has all the markings of a future one.
“I don’t even know when I don’t check Snapchat,” said the 27-year-old, who Snapchats for brands like MTV, Jolly Ranchers, Pixar, and Disneyland - and charges $10,000 to $30,000 per Story.
“It’s like, I’m in a restaurant, and then I don’t spend all of the time I’m there (on Snapchat), but then I spend five minutes checking what’s in my Snapchat feed. It’s not one sitting, it’s various sittings throughout the day.”
How many texts does she send a day? “Oh gosh, more than a thousand.” She added, “I never actually thought about how many that would be.”
Two to three hours a day, Quiamco draws colorful, detailed cartoons for Snapchat on her phone.
“You’re so focused on creating it because you don’t want to stop,” even when a pang runs up her forearm, she said. “I tell my mom, ‘Hey, I’m getting hand cramps by using the phone.’ She says, ‘You’re going to develop something. If you lose your hand, that’s everything.’”
She laughed.
As a 6-year-old, Smolcic fell in love with The Little Mermaid. As a grown-up graphic designer at Pixar, across the bay from San Francisco, she got to make her own mark on films like Monsters University, Cars 2, and Finding Dory. For Toy Story 3, she crafted the logo of pink teddy bear and chief antagonist Lots-o’-Huggin’ Bear; for the Scotland-set Brave, she whipped up Celtic patterns for furniture and costumes.
Meetings with famous directors and other “pinch me” moments overflowed during her five years there.
“There’s just all those amazing little life lessons buried into the entertainment aspect of it that do make an impact on people,” she said of Pixar’s movies. “It felt special to be part of that.”
Despite the grueling hours, Smolcic didn’t seriously believe that hand injuries could be a hazard of the trade. But once the aches arrived, they stayed.
Even when she felt normal after a monthlong break, the stabbing sensations would flare up when she jumped back into work. Pixar was supportive, she said, and gave her an elaborate work station with a motorized standing and sitting desk, a sideways mouse, programmable foot pedals, ergonomic chairs, extra monitors, and a tablet sensitive to touch.
Doctors and specialists put her through one treatment after another, some less conventional than others: acupuncture, acupressure, breathwork, massages, physical therapy, personal training, biofeedback, myofascial release, NeuroKinetic Therapy, reflexology, naturopathy.
According to some of her many medical professionals, her diagnosis was fibromyalgia, a musculoskeletal pain disorder. Others called it a “repetitive strain injury.”
That’s probably the first term that comes to mind for these types of impairments. But occupational health experts shy away from it because it lumps together a lot of different ailments. Take carpal tunnel syndrome: A compressed nerve in your forearm numbs and weakens your hand.
But painful thumb tendons, the cord-like structures that link muscle to bone, might mean de Quervain syndrome. Tendinitis (inflamed tendons) shouldn’t be confused with trigger finger (inflammation around a tendon). And for anything too vague or early-stage to neatly fit a diagnosis, there’s the handy label of “nonspecific pain.”
To make things more confusing, none of these injuries can be easily blamed on technology. You can fiddle with gadgets your whole life without a sore thumb. Or your ailment can build over years, making it hard to know whether gadgets are the sole cause.
Recovery, too, varies. All you may need to do is vigilantly sit up straight and take breaks, whereas others would need anything from a steroid shot to surgery.
These nuances can confound primary care physicians, who don’t necessarily know when to refer patients to specialists - who in turn don’t always have all the answers either.
“People go to the hand surgeons, who are frustrated because they’re not surgical patients, so they send them to therapy,” said Melanie Johnke, who runs Golden Gate Hand Therapy in San Francisco. “And I’m not a doctor, either,” meaning she can’t make official diagnoses or prescribe medications.
As Savir put it: “If I go to the doctor, what is he going to say? ‘Don’t hold your phone that way.’ What’s the point?”
Despite knowing everything we should do, from sitting straight and stretching to taking breaks and using a phone stylus, we probably don’t and won’t follow suit. And maybe that’s just how things are now. Maybe only technology can save us from ourselves.
Tech giants like Apple, Google, and Microsoft are racing to turn their machines into mind readers. Every swipe saved, every “frictionless” convenience engineered, keeps us coming back for more: It’s a business strategy that also happens to be ergonomically friendly.
Speech recognition software - Siri, “OK Google,” Alexa, Dragon - promises to take the manual labor out of internet browsing and looking up directions.
But it doesn’t work perfectly, which isn’t news to anyone who’s yelled at Siri, and it’s still kind of weird, frankly, to talk to your phone in public.
“I’m in a shared office space, and I don’t know how that would work out,” said Saima Jamshed, 42, who has chronic pain in her right arm.
Then there are the machine learning–powered apps that, seemingly magically, cue up the next word in your message, person to call, or video to watch, based on your past activity and keystrokes.
See (as of last week) Google’s new messaging app Allo, which comes with prepackaged responses and predictive texts. But accepting their help does require sacrificing privacy to an unsettling degree.
Of course, we could also use technology less. We certainly seem to want to. Virtually all 30 or so people who spoke to me wished they could leave their phones at home, stop refreshing their notifications, watch less YouTube. Asked to guess how much time this all amounted to, they answered: too much.
Cutting back would almost definitely be healthier. But we may not be willing to do that.
Skylar has almost fully recovered, thanks to physical therapy at the Text Neck Institute and exercises at home. Her mother says she’s diligent about setting her devices at eye level (and telling everyone else to as well), just like the doctor told her to. But she isn’t actually cutting back on screen time.
The peer pressure is intense: All her friends have phones, and some have iPads and computers.
“Sometimes it gets annoying when I go to a friend’s house and all we do is play on our phone or watch something on our iPad,” Skylar said. “I went to their house to play with them or hang out with them, not just go on our electronics and be silent the whole time.”
“When I was growing up,” her mother, Kerri, recalled, “the phone was in the house, so if you left the house, the phone rang and somebody would call you later.” It was a non-negotiable break when the world had to accept that you were physically untethered from your device. “Now,” Kerri said, “it’s just everywhere.”
Smolcic has largely disconnected from technology, just not by choice.
When she was 28, a pain management specialist gave her the devastating news: She would never fully recover. She hung on for a few more years, but finally left in October 2014 for a San Francisco design agency where, she hoped, her role would be less hands-on. “I really felt like I’d tried everything I could,” she said.
But the work and pain remained more or less the same, so this March, she left the agency, and design, for the foreseeable future. Her life’s work hurt.
Since then, she’s been using money saved up to travel through Hong Kong, Greece, and Iceland, with stops to see shamans and alternative healers in Indonesia, Thailand, and Mexico. She’s also writing, which she now believes to be her true calling.
Composing an 1,800-word essay this spring - through a combination of typing and recording voice memos - took a month and a half because she could only work for an hour a day. Now she says she can write for several hours at a time with almost no pain, and she’s working on a memoir partly about her injuries.
At 33, Smolcic believes that she’s 90% recovered. She can’t be sure it’s permanent - but even if so, she no longer wants a trade design job.
“I think I’d be okay with not having a lot of the luxuries I had in my San Francisco life,” she said, “as a trade for having more time to be actively living and out in the world, as opposed to being behind a desk.”
But despite all that she believes technology has cost her, physically and emotionally, Smolcic hasn’t been able to resist turning to her iPhone and MacBook on the road this year.
They are a source of directions and travel tips, an outlet for writing and music, a camera to record memories, a line of communication to friends and family. “These machines,” she wrote to me this summer, “put so much power at my fingertips.” And now that she’s feeling better, she uses them all the time.
Debate Post-Mortem: Trump Crushes Clinton - "You Should Be In Jail"
October 12 2016 | From: ZeroHedge
From the no-handshake start, following the most awkward Bill-Melania pre-debate greeting, it was clear the gloves were off.
While Trump started apologetically, once Clinton opened up ad hominem character attacks, The Donald turned it up to '11'.
Lashing out at Bill's indiscretions "his actions are worse than words", Hillary's lying "you should be in jail... I will call for a special prosecutor", and the biases of the moderators"it's one of three here" even the crowd cheered.. before being quickly shushed. Online polls, unbiased commentators, and the Mexican Peso agreed Trump won.
TRUMP: "Bernie Sanders and between super delegates and Debra Wassermann Schultz and I was surprised to see him sign on with the devil.
The thing that you should be apologizing for are the 33,000 e-mails that you deleted and you acid washed and the two boxes of e-mails and other things last week that were taken from an office are are now missing.
I didn't knowledge I would say this, but I'm going to and I hate to say it. If I win, I am going to instruct my attorney general to get a special prosecutor to look into your situation. There has never been so many lies, so much exception.
There has never been anything like it. We will have a special prosecutor. I go out and speak and the people of this country are furious.
The long time workers at the FBI are furious. There has never been anything like this with e-mails. You get a subpoena and after getting the subpoena you delete 33,000 e-mails and acid watch them or bleach them. An expensive process.
We will get a special prosecutor and look into it. You know what, people have been -- their lives have been destroyed for doing 1/5 of what you have done. You should be a shamed.
COOPER: "Secretary Clinton, I will let you respond."
CLINTON: "Everything he said is absolutely false. It would be impossible to be fact checking Donald all the time. I would never get to talk and make lives better for people.
Once again, go to Hillary clinton.com. You can fact check trump in realtime. Last time at the first debate we had millions of people fact checking and we will have millions more fact checking.
It's just awfully good that someone with the temperament of Donald Trump is not in charge of the law in our country."
TRUMP: "Because you would be in jail."
COOPER: "We want to remind the audience to please not talk out loud. Do not applaud. You are wasting time."
"I was surprised to Bernie sign on with you the devil..."
Trump: Take a look at WikiLeaks and see what they said about Bernie Sanders...I was so surprised to see him sign on with the devil. #debatepic.twitter.com/QPXpUlozco
Online polls show it as an overwhelming win for Trump. - DrudgeReport
And then - 90 minutes after the debate ended - CNN finally releases their poll of 537 Voters!
What a total embarrassment!
Finally, the most real-time indicator of performance...
It's on like Donkey Kong.
Congressman Long Statement On Donald J. Trump’s Debate Victory
“America saw tonight why we cannot stand another four years of the Clinton-Obama record of stagnant economic growth and declining respect throughout the world. Donald Trump showed tonight he understands Syria is much more complicated than Hillary would like for it to be.
He is the only candidate with workable plans to reinvigorate our country’s economic engine by bringing back jobs, and he is the only candidate that can help America regain its place as a strong and respected nation.
America will be a safer place to raise a family under Trump's leadership.”
Hillary Clinton is one of the founders of ISIS and almost completely responsible for the destruction of of Syria, but now she’s blaming that on Russia.
Busted! Bill Clinton's Face When Trump Brings Up The Rape Allegations is Priceless
Epic Moment. Donald Trump brought up Bill Clinton's rape allegations during the Presidential Debate as the world is finally learning about the Clinton's lifetime pattern of abuse towards women.
Why does Hillary Clinton blame her husbands victims and then destroy their lives and reputations?
This Was The Week The World Got Really Anxious About Globalization's Future
October 11 2016 | From: Bloomberg
Markets might never be the same again.
Weak global trade, fears that the U.K. is marching towards a hard Brexit, and polls indicating that the U.S. election remains a tighter call than markets are pricing in have led a bevy of analysts to redouble their warnings that a backlash over globalization is poised to roil global financial markets - with profound consequences for the real economy and investment strategies.
From the economists and politicians at the annual IMF meeting in Washington to strategists on Wall Street trying to advise clients, everyone seems to be pondering a future in which cooperation and global trade may look much different than they do now.
Brexit
Suggestions that the U.K. will prioritize control over its migration policy at the expense of open access to Europe's single market in negotiations to leave the European Union - a strategy that's being dubbed a "hard Brexit" - loomed large over global markets.
The U.K. government is “strongly supportive of open markets, free markets, open economies, free trade,” said Chancellor of the Exchequer Philip Hammond during a Bloomberg Television interview in New York on Thursday. “But we have a problem - and it’s not just a British problem, it’s a developed-world problem - in keeping our populations engaged and supportive of our market capitalism, our economic model."
Trade
Citing the rising anti-trade sentiment, analysts from Bank of America Merrill Lynch warned that:
“Events show nations are becoming less willing to cooperate, more willing to contest," and a backlash against inequality is likely to trigger more activist fiscal policies.
Looser government spending in developed countries - combined with trade protectionism and wealth redistribution - could reshape global investment strategies, unleashing a wave of inflation, the bank argued, amid a looming war against inequality.
U.S. Treasury Secretary Jack Lew did his part to push for more openness. During an interview in Washington on Thursday, he said that efforts to boost trade, combined with a more equitable distribution of the fruits of economic growth, are key to ensuring U.S. prosperity.
Rolling back on globalization would be counterproductive to any attempt to boost median incomes, he added.
Trump
Without mentioning him by name, Lew's comments appeared to nod to Donald Trump, who some believe could take the U.S. down a more isolationist trading path should he be elected president in November.
“The emergence of Donald Trump as a political force reflects a mood of growing discontent about immigration, globalization and the distribution of wealth," write analysts at Fathom Consulting, a London-based research firm.
Their central scenario is that a Trump administration might be benign for the U.S. economy.
“However, in our downside scenario, Donald Dark, global trade falls sharply and a global recession looms. In this world, isolationism wins, not just in the U.S., but globally," they caution.
Analysts at Standard Chartered Plc agree that the tail risks of a Trump presidency could be significant.
“The main risk with potentially tough negotiating tactics is that trade partners could panic, especially if global coordination evaporates."
They add that business confidence could take a big hit in this context.
“The global trade system could descend into a spiral of trade tariffs, reminiscent of what happened after the Smoot-Hawley tariff of 1930, and ultimately a trade war, possibly accompanied by foreign-exchange devaluations; this would be a ‘lose-lose’ deal for all."
Market participants are also concerned that populism could take root under a Hillary Clinton administration.
“We believe the liberal base’s demands on a Clinton Administration could lead to an overly expansive federal government with aggressive regulators," write analysts at Barclays Plc.
"If the GOP does not unify, Clinton may expand President Obama’s use of executive authority to accomplish her goals."
Managing Risks
No matter who wins in November, Citigroup Inc. Head FX Strategist Steven Englander warns that investors are failing to hedge against rising event risks, with the U.S. election serving as a possible stress test for global markets.
“If everyone is positioning to pull the trigger on positioning as soon as they know the outcome, the repressed volatility may emerge in a very sharp burst," he points out.
Amid political attacks on the apparent inequities generated by monetary policy in the U.K., sluggish trade challenging Chinese growth, and the rise of populist movements in Europe, there are plenty of reasons why market players should snap up volatility hedges, analysts say.
“In our view, volatility is going to heat up in the coming months given the U.S. election, China's potential response against a stronger currency, and Italian political risks," concluded Martin Enlund, chief currency strategist at Nordea Markets.
The New Snowden? NSA Contractor Arrested Over Alleged Theft Of Classified Data
October 11 2016 | From: ActivistPost A contractor working for the National Security Agency (NSA) was arrested by the FBI following his alleged theft of “state secrets.”
More specifically, the contractor, Harold Thomas Martin, is charged with stealing highly classified source codes developed to covertly hack the networks of foreign governments, according to several senior law enforcement and intelligence officials.
Martin was employed by Booz Allen Hamilton, the company responsible for most of the NSA’s most sensitive cyber-operations.
Edward Snowden, the most well-known NSA whistleblower, also worked for Booz Allen Hamilton until he fled to Hong Kong in 2013 where he revealed a trove of documents exposing the massive scope of the NSA dragnet surveillance. That surveillance system was shown to have targeted untold numbers of innocent Americans.
According to the New York Times, the theft “raises the embarrassing prospect” that an NSA insider managed to steal highly damaging secret information from the NSA for the second time in three years, not to mention the “Shadow Broker” hack this past August, which made classified NSA hacking tools available to the public.
According to a Department of Justice press release, Martin’s residence in Maryland was raided by the FBI on August 27th, 2016. During the raid, investigators found hard-copy documents and digital information stored on various devices and removable digital media.
The FBI claims that a large percentage of the materials uncovered at Martin’s home were marked as US government property and contained highly classified information including Top Secret and Sensitive Compartmented Information (SCI).
Investigators also have claimed to have located government property with a combined value of over $1,000, which Martin allegedly stole. If convicted, he faces up to 11 years in prison for the theft of government property and the removal of classified material.
Snowden himself took to Twitter to comment on the arrest. In a tweet, he said the news of Martin’s arrest “is huge” and asked, “Did the FBI secretly arrest the person behind the reports [that the] NSA sat on huge flaws in US products?” It is currently unknown if Martin was connected to those reports as well.
It also remains to be seen what Martin’s motivations were in removing classified data from the NSA. Though many suspect that he planned to follow in Snowden’s footsteps, the government will more likely argue that he had planned to commit espionage by selling state secrets to “adversaries.”
According to the New York Times article on the arrest, Russia, China, Iran, and North Korea are named as examples of the “adversaries” who would have been targeted by the NSA codes that Martin is accused of stealing.
However, Snowden revealed widespread US spying on foreign governments including several US allies such as France and Germany. This suggests that the stolen “source codes” were likely utilized on a much broader scale.
The Clinton Chronicles October 10 2016 | From: JeremiahFilms The Clinton Chronicles: An Investigation into the Alleged Criminal Activities of Bill Clinton is a 1994 film that accused Bill Clinton of a range of crimes. Back in '94 these criminal psychopaths were just getting warmed up, as history now attests...
Many people involved in the research and investigations reported by this film have been murdered or died under questionable circumstances.
The names and faces of the key players who Clinton used to build his Circle of Power - as well as those who got in his way and lost their jobs, reputations, virtue and lives!
From Whitewater to ADFA (Clinton political Machine).
From millions in drug smuggling in Mena, Arkansas. To Money laundering with the BCCI.
From Gennifer Flowers to Paula Jones.
From Vince Foster’s “Suicide” to the gangland slaying of private investigator Jerry Parks.
The documentary uncovers the shocking truth the controlled media and Clintons don’t want you to know!
Wikileaks Releases Over 2,000 Emails From Clinton Campaign Chair As State Department Releases Deleted Emails
October 9 2016 | From: RT The internet whistleblowing group Wikileaks released over 2,000 emails involving Hillary Clinton campaign chairman John Podesta.
The release comes the same day the State Department published 350 emails previously deleted from Clinton's private server.
Related: Assange: WikiLeaks to release all US election docs by November 8
WikiLeaks will release documents on the US presidential elections before November 8, the group’s founder, Julian Assange, said in an eagerly anticipated address in Berlin to mark WikiLeaks’ 10th anniversary.
At first inspection the emails date as far back as 2008 to 2016 and cover the gamut from the mundane like "Hillary Clinton’s Chipotle Order” to “Call with HRC” to “My position on the Iran deal” sent from Nancy Rotering to John Podesta.
Wikileaks said Podesta is a long-term associate of the Clintons and served as Bill Clinton’s chief of staff from 1998 to 2001.
The State Department released 350 pages of Clinton’s emails on Friday, following a court order last month.
Newly disclosed emails show top Obama administration officials in close contact with Clinton’s presidential campaign in 2015 about potential fallout from the former secretary of state’s use of a private email server.
According to those email disclosures, the White House was instructing Secretary of State John Kerry to avoid questions about Clinton’s email arrangements, according to the Wall Street Journal.
The emails were obtained by the Republican National Committee as part of a Freedom of Information Act lawsuit seeking records of Clinton’s time in office.
Among them is an email in 2011 about a discussion paper from Huma Abedin on thoughts on post-Gaddafi Assistance & Governance which talked about how to form a new Libyan government, work on a constitution, shore up oil contracts to revenue, understand past conflicts with the Gaddafi administration and its alleged failure share hydrocarbon dollars, and the theft of private property from members of the monarchy.
Podesta served during Bill Clinton administration. Wikileaks warned on its 10th anniversary it would be releasing more emails.
How Can We Stop Drug Trafficking When It’s The CIA That’s Running The Show / The Philippines Fight The Cabal
October 9 2016 | From: Geopolitics
Historically, illegal drugs were being used to destroy sovereign countries, and by now the Philippines’ war on drugs is a regular headline by CIA funded journalists and media networks, and a constant object for criticism of the Soros’ Open Society Foundation funded pseudo-non-government organizations, for being brutal and violative of human rights.
Those same critics, however, failed to put their money where their mouth is, especially when it comes to helping the Duterte government rehabilitate close to a million drug surrendered.
They would rather focus our attention into the 3,700 deaths, some of which are the direct result of the decisive police action, and the rest were victims of the drug syndicates who are now cleaning their own ranks from squealers, i.e. those who have surrendered and subsequently named their suppliers.
The same bleeding hearts who chose to ignore the fact that the statistics related to crime are just the same as in past administrations.
Only this time it is the criminals who are dying, because once a poor brat is hooked into meth, he must do whatever he can get his fix for the day, which include cell phone snatching, daylight robbery, etc.
Other sordid crimes relating to meth addiction were also brought to light including cannibalism, and in the realm of politics, it has sent a former justice secretary to the present senate, on top of congressmen and mayors who are already funded with drug money for years.
In short, the Philippines’ war on drugs is a necessary measure that must be taken before the country plunges completely into another failed state.
Still at 100th day in office, the Duterte government is able to reduce the crime rate to 50% nationwide using only the national budget crafted by his predecessor.
The same budget, which does not include the establishment of rehabilitation centers necessary to help the projected 4 million drug dependents, and for whom the US, EU and UN “human rights advocates” could help more than just paying lip service to the 3,750 so called victims of extrajudicial killings.
To those who would rather criticize the sensible actions of the Philippine government that is enjoying 97% trust rating, are you really raising concerns over human rights vilolations, or just in it to protect the illegal drug industry?
CIA Drug Trafficking Exposed by Political Prisoner
The Real Drug Lords: A brief history of CIA involvement in the Drug Trade
1947 to 1951, France
According to Alfred W. McCoy in The Politics of Heroin in Southeast Asia, CIA arms, money, and disinformation enabled Corsican criminal syndicates in Marseille to wrestle control of labor unions from the Communist Party.
The Corsicans gained political influence and control over the docks - ideal conditions for cementing a long-term partnership with mafia drug distributors, which turned Marseille into the postwar heroin capital of the Western world. Marseille’s first heroin laboratones were opened in 1951, only months after the Corsicans took over the waterfront.
Early 1950s, Southeast Asia
The Nationalist Chinese army, organized by the CIA to wage war against Communist China, became the opium barons of The Golden Triangle (parts of Burma, Thailand and Laos), the world’s largest source of opium and heroin.
Air America, the ClA’s principal airline proprietary, flew the drugs all over Southeast Asia. (See Christopher Robbins, Air America, Avon Books, 1985, chapter 9)
1950s to early 1970s, Indochina
During U.S. military involvement in Laos and other parts of Indochina, Air America flew opium and heroin throughout the area. Many Gl’s in Vietnam became addicts. A laboratory built at CIA headquarters in northern Laos was used to refine heroin. After a decade of American military intervention, Southeast Asia had become the source of 70 percent of the world’s illicit opium and the major supplier of raw materials for America’s booming heroin market.
1973-80, Australia
The Nugan Hand Bank of Sydney was a CIA bank in all but name. Among its officers were a network of US generals, admirals and CIA men, including fommer CIA Director William Colby, who was also one of its lawyers.
With branches in Saudi Arabia, Europe, Southeast Asia, South America and the U.S., Nugan Hand Bank financed drug trafficking, money laundering and international arms dealings. In 1980, amidst several mysterious deaths, the bank collapsed, $50 million in debt. (See Jonathan Kwitny, The Crimes of Patriots: A True Tale of Dope, Dirty Money and the CIA, W.W. Norton & Co., 1 987.)
1970s and 1980s, Panama
For more than a decade, Panamanian strongman Manuel Noriega was a highly paid CIA asset and collaborator, despite knowledge by U.S. drug authorities as early as 1971 that the general was heavily involved in drug trafficking and money laundering.
Noriega facilitated ”guns-for-drugs” flights for the contras, providing protection and pilots, as well as safe havens for drug cartel otficials, and discreet banking facilities. U.S. officials, including then-ClA Director William Webster and several DEA officers, sent Noriega letters of praise for efforts to thwart drug trafficking (albeit only against competitors of his Medellin Cartel patrons).
The U.S. government only turned against Noriega, invading Panama in December 1989 and kidnapping the general once they discovered he was providing intelligence and services to the Cubans and Sandinistas. Ironically drug trafficking through Panama increased after the US invasion. (John Dinges, Our Man in Panama, Random House, 1991; National Security Archive Documentation Packet The Contras, Cocaine, and Covert Operations.)
1980s, Central America
The San Jose Mercury News series documents just one thread of the interwoven operations linking the CIA, the contras and the cocaine cartels. Obsessed with overthrowing the leftist Sandinista government in Nicaragua, Reagan administration officials tolerated drug trafficking as long as the traffickers gave support to the contras.
In 1989, the Senate Subcommittee on Terrorism, Narcotics, and International Operations (the Kerry committee) concluded a three-year investigation by stating:
“There was substantial evidence of drug smuggling through the war zones on the part of individual Contras, Contra suppliers, Contra pilots mercenaries who worked with the Contras, and Contra supporters throughout the region... U.S. officials involved in Central America failed to address the drug issue for fear of jeopardizing the war efforts against Nicaragua.
In each case, one or another agency of the U.S. govemment had intormation regarding the involvement either while it was occurring, or immediately thereafter. Senior U S policy makers were nit immune to the idea that drug money was a perfect solution to the Contras’ funding problems.”
- Drugs, Law Enforcement and Foreign Policy, a Report of the Senate Committee on Foreign Relations, Subcommittee on Terrorism, Narcotics and Intemational Operations, 1989
In Costa Rica, which served as the “Southern Front” for the contras (Honduras being the Northern Front), there were several different ClA-contra networks involved in drug trafficking. In addition to those servicing the Meneses-Blandon operation detailed by the Mercury News, and Noriega’s operation, there was CIA operative John Hull, whose farms along Costa Rica’s border with Nicaragua were the main staging area for the contras.
Hull and other ClA-connected contra supporters and pilots teamed up with George Morales, a major Miami-based Colombian drug trafficker who later admitted to giving $3 million in cash and several planes to contra leaders.
In 1989, after the Costa Rica government indicted Hull for drug trafficking, a DEA-hired plane clandestinely and illegally flew the CIA operative to Miami, via Haiti. The US repeatedly thwarted Costa Rican efforts to extradite Hull back to Costa Rica to stand trial.
Another Costa Rican-based drug ring involved a group of Cuban Amencans whom the CIA had hired as military trainers for the contras. Many had long been involved with the CIA and drug trafficking They used contra planes and a Costa Rican-based shrimp company, which laundered money for the CIA, to move cocaine to the U.S. Costa Rica was not the only route.
Guatemala, whose military intelligence service - closely associated with the CIA - harbored many drug traffickers, according to the DEA, was another way station along the cocaine highway.
Additionally, the Medellin Cartel’s Miami accountant, Ramon Milian Rodriguez, testified that he funneled nearly $10 million to Nicaraguan contras through long-time CIA operative Felix Rodriguez, who was based at Ilopango Air Force Base in El Salvador. The contras provided both protection and infrastructure (planes, pilots, airstrips, warehouses, front companies and banks) to these ClA-linked drug networks.
At least four transport companies under investigation for drug trafficking received US govemment contracts to carry non-lethal supplies to the contras. Southern Air Transport, “formerly” ClA-owned, and later under Pentagon contract, was involved in the drug running as well.
Cocaine-laden planes flew to Florida, Texas, Louisiana and other locations, including several militarv bases Designated as ‘Contra Craft,” these shipments were not to be inspected.
When some authority wasn’t clued in and made an arrest, powerful strings were pulled on behalf of dropping the case, acquittal, reduced sentence, or deportation.
1980s to early 1990s, Afghanistan
ClA-supported Moujahedeen rebels engaged heavily in drug trafficking while fighting against the Soviet-supported govemment and its plans to reform the very backward Afghan society. The Agency’s principal client was Gulbuddin Hekmatyar, one of the leading druglords and leading heroin refiner.
CIA supplied trucks and mules, which had carried arms into Afghanistan, were used to transport opium to laboratories along the Afghan Pakistan border.
The output provided up to one half of the heroin used annually in the United States and three-quarters of that used in Western Europe.
US officials admitted in 1990 that they had failed to investigate or take action against the drug operabon because of a desire not to offend their Pakistani and Afghan allies. In 1993, an official of the DEA called Afghanistan the new Colombia of the drug world.
Mid-1980s to early 1990s, Haiti
While working to keep key Haitian military and political leaders in power, the CIA turned a blind eye to their clients’ drug trafficking. In 1986, the Agency added some more names to its payroll by creating a new Haitian organization, the National Intelligence Service (SIN).
SIN was purportedly created to fight the cocaine trade, though SIN officers themselves engaged in the trafficking, a trade aided and abetted by some of the Haitian military and political leaders.
Washington’s Hidden Agenda: Restore the Drug Trade
In 2014 the Afghan opium cultivation has once again hit a record high, according to the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime’s 2014 Afghan Opium Survey.
“In the course of the last four years, there has been a surge in Afghan opium production. The Vienna based UN Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC) reveals that poppy cultivation in 2012 extended over an area of more than 154,000 hectares, an increase of 18% over 2011. A UNODC spokesperson confirmed in 2013 that opium production is heading towards record levels."
According to the 2012 Afghanistan Opium Survey released in November 2012 by the Ministry of Counter Narcotics (MCN) and the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC). potential opium production in 2012 was of the order of 3,700 tons, a decline of 18 percent in relation to 2001, according to UNODC data.
There is reason to believe that this figure of 3,700 tons is grossly underestimated. Moreover, it contradicts the UNOCD’s own predictions of record harvests over an extended area of cultivation.
While bad weather and damaged crops may have played a role as suggested by the UNODC, based on historical trends, the potential production for an area of cultivation of 154,000 hectares, should be well in excess of 6000 tons. With 80,000 hectares in cultivation in 2003, production was already of the order of 3600 tons.
It is worth noting that UNODC has modified the concepts and figures on opium sales and heroin production, as outlined by the European Monitoring Centre for Drugs and Drug Addiction (EMCDDA).
“A change in UN methodology in 2010 resulted in a sharp downward revision of Afghan heroin production estimates for 2004 to 2011. UNODC used to estimate that the entire global opium crop was processed into heroin, and provided global heroin production estimates on that basis.
Before 2010, a global conversion rate of about 10 kg of opium to 1 kg of heroin was used to estimate world heroin production (17). For instance, the estimated 4 620 tonnes of opium harvested worldwide in 2005 was thought to make it possible to manufacture 472 tonnes of heroin (UNODC, 2009a).
However, UNODC now estimates that a large proportion of the Afghan opium harvest is not processed into heroin or morphine but remains ‘available on the drug market as opium’
There is no evidence that a large percentage of opium production is no longer processed into heroin as claimed by the UN.
This revised UNODC methodology has served, – through the outright manipulation of statistical concepts – to artificially reduce the size of of the global trade in heroin.
According to the UNODC, quoted in the EMCDDA report:
“An estimated 3 400 tonnes of Afghan opium was not transformed into heroin or morphine in 2011. Compared with previous years, this is an exceptionally high proportion of the total crop, representing nearly 60 % of the Afghan opium harvest and close to 50 % of the global harvest in 2011."
What the UNODC, – whose mandate is to support the prevention of organized criminal activity – has done is to obfuscate the size and criminal nature of the Afghan drug trade, intimating – without evidence – that a large part of the opium is no longer channeled towards the illegal heroin marke.
In 2012 according to the UNODC, farmgate prices for opium were of the order of 196 per kg.
Each kg. of opium produces 100 grams of pure heroin. The US retail prices for heroin (with a low level of purity) is, according to UNODC of the order of $172 a gram. The price per gram of pure heroin is substantially higher.
The profits are largely reaped at the level of the international wholesale and retail markets of heroin as well as in the process of money laundering in Western banking institutions.
The revenues derived from the global trade in heroin constitute a multibillion dollar bonanza for financial institutions and organized crime.
The following article first published in May 2005 provides a background on the history of the Afghan opium trade which continues to this date to be protected by US-NATO occupation forces on behalf of powerful financial interests.
The Spoils of War: Afghanistan’s Multibillion Dollar Heroin Trade
Since the US led invasion of Afghanistan in October 2001, the Golden Crescent opium trade has soared. According to the US media, this lucrative contraband is protected by Osama, the Taliban, not to mention, of course, the regional warlords, in defiance of the “international community”.
The heroin business is said to be “filling the coffers of the Taliban”. In the words of the US State Department:
“Opium is a source of literally billions of dollars to extremist and criminal groups… [C]utting down the opium supply is central to establishing a secure and stable democracy, as well as winning the global war on terrorism,”
- Statement of Assistant Secretary of State Robert Charles. Congressional Hearing, 1 April 2004
According to the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNODC), opium production in Afghanistan in 2003 is estimated at 3,600 tons, with an estimated area under cultivation of the order of 80,000 hectares. (UNODC at www.unodc.org/unodc ). An even larger bumper harvest is predicted for 2004.
The State Department suggests that up to 120 000 hectares were under cultivation in 2004. (Congressional Hearing, op cit):
“We could be on a path for a significant surge. Some observers indicate perhaps as much as 50 percent to 100 percent growth in the 2004 crop over the already troubling figures from last year.”
(Ibid)
“Operation Containment“
In response to the post-Taliban surge in opium production, the Bush administration has boosted its counter terrorism activities, while allocating substantial amounts of public money to the Drug Enforcement Administration’s West Asia initiative, dubbed “Operation Containment.”
The various reports and official statements are, of course, blended in with the usual “balanced” self critique that “the international community is not doing enough”, and that what we need is “transparency”.
The headlines are “Drugs, warlords and insecurity overshadow Afghanistan’s path to democracy”. In chorus, the US media is accusing the defunct “hard-line Islamic regime”, without even acknowledging that the Taliban – in collaboration with the United Nations – had imposed a successful ban on poppy cultivation in 2000.
Opium production declined by more than 90 per cent in 2001.
In fact the surge in opium cultivation production coincided with the onslaught of the US-led military operation and the downfall of the Taliban regime. From October through December 2001, farmers started to replant poppy on an extensive basis.
The success of Afghanistan’s 2000 drug eradication program under the Taliban had been acknowledged at the October 2001 session of the UN General Assembly (which took place barely a few days after the beginning of the 2001 bombing raids). No other UNODC member country was able to implement a comparable program:
“Turning first to drug control, I had expected to concentrate my remarks on the implications of the Taliban’s ban on opium poppy cultivation in areas under their control…
We now have the results of our annual ground survey of poppy cultivation in Afghanistan. This year’s production [2001] is around 185 tons.
This is down from the 3300 tons last year [2000], a decrease of over 94 per cent. Compared to the record harvest of 4700 tons two years ago, the decrease is well over 97 per cent.
Any decrease in illicit cultivation is welcomed, especially in cases like this when no displacement, locally or in other countries, took place to weaken the achievement.”
- Remarks on behalf of UNODC Executive Director at the UN General Assembly, Oct 2001
United Nations’ Coverup
In the wake of the US invasion, shift in rhetoric. UNODC is now acting as if the 2000 opium ban had never happened:
“The battle against narcotics cultivation has been fought and won in other countries and it [is] possible to do so here [in Afghanistan], with strong, democratic governance, international assistance and improved security and integrity.”
- Statement of the UNODC Representative in Afghanistan at the :February 2004 International Counter Narcotics Conference, www.unodc.org/pdf/afg
In fact, both Washington and the UNODC now claim that the objective of the Taliban in 2000 was not really “drug eradication” but a devious scheme to trigger “an artificial shortfall in supply”, which would drive up World prices of heroin.
Ironically, this twisted logic, which now forms part of a new “UN consensus”, is refuted by a report of the UNODC office in Pakistan, which confirmed, at the time, that there was no evidence of stockpiling by the Taliban. (Deseret News, Salt Lake City, Utah. 5 October 2003)
Washington’s Hidden Agenda: Restore the Drug Trade
In the wake of the 2001 US bombing of Afghanistan, the British government of Tony Blair was entrusted by the G-8 Group of leading industrial nations to carry out a drug eradication program, which would, in theory, allow Afghan farmers to switch out of poppy cultivation into alternative crops. The British were working out of Kabul in close liaison with the US DEA’s “Operation Containment”.
The UK sponsored crop eradication program is an obvious smokescreen. Since October 2001, opium poppy cultivation has skyrocketed. The presence of occupation forces in Afghanistan did not result in the eradication of poppy cultivation. Quite the opposite.
The Taliban prohibition had indeed caused “the beginning of a heroin shortage in Europe by the end of 2001″, as acknowledged by the UNODC.
Heroin is a multibillion dollar business supported by powerful interests, which requires a steady and secure commodity flow. One of the “hidden” objectives of the war was precisely to restore the CIA sponsored drug trade to its historical levels and exert direct control over the drug routes.
Immediately following the October 2001 invasion, opium markets were restored. Opium prices spiraled. By early 2002, the opium price (in dollars/kg) was almost 10 times higher than in 2000.
In 2001, under the Taliban opiate production stood at 185 tons, increasing to 3400 tons in 2002 under the US sponsored puppet regime of President Hamid Karzai.
While highlighting Karzai’s patriotic struggle against the Taliban, the media fails to mention that Karzai collaborated with the Taliban. He had also been on the payroll of a major US oil company, UNOCAL. In fact, since the mid-1990s, Hamid Karzai had acted as a consultant and lobbyist for UNOCAL in negotiations with the Taliban. According to the Saudi newspaper Al-Watan:
“Karzai has been a Central Intelligence Agency covert operator since the 1980s. He collaborated with the CIA in funneling U.S. aid to the Taliban as of 1994 when the Americans had secretly and through the Pakistanis [specifically the ISI] supported the Taliban’s assumption of power.”
- Quoted in Karen Talbot, U.S. Energy Giant Unocal Appoints Interim Government in Kabul, Global Outlook, No. 1, Spring 2002. p. 70. See also BBC Monitoring Service, 15 December 2001
History of the Golden Crescent Drug Trade
It is worth recalling the history of the Golden Crescent drug trade, which is intimately related to the CIA’s covert operations in the region since the onslaught of the Soviet-Afghan war and its aftermath.
Prior to the Soviet-Afghan war (1979-1989), opium production in Afghanistan and Pakistan was directed to small regional markets. There was no local production of heroin. (Alfred McCoy, Drug Fallout: the CIA’s Forty Year Complicity in the Narcotics Trade. The Progressive, 1 August 1997).
The Afghan narcotics economy was a carefully designed project of the CIA, supported by US foreign policy.
The story of the take down of the BCCI was told in the excellent film "The International"
As revealed in the Iran-Contra and Bank of Commerce and Credit International (BCCI) scandals, CIA covert operations in support of the Afghan Mujahideen had been funded through the laundering of drug money. “Dirty money” was recycled –through a number of banking institutions (in the Middle East) as well as through anonymous CIA shell companies –, into “covert money,” used to finance various insurgent groups during the Soviet-Afghan war, and its aftermath:
“Because the US wanted to supply the Mujahideen rebels in Afghanistan with stinger missiles and other military hardware it needed the full cooperation of Pakistan. By the mid-1980s, the CIA operation in Islamabad was one of the largest US intelligence stations in the World.
`If BCCI is such an embarrassment to the US that forthright investigations are not being pursued it has a lot to do with the blind eye the US turned to the heroin trafficking in Pakistan’, said a US intelligence officer."
(“The Dirtiest Bank of All,” Time, July 29, 1991, p. 22.)
Researcher Alfred McCoy’s study confirms that within two years of the onslaught of the CIA’s covert operation in Afghanistan in 1979;
“The Pakistan-Afghanistan borderlands became the world’s top heroin producer, supplying 60 per cent of U.S. demand. In Pakistan, the heroin-addict population went from near zero in 1979 to 1.2 million by 1985, a much steeper rise than in any other nation.
CIA assets again controlled this heroin trade. As the Mujahideen guerrillas seized territory inside Afghanistan, they ordered peasants to plant opium as a revolutionary tax.
Across the border in Pakistan, Afghan leaders and local syndicates under the protection of Pakistan Intelligence operated hundreds of heroin laboratories. During this decade of wide-open drug-dealing, the U.S. Drug Enforcement Agency in Islamabad failed to instigate major seizures or arrests.
U.S. officials had refused to investigate charges of heroin dealing by its Afghan allies because U.S. narcotics policy in Afghanistan has been subordinated to the war against Soviet influence there.
In 1995, the former CIA director of the Afghan operation, Charles Cogan, admitted the CIA had indeed sacrificed the drug war to fight the Cold War..."
"...‘Our main mission was to do as much damage as possible to the Soviets. We didn’t really have the resources or the time to devote to an investigation of the drug trade,’ I don’t think that we need to apologize for this. Every situation has its fallout.
There was fallout in terms of drugs, yes. But the main objective was accomplished. The Soviets left Afghanistan.’”
(McCoy, op cit)
The role of the CIA, which is amply documented, is not mentioned in official UNODC publications, which focus on internal social and political factors. Needless to say, the historical roots of the opium trade have been grossly distorted.
According to the UNODC, Afghanistan’s opium production has increased, more than 15-fold since 1979. In the wake of the Soviet-Afghan war, the growth of the narcotics economy has continued unabated. The Taliban, which were supported by the US, were initially instrumental in the further growth of opiate production until the 2000 opium ban.
This recycling of drug money was used to finance the post-Cold War insurgencies in Central Asia and the Balkans including Al Qaeda.
Narcotics: Second to Oil and the Arms Trade
The revenues generated from the CIA sponsored Afghan drug trade are sizeable. The Afghan trade in opiates constitutes a large share of the worldwide annual turnover of narcotics, which was estimated by the United Nations to be of the order of $400-500 billion.
(Douglas Keh, Drug Money in a Changing World, Technical document No. 4, 1998, Vienna UNDCP, p. 4. See also United Nations Drug Control Program, Report of the International Narcotics Control Board for 1999, E/INCB/1999/1 United Nations, Vienna 1999, p. 49-51, and Richard Lapper, UN Fears Growth of Heroin Trade, Financial Times, 24 February 2000).
At the time these UN figures were first brought out (1994), the (estimated) global trade in drugs was of the same order of magnitude as the global trade in oil.
The IMF estimated global money laundering to be between 590 billion and 1.5 trillion dollars a year, representing 2-5 percent of global GDP. (Asian Banker, 15 August 2003). A large share of global money laundering as estimated by the IMF is linked to the trade in narcotics.
Based on recent figures (2003), drug trafficking constitutes:
“The third biggest global commodity in cash terms after oil and the arms trade.”
- The Independent, 29 February 2004
Moreover, the above figures including those on money laundering, confirm that the bulk of the revenues associated with the global trade in narcotics are not appropriated by terrorist groups and warlords, as suggested by the UNODC report.
There are powerful business and financial interests behind narcotics. From this standpoint, geopolitical and military control over the drug routes is as strategic as oil and oil pipelines.
However, what distinguishes narcotics from legal commodity trade is that narcotics constitutes a major source of wealth formation not only for organised crime but also for the US intelligence apparatus, which increasingly constitutes a powerful actor in the spheres of finance and banking.
In turn, the CIA, which protects the drug trade, has developed complex business and undercover links to major criminal syndicates involved in the drug trade.
In other words, intelligence agencies and powerful business syndicates allied with organized crime, are competing for the strategic control over the heroin routes. The multi-billion dollar revenues of narcotics are deposited in the Western banking system.
Most of the large international banks together with their affiliates in the offshore banking havens launder large amounts of narco-dollars.
This trade can only prosper if the main actors involved in narcotics have “political friends in high places.” Legal and illegal undertakings are increasingly intertwined, the dividing line between “businesspeople” and criminals is blurred.
In turn, the relationship among criminals, politicians and members of the intelligence establishment has tainted the structures of the state and the role of its institutions.
Where does the money go? Who benefits from the Afghan opium trade?
This trade is characterized by a complex web of intermediaries. There are various stages of the drug trade, several interlocked markets, from the impoverished poppy farmer in Afghanistan to the wholesale and retail heroin markets in Western countries. In other words, there is a “hierarchy of prices” for opiates.
This hierarchy of prices is acknowledged by the US administration:
“Afghan heroin sells on the international narcotics market for 100 times the price farmers get for their opium right out of the field”.
(US State Department quoted by the Voice of America (VOA), 27 February 2004).
According to the UNODC, opium in Afghanistan generated in 2003 “an income of one billion US dollars for farmers and US$ 1.3 billion for traffickers, equivalent to over half of its national income.”
Consistent with these UNODC estimates, the average price for fresh opium was $350 a kg. (2002); the 2002 production was 3400 tons.
The UNDOC estimate, based on local farmgate and wholesale prices constitutes, however, a very small percentage of the total turnover of the multibillion dollar Afghan drug trade.
The UNODC, estimates “the total annual turn-over of international trade” in Afghan opiates at US$ 30 billion. An examination of the wholesale and retail prices for heroin in the Western countries suggests, however, that the total revenues generated, including those at the retail level, are substantially higher.
Wholesale Prices of Heroin in Western Countries
It is estimated that one kilo of opium produces approximately 100 grams of (pure) heroin. The US DEA confirms that;
“SWA [South West Asia meaning Afghanistan] heroin in New York City was selling in the late 1990s for $85,000 to $190,000 per kilogram wholesale with a 75 percent purity ratio."
- National Drug Intelligence Center
According to the US Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA):
“The price of SEA [South East Asian] heroin ranges from $70,000 to $100,000 per unit (700 grams) and the purity of SEA heroin ranges from 85 to 90 percent”
(ibid).
The SEA unit of 700 gr (85-90 % purity) translates into a wholesale price per kg. for pure heroin ranging between $115,000 and $163,000.
The DEA figures quoted above, while reflecting the situation in the 1990s, are broadly consistent with recent British figures. According to a report published in the Guardian (11 August 2002), the wholesale price of (pure) heroin in London (UK) was of the order of 50,000 pounds sterling, approximately $80,000 (2002).
Whereas as there is competition between different sources of heroin supply, it should be emphasized that Afghan heroin represents a rather small percentage of the US heroin market, which is largely supplied out of Colombia.
Retail Prices
United States
“The NYPD notes that retail heroin prices are down and purity is relatively high. Heroin previously sold for about $90 per gram but now sells for $65 to $70 per gram or less.
Anecdotal information from the NYPD indicates that purity for a bag of heroin commonly ranges from 50 to 80 percent but can be as low as 30 percent.
Information as of June 2000 indicates that bundles (10 bags) purchased by Dominican buyers from Dominican sellers in larger quantities (about 150 bundles) sold for as little as $40 each, or $55 each in Central Park.
DEA reports that an ounce of heroin usually sells for $2,500 to $5,000, a gram for $70 to $95, a bundle for $80 to $90, and a bag for $10. The DMP reports that the average heroin purity at the street level in 1999 was about 62 percent.”
The NYPD and DEA retail price figures seem consistent. The DEA price of $70-$95, with a purity of 62 percent translates into $112 to $153 per gram of pure heroin. The NYPD figures are roughly similar with perhaps lower estimates for purity.
It should be noted that when heroin is purchased in very small quantities, the retail price tends to be much higher. In the US, purchase is often by “the bag”; the typical bag according to Rocheleau and Boyum contains 25 milligrams of pure heroin.( Office of National Drug Control Policy )
A $10 dollar bag in NYC (according to the DEA figure quoted above) would convert into a price of $400 per gram, each bag containing 0.025gr. of pure heroin. (op cit). In other words, for very small purchases marketed by street pushers, the retail margin tends to be significantly higher. In the case of the $10 bag purchase, it is roughly 3 to 4 times the corresponding retail price per gram.($112-$153)
United Kingdom
In Britain, the retail street price per gram of heroin, according to British Police sources, “has fallen from £74 in 1997 to £61 [in 2004].” [i.e. from approximately $133 to $110, based on the 2004 rate of exchange] (Independent, 3 March 2004).
In some cities it was as low as £30-40 per gram with a low level of purity. (AAP News, 3 March 2004). According to Drugscope ( www.drugscope.org.uk ), the average price for a gram of heroin in Britain is between £40 and £90 ($72- $162 per gram) (The report does not mention purity). The street price of heroin was £60 per gram in April 2002 according to the National Criminal Intelligence Service.
The Hierarchy of Prices
We are dealing with a hierarchy of prices, from the farmgate price in the producing country, upwards, to the final retail street price. The latter is often 80-100 times the price paid to the farmer.
In other words, the opiate product transits through several markets from the producing country to the transshipment country(ies), to the consuming countries. In the latter, there are wide margins between “the landing price” at the point of entry, demanded by the drug cartels and the wholesale prices and the retail street prices, protected by Western organized crime.
The Global Proceeds of the Afghan Narcotics Trade
In Afghanistan, the reported production of 3,600 tons of opium in 2003 would allow for the production of approximately 360,000 kg of pure heroin. Gross revenues accruing to Afghan farmers are roughly estimated by the UNODC to be of the order of $1 billion, with 1.3 billion accruing to local traffickers.
When sold in Western markets at a heroin wholesale price of the order of $100,000 a kg (with a 70 percent purity ratio), the global wholesale proceeds (corresponding to 3600 tons of Afghan opium) would be of the order of 51.4 billion dollars.
The latter constitutes a conservative estimate based on the various figures for wholesale prices in the previous section.
The total proceeds of the Afghan narcotics trade (in terms of total value added) is estimated using the final heroin retail price. In other words, the retail value of the trade is ultimately the criterion for measuring the importance of the drug trade in terms of revenue generation and wealth formation.
A meaningful estimate of the retail value, however, is almost impossible to ascertain due to the fact that retail prices vary considerably within urban areas, from one city to another and between consuming countries, not to mention variations in purity and quality (see above).
The evidence on retail margins, namely the difference between wholesale and retail values in the consuming countries, nonetheless, suggests that a large share of the total (money) proceeds of the drug trade are generated at the retail level.
In other words, a significant portion of the proceeds of the drug trade accrues to criminal and business syndicates in Western countries involved in the local wholesale and retail narcotics markets. And the various criminal gangs involved in retail trade are invariably protected by the “corporate” crime syndicates.
90 percent of heroin consumed in the UK is from Afghanistan. Using the British retail price figure from UK police sources of $110 a gram (with an assumed 50 percent purity level), the total retail value of the Afghan narcotics trade in 2003 (3,600 tons of opium) would be the order of 79.2 billion dollars. The latter should be considered as a simulation rather than an estimate.
Under this assumption (simulation), a billion dollars gross revenue to the farmers in Afghanistan (2003) would generate global narcotics earnings, – accruing at various stages and in various markets – of the order of 79.2 billion dollars.
These global proceeds accrue to business syndicates, intelligence agencies, organized crime, financial institutions, wholesalers, retailers, etc. involved directly or indirectly in the drug trade.
In turn, the proceeds of this lucrative trade are deposited in Western banks, which constitute an essential mechanism in the laundering of dirty money.
A very small percentage accrues to farmers and traders in the producing country. Bear in mind that the net income accruing to Afghan farmers is but a fraction of the estimated 1 billion dollar amount. The latter does not include payments of farm inputs, interest on loans to money lenders, political protection, etc.
The Share of the Afghan Heroin in the Global Drug Market
Afghanistan produces over 70 percent of the global supply of heroin and heroin represents a sizeable fraction of the global narcotics market, estimated by the UN to be of the order of $400-500 billion.
There are no reliable estimates on the distribution of the global narcotics trade between the main categories: Cocaine, Opium/Heroin, Cannabis, Amphetamine Type Stimulants (ATS), Other Drugs.
The Laundering of Drug Money
The proceeds of the drug trade are deposited in the banking system. Drug money is laundered in the numerous offshore banking havens in Switzerland, Luxembourg, the British Channel Islands, the Cayman Islands and some 50 other locations around the globe.
It is here that the criminal syndicates involved in the drug trade and the representatives of the world’s largest commercial banks interact. Dirty money is deposited in these offshore havens, which are controlled by the major Western commercial banks.
The latter have a vested interest in maintaining and sustaining the drug trade. (For further details, see Michel Chossudovsky, The Crimes of Business and the Business of Crimes, Covert Action Quarterly, Fall 1996)
Once the money has been laundered, it can be recycled into bona fide investments not only in real estate, hotels, etc, but also in other areas such as the services economy and manufacturing. Dirty and covert money is also funneled into various financial instruments including the trade in derivatives, primary commodities, stocks, and government bonds.
Concluding Remarks: Criminalization of US Foreign Policy
US foreign policy supports the workings of a thriving criminal economy in which the demarcation between organized capital and organized crime has become increasingly blurred.
The heroin business is not “filling the coffers of the Taliban” as claimed by US government and the international community: quite the opposite!
The proceeds of this illegal trade are the source of wealth formation, largely reaped by powerful business/criminal interests within the Western countries. These interests are sustained by US foreign policy.
Decision-making in the US State Department, the CIA and the Pentagon is instrumental in supporting this highly profitable multibillion dollar trade, third in commodity value after oil and the arms trade.
The Afghan drug economy is “protected”.
The heroin trade was part of the war agenda. What this war has achieved is to restore a compliant narco-State, headed by a US appointed puppet.
The powerful financial interests behind narcotics are supported by the militarisation of the world’s major drug triangles (and transshipment routes), including the Golden Crescent and the Andean region of South America (under the so-called Andean Initiative).
Inflation: The Most Evil Threat = Governments Robbing Their Citizens
October 8 2016 | From: FinalWakeUpCall Inflation, is an invisible, secret tax that not even 1% of common people understand. It is dangerous and most of the time a fatal disease.
If not under control in time, it can destroy society. No government is willing to accept responsibility for causing inflation. They always find an excuse; such as greedy businessmen, selfish trade unions, spendthrift consumers, Arab sheiks that have raised the price of oil, bad weather, or anything else that seems plausible.
Although all these can temporarily produce higher prices for individual items; they cannot produce continuing inflation for one very simple reason; None of the above alleged culprits possesses a printing press, to turn out pieces of paper called money; None can legally authorise a bookkeeper to make entries on ledgers that are the equivalent of those pieces of paper.
Over time, the result will be an immensely lower standard of living, resulting from the declining purchasing power and increasing commodity prices. Real wages will be much lower, as employers will not readily increase wages to keep up with inflation.
Under a paper system without backing, the entire monetary system is controlled by the political class, which has the power to allocate capital or to deny it.
This implies that the people heading the world’s capital markets, rather than acting as capital allocators, have become mere speculative marionettes, whose strings are controlled by the well connected and the influential.
Inflation is a printing press phenomenon. The two important basic questions are:
Why do governments increase the quantity of money?
Why do they produce inflation when they understand the potential harm?
If the quantity of goods and services available for purchase – for short-term ‘output’ – were to increase as rapidly as the quantity of money, prices would tend to be stable.
Prices may fall gradually, as more became available, while people keep their wealth in the form of money. Inflation occurs when the quantity of money rises more rapidly than output and the more rapid the rise in the quantity of money, the greater the rate of inflation.
Output is limited by the physical and human resources available, and by the improvement in knowledge and capacity to use them. At best the output can grow only fairly slowly. The same is the case, although always temporarily and for a brief period of time, for money backed by a commodity. While, paper money has no limitation as does commodity-backed money.
Inflation is a Monetary Phenomenon:
In short; Inflation is primarily a monetary phenomenon, produced by a more rapid increase in the quantity of money than in output. Excessive monetary growth produces inflation, caused by governments. – In general, inflation is worse than a financial crisis.
Taxpayers’ money is spent for nothing without reform in sight; Increase in unemployment, as businesses go bankrupt. – Bankers that caused the 2008 financial crisis were bailed out with people’s money and their managers were left in charge who in turn were taking on even more risks with taxpayer’s deposits in order to rake up even larger bonuses.
Eventually these schemes will result in a massive inflation, never witnessed before. The debt is structural; it’s irresolvable, there is no way to repair this economy.
Inflation is Legalised Theft:
Inflation is nothing more than legalised theft by your government; inflation is only two percent, is what the Statistics suggest. But these numbers don’t show the truth. Today’s real inflation rate is probably closer to 9 %, maybe even higher.
Who knows? All published inflation data are a blatant lie, as these numbers are made up to suit the government.
Showing lower inflation in statistics looks better. The theft committed by governments is concealed.
When central banks print reserves far in excess of domestic savings, the result is inevitably inflation. The more they print, the more capital is available forinstitutions – central banks – to invest.
This creates massive asset inflation, in the price of assets, as central bankers buy – bonds, stocks, and real estate – to push economies upwards all around the world. – Instead of triggering an immediate currency flight, as seen in Argentina or Zimbabwe, this inflation has produced an investment-generated boom.
If additional government spending was financed either by taxes or by borrowing from the public, that would not lead to more rapid monetary growth. In this case the government would have more to spend, while the public would have less.
But the easy way out is increasing the quantity of money, because that’s more attractive since the public doesn’t understand the severe implications, and it seems like magic, like getting something for nothing! But the fact of the matter is that the holders of the money pay for the extra spending, as the extra money raises prices when it is injected into the economy.
Moreover, inflation indirectly yields extra revenue by automatically raising effective tax revenues, as income from the people goes up to compensate for inflation, and people are consequently pushed into higher tax rate brackets.
Additionally, there is the benefit of paying off debt with less valuable currency – less purchasing power – as less valuable units are paying for original units that were more valuable.
Reduction of Monetary Growth:
The cure for inflation is the reduction in the rate of monetary growth, as this is the cause of inflation. Eventually it is a curable disease. Although the bad effects – a temporarily lower economic growth, and higher unemployment would be felt first, the good effects – a lower to zero inflation – would come later.
This would result in a healthier economy, with the potential for rapid noninflationary growth.
But as usual there is the lack of a true desire to cure the addiction of free money, resulting in this disease. In a sense people enjoy inflation. Although they would like to see the prices of goods they buy go down, or at least stop going up, they are more than happy to see the prices of the things they own or sell go up.
Inflation is Destructive:
One reason inflation is so destructive is because while some people benefit greatly, other people suffer. Society is divided into winners and losers. The winners regard the good things that happen to them as the natural result of their own foresight, prudence, and initiative.
They regard the bad things; the rise of prices of goods purchased, as caused by forces outside their control. Almost everyone will say they are opposed to inflation. What they generally mean is that they are opposed to the bad things that have happened to them due to certain effects of inflation.
The paper value of homes is rising. With a mortgage, the interest rate generally is below the rate of inflation. As a result of this, inflation in effect is paying off the mortgage interest payments as well the principal. This effect is an advantage to the home owner, as his equity in the house goes up rapidly. The flip side of the coin is that an interest rate below inflation results in a loss for savers.
As inflation accelerates, rather sooner than later, it is causing so much damage to the fabric of society, by creating so much injustice, and suffering.
The Side-Effects:
Everywhere one looks it is repeatedly published that unemployment and slow growth are cures for inflation; that all alternativemeasures taken will result in more inflation or higher unemployment, which is nonsense. The truth is that slow growth and high unemployment are not cures for inflation. They are the side-effects of a successful cure of a diseased economy.
The general signal of increasing demand will be confused with the specific signals reflecting changes in relative demands. That is why the initial side effect of faster monetary growth is the appearance of prosperity and greater employment.
– When it is discovered that the rise in wages does not coincide with higher demand, the flaw in the system is discovered. Wages and prices are higher not because of higher demand, but primarily to allow for the rises in the pricesof goods they buy.
Subsequently people are off on a price-wage spiral that itself effectively is inflation, and by no means the cause of it. If monetary growth does not speed up faster, the initial stimulus to employment and output will be replaced by the opposite; both will go down in response to the higher prices and wages.
By the way; governments can actually not create jobs, they can only steal from people and give it to others.
If it were politically profitable and feasible to generate a 10% inflation rate, the temptation would be great if inflation indeed reached this level, to raise it to 11, or 12 or 15 %. Zero inflation is a politically feasible objective; 10% is not.
This is the verdict of experience. Nevertheless, central bankers create excessive quantities of money, as they tell us the world needs more inflation to fight deflationary forces, which basically is nonsense as the deflationary forces are the result of the increase of monetary supply.
The Best Solution to Create Inflation:
Moreover, if they want to create inflation, there is no need for excessive money printing. They can create inflation instantly byraising the price of gold, which is the easiest way to create inflation.
A higher dollar price for gold is practically the definition of inflation. The Fed would just declare the price of gold to be, say, $5,000 an ounce and make the price stick using the gold in Fort Knox – assuming it is still there? – Their printing press would maintain a two-way market.
The Fed could sell gold when it hits $5,050 an ounce and buy gold when it hits $4,950 an ounce. That’s a 1% band around the target price of $5,000 an ounce. The band and the use of physical gold would make the target price stick.
A higher price for gold is the same as a lower value for the dollar. The world of $5,000-per-ounce gold also means $10 per gallon gas at the station and $40 for a movie ticket. Nothing happens without consequences.
Santa Claus Doesn’t Exist:
Inflation, in contrast to what economic leaders lead us to believe, is not equivalent to Santa Claus. It can’t bring gifts to everyone. All it does is shift the benefits of the economy around. In the immortal words of President Obama: “inflation spreads the wealth around a little.”
Inflation penalises wage earners, savers, and retirees to the benefit of asset owners. It benefits debtors at the expense of creditors. There’s no net increase in the nation’s wealth. One group is merely taxed for the benefit of the other. This is sold as a benefit to the country by governments. They have to sell it to the people because without inflation they won’t be able to pay their bills.
However, wealth cannot be created by a printing press. This will cause price inflation, asset inflation, credit collapse – or a mixture of all three. Everyone knows this. Nevertheless, our leaders pretend otherwise.
If credit is expanded in excess of savings, it historically always ends in a collapse. So there should be no surprise. When creditors begin to ask the critical question: Can these debts really be financed? Will we get our savings back? If credit has been expanded radically beyond savings, as is the case today in the developed world, the answer is always NO.
It is true that dramatic increases in the money supply eventually lead to inflation. But the key word here is “eventually.” Sometimes it can take a while. The extent of the delay depends on general conditions, and a very important concept known as “monetary velocity.”
Inflation and deflation are not purely products of how much money is in the system. They are products of how fast this moneyis moving through the system.
When banks are lending, businesses are borrowing, and consumers are spending, money changes hands quickly. Under these conditions, the monetary velocity is high.
Conversely, when banks don’t lend the money, businesses are hunkered down, and consumers are saving or paying down debt, money does not change hands quickly. It moves slowly. If the economy grinds to a near halt, as is the case today, eventually money stops changing hands completely.
Inflation is not purely from an increase in the money supply. Sufficient monetary velocity is required to spur a general and persistent increase in the price of goods and services. Without velocity – if money doesn’t move through the system – there is no reason for prices to rise.
The point is that it’s not just about how many units are being printed. It’s about where those units go and how fast they are moving through the system. The end game may indeed be accelerating monetary velocity. The cumulative effect on the rise in prices and a spectacular loss of faith in the system will result in a decline in the desire for owning dollars will plummet, and that means hyperinflation.
How Much Money is in Circulation?
Ever wondered how much money exists? This video compares the world’s richest people, the biggest companies, physical currency, the gold market, the stock market, global debt, and more to give you a sense of the quantity of money that actually exists.
The Flawed Germ Theory; Unfortunately The Basis Of Modern Medicine
October 8 2016 | From: Tbyil Ever wonder why modern medicine is not helping the populations of the western world to become healthier? Maybe the foundation for health is wrong.
Pasteur's germ theory of disease has helped forward the one germ for one disease concept that has raised Big Pharma to the wealthy business of developing drugs for one germ to purportedly cure one disease while causing autoimmune and chronic diseases to flourish from destroyed immune systems.
Germ phobia, here comes the flu, get your flu shots or you may wind up as one of the 36,000 who manage to die from it each year according to the CDC. It's never more, never less - 36,000 deaths each flu season. Isn't there something fishy about that?
Then get out the antibiotics for every case of the sniffles. Don't forget the pharmaceutical antiviral Tamiflu, expensive, not so effective, and dangerous. The germ theory has turned out to be great for the pharmaceutical business model.
Now we have those nasty mosquitoes carrying the Zika virus, which has no real history of being problematic. So spray everything and everyone with toxic chemicals that do cause disease. And let's not forget those new vaccines. Over a billion dollars of government money has been recently set aside for Zika virus research and vaccines.
Why the Germ Theory is Flawed
The following quote is used by Dr. Robert O. Young in his book Sick and Tired?: Reclaim Your Inner Terrain:
“If I could live my life over again, I would devote it to proving that germs seek their natural habitat - diseased tissue - rather than being the cause of the diseased tissue; e.g., mosquitoes seek the stagnant water, but do not cause the pool to become stagnant.”
- Dr. Rudolph Virchow (Father of Pathology 1821 - 1902)
Pasteur was the original scammer of the germ theory, not considered a worthy scientist by his peers. But he had good press. Media bias and corruption are nothing new.
Other scientists, especially Claude Bernard, claimed the inner terrain, which includes overall and organ specific pH levels and all facets of the immune system countered Pasteur's one germ for one disease theory with claims of pleomorphism within damaged or diseased tissue, which the Medical Mafia and Big Pharma refused to acknowledge.
Pleomorphism was proven when Royal Raymond Rife's universal microscope in the late 1930s revealed structural changes in microbes, up to 16, according their host's environment. Microbes can start out as benign then alter themselves to survive if one's inner terrain is unhealthy.
In other words, inflammation and tissue degeneration with acidic pH levels attract pathogenic microbes or encourage existing ones into morphing as pathogenic microbes if already present and harmless or even beneficial. The germ theory hoax is the basis of modern pharmaceutical medicine and killing good food with pasteurization and irradiation.
Not only do our highly acidic junk and processed foods with add sugars promote acidic pH levels under 7.3, so do overworking, stress, and anger. The combination of our environmental toxic load and inadequate nutrition lead to the stagnant pools within our tissues that become the breeding grounds for existing or new pathogenic microbes to thrive.
Detoxing and seeking fresh whole foods with the proper supplements offer more disease protection from germs than all the vaccines in the world.
Vaccinations offer the following tradeoffs for thwarting germs: Death, lifelong disability, or most commonly autoimmune disease vulnerability.
Haven't you noticed? Autoimmune diseases and allergies have risen with the rise in vaccination schedules.
There have been studies in the USA among Amish children and in Europe among those raised on small dairy farms that demonstrate how being exposed to germs at an early age exercises the immune system and make it stronger, thus rendering natural immunization.
This is where rude, crude, over the top and hilarious George Carlin comes in:
Another Reason to Not Trust the CDC's Fear Mongering
Sharyl Attkinson was the news producer for CBS's Washington Bureau. During the Swine Flu “pandemic” of 2008-9, she was intent at getting to the truth of just how much of an epidemic it really was. Sharyl, who is now independent with her own website and her book Stonewalled in circulation, questioned the authenticity of the CDC's reportage on incidents of Swine Flu.
After being stonewalled by the CDC with her Freedom of Information (FOI) requests for detailed statistics on the Swine Flu, she and her CBS Washington Bureau news staff did an end around – they went directly to state health departments and discovered only a very few flu cases, mostly single digit numbers, tested positive for Swine Flu.
Those numbers were not nearly enough to justify claims of a level 6 pandemic, considered the most severe and dangerous international pandemic level.
Then the CDC attempted damage control by announcing they had stopped counting because there were millions of Swine Flu cases and they couldn't keep up with it.
Wow, if the first lie doesn't work then tell a bigger one, even if it doesn't make any sense at all. This incident forced Sharyl out of mainstream news. Can't question the CDC on mainstream TV.
You're better off sticking with alternative media and holistic health approaches for establishing a stronger immune system by lessening your toxic chemical load and increasing your nutritional level with organic foods and supplements.
Smoking Gun For Christchurch Killer Quake: Hillary Clinton Emails Show Advance Warning Of Christchurch Earthquake
October 7 2016 | From: MediaWhores / TheContrail Recently releases Hillary Clinton emails show US State Department advanced knowledge of the big Christchurch Earthquake on 22nd February 2011. This appears to be proof that the killer earthquake was a planned disaster "And on cue..."
The first email sent by the State Department to head of the department Hillary Clinton was sent a full 6 hours before the actual quake hit. Washington being 18 hours behind NZST. The second email was sent as the quake hit.
On the presumption the emails are real – this proves advanced knowledge by the US State Department of the Christchurch Earthquakes.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
Clinton Christchurch Earthquakes Emails – Source, Wikileaks
Sources for these emails are being actively and aggressively blocked worldwide. It seems they even knew the size of the quake: 6.3 – a possible reference to the Freemasonic Kabbalah number 666. There is substantial evidence that the quake was in fact much bigger than 6.3 magnitude.
Interestingly – the US disaster relief team “FEMA” was also in Christchurch the week before the big earthquake, and they flew out just hours before the earthquake hit – leaving behind their head disaster coordinator…
If this all sounds unbelievable to you – you probably need to do some research on “HAARP” the radio wave technology being used to influence weather, storms and some say even earthquakes world wide – and nothing new, Tesla was using similar technology last century.
EMF conditions before the Christchurch Earthquake on 14/2/16
More Confessions Of An Economic Hit Man: "This Time, They’re Coming For Your Democracy"
October 7 2016 | From: ZeroHedge Twelve years ago, John Perkins published his book, “Confessions of an Economic Hit Man.” Today, he says “things have just gotten so much worse.”
Twelve years ago, John Perkins published his book, Confessions of an Economic Hit Man, and it rapidly rose up The New York Times’ best-seller list.
In it, Perkins describes his career convincing heads of state to adopt economic policies that impoverished their countries and undermined democratic institutions. These policies helped to enrich tiny, local elite groups while padding the pockets of U.S.-based transnational corporations.
Perkins was recruited, he says, by the National Security Agency (NSA), but he worked for a private consulting company. His job as an undertrained, overpaid economist was to generate reports that justified lucrative contracts for U.S. corporations, while plunging vulnerable nations into debt.
Countries that didn’t cooperate saw the screws tightened on their economies. In Chile, for example, President Richard Nixon famously called on the CIA to “make the economy scream” to undermine the prospects of the democratically elected president, Salvador Allende.
If economic pressure and threats didn’t work, Perkins says, the jackals were called to either overthrow or assassinate the noncompliant heads of state. That is, indeed, what happened to Allende, with the backing of the CIA.
Perkins’ book has been controversial, and some have disputed some of his claims, including, for example, that the NSA was involved in activities beyond code making and breaking.
Perkins has just reissued his book with major updates. The basic premise of the book remains the same, but the update shows how the economic hit man approach has evolved in the last 12 years.
Among other things, U.S. cities are now on the target list. The combination of debt, enforced austerity, underinvestment, privatization, and the undermining of democratically elected governments is now happening here.
I couldn’t help but think about Flint, Michigan, under emergency management as I read The New Confessions of an Economic Hit Man.
I interviewed Perkins at his home in the Seattle area. In addition to being a recovering economic hit man, he is a grandfather and a founder and board member of Dream Change and The Pachamama Alliance, organizations that work for “a world that future generations will want to inherit.”
Sarah van Gelder: What’s changed in our world since you wrote the first Confessions of an Economic Hit Man?
John Perkins: Things have just gotten so much worse in the last 12 years since the first Confessions was written. Economic hit men and jackals have expanded tremendously, including the United States and Europe.
Back in my day we were pretty much limited to what we called the third world, or economically developing countries, but now it’s everywhere.
And in fact, the cancer of the corporate empire has metastasized into what I would call a failed global death economy. This is an economy that’s based on destroying the very resources upon which it depends, and upon the military. It’s become totally global, and it’s a failure.
van Gelder: So how has this switched from us being the beneficiaries of this hit-man economy, perhaps in the past, to us now being more of the victims of it?
Perkins: It’s been interesting because, in the past, the economic hit man economy was being propagated in order to make America wealthier and presumably to make people here better off, but as this whole process has expanded in the U.S. and Europe, what we’ve seen is a tremendous growth in the very wealthy at the expense of everybody else.
On a global basis we now know that 62 individuals have as many assets as half the world’s population.
We of course in the U.S. have seen how our government is frozen, it’s just not working. It’s controlled by the big corporations and they’ve really taken over. They’ve understood that the new market, the new resource, is the U.S. and Europe, and the incredibly awful things that have happened to Greece and Ireland and Iceland, are now happening here in the U.S.
We’re seeing this situation where we can have what statistically shows economic growth, and at the same time increased foreclosures on homes and unemployment.
van Gelder: Is this the same kind of dynamic about debt that leads to emergency managers who then turn over the reins of the economy to private enterprises? The same thing that you are seeing in third-world countries?
Perkins: Yes, when I was an economic hit man, one of the things that we did, we raised these huge loans for these countries, but the money never actually went to the countries, it went to our own corporations to build infrastructure in those countries.
And when the countries could not pay off their debt, we insisted that they privatize their water systems, their sewage systems, their electric systems.
Now we’re seeing that same thing happen in the United States. Flint, Michigan, is a very good example of that. This is not a U.S. empire, it’s a corporate empire protected and supported by the U.S. military and the CIA. But it is not an American empire, it’s not helping Americans. It’s exploiting us in the same way that we used to exploit all these other countries around the world.
van Gelder: So it seems like Americans are starting to get this. What is your sense about where the American public is in terms of readiness to do something?
Perkins: As I travel around the U.S., as I travel around the world, I see that people are really waking up. We’re getting it. We’re understanding that we live on a very fragile space station, and it’s got no shuttles; we can’t get off. We’ve got to fix it, we’ve got to take care of it, and we’re in the process of destroying it.
The big corporations are destroying it, but the big corporations are just run by people, and they’re vulnerable to us. If we really consider it, the market place is a democracy, if we just use it as such.
van Gelder: I want to push back on that one a little bit because so many corporations don’t sell to ordinary consumers, they sell to other companies or to governments, and so many corporations have such an entrenched reward system where if one person doesn’t perform by exploiting the earth they’ll simply get replaced with somebody else who does.
Perkins: I’ve recently been speaking at a number of corporate conferences. I hear time after time after time that many of them want to leave a green legacy. They’ve got children, they’ve got grandchildren, they understand we can’t go on like this.
So what they say is;
“Go out there, start consumer movements. What I want is to receive a hundred thousand emails from my customers saying, ’Hey, I love your product but I’m not going to buy it anymore until you pay your workers a fair wage in Indonesia, or wherever, or clean up the environment, or do something.’
And then I can take that to my board of directors and my big stockholders, to the people who really control whether I get hired or fired.”
van Gelder: I agree, and those campaigns, as you know, have been going on for decades now, and sometimes they have little incremental changes around the edge. But then we look back on it later and we see that there’s enormous resistance because of the profits to be made in continuing the system.
Perkins: I think we’ve seen tremendous changes, though. Just in the last few years, we’ve seen organic foods become very big. Twenty years ago they couldn’t make a go of it. We’ve seen women having bigger positions in corporations, and minorities, and we need to get better at this.
We’ve seen the labeling of many foods. GMOs aren’t included yet, but nutrition and calories and so forth are. And what we really need to do is convince corporations that they’ve got to have a new goal.
We’ve got to let corporations know what their job is: It’s to serve a public interest, and make a decent rate of return for investors. We need investors, but beyond that, every corporation should serve a public interest, should serve the earth, should serve future generations.
van Gelder: I want to ask you about the Trans-Pacific Partnership, and other trade deals. Is there any way that we can beat these things back so they don’t continue supercharging the corporate sphere at the expense of local democracies?
Perkins: They’re devastating; they give sovereignty to corporations over governments. It’s ridiculous.
We’re seeing terrible desperation from people in Central America trying to get away from a system that’s broken, primarily because our trade agreements and our policies toward Latin America have broken them.
And we’re seeing, of course, those similar things in the Middle East and in Africa, these waves of immigrants that are swarming into Europe from the Middle East. These terrible problems that have been created because of the greed of big corporations.
I was just in Central America and what we talk about in the U.S. as being an immigration problem is really a trade agreement problem.
They’re not allowed to impose tariffs under the trade agreements - NAFTA and CAFTA - but the U.S. is allowed to subsidize its farmers. Those governments can’t afford to subsidize their farmers. So our farmers can undercut theirs, and that’s destroyed the economies, and a number of other things, and that’s why we’ve got immigration problems.
van Gelder: Can you talk about the violence that people are fleeing in Central America, and how that links back to the role the U.S. has had there?
Perkins: Three or four years ago the CIA orchestrated a coup against the democratically elected president of Honduras, President Zelaya, because he stood up to Dole and Chiquita and some other big, global, basically U.S.-based corporations.
He wanted to raise the minimum wage to a reasonable level, and he wanted some land reform that would make sure that his own people were able to make money off their own land, rather than having big international corporations do it.
The big corporations couldn’t stand for this. He wasn’t assassinated but he was overthrown in a coup and sent to another country, and replaced by a terribly brutal dictator, and today Honduras is one of the most violent, homicidal countries in the hemisphere.
It’s frightening what we’ve done. And when that happens to a president, it sends a message to every other president throughout the hemisphere, and in fact throughout the world: Don’t mess with us.
Don’t mess with the big corporations. Either cooperate and get rich in the process, and have all your friends and family get rich in the process, or go get overthrown or assassinated. It’s a very strong message.
van Gelder: I wanted to ask about your time spent in Ecuador with indigenous people. I’m wondering if you could talk about how that experience has changed you?
Perkins: Many years ago when I was a Peace Corps volunteer in the Amazon with the Shuar indigenous people there, I was dying.
I got very ill, and my life was saved in one night by a shaman. I’d come out of business school this is 1968, ’69, and I had no idea what a shaman was, but it changed my life by helping me understand that what was killing me was a mindset - what they would call the dream.
I spent many years studying all this, and working with many different indigenous groups, and what I saw was the power of the mindset.
The shamans teach us - the indigenous people teach us - once you change the mindset, then it’s pretty easy to have the objective reality change around it. So, instead of the kind of economy we have now, a death economy, if we can change the mindset we can very quickly move into a life economy.
van Gelder: So what are the mechanisms by which a change in consciousness actually shifts things on the ground?
Perkins: Well, in my opinion the biggest catalyst that needs to go forward to change this is we’ve got to change the corporations. We’ve got to move from that goal that was stated by Milton Friedman in the 1970s, that the only responsibility of corporations is to maximize profits regardless of social and environmental costs.
We change the big corporations by telling them we’re not going to buy from you anymore unless you change your goal. No longer should your goal be to maximize profits regardless of social and environmental costs. Make a decent rate of return for your investors, but serve us, we the people, or we’re not buying from you.
van Gelder : You quote Tom Paine in your book: “If there must be trouble let it be in my day that my child may have peace.” Why did you decide to use that quote?
Perkins : Well, I think Tom Paine was brilliant in that statement. He understood how that would impact people. And he wrote that statement in December 1776.
Washington had lost just about every battle he ever fought; he wasn’t getting any support from the Continental Congress; they weren’t giving his men guns or ammunition or even blankets and shoes, and he was bogged down at Valley Forge. Paine realizes that he’s got to somehow write something that will rally people, and there’s nothing that rallies people more than to think about their children.
That to me is where we’re at right now. I’ve got a daughter and I’ve got an 8-year-old grandson. Bring on the trouble for me, OK, but let’s create a world they’re going to want to live in. And let’s understand that my 8-year-old grandson cannot have an environmentally sustainable and regenerative, socially just, fulfilling world unless every child on the planet has that.
And this is new. It used to be all we had to worry about was our local community, maybe our country. But we didn’t have to worry about the world. But what we know now is that we can’t have peace anywhere in the world, we can’t have peace in the U.S., unless everybody has peace.
Propaganda Techniques Of Empire + Politically Correct Language Control And The Rise Of The Third Reich
October 6 2016 | From: EurasiaReview / NaturalNews Washington’s quest for perpetual world power is underwritten by systematic and perpetual propaganda wars.
Every major and minor war has been preceded, accompanied and followed by unremitting government propaganda designed to secure public approval, exploit victims, slander critics, dehumanize targeted adversaries and justify its allies’ collaboration. In this paper we will discuss the most common recent techniques used to support ongoing imperial wars.
Role Reversal
A common technique, practiced by the imperial publicists, is to accuse the victims of the same crimes, which had been committed against them.
The well documented, deliberate and sustained US-EU aerial bombardment of Syrian government soldiers, engaged in operations against ISIS-terrorist, resulted in the deaths and maiming of almost 200 Syrian troops and allowed ISIS-mercenaries to overrun their camp.
In an attempt to deflect the Pentagon’s role in providing air cover for the very terrorists it claims to oppose, the propaganda organs cranked out lurid, but unsubstantiated, stories of an aerial attack on a UN humanitarian aid convoy, first blamed on the Syrian government and then on the Russians.
The evidence that the attack was most likely a ground-based rocket attack by ISIS terrorists did not deter the propaganda mills. This technique would turn US and European attention away from the documented criminal attack by the imperial bombers and present the victimized Syrian troops and pilots as international human rights criminals.
Hysterical Rants
Faced with world opprobrium for its wanton violation of an international ceasefire agreement in Syria, the imperial public spokespeople frequently resort to irrational outbursts at international meetings in order to intimidate wavering allies into silence and shut down any chance for reasonable debate resolving concrete issues among adversaries.
The current ‘US Ranter-in-Chief’ in the United Nations, is Ambassador Samantha Power, who launched a vitriolic diatribe against the Russians in order to sabotage a proposed General Assembly debate on the US deliberate violation (its criminal attack on Syrian troops) of the recent Syrian ceasefire. Instead of a reasonable debate among serious diplomats, the rant served to derail the proceedings.
Identity Politics to Neutralize Anti-Imperialist Movements
Empire is commonly identified with the race, gender, religion and ethnicity of its practioners. Imperial propagandists have frequently resorted to disarming and weakening anti-imperialist movements by co-opting and corrupting black, ethnic minority and women leaders and spokespeople.
The use of such ’symbolic’ tokens is based on the assumption that these are ‘representatives’ reflecting the true interests of so-called ‘marginalized minorities’ and can therefore presume to ’speak for the oppressed peoples of the world’.
The promotion of such compliant and respectable ‘minority members’ to the elite is then propagandized as a ‘revolutionary’, world liberating historical event – witness the ‘election’ of US President Barack Obama.
The rise of Obama to the presidency in 2008 illustrates how the imperial propagandists have used identity politics to undermine class and anti-imperialist struggles.
Under Obama’s historical black presidency, the US pursued seven wars against ‘people of color’ in South Asia, the Middle East and North Africa.
Over a million men and women of sub-Saharan black origin, whether Libyan citizens or contract workers for neighboring countries, were killed, dispossessed and driven into exile by US allies after the US-EU destroyed the Libyan state – in the name of humanitarian intervention.
Hundreds of thousands of Arabs have been bombed in Yemen, Syria and Iraq under President Obama, the so-called ‘historic black’ president.
Obama’s ‘predator drones’ have killed hundreds of Afghan and Pakistani villagers. Such is the power of ‘identity politics’ that ignominious Obama was awarded the ‘Nobel Peace Prize’.
Meanwhile, in the United States under Obama, racial inequalities between black and white workers (wages, unemployment, access to housing, health and educational services) have widened. Police violence against blacks intensified with total impunity for ‘killer cops’.
Over two million immigrant Latino workers have been expelled – breaking up hundreds of thousands of families– and accompanied by a marked increase of repression compared to earlier administrations.
Millions of black and white workers’ home mortgages were foreclosed while all of the corrupt banks were bailed out – at a greater rate than had occurred under white presidents.
This blatant, cynical manipulation of identity politics facilitated the continuation and deepening of imperial wars, class exploitation and racial exclusion. Symbolic representation undermined class struggles for genuine changes.
Past Suffering to Justify Contemporary Exploitation
Imperial propagandists repeatedly evoke the victims and abuses of the past in order to justify their own aggressive imperial interventions and support for the ‘land grabs’ and ethnic cleansing committed by their colonial allies – like Israel, among others.
The victims and crimes of the past are presented as a perpetual presence to justify ongoing brutalities against contemporary subject people.
The case of US-Israeli colonization of Palestine clearly illustrates how rabid criminality, pillage, ethnic cleansing and self-enrichment can be justified and glorified through the language of past victimization.
Propagandists in the US and Israel have created ‘the cult of the Holocaust’, worshiping a near century-old Nazi crime against Jews (as well as captive Slavs, Gypsies and other minorities) in Europe, to justify the bloody conquest and theft of Arab lands and sovereignty and engage in systematic military assaults against Lebanon and Syria.
Millions of Muslim and Christian Palestinians have been driven into perpetual exile. Elite, wealthy, well-organized and influential zionist Jews, with primary fealty to Israel, have successfully sabotaged every contemporary struggle for peace in the Middle East and have created real barriers for social democracy in the US through their promotion of militarism and empire building.
Those claiming to represent victims of the past have become among the most oppressive of contemporary elites. Using the language of ‘defense’, they promote aggressive forms of expansion and pillage.
They claim their monopoly on historic ’suffering’ has given them a ’special dispensation’ from the rules of civilized conduct: their cult of the Holocaust allows them to inflict immense pain on others while silencing any criticism with the accusation of ‘anti-Semitism’ and relentlessly punishing critics.
Their key role in imperial propaganda warfare is based on their claims of an exclusive franchise on suffering and immunity from the norms of justice.
Entertainment Spectacles on Military Platforms
Entertainment spectacles glorify militarism. Imperial propagandists link the public to unpopular wars promoted by otherwise discredited leaders. Sports events present soldiers dressed up as war heroes with deafening, emotional displays of ‘flag worship’ to celebrate the ongoing overseas wars of aggression.
These mind-numbing extravaganzas with crude elements of religiosity demand choreographed expressions of national allegiance from the spectators as a cover for continued war crimes abroad and the destruction of citizens’ economic rights at home.
Much admired, multi-millionaire musicians and entertainers of all races and orientations, present war to the masses with a humanitarian facade. The entertainers smiling faces serve genocide just as powerfully as the President’s benign and friendly face accompanies his embrace of militarism.
The propagandist message for the spectator is that ‘your favorite team or singer is there just for you… because our noble wars and valiant warriors have made you free and now they want you to be entertained.’
The old style of blatant bellicose appeals to the public is obsolete: the new propaganda conflates entertainment with militarism, allowing the ruling elite to secure tacit support for its wars without disturbing the spectators’ experience.
Do the Imperial Techniques of Propaganda Work?
How effective are the modern imperial propaganda techniques? The results seem to be mixed. In recent months, elite black athletes have begun protesting white racism by challenging the requirement for choreographed displays of flag worship. . . opening public controversy into the larger issues of police brutality and sustained marginalization.
Identity politics, which led to the election of Obama, may be giving way to issues of class struggle, racial justice, anti-militarism and the impact of continued imperial wars. Hysterical rants may still secure international attention, but repeated performances begin to lose their impact and subject the ‘ranter’ to ridicule.
The cult of victimology has become less a rationale for the multi-billion dollar US-tribute to Israel, than the overwhelming political and economic influence and thuggery of billionaire Zionist fundraisers who demand US politicians’ support for the state of Israel.
Brandishing identify politics may have worked the first few times, but inevitably black, Latino, immigrant and all exploited workers, all underpaid and overworked women and mothers reject the empty symbolic gestures and demand substantive socio-economic changes – and here they find common links with the majority of exploited white workers.
In other words, the existing propaganda techniques are losing their edge – the corporate media news is seen as a sham. Who follows the actor-soldiers and flag-worshipers once the game has begun?
The propagandists of empire are desperate for a new line to grab public attention and obedience. Could the recent domestic terror bombings in New York and New Jersey provoke mass hysteria and more militarization? Could they serve as cover for more wars abroad . . .?
A recent survey, published in Military Times, reported that the vast majority of active US soldiers oppose more imperial wars. They are calling for defense at home and social justice. Soldiers and veterans have even formed groups to support the protesting black athletes who have refused to participate in flag worship while unarmed black men are being killed by police in the streets.
Despite the multi-billion dollar electoral propaganda, over sixty percent of the electorate reject both major party candidates. The reality principle has finally started to undermine State propaganda.
Politically Correct Language Control And The Rise Of The Third Reich
Stunning new documentary reveals why we must stop the rise of safe spaces, social justice warriors and progressive fanaticism.
In a stunning new documentary released just today, I reveal how politically correct speech control (thought control) gave rise to Adolf Hitler and the Third Reich.
The film reveals how the phenomenon of progressive fanaticism -- safe spaces, social justice warriors, microaggressions, generation snowflake crybullies -- mirrors the Brownshirts of Nazi Germany and escalates demands for obedience into physical violence against innocents.
We're already seeing a similar phenomenon today with numerous Black Lives Matter terrorist shootings of police officers, beatings of innocent people merely because they are white, and calls for extreme acts of violence against police officers and Caucasians.
The aggressive, violent behavior of "progressive fanatics" is now mirroring the rise of the Third Reich that eventually led to genocide and the mass murder of millions.
FYI, "Nazi" means "National Socialism." The Third Reich is often incorrectly described as a "far right" regime. It was actually an extreme rendition of corporate-government fascism, a powerful centralized socialist government, and the kind of strict demands for cultural obedience that we frequency see from the extreme left.
Some of the big issues that characterized the Nazi government were gun control, forced euthanasia, an expansion of entitlement handouts and the invocation of "science" as the justification behind genocide. We see all these same theme today from the political left.
California SB 277, for example, a genocidal medical experiment conducted on children by the state government, was pushed by a radical leftist child killer named Sen. Richard Pan (who would have been right at home in the Third Reich).
America's social justice warriors are intolerant, racist bigots who are a real threat to a peaceful society
Just as in Nazi Germany, today's "social justice warriors" are intolerant, racist, bigoted instigators of violence, and they seek political power at the expense of innocents.
While disavowing the legitimacy of law in a peaceful society, today's P.C. fanatics - including lunatic leftist university students - demand the mass disarmament of private citizens by a totalitarian government, following in lockstep with the early days of Nazi Germany when gun confiscation preceded genocide.
With students in the United States now being vilified for saying that "all lives matter," we have entered a realm of extreme leftist lunacy that cannot be ended with reason or any appeal to logic. The violent rhetoric and destructive actions of the political left have now gone beyond the point of no return, leading America to the exact outcome desired by globalist instigators like George Soros: civil war.
Soros and other seek to tear America apart from within. Seething with hatred for humanity, destructive people of high influence -- like Adolf Hitler, George Soros and Barack Obama - use their positions to enslave people rather than setting them free.
They create conflict rather than preventing it... and they use words as weapons to keep people down rather than as tools to empower individuals.
America has now entered a very dangerous chapter of its history, and conformity to P.C. language is a surrender to the fanaticism of the radical left. Now is the time for all Americans to reject P.C. language control, reject the leftist thought police and assert your right to exercise cognitive diversity with a vast array of ideas and dissenting speech.
At this critical moment in history, we must defend speech freedom or lose it forever, because the Nazi-like P.C. language police on the left demand that you either surrender to them or DIE.
Sound familiar? History has been here before, and it didn't end without massive bloodshed. Eventually, the USA, Russia and other allies had to use kinetic weapons to destroy the Nazi regime and end its "politically correct" genocide against humanity.
Let us hope it doesn't come to that again.
Why Capitalism Creates Useless Jobs
October 6 2016 | From: Strikemag Ever had the feeling that your job might be made up? That the world would keep on turning if you weren’t doing that thing you do 9-5? Anthropology professor and best selling author David Graeber explored the phenomenon of bullshit jobs for our recent summer issue – everyone who’s employed should read carefully
In the year 1930, John Maynard Keynes predicted that technology would have advanced sufficiently by century’s end that countries like Great Britain or the United States would achieve a 15-hour work week.
There’s every reason to believe he was right. In technological terms, we are quite capable of this. And yet it didn’t happen. Instead, technology has been marshaled, if anything, to figure out ways to make us all work more. In order to achieve this, jobs have had to be created that are, effectively, pointless.
Huge swathes of people, in Europe and North America in particular, spend their entire working lives performing tasks they secretly believe do not really need to be performed. The moral and spiritual damage that comes from this situation is profound.
It is a scar across our collective soul. Yet virtually no one talks about it.
Why did Keynes’ promised utopia – still being eagerly awaited in the ‘60s – never materialise? The standard line today is that he didn’t figure in the massive increase in consumerism.
Given the choice between less hours and more toys and pleasures, we’ve collectively chosen the latter. This presents a nice morality tale, but even a moment’s reflection shows it can’t really be true.
Yes, we have witnessed the creation of an endless variety of new jobs and industries since the ‘20s, but very few have anything to do with the production and distribution of sushi, iPhones, or fancy sneakers.
So what are these new jobs, precisely? A recent report comparing employment in the US between 1910 and 2000 gives us a clear picture (and I note, one pretty much exactly echoed in the UK). Over the course of the last century, the number of workers employed as domestic servants, in industry, and in the farm sector has collapsed dramatically.
At the same time, “professional, managerial, clerical, sales, and service workers” tripled, growing “from one-quarter to three-quarters of total employment.” In other words, productive jobs have, just as predicted, been largely automated away (even if you count industrial workers globally, including the toiling masses in India and China, such workers are still not nearly so large a percentage of the world population as they used to be).
But rather than allowing a massive reduction of working hours to free the world’s population to pursue their own projects, pleasures, visions, and ideas, we have seen the ballooning not even so much of the “service” sector as of the administrative sector, up to and including the creation of whole new industries like financial services or telemarketing, or the unprecedented expansion of sectors like corporate law, academic and health administration, human resources, and public relations.
And these numbers do not even reflect on all those people whose job is to provide administrative, technical, or security support for these industries, or for that matter the whole host of ancillary industries (dog-washers, all-night pizza deliverymen) that only exist because everyone else is spending so much of their time working in all the other ones.
These are what I propose to call “bullshit jobs.”
It’s as if someone were out there making up pointless jobs just for the sake of keeping us all working. And here, precisely, lies the mystery.
In capitalism, this is exactly what is not supposed to happen. Sure, in the old inefficient socialist states like the Soviet Union, where employment was considered both a right and a sacred duty, the system made up as many jobs as they had to (this is why in Soviet department stores it took three clerks to sell a piece of meat).
But, of course, this is the very sort of problem market competition is supposed to fix. According to economic theory, at least, the last thing a profit-seeking firm is going to do is shell out money to workers they don’t really need to employ. Still, somehow, it happens.
While corporations may engage in ruthless downsizing, the layoffs and speed-ups invariably fall on that class of people who are actually making, moving, fixing and maintaining things; through some strange alchemy no one can quite explain, the number of salaried paper-pushers ultimately seems to expand, and more and more employees find themselves, not unlike Soviet workers actually, working 40 or even 50 hour weeks on paper, but effectively working 15 hours just as Keynes predicted, since the rest of their time is spent organising or attending motivational seminars, updating their facebook profiles or downloading TV box-sets.
The answer clearly isn’t economic: it’s moral and political. The ruling class has figured out that a happy and productive population with free time on their hands is a mortal danger (think of what started to happen when this even began to be approximated in the ‘60s).
And, on the other hand, the feeling that work is a moral value in itself, and that anyone not willing to submit themselves to some kind of intense work discipline for most of their waking hours deserves nothing, is extraordinarily convenient for them.
Once, when contemplating the apparently endless growth of administrative responsibilities in British academic departments, I came up with one possible vision of hell. Hell is a collection of individuals who are spending the bulk of their time working on a task they don’t like and are not especially good at.
Say they were hired because they were excellent cabinet-makers, and then discover they are expected to spend a great deal of their time frying fish. Neither does the task really need to be done – at least, there’s only a very limited number of fish that need to be fried.
Yet somehow, they all become so obsessed with resentment at the thought that some of their co-workers might be spending more time making cabinets, and not doing their fair share of the fish-frying responsibilities, that before long there’s endless piles of useless badly cooked fish piling up all over the workshop and it’s all that anyone really does.
I think this is actually a pretty accurate description of the moral dynamics of our own economy.
Now, I realise any such argument is going to run into immediate objections:
“Who are you to say what jobs are really ‘necessary’? What’s necessary anyway? You’re an anthropology professor, what’s the ‘need’ for that?”
(And indeed a lot of tabloid readers would take the existence of my job as the very definition of wasteful social expenditure.)
And on one level, this is obviously true. There can be no objective measure of social value.
I would not presume to tell someone who is convinced they are making a meaningful contribution to the world that, really, they are not. But what about those people who are themselves convinced their jobs are meaningless? Not long ago I got back in touch with a school friend who I hadn’t seen since I was 12.
I was amazed to discover that in the interim, he had become first a poet, then the front man in an indie rock band. I’d heard some of his songs on the radio having no idea the singer was someone I actually knew. He was obviously brilliant, innovative, and his work had unquestionably brightened and improved the lives of people all over the world.
Yet, after a couple of unsuccessful albums, he’d lost his contract, and plagued with debts and a newborn daughter, ended up, as he put it, “taking the default choice of so many directionless folk: law school.”
Now he’s a corporate lawyer working in a prominent New York firm. He was the first to admit that his job was utterly meaningless, contributed nothing to the world, and, in his own estimation, should not really exist.
There’s a lot of questions one could ask here, starting with, what does it say about our society that it seems to generate an extremely limited demand for talented poet-musicians, but an apparently infinite demand for specialists in corporate law?
(Answer: if 1% of the population controls most of the disposable wealth, what we call “the market” reflects what they think is useful or important, not anybody else.)
But even more, it shows that most people in these jobs are ultimately aware of it. In fact, I’m not sure I’ve ever met a corporate lawyer who didn’t think their job was bullshit. The same goes for almost all the new industries outlined above.
There is a whole class of salaried professionals that, should you meet them at parties and admit that you do something that might be considered interesting (an anthropologist, for example), will want to avoid even discussing their line of work entirely.
Give them a few drinks, and they will launch into tirades about how pointless and stupid their job really is.
This is a profound psychological violence here. How can one even begin to speak of dignity in labour when one secretly feels one’s job should not exist? How can it not create a sense of deep rage and resentment.
Yet it is the peculiar genius of our society that its rulers have figured out a way, as in the case of the fish-fryers, to ensure that rage is directed precisely against those who actually do get to do meaningful work.
For instance: in our society, there seems a general rule that, the more obviously one’s work benefits other people, the less one is likely to be paid for it.
Again, an objective measure is hard to find, but one easy way to get a sense is to ask: what would happen were this entire class of people to simply disappear?
Say what you like about nurses, garbage collectors, or mechanics, it’s obvious that were they to vanish in a puff of smoke, the results would be immediate and catastrophic.
A world without teachers or dock-workers would soon be in trouble, and even one without science fiction writers or ska musicians would clearly be a lesser place.
It’s not entirely clear how humanity would suffer were all private equity CEOs, lobbyists, PR researchers, actuaries, telemarketers, bailiffs or legal consultants to similarly vanish. (Many suspect it might markedly improve.)
Yet apart from a handful of well-touted exceptions (doctors), the rule holds surprisingly well.
Even more perverse, there seems to be a broad sense that this is the way things should be. This is one of the secret strengths of right-wing populism.
You can see it when tabloids whip up resentment against tube workers for paralysing London during contract disputes: the very fact that tube workers can paralyse London shows that their work is actually necessary, but this seems to be precisely what annoys people.
It’s even clearer in the US, where Republicans have had remarkable success mobilizing resentment against school teachers, or auto workers (and not, significantly, against the school administrators or auto industry managers who actually cause the problems) for their supposedly bloated wages and benefits.
It’s as if they are being told “but you get to teach children! Or make cars! You get to have real jobs! And on top of that you have the nerve to also expect middle-class pensions and health care?”
If someone had designed a work regime perfectly suited to maintaining the power of finance capital, it’s hard to see how they could have done a better job.
Real, productive workers are relentlessly squeezed and exploited.
The remainder are divided between a terrorised stratum of the – universally reviled – unemployed and a larger stratum who are basically paid to do nothing, in positions designed to make them identify with the perspectives and sensibilities of the ruling class (managers, administrators, etc) – and particularly its financial avatars – but, at the same time, foster a simmering resentment against anyone whose work has clear and undeniable social value.
Clearly, the system was never consciously designed [actually you were right up until this statement]. It emerged from almost a century of trial and error. But it is the only explanation for why, despite our technological capacities, we are not all working 3-4 hour days.
Western Banks Crumble While Yuan Joins The IMF SDR Basket
October 5 2016 | From: Geopolitics The gradual Global Reset continues with the official inclusion of the Chinese Yuan (RMB) as prime alternative to the US dollar as global currency of exchange which should provide a smooth transition away from fiat dollar.
While this SDR inclusion was preannounced months ago, still the multiple investigations of fraudulent bank services, and the ongoing fall of the Big Banks suggest that the ongoing Global Reset will continue no matter the geopolitical noise, which are all part of the hybrid World War 3 being fought against the outgoing Nazionist Word Order.
Related: Bix Weir On Global Financial Collapse: It’s Happening, Right on Time When one considers the fact that the Chinese Yuan is backed with real, tangible hard assets, e.g. gold and industrial infrastructure, it would be very easy to say that the US dollar is doomed as it should be since its integrity and real value are nil at this point in time.
Yes, the Khazarian bankers can’t hide it anymore. They have a problem, a very big one, and they want to pass it on to the Western taxpayers, one more time.
Deutsche Bank Troubles Raise Fear of Global Shock
"Germany’s largest bank appears in danger, sending stock markets worldwide on a wild ride. Yet the biggest
source of worry is less about its finances than a vast tangle of unknowns - not least, whether Europe can muster the will to mount a rescue in the event of an emergency.
In short, fears that Europe lacks the cohesion to avoid a financial crisis may be enhancing the threat of one.
The immediate source of alarm is the health of Deutsche Bank, whose vast and sprawling operations, are entangled with the fates of investment houses from Tokyo to London to New York.
Deutsche is staring at a multibillion-dollar fine from the Justice Department for its enthusiastic participation in Wall Street’s festival of toxic mortgage products in the years leading up to financial crisis of 2008.
Given Deutsche’s myriad other troubles - a role in the manipulation of a financial benchmark, claims of trades that violated Russian sanctions and a generalized sense of confusion about its mission - the American pursuit of a stiff penalty comes at an inopportune time.
It heightens the sense that Deutsche - whose shares have lost more than half their value this year - needs to secure additional investment, lest it leave itself vulnerable to some new crisis."
- Deutsche Bank Troubles Raise Fear of Global Shock
Who will provide the additional investment if not the German people who will be forced to swallow a slew of legislated austerity measures later on?
But the bigger problem for the Banking Canal is: Deutsche bank is just one domino in the entire fraudulent fractional banking system that is visibly in turmoil, and it is expected to bring down the entire fiat financial system with it.
Why Deutsche Bank is Now the Biggest Worry in the Financial World
"Shares in Deutsche have lost more than half their value so far this year. The IMF hasn’t helped matters, saying in June that the bank is the greatest contributor to systemic risk in the world’s biggest lenders.
Q How is Deutsche Bank reacting?
A John Cryan, the Briton who became chief executive last summer, has set out a five-year restructuring plan that will cut about 15,000 of Deutsche’s 101,000-strong workforce. Its dividend has been suspended for two years, and Cryan expects to close dozens of overseas sites. It sold Abbey Life, its old portfolio of British life insurance products, for euros 1billion on Wednesday.
Q What else can the bank do?
A Rumours surfaced over the summer of a possible merger between Deutsche and Commerzbank, its biggest competitor, and more recently the idea of another multi-billion-euro rights issue has been floated. Again, these reports have been played down by the bank.
Deutsche also has the option to “switch off” regular coupon payments on its coco bonds, providing a small amount of breathing space. Analysts at Autonomous have also suggested that the bank could save euros 2.8billion by not paying staff bonuses."
However, the possible merger between Deutsche Bank and Commerzbank can only go as far as the next collapse…
Is Another German Bank in Trouble? Commerzbank to Cut 9,600 Jobs and Suspend Dividend
"Commerzbank, the second-biggest bank in Germany, has suspended its dividend and revealed more than 9,000 job losses as it tries to shore up its business in the face of ultra-low interest rates and sagging client activity.
The bank said its decision to cut almost one in five of its employees worldwide and merge two of its largest businesses will result in a €700m write-off and a loss for this quarter.
The bank’s Mittelstand division, seen as the engine room of Germany’s mid-sized corporate economy, will be combined with its corporate branch, while investment activity will be scaled back.
Commerzbank also warned that “ongoing weakness in the shipping markets” would push up its loan loss provisions in the coming months. The bank decided four years ago to exit the ship financing business but still has about €8bn on its books.
“We simply don’t earn enough money to lead the bank sustainably and successfully into the future. And this situation will get worse if we don’t do something about it,” chief executive Martin Zielke said in a draft note to employees, according to Reuters.
The bank will cease dividend payments “for the time being”, prompting analysts at RBC Capital Markets to scrap their forecasts for payments until at least 2018."
"ING Groep NV, the largest Netherlands lender, will announce thousands of job cuts at its investor day on Monday, Dutch newspaper Het Financieele Dagblad reported Friday, citing unidentified people with knowledge of the matter.
The reorganization will result in more central management and may generate billions of euros in savings, the paper said. Raymond Vermeulen, a spokesman for the Amsterdam-based bank, declined to comment on the report. The bank employs about 52,000 people, according to its website."
Stanford Endowment Joins Long List of College Funds Doing Poorly
"The Stanford University endowment posted a 0.4 percent loss on its investments for fiscal 2016, underperforming some large rivals but doing better than Harvard University’s 2.0 percent loss. The median return for foundations and endowments tracked by the Wilshire Trust Universe Comparison Service was negative 0.3 percent.
Harvard is the largest university endowment, with $35.7 billion in assets. Harvard president Drew Faust said the “disappointing” investment return would “constrain our budgets,’’ according to the Harvard Crimson.
Harvard Management Co. is seeking a new chief executive after the departure this summer of Stephen Blyth after a short, year-and-a-half stint. The endowment manager is under pressure to boost performance; Blyth had said it needed to produce at least a 5 percent return annually to meet its obligations to Harvard’s annual operating budget."
Reckoning Comes for U.S. Pension Funds as Investment Returns Lag
"The $1.9 trillion shortfall in U.S. state and local pension funds is poised to grow as near record-low bond yields and global stock-market turmoil reduce investment gains, increasing pressure on governments to put more money into the retirement systems.
With the Federal Reserve deciding to hold interest rates steady at its meeting Wednesday, the funds will continue to be squeezed by rock-bottom payouts on fixed-income securities just as stocks fall overseas and post only modest U.S. gains.
As a result, pensions in Illinois, Missouri and Hawaii this year have moved to roll back the assumed rate of return on their investments, joining the dozens that have taken that step over the past two years.
“There’s little light at the end of the tunnel as far as pension funding is concerned,” said Vikram Rai, head of municipal-bond strategy at Citigroup Inc. in New York.
“I expect funded ratios will drop further. It’ll require increased pension contributions on the part of the states and local government, but most state and local governments don’t have the ability to do so.”
This expanding financial time bomb is being exposed one more time with the US senate investigations on Wells Fargo’s highly deceptive sales strategies victimizing even its long-time customers.
Wells Fargo Problems Far From Over as Investigations and Lawsuits Expand
"Alex Polonsky was watching Senator Elizabeth Warren of Massachusetts lay into Wells Fargo’s chief executive, John Stumpf, on 20 September when he finally had enough.
He picked up the phone and called Jonathan Delshad, who would soon become his lawyer. Polonsky used to work for Wells Fargo, but according to his lawsuit, he was demoted and later terminated for not meeting his sales quotas.
The bank has recently come under scrutiny for such quotas after it was revealed that for years, thousands of its employees had been opening unauthorized accounts in order to meet them.
More than 2m such accounts were opened without customers’ permission and more than 5,300 Wells Fargo employees have been fired – with about 1,000 being dismissed each year over the past five years.
At the same time, employees like Polonsky were fired for not meeting their quotas."
Surely, the complete Western financial collapse will just be a matter of time, and contrary to some assertions, it’s not something that the Khazarian bankers are fretting much about.
They have already invested their loot in China, India and even in Russia. They have profited from every systemic shift which have happened before.
But unlike before, they will now have a two-pronged approach which assures their continued occupation of the Halls of Power in the West.
Aside from the simple transfer of financial assets to the “winning side” which they don’t have full control of anymore, they will also be using the event to install in the West what they have been eagerly egging on, and that is the full digitization of fiat currencies, and the full integration of European human resources into their quantum supercomputer AI-based economic system.
In order to effect this gigantic automated NWO plan, the United States has recently transferred its authority over the ICANN;
“A nonprofit organization that is responsible for coordinating the maintenance and procedures of several databases related to the namespaces of the Internet – thereby ensuring the network’s stable and secure operation...”
- to the United Nations, in addition to all measures already in the pipeline, e.g. drone squadron, surveillance mechanisms, armed police, etc.
This march towards Technocratic Dictatorship will continue unless the people in the US and Europe will take a decisive action against the PuppetMasters right in their own countries.
To make these regressive changes happen, the United Nations is already conditioning the minds of its subjects about “the 3rd leg of the global financial crisis – with prospect of epic debt defaults.”
UN Fears Third Leg of the Global Financial Crisis – With Prospect of Epic Debt Defaults
"The third leg of the world’s intractable depression is yet to come. If trade economists at the United Nations are right, the next traumatic episode may entail the greatest debt jubilee in history.
It may also prove to be the definitive crisis of globalized capitalism, the demise of the liberal free-market orthodoxies promoted for almost forty years by the Bretton Woods institutions, the OECD, and the Davos fraternity.
“Alarm bells have been ringing over the explosion of corporate debt levels in emerging economies, which now exceed $25 trillion. Damaging deflationary spirals cannot be ruled out,” said the annual report of the UN Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD).
We know already that the poisonous side-effect of zero rates and quantitative easing in the US, Europe, and Japan was to flood developing nations with cheap credit, upsetting their internal chemistry and drawing them into a snare. What is less understood is just how destructive this has been.
Much of the money was wasted, skewed towards “highly cyclical and rent-based sectors of limited strategic importance for catching up,” it said.
Worse yet, these countries have imported the deformities of western finance before they are ready to cope with the consequences. This has undermined what UNCTAD calls the “profit-investment nexus” that ultimately drives growth and prosperity.
The extraordinary result is that some countries are slipping backwards, victims of “premature deindustrialisation”. Many of them have fallen further behind the rich world than they were in 1980 despite opening up their economies and following the global policy script diligently.
The middle income trap closed in on Latin America and the non-oil states of the Middle East a long time ago, but now it is beginning to close in such countries as Malaysia and Thailand, and in some respects China. “The benefits of a rushed integration into international financial markets post-2008 are fast evaporating,” it said.
If policymakers fail to mitigate the negative impacts of unchecked global market forces, then a turn to protectionism could trigger a vicious downward spiral for everyone.
… What is clear is that world will soon need a massive and coordinated spending push by governments to create demand and bring the broken global system back into equilibrium. UNCTAD is entirely right about that.
The key phrase of that article is “the next traumatic episode may entail the greatest debt jubilee in history” which may sound good until we realize that they are just resetting the same old fiat debt-based slavery system because the derivative bubble numbers are getting so large, it complicates the manipulations even more, much like they reset the calendar from BCE to CE, or AD, to hide those countless genocides that their bloodlines have committed thousands of years ago.
At the same time, and in addition to simplifying the whole corrosive system, what these economic gurus are trying to project is that economics and finance are so complicated, but the solution still lies within that same grossly defective monetary system of controlling resources.
There can never be anything better than this debt slavery quicksand in spite of the existence of exotic technologies that would render the whole economic system obsolete.
It must be known to all, that the progressive BRICS are not suppressing these same exotic technologies but are gradually raising global awareness to the fact, as some Russian scientists have already announced the discovery of an industrial method to produce any element, known and unknown, which runs counter to the economics of scarcity, at the press of a button.
China, for its part, is already manufacturing and selling HHO kits to increase the fuel efficiency of existing internal combustion engines, or eliminate the use of fossil fuels altogether.
A HHO system is basically a small device that uses electricity to release hydrogen based gas from water, called HHO, which is then directed into a vehicle’s air intake system. The “new air”, is enriched with hydrogen now – and it is highly explosive. This enriched air can now be mixed with less fuel in order to achieve the same explosive inside the engine. This is basically how HHO kits save fuel.
The dense fog of highly distractive lies and deceptions is covering both sides of the Atlantic. But here in Asia, the options are pretty clear, i.e. continued participation of the Globalist Empire, or the total separation through a parallel system of the BRICS Alliance’s New Silk Roads, CIPS bank transfer system, and a separate internet backbone.
But just like the Syrian crisis, the ultimate solution to the Western financial crisis is the total defeat of the Khazarian Criminal Syndicate which has full control of the Western governments, before the march towards global prosperity can commence in earnest.
Nutrition And Mental Health + ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist
October 5 2016 | From: BePure / Sott Last week I attended a conference by Dr Julia Rucklidge from the University of Canterbury where she presented her groundbreaking research on the treatment of mental health disorders such as ADHD, bipolar, depression and anxiety using therapeutic doses of micronutrients.
More and more we are seeing that what we eat, and what we absorb from our food choices, affect more than our physical appearance and physical fitness.
Related: Nutrition And Mental Health
Yes these things are important, but actually there are numerous benefits to eating a nutrient-dense diet with supporting products that don’t get mentioned. And they should. Our mental health is something that affects every interaction we have with ourselves, our families, our work colleagues and our friends.
The takeaway message from this conference is the prevalence of mental health problems in the modern world is concerning. According to Dr Rucklidge:
“There is a very real danger of mental health care bankrupting our society in terms of cost and social implications.”
In this blog I’m going to address the link between nutrition and mental health. There are many other factors involved in the prevention and treatment of mental illness. We are only addressing nutrition in this blog as it is such an important factor to consider.
The Whole Picture
One in ten New Zealanders are on antidepressants. This is an eight-fold increase in total prescription numbers from 1998.
There has been a four-fold increase in claimed disability financial support due to psychiatric disorders in New Zealand from 1991 to now. Both these figures are supplied through Statistics New Zealand’s annual reports.
In a period of time where more “cutting edge medicines” have been researched, developed and trialled on our population, rates of mental health disorders continue to rise.
The long term results from the National Institute of Mental Health’s (NIMH) MTA study found that children taking medication for ADHD for longer than 24 months showed “significant markers not of beneficial outcome, but of deterioration… medicated children were also slightly smaller, and higher delinquency scores.” Source: The MTA cooperative randomised clinical trial.
It’s fair to say our current gold standards are not working, so what else has changed in this time period?
Food And Stress
This increase in mental health conditions follows the same exponential rise of obesity and type two diabetes from the 1970s to now. We know that the rise in medical knowledge and the availability of medications hasn’t resolved the problem, nor has a 300% increase in gym memberships, so what has changed to negatively affect our mental and metabolic health?
I firmly believe, and the evidence supports this idea, that what we are eating and the nutrients we give to our bodies drastically affect our weight, energy, metabolic health AND mental health in both negative and positive ways.
For many people gluten, refined grains and sugar can cause problems affecting everything from digestion, mood, skin disorders like rashes and eczema, to joint pain, weight gain, migraines, thyroid disorders, mental health disorders and behavioural issues such as ADHD.
Gluten is a protein found in wheat, barley, and rye, and is what gives bread its stretch. Many nutritionists now believe many people - not just those with gluten intolerance or Celiac Disease - should avoid gluten as it is a known contributor to leaky gut.
This is problematic for mental health conditions because if serotonin is not kept within your gut and digestive tract, it cannot engage in chemical reactions within your brain to increase your mood.
Refined grains and sugar cause blood sugar spikes and energy crashes as insulin is produced to mitigate the quick rush of glucose and fructose. You can read in length about the problem with refined grains and sugar.
Lastly, the stress of modern living has a huge impact on our mental health. Cortisol is a stress hormone that is activated by everything from traffic, fighting with a loved one, worry, anxiety, excessive caffeine intake and even exercise. Cortisol initiates our fight or flight response in our nervous system. In ancestral times this response was necessary for fleeing from danger.
In the modern world, we perceive danger to be everywhere (i.e we release cortisol) despite the fact we aren’t running away from a lion. This constant flood of cortisol prevents our “rest and digest” nervous system from operating. This prevents recovery from exercise or the day’s stressors, the production of growth hormone and serotonin as well as preventing sleep and digestion.
Managing stress is critical for those people with mental health concerns.
The Brain Gut Connection
Current research in the field of microbiome health and mental health conditions confirms the theory our stomach is our second brain. There are several reasons for this. The first is Serotonin.
Serotonin is your happiness hormone. It is a neurotransmitter that relays messages from all areas of your brain to your cells. An imbalance or deficiency in serotonin is thought to influence the brain in a way that causes depression.
Up to 70% of your bodies total serotonin lives in your digestive tract. If you have leaky gut, a food intolerance or gut dysbiosis through poor diet or antibiotic use, the serotonin can leak out of your gut and is then unable to do its job in your brain.
The second factor has to do with the nutritional and energy demands of our brains. Our brains are approximately 2% of our body weight. However, it consumes 20-40% of our metabolism. In other words, it is constantly and disproportionately demanding nutrients and oxygen. One litre of blood enters your brain every minute, carrying whatever nutrients it has access to.
Giving it nutrient dense food and access to as many nutrients as possible is critical for mental health.
So What Can We Do?
Dr Rucklidge’s research suggests we need to ensure good nutrient-density in our diets and use therapeutic doses of micronutrients to support mental health conditions.
“Micronutrients such as zinc, vitamin D, Essential Fatty Acids and many more have been used in many open label trials across anxiety, sleep issues, bipolar disorder and ADHD.
All have shown significant reductions in psychiatric and psychological symptoms. Response rates range from 50-80% improvements."
Source: Dr Julia Rucklidge at the University of Canterbury.
The current medical model seeks to use medication first before addressing stress, food, sleep and nutrient deficiencies. I would personally love to see this equation flipped. If we can address dietary and lifestyle factors first, along with nutrient support, while using medication sparingly on a case-by-case basis, we can greatly improve the mental health of our nation.
If you or a loved one are currently struggling with depression-like symptoms, bipolar ADHD or anxiety please seek assistance. You can contact your GP or health care provider, the BePure team at info@bepure.co.nz, www.depression.org.nz or the depression helpline at 0800 111 757.
He is well-known for his pioneering work in developmental psychology at Harvard University, where he has spent decades documenting how babies and small children grow, and is an exceptional and highly-regarded researcher.
So it may be surprising to learn that he believes the diagnosis of ADHD (attention deficit hyperactivity disorder) is an invention - and only benefits the pharmaceutical industry and psychiatrists.
Mislabeling Mental Illness
"That is the history of humanity: Those in authority believe they're doing the right thing, and they harm those who have no power", says Jerome Kagan.
In an interview with Spiegel, Kagan addressed the skyrocketing rates of ADHD in America, which he attributes to "fuzzy diagnostic practices."
He illustrated his point with the following example:
Say fifty years ago you have a 7-year-old who is bored in school and exhibits disruptive behavior. Back then, he would be labeled as lazy. But today, that same child is said to suffer from ADHD. That's why we've seen such a dramatic increase in the disorder.
Every child who is having problems in school is sent to see a pediatrician, who then claims it's ADHD and prescribes Ritalin.
"In fact, 90 percent of these 5.4 million kids don't have an abnormal dopamine metabolism. The problem is, if a drug is available to doctors, they'll make the corresponding diagnosis," he said.
"We could get philosophical and ask ourselves: "What does mental illness mean?"
If you do interviews with children and adolescents aged 12 to 19, then 40 percent can be categorized as anxious or depressed.
But if you take a closer look and ask how many of them are seriously impaired by this, the number shrinks to 8 percent.
Describing every child who is depressed or anxious as being mentally ill is ridiculous.
Adolescents are anxious, that's normal. They don't know what college to go to. Their boyfriend or girlfriend just stood them up. Being sad or anxious is just as much a part of life as anger or sexual frustration," Kagan told Spiegel.
What are the implications for the millions of children who are inaccurately diagnosed as mentally ill? Kagan believes it's devastating because they think there is something fundamentally wrong with them.
He's not the only psychologist to raise the alarm about this trend, but Kagan and others feel they're up against:
"An enormously powerful alliance: pharmaceutical companies that are making billions, and a profession that is self-interested."
Kagan himself suffered from inner restlessness and stuttering as a child, but his mother told him: "There's nothing wrong with you. Your mind is working faster than your tongue." He thought at the time: "Gee, that's great, I'm only stuttering because I'm so smart." If he had been born in the present era, he most likely would have been classified as mentally ill.
Jerome Kagan
ADHD isn't the only mental illness epidemic among children that worries Kagan, depression is another.
In 1987, about one in 400 American teenagers was using an antidepressant. By 2002, the numbers leaped to one in 40.
He feels it's another overused diagnosis, simply because the pills are available.
Instead of immediately resorting to pharmaceutical drugs, he thinks doctors should take more time with the child to find out why they aren't as cheerful, for instance. At the very least, a few tests should be carried out - and an EEG for certain, especially since studies have shown that people who have heightened activity in the right frontal lobe respond poorly to antidepressants.
Kagan remembers going into a textbook-type depression after a major research project he was involved with failed. He had insomnia and met all the other clinical criteria for depression. But since he knew what the cause was, he didn't seek professional help. After six months, the depression was gone.
Under normal circumstances, he would have been diagnosed as mentally ill by a psychiatrist and put on medication.
But here lies an important distinction: when a life event overwhelms us, it's common to fall into a depression for a while. But there are those who have a genetic vulnerability and experience chronic depression; they are mentally ill.
It's crucial to look not only at the symptoms, but the causes.
This is where psychiatry drops the ball, as it's the only medical profession that establishes illness on symptoms alone.
Such a blind spot opens the door for new maladies - like bipolar disorder, which we never used to see in children. As it stands today, nearly a million Americans under the age of 19 are diagnosed with it.
"A group of doctors at Massachusetts General Hospital just started calling kids who had temper tantrums bipolar. They shouldn't have done that. But the drug companies loved it because drugs against bipolar disorders are expensive. That's how the trend was started. It's a little like in the 15th century, when people started thinking someone could be possessed by the devil or hexed by a witch," said Kagan.
When asked if there are alternatives to pharmaceutical drugs for behavioral abnormalities, Kagan said we could look at tutoring, as an example, for kids diagnosed with ADHD. After all, it's never the ones who are doing well in school that are diagnosed, it's always the children who are struggling.
$40 Billion US In Aid To Israel: For Whom And For What? + Documentary Reveals How Israel Convinces Americans: “Palestine Occupies Israel”
October 4 2016 | From: Sott / GlobalResearch / Various Recently, the United States just renewed military aid to Israel in a decade-long, $38 billion deal - the largest of its kind in American history.
It represents a significant increase in aid, roughly $3.8 billion a year - expected to be supplemented by additional assistance through US Congress - up from $3 billion per year previously.
The Atlantic in an article titled, Why Does the United States Give So Much Money to Israel?, attempted to explain the reasoning behind the otherwise unreasonable and unprecedented assistance by claiming:
“Defenders of the deal would say it's necessary. Dalton described the uptick in spending as a natural extension of the long-standing relationship between the United States and Israel, "as well as close ties between those countries and their peoples."
She described the "fraught neighborhood" surrounding Israel: war-torn Syria to the northeast, Hezbollah-influenced Lebanon to the north, and an Islamist insurgency in Egypt's Sinai to the south, all of which help explain the historically high promise of $5 billion in missile funding over the next 10 years."
However, experienced geopolitical analysts will point out that the United States does not have "friends," "allies," or "relationships" - only interests and those who serve them.
And while The Atlantic attempts to explain the deal as a means of maintaining a "relationship," it and other publications admit that there are "strings attached." If examined carefully, these strings reveals just what interests this supposed "relationship" serves.
CNBC would say just that in its article, Big US military aid package to Israel has strings attached, claiming:
“...it's structured so that more Israeli defense spending goes to U.S. companies. Israel's long-standing special arrangement for funds from the United States previously allowed Israel to spend 26 percent of the money in Israel - on Israeli-made defense products. But that provision is being phased out over the first five years of the deal."
In other words, the ten year, $38 billion aid package is first and foremost welfare for US defense contractors, not Israel whose own defense spending adds up to $16 billion per year - dwarfing annual US "aid." The deal is to encourage further Israeli dependency on America - dependency that lends Washington further leverage over both Israel and the region.
The purpose of aid and those who have arranged it on both the Israeli and American sides of the negotiating table is to continue directing Israel's domestic and foreign policy to suit America's interests, not the Israeli people's.
An Israel at peace with its neighbors in a stable Middle East and North Africa is an Israel that negates the supposed need of a US presence in the region. It also negates the need for such extravagant defense spending in both Israel and the United States.
CNBC would also reveal that the new assistance package would include provisions making it difficult for Israel to lobby for additional spending unless war broke out.
Considering the track record of various Israeli regimes, does one suppose this is an incentive for Israel to avoid conflict, or actively seek it out?
In every way the aid deal is meant to perpetuate unpopular regimes, unpopular and inhumane policies, as well as perpetuate conflict and human misery.
The role the US plays in "stabilizing" the Middle East is revealed instead as a constant conspiracy to overturn it.
US, Israel, and Saudi Arabia - Trifecta of Conflict and Instability
The only other nation in the Middle East sowing as much conflict and instability as Israel's current regime is Saudi Arabia. It has flooded Iraq and Syria with militant groups triggering years of devastating war as well as directly launched an extensive air and ground war against neighboring Yemen.
Saudi Arabia - like Israel - is the recipient of extensive US backing. While the US made history by granting Israel unprecedented foreign aid, it sealed with Saudi Arabia recently an equally historic and unprecedented weapons deal amounting to some $60 billion - a single deal significantly larger than the 10 year aid package the US is providing Israel.
Israel's Haaretz would report in its article, U.S. Announces $60b Arms Sale to Saudi Arabia, Says 'Israel Doesn't Object', that:
“The United States plans to sell up to $60 billion worth of military aircraft to Saudi Arabia, the U.S. State Department announced on Wednesday in a move designed to shore up a region overshadowed by Iran.
Andrew Shapiro, the assistant secretary of state for political-military affairs, told a news conference the U.S. administration did not anticipate any objections to the sale from Israel, traditionally wary of arms sales to nearby Arab countries."
Indeed, Israel does not object to US weapon deals with Saudi Arabia. Despite feigned adversity between the two regimes, the governments of Israel and Saudi Arabia work in tandem toward a singular regional vision with very few points of contention and with the common denominator being the way each nation's role enhances their joint sponsor - the United States - and its hegemony over the region.
It is then not surprising to see US-funded Israeli forces defending Saudi subsidized terrorists on the Golan Heights coordinating violence against Syrian forces throughout the destructive, ongoing Syrian conflict.
Unlike Saudi Arabia, which does not exist as a functioning legitimate nation-state beyond its petrodollars and its US-backed military power, Israel does possess the economic infrastructure and human capital to transition into a functioning, independent nation-state - if only its population can overcome the engineered strategy of tension that has ensnared it for decades and the regime behind it.
The United States' $38 billion is to ensure that regime remains in power for another 10 years, the strategy of tension continues to play out, and the Israeli people, as well as their neighbors are denied any opportunity to live in peace and move forward in progress for another decade to come.
Rather than underwriting Israel's security for the next decade, the US is ensuring Israel struggles under another 10 years of uncertainty, perpetually impending war, all while its regime continues to partner with neighboring regimes - including Saudi Arabia and Turkey - to undermine regional stability and further threaten the future of the Israeli people and the survival of the Israeli nation.
The Israeli regime's signing of yet another compromising, dependency-inducing aid package with the United States is proof once again that Israel's own government constitutes the Israeli nation's worst enemy.
Comment: Perhaps Israel has been given too little credit here for its manipulative controls, global infiltration and concentration of pathocracy.
Documentary Reveals How Israel Convinces Americans: “Palestine Occupies Israel”
In this episode of ‘Behind the Headline,’ host Mint Press Mnar Muhawesh meets Sut Jhally, an expert on media manipulation and propaganda. In the film ‘The Occupation of the American Mind,’ Jhally and others examine how high-paid spin doctors control the media message on Israel.
Following the Holocaust, the world community - led by the United States and Britain - sought to create a European Jewish-only state.
This humanitarian move, though, utterly failed in respecting the humanity of the land’s indigenous inhabitants - Christian and Muslim Palestinians.
Starting in December of 1947, their land and property was seized and destroyed to make way for the state of Israel, where white only European Jews would live . Over 750,000 Palestinians were expelled and over 10,000 were killed by the British and US armed Zionist militias, and later Israeli forces, during the Nakba, an Arabic word meaning “catastrophe.”
Those expelled by the Nakba and their Palestinian descendants who make up the world’s largest refugee population in the world are not allowed to return to their land.
That’s because the mainstream, corporate-owned media continues to spin a propaganda wheel that dehumanizes Palestinians and paints Israel as a beacon of democracy.
Meanwhile, special interest groups like the American Israel Public Affairs Committee, or AIPAC, buy their way into the hearts and minds of our elected officials. Ever wonder why Israel gets $3 billion in annual military funding from Uncle Sam? Connect the dots from the campaign contributions to the spending bills.
There’s a lot riding on our relationship with Israel: Apart from serving as a proxy for U.S. relations in the Middle East and Africa, Israel is America’s second-top destination for arms exports. Yep - the country’s that’s no bigger than the state of New Jersey is basically a black check for the military-industrial complex.
But not all Americans are on board with the notion of Israel as the victim of Palestinian oppression.
A new documentary, “The Occupation of the American Mind,” brings attention to how Israel’s public relations campaign has successfully manipulated the narrative of the Israel-Palestine conflict — in that, it’s not a conflict at all but a matter of modern-day colonialism, ethnic cleansing and apartheid.
Today I’m joined by Sut Jhally, executive producer of “The Occupation of the American Mind” and a professor of communication at the University of Massachusetts. The film was produced, written and directed by Loretta Alper and Jeremy Earp.
I asked Jhally to explain how Americans are being kept in the dark about Palestine, and how that prevents a mass movement against Israeli apartheid from forming in the U.S.
Learn more about the US war in Afghanistan fueling the worldwide heroin crisis, and Israel’s occupation of American minds:
October 2016: The Most Consequential Month Of The Millennium
October 3 2016 | From: CosmicConvergence
Never in the history of the world has so much anticipation and anxiety been focused on the outcomes of a single month.
According to astrologers and oracles, psychics and prophets, pundits and politicos, October of 2016 has been foreordained as a month of great events and awesome surprises.
Not only does the astrology stack up in such a way so as to indicate a month of HUGE happenings, so, too, have many powerful predictions been made by various oracles as compelling prophecies have been uttered by modern-day prophets.
Just why is October so Momentous?
First it happens to perfectly align with the Hebrew month of Tishri. Elul 29 falls on October 2nd which means the rest of the month until the 31st matches up with Tishri. This single point of fact means that the whole month of October has the potential to unfold in a manner that brings major revelations and unparalleled change.
The primary reason for this is that the end of the Biblical Shemitah Jubilee (also known as the Super Shemitah) takes place on Sunday, October 2. This sole calendrical event will set up the rest of the month for an anything goes, anytime, anywhere context.
However, most of the real action is guaranteed to occur right here in the good ole USA (as well as Europe and the Mideast). Because the destiny of the Modern State of Israel (MSI) is joined at the hip with that of the United States, outcomes for one will greatly affect the other. And those outcomes will come fast and furiously.
The upshot of this quite lopsided relationship (between the USA and Israel) is that one can easily take down the other, just as they have supported each other since the birth of the MSI in 1947. It is, however, the Super Shemitah that holds the key for the great unraveling that is about to take place.
For the utter predictability of the Shemitah years is a well established pattern and cannot be denied in view of the historical events of epic proportions which always occur.
For the newcomer, witness 9/11 in the Shemitah year of 2001; witness the stock market crash of 2008, witness the various market crashes of 2015 along with the bankruptcies of Greece and Puerto Rico. Going back to 1994 there was the great bond market crash and bankruptcy of Orange County. All of these were Shemitah years.
The critical point here is that 2016 represents the end of a major Shemitah cycle making it the Super Shemitah. Therefore, what takes place during the month of October (Tishri according to the Judaic tradition) will have great consequence for the entire world community of nations.
Whatever occurs will likely be triggered on Monday, October 3rd since October 2nd is a Sunday. We may not even see that trigger in the MSM, although something quite HUGE just happened on Friday.
Astrology for October is Quite Tumultuous and Validates the Shemitah
This October will see a number of transits and other astrological events that will create extraordinary tension and opportunity for change. Most real change comes at the barrel of a gun. Isn’t that true in life in general? Who ever gives up their comfort food unless a serious health condition forces them to?
Does the sugarholic (or alcoholic, or caffeine addict, or nicotine addict, or coke addict, or gambler, or Smartphone addict, or endorphin addict, etc.) ever just stop gratifying their addiction… unless it becomes truly life-threatening?! Sounds like a certain politician presently running for POTUS irrespective of her diagnosed Parkinson’s disease, Subcortical vascular dementia and Post concussive syndrome.
Well that’s exactly where things are for the Oligarchy of 1% that currently runs Planet Earth. For it is the pathological love of money (and psychopathic addiction to power) that has pushed them firmly into the seats of power and influence around the globe.
However, their grip on that virtually absolute power is now loosening.
And the astrology shows us how this is happening. Nevertheless, it’s even more important to understand that it is the ruled (the 99%) who ultimately permitted the tyrannical rulers to run their tyranny on them.
Oligarchs Gone Wild
With Uranus, Neptune and Pluto in houses controlled by the 1%, the 1% decided what if anything ever warranted protest or needed reform (Uranus). They were empowered to choose which ideals would guide us (Neptune). They also decided who should hold power, how it should be wielded and why (Pluto).
For much of the time, the oligarchs also decided what was logical and legal (Saturn), who would become wealthy, how wealthy they would become, who would share in that wealth and why (Jupiter).
For going on half a century, the oligarchs made virtually all the rules. They won every hand. They decided every case. By the end, they called every shot.
But that was us, drinking our own oligarchic koolaid. We followed the yellow brick road that we ourselves had paved to global oligarchy.
Only by understanding that it is the 99% who also walked down the very same “yellow brick road”, can the spell of the love of money be broken. There’s absolutely nothing inherently wrong with money itself; rather, it is the energetic charge associated with HOW it is earned, and HOW it is spent.
Each Month has its own Astrological Imprint
The following breakdown of the primary days in October may not be comprehensible to most. Nonetheless each one serves as a critical marker during a month - October - that is typically full of surprises. This month will be no different and will quite likely see some of the most kariotic surprises of all time.
The following short description of the primary astrological makers for October ought to be kept handy throughout the month. Each of these days has the potential for being a defining moment for the 3rd Millennium.
October unfolds with a series of collapses, astrologically tied to these dates:
October 5th - when Mars squares Jupiter.
October 7th - when Sun squares Pluto
October 15 - when Sun conjuncts Uranus
Then the big one on October 19 - when Mars conjuncts Pluto. This alignment happens every 2 years, but in light of the earlier October dates this is the one that will give a big kick to all the Pluto aspects in October.
The Gray Swans of 2016
There is no question about the many and diverse gray swans that now lurk in every location across the planetary civilization.
They were set up this way so that when the other shoe dropped every single resident of the planet would be affected by something, somewhere. In this way, each individual will be challenged to respond to the coming events in a proactive, courageous and life-affirming manner.
For instance, who can deny that a collapse of Deutsche Bank would affect every German … and every European. Talk about a massive gray swan flying over the Continent.
4. Cyberterrorism/cyberwarfare/sabotage affecting US infrastructure (e.g. financial markets, power grid, internet). [Analysis…]
5. The collapse of the European Union due to a successful Brexit-like referendum in France or Italy. [Analysis…]
6. Escalation of a war between the US/NATO and Russia originating from the Syrian conflict or from the eastern European border countries (Balkans/Poland).[Analysis…]
7. Bursting of the global sovereign bond bubble and the interconnected fixed-income derivatives network.
8. Escalation of a war between the US and China originating from the South China Sea territorial water disputes.
9. A large and rapid Chinese currency devaluation.
11. Organized civil unrest that escalates to prolonged violence in multiple US cities which triggers martial law and a permanent re-calibration of the social consciousness vis-à-vis a collective, national awakening to a starkly different definition of America on all levels — from its 1776, constituent DNA to the US’ perceived status through the eyes of the rest the world.
Let’s face it, it doesn’t get any bigger than this one. November 8th is surely the biggest election in the history of the USA. Hence, what occurs (or does not occur) during the month of October will dictate the final outcome of this election cycle.
As for dramatic political surprises, here’s one that just happened:
We haven’t seen “October Surprises” like those that will be dropping out of the sky over the next 30 days. If ever there was a time to really hang onto your hat, this month is it.
Of course, the real $64,000 question is whether Obama will “wag the dog” for Hillary? There are many concerning developments in Syria that point directly to the Obama Administration deliberately inflaming a regional war as a distinct prelude to a World War III. These folks seem hellbent to do whatever is necessary to shoehorn Hillary Clinton into the Oval Office.
As for Donald Trump’s response to her presidential aspirations, the following video portrays The Donald as such a no-nonsense speaker of the truth that his performance is entirely UNPRECEDENTED IN ELECTION HISTORY.
Should he continue to increase the number and intensity of these truth bombs over the course of October, Hillary will have acquired the worst case of political PTSD ever!
Since this essay focuses on astrology, it is of paramount importance to understand that 2016 - until January 27, 2017 - is the Chinese Year of the Red Fire Monkey. Yes, Donald Trump is a quintessential Fire Monkey tearing apart the whole jungle as it should be.
Bernie Sanders had a similar energy on his side, but he wimped out. The key point is that everyone needs to awaken their inner “Red Fire Monkey” because that is exactly what it’s going to take.
The energies are conspiring to create a surprising reversal of fortune for the ruling elites, but the job must be performed by We the People.
However, there is only one way to pull off such a reversal. Every concerned soul must step up when they are called to do so. In the Year of the Red Fire Monkey there is simply no stopping those who truly align with the dharma of the indomitable Monkey.
In ancient Eastern lore, Lord Hanuman, perhaps the greatest Fire Monkey of all time, was known to be supremely powerful, unrivaled off the battlefield, and invincible in war.
Conclusion
October 2016 will be written about in future history books as the most consequential time frame of the era.
Whether the events are dramatic or the developments are paradigm-shattering, what does transpire in the next four plus weeks will radically alter society, profoundly change Western civilization and deeply transform the planetary order.
What’s Happening Outside Keenan’s Reach - The Illegal Casinos Are Closing Down
October 3 2016 | From: Farouk Currently the global Stock Market capitalization stands about USD 69 Trillion, with an average daily turnover of around USD 190 Billion. The size of the international Bond Markets in outstanding issues is USD 140 Trillion and with daily trading volumes around USD 700 Billion.
Global Currency Trading dwarfs Stock and Bond Markets with an estimated turnover of USD 5.3 Trillion DAILY. And as this is essentially an unregulated market based on “pair swaps” (one currency swapped for another) it is impossible to estimate actual annual turnover and market capitalization.
The global Derivatives Market is another unregulated financial hedge market with an essentially an unknown number of bets being placed on any number of hedging situations associated with Stock, Bond, Commodity and/or Currency Market conditions. Global Derivative market size estimates vary between USD 800 Trillion to over USD 4-6 Quadrillion in outstanding bets most of which are backed by NOTHING.
And to all this can be added Commodity Exchanges, Credit Card Companies and interlocking International Corporations in various major economic sectors.
All of these markets are simple gambling operations. They produce virtually nothing except BETS in poorly or un-regulated markets dominated by Central Banks, major international banks, large hedge funds and trusts, pension funds and insurance companies who automatically trade using computer algorithms and direct collusions between these main traders resulting in price fixing scams.
There is no real “Free Market Trading”.
It is all “rigged”.
What would happen if all that daily traded money were to be spent on real productive development?
OH! I can hear the screams from Wall Street! “WE NEED FREE TRADING MARKETS!”
1,001 Excuses will come. Rats trying to save their sinking ship and their cushy jobs that produce nothing. Most of these shysters have never run a productive business and cannot see beyond their adrenalin gambling addictions and money playpens.
It is clear that the World is transitioning from the “Debt Slavery Model” to a newer paradigm of more equitable balancing of financial wealth, particularly within the Middle Class populations that are the productive backbone of all economies.
This will result in a reduction of funds flowing into gambling markets and an increase in funding real projects that produce real things.
We do not expect these global markets to close completely, except for Currency and Derivative Markets, but merely down-size their trading activities by channeling funds to productive or new investment opportunities and because currencies will be asset (GOLD) backed in accordance with the Paris Accords.
Stock Markets that have been FIAT INFLATED by Central Banks and the FED will have to fall as stocks and companies they represent will fall back to historic and real value levels.
Expect 50+% drops in US, European and Japanese stocks as a direct result of real revaluation and a major decline in bank liquidity to these markets resulting in margin calls and further downward pressures.
Bond markets will also fall because of the lack of market liquidity and corporate revaluations but will rebound with higher interest rates. Underwriting for new issues will be difficult but due to a lack of new issues, those that do get underwritten will enjoy higher margins and increased market demand. New Bonds may face a Seller’s Market if they can find underwriters.
The derivatives market is, in a word, gigantic, often estimated at more that $1.2 quadrillion. Some market analysts estimate the derivatives market at more than 10 times the size of the total world gross domestic product, or GDP. The reason the derivatives market is so large is because there are numerous derivatives available on virtually every possible type of investment asset, including equities, commodities, bonds and foreign currency exchange.
We do advocate closing down the Derivative Markets entirely as these produce only hedge bets currently far beyond the Global GDP and thus are absolutely un-recoverable. This is clearly bringing down the “Too Big To Bailout” Banks like Deutsche Bank who will collapse the entire derivatives market, not “IF”, but “When” it goes into receivership or financial restructuring.
Similarly, Currency Markets will be totally unnecessary once a country’s currency is gold backed and issues are pegged to that value or to the value of a single international reserve currency (International Trade Dollars issued by a new International Central Clearing Bank).
Currency Pegging eliminates trading margins and the ability of major financial players from influencing currency price movements. Gold and real asset backing together with internationally agreed currency revaluation rates essentially freezes exchange rates.
What these financial market changes will do is to release TRILLIONS in capital investments into real development projects globally.
This will sprout new industries in renewable and free energy, electric autonomous vehicles, vertical farming, sea ranching, cities in the sea, and advances in AI and virtual reality networking. These and many more are known technologies that just have yet to be fully financed. All that is about to change.
Generally through various financial redistribution programs and the Golden Dragon Family’s gold backing of all currencies, there will be a financial re-saturation of the Middle Class on a global basis.
Not everyone will be rich all of a sudden, but wealth dispersion at all lower levels will be gradually accomplished. Happy Days ahead for most of humanity.
Happy Days will not be coming to many Governments though. These governments will be kicked out as they were part of the primary cause for the raping of the middle classes through ever increasing taxation and over-spending.
The announcement of the US returning to its REPUBLiC roots will be the harbinger call for global political reform.
Neil Keenan is a very important pin prick in this Western Financial Fiat Bubble. His and his team’s efforts to reclaim control over the Global Collateral Accounts are fundamentally altering the Western Banking World by financially restructuring the underlying assets that the Western Banking is based on.
Before the ink dried on the Bretton Woods Agreement, the Western Banksters were already stealing and illegally using these account funds, legally negating and voiding the Agreement and any subsequently related agreements. The theft and abuse of these GCA’s is well documented, thus a day in Court can never be avoided (and that is coming soon).
Neil’s organizing the first BRICS boat trip has forever altered the financial World. A whole new financial structure has quickly emerged that almost all the countries of the World have now signed onto the BRICS Group, AIIB and its secure financial transfer network.
All countries are now well prepared for the gold backed RV’s and GCR’s that are to follow shortly.
Neil still has some unfinished business to attend to with officially taking charge of the Global Collateral Accounts (GCA).
That has been made much easier with the pending final ratification of the Paris Accords that now launches the global gold and asset backed currencies, RV’s and GCR’s as this causes a mandatory compliance and the abandonment of issuing fiat currencies.
The next step for Neil is to secure the GCA’s which is basically a legal battle of house cleaning with the FED, Bank of England, Bank of International Settlements, the top Swiss Banks and the rest of the European Banks and financial services organizations that have been illegally and fraudulently feeding at this financial trough for the past 50-years.
If there has ever been a bigger ball of string to unwind, this one takes top spot.
Neil’s job is not to pull the financial underpinnings out from under the Western financial empire, but is more to place the ownership of these financial institutions into the proper hands of those depositors whose money actually funded these institutions through the GCA’s.
This will most likely be some serious negotiations concerning transfers of ownership from those who illegally and fraudulent.
US Dollar Disaster Looms? China And Russian Currencies Break Away October 2 2016 | From: TheDailyBell / Various
Russia leaves the Dollar based monetary system and adopts a system of Sovereign Currency. The implications are phenomenal! “In 1990 the first priority of Washington and the IMF was to pressure Yeltsin and the Duma to “privatize” the State Bank of Russia, under a Constitutional amendment that mandated the new Central Bank of Russia, like the Federal Reserve or European Central Bank, be a purely monetarist entity whose only mandate is to control inflation and stabilize the Ruble. In effect, money creation in Russia was removed from state sovereignty and tied to the US dollar.”
Comment: Insiders report that the Cabal in the US is planning on dropping the US Dollar but before that they must have control over much of the gold in the Global Collateral Accounts, however this is not going to be allowed to happen.
2016: "The Stolypin club report advises to increase the investment, pumping up the economy with money from the state budget and by the issue of the Bank of Russia”. Putin decided to follow the Stolypin club advice as the new monetary policy of the country.
Money is changing fast and the US dollar is going to crash.
Here’s an excerpt from yet another recently published article (translated from the Russian) describing how the ruble may now evolve (here).
“We must nationalize the ruble. What does it mean? It means that we must separate the internal markets from the external ones.
… Thus, the first step for Russia is secession from the IMF and others similar institutions designed to keep the entire world in bondage. The dollar noose must be cut.
Now the amount of printed rubles will not be determined by how many dollars we have but by the actual needs of our economy.
… We have absolutely no need in the central bank in its current form, but we do need a financial regular.
Under any regime, it was the Treasury that performed this function. Let it remain the same now regardless of the official name. It may continue to be called the Central Bank. If the essence is changed, there is no need in changing plaques."
You can also see an article (here) that goes into this issue more deeply and claims that Putin has in mind backing a portion of the ruble with gold as well. (We should note there are claims the ruble is backed by gold already.)
The dramatic – historical – Russian currency changes (if these articles are accurate) seem a little difficult to discern in full at this moment, but obviously things are changing fast. And they are changing for China’s “money” as well. In fact, some have speculated China and Russia could launch a joint, gold-backed currency (here, see bottom of article).
At the beginning of October, the yuan joins the IMF’s SDR basket (here). This means that major international institutions can issue bonds payable in yuan (actually RMB, the Chinese external currency).
And that is just what has happened already. The World Bank is issuing a large yuan/RMB tranche and this will be the first of many (here).
Investors who want to place funds in RMB rather than dollars will use the new yuan/RMB-based instruments. The US will continue to print dollars but those dollars may not find a home abroad so easily. Instead they may circulate back into the US economy creating significant price inflation.
The US was able to do so much damage domestically and abroad because of its virtually unlimited spending power. It’s been able to prosecute endless, horrible wars and imprison up to five percent of its adult population at any one time.
Now things are changing. Between the Russian announcement and yuan/RMB convertibility, the US will gradually have more trouble printing money at will. Perhaps the corrupt military-industrial complex will be impelled to shrink and large-scale social programs like the wretched Obamacare will have more difficulty with funding as well.
We are well aware that the same banking influences that created the monstrous, modern state is ruining US and the West generally in order to build up a more febrile internationalism.
It seems natural, of course, as “directed history”always does. But it is not natural in the slightest. From what we can tell, it is pre-planned.
Remember both the IMF and the World Bank are controlled by the US. And yet it is these two organizations that are facilitating the rise of the yuan/RMB.
[Important Point: "Pre-planned" does not always mean by the Cabal, nor that if it was the Cabal who pre-planned it, that it will go their way - as numerous insiders will attest.]
Also, please pay attention to how Russia will issue rubles into the economic system (from the same translated article we quoted previously):
“How can we calculate [how many rubles Russia needs]? In exactly the same way as the United States calculates the amount of dollars needed for its economy. Just as the European Union does the same.
The best justification would be that from now on Russia issues rubles based on the value (in rubles) of all natural resources explored on its territory. It is quite amusing that subsequent steps are no rocket science; they are dictated by common sense itself. Since we are breaking down the disadvantageous system."
Putin may be taking a big step, but by circumventing his central bank (initially imposed by the West) he can be seen as moving toward more state control of Russian currency.
And for years, we have debated heatedly with people like Ellen Brown (here) who believe that federal governments can do a much better job of printing money than quasi-independent central banks. Good Lord! What’s wrong with a little monetary freedom?
All Putin has to do if he wants a healthy currency is declare that the new ruble will be backed by gold and that its issuance will be a private or regional matter.
Let a thousand gold mines bloom. Let the circulation of gold and its related paper notes travel up or down depending on quantity and demand – not the determinations of yet another shadowy, elite clique.
This is the way the US ran before the Civil War and created one of the world’s most prosperous and freest cultures. Those in the US live yet on the dregs of that “golden” period.
But this is not well understood. As time goes on the often-illiterate alternative media may join in hosannas for Putin’s upcoming currency shift. But, again, just because “Russia” will now control its currency instead of a central bank reporting to the IMF, doesn’t necessarily create a better system.
Of course, the argument will be made this sort of system is what Hitler installed in Nazi Germany in order to create the German “miracle” of the 1930s (which we are supposedly not able to talk about). But that system might have destroyed itself over time. Surely it would have.
To begin with, such systems may work very well. But since the “money” is being created by human deciders rather than the competitive market, distortions are inevitable. Price-fixing, which is what it is, never works.
And while we are making the point that this newfound ruble freedom may not be so profound as advertised, let us note that the advent of a currency war is being accompanied by military tension as well.
Conclusion: Whether such tensions are legitimate or dramatized is difficult to say. But given elite banking control of so much around the world, we would not be surprised if we are simply being exposed to a gigantic performance of sorts directed from the top down.Ironically, despite apparent “setbacks,” London’s City surely leads the way.
Related: Stocks jump, euro edges up as Deutsche Bank rebounds
Green Gestapo Says You're Mentally Ill If You Challenge Climate Change + Over 30,000 Scientists Say 'Catastrophic Man-Made Global Warming' Is A Complete Hoax And Science Lie October 2 2016 | From: Infowars / NaturalNews
Any opposition to the party line constitutes "culpable insanity."
Dr. Roy Spencer of the University of Alabama at Huntsville annoyed the climate-extremist establishment a couple of years ago by describing them as “climate Nazis.”
Related: Climate Swindle - Who wants to be a carbon trillionaire?
Recently several of these creatures wrote a supposedly “learned” paper in an obscure journal, saying that anyone who, like Roy and me, raises legitimate questions about the magnitude of Man’s influence on climate or the disproportionate cost of making largely non-existent global warming go away, must be suffering from a psychiatric disorder.
These climate Nazis said that those who dare to question the Party Line on the weather should be regarded as suffering from “identity-protective cognition” and “conspiracist ideation.” I was among those they named.
In Communist Russia, before its defeat at the hands of the triumvirate of liberty – Ronald Reagan, Margaret Thatcher and Pope John Paul II – opponents of the regime whom the dictators had not executed were instead flung into psychiatric institutions, on the ludicrous ground that any opposition to the Party Line constituted culpable insanity.
Lord Christopher Monckton
(Author if this article)
The intellectual pygmies who are the inheritors of the dictators, conveniently forgetting the 250 million people whom communist and fascist socialism sent to their deaths in the 20th century, are now whining that we who have exposed their climate scam should be locked away in state psychiatric prisons, there to be “re-educated” to cure us of the wicked notion that science, not politics, is the way to determine the magnitude (if any) and cost (if any) of the climate problem (if any).
Well, I’ve had enough.
I’ve written to the editor of the obscure journal, to the president of the editor’s university and to the presidents of the universities that provide nests for two of the paper’s authors, to warn them that in Europe, to ensure that the arrogant and un-self-critical totalitarianism that killed so many in the last century will kill none in this, we now have hate-speech laws that make the publication of the offending paper falsely accusing us of lunacy an imprisonable criminal offense.
One of the co-authors, one Cook, recently appointed to a third-rank university in the United States, falsely stated in an earlier paper that 97% of climate scientists had said recent global warming was mostly man-made, when his own records – now in the hands of the fraud police – show he knew the true figure was not 97% but 0.5%.
Lest you should think that my comparing these wretches with the totalitarians of old is unjust, I have obtained a picture of Cook dressed up in his favorite uniform, a parody of a Nazi SS uniform. The photograph bears the self-describing caption Reichsführer-SS J. Cook.
I have sent copies of this photograph to the president of Cook’s new “university,” together with a request that I should be permitted to set straight the crooked record of poisonous and criminal hate-speech that Cook and his ghastly co-authors have published to my detriment.
Watch this space!
Footnote: My recent speech to the London climate conference exposing a huge error at the heart of the climate models – an error without which no one will ever worry about our effect on the climate – is causing major concern among the ranks of the ungodly. It’s unusual for a mathematical presentation to gather 10,000 hits in a week, but it’s happened. If you haven’t seen it yet:
Don’t miss the speech that makes the climate Nazis squirm.
If you like Classical music, you’ll enjoy a recording of the piece I played onstage in the conference hall during the closing-night party. It’s Schubert’s Sechs Ecossaisen der Ehemaligen, six little Scottish dances played as an oran talaidh or lullaby in the dreamy Highland style. If baby won’t sleep, play this resonant recording and all will be well. Enjoy!
Lord Christopher Monckton is a well-known journalist, public speaker, UKIP activist and “global warming” skeptic who also invented the mathematical puzzle Eternity. You can find him at the Lord Monckton Foundation.
Over 30,000 Scientists Say 'Catastrophic Man-Made Global Warming' Is A Complete Hoax And Science Lie
The highly-politicized climate change debate rages on as we approach the crucial 2016 U.S. presidential election, despite an ever-growing body of evidence revealing the fact that "catastrophic man-made global warming" is nothing more than an elaborate hoax.
And the November election may prove to be a victory for the hoaxers, according to experts who happen to be among those who dare to challenge the spurious climate change narrative.
[Note: David Wilcock, within his vast body of research and writings has pointed out that: "[He] used official NASA sources to prove that the Sun, planets, and satellites [moons, asteroids etc.] in our system are becoming brighter, hotter, and more magnetic at a remarkable speed."]
Related: When Plutocrats Own The Weather & Nobody Is Buying The “Climate Change” Hoax Anymore
One of these experts is Weather Channel founder John Coleman, who is now warning that the election could prove to be a "tipping point" in favor of people like Al Gore, who continues to amass vast fortunes based on the global warming scam.
In a recent interview with Climate Depot, Coleman said:
“Al Gore may emerge from the shadows to declare victory in the 'global warming' debate if Hillary Clinton moves into the White House. Yes, if that happens and the new climate regulations become the law of the land, they will be next to impossible to overturn for four to eight years."
Climate change proponents remain undeterred in their mission, ignoring numerous recent scientific findings indicating that there has been no warming trend at all for nearly two decades.
Al Gore's dire predictions of the melting of polar ice on a massive scale have proved to be completely false. In fact, in 2014 - a year that was touted as being "the hottest ever" in the Earth's history - there were record amounts of ice reported in Antarctica, an increase in Arctic ice, and record snowfalls across the globe.
Debunking the "97 Percent" Lie
On top of those "inconvenient truths," the White House's assertion that 97 percent of scientists agree that global warming is real has been completely debunked. Several independently-researched examinations of the literature used to support the "97 percent" statement found that the conclusions were cherry-picked and misleading.
More objective surveys have revealed that there is a far greater diversity of opinion among scientists than the global warming crowd would like for you to believe.
From the National Review:
"A 2008 survey by two German scientists, Dennis Bray and Hans von Storch, found that a significant number of scientists were skeptical of the ability of existing global climate models to accurately predict global temperatures, precipitation, sea-level changes, or extreme weather events even over a decade; they were far more skeptical as the time horizon increased."
Other mainstream news sources besides the National Review have also been courageous enough to speak out against the global warming propaganda - even the Wall Street Journal published an op-ed piece in 2015 challenging the Anthropogenic Global Warming (AGW) pseudoscience being promulgated by global warming proponents.
And, of course, there are the more than 31,000 American scientists (to date) who have signed a petition challenging the climate change narrative and 9,029 of them hold PhDs in their respective fields. But hey, Al Gore and his cronies have also ignored that inconvenient truth, as well.
Many of those scientists who signed the petition were likely encouraged to speak out in favor of the truth after retired senior NASA atmospheric scientist John L. Casey revealed that solar cycles are largely responsible for warming periods on Earth - not human activity.
Al Gore and Cronies Continue Getting Richer from the Global Warming Hoax
But the global warming crowd continues to push their agenda on the public while lining their pockets in the process. If you're still inclined to believe what Al Gore has to say about global warming, please consider the fact that since he embarked on his crusade, his wealth has grown from $2 million in 2001 to $100 million in 2016 - largely due to investments in fake "green tech" companies and the effective embezzlement of numerous grants and loans.
You might want to take all of this information into serious consideration before casting your vote in the November election.
Red Cross Built Exactly 6 Homes For Haiti With Nearly Half A Billion Dollars In Donations
October 1 2016 | From: Propublica / Various
The neighborhood of Campeche sprawls up a steep hillside in Haiti’s capital city, Port-au-Prince. Goats rustle in trash that goes forever uncollected. Children kick a deflated volleyball in a dusty lot below a wall with a hand-painted logo of the American Red Cross.
In late 2011, the Red Cross launched a multimillion-dollar project to transform the desperately poor area, which was hit hard by the earthquake that struck Haiti the year before. The main focus of the project — called LAMIKA, an acronym in Creole for “A Better Life in My Neighborhood” — was building hundreds of permanent homes.
Today, not one home has been built in Campeche. Many residents live in shacks made of rusty sheet metal, without access to drinkable water, electricity or basic sanitation. When it rains, their homes flood and residents bail out mud and water.
The Red Cross received an outpouring of donations after the quake, nearly half a billion dollars.
The group has publicly celebrated its work. But in fact, the Red Cross has repeatedly failed on the ground in Haiti. Confidential memos, emails from worried top officers, and accounts of a dozen frustrated and disappointed insiders show the charity has broken promises, squandered donations, and made dubious claims of success.
The Red Cross says it has provided homes to more than 130,000 people. But the actual number of permanent homes the group has built in all of Haiti: six.
After the earthquake, Red Cross CEO Gail McGovern unveiled ambitious plans to “develop brand-new communities.” None has ever been built.
Haitians outside a Red Cross field hospital in Carrefour, Haiti, on Dec. 14, 2010, 11 months after a magnitude 7.0 earthquake hit the country's capital, Port-au-Prince
Aid organizations from around the world have struggled after the earthquake in Haiti, the Western Hemisphere’s poorest country. But ProPublica and NPR’s investigation shows that many of the Red Cross’s failings in Haiti are of its own making.
They are also part of a larger pattern in which the organization has botched delivery of aid after disasters such as Superstorm Sandy. Despite its difficulties, the Red Cross remains the charityof choice for ordinary Americans and corporations alike after natural disasters.
One issue that has hindered the Red Cross’ work in Haiti is an overreliance on foreigners who could not speak French or Creole, current and former employees say.
In a blistering 2011 memo, the then-director of the Haiti program, Judith St. Fort, wrote that the group was failing in Haiti and that senior managers had made “very disturbing” remarks disparaging Haitian employees. St. Fort, who is Haitian American, wrote that the comments included, “he is the only hard working one among them” and “the ones that we have hired are not strong so we probably should not pay close attention to Haitian CVs.”
The Red Cross won’t disclose details of how it has spent the hundreds of millions of dollars donated for Haiti. But our reporting shows that less money reached those in need than the Red Cross has said.
Where did the half billion raised for Haiti go? The Red Cross won’t say.
Lacking the expertise to mount its own projects, the Red Cross ended up giving much of the money to other groups to do the work. Those groups took out a piece of every dollar to cover overhead and management. Even on the projects done by others, the Red Cross had its own significant expenses – in one case, adding up to a third of the project’s budget.
In statements, the Red Cross cited the challenges all groups have faced in post-quake Haiti, including the country’s dysfunctional land title system.
“Like many humanitarian organizations responding in Haiti, the American Red Cross met complications in relation to government coordination delays, disputes over land ownership, delays at Haitian customs, challenges finding qualified staff who were in short supply and high demand, and the cholera outbreak, among other challenges,” the charity said.
The group said it responded quickly to internal concerns, including hiring an expert to train staff on cultural competency after St. Fort’s memo.
Minouche Lamour, a member of the Community Platform for Development in Campeche, says she doesn't see how millions of dollars from the Red Cross could have been spent in her neighborhood
While the group won’t provide a breakdown of its projects, the Red Cross said it has done more than 100. The projects include repairing 4,000 homes, giving several thousand families temporary shelters, donating $44 million for food after the earthquake, and helping fund the construction of a hospital.
"Millions of Haitians are safer, healthier, more resilient, and better prepared for future disasters thanks to generous donations to the American Red Cross,” McGovern wrote in a recent report marking the fifth anniversary of the earthquake."
In other promotional materials, the Red Cross said it has helped “more than 4.5 million” individual Haitians “get back on their feet.”
Oops. Busted - The Order of St. John; a secret society under deep cover - hidden in plain sight, a classic esoteric 'laughing at the goyim who are too stupid to see' hallmark. Compare the St. John logo with the flag above. St. John is admittedly run by The Knights of Malta. Similarly, Red Cross has it's origins in the esoteric and was influenced by John D Rockefe;ler. While the Freemasons are lees inclined to admit their stewardship directly. Charities? Throw your money away if you like. It is quite well known nowadays that most of the money given to charity organisations never get's to where it was intended. Those pulling the strings simply play on peoples good nature
For those interested in the occult history of the Red Cross see: The Knights Templar
It has not provided details to back up the claim. And Jean-Max Bellerive, Haiti’s prime minister at the time of the earthquake, doubts the figure, pointing out the country’s entire population is only about 10 million.
"No, no,” Bellerive said of the Red Cross’ claim, “it’s not possible.”
When the earthquake struck Haiti in January 2010, the Red Cross was facing a crisis of its own. McGovern had become chief executive just 18 months earlier, inheriting a deficit and an organization that had faced scandals after 9/11 and Katrina.
Gail McGovern
Inside the Red Cross, the Haiti disaster was seen as “a spectacular fundraising opportunity,” recalled one former official who helped organize the effort. Michelle Obama, the NFL and a long list of celebrities appealed for donations to the group.
The Red Cross kept soliciting money well after it had enough for the emergency relief that is the group’s stock in trade. Doctors Without Borders, in contrast, stopped fundraising off the earthquake after it decided it had enough money. The donations to the Red Cross helped the group erase its more-than $100 million deficit.
The Red Cross ultimately raised far more than any other charity.
A year after the quake, McGovern announced that the Red Cross would use the donations to make a lasting impact in Haiti.
We asked the Red Cross to show us around its projects in Haiti so we could see the results of its work. It declined. So earlier this year we went to Campeche to see one of the group’s signature projects for ourselves.
Street vendors in the dusty neighborhood immediately pointed us to Jean Jean Flaubert, the head of a community group that the Red Cross set up as a local sounding board.
Sitting with us in their sparse one-room office, Flaubert and his colleagues grew angry talking about the Red Cross. They pointed to the lack of progress in the neighborhood and the healthy salaries paid to expatriate aid workers.
"What the Red Cross told us is that they are coming here to change Campeche. Totally change it,” said Flaubert.
“Now I do not understand the change that they are talking about. I think the Red Cross is working for themselves.”
The Red Cross’ initial plan said the focus would be building homes — an internal proposal put the number at 700. Each would have finished floors, toilets, showers, even rainwater collection systems. The houses were supposed to be finished in January 2013.
The Red Cross promised to build hundreds of new homes in Campeche but none have been built. Many residents still live in crude shacks. (Marie Arago, special to ProPublica)
None of that ever happened. Carline Noailles, who was the project’s manager in Washington, said it was endlessly delayed because the Red Cross “didn’t have the know-how.”
Another former official who worked on the Campeche project said, “Everything takes four times as long because it would be micromanaged from DC, and they had no development experience.”
Shown an English-language press release from the Red Cross website, Flaubert was stunned to learn of the project’s $24 million budget — and that it is due to end next year.
"Not only is [the Red Cross] not doing it,” Flaubert said, “now I’m learning that the Red Cross is leaving next year. I don’t understand that.”
(The Red Cross says it did tell community leaders about the end date. It also accused us of “creating ill will in the community which may give rise to a security incident.”)
The project has since been reshaped and downscaled. A road is being built. Some existing homes have received earthquake reinforcement and a few schools are being repaired. Some solar street lights have been installed, though many broke and residents say others are unreliable.
The group’s most recent press release on the project cites achievements such as training school children in disaster response.
The Red Cross said it has to scale back its housing plans because it couldn’t acquire the rights to land. No homes will be built.
Other Red Cross infrastructure projects also fizzled.
In January 2011, McGovern announced a $30 million partnership with the U.S. Agency for International Development, or USAID. The agency would build roads and other infrastructure in at least two locations where the Red Cross would build new homes.
But it took more than two and a half years, until August 2013, for the Red Cross just to sign an agreement with USAID on the program, and even that was for only one site. The program was ultimately canceled because of a land dispute.
A Government Accountability Office report attributed the severe delays to problems “in securing land title and because of turnover in Red Cross leadership” in its Haiti program.
Other groups also ran into trouble with land titles and other issues. But they also ultimately built 9,000 homes compared to the Red Cross’ six.
Asked about the Red Cross’ housing projects in Haiti, David Meltzer, the group’s general counsel and chief international officer, said changing conditions forced changes in plans. “If we had said, ‘All we’re going to do is build new homes,’ we’d still be looking for land,” he said.
The USAID project’s collapse left the Red Cross grasping for ways to spend money earmarked for it.
"Any ideas on how to spend the rest of this?? (Besides the wonderful helicopter idea?),” McGovern wrote to Meltzer in a November 2013 email obtained by ProPublica and NPR.
“Can we fund Conrad’s hospital? Or more to PiH[Partners in Health]? Any more shelter projects?”
Jean Jean Flaubert says the Red Cross promised to transform his neighborhood. “Now I do not understand the change that they are talking about,” he said. (Marie Arago, special to ProPublica)
It’s not clear what helicopter idea McGovern was referring to or if it was ever carried out. The Red Cross would say only that her comments were “grounded in the American Red Cross’ strategy and priorities, which focus on health and housing.”
Another signature project, known in Creole as “A More Resilient Great North,” is supposed to rehabilitate roads in poor, rural communities and to help them get clean water and sanitation.
But two years after it started, the $13 million effort has been faltering badly. An internal evaluation from March found residents were upset because nothing had been done to improve water access or infrastructure or to make “contributions of any sort to the well being of households,” the report said.
The Red Cross says 91% of donations went to help Haitians. That’s not true.
So much bad feeling built up in one area that the population “rejects the project.”
Instead of making concrete improvements to living conditions, the Red Cross has launched hand-washing education campaigns. The internal evaluation noted that these were “not effective when people had no access to water and no soap.” (The Red Cross declined to comment on the project.)
The group’s failures went beyond just infrastructure.
When a cholera epidemic raged through Haiti nine months after the quake, the biggest part of the Red Cross’ response — a plan to distribute soap and oral rehydration salts — was crippled by “internal issues that go unaddressed,” wrote the director of the Haiti program in her May 2011 memo.
Throughout that year, cholera was a steady killer. By September 2011, when the death toll had surpassed 6,000, the project was still listed as “very behind schedule” according to another internal document.
The Red Cross said in a statement that its cholera response, including a vaccination campaign, has continued for years and helped millions of Haitians.
But while other groups also struggled early responding to cholera, some performed well.
"None of these people had to die. That’s what upsets me,” said Paul Christian Namphy, a Haitian water and sanitation official who helped lead the effort to fight cholera. He says early failures by the Red Cross and other NGOs had a devastating impact.
“These numbers should have been zero.”
So why did the Red Cross’ efforts fall so short? It wasn’t just that Haiti is a hard place to work.
"They collected nearly half a billion dollars,” said a congressional staffer who helped oversee Haiti reconstruction.
“But they had a problem. And the problem was that they had absolutely no expertise.”
Lee Malany was in charge of the Red Cross’ shelter program in Haiti starting in 2010.
He remembers a meeting in Washington that fall where officials did not seem to have any idea how to spend millions of dollars set aside for housing. Malany says the officials wanted to know which projects would generate good publicity, not which projects would provide the most homes.
"When I walked out of that meeting I looked at the people that I was working with and said, ‘You know this is very disconcerting, this is depressing,’” he recalled.
The Red Cross said in a statement its Haiti program has never put publicity over delivering aid.
Malany resigned the next year from his job in Haiti.
"I said there’s no reason for me to stay here. I got on the plane and left.”
Transitional shelters like these on the outskirts of Port-Au-Prince, paid for by the Red Cross, typically last three to five years.
Sometimes it wasn’t a matter of expertise, but whether anybody was filling key jobs. An April 2012 organizational chart obtained by ProPublica and NPR lists 9 of 30 leadership positions in Haiti as vacant, including slots for experts on health and shelter.
The Red Cross said vacancies and turnover were inevitable because of “the security situation, separation from family for international staff, and the demanding nature of the work.”
The constant upheaval took a toll. Internal documents refer to repeated attempts over years to “finalize” and “complete” a strategic plan for the Haiti program, efforts that were delayed by changes in senior management. As late as March 2014, more than four years into a six-year program, an internal update cites a “revised strategy” still awaiting “final sign-off.”
The Red Cross says it provided homes to more than 130,000 Haitians. But they didn’t.
The Red Cross said settling on a plan early would have been a mistake. “It would be hard to create the perfect plan from the beginning in a complicated place like Haiti,” it said. “But we also need to begin, so we create plans that are continually revised.”
Those plans were further undermined by the Red Cross’ reliance on expats. Noailles, the Haitian development professional who worked for the Red Cross on the Campeche project, said expat staffers struggled in meetings with local officials.
"Going to meetings with the community when you don’t speak the language is not productive,” she said. "Sometimes, she recalled, expat staffers would skip such meetings altogether.
The Red Cross said it has “made it a priority to hire Haitians” despite lots of competition for local professionals, and that over 90 percent of its staff is Haitian. The charity said it used a local human resources firm to help.
Yet very few Haitians have made it into the group’s top echelons in Haiti, according to five current and former Red Cross staffers as well as staff lists obtained by ProPublica and NPR.
That not only affected the group’s ability to work in Haiti, it was also expensive.
According to an internal Red Cross budgeting document for the project in Campeche, the project manager – a position reserved for an expatriate – was entitled to allowances for housing, food and other expenses, home leave trips, R&R four times a year, and relocation expenses. In all, it added up to $140,000.
Compensation for a senior Haitian engineer — the top local position — was less than one-third of that, $42,000 a year.
Shelim Dorval, a Haitian administrator who worked for the Red Cross coordinating travel and housing for expatriate staffers, recalled thinking it was a waste to spend so much to bring in people with little knowledge of Haiti when locals were available.
"For each one of those expats, they were having high salaries, staying in a fancy house, and getting vacation trips back to their countries,” Dorval said.
“A lot of money was spent on those people who were not Haitian, who had nothing to do with Haiti. The money was just going back to the United States.”
Soon after the earthquake, McGovern, the Red Cross CEO, said the group would make sure donors knew exactly what happened to their money.
The Red Cross would “lead the effort in transparency,” she pledged. “We are happy to share the way we are spending our dollars.”
That hasn’t happened. The Red Cross’ public reports offer only broad categories about where $488 million in donations has gone. The biggest category is shelter, at about $170 million. The others include health, emergency relief and disaster preparedness.
After the earthquake, Red Cross CEO Gail McGovern unveiled plans to “develop brand-new communities.” None has ever been built.
It has declined repeated requests to disclose the specific projects, to explain how much money went to each or to say what the results of each project were.There is reason to doubt the Red Cross’ claims that it helped 4.5 million Haitians.
In other cases, the figures were low, and in others double-counting went uncorrected.
In describing its work, the Red Cross also conflates different types of aid, making it more difficult to assess the charity’s efforts in Haiti.
For example, while the Red Cross says it provided more than 130,000 people with homes, that includes thousands of people who were not actually given homes, but rather were “trained in proper construction techniques.” (That was first reported by the Haiti blog of the Center for Economic and Policy Research.)
The figure includes people who got short-term rental assistance or were housed in several thousand “transitional shelters,” which are temporary structures that can get eaten up by termites or tip over in storms.
It also includes modest improvements on 5,000 temporary shelters.The Red Cross also won’t break down what portion of donations went to overhead.
McGovern told CBS News a few months after the quake, “Minus the 9 cents overhead, 91 cents on the dollar will be going to Haiti.
And I give you my word and my commitment, I’m banking my integrity, my own personal sense of integrity on that statement.”
But the reality is that less money went to Haiti than 91 percent.
That’s because in addition to the Red Cross’ 9 percent
overhead, the other groups that got grants from the Red Cross also have their own overhead.
In one case, the Red Cross sent $6 million to the International Federation of the Red Cross for rental subsidies to help Haitians leave tent camps.
The IFRC then took out 26 percent for overhead and what the IFRC described as program-related “administration, finance, human resources” and similar costs.
Beyond all that, the Red Cross also spends another piece of each dollar for what it describes as “program costs incurred by the American Red Cross in managing” the projects done by other groups.
The American Red Cross’ management and other costs consumed an additional 24 percent of the money on one project, according to the group’s statements and internal documents. The actual work, upgrading shelters, was done by the Swiss and Spanish Red Cross societies.
"It’s a cycle of overhead,” said Jonathan Katz, the Associated Press reporter in Haiti at the time of the earthquake who tracked post-disaster spending for his book, The Big Truck That Went By.
“It was always going to be the American Red Cross taking a 9 percent cut, re-granting to another group, which would take out their cut.”
Given the results produced by the Red Cross’ projects in Haiti, Bellerive, the former prime minister, said he has a hard time fathoming what’s happened to donors’ money.
"Five hundred million dollars in Haiti is a lot of money,” he said. “I’m not a big mathematician, but I can make some additions. I know more or less the cost of things. Unless you don’t pay for the gasoline the same price I was paying, unless you pay people 20 times what I was paying them, unless the cost of the house you built was five times the cost I was paying, it doesn’t add up for me.”
A resident in a Port-Au-Prince transitional shelter paid for by the Red Cross.
This story was co-published with NPR. Mitzy-Lynn Hyacinthe contributed reporting. Design direction by David Sleight, production by Hannah Birch.
If you have information about the Red Cross or about other international aid projects, please email justin@propublica.org.
Can Russia Learn From Brazil’s Fate? Cabal Meddling In South America
October 1 2016 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / NewEasternOutlook / Various
William Engdahl recently explained how Washington used the corrupt Brazilian elite, which answers to Washington, to remove the duly elected President of Brazil, Dilma Rousseff, for representing the Brazilian people rather than the interests of Washington [see follow up article below].
Unable to see through the propaganda of unproven charges, Brazilians acquiesced in the removal of their protector, thereby providing the world another example of the impotence of democracy.
Everyone should read Engdahl’s article. He reports that part of the attack on Rousseff stemmed from Brazil’s economic problems deliberately created by US credit rating agencies as part of Washington’s attack to down grade Brazilian debt, which set off an attack on the Brazilian currency.
Brazil’s financial openness made Brazil an easy target to attack. One might hope that Vladimir Putin would take note of the cost of “economic openness.” Putin is a careful and thoughtful leader of Russia, but he is not an economist. He has confidence in neoliberal Elvira Nabiulina, Washington’s choice to head the Russian central bank.
...
Note: The rest of Paul Craig Robert's article has not been republished here. Whilst he is a very smart man on many matters the rest of this article demonstrates his fundmental lack of understanding of the central banking system. His belief that Russia needs to rely upon it's central bank, while it is still under the unfluence of the Rothschild cabal - is woefully misinformed.
He is right in the idea that any country would be better to rely on itself for financing itself - doing that by using a privately-owned foreign central bank is insane - and how we have come to be in this mess in the first place. Mr. Roberts is not playing the game with all of the pieces on this matter but you can read his full article here.
Washington Tries To Break BRICS – Rape Of Brazil Begins
Washington’s regime change machinery has for the time being succeeded in removing an important link in the alliance of large emerging nations by railroading through a Senate impeachment of the duly elected President, Dilma Rousseff.
On August 31 her Vice President Michel Temer was sworn in as President. In his first speech as president, the cynical Temer called for a government of “national salvation,” asking for the trust of the Brazilian people. He indicated plans to reform, and has also signaled his intention to overhaul the pension system and labor laws, and cut public spending, all themes beloved of Wall Street banks, of the International Monetary Fund and their Washington Consensus.
Now after less than three weeks at the job, Temer has unveiled plans for wholesale privatization of Brazil’s crown jewels, starting with oil. The planned Wall Street rape of Brazil is about to begin.
It’s important to keep in mind that elected President Rousseff was not convicted or even formally charged with any concrete act of corruption, even though the pro-oligarchy mainstream Brazil media, led by O’Globo Group of the billionaire Roberto Irineu Marinho, ran a media defamation campaign creating the basis to railroad Rousseff into formal impeachment before the Senate.
The shift took place after the opposition PMDB party of Temer on March 29 broke their coalition with Rousseff’s Workers’ Party, as accusations of Petrobras-linked corruption were made against Rousseff and former president Luiz Inácio Lula da Silva.
On August 31, 61 Senators voted to remove her while 20 voted against removal. The formal charge was “manipulation of the state budget” before the 2014 elections to hide the size of the deficit.
She vehemently denies the charge.
Indeed, the Senate issued its own expert report that concluded there was:
"No indication of direct or indirect action by Dilma” in any illegal budgetary maneuvers. According to the Associated Press, “Independent auditors hired by Brazil’s Senate said in a report released Monday that suspended President Dilma Rousseff didn’t engage in the creative accounting she was charged with at her impeachment trial.”
Under an honest system that would have ended the impeachment then and there. Not in Brazil.
In effect, she was impeached for the dramatic decline in the Brazilian economy, a decline deliberately pushed along as US credit rating agencies downgraded Brazilian debt, and international and mainstream Brazilian media kept the Petrobras corruption allegations in the spotlight.
Importantly, the Senate did not ban her from office for 8 years as Washington had hoped, and she has promised an electoral return. The Washington-steered Temer has until end of 2018 to deliver Brazil to Temer’s foreign masters before his term legally ends.
Notably, Temer himself was accused of corruption in the Petrobras state oil company investigations. He reportedly asked the then-head of the transportation unit of Petróleo Brasileiro SA in 2012 to arrange illegal campaign contributions to Temer’s party which was running a Washington-backed campaign to oust Rousseff’s Workers’ Party.
Then this June, only days into his serving as acting president, two of Temer’s own chosen ministers, including the Minister of Transparency, were forced to resign in response to allegations that they sought to subvert the probe into massive graft at Petrobras.
One of the two, Temer’s extremely close ally Romero Jucá, was caught on tape plotting Dilma’s impeachment as a way to shut down the ongoing Petrobras corruption investigation, as well as indicating that Brazil’s military, the media, and the courts were all participants in the impeachment plotting.
In brief, the removal of Dilma Rousseff and her Workers’ Party after 13 years in Brazil’s leadership was a new form of Color Revolution from Washington, one we might call a judicial coup by corrupt judges and congressmen.
Of the 594 members of the Congress, as the Toronto Globe and Mail reported, “318 are under investigation or face charges” while their target, President Rousseff, “herself faces no allegation of financial impropriety.”
The day after the first Lower House impeachment vote in April, a leading member of Temer’s PSDP party, Senator Aloysio Nunes, went to Washington, in a mission organized by former Bill Clinton Secretary of State Madeline Albright’s lobbying firm, Albright Stonebridge Group.
Nunes, as president of the Brazilian Senate’s Foreign Relations Committee, has repeatedly advocated that Brazil once again move closer to an alliance with the US and UK.
Madeline Albright, a Director of the leading US think-tank, Council on Foreign Relations, is also chair of the prime US Government “Color Revolution” NGO, the National Democratic Institute (NDI). Nothing fishy here, or? Nunes reportedly went to Washington to rally backing for Temer and the unfolding judicial coup against Rousseff.
A key player from the side of Washington, Rousseff’s de facto political executioner, was, once again, Vice President Joe Biden, the “Dick Cheney” dirty operator-in-chief in the Obama Administration.
Biden’s fateful Brazil trip
In May, 2013, US Vice President Joe Biden made a fateful visit to Brazil to meet with President Rousseff. In January 2011 Rousseff had succeeded her Workers’ Party mentor, Luis Inacio Lula da Silva, or Lula, who constitutionally was limited to two consecutive terms.
Biden went to Brazil to discuss oil with the new President. Relations between Lula and Washington had chilled as Lula backed Iran against US sanctions and came economically closer to China.
In late 2007 Petrobras had discovered what was estimated to be a mammoth new basin of high-quality oil on the Brazilian Continental Shelf offshore in the Santos Basin.
In total the Brazil Continental Shelf could contain over 100 billion barrels of oil, transforming the country into a major world oil and gas power, something Exxon and Chevron, the US oil giants wanted to control.
In 2009, according to leaked US diplomatic cables published by Wikileaks, the US Consulate in Rio wrote that Exxon and Chevron were trying in vain to alter a law advanced by Rousseff’s mentor and predecessor in her Brazilian Workers’ Party , President Luis Inacio Lula da Silva.
That 2009 law made the state-owned Petrobras chief operator of all offshore oil blocs. Washington and the US oil giants were not at all pleased at losing control over potentially the largest new world oil discovery in decades.
Lula had not only pushed ExxonMobil and Chevron out of the controlling position in favor of the state-owned Petrobras, but he also opened Brazilian oil exploration to the Chinese, since 2009 a core member of the BRICS developing nations with Brazil, Russia, India and South Africa.
In December, 2010 in one of his last acts as President, Lula oversaw signing of a deal between the Brazilian-Spanish energy company Repsol and China’s state-owned Sinopec. Sinopec formed a joint venture, Repsol Sinopec Brasil, investing more than $7.1 billion towards Repsol Brazil.
Already in 2005 Lula had approved formation of Sinopec International Petroleum Service of Brazil Ltd as part of a new strategic alliance between China and Brazil.
In 2012 in a joint exploration drilling, Repsol Sinopec Brasil, Norway’s Statoil and Petrobras made a major new discovery in Pão de Açúcar, the third in block BM-C-33, which includes the Seat and Gávea, the latter one of the world’s 10 largest discoveries in 2011. USA and British oil majors were nowhere to be seen.
Biden’s task was to sound out Lula’s successor, Rousseff, about reversing that exclusion of US major oil companies in favor of the Chinese. Biden also met with leading energy companies in Brazil including Petrobras.
While little was publicly said, Rousseff refused to reverse the 2009 oil law in a way that would be suitable to Biden, Washington and US oil majors. Days after Biden’s visit came the Snowden NSA revelations that the US had also spied on Rousseff and top officials of Petrobras.
She was livid and denounced the Obama Administration that September before the UN General Assembly for violating international law. She cancelled a planned Washington visit in protest. After that, US-Brazil relations took a dive.
After his May 2013 talks with Rousseff, Biden clearly gave her the kiss of death.
Before Biden’s May 2013 visit Dilma Rousseff had 70% of popularity rating. Less than two weeks after Biden left Brazil, nationwide protests by a very well-organized group called Movimento Passe Livre, over a nominal 10 cent bus fare increase, brought the country virtually to a halt and turned very violent.
The protests bore the hallmark of typical “Color Revolution” or Twitter social media destabilizations that seem to follow Biden wherever he makes a presence. Within weeks Rousseff’s popularity plummeted to 30%.
Washington had clearly sent a signal that Rousseff had to change course or face serious problems.
The Washington regime change machine, including its entire array of financial warfare operations ranging from a leaked PwC audit of Petrobras to Wall Street credit rating agency Standard & Poors’ downgrade of Brazil public debt to junk in September 2015, went into full action to remove Rousseff, a key backer of the BRICS New Development Bank and of an independent national development strategy for Brazil.
Selling the Crown Jewels
The man who has now manipulated himself into the Presidency, the corrupt Michel Temer, worked as an informer for Washington the entire time.
In documents released by Wikileaks, it was revealed that Temer was an informant to US intelligence since at least 2006, via telegrams to the US embassy in Brazil classified by the Embassy as “sensitive” and “for official use only.”
Washington’s man in Brazil, Temer, has lost no time appeasing his patrons in Wall Street. Even as acting President this May, Temer named Henrique Meirelles as Minister of Finance and Social Security.
Meirelles, a Harvard-educated former President of the Brazilian central bank, was President of BankBoston in the USA until 1999, and was with that bank in 1985 when it was found guilty of failing to report $1.2 billion in illegal cash transfers with Swiss banks.
Meirelles is now overseeing the planned selloff of Brazil’s “crown jewels” to international investors, a move that is intended to gravely undercut the power of the state in the economy.
Another of Temer’s key economic advisers is Paulo Leme, former IMF economist and now Goldman Sachs Managing Director of Emerging Markets Research. Wall Street is in the middle of the Temer-led economic rape of Brazil.
On September 13, Temer’s government unveiled a massive privatization program with the cynically misleading comment,
"It is clear the public sector cannot move forward alone on these projects. We are counting on the private sector.”
He omitted to say the private sector he meant were his patrons.
Temer unveiled plans that would complete the country’s largest privatization in decades. Conveniently, the process us to be completed by end of 2018, just before Temer’s term must end.
The influential US-Brazil Business Council detailed the privatization list on its website. The US-Brazil Business Council was founded forty years ago by Citigroup, Monsanto, Coca-Cola, Dow Chemicals and other US multinationals.
Tenders for the first round of concessions will be issued before the end of this year. They will include privatization of four airports and two port terminals, all auctioned in the first quarter of 2017.
Other concessions include five highways, one rail line, bidding on small oil blocks and a later round for large, mainly offshore, oil development blocks. As well the government will sell selected assets currently controlled by its Minerals Research Department plus six electric power distributors and three water treatment facilities.
The heart of his planned privatization are, not surprisingly, Joe Biden’s coveted state oil and gas companies along with chunks of the state Eletrobrás power company. Temer plans to get as much as $24 billion from the selloff. Fully $11 billion of the total are to come from sale of key oil and gas state holdings.
Of course, when state assets such as huge oil and gas resources are sold off to foreign interests in what will clearly be a distress sale, it is a one-off deal.
State oil and gas or electric power projects generate a continuing revenue stream many times any one-off privatization gains. Brazil’s economy is the ultimate loser in such privatization. Wall Street banks and multinationals are of course, as planned, the winner.
On September 19-21, according to the US-Brazil Business Council website, the Brazilian government’s key ministers for infrastructure including Minister Moreira Franco; Minister Fernando Bezerra Coelho Filho, Minister of Mines and Energy; and Minister Mauricio Quintella Lessa, Minister of Transport, Ports and Civil Aviation, will be in New York City to meet with Wall Street “infrastructure investors.”
This is Washington’s way, the way of the Wall Street Gods of Money, as I title one of my books. First, destroy any national leadership intent on genuine national development such as Dilma Rousseff.
Replace them with a vassal regime willing to do anything for money, including selling the crown jewels of their own nation as people like Anatoli Chubais did in Russia in the 1990’s under Boris Yeltsin’s “shock therapy.”
As reward for his behavior, Chubais today sits on the advisory board of JP MorganChase. What will Temer and associates get for their efforts remains to be seen. Washington for now has broken one of the BRICS that ultimately threaten her global hegemony. It is not likely to bring any lasting success if recent history is any guide.
F. William Engdahl is strategic risk consultant and lecturer, he holds a degree in politics from Princeton University and is a best-selling author on oil and geopolitics, exclusively for the online magazine “New Eastern Outlook.”
Dangerous Products That We’re Unknowingly Using In Our Day-To-Day Life
+ The Cancer Risk To People Who Drink Chlorinated Water Is 93% Higher Than Those Who Don’t September 30 2016 | From: NewEasternOutlook / EnvirowatchRangitikei / Varous
In today’s highly controversial and aggressive world, virtually anything can present a threat to the life of a human being, not just wars, climate change, or short-sighted and often criminal actions of certain politicians.
As it has been shown by a number of scientific studies, the activities of a number of American corporations present a very real threat the well-being of the population mainly due to the use of genetically modified substances in their products while manufacturing substandard health and beauty aids.
The truth is that it’s the people of developing countries that are being affected by these fraudulent business practices the most, since Western corporations try to suppress any information about the health effects of their products to obtain maximum profit.
At the end of the twentieth century British scientists have come to a sensational conclusion that parabens are capable of penetrating the skin barrier and are being accumulated in the tissues of the body, causing cancer, hormone system failures, endocrine system suppression, and skin diseases.
Research made this finding while studying malignant tumors in breast tissue, all of which contained parabens, Later on, these findings were confirmed by Canadian and French scientists.
Parabens are artificial preservatives that are often used in the pharmaceutical and cosmetic industry by a number of Western corporations.
Even though they are effectively increasing the shelf life of a product, while remaining relatively cheap to use, parabens pose a serious threat to human health and well-being.
From time to time one can come across articles on the harmful effects of parabens in Europe and the United States, forcing certain companies to replace parabens with less harmful preservatives. However, the markets of developing countries, especially those with hot and humid climates, are flooded with Western cosmetic products that contain the dangerous substance.
In order to attract international attention to this danger, the French Le Monde went as far as to publish a list of the 400 Western pharmaceutical products containing parabens and that are, therefore, dangerous for use or consumption.
In this list one may find the baby cream Biafine, such cough medicines as Clarix, Codotussyl, Drill, Hexapneumine, Humex, Pectosan, and Rhinathiol, stomach relief medicine such as Maalox, Gaviscon, Josacine, and antibiotic Zinnat, along with a list of other drugs produced by Western corporations and actively advertised for mass consumption.
As it has been pointed out by French journalists, numerous studies have shown that drugs from this list compromise the functioning of the hormone system, especially the reproductive ability of men and women, and may result in cancer.
At the same time, scientists are stressing the danger of hydro-alcoholic gels which were brought to the market in the wake of the artificially created hysteria around the “danger” of the so-called “bird flu,” the H1N1. These gels are advertised as the ultimate solution for sanitizing hands and body in the absence of soap.
A study carried out by the University of Missouri and published in the Plos ONE journal shows that hydro-alcoholic gels make a person more susceptible to Bisphénol-A.
In 2010, the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) officially recognized that Bisphénol-A is harmful to human health due to the negative effect it has on brain functions and the reproductive system. It also causes a number of cancers (in both women and men) – in particular, prostate cancer, breast cancer as well as autism, depression, reproductive and endocrine systems failure, delays in brain development, diabetes, obesity, and cardiovascular disease.
Yet another study conducted in Argentina showed that 85% of the women’s hygienic pads presented a serious threat to women since they contain the chemically hazardous substance known as glyphosate.
This fact was revealed by researchers of the National Argentine University of La Plata at a recent congress of physicians in Buenos Aires, upon examining sanitary towels and sanitary pads produced with the use of genetically-modified cotton that was grown using Roundup herbicide of the American company Monsanto-Bayer.
As we learn from this study,after the use of this herbicide, all cotton products contain this carcinogenic substance. For this reason, there’s been a massive movement in many countries through the collection of signatures to force such producers as Tampax or Always to state the composition of their products.
The Cancer Risk To People Who Drink Chlorinated Water Is 93% Higher Than Those Who Don’t
This information is from well known Dr Mercola. If you go to the link you can download his free ebook, an excellent resource that will show you how to protect yourself and your loved ones from health risks by choosing the best water to drink and bathe in.
Need I repeat? We need to be vigilant in what we expose ourselves to today because corporate interests are such that they will focus on profits not on your health. Be vigilant and be informed.
What if that clear, clean-looking liquid you use every day – to quench your thirst, to bathe and shower in, and to wash your dishes and laundry in contributed to dozens of everyday ailments, including…heart attacks, tiredness, sinus problems, sperm count, risk of miscarriage, a weakened immune system and many more.
Truth is, the water we use in and around our homes is far from the fresh, pure resource you might assume. And the worst part is…
Americans are ingesting from 300 to 600 times what the Environmental Protection Agency considers a “safe” amount while chlorine itself is relatively benign, and was created to help keep us free from infectious diarrheas, it reacts with organic materials which already dissolve in water, forming chemicals (known as DBP’s) that are over 100 times more toxic than chlorine…
According to the U.S. Council of Environmental Quality, the cancer risk to people who drink chlorinated water is 93 percent higher than among those whose water does not contain chlorine.
The residents of a small town in Pennsylvania who ate diets rich in saturated animal fats and milk had no heart attacks – until they switched from mountain spring water to fluoridated water.
Research from the University of Nijmegen in the Netherlands discovered that people who swam in chlorinated pools or polluted waters as children had 2.2 to 2.4 times the risk of developing melanoma compared to those who did not swim in chlorinated waters.
Male smokers who drank chlorinated tap water for more than 40 years had double the risk of bladder cancer as smoking males who drank non-chlorinated water.
Presidential Debate Check: 12 Hillary Lies Debunked + Lots More
September 29 2016 | From: Lifezette
Clinton's debate performance was riddled with mistruths that got a pass from Lester Holt.
While the moderator focused on interrupting and fact-checking Trump, Hillary Clinton offered a litany of lies to the nation on Monday night during her first debate against Donald Trump.
Clinton’s nose began to grow from the very start, as she asserted that the nation needs to “finally guarantee equal pay for equal work” for women in her opening statement. The notion that women on average do not receive the same pay as men - the 77 cents to a dollar myth - has been proven false repeatedly.
The fact is that it is already illegal to pay men and women different wages for the same work if they have the same experience. The 77 cents myth is derived from looking merely at average income accrued over a lifetime, and ignores the fact that men on average tend to work longer hours, often work in higher paying industries, and spend more active years in the work force.
"When confronted by Trump about her former strong support for the Trans-Pacific Partnership, Clinton claimed that she “hoped it would be good deal.”
The truth of course is that she called it the “gold standard” of trade deals.
Clinton also advocated raising taxes on the wealthy based on the premise that they do not currently pay enough. “I think it’s time to suggest that the wealthy pay their fair share,” she said. The truth is that America has the most progressive tax system in the developed world - the top 10 percent contribute over half of all income tax revenue.
Bizarrely, Clinton claimed that "slashing taxes on the wealthy hasn't worked." Her comment implied that slashing taxes on the wealthy is why the economy is in such poor shape currently. This is an odd thing to say, considering Obama has been in office for the better part of eight years and has done anything but slash taxes for anyone.
When Trump said he wished to lower the corporate tax rate, Hillary said: "We've looked at your tax proposals. I don't see changes in the corporate tax rates … you're referring to that would cause the repatriation."
Clinton and her team couldn't have been looking very hard, as Trump's plan to lower to corporate tax rate from 35 percent to 15 is written quite clearly on the economic plan posted on his website.
Taking time to remind the country that Clinton's success is due in large part to her surname, she asserted that "my husband did a pretty good job in the 1990s." Clinton, like all Democrats, loves to take credit for the financial stability of her husband's presidency. Of course, it was the Republican-controlled Congress led by Newt Gingrich that blocked Clinton's desired spending measures and balanced the budget.
Only Hillary: With Hillary Clinton campaigning for the White House, it’s hard to determine the truth from the lies - especially with the biased media. But we know the truth - it is only Hillary who has a questionable and incriminating track record.
Clinton also claimed that in being party to the Iran deal she helped "put the lid on Iran's nuclear program." But many said the deal guarantees no such thing. Indeed, it rests entirely on Iran's acting in good faith and upholding their end of the bargain.
When Trump defended the use of stop-and-frisk policies in New York City, Clinton attacked them as unconstitutional and asserted "it was uneffective it did not do what it needed to do."
This is simply false.
"Data from the few cities that report police stops show their effectiveness," Dennis C. Smith, professor of public policy at the Robert F. Wagner Graduate School of Public Service at New York University, wrote in The New York Times in 2012 .
"My trend analysis with SUNY Albany professor Robert Purtell found that the increased use of stops correlated significantly with accelerating drops in most of the major crimes. A Harvard study of policing in Los Angeles under William Bratton, when crime dropped significantly, reported a surge in stops by the L.A.P.D. [with per capita stop rate higher than N.Y.P.D.]," Smith continued.
Perhaps Clinton's most egregious lies were two concerned with emails. "I made a mistake using a private email," Clinton said.
Of course, Clinton didn't use a "private email." She used multiple private email servers. The word mistake implies Clinton didn't know she was doing anything wrong, a claim belied entirely by the fact that so many of her aides and associates pleaded the Fifth or were granted immunity by the FBI - not to mention the fact that many of them engaged in the destruction of evidence and that she herself made false exculpatory statements.
Finally, in visiting her favorite Trump-Putin conspiracy theory, Clinton claimed that "Donald publicly invited Putin to hack into Americans."
The truth, as is obvious from the context of his words, is that Trump was calling on the Russians to release Clinton's missing emails in the event that they already had them.
Clinton may have proven her ability to hold her own against Trump one-on-one Monday night, but she also proved her complete disregard for the truth and willingness to lie to the American people.
The only group that can produce a majority that still trusts the media are Democrats with a 51% trust rate in print and TV reporting. The next highest trust rate is Americans over 50 years of age with a trust rate of 38 percent. Related: YouTube Has Quietly Begun “Censoring” Journalists Who Criticize Government
The conclusion is that old people who are Democrats are the only remaining group that barely trusts the media. This mistaken trust is due to their enculturation. For older Democrats belief in government takes the place of Republican belief in evangelical Christianity.
Older Democrats are firm believers that it was government under the leadership of President Franklin D. Roosevelt that saved America from the Great Depression. As the print and TV media in the 21st century are firmly aligned with the government, the trust in government spills over into trust of the media that is serving the government.
As the generation of Democrats enculturated with this mythology die off, Democratic trust rates will plummet toward Republican levels.
It is not difficult to see why trust in the media has collapsed. The corrupt Clinton regime, which we might be on the verge of repeating, allowed a somewhat diverse and independent media to be 90% acquired by six mega-corporations. The result was the disappearance of independence in reporting and opinion.
The constraints that corporate ownership and drive for profits put on journalistic freedom and resources reduced reporting to regurgitations of government and corporate press releases, always the cheapest and uncontroversial way to report.
With journalistic families driven out of journalism by estate taxes, the few remaining newspapers become acquisitions like a trophy wife or a collector Ferrari.
Jeff Bezos, CEO and founder of amazon.com, handed over $250 million in cash for the Washington Post. Jeff might be a whiz in e-commerce, but when it comes to journalism he could just as well be named Jeff Bozo.
On September 12, Washington Post reporter Cindy Boren dropped the Washington Post below the level of the supermarket tabloid, National Enquirer. One must wonder where her editor was.
Drunk perhaps? The Washington Post actually reported that a Nigerian MD, Bennet Omalu, “whose credentials and tenacity are well known,” has concluded that Hillary Clinton’s obvious medical problems could be due to her being poisoned by a Putin-Trump conspiracy. Related: The man who discovered CTE thinks Hillary Clinton may have been poisoned
One could possibly conclude that Cindy Boren and her Washington Post editor were having fun with Omalu, except that the article repeated the unfounded allegation that circumstantial evidence according to a UK inquiry associates Putin with the poisoning death of Litvinenko.
In other words, first Litvinenko, now Hillary.
If circumstantial evidence is to be the Washington Post’s guide, then clearly that evidence suggests that the neoconservatives, well-ensconced in high government positions and desperate for a New Pearl Harbor in order to launch their wars of hegemony in the Middle East, are responsible for 9/11.
Yet the Washington Post has a full-time reporter whose job is to disparage conspiracy theories while the Washington Post itself launches the conspiracy theory of the century: Putin And Trump Conspiracy Poisons US Democratic Candidate for President.
If intelligence, or perhaps simply sufficient time in Americans’ lives to investigate the news, were not in such short supply, possibly Americans would reflect on what the benefit is of being driven by Washington into conflict with Russia and China.
UN Peace Council: The US Media Is Lying To The American People. The War In Syria Is Not A Civil War, It's A Proxy Invasion By The United States.
US Peace Council Representatives CONFRONT a hostile American press after visiting Syria, and learning that the American people are being lied to, grossly lied to.
A long video, but worth watching if you care to know the truth about what is going on in Syria and how Obama has been lying to us... again.
Tribalism: New Mini-Documentary Reveals How Globalist Manipulators Hijack The Animalistic Control Centers Of Your Brain
September 28 2016 | From: NaturalNews
My new mini-documentary unveils exactly how globalist manipulators hijack the animalist control centers of your brain.
If you're ever wondered how globalists manage to convince the masses that Islamic terrorism doesn't exist, that half the population is gay or transgender, that national security is hatred and bigotry or that government dictatorships are rooted in love and compassion, you must see this video.
This video joins the series of mini-documentaries I've recently released on the subject of mass awakening.
Whatever You Do, Do Not Use Google "Allo": Snowden
September 27 2016 | From: RT
Google Allo, the new “smart” chat app launched on Wednesday, is ‘dangerous’ and should be avoided, according to whistleblower Edward Snowden.
The ex-NSA contractor posted a series of Tweets to warn everyone away from the chat app, which he says will “record every message you ever send and make it available to police upon request”. Related: Delete Google Maps? Go ahead, says Google, we'll still track you
Allo, designed to unseat chat pack leader WhatsApp, promises to deliver quick conversations with features like; “Smart Reply” that can guess your answers and respond to messages with just the tap of a button, and “Google Assistant”, which answers your questions and helps you search for things directly in your chat.
How does Allo plan on predicting your every word and witty emoji, you ask? “The more you use it, the more it improves over time,” which basically means they’ll collect and store as much of your data as possible and then use artificial intelligence to guess your replies.
However, the efficiency of time-saving typing may end up costing customers their already compromised privacy.
When Google first announced the introduction of Allo earlier this year they, too, had planned end-to-end-encryption in “Incognito Mode” and assured they would only store messages transiently, rather than indefinitely.
However, it now appears that Google won’t be doing that after all. Wednesday’s announcement revealed Google plans to store all conversations that aren’t specifically started in “incognito mode” by default.
As Snowden pointed out, last year every single one of the NSA and FBI’s 1,457 surveillance requests was granted by the US foreign intelligence surveillance court… and Allo’s stored data (i.e. your data) will be fair game too.
In contrast, all of WhatsApp’s chats are encrypted and unreadable - although they did announce last month that they will now be sharing your contacts and who you talk to with Facebook.
The War On Reality: How Globalists Occupy Your Mind To Control Everything
September 26 2016 | From: TheHealthRanger
There is a war going on for reality and the battlefield for that war is your consciousness.
Almost everything you see going on in society or from official sources is fabricated or rigged. It's fictional. It's all designed to weave this artifical tapestry of beliefs and ideas and truths in your mind that actually are not true. They are not based on reality.
The point of this it to create a prison for your mind
that gives you the illusion of thinking you have freedome of thought, freedom of choice or that you live in a democracy when in reality thie entire system around you is all fabricated to force you into making certain decisions or taking certain actions or avoiding certain actions, all of which further the desires and the consolidation of power of the totalitarian regime in power...
Crash Predictor Ann Pettifor: 'We're No Longer Citizens, We're Customers'
September 24 2016 | From: RadioNewZealand
One of the few analysts to correctly predict the 2008 global financial crash says we need to start worrying about the economic attempts to turn citizens into consumers.
UK economist Ann Pettifor was also one of the leaders of the Jubilee 2000 debt campaign that successfully pushed to cancel $100 billion worth of debt owed by some of the world's poorest nations.
Ms Pettifor, the director of left-wing economic think tank Policy Research in Macroeconomics, has been in New Zealand to deliver public lectures on the current state of the financial world.
Speaking to Nine to Noon today, she said many of the current issues facing the world came from attempts by economists and the finance sector to 'marketise' society and to "turn us all into customers for everything".
"We're no longer citizens, we're no longer workers, we're customers, all along the line. And all of our relationships must, they argue, be marketised.
They're also turning us into 'rentiers', so when we rent out our house as part of Airbnb, or we rent out our car as part of Uber, we are learning that with the ownership of an asset, it becomes possible, almost effortlessly, to earn rent."
She said the global economy was increasingly about earning rent from money, property and any other assets people owned.
"We are using up everything we have to earn a bit more money, and that is partly because the way the system is geared, and those who do have assets are able to earn rent on those assets, whether it's interest rates or whatever, and those without assets are poor, and those people are cross, they are very cross."
Ms Pettifor said people were feeling increasingly desperate due to low wages and salaries.
"I'm not against people using Airbnb, and I understand why they are doing it, and the reason they are doing it is because they are getting poorer, because they cannot live on their existing income, because we don't pay wages or salaries that allow people to live a decent life. So they have to supplement that, with all of these additional marginal activities.
That's what's wrong with the way we have allowed the markets to take control of our economies and for the invisible hand to decide who gets what, is those who are left behind - and the left-behinders voted for Brexit, the left-behinders are voting for Trump, and they're voting for Le Pen, the fascist in France - we need to worry about that."
Former Kissinger CEO Says The World Is Run By 30 Families
September 24 2016 | From: Hiduth
A former CEO for Henry Kissinger has said that he believes just 30 families run the world, and that these families are the driving force behind the New World Order.
David Rothkopf, author of ‘Superclass: The Global Power Elite and the World They Are Making,’ and former CEO of Kissinger Associates, says that 30 families and their 6,000 minions control the entire human race of six billion people.
His findings mirror a study conducted by the Federal Institute of Technology in Zurich which found that a mere 147 corporations (out of 40,000 studied) had real power and influence in the world economy. All of these 147 companies had interlocking Boards of Directors.
Currently, this One World Corporatocracy uses the United States and the European Union to consolidate and wield power over the entire globe. But there are vulnerabilities in the world of Wall Street Globalism. The EU appears to be disintegrating.
The ECB (European Central Bank) under the ex-Goldman Sachs VP Mario Draghi seems to be as suicidal as His Japanese counterpart. And America is stretched thin by its constant warfare. Russia Today said the US had military operations in 134 countries in 2014.
Wikileaks, Snowden and others have revealed way more truth than the public can digest.
The US has been funding Al Qaeda and ISIS. And now Putin has shown his superiority by being able to actually find ISIS and bomb them into oblivion.
The only economic and military advantage America had is about to disappear. Dr Michael Hudson wrote Super Imperialism in 1972. That was the year after Nixon closed the Gold Window on August 15, 1971 and the year before Henry Kissinger’s invention of the Petrodollar in 1973 after the Arab-Israeli war.
Hudson went to the Pentagon and the State Department in 1972 to explain that the US was making nations overseas pay for their occupation by American troops by accepting worthless Federal Reserve Notes in exchange for real goods and services.
When an American general finally understood what Dr Hudson was saying about foreigners paying for their own occupation, he exclaimed, “We’re ripping people off.”
The days when The Federal Reserve could print stacks of dollars to the moon and the Saudis could fund the US budget deficit with their oil revenues are rapidly coming to an end. Very soon American politicians will have to recognize that we can no longer afford all of those wars and forget about over 700 military bases overseas.
The American consumer will have to deal with the doubling of the price of imported goods. Of course that will mean a drastic drop in the American standard of living which will lead to instability at home. This cold light of economic reality will force America to either start WW III or go home.
Most sane people would like to avoid either a thermonuclear war with Russia or a conventional one as they have far superior weapons. American politicians and the Pentagon spent $400 billion on the F-35 which does not work. Russia is too poor to spend trillions of dollars on failed projects so the Elite can line their pockets at our expense.
What would be nice is for American voters to join with the citizens of Europe, Asia, Latin America, Africa and the Mideast in their revolt against Globalism. That is to say the workers of the world unite to end Global Occupation by Bankers.
The following describes an eleven point program to undo what has been done to us by design. But first I need to explain what causes Depressions.
Ask your friends what a Depression is. Most answers will describe the effects, such as, unemployment, starvation and bankruptcies. Depressions are solved by cancellation of debts either through discharge in bankruptcy court or by inflation devaluing the real value of the burden of debt.
The third alternative would be for the government to void Unpayable Debts as the Kings of ancient Babylon and Sumer did. We would need to devise a more sophisticated plan as those were relatively simpler agricultural societies.
I would like to make 11 suggestions which can both end a Depression and take down our Banker Occupied governments:
1) Offer $25,000 in debt cancellation to every adult US citizen who is not institutionalized. This should be an international effort so people in foreign countries will get equivalent amounts in pounds, euros and other local currencies.
This is to be financed by seizing the assets of financial war criminals that were stashed in Liechtenstein, the Cayman Islands and other such offshore money laundering centers.
We need to get the assets of the private banks and the account numbers of all the corporations and the trusts the criminals who declared war against us.
2) Seize all the assets of war criminals. A lot of assets have been converted into real estate. In America we also have problems with mortgages. To evade taxes and to intentionally create clouded titles to homes the war criminals created the Mortgage Electronic Registration System (MERS). I would suggest that MERS be made illegal and require all mortgages be registered at reduced rates at the local county courthouse. I would give everyone 90 days to register for a clear title.
I would also challenge the title to every property to show that it did not belong to a corporation or trust fund owned by a war criminal. For example, if a shopping mall is owned by a corporation, the actual people who own the shares must identify themselves.
The World Bank did a study of 213 banking scandals and found that 150 were traced bank to offshore trusts linked either to drug cartels or to the 30 or so families whose wealth has been fully invested in slave trading, drug smuggling and other crimes against humanity for centuries.
All of these assets need to be seized so we can cancel debts and get the economy moving again. We also need to take away their assets not just because they were stolen from us but to reduce their ability to wage war against us to zero.
We can take the seized real estate and use it to fund Social Security and stolen pension funds.
The seized stock and bond assets should also be used to fund public and private pensions and to cancel government debts. I would also use the tens of trillions of dollars in government agency assets listed at www.CAFR1.com to cancel debts and fund pensions.
3) All federal, sate and local government debt should be made illegal. President Lincoln (and Kennedy (both assassinated)) issued Greenbacks which bore no interest. Greenbacks eliminated the need for bonds to be issued.
4) I would issue a non-interest bearing currency in America and require the same of any foreign country that would want our assistance to cancel their government and personal debts.
It was the Federal Reserve Act of 1913 that allowed bankers to create money out of nothing and charge us interest.
That interest was designed to transfer all wealth from us to the bankers. It created Unpayable Debts which grow at exponential rates due to the law of compound interest.
Since prices are a ratio of the Money Supply to goods and services for sale, if we increase both at the same rate, we would have price stability. We could at current rates spend 535 billion dollars a year into circulation. We could create 535 billion dollars and spend it without raising taxes to pay for it. If we increased the GDP and the Money Supply to twice our current levels, then we could spend a trillion dollars a year into circulation while maintaining stable prices.
5) I would spend 200 billion dollars a year to repair America’s infrastructure. We have spent too much money on foreign wars so our infrastructure is collapsing.
I would divide up 100 billion dollars a year amongst the 50 states on a proportional basis so a state with 2% of the US population would get 2 billion dollars to spend on bridges, roads, dams, levees, water purification plants, sewers and school buildings. This would be matched by another 100 billion dollars in federal infrastructure repair.
6) I would make pensions illegal. A pension is a promise to pay you something in 20 or 30 years. These pension funds currently attract maggots seeking to feed on your retirement funds. I would pass a law saying that your employer must pay you this year for any money that was intended to be set aside for your retirement. This money would go into a retirement account in your name at a local cooperative trust. Neither politicians nor anyone from Wall Street should ever be allowed to touch your retirement funds.
7) Use those cooperative trusts to overpower Wall Street and the City of London. Allow them to offer low interest credit cards and consumer loans.
Let them issue simple life, fire and auto insurance. Plow the profits back into retirement funds. Commercial banks would be geared to small businesses.
8) To boost the economy release all of the secret government technology to new corporations that would receive the patents and a 5 billion dollar grant to bring cheap and abundant energy and other advances onto the market. If needed, they could trade patent rights for regions overseas in exchange for the machinery needed to produce products in America.
Shares should be issued to American citizens who are over 35. If a stock valued at $50 splits 6 times in 20 years, then it will be worth $3,200 and ten original shares would be valued at $32,000. They will need the extra growth in their stock portfolio more than couples 18 to 30 who have longer growth curves and can expect to retire with a million dollars in stocks.
Young people would no longer contribute to Social Security. Their employer would pay into their retirement account at their cooperative trust but they would pay nothing to Social Security.
If a married couple making no more than the minimum wage were able to set aside everything they paid into Social Security into a mutual fund, they would retire at age 65 with a million dollars. That had to be said for the benefit of those who do not understand money and compound growth.
9) Make fractional reserve banking illegal. In 1348 the people of Venice were on a gold standard. If you deposited one gold coin, the banker could loan 50 certificates said to be equal to 50 gold coins. The banker was allowed to collect interest on that paper note as if it were 50 gold coins.
This system collapsed even though the people had a gold standard. Bankers pay people to spread false doctrines about the gold standard. The bankers have stolen most of the gold and would love a return to the gold standard. But to function as money the medium of exchange must be plentiful enough so everyone can buy and sell.
The only way a gold standard could work is if we allowed bankers to loan out 100 or more paper certificates in exchange for each gold coin. That would impoverish us with interest payments on money the Bankers created out of nothing. Sound familiar?
10) Make property taxes on a primary residence illegal. A home should be one of the primary savings plans for retirement. Taxing homes harms taxpayers. It should no longer be the policy of the government to do harm to us.
Property tax revenues would be more than balanced by the cancellation of state and local debts and 200 billion dollars a year in federal capital grants. And all those new infrastructure workers will be paying taxes.
11) Establish an incomes policy. My goal is self-determination for the working class. The current government is bankrupting small businesses and the middle class while encouraging welfare dependency.
I would make the first $30,000 a year on a single person or $60,000 for a married couples tax free. I would give the custodial parent $600 a month for the first child and $400 a month for the second child. Nothing for additional children except in cases of twins and triplets.
I would also change the name of the IRS to Internal Revenue and Benefits Services. I would also take away their armed agents and their police powers. A separate police force would be responsible for arresting tax cheats. The IRS has killed too many innocent Americans for them to survive without a serious overhaul.
I would also pass a negative income tax. Under this system a person making $8.50 an hour would be paid $1.50 an additional hour by the employer from federal sources. Under this plan a married couple both working 40 hours a week would earn a guaranteed $40,160 a year tax free. If they had 2 children, they would receive $1,000 a month or $12,000 a year for a total of $52,160 tax free.
I would pay for this in part by ending the wars and the surveillance state. Someone said we spent 7 trillion dollars on wars we did not need after we allowed Israel to blow up the World Trade Center. I also would no longer allow bankers to steal 3 billion or more dollars a week from unaudited federal spending.
We should also eliminate a lot of federal, state and local jobs and even entire departments. We currently have 30 million federal, state and local government workers if you count contractors.
I would eliminate most tax deductions. I would trade your interest rate deduction on a home mortgage for the elimination of property taxes on a principal residence. And I would trade your tax exemptions for children by paying you $12,000 a year for the first two children.
Eliminating tax deductions would pay for a greater part of the reforms we need. Any deduction that gives you a thousand dollars gives others $100,000 in tax breaks.
An oil man once paid $17.95 in federal income tax on an income of $75,000,000. That was when tax rates were higher but deductions still shifted the burden to the middle class. By giving married couples $12,000 for children, we will make the flat rate tax fair for the middle class.
We need strong middle and working classes to counter the power of Wall Street. By creating our own currency and making home ownership more affordable and getting control of our retirement funds and savings in co-operative trusts, we will guarantee that the Elite stop all this nonsensical talk of killing a few billion of the common people.
Syria: Attack on Aid Convoy Kills Twenty, Destroys Aid, And Obliterates US War Crimes In Support Of ISIS-Daesh Terror Group?
September 23 2016 | From: GlobalResearch “The President does not have power under the Constitution to unilaterally authorize a military attack in a situation that does not involve stopping an actual or imminent threat to the nation.” Candidate Barack Obama, December, 2007
As the US heaps blame and accusations on Russia and Syria for the alleged air strike on the aid convoy on Monday 19th September, as ever there are more questions than answers – and whatever US spokespersons state, absolutely no certainties.
The only undeniable fact is that another tragedy killed at least twenty Syrian Arab Red Crescent volunteers and the organisation’s local Director Omar Barakat, father of nine. At least eighteen of the thirty one-truck convoy were destroyed with the warehouse where humanitarian aid was stored.
The Russian Defence Ministry has categorically denied any attack and claims the convoy caught fire:
"We have studied video footage from the scene from so-called ‘activists’ in detail and did not find any evidence that the convoy had been struck by ordnance”, commented Igor Konashenkov, a Ministry spokesman.
“There are no craters and the exterior of the vehicles do not have the kind of damage consistent with blasts caused by bombs dropped from the air.”
His observations are hard to challenge, anyone who has studied the assaults of the "international community" on far away countries over the last decades knows what a bombed truck looks like, what fragments remains of it.
Photographs of the affected lorries show burned out vehicles, metal skeleton intact.
Konashenkov said that damage visible in footage was instead the result of cargo igniting – “oddly” occurring at the same time as militants (formerly Nusra Front) had started a big offensive in nearby Aleppo, backed by tanks, artillery and other heavy equipment.
He added:
"Only representatives of the ‘White Helmets’ organization close to the Nusra Front who, as always, found themselves at the right time in the right place by chance with their video cameras can answer who did this and why.”
Indeed the ‘White Helmets’ boasted in a video of being on the scene within “moments.”
The “White Helmets” who have had the gall to entitle themselves the Syrian Civil Defence Force are seemingly neither Syrian, nor Civil, nor Defence. Vanessa Beeley who has meticulously charted their antics points out:
"This is an alleged ‘non-governmental’ organization … that so far has received funding from at least three major NATO governments, including $23 million from the US Government and $29 million (£19.7 million) from the UK Government, $4.5 million (€4 million) from the Dutch Government.
In addition, it receives material assistance and training funded and run by a variety of other EU Nations.”
She informs of such concerns regarding the organization that:
"A request has been put into the EU Secretary General to provide all correspondence relating to the funding and training of the White Helmets. By law this information must be made transparent and available to the public.”
Beeley points out: “There has been a concerted campaign by a range of investigative journalists to expose the true roots of … the White Helmets.” The most damning statement, however (comes from) their funders and backers in the US State Department who attempted to explain the US deportation of the prominent White Helmet leader, Raed Saleh, from Dulles airport on the 18th April 2016.
Of the incident, Mark Toner, State Department spokesman stated:
"And any individual – again, I’m broadening my language here for specific reasons, but any individual in any group suspected of ties or relations with extremist groups or that we had believed to be a security threat to the United States, we would act accordingly. But that does not, by extension, mean we condemn or would cut off ties to the group for which that individual works for.”
Figure that one, Dear Reader.
The Ron Paul Institute has pointed out:
"We have demonstrated that the White Helmets are an integral part of the propaganda vanguard that ensures obscurantism of fact and propagation of Human Rights fiction that elicits the well-intentioned and self righteous response from a very cleverly duped public.
A priority for these NGOs is to keep pushing the No Fly Zone scenario which has already been seen to have disastrous implications for innocent civilians in Libya, for example.”
What better chance to push “the No Fly Zone scenario” than arriving within “moments” of the convoy tragedy, filming it and creating a propaganda scenario before any meaningful forensic investigation could even be started, since the trucks were still burning. And of course, the “White Helmets”, aka “Syrian Defence Force”, were filming rather than attempting to put out the fire and rescue those in the burning trucks.
The Russian Defence Ministry subsequently caused outrage by claiming that Drone footage: “shows bombed Syrian aid convoy included truck full of militant fighters carrying mortar guns.”
However: “The footage emerged as the United Nations rowed back from describing the attack on the aid convoy as air strikes, saying it did not have conclusive evidence about what had happened.”
It must be asked, why on earth, after long and protracted negotiations over the convoy would Syria and or their Russian ally risk the wrath of US and “coalition” further decimation of the country by laying themselves open to accusations of bombing and aid convoys?
The tragedy has emphatically achieved one thing, however. Wiped from the headlines is another atrocity – the US bombing which killed over sixty Syrian soldiers and wounded over a hundred others just two days earlier, on Saturday 17th September, causing Russian Foreign Ministry spokeswoman Maria Zakharova to comment:
“We are reaching a really terrifying conclusion for the whole world: That the White House is defending Islamic State. Now there can be no doubts about that”,according to the RIA Novosti news agency.
Again – Quis custodiet ipsos custodes?
Who will guard the guards?
UN Security Council Holds High-Level Meeting On Syria
The United Nations Security Council is held a high-level meeting on Syria in New York on Wednesday, September 21, on the sidelines of the UN General Assembly.
The meeting, chaired by New Zealand’s Prime Minister John Key, started with a briefing on Colombia, followed by a discussion of the situation in the Middle East, with special focus on Syria, after the US-Russia brokered ceasefire collapsed due to US bombing of Syrian government forces, and the subsequent attack on the Aleppo aid convoy.
Why Washington Had To Wreck The Syrian Ceasefire
Finian Cunningham explains that the CIA and Pentagon had to wreck the Syrian ceasefire in order to prevent the world discovering that there are no moderate Syrian rebels.
All of the so-called “rebels” are part of a US organized group of jihadists tasked with bringing chaos to Syria.
Cunningham makes clear that the US has no print and TV media, just a collection of whores who lie for their living. For the article visit: StrategicCulture
Unlawful Killing - The Murder Of Princess Diana And Why It Matters
September 23 2016 | From: Sott / Various The mystery surrounding the deaths of Princess Diana and Dodi al-Fayed 22 years ago was revived by the claims of a British SAS sniper whose testimony was part of the trial of another SAS soldier who was convicted of illegal weapons possession.
The parents-in-law of the SAS sniper in question, known only as "Soldier N", claim that he boasted to his wife that the "SAS was behind Princess Diana's death".
Unsurprisingly, the media reaction to the story has been to dismiss it, citing, incorrectly, that the investigation into Diana and Dodi's deaths was conclusive, that it was an accident, and that there was "no evidence of conspiracy".
In fact, this alleged "new evidence" has done little more than provide the media with an opportunity to, once again, ridicule any idea that there was anything strange about the events in Paris that night.
The general consensus among the great British and world public seems to be that Diana and Dodi and their driver Henri Paul died as a result of a car crash caused by pursuing paparazzi. It's rather perplexing that this should be the case because the jury in the official 3-month-long inquiry into their deaths returned a verdict of "unlawful killing" and the paparazzi were exonerated.
How does this happen? Well, how did it come to pass that 50% of American citizens believed that Saddam Hussein was involved in the 9/11 attacks, despite the fact that no one, not one person, ever made such a statement publicly?
Answer:The mainstream media's real job is not to report the news but to 'catapult the propaganda' that the 'elite' hope will become the new 'reality' or historical record.
Five years ago British film director Keith Allen made an attempt to release a documentary about the death of Diana and Dodi. Due to the content of the film however, Allen was legally prevented from making it widely available to the public.
Attempts to upload it to video hosting sites like Youtube and Vimeo have also been thwarted. The documentary provides fairly damning evidence that Diana and Dodi were murdered by the British 'elite', with the support and connivance of their French counterparts.
Just some of the details revealed in the documentary include:
All CC TV cameras at the entrance to the Alma tunnel in Paris (alma means 'soul' in Spanish) were mysteriously switched off at the time of the 'crash'.
The seat-belts in the back of the Mercedes in which Diana and Dodi were traveling may have been tampered with to make them inoperable.
The paparazzi were left far behind Diana and Dodi's Mercedes by the time they entered the Alma tunnel. However, four motorbikes and a white Fiat Uno car surrounded the Mercedes in the tunnel. One of these vehicles (or one of the drivers) emitted an intensely bright flash of light (similar to a strobe light). The Fiat Uno then hit the Mercedes from the side, causing it to crash violently into one of the central pillars of the tunnel.
French doctor Jean Marc Martino took immediate control of the crash scene and the victims. It took him 37 minutes, however, to extract the still conscious Diana from the back of the car, despite the fact that the back of the car was undamaged, so there should have been no significant delay in removing her.
81 minutes elapsed before the ambulance departed the scene of the crash for the nearest hospital.
It was 103 minutes (a further 22 minutes) before the ambulance arrived at the nearby hospital (a journey that should have taken no more than 5 minutes).
At the official inquest, experts agreed that Diana's life could have been saved if she had received normal and prompt medical attention.
The doctors Dr. Pepin and Professor LeComte who conducted tests on the blood samples of the driver Henri Paul appear to have used someone else's blood to determine that Paul was drunk, when he was not. Both of these doctors were legally required to attend the inquest, but refused to appear. The French Ministry of Justice protected them, citing reasons of "public order" for their refusal to attend and officially the reason was "protection of state secrets and the essential interests of the nation."
A government that withholds information in the interest of "national security" or to "protect state secrets" is essentially saying that they realise that if the information became publicly available, it could provoke mass public disturbances, or even revolution. In short, "protecting state secrets" and "national security" are euphemisms for protecting the 'elite' from the people, and what the people might do if they knew the truth.
In 2006, a team of scientists offered to conduct tests on the samples to determine who they belonged to. The French government declared, however, that the blood samples in question "no longer existed". There is also clear evidence that French police planted alcohol in Paul's apartment to support the claim that he was an alcoholic.
British intelligence had developed a plan to assassinate a Serbian politician by causing his car to crash in a tunnel by flashing a strobe light at the driver.
Many members of the British establishment, including the judiciary, police force and politicians, conspired to cover up the truth about the crash and the fact that Diana suspected she was going to be killed.
British MP Nicholas Soames appears to be a psychopathic misogynist (one among many in the British establishment) who hated Diana. Soames was British Defence Minister under Conservative Prime Minister John Major (1994-97). Soames threatened Diana that she should back off from her high-profile campaign to end the use of land mines in third world countries and warned her that "accidents can happen". Soames is the Chairman of Aegis Defence Services, a British private mercenary company with overseas offices in Afghanistan, Bahrain, Iraq, Kenya, Nepal and the United States. As evidenced by video footage released in 2005, Aegis mercenaries were involved in the indiscriminate shooting and murder of Iraqi civilians during 'Operation Iraqi Freedom'.
According to the book Women in Parliament published in 2005, Soames has been named as the 'most sexist' MP, with several female MPs stating that he has made vulgar comments to them. In other accusations of sexual harassment, it has been alleged that Soames makes repeated cupping gestures with his hands, suggestive of female breasts, when women are trying to speak in parliament, in order to distract them.
Nicholas Soames: a repellant excuse for a human being
If there is a flaw in Keith Allen's excellent documentary investigation into the murder of Diana and Dodi, it is the emphasis given to the role of the British monarchy in the murder. It is unlikely that the British royals had any significant role in the murder of Diana and Dodi because the British royals do not wield significant power in the UK, and have not done so for centuries.
Since the de facto end of absolutist monarchy in England at the turn of the 18th century, the role of British royalty has been one of serving the interests of the established lay authorities, a.k.a. 'the elite'.
Diana and Dodi were murdered to "protect the British monarchy" only insofar as the continued existence of the British monarchy is important to the civilian 'elite' because it lends legitimacy to their claim of 'natural' or 'divinely ordained' superiority over the inferior rabble.
It is, after all, the Queen that appoints governments and bestows knighthoods, peerages and other 'honors' on the chosen, and thereby confers 'regal legitimacy' on those so honored and appointed.
Of course, behind the scenes, it is 'her majesty's government' (i.e. the self-same civilian 'elite') that advises the sovereign on who gets what and when.Without this royal pomp and circumstance, the bestowing of titles by civilians on other civilians would look, for all the world, like a bunch of undeserving bureaucrats pumping themselves up far beyond their station. And the people may not be so eager to sanction it.
Diana's divorce from Charles, her impending marriage to Dodi al-Fayed (a Muslim) and the possibility that she might expose some of the less than regal goings-on inside Windsor Castle threatened the public image, reputation and very existence of the British Royal establishment, but the threat was felt most keenly among the high-level securocrats in Whitehall and assorted pedophile peers who jealously guard their immoderate privileges and lifestyles.
Dodi al-Fayed was a film-maker (he produced the multi-Oscar-winning Chariots of Fire). His father was a wealthy man. Had he and Diana been allowed to live, we can only imagine what kind of films or documentaries he may have turned his hand to with Diana as his wife and inspiration.
Given Diana's outspoken and compassionate nature, combined with her world-wide public appeal, what might she have said or done, and what might she have achieved had she been allowed to live?
With the world as her stage and having the ears of billions, might the last 16 years that have brought us the interminable 'war on terror', the invasions of other nations, the slaughter of so many innocents and the institution of a global police state, have been any different?
But it is certainly a sad indictment on the nature and structure of our modern society that an open and loving heart coupled with a natural and widespread popularity is perceived as such a threat by our entrenched 'leaders' that their minds invariably turn to murder and cover-ups to 'solve the problem'.
But that appears to be precisely what happened in the case of Diana, and she was certainly not the first victim. This particular story of the summary assassination of a popular hero is anything but new. Julius Caesar was one such hero, and there have been many others over the course of the last 2000 years.
Unfortunately, their lives all seem to tell the same story of unfulfilled potential for themselves, the millions they could have inspired, and human society in general.
Watch the 'Unlawful Killing' documentary for yourself below:
The Real Reason Why Princess Diana Was Assassinated: Ex MI5 Agent Testifies
The Ritualistic Assassination of Princess Diana - David Icke
Bayer's Monsanto Deal To Be Closely Watched By New Zealand Farmers As Agri-Chemical Players Dwindle
September 22 2016 | From: NationalBusinessReview Bayer's US$66 billion acquisition of Monsanto, creating the world's biggest supplier of seeds and agri-chemicals to farmers, will be closely watched by New Zealand's rural sector as the latest in a series of deals that has shrunk the number of competitors in the market.
Bayer and Monsanto are two of the big seven companies selling agricultural chemicals in New Zealand.
Of the other five, Dow Chemical is in the process of a global merger with DuPont and Swiss seed giant Syngenta is close to being acquired by China National Chemical Corp, which already owns Adama.
Of the others, ASX-listed Nufarm had a distribution agreement with Monsanto for its Roundup glyphosphate products up until 2013, while Bayer rival BASF reportedly held inconclusive talks with Monsanto earlier this year
Bayer chief executive Werner Baumann has indicated the companies would need to file for clearance in about 30 jurisdictions for the deal and get antitrust approval in the US, Canada, Brazil and the EU, the Financial Times reports. The deal has stoked concern among US farmer groups that they may face price increases for agricultural products.
Federated Farmers arable farming chair Guy Wigley called it:
"A significant development for New Zealand farming. It's a very finely tuned marketplace and farmers are highly sensitive to pricing," he said. "The costs and benefits of using all their products are keenly understood."
Wigley likened agri-chemicals to the pharmaceuticals industry, where there was plenty of competition for older products that had come off patent while companies sought a premium to cover research and development costs for new products.
The Commerce Commission said it is unable to comment on whether the transaction would require its scrutiny. However, John Hampton, professor of seed technology and director of the Lincoln University Seed Research Centre, said it may require antitrust approval.
While Monsanto is the world's largest seed company, its GM crops such as Roundup-ready Canola, soybean and maize aren't sold in New Zealand and its local sales in that market are confined to vegetable seeds produced by its Seminis and De Ruiter units.
Bayer has a smaller seeds business but is mainly in the pest and disease product side of the agri-chemical market, including seed treatments, while Monsanto's chemicals were more in the herbicide and weed control side of the market.
All up there were about half a dozen major companies in the seed sector, "so I can't see there would be a major impact in what's happening in seeds in New Zealand," Hampton said, adding that he speculated that Monsanto's GM technology was a major driver for Bayer's takeover offer.
Globally, there was no new herbicide chemistry emerging and increased resistance and regulatory hurdles for some existing ones. At the same time growing demand "for more sustainable methods of weed and pest control," he said.
“Chemicals aren't the future. Now the industry is looking at interactions between microbes and plants - biocontrols," he said.
The past five years have been marked by a number of acquisitions of small biocontrol companies by big agri-chemical producers "being astute and looking to the future". Research was now focussed in two main areas - GM technology and the use of bacteria and fungi to control pests and diseases and to promote plant growth, he said.
Industry group Agcarm, which represents about 85 percent of the New Zealand agri-chemicals market, has 14 members listed as crop protection companies. It estimates the New Zealand market is worth $250 million to $300 million.
Bayer's offer for Monsanto of US$128 a share in cash is about 20 percent more than the last trading price of US$106.76. Bayer said the deal would create "significant value" with annual synergies of about US$1.5 billion after three years "plus additional synergies from integrated solutions in future years".
Listen Up Truth-Seekers: We’re On The Same Team
September 22 2016 | From: WakingTimes The justice-seeking community are a funny bunch. We’ve all got our differences, including the various ‘beliefs’ we have, but ultimately we’re on the same team. You’d think we would be acting like it too, but unfortunately we’re not.
It’s clear that the divide and conquer strategy is in full swing, even among the truth and freedom movements. What’s the D&C strategy I can hear some of you ask?
It’s when the powers-that-think-they’re-the-overlords use informational tactics to divide the people so they fight one another, instead of collectively facing the real issues.
And god dammit they’ve been successful.
There’s covert powers who are in control? I would suggest we engage some simple logic with this one. To start, money rules the world. better put, they can digitally punch numbers into a computer and POOF, currency is created.
Now these banksters control the central banks and therefore control the governments. Enter the two-party tyranny system we call democrSo, who owns the money? The banksters of course. Their scam is so brilliant that they can create money out of thin air, oracy. Both sides work for the same financial interests, which are not just limited to the banking industry, but the energy, pharmaceutical and media corporations too, among many others.
Essentially, we are ruled via a highly integrated corporatocracy, regardless if you understand it, or believe it to be true.
This control-system is a sick beast. It’s out of alignment with natural law, which essentially means that it disrespects the golden rule. In layman’s terms, this universal law is to do no harm, respect each others shit, honor your contracts; that sort of thing.
Because the matrix of control aims to impose their centralized global dictatorship on all of us, including the disgraceful methods they’re choosing to achieve it, they’ve broken this divine contract. Therefore, their so-called ‘power’ is undermined by their own actions.
They essentially make themselves obsolete.
But we cannot keep our heads in the sand and do nothing; we still have to deal with this layer of truth in one way or another. After all, no great organizational change occurred by riding unicorns and staring at pretty fucking rainbows.
Simply, we have both a material and energetic responsibility to face this cancer of an order and replace it with something truly made out of justice and honor.
What then, should we replace it with? Well, this is one of the million dollar questions.
Some people are fundamentalist anarchists who want zero government. Now I might be off target, but at least hear me out and then disagree with me if you wish.
Personally I find that proposition unrealistic, especially until every person in every country is at some stage of enlightenment where they won’t try to monopolize, tyrannize, subjugate or apply an array of other tactics of suppression, coercion and control.
In other words my view is that we ned to utilize the current operational system, at least in the transitional phase, because groups of people still exist who will fuck others over given the chance. So it makes more sense for ‘the people’ to ethically take control of the governmental system and transform it into one that honors the golden rule, at least initially.
Now I might be wrong about this, and I’m perfectly okay with that. And that’s my point; we can disagree about exactly where we go from here, but we still need to mobilize a voluntary team otherwise we’re all likely to be royally fucked.
I also see the inherent value of a money-less society because money itself is an evidence-based tool of scarcity, and therefore enslavement. It also naturally breeds excessive competition, inequality and greed. This approach could be achieved via some form of abundance-based economy, but I do realize this futurist design is unrealistic, at least in the short term.
But once again, I don’t have all the answers. No one does. I would suggest that most of us don’t want to be ruled, and therefore we’re all anarchists in the pure sense of the word, and that’s the first principle we can unite on. But how we transition to a ruler-less world is yet to be determined.
So, given we need to integrate to undermine the mechanisms of the control-system, where are we at?
Unfortunately, the alternative media is in tatters. We’ve recently had a couple of big names surrounded by big controversy, causing further division. Many people are violently arguing about the shape of our reality. The conspiracy rabbit hole and it’s multiple tunnels of truth and untruth have left many people poorly focused, as well as the truth-seekers significantly divided. The competing views on Trump has also resulted in more infighting.
In addition, many people think they have their shit sorted and are ‘enlightened’, but few appear to remember they’ve continuously changed their minds and behaviors since birth. Even if they have a good idea of what the fuck is going on, many fail to realize that this ride of ‘waking up’ is a journey, not a destination.
For example, there’s a couple of quotes which have been shared tens of millions of times, which say something like ‘be the change’ and ‘I’m wise so I change myself’, but they’ve been disgraced by all those who don’t bother to truly live by them.
The hypocrisy and inaction among the truth-seekers is painfully obvious.
Yet, we’re all hypocrites to one degree or another. We’re all going to evolve our beliefs in some way too. If we truly accept that we all have our weaknesses and contradictions, and that we’ve got philosophical and behavioral refinements that we’re yet to undertake, then it makes it very easy to accept one another as comrades.
And it’s absolutely necessary at this point too. The concerning reality is that the entire freedom movement is in danger of becoming a running joke, not just to the outsider curtain hangers, but internally as well.
That’s one of the reasons why we really need to start fresh. If we begin by accepting that none of us 100% know what has, is and should be, then we will create a level playing field where we all have an opportunity to volunteer as equals on the team of truth and freedom.
If so, we will actually have a strong shot at finally unifying, which is the only bloody way we’re going to get anything seriously done.
Of course we’re already moving in a general direction, and there’s many agreements already subtly made. For example, it’s fairly clear there are certain concepts and primary targets that have manifested as a pattern within the independent media and the progressive mindsets. What follows, therefore, is a simple merger strategy that’s based on a few core values, and a few core systemic areas.
So let’s see how this resonates. In terms of values, do you personally agree with the following?
1. We value love over hate.
2. We value truth over lies.
3. We value freedom over enslavement.
4. We value happiness over suffering.
5. We value honor over disrespect.
6. We value cooperation over competition.
7. We value family and community over money.
8. We value health over business.
9. We value peace over war.
10 We value justice over injustice.
Sound fair? I’m going to assume that’s a yes, because otherwise you need some serious self-healing. Sorry (not sorry) to be so blunt, but your-self and your fellow-man are not your enemy.
In addition, if we agree on these values, they must be applied in every area of discourse. Of course there are areas where competition for example has its place, such as sport, but there is still cooperation first and foremost otherwise the game wouldn’t even be played.
So if these values can stand the test of time, that also means they will naturally dissolve any so-called rules and laws that contradict them.
In terms of the systemic issues, let’s see if we can at least agree on the Four M’s as our primary targets for change, which are Money, Medicine, Media and Management:
1. Money should be a sovereign public utility, not hijacked by private stakeholders and converted into a transnational banking cartel.
2. Medicine (including food) should be as natural as possible, as well as be inexpensively available to all who need it, not monopolized by the multinational giants and perverted into the toxin-rich, addictive and unnatural substances we have today.
3. Media should be based on truth, authentic journalism and what’s best for the people, not propagandized to create minions of the failing system.
4. Management of our society should be designed by and for the people, not by and for the corporate and oligarchical structures.
Is that fair too? Does the whole lot sit well with you? Let’s bloody well hope so.
So in saying all this, and of the thousands of people who read it, what will actually change to unite the world’s justice-seeking communities?
To be straightforward and realistic, most likely fuck all. In truth, I actually could care less if it’s this proposal either; if a group would like to design a basic unification strategy that we can agree on, please do so. No matter how it happens, it just needs to happen, and that’s the most important thing.
However, we really do need to show some solidarity, so this has been created as an opportunity for the fragmented independent media to stand together on some core values and systemic focal points. We’re all in the position to share this information through our networks too, so if you more or less agree with this strategy for unification then there is nothing stopping you from doing so.
In addition, the recent issues arising from two key voices in the independent media has further shown that we shouldn’t be rallying around individuals, but instead be binding around some very simple and key agreements. If so, we could use them as a framework for publicly debating how they relate to the behavior of governments, corporations, oligarchs and the system itself.
By continuously saturating our agreements and discussions into the collective consciousness, more and more people – working both inside and outside of the system – will be emancipated from the delusions they’ve been programmed to have. After all, people are just people, and most of them deep down want the best for their fellow-man.
It would then continue as an education process for everybody who needs it, based on any agreements made. And as Max Igan suggests in the below interview, we could also organize a global day of protest to show unification around our quest for truth and freedom.
In any case, I primarily wrote this as an energetic injection because I know that somewhere lurking just beyond the veil, the many movements for truth and freedom have an innate capacity to put their differences to the side and come together as a peaceful force to radically transform our world into one of honor and justice.
Could this happen soon? Who knows; we’ve all been pleasantly surprised before.
For further information regarding where we’re at, and where we’re going, watch this new interview with the infamous Max Igan.
Italians Blow Chemtrails ‘Secret War’ Lid Off With Film
September 21 2016 | From: PakAlertPress A new Italian film, Chemtrails: The secret war has been released showing a disturbing covert military agenda behind the sinister phenomenon, one that according to evidence presented includes far more than weather manipulation for “climate change.”
“Let’s stand up and defend our rights!” say Italian filmmakers Antonio and Rosario Marciano.
The Marcianos, of the Italian website Tanker Enemy (Tanker-Enemy.eu) have produced the documentary film, Chemtrails: the secret war (below) to show scientific evidence related to the chemtrails phenomenon. While much of the documentation has been presented in previous years by Professor Michel Chossudovsky, head of Global Research, no film captures the covert war against We the People as well as the Marcianos do.
“Weather manipulation is only one (collateral) aspect of this phenomenon,” say the Marcianos. “What is at stake is a covert military agenda.”
This HD documentary film is the first Italian professional film on illegal geo-engineering aka chemtrails.
“It has been realized thanks to many friends and collaborators. For years this issue has been denied and mocked but the chemical spraying of our sky is still happening,” the couple say.
In September 2014, Jacques Daidié, a French activist, went to Italy where he met the Marcianos, well-known Italian activists against geo-engineering. The French translation was born from that meeting and then, produced by several members of the French association “Ciel voilé”, (www.cielvoile.fr).
Other contributors of the film’s translation include Jacques, Dominique from Avignon, Mary from Monteux, Sebastien from St Firmin in Valgaudemard and Danielle from Gap.
In 2012, Dupre reported in the article, Geoengineered climate change heats up debate:
“The US Air Force has the capability of manipulating climate either for testing purposes or for outright military-intelligence use,” economist Chossudovsky wrote. “These capabilities extend to the triggering of floods, hurricanes, droughts and earthquakes."
In recent years, large amounts of money have been allocated by the US Department of Defense to further developing and perfecting these capabilities.
Christchurch, New Zealand, 2011
“Ironically,” Chossudovsky remarked, “the Pentagon, while recognizing its ability to modify the World’s climate for military use, has joined the global warming consensus." (This disguises the Pentagon’s perfidy.) In a major study (now mysteriously unavaliable), the Pentagon has analyzed in detail the implications of various global warming scenarios.
Weather-modification, according to US Air Force document AF 2025 Final Report, ‘offers the war fighter a wide range of possible options to defeat or coerce an adversary’ and, it says, extend to the triggering of floods, hurricanes, droughts and earthquakes:
“Weather modification will become a part of domestic and international security and could be done unilaterally…It could have offensive and defensive applications and even be used for deterrence purposes. The ability to generate precipitation, fog, and storms on earth or to modify space weather, … and the production of artificial weather all are a part of an integrated set of technologies which can provide substantial increase in US, or degraded capability in an adversary, to achieve global awareness, reach, and power.
Air University at Maxwell Air Force Base in Alabama provides the full spectrum of Air Force education, from pre-commissioning to the highest levels of professional military education, including degree granting and professional continuing education for officers, enlisted and civilian personnel throughout their careers.
AU’s PME programs educate Airmen on the capabilities of air and space power and its role in national security. AU conducts research in air, space and cyberspace power, education, leadership and management. AU also provides citizenship programs and contributes to the development and testing of Air Force doctrine, concepts and strategy.
“The significant expansion in America’s weather warfare arsenal, which is a priority of the Department of Defense is not a matter for debate or discussion,” stated Chossudovsky in 2004, calling the subject matter “a scientific taboo.”
This taboo constitutes a human rights violation as much as fossil fuel companies and other polluters dismissing climate change today. The Marcianos hope their new movie, Chemtrails, the secret war, will catapult chemtrail deniers out of their comfort zone and into reality, at least for more open public debate if not action against the covert war.
What Do Smart Meters And Vaccinations Have In Common? + Another Vaccine Dump
September 20 2016 | From: NaturalBlaze / Various Jerry Day of Freedom Taker.com has produced an exceptional new video wherein he explains in detail what Smart Meters and Vaccinations have in common.
It’s called “Conditional Acceptance,” a term and a legal tactic whereby you can refuse anyone who pressures you to sign either an “opt-out” agreement for a Smart Meter or demands you to accept a vaccination.
Opt-out contracts are ones big corporations give you when you refuse corporate offers. Jerry explains what he calls “highway robbery” in this video.
Listen carefully to what Jerry explains, plus take notes, because his logic may be one that you can utilize under “Right of Contract.” Jerry says;
“Always remember that you have Right of Contract. That is the legal term used to describe the fact that on any contract or agreement your signature must be fully voluntary and not coerced in any way. If you’re pressured into signing or agreeing, your signature and agreement technically have no authority or effect."
And legally, there is no contract or agreement if you can show there was coercion or pressure causing you to sign that contract. So your Right of Contract means that you – and only you – may decide whether you sign something or not. And you may not be penalized in any way for refusing to sign anything.”
“They [utilities and governments] are criminally violating utility customers – and they know it. So when they refuse to insure the damage, their equipment will cause to you, you have every right to refuse that equipment.
“If the equipment they are installing was really not harmful and did not violate your rights, the insurance would cost almost nothing. But electronic utility meters are known to be hazardous and harmful – so much so that no insurance company will provide insurance for any price [more about insurance here], because they know that advanced utility metering is a ticking time bomb of damages and litigation. Vaccinations represent a very similar situation to utility metering.”
Listen intently to what Jerry says about “Conditional Acceptance” because that’s the bargaining chip in the ‘song and dance’ you will have to engage in to protect yourself and your family from AMI Smart Meter RFs/EMFs, dirty electricity they produce , plus possible fire loss to your home from Smart Meters proclivity to malfunction.
The same logic regarding “Right of Contract” and “Conditional Acceptance” applies with regard to vaccinations. Jerry delves into vaccinations like you may not have heard before.
Homeowners insurance and health insurance do not cover you for losses from AMI Smart Meters or injured health from receiving a vaccine! The unfair fact about bullying and harassment from utilities and the medical profession has to be understood fully for what it is: You are liable for all damages unless you are prepared not to be left helpless and demand your legal rights by taking Jerry’s advice into consideration.
After listening to the above video, please be certain to check out thedownloadable documents A-2 and A-4 regarding Smart Meters. There’s also a Vaccination Notice Jerry talks about. All are offered as templates at www.FreedomTaker.com.
Related Articles
Yes, they just keep coming - the evidence is in the order of a flood of biblical proportions for this with the eyes to see:
Shocking Research Confirms Vaccines Are Contaminated With Monsanto's RoundUp Herbicide
Folks, I have written about the problems with vaccines in previous blog posts. Now, a new serious contamination problem with our vaccines has been identified.
Researcher Anthony Samsel has published five peer-reviewed articles on the herbicide Glyphosate (the active ingredient in Roundup). A yet-to-be published sixth paper found various commonly-used vaccines contaminated with the herbicide glyphosate.
Yes, you read that correctly: Our vaccines are contaminated with an herbicide that the World Health Organization characterized as"probably carcinogenic to humans."
How can this happen? That answer is easy.
Many vaccines contain animal byproducts such as gelatin, bovine casein, bovine serum, bovine calf serum, or chicken egg protein. The animals from which these products come from are fed grains sprayed with glyphosate. It does not take a rocket scientist to come to the conclusion that these animals, fed glyphosate in their diet, would contain glyphosate in their byproducts.
Samsel sent a letter to Congress that stated:
“I have run numerous groups of vaccines and identified several vectors of contamination. These include the excipient gelatins, egg protein and or similar substrates used to grow vaccines.
I have found gelatins and egg proteins contaminated with Glyphosate-based herbicides from animals fed a glyphosate contaminated diet.
This contamination carries into thousands of consumer products i.e. vitamins, protein powders, wine, beer and other consumables which use gelatins as part of the product or in fining and processing."
What did Samsel hear back?
He heard nothing.
In other words, our do-nothing Congress, so far, has failed to respond. In his letter to Congress, Samsel also stated that Glyphosate is a synthetic amino acid. It bioaccumulates and is found in all tissue types, particularly the bone and marrow of animals fed a diet contaminated with Glyphosate residues.
You can see Dr. Samsel talk about his research by clicking here.
The following vaccines were found to be contaminated with the herbicide glyphosate:
1. MMR
2. Varicella (chicken pox)
3. Zostavax (shingles)
4. Proquad (MMR, rubella, varicella)
5. Fluzone Quad (flu vaccine)
6. Hepatitis B (B Energix-B)
Multiple vaccines from different manufactures were found to be contaminated. Folks, this is a big deal. Injecting a vaccine contaminated with a known herbicide that is "probably carcinogenic to humans" should be prohibited. We need a Congressional investigation into our vaccines.
We keep hearing the mantra that vaccines are safe. Injecting a vaccine containing an herbicide is safe? Give me a break!
It is time to call your political representatives and tell them to investigate this matter. I can assure you that it is not safe to inject a known neurotoxin such as mercury or aluminum. Nor is it safe to inject a known carcinogen such as formaldehyde.
Guess what? It is not safe to inject an herbicide that is a probable human carcinogen.
Follow Dr. Brownstein's blog for more great articles by clicking here.
Anthony Samsel on Vaccines contaminated with Glyphosate
Scientists Anthony Samsel and Stephanie Seneff have just gotten the fifth peer reviewed paper on Glyphosate published. Its named "Glyphosate pathways to modern diseases V: Amino acid analogue of glycine in diverse proteins".
In this regard Tony Mitra interviewed Anthony Samsel, to cover the newly emerging scientific findings on Glyphosate and how it can and does hurt creatures including humans.
In the course of the interview, Anthony Samsel mentioned the issues being covered in their next paper, the 6th one. This covers a number of vaccines that use animal byproducts such as egg protein and gelatine. He suspected these products might be contaminated with Glyphosate, if the vaccine makers were using factory farmed animals fed with Glyphosate laced GMO feed.
To verify, he got a large number of vaccines that do use egg proteins and gelatine and got them analyzed in multiple labs. The results confirmed his doubt. The vaccines themselves are largely contaminated with Glyphosate and pose serious hazard to those that are and will be vaccinated using these products.
Not So Smart Technology: Safety Inspector Blows The Whistle On Fire Hazards Of 'Smart' Electronics
September 20 2016 | From: Sott / If you think your "smart" appliances are the "cat's whiskers," then please think again! Actually, in my opinion, they are the dumbest things ever invented that have been able to buffalo consumers into spending their hard-earned money to purchase, but have the greatest potential for causing consumers harm and grief.
Recently, I received an email from one of my readers who had to attend a fire safety training session for 'their' job. That instructional course was given by none other than a Delaware County, Pennsylvania Fire Investigator, who was quite explicit in his presentation about certain fire causes.
Here's what the email said for which this sender gave permission to share:
“He [the trainer] mentioned in the beginning of his presentation how fire deaths were down, but house fires were up dramatically across the nation. [CJF emphasis added]
Later during the Q&A, I asked him in front of the whole group [what were] the causes of these fires. He mentioned all the electronics - WiFi/Bluetooth gadgets, cheap phone chargers, iPads, wide screen TVs, etc.
I interrupted to say "how about smart meters" to which he replied: Anything "smart" is a fire hazard.
This [smart] technology is so new, and they haven't tested or developed it adequately enough yet.
He went on to poke fun at "smart" wired houses having everything linked and what a hazard that can cause.
Then after the presentation, I commented how I heard that as this technology ages, it becomes even more potentially hazardous, which he affirmed, and also mentioned that
More car fires occur because of all the electronic gadgetry now.”
All the above information is yet another confirmation with implications for Consumer Protection Law(s) at local and state levels regarding "smart" consumer appliances and fires, which insurance companies - especially AMI Smart Meter fires - are declining coverage for!
But there is even more serious damage happening every minute of the day from microwave technology, which smart appliances operate on. It's called electromagnetic frequencies (EMFs/RFs) that emit non-ionizing radiation which cause adverse health effects known as "non-thermal" effects.
Comment: Dr. Barrie Trower, a British physicist has acquired a great deal of expertise in the microwave field, extending his research to common electronic systems, including cell phones, iPods, computer games and microwave ovens. His research has shown that microwave radiation is extremely hazardous, especially to pregnant women and young children.
The risks are so great that the use of WiFi can lead to permanent genetic damage to our children and subsequent generations.
Consumers, when they really learn the downside of "smart technology," obviously will have to beef up their activism to get the protection they need for their health and properties, as the industries involved - and more sadly - states public utility commissions - really don't give a hoot about the harms caused, otherwise they would be enacting legislation to deal with them.
And then there's this information that I received from readers whose privacy I respect and honor, but will share their information. In sharing information like the following from a reader in Canada, it is that consumers become aware, physically safer plus empowered:
“People need to be getting documentation about all of these fires. Media articles are often the starting point, but they are anecdotal. Once there is what sounds like a smart meter fire, request and obtain the official fire report from the state or provincial fire commissioner.
Find out what the legal reporting and investigating requirements are. If the fire is believed to be electrical, who does the investigation and how is he informed about the fire? Are the laws being followed?
Are meters being removed? It takes time and digging but I can't find anyone else who is getting this sort of info for fires in their areas. It is only when this documentation is obtained for many fires and patterns are found that things will be taken seriously.
In the US the Consumer Affairs Dept. [1] has agreed to gather reports on smeter fires. I have sent her a few because the ITRON meters we use are the same used in many places in the US. But in Canada our meters are not considered "consumer" goods since the utilities own them.
This agency should be informed but it requires full documentation - not just media reports."
Note that here's what I think our kind and thoughtful Canadian neighbor is referring to:
“The US Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC) is a federal agency that will take complaints on utility smart meters from all US states. If you have or had smart meter electrical or fire problems CALL: (800) 638-2772 Monday through Friday from 8:00 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. ET or submit your complaint by email. "
However, I must caution a consumer that, if or when you experience an AMI Smart Meter ('smeter') fire, immediately after the fire has been extinguished and it is safe to do so, take photographs with your cell phone and a regular camera, so you can have "secured" documentation because things can get 'lost' in cyberspace! Remember to attach copies of those photos with the smeter fire report you file with the US Consumer Products Safety Commission.
Additionally, I must share that I've heard stories that the power company immediately removes the fire-damaged meter and does not allow consumers access to it or to keep a fire-damaged meter as 'proof' for insurance purposes. It seems that 'games' are being played, and insurance companies 'buy' into them too!
Fire safety regarding all 'smart' technology should be enforced by consumer products safety commissions, municipalities and code enforcement departments at local and state levels. Obviously they are not doing that when it comes to AMI Smart Meters made with heat-sensitive plastic parts. Analog meters were made of glass and steel parts.
Learn how to protect yourself from smart technology EMFs/RFs and fire hazards.
Tesla’s Anti-Gravity Research In Use In Dozens Of Secretive Military Projects
September 19 2016 | From: WakingTimes Doctor Richard Boylan, and numerous others have already let the cat out of the bag when it comes to anti-gravity space flight, so why do Boeing and Lockheed, two of America’s largest military industrial contractors, and the recipient of trillions in tax payer ‘black budget’ dollars still hide that they are operating at least 12 anti-gravity aerospace platforms?
It seems that Boeing hides this advanced aerospace technology because it would prove what many free energy enthusiasts have said about Nikola Tesla – that he discovered anti-gravity, and learned how to utilize it as an abundant, if not free, energy source.
Objects can even be levitated easily with anti-gravity, and its numerous applications are just beginning to be understood by the public at large.
The late genius and inventor even explained the fact prior to his death. William R. Lynewrites in Occult Ether Physics (Creatopia Productions), that a lecture Tesla prepared for the Institute of Immigrant Welfare (May. 12, 1938), dealt with his Dynamic Theory of Gravity.
Tesla said in his lecture that he had developed, “one of two far-reaching discoveries, which I worked out in all details in the years 1893 and 1894.” Indeed, Tesla held a patent in 1928, for a flying machine which resembled both a helicopter and an airplane and is thought to have run with the benefit of anti-gravity.
Boeing has loosely revealed that they have already developed this technology in a veiled admittance that “it is working on experimental anti-gravity projects that could overturn a century of conventional aerospace propulsion technology.” And Ben Rich, once the CEO of Lockheed Martin, admitted on his deathbed that “aliens were real,” and the “US military already travels to the stars, ”explaining where this technology could have been sourced, aside from terrestrial beings like Tesla.
This means that for more than 130 years we have been kept in the dark about a known free energy source so that the powers-that-be can profit from our ignorance. Every time you see a ‘rocket ship’ go up in space, it is essentially no different from the false flag attempts orchestrated by six media companies controlling the media to alter your perception of reality.
So Where Did All that Research Go?
Theodore C. Loder, PhD, posits in one paper that since the 1950’s (known to some as the brain drain era) almost all research into anti-gravity seems to have disappeared.
None other than Professor Hermann Oberth, considered by some to be one of the fathers of the space age (and who later worked in the US with Wernher von Braun, the Army Ballistic Missile Agency and NASA), stated the following in 1954: “It is my thesis that flying saucers are real and that they are space ships from another solar system.”
Perhaps of more interest to our present discussion on the secrets Boeing and Lockheed have kept, Oberth states:
“They are flying by the means of artificial fields of gravity. . . . They produce high-tension electric charges in order to push the air out of their paths, so it does not start glowing, and strong magnetic fields to influence the ionized air at higher altitudes. First, this would explain their luminosity . . . Secondly, it would explain the noiselessness of UFO flight.”
Indeed, you can see the crumbs of government contractor’s special operatives at work when you look into the work of John Hutchison. He discovered, “highly-anomalous electromagnetic effect which causes the jellification of metals, spontaneous levitation of common substances, and other effects,” which echo Tesla’s findings. These strange effects were later dubbed the Hutchison effect.
As is usually the case when silencing the curious, a Vancouver businessman, George Hathaway heard of the Hutchison effect around 1980, and hired an engineer from Boeing Aerospaceto work with the Canadian government to form a company that would promote technology developed from the effect. They called this company Pharos’ Technology. You likely haven’t heard of what they have created since then.
12 Special Aerospace Platforms Incorporating Anti-Gravity Technology
“At this time, I am aware of the existence of 12 kinds of special-technology advanced aerospace platforms [mil-speak for craft], all incorporating antigravity technology in some form.
These 12 are: the Northrop Grumman B-2 Spirit Stealth Bomber, the F-22 Raptor advanced stealth fighter, and its successor, the F-35 Lightning II advanced stealth fighter; the Aurora, Lockheed-Martin’s X-33A, the Lockheed X-22A two-man antigravity disc fighter, Boeing and Airbus Industries’ Nautilus, the TR3-A Pumpkinseed , the TR3-B Triangle , Northrop’s “Great Pumpkin” disc, Teledyne Ryan Aeronautical’s XH-75D Shark antigravity helicopter, and the Northrop Quantum Teleportation Disc.”
Since at least 1956, the press has been trying to manage public awareness by staying hush-hush about anti-gravity research, or discounting those who attempted to show that it was real. However, a trade press magazine, the Aviation Report, made numerous references to anti-gravity projects, and listed many of the companies pursuing research into anti-gravity technologies.
Quotes from the Aviation Report listed in the Aviation Studies (International) Ltd. report[8] are suggestive of what was truly going on at Boeing, Lockheed and other agencies despite what the public was being told.
What Anti-Gravity Means to the World at Large
Anti-gravity, first and foremost would make petrol-guzzling cars, crumbling electric grids, and other outdated and dirty fuels a total waste of time. Anti-gravity, as Nikola Tesla made clear, would make space flight to other heavenly bodies as simple as driving your car to a nearby city, today.
It would also turn Einstein’s E=MC2 theory on its head, and it also suggests, as Tesla explained, that the ether is given to us to use responsibly by a life-giving creative force.
We know where that went - and it's for the record
Just so you know.
In short, everything we need is already out there, in abundant supply. We just need to tap into it and free these technologies from the grip of the military industrial complex.
Related: It's Not All About the Cabal Flunky that is Fucking Elon Musk: Russian Scientists Revive Nikola Tesla's Designs With Help From Crowdfunding
US Global Hegemony Is Officially Dead
September 18 2016 | From: Geopolitics Humanity is now in the cusp for a massive globalwide revolution in engineering and scientific development as divisively regressive geopolitics are being shamed in the global stage, and instigations for new wars are effectively suppressed.
For the last 4 years, or so, railways and sea/airports were being built across Asia, and these projects will only accelerate in the coming months as the Khazarian transnational crime syndicate is being pinned down at every level.
…and Wikileaks will be releasing more exposé very soon, as former DND Secretary Colin Powell is being dragged to the Clinton email controversy.
Hitlery is just getting the update...
The massive resignations of bankers have already occurred four years ago, as punctuated by the World Bank president Zoellick’s own resignation months later and the Papal resignation in 2013.
And no matter how much it tries, NATO could not start a new war anywhere in the world. All of Eurasia are now poised to give their full support to the China-led “One Belt, One Road” massive economic programs to redevelop the planet for the benefit of all its inhabitants.
To White House’s surprise, Turkey pivoted towards its rival Kremlin in the middle of this year. The subsequent CIA military coup in cooperation with embedded 5th columnists inside Turkey was unsuccessful, due in part to a timely Russian intelligence report which gave Erdogan the upperhand early on.
But so far, the biggest geopolitical event this year is the epic expressed rejection of US interference in the ASEAN-China region.
US President Barack Obama and Chinese President Xi Jinping (L) look on after formally joining the Paris Climate deal at Ruyi Hall at the West Lake State House in Hangzhou on September 3, 2016.The United States and China on September 3 formally joined the Paris climate deal, with US President Barack Obama hailing the accord as the “moment we finally decided to save our planet”. World leaders are gathering in Hangzhou for the 11th G20 Leaders Summit from September 4 to 5. / AFP / SAUL LOEB (Photo credit should read SAUL LOEB/AFP/Getty Images)
Xi officially denied Obama the luxury of insulting Asia right on its doorsteps. The phrase “This is our country. This is our airport” being shouted against Obama’s entourage should summarize China’s assertion of its geopolitical and financial sovereignty. Forcing Obama to descend through the ass of Air Force One was just the icing on the cake.
China positively responded to the ASEAN Community’s establishment of a well-defined Code of Conduct in the West Philippine Sea to avoid miscommunications in the area, and all parties have agreed that the best way to find resolution in the conflict zone where an estimated $5 trillion of physical commerce passes annually, is only through dialogue, trade cooperation, and the sharing of natural resources in these contested areas, as it had been done for thousands of years prior to Western’s ”divide and conquer” intervention.
The straight talking Duterte complemented the whole covert and not-so-covert anti-Khazarian advances in the region by directly confronting Obama and Ba Ki Moon during the East Asian Summit, with photos of human rights violation against 600,000 Muslim Moro, 6,000 of whom were massacred and buried in a common pit, at the turn of the 20th century, which is the root cause of the secessionist movements in Southern Philippines.
Obama and Ban Ki Moon were caught off guard and the two found themselves out of ammunition to respond accordingly. Here’s the mainstream media summary of the event:
All headline hugging Duterte tirades prior to the ASEAN Summit 2016 were meant to underscore the fact that the Philippines is no longer a US vassal state.
To Duterte’s credit, Indonesia is buying up weapons after its Police Anti-Narcotics Chief Budi Waseso announced that the largest Muslim country in the region will duplicate Duterte’s methods of dealing with drug trafficking.
Duterte has just visited Indonesia in order to discuss the two countries’ coordination in the field of economics and terrorism. Both countries share a border where CIA-ISIS affiliated Abu Sayyaf is operating.
Here in the Philippines, it is our understanding that the Chinese government will eventually abide by the UNCLOS arbitral ruling in the future when the subject is already properly explained to its people, and if the Philippines maintains its independence from the US beyond Duterte’s presidency.
Ironically, China is a signatory to the UNCLOS, but not the perennial conflict instigator known as the United States.
All of these great milestones occurred “while Americans were busy watching the Kardashians.”
The official declaration of the Fall of the US Empire has been held in the peace loving countries of Asia.
It is now up to the Americans, and the entire Western population, to reciprocate what has been made here.
How To Become Immune To Mind Control | How TV Affects Your Brain Chemistry For The Worse
September 18 2016 | From: SitsShow Television has been used as a medium for dispensing news, entertainment and information for over 90 years at this point.
The effects of this nearly pandemic device are little acknowledge by mainstream society, but within a growing population of inquisitive individuals the mind altering attributes of this seemingly benign device are well understood.
They call it tell-a-vision for a reason, because our minds at a certain level of consciousness, are unable to distinguish between the images on screen and reality itself. Additionally the unconscious mind becomes stimulated via focused attention on the items presented, generating a wealth of internal insights, ideas, and concepts.
If these are left unprocessed, if we do not analyze the internal generated products as a result of watching TV, they settle into our being, altering our perception and distorting our values. And so, TV, like all things can be a powerful tool for expanding consciousness or it can create chaos and strife if the powers of our discernment are never used.
In the below linked article on A.I. Robots, we discuss mirror neuron's and how they suggest a biological component to empathy; the basis of morality. This part of the brain receives information as if observed events are happening to us directly, in other words we are hard wired for empathy.
The unconscious mind is hardwired to receive all information from within and without, storing it as memories that alter our conscious mind's processes.
In other words there is an aspect of us that is literally all seeing, which provides us a wealth of data that can be consciously analyzed and distilled, eventually allowing us to gain knowledge of all things in our experience; if we but do the inner work of philosophy, contemplation and discernment.
“Enter the AI drone or soldier debate. The military industrial complex has long desired a highly obedient yet adaptable soldier, able to execute commands without question and anticipate needs so as to change tactics of battle real time.
Human beings are programable, but human nature allows us to change, providing an unending source of risk and error for military activities.
For example, in the Civil War, 50% of soldiers froze when aiming at a living target, and in some cases instinctually missed. This was despite standard training and practice shooting. What was the problem? - empathy.
"Lt. Col. Dave Grossman, a psychologist and professor of military science, looked at this evidence and concluded “that there is within most men an intense resistance to killing their fellow man. A resistance so strong that, in many circumstances, soldiers on the battlefield will die before they can overcome it.”
In some ways this isn’t all that surprising. Very few people would seek out an opportunity to kill others. At the same time, you may find it hard to believe that it is sometimes impossible for soldiers to kill others even when their own lives are at risk." - The Psychology of Killing and the Origins of War
Empathy is 'hardwired' into living organisms, with increasing levels of actualization in higher order life. Modern science has acknowledged this in discovering the so called mirror neurons, which fires when an action is taken by an organism or when it is observed.
This is why when we watch another getting hurt we react as if we have been hurt. This subconscious and unavoidable process is the foundation for empathy processing, which concordantly is the basis for morality."
The brain is profoundly affected by what we experience, even if it comes from TV. As the below article discusses, the brainwave patterns of movie goers actually synchronizes from the hypnotic effects of watching images and sound on film.
In my view, the programing of one's mind using TV is due to lack of conscious processing. Often the worldviews, ideals and opinions offered are not questioned or contemplated, we do not engage in philosophy as a civilization any longer; thats what TV is for!
This also applies to any other source of information, such as school, literature, advertising and even mild conversation. Anytime an idea enters the mind and it is not contemplated and reconciled with our knowledge base, it settles into the unconscious as is.
The Technique For Dispelling Suggestion and Mind Control
The mind has two primary modes of expression, conscious thought and unconscious absorption. The conscious mind is where two or more ideas can be compared, revealing patterns and inconsistencies.
The unconscious mind is a powerful observer, able to receive and store all information streaming in as insight and intuition (random thoughts), and without as sensory data. Science has proven that even though we may not notice something consciously, the unconscious mind does, settling into the total consciousness; effecting our behavior.
Therefore, the key to undoing any form of mind control (unconsciously accepted suggestions) is through the conscious mind. Essentially a subliminal suggestion is an illusion or magic trick, it only fools us into thinking it's real so long as we never investigate it.
But once we know how the trick is done, we see the whole truth more clearly, and now we are conscious of the subtle suggestion, able to dismiss it with ease. Ignorance is the foundation upon which all forms of mind control and subtle suggestion work, therefore dispelling it with knowledge - the conscious act of seeking the truth - is the primary tool for gaining freedom.
In my own experience, after researching these topics in earnest over the past five years, it is now clear how many suggestions are spread liberally into almost all media. For example, often in police dramas the cops show up at the door of a suspect or witness needing to conduct a search or look for someone inside.
When answering the door, rarely if ever do the police have a warrant. The person answering the door usually just lets the police in without a word of question; never asking to see a warrant. This fictional story sends a subtle suggestion to the watcher, that most people don't ask for warrants.
And since the vast majority of people base their behavior on what everyone else does, they are effectively being programed to never ask for a warrant. Even if they do have the notion to ask for one, the social pressure from this suggestion will require a major act of will to overcome.
But all of this can only work on an unconscious mind; an unawake person. Once the sleeper has awakened, and we begin to consciously investigate the mind control all around us, it becomes very easy to spot subliminal suggestion when encountered.
Just like it can become easy to tell when someone is lying to us after we've passed through the initiative experience of being lied to, in this way, the efforts of our would-be masters to control the masses actually provides us with the information we need to become immune to such forms of control.
The solution to external control, therefore, is to become conscious, awaken and active. To use the power of philosophy - the exploration of meanings, to analyze and discern the suggestions constantly pouring into our minds. A deception, illusion or fraud, once recognized, is forever dissolved by the now wise and discerning mind.
And these skills of self mastery and sovereignty can now be shared with others. In essence each of us who accepts the mission of facing these forms of control, can now become a force to counter them, an epicenter of awakened and active consciousness.
In my view, reviewing mainstream TV, especially news, is an essential part of training discernment and strengthening mental discipline. We can literally watch TV looking for suggestions. Try doing this with scenes in your favorite show, attempt to observe the events of the story and what they are implying about the characters in it.
Often there are flagrant examples of suggestion such as symbols or words flashed on the screen at a point in the story that when put together creates a subtle suggestion. In any popular TV series or film there are many layers of suggestion to discover and gain mastery over by exercising these skills of internal discernment .
One final point on TV is the actual technology used. In our modern age Cathode Ray Tube televisions have been almost completely phased out. These devices produce an extremely intense electromagnetic field that disrupts the bodies delicate organic field.
These fields govern a huge amount of processes within our bodies and minds. It has been demonstrated that the minds ability to create a stable image or thought is significantly reduced after exposure to older TV's. But this effect also happens when viewing any imagery for prolonged periods of time, without also exercising the imagination using discernment.
Imagination Is Essential
It is during philosophy, contemplation, investigation, insight and meditation that these innate imaginative powers are exercised and honed.
The imagination is an essential aspect of our beingness, the foundation of holistic intelligence, balanced emotional states and even psi-abilities.
Any adverse affects of TV on the mind, by way of implantation of thought forms, belief systems and values, can be almost totally reversed by a dedicated and active process of mental activity.
We must think about what we're watching, sift through meanings and reveal insights, develop an appreciation for symbolism and the power of consciousness to explore ideas.
In this way TV becomes a powerful tool for expanding consciousness, so long as we learn to use the discerning powers of the mind and healing energy of the heart.
As I often like to say: "learn to use your mind, or someone else will."
Global Financial Meltdown - One Of The Best Financial Crisis Documentary Films
September 17 2016 | From: RebelMystic Meltdown is a four-part investigation into a world of greed and recklessness that brought down the financial world. The show begins with the 2008 crash that pushed 30 million people into unemployment, brought countries to the edge of insolvency and turned the clock back to 1929.
It's a bloody good watch and goes into specific detail as to how the house of cards was built and subsequently fell.
Caveat Emptor.
But how did it all go so wrong? Lack of government regulation; easy lending in the US housing market meant anyone could qualify for a home loan with no government regulations in place. Also, London was competing with New York as the banking capital of the world. Gordon Brown, the British finance minister at the time, introduced "light touch regulation" - giving bankers a free hand in the marketplace.
Meltdown moves on to examine the epidemic of fear that caused the world's banks to stop lending and how the people began their fight back. Finally, it asks how the world can prepare for the next crisis even as it recognises that this one is far from over.
We hear about the sheikh who says the crash never happened; a Wall Street king charged with fraud; a congresswoman who wants to jail the bankers; and the world leaders who want a re-think of capitalism.
5G Telecomm Radiation The Perfect Tool To Mass Modify Human Brain Waves + More Studies Reveal Dangers
September 16 2016 | From: WakingTimes / Mobilize On 14 July 2016 the FCC (Federal Communications Commission) of the USA made space available in the radio spectrum for consumer devices to operate within the 25 GHz to 100 GHz of the electromagnetic spectrum.
It went on to say: “The Commission has struck a balance between new wireless services, current and future fixed satellite service operations, and federal uses. The item adopts effective sharing schemes to ensure that diverse users – including federal and non-federal, satellite and terrestrial, and fixed and mobile – can co-exist and expand.”
Nowhere in its document is mention made of consumer safety or well-being. I guess that is fair of the FCC because historically, it is not interested in matters of microwave radiation and consequent thermal and non-thermal effects on the population.
Let’s face it, and most people find this hard to believe, the FCC works purely on behalf of the telecoms industries in granting them access to the airwaves, no more and no less.
Industry was very happy to hear the FCC announcement on granting access of large portions of the radio spectrum for yet more of its toys and other consumer devices. Qualcomm for example talks much about ‘the massive internet of things’, yet nowhere on its 5G musings is mention made of consumer safety or well-being.
That ‘pink elephant’ in the living room regarding safety brings me to the point of this article. The FCC and the telecomms industry rub their hands with glee because lots of money is going to be made as 5G devices rollout yet no recent safety studies have been carried out on consumer safety.
No doubt both the FCC and industry will point regulators to the old, out-dated and one-dimensional so-called ‘safety studies’ (thermal effects) produced by the ICNIRP. This private organisation is comprised of people and individuals who work in the telecommunications industries with no background in epidemiology, toxicology, radio frequency safety or medical practice.
The implications of 5G on consumer well-being and safety do not look good for one reason: devices that will operate within the 5G electromagnetic spectrum will use antennas that are physically small i.e. from a few millimetres to a centimetre in length.
This means that industry will produce a variety of different antenna systems to do different things.
Qualcomm’s 5G Vision
“5G is much more than higher peak rates - it needs to enable new classes of services, connect new devices and industries, and empower new user experiences while fully leveraging 4G investments. The envisioned unified platform needs to support all spectrum, below 6 GHz as well as above 6 GHz and mmWave."
Everything is awesome!
The weird fact of operating within this very high frequency range is that signals are mostly line of sight or they are easily reflected, refracted or ‘lost’ within the differing build composition of urban environment structures.
In other words, without careful antenna design and recognition of many of the pitfalls trying to propagate microwave signals within urban environments, the signal can be easily degraded or completely lost. In response to these challenges, the advantages in using very small physical size antennas in the millimetre wavelength is you can feed many antennas in various configuration arrays e.g. vertical or horizontal arays, waveguide, coned or highly directional beam type designs.
These types of antenna designs focus most of the transmitted power into specified directions. This is bad news for consumers because these very small physical size antennas will pack a mighty punch to our biological systems if we step into them.
Getting back to consumer safety and well-being and all things microwave, it is clear that the latency period for adverse biological effects from devices using microwave frequencies from say 1 GHz to 5 Ghz is approximately 10 - 20 years.
In 2016 there are now many thousands of peer-reviewed medical and epidemiological studies that show, illustrate or correlate, adverse biological effects with use of mobile phone technology or WIFI.
Using frequencies even higher than 5 GHz (and up to 100 GHz) will compress the timeframe in which cancers and other biological effects show themselves within society.
It is anyone’s guess on what might happen in terms of biological safety yet it is clear to see that the pulsed nature of these high frequency, high signal intensity signals do not harbour good news for humanity, particularly in relation to the functioning of our DNA.
Nowadays, exposure to microwave radiation or frequencies used by WIFI, mobile phones, smart phones, smart meters, WIFI-enabled audio devices, WIFI-enabled fridges, most baby monitors and a whole host of other ‘esoteric’ electrical devices were recently classed as Class 2B carcinogens.
Point of sale literature excludes this fact on any advertising blurb and it is also fascinating that the small print embedded deep within mobile phone product literature say that you should not put these devices directly to your skin, body or face.
If you do, you exceed the so-called ‘safe’ exposure thresholds put in place for these devices.
Getting back to the very small physical length of the antennas that will be used for 5G devices, it is very clear to surmise that if these devices talk to each other using highly efficient, directional antennas, the ERP (effective radiated power) will be huge.
If you happen to walk into this intensely focused beam of microwave radiation, what will this level of signal intensity do to your biology?
Yet again, time will tell unless we get our arses into gear and demand proper safety studies from industry and independent academia that focus on thermal and non-thermal effects on our biology.
Just like the advent of modern mobile phone technology, it is us, the consumers, who provide the guinea pig role in terms of safety.
Sufferers of EHS (electro-hyper-sensitivity) will need to be aware of any 5G device simply because the electron volt assault on their compromised bodies will be easily and instantly felt.
It is they who will suffer first and in time, everyone will be affected because one other fact the telecoms industries have not mentioned is that in order to develop an efficient network of signals within an urban environment, many thousands of new transmitter sites will need to be installed.
The physical small size of these antennas means they can be covertly installed into all sorts of urban structures which suggest that for urban dwellers at least, there will be no escape from exposure to these highly damaging microwave frequencies. I also feel that when these antennas are in place, it will be relatively easy to alter and manipulate brain wave function of its users and others close by.
The amount of ancillary information that can be piped or attached to the main carrier frequency of such a telecommunications network system is potentially, huge.
Police forces the world over use ‘Tetra’ as a systems of communication. This system also includes a sub-carrier frequency of about 16 Hz which is very close to our natural brainwave patterns.
Could this 16 Hz ancillary pulsed ELF (extremely low-frequency) be responsible for instilling aggressive behaviours in our police force personnel?
The ‘zombie apocalypse’ might just be around the corner unless of course, we refuse to comply. That is our choice.
Mobilize
Mobilize is an investigative documentary that explores the long-term health effects of cell phone radiation, including cancer and infertility.
Clear Light Ventures is sponsoring free viewing of Mobilize from September 15 to October 16, 2016 - enter promo code "ClearLight".
Film Synopsis
In 2011 the World Health Organization stated, “The electromagnetic fields produced by mobile phones are classified by the International Agency for Research on Cancer as possibly carcinogenic to humans.” The cell phone industry has vigorously disputed these findings.
Mobilize is an explosive investigative documentary that explores the potential long-term health effects from cell phone radiation, including brain cancer and infertility.
The politically charged film examines the most recent scientific research and the harsh challenges politicians face trying to pass precautionary legislation. Featuring interviews with expert researchers, mobile phone industry representatives, and prominent politicians, MOBILIZE illuminates how industry’s economic and political influence can corrupt public health.
Featuring Gavin Newsom Lt. Governor of California, Lawrence Lessig, Esq., Steve Wozniak, Richard Branson, Devra Davis, PhD, MPH and many more.
How Much Of This Junk Are You Exposed To?
September 16 2016 | From: Inquisitr / Sott / NaturalNews / GreenMedInfo We all know about toxins and poisons in the environment - the slow kill. Keep the populace sick while the globalist corporatocracy bleeds us dry of money for power whilst they get off on their depopulation Eugenics agenda.
Awareness of 'environmental toxins' that are literally all around us helps you keep some of the crap out of your system...
Antibacterial Soap Banned By FDA, Commonly Used Chemicals May Do More Harm Than Good
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has banned antibacterial soap sales in the United States, and the reason why is incredibly disturbing.
Many people have turned to antibacterial soap for years, believing them to be a safe and effective way to remove dirt and germs from the body and hands, and more effective than traditional soap and water. However, when the FDA banned the popular soaps, they informed the public that they might not be so effective after all.
What’s more and infinitely more disturbing, according to the FDA, the chemicals most commonly used in antibacterial soaps may not even be safe.
A total of 19 chemicals often used in antibacterial soaps have been targeted by the FDA, and the agency has given manufacturers only a year to remove them all from the products they are selling (and marketing as safe and effective) to the public.
As The New York Times reports, while nearly 20 chemicals were involved in the decision that led to the antibacterial soap being banned by the FDA, two are the primary culprits. Triclosan and triclocarban are used in both bar and liquid antibacterial soap, and they are almost everywhere.
When the FDA banned antibacterial soap this week based on the risks of using the product often outweighing the benefits, they didn’t ban the questionable chemicals from all products.
Reportedly, at least one toothpaste uses a now-banned chemical, but according to the FDA, in that product it’s risks are less than the benefits it provides to consumers.
While the news that antibacterial soap has been banned by the FDA may be shocking and sudden to some, the truth of the matter is that there have been questions about its safety for years and years.
As Smithsonian Magazine reports, the FDA has been threatening to ban antibacterial soap for years. In the article, published in 2014, cited questions that the FDA had about the safety and effectiveness of antibacterial soap.
Even then, the FDA warned that antibacterial soap would be banned if manufacturers didn’t prove that it was both safe and more effective than using soap and water.
Apparently, the industry was unable to prove that antibacterial soap is safe or provides a public benefit that outweighs the potential risk of exposure of the chemicals used in the product.
At the time of the Smithsonian Magazine article, triclosan (with is banned as part of the FDA’s sweeping decision on antibacterial soap) was used in roughly 30 percent of all bar soap and 75 percent of liquid antibacterial soap. In 2014, the antibacterial soap industry, now banned by the FDA, was worth about $1 billion.
In 2014, the antibacterial soap industry was put on notice by the FDA. They were told to prove the safety of their product by 2016 or see their product banned. Despite the fact that manufacturers had turned antibacterial soap into a $1 billion industry and were given two years, they chose not to put together the required proof that they were selling a product that is safe and effective.
And plenty of people are speculating that the reason that the antibacterial soap industry didn’t prove to the FDA that their product is safe is that they know that it isn’t.
But rather than simply removing it from the market themselves (or demonstrate its safety), the antibacterial soap industry continued to use the questionable chemicals and sell personal hygiene products that may not be safe until the FDA announced that the products were banned.
Even now, antibacterial soap can be legally sold, despite questions about its safety.
In the aftermath of the announcement that the FDA had banned antibacterial soap, public health professionals have overwhelmingly supported the decision, adding that the chemicals in antibacterial soap can alter the hormones of children and even contribute to the problem of antibiotic-resistant superbugs.
“It has boggled my mind why we were clinging to these compounds, and now that they are gone I feel liberated They had absolutely no benefit but we kept them buzzing around us everywhere. They are in breast milk, in urine, in blood, in babies just born, in dust, in water.”
Recent studies into the chemicals found in antibacterial soap products have resulted in some very disturbing discoveries regarding the harm they can do to animals and likely to humans, too.
Among the problems caused by the now-banned products include severe abnormalities having to do with metabolism and reproduction. According to the CDC, the chemicals found in FDA banned antibacterial soap have been found in the bodily waste of 75 percent of U.S. residents.
Kinder and Lindt Chocolate Bars Revealed to Contain Cancer-Causing Carcinogens
Tests carried out by a German watchdog revealed Kinder chocolate bars and two other brands tested positive for a hazardous cancer-causing substance. Surprise!
Foodwatchcalled for Ferrero's Kinder Riegel, Lindt's Fioretto Nougat Minis, and Sun Rice Classic Schokohappen by Rübezahl to be taken off the shelves on Monday after tests found "possible carcinogens."
The sweet treats had been contaminated with "so-called aromatic mineral oils (MOAH)," says Foodwatch, but the manufacturers are allegedly reluctant to recall their products.
"The manufacturer is guilty of gross negligence. Instead of clearing the dangerous candy from the shelves and alerting consumers, they [postulate]... that everything was undertaken legally," said Foodwatch's John Heeg.
Foodwatch tested more than 20 different kinds of potato chips and chocolate snacks and found saturated mineral oils (MOSH) which it warned can "accumulate in the human body and [cause] long term damage to organs" with children particularly at risk.
"There is no acceptable levels of mineral oils in food for consumption," Heeg told the German edition of The Local, citing the European Food Safety Authority (EFSA) who he says considers MOAHs "likely carcinogenic and mutagenic."
"You can't see it, you can't taste it, but it's in there," warned Hegg. "We recommend not purchasing these products because the levels are simply unacceptable for consumption."
Kinder Riegel, "one of the best-selling chocolate bars in Germany," had the worst MOSH and MOAH values. The chemicals are usually transferred to foods through recycled packaging that previously had been printed with inks which may contain oils.
Foodwatch is calling for strict limits on saturated mineral oils (MOSH) in food and a zero tolerance for aromatic mineral oils (MOAH).
Brain Damaging Heavy Metal Mercury Found in Grocery Products Made With High Fructose Corn Syrup (HFCS)
HFCS is ubiquitous in the modern processed food supply. It's added to pizza sauce, salad dressings, ketchup and "whole wheat" breads. Did you know it's often contaminated with the toxic heavy metal mercury?
High-fructose corn syrup (HFCS) is a highly processed sweetener made primarily from corn and found in a plethora of food and beverages on grocery store shelves.
The U.S. Department of Agriculture's Economic Research Service estimated in 2011 that the average consumer per capita consumes nearly 42 pounds of high fructose corn syrup per year. Not one, but two studies in 2009 found that HFCS commercially produced in America and American-bought HFCS products were tainted with mercury.
The first study published in the peer-reviewed journal Environmental Health found that, of twenty samples collected and analyzed from three different manufacturers, nine, or 45 percent, came back tainted with mercury.
The second study by watchdog group Institute for Agriculture and Trade Policy (IATP) purchased fifty-five food items from popular brands off grocery store shelves in the fall of 2008 -- items in which HFCS was the first or second principal ingredient -- and detected mercury in nearly a third of them.
The contamination may have been due to the fact that mercury cells are still used in the production of caustic soda, an ingredient used to make HFCS.
The HFCS mercury plot thickens, however. Online news outlet Grist reported that the lead researcher in the Environmental Health study, Renee Dufault, previously worked as an FDA researcher.
Dufault had apparently turned over the information contained in her HFCS mercury study to the agency back in 2005, but the FDA reportedly sat on it and did nothing, so Dufault went public with it after she retired in 2008.
How Big Food Cornered the Market with a Liquid Sweetener
Initial attempts to get corn syrup widely dispersed into the U.S. food supply in the 1970s didn't really take off because sugar was so cheap and abundant at the time. However, this changed, as U.S.- imposed tariffs decreased sugar imports throughout the 1970s and early 1980s, making sugar significantly more expensive in America than in other parts of the world.
The surface explanation for these tariffs was to protect American sugar farmers; behind the scenes, however, Big Agra interests had lobbied for the policy to promote what would become a new source of sugar - derived from corn - which soon emerged as a popular commodity that was sold at a price significantly cheaper than cane sugar or beet sugar.
Archer Daniels Midland opened the first large-scale plant in 1978 (before they acquired the Clinton Corn Processing Company) to produce 90 percent HFCS and 55 percent HFCS. By January 1980, Coca-Cola began allowing high fructose corn syrup to be used as a sweetener at 50 percent levels with regular sugar; Pepsi Cola followed suit by 1983.
By November 1984, both major soft drink brands had approved full sweetening with HFCS, and HFCS quickly captured 42 percent of the sweetener market. The rising dominance of HFCS allowed it to maintain commercial prices similar to sugar until the 1990s.
Government Money Subsidizing Corn Syrup
For the past several decades, the U.S. government has paid subsidies to American farmers to grow tons of corn (much of which -- nearly 90 percent -- is genetically modified) and shifted domestic agricultural policy to maximize corn crops. This made high-fructose corn syrup and other corn-derived processed ingredients much cheaper for industrial food manufacturers to use.
Today, HFCS is nearly ubiquitous on American grocery store shelves. It can be found in a wide range of items, including candy, ice cream, bread, chips, snacks, soups, soft drinks, fruit drinks and other beverages, condiments, jellies, deli meats, and much, much more.
Overall, Americans consume about fifty to sixty pounds of high fructose corn syrup per capita – an insane amount. HFCS has been linked in scientific research to obesity, diabetes, heart disease, fatty liver and other contributors of bad health and early death.
As the biggest dietary source of fructose, HFCS also promotes insulin resistance and increasing uric acid levels, which contribute to metabolic dysfunction and type 2 diabetes. Further, researchers in 2008 found a correlation between high fructose consumption and liver scarring in non-alcoholic fatty liver disease (NAFLD), which is present in nearly a third of American adults.
Corn Refiners Association Attempts to Hoodwink Consumers
On top of lobbying efforts, the Corn Refiners Association, an industry organization of which Archer Daniels Midland a is a key member, launched the website sweetsurprise.com as a media relations ploy to debunk "myths" about HFCS and clarify "The Facts about High Fructose Corn Syrup."
It also ran well-funded TV advertising starting in 2008 sticking up for the industry's favorite sweetener and asserting that "sugar is sugar," which prompted a lawsuit by sugar producers claiming false advertising in 2011. The FDA also demanded the corn industry stop using the term "corn sugar" without approval.
In 2012, the FDA rejected a petition filed by the Corn Refiners Association in 2010 to change the name of high-fructose corn syrup to "corn sugar" for the purposes of food labeling and advertising. The Corn Refiners Association claims that it wanted the name change to "educate consumers," the majority of whom are "confused about HFCS."
To keep reading, get my new book Food Forensics, available now for pre-order everywhere books are sold.
How Sucralose (Splenda) Affects Health [Artificial Sweeteners in General]
The emergence of sucralose came from the fight against obesity, but did we trade one problem for another?
This video was originally published on NutritionFacts.org and republished with permission.
In the United States, sucralose (the sweet tasting chemical in Splenda brand artificial sweeteners) was approved for use by the FDA in 1998. It was deemed safe, but we no have over a decade’s worth of research to prove that sucralose affects health in a very negative and very unique way.
The only effect they thought it would have on health was that it could potentially trigger migraines in a small percentage of people.
This, they decided, was a small enough issue that the FDA allowed the substance into the marketplace, citing obesity as a more pressing issue. They could not have been more wrong.
One of the major complications that can come from obesity is diabetes, where the body no longer responds to insulin properly. Originally meant to combat issues like obesity-caused diabetes, lab tests show that insulin resistance increases by as much as 20% after ingesting the sugar substitute.
The cause can be traced back to gut bacteria and how sucralose and other artificial sweeteners can alter their environments. For example; Aspartame is another type of artificial sweetener which studies have shown is metabolized in the body as formaldehyde, a known carcinogen.
Furthermore, alterations in gut bacteria are also very likely the culprit behind the rise in inflammatory bowel diseases like Crohn’s disease.
In every part of the world where sucralose has been approved, inflammatory bowel disease has increased. Clearly, there is a causal link between this substance and the health of our gut.
Though the alternative to sugar was created in an effort to combat obesity, with all of the complications and damage it can cause, it’s clear that how sucralose affects health – negatively. This just further proves that we can all do ourselves a service by sticking to natural foods whose benefits don’t have to be decided on by a committee.
'They [Parliamentary Service] Have No Right To Be Screening Emails' - Hipkins
September 15 2016 | From: RadioNewZealand Parliament's Speaker is expected to report back to an urgent request about MPs emails being monitored, and even blocked, by Parliamentary Service.
Labour's chief whip Chris Hipkins says Parliamentary Service told him it had blocked one of his emails because of a security classification of the attached document, which he says is 'outrageous'.
Mr Hipkins has asked the Speaker of the House to urgently investigate what he says is a clear breach of parliamentary privilege.
He told the House that Parliamentary Service was monitoring, and in some cases blocking, emails to and from MPs based on government security classifications.
When he sought clarification from Parliamentary Service, Mr Hipkins said he was told they had blocked it on the basis the document attached to his email contained "sensitive words" that were in violation of government security classifications.
“And therefore I was not allowed to send the email - that's outrageous, they have no right to be screening the emails being sent by Members of Parliament."
He said the incident had "tipped us [Labour] off" to the fact MPs emails were being monitored. Mr Hipkins said the document he was sending to a journalist had been released under the Official Information Act.
Speaking to Morning Report today, Mr Hipkins said there was room for abuse in the new system.
He said other MPs and staff have had emails blocked in the last two months, but no-one was informed about a new system.
"They shouldn't be monitoring the emails that I am sending and receiving anyway. I'm not a member of government, I'm an opposition member of the parliament, and from time to time we will be handling information that is embarrassing to the government, that's the nature of what we do."
Mr Hipkins said he expected the Speaker David Carter, to come to the House with a response today, as it was a breach of Parliament's rules, even if software was being used to screen communications.
“And it's something he needs to put an immediate stop to."
The Speaker is responsible for Parliamentary Service, which provides administrative and management services to Parliament.
Mr Hipkins said since he raised it in Parliament, Labour Party staff had been contacting him with other examples of their emails being blocked. Those had all been in the last few weeks so he was not sure how far back this went.
Mr Hipkins, who was on that committee, said there was discussion among committee members during those hearings about the fact Parliamentary Service should not be monitoring either the metadata or content of MPs communications, and to do so could be matter of privilege.
The National Party's senior whip said it would be concerning if Parliamentary Service has overstepped the mark when dealing with MPs' communications.
Tim Macindoe said he would be interested to hear the Speaker's response this afternoon.
“I think all MPs would be concerned to ensure their legitimate activities are not being interfered with, so I'm hoping that the issue will be resolved quickly."
Parliamentary Service said it had no comment to make, except that it was working with the Speaker on the matter and would know more in the next couple of days.
10 Biggest Corporations Make More Money Than Most Of World Combined
September 15 2016 | From: RT / Various The world’s top ten corporations, including Apple, Shell and Walmart, have a combined revenue that is greater than the combined income of the 180 “poorest” countries out of the world’s total 195 sovereign states.
The figures, which reveal that Walmart, Apple and Shell alone are now richer than Russia, Belgium and Sweden, were released by the campaign group Global Justice Now.
Sixty-nine of the world’s 100 top economic entities are now corporations instead of countries – a rise from last year’s staggering figure of 63. Out of the top 200 entities in the world, a whopping 153 were found to be corporations.
The US, China, Germany, Japan, France and the UK comprise the top six economic entities followed by Italy, Brazil and Canada.
“The vast wealth and power of corporations is at the heart of so many of the world’s problems – like inequality and climate change,” said Nick Dearden, director of Global Justice Now.
“The drive for short-term profits today seems to trump basic human rights for millions of people on the planet. These figures show the problem is getting worse,” he added.
The London-based campaign group released the figures in an effort to put increased pressure on the British government ahead of their working group with the UN.
The meeting, led by Ecuador, was established with the aim of working towards a binding treaty that would ensure “transnational corporations abide by the full range of human rights responsibilities”.
“The UK government has facilitated this rise in corporate power – through tax structures, trade deals and even aid programmes that help big business,” said Dearden.
The Corporation is a Canadian documentary film written by Joel Bakan, and directed by Mark Achbar and Jennifer Abbott. The documentary examines the modern-day corporation, considering its legal status as a class of person and evaluating its behavior towards society and the world at large as a psychiatrist might evaluate an ordinary person.
This is explored through specific examples. Bakan wrote the book, The Corporation: The Pathological Pursuit of Profit and Power, during the filming of the documentary.
Further to this, the documentary provides insighst into very poignant hostorical points, including the role of IBM in providing computational hardware and services to the Nazis - and some very interesting truths about the Nazi creation of Coca Cola's Fanta. Enjoy. If possible.
“We Are The Death Merchant Of The World”: Ex-Bush Official Lawrence Wilkerson Condemns Military-Industrial Complex
September 14 2016 | From: Salon / Various The military-industrial complex "is much more pernicious than Eisenhower ever thought," says the retired US colonel.
Col. Lawrence Wilkerson is tired of “the corporate interests that we go abroad to slay monsters for.”
As the former chief of staff to Secretary of State Colin Powell, Wilkerson played an important role in the George W. Bush administration. In the years since, however, the former Bush official has established himself as a prominent critic of U.S. foreign policy.
“I think Smedley Butler was onto something,” explained Lawrence Wilkerson, in an extended interview with Salon.
In his day, in the early 20th century, Butler was the highest ranked and most honored official in the history of the U.S. Marine Corps. He helped lead wars throughout the world over a series of decades, before later becoming a vociferous opponent of American imperialism, declaring “war is a racket.”
Wilkerson spoke highly of Butler, referencing the late general’s famous quote:
“Looking back on it, I might have given Al Capone a few hints. The best he could do was to operate his racket in three districts. I operated on three continents.”
“I think the problem that Smedley identified, quite eloquently actually,” Wilkerson said, “especially for a Marine - I had to say that as a soldier,” the retired Army colonel added with a laugh;
“I think the problem is much deeper and more profound today, and much more subtle and sophisticated.”
Today, the military-industrial complex “is much more pernicious than Eisenhower ever thought it would be,” Wilkerson warned.
In his farewell address in 1961, former President Dwight D. Eisenhower famously cautioned Americans that the military and corporate interests were increasingly working together, contrary to the best interests of the citizenry. He called this phenomenon the military-industrial complex.
As a case study of how the contemporary military-industrial complex works, Wilkerson pointed to leading weapons corporations like Lockheed Martin, and their work with draconian, repressive Western-allied regimes in the Gulf, or in inflaming tensions in Korea.
“Was Bill Clinton’s expansion of NATO - after George H. W. Bush and [his Secretary of State] James Baker had assured Gorbachev and then Yeltsin that we wouldn’t go an inch further east - was this for Lockheed Martin, and Raytheon, and Boeing, and others, to increase their network of potential weapon sales?” Wilkerson asked.
“You bet it was,” he answered.
“Is there a penchant on behalf of the Congress to bless the use of force more often than not because of the constituencies they have and the money they get from the defense contractors?” Wilkerson continued.
Again, he answered his own question: “You bet.”
“It’s not like Dick Cheney or someone like that went and said let’s have a war because we want to make money for Halliburton, but it is a pernicious on decision-making,” the former Bush official explained.
“And the fact that they donate so much money to congressional elections and to PACs and so forth is another pernicious influence.”
“Those who deny this are just being utterly naive, or they are complicit too,” Wilkerson added.
“And some of my best friends work for Lockheed Martin,” along with Raytheon, Boeing and Halliburton, he quipped.
Wilkerson - who in the same interview with Salon defended Edward Snowden, saying the whistle-blower performed an important service and did not endanger U.S. national security - was also intensely critical of the growing movement to “privatize public functions, like prisons.”
Col. Lawrence Wilkerson
“I fault us Republicans for this majorly,” he confessed - although a good many prominent Democrats have also jumped on the neoliberal bandwagon.
In a 2011 speech, for instance, Secretary of State Hillary Clinton declared, “It’s time for the United States to start thinking of Iraq as a business opportunity” for U.S. corporations.
Wilkerson lamented, “We’ve privatized the ultimate public function: war.”
“In many respects it is now private interests that benefit most from our use of military force,” he continued.
“Whether it’s private security contractors, that are still all over Iraq or Afghanistan, or it’s the bigger-known defense contractors, like the number one in the world, Lockheed Martin.”
Journalist Antony Loewenstein detailed how the U.S. privatized its wars in Iraq and Afghanistan in another interview with Salon. There are an estimated 30,000 military contractors working for the Pentagon in Afghanistan today; they outnumber U.S. troops three-to-one. Thousands more are in Iraq.
Lockheed Martin simply “plans to sell every aspect of missile defense that it can,” regardless of whether it is needed, Wilkerson said. And what is best to maximize corporate interest is by no means necessarily the same as what is best for average citizens.
“We dwarf the Russians or anyone else who sells weapons in the world,” the retired Army colonel continued.
Gene Roddenberry Based Star Trek On Secret US Navy Space Fleet
September 14 2016 | From: Exopolitics September 8 marked the 50th anniversary of the creation of the Star Trek science fiction series that began in 1966. There is significant evidence that its creator, Gene Roddenberry, did not simply come up with the idea of Star Trek on his own.
Instead he was encouraged to create the series based on classified information surrounding the development of a secret U.S. Navy space fleet that would build a broad extraterrestrial alliance.
This led Roddenberry to come up with the idea of a United Federation of Planets, with its military headquarters in San Francisco.
Roddenberry began developing ideas for a science fiction show after one of his series had bombed in 1964:
“The only reason Roddenberry created Star Trek, at least initially, was to sell another series to a network. He was, if not desperate, anxious… He had just failed with The Lieutenant, for Norman Felton’s Arena Productions.
… No one was clamoring for another series from Roddenberry, or even his scripts. His agent suggested he come up with a space series…
This may have led to what The Outer Limits historians insist are the accurate - if generally unknown - accounts of Roddenberry hanging out at times on the set of The Outer Limits. When I learned this, it wasn’t hard to imagine that series creator, and executive producer, Leslie Stevens … was someone that Roddenberry may have sought to emulate."
This account is confirmed by Tom Seldon, one of the production assistants of The Outer Limits:
“Star Trek was in fact an outgrowth of The Outer Limits. Gene Roddenberry watched our dailies all the time and took a lot of phone calls from our screening room.
He was spurring his imagination and checking on the incredible quality control we had.
I wondered why he was there but he was there more often than not during the time he was coming up with Star Trek."
The following firmly suggests that Roddenberry and Stevens had reached a business arrangement for the planned sci-fi series, Star Trek:
“Bearing in mind that Roddenberry was contracted to a rival studio and a rival network, the odds are essentially slim to none that the two men didn’t have some kind of business arrangement, whether in writing or not."
If Stevens and Roddenberry had indeed developed a business arrangement for the new Star Trek series, this is where Stevens background becomes critical in understanding the nature of their arrangement. Stevens was the son of a U.S. Navy Vice Admiral Leslie Stevens who died in 1956.
Vice Admiral Stevens was a contemporary of Rear Admiral Rico Botta who according to a former aerospace engineer, William Tompkins, oversaw a covert Navy espionage program out of Nazi Germany to learn about Nazi flying saucers during World War II.
The 29 Navy spies in the program had not only learned that the Nazis had developed up to 30 different flying saucer prototypes, but were also being directly assisted by an extraterrestrial civilization comprising Reptilian hominoids in building secret bases in Antarctica.
Both Admirals Botta and Stevens were leading experts in aerospace engineering and headed top Navy aerospace facilities at various points during their careers. In 1946, both were retroactively promoted to the rank of Rear Admiral as of 1943, for their wartime duties.
Botta went on to head the Naval Air Material Center out of Philadelphia Shipyard from 1950 to 1952. It is from this and similar command assignments that plans began for a secret Navy space fleet aimed to counter what the Nazis had developed in Antarctica.
Similarly, Admiral Stevens was known for his accomplishments in aeronautics and is quoted as having“had a hand in the design or conception of all naval aircraft, aircraft carriers and carrier landing apparatus.” Admiral Stevens’ aeronautics expertise meant that he was almost certainly aware of what Botta had learned about Nazi aerospace projects.
It is more than likely that Admirals Botta and Stevens were the first to comprise a covert Navy leadership group that would oversee the development of a U.S. Navy space fleet based on modern aircraft carrier battle groups that would in time join an interplanetary alliance.
This is precisely what Tompkins says he was asked to do at the Douglas Aircraft Company on behalf of the Navy from 1952 to 1963. Tompkins says that he was covertly assisted by Nordic extraterrestrials while he was helping design kilometers-long spacecraft for future U.S. Navy space battle groups. In interviews, Tompkins has revealed that Nordic extraterrestrials were working directly with senior officers within the U.S. Navy.
Admiral Stevens went on to occupy important positions with the national security council system, including the Psychological Strategy Board where he became Director.
Formally established in 1951 by President Truman, it is one of the interagency boards that was set up to disinform the general public about the reality of flying saucers, while secretly gathering information about what other nations were doing in response to the phenomenon.
William Tompkins confirmed, in a private phone call on August 24, that Admiral Stevens was aware of what the Navy had learned about Nazi Germany’s flying saucer programs. He further confirmed that Admiral Stevens played a direct role in setting up a secret U.S. Navy space program, and that his son, Leslie Stevens, IV, was aware of what was happening.
Tompkins claims here are consistent with what he says happened from 1985 to 1999, when he ran an extraterrestrial related “Special Projects” out of the U.S. Navy League center in Medford, Oregon. He said that it was common for Navy officers to have their children briefed about secret space programs and alliances with different extraterrestrial races.
This was done in order to prepare the next generation of navy officers and/or leaders for a world where extraterrestrial life was common knowledge. This is similar to another program happening on the U.S. East Coast as described by Catherine Austin Fitts, a former Assistant Secretary of Housing and Urban Development.
She was asked to participate in strategy sessions that were being conducted by the Arlington Institute, a non-profit organization headed by John Peterson that was assigned a number of US Navy contracts. Fitts says:
“John asked me to help him with a high level strategic plan Arlington was planning to undertake for the Undersecretary of the Navy…
I met with a group of high level people in the military in the process - including the Undersecretary.
According to John, the purpose of the plan - discussed in front of several military or retired military officers and former government officials - was to help the Navy adjust their operations for a world in which it was commonly known that aliens exist and live among us."
Tompkins has supplied a document confirming that he ran a Special Projects Committee with the U.S. Navy League. Additionally, two retired Navy Officers, Art Lumley (Commander), and Larry Boeck (Captain) have confirmed that Tompkins did discuss extraterrestrial projects at Navy League meetings, and was regarded as an expert on these issues.
Minutes of Board Meeting refers to Special Projects Committee
Tompkins’ testimony confirms that it was common practice for Navy officers, briefed about extraterrestrial life, to pass on some of this highly classified information to their children.
Consequently, it is almost certain that Admiral Stevens revealed to his son, Leslie Stevens, some of the classified details about the existence of extraterrestrial life and secret space programs prior to his death.
It is furthermore very possible, that Stevens, Jr., was part of a Navy sanctioned “soft disclosure” process that would use the television/movie industry to reveal elements of the Navy’s planned secret space program.
All this helps considerably in finally understanding the nature of the business relationship between Roddenberry and Leslie Stevens, Jr. Stevens could not himself directly create a science fiction show revealing details of the classified information given to him by his deceased father, but he very likely received tacit permission by Navy officials, to share it with television/movie producers such as Roddenberry who would fictionalize the information.
Consequently, the business relationship between Gene Roddenberry and Leslie Stevens, suggests that Star Trek was initially based on information gained by Admirals Botta and Stevens. A future U.S. Navy space fleet would be developed that would actively cooperate with Nordic extraterrestrials in an alliance that would counter the Nazis and their Reptilian allies.
In the Star Trek series, the Nordics were depicted as Vulcans, the Reptilians as Klingons, while the Nazis were represented as genetically enhanced humans.
Furthermore, it is topical to recognize that Roddenberry chose the beautiful, iconic city of San Francisco as the military headquarters for his fictional Starfleet Command in Star Trek, elevating this U.S. city in the hearts and minds of generations as a symbol of humanity’s bright future achievements.
It would also directly represent the Navy’s plan for its secret space program becoming a model for integrating other nations in a united partnership.
Two independent sources, former Asian Bureau chief for Forbes Magazine, Benjamin Fulford in 2011, and an anonymous source called the “Hidden Hand” in 2009, have revealed that the Illuminati/Cabal specifically named San Francisco (along with Damascus) as a city that will be made uninhabitable in its Armageddon agenda.
Does San Francisco pose a double threat as both a symbol of hope within the collective psyche, and the truth of a reality it mirrors in the military’s accomplishments? If so, then the Cabal’s goal is not to destroy a city, but to break the collective spirit of a peaceful human vision for a spacefaring future that begins with full disclosure.
The above evidence suggests Star Trek was no mere science fiction series, but was actively encouraged through a business arrangement between Roddenberry and the son of a deceased U.S. Navy admiral, who was directly involved in developing a secret U.S. Navy Space Fleet called Solar Warden.
As we celebrate the 50th anniversary of Star Trek on Thursday, it is worth remembering the roles of U.S. Navy admirals that helped launch the real secret space program upon which Star Trek was modeled.
Putin Bans Rothschilds From Russia + Hungary Becomes First European Nation To Ban Rothschild Banks
September 13 2016 | From: NosComunicamos / WakingTimes / Various Brave Vladimir Putin has banned Jacob Rothschild and his New World Order banking cartel family from entering Russian territory “under any circumstances.
Putin recently reminded his cabinet that he paid off the Rothschild’s debt and “grabbed them by the scruff of the neck and kicked them out Russia’s back door.”
This meeting featured the President pounding his fist on the table and vowing to destroy the New World Order, and according to a Kremlin source Putin is making great strides towards this goal.
“They do not own the world, and they do not have carte blanch to do whatever they want. If we do not challenge them there will be other issues. We will not be bullied by them.”
It is understood that the Rothschild banking racket was a noose tied around the neck of the Russian economy. Once the knot was tightened, the economy would struggle and choke.
Early in his presidency he made a priority of uniting Russia socially, spiritually, and economically. He ordered the arrest of the Rothschild backed oligarch Mikhail Khodorkovsky who had made Rothschild, Henry Kissinger and Arthur Hartman directors of the Open Russia foundation.
He was so upset with the banksters in his temple, he tipped over their tables and drove them out with a whip.
A keen student of history, well versed in world affairs, the Russian President has studied the history of the world’s most elusive organisation and understands the central role their financial collaborators have played in fomenting the major international conflicts of the 20th century.
The New World Order’s invasive roots and branches keep spreading around the world, but President Putin has stopped them expanding into Russia. This is a major blow to their plans for world domination and now they view him as a real threat. He’s got them running scared, which is why he is degraded in the Western media at every opportunity.
The reality is that Putin is leading us towards a multi-polar world, far from the one government, one religion future plotted by the New World Order. When he took his forces into Syria to protect a sovereign state he further enhanced his reputation as a powerful leader.
People around the world have started to wake up and notice.
Putin's Eye-Opening Speech About US Foreign Policy
This video goes back to a Russian TV show in 2011, when Putin's foreign policy wasn't quite as clear to the Russian public as it is today. Nevertheless, he makes his stance known on US foreign policy, and notably, his feelings toward Mr McCain.
Hungary Becomes First European Nation To Ban Rothschild Banks
The name Rothschild is literally associated with wealth. This is because for over 200 years, the family has remained the most powerful and wealthy family in the world.
The head of Hungary’s central bank has called for the International Monetary Fund to close its office in Budapest
Most of the Rothschild fortune has been made in the world of banking, but investments in other industries, such as coal, real estate, and construction, have helped secure the family’s wealth and immense power.
One of the banks owned by the Rothschild group (the biggest banking group in the world) is the International Monetary Fund (IMF), AKA ’Imposing Misery and Famine’.
Not only does the group make money off usurious interest rates at the misfortune of crumbling economies, it literally owns Governments and people of power. Because it’s nearly impossible to escape the clutches of the banking group, news of IMF being booted from Hungary is being heralded as a victorious happening.
TapNewsWirereports that in 2008, Hungary survived economic turmoil by relying on a €20 billion ($26 billion) loan from the IMF and aid from the EU. This was before Hungarian Prime Minister Viktor Orbán was elected into office.
In 2013, however, the former economy minister and current central bank governor, Gyorgy Matolcsy, wrote a letter to IMF Managing Director Christine Lagarde calling for the fund to close its representative office in Budapest. Matolcsy noted that it was “not necessary to maintain” it any longer. In addition, he said in July of 2016 that Hungary would repay the 2008 loan in full by the end of the year.
Prime Minister Orbán hasn’t had a good relationship with IMF since taking office, and this latest move has taken it to a new low. However, many are hailing Hungary’s decision to boot the IMF from the country as an intelligent decision.
“Paying the loan back early has meant Hungary have saved €11.7 million worth of interest expenses, but Gordan Bajnai, leader of the electoral alliance E14-PM, claimed that they had actually lost €44.86 million by March 2014 because of the early repayment as all they did was replace the loan from the [IMF] with a more expensive one, labelling the stunt as Propaganda.
And what made further nonsense; another loan at high interest rates was signed to finance a nuclear upgrade, which will mean not only higher repayments but also high electricity costs. But they do have economic sovereignty now.“
The central bank governor says that the government succeeded in pushing its budget deficit below the EU ceiling of 3% in GDP and reduced government debt. Though the EU Commission expected it to return to weak growth shortly after the decision, the unorthodox system of imposing heavy special taxes on large companies seems to be working for the country.
YourNewsWire relays that Iceland joined Hungary in 2014 when it paid back its $400 million loan ahead of schedule after the collapse of the banking sector in 2008.
In addition, Russia has refused to bow down to any Western puppeteer and gained financial independence in 2005.
Race Relations In New Zealand
September 12 2016 | From: NZPCR Last week the Race Relations Commissioner Dame Susan Devoy wrote an open letter to all New Zealanders. She wants to hear your views on racism in New Zealand. The letter is part of the Human Rights Commission’s first nationwide anti-racism campaign.
Dame Susan says the That’s Us campaign, which asks Kiwis to share their own stories about “racism, intolerance and hatred” in New Zealand, is about “the kind of people we want to be”, and “the kind of country we want our kids growing up in”.
If you would like to reply to Dame Susan’s letter to you, her email address is SusanD@hrc.co.nz – or feedback can be provided through the special website www.thatsus.co.nz.
The Human Rights Commission has justified the campaign on the basis that New Zealand is an extremely diverse society, and since diverse societies elsewhere have become more racially intolerant, they expect it to occur here too. With around 400 formal complaints about racism received every year, the Commission wants public feedback: “if we’re going to better understand racism then we need to know what it is” – which in itself seems extraordinary!
In particular, they highlight “casual” or “quiet” racial intolerance – the type that they say occurs in everyday life and often goes unreported. As an example they cite the case of a woman registering students at a university, who “smiles at every other student but the brown ones”.
Clearly this campaign is an exercise in redefining racism to become substantially wider than what most rational people would assume it to be. It is a further example of the arrant nonsense emanating from the Race Relations Commissioner and the Human Rights Commission.
This week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator, broadcaster Lindsay Perigo, who shares with us a speech he delivered at a recent debate with Dame Susan Devoy, believes the Race Relations Commissioner and the Human Rights Commission should be abolished:
“I’d abolish Dame Susan. Nothing personal! I’d just abolish the office of Race Relations Commissar and with it, the entire Human Rights Commission, to which I routinely refer as the Human Wrongs Commissariat.
This cossetted coterie of taxpayer-supported fascists of the left just want to impose their precious, prissy, puritanical Political Correctness upon all of us. They’re our Thought Police, prattling on about diversity when they’re attempting to outlaw the most important diversity of all, ideological diversity and make their Political Correctness compulsory.
Everything in their universe would be either illegal or compulsory. In my universe they’d have to find real jobs and the legislation that set them up would be repealed.”
The legislation under which the Race Relations Commissioner and the Human Rights Commission operate is the Human Rights Act 1993, which essentially enshrines the United Nation’s human rights agenda into our domestic law.
As a result, the Commission is now promoting the highly controversial United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, which Helen Clark’s Labour Government considered too radical to support.
While the National Government signed up in 2010 – at the behest of the Maori Party – Prime Minister John Key went to some lengths to assure the New Zealand public that it was “a non-binding aspirational goal”. Yet here we are with the Human Rights Commission now proactively promoting the Declaration, including through brochures which advocate Maori self determination and self government.
One of the Human Rights Commission’s main roles is to pursue those they claim are discriminating against others.
Dr Paul Moon, a professor of history at the Maori Development Unit of the Auckland University of Technology, explained how, as a result of the publication of his book, This Horrid Practice, in 2008 – which portrayed cannibalism as a violent and widespread practice among traditional Maori – he was the subject of an anonymous complaint to the Human Rights Commission.
But it doesn‘t even need a person to lay a complaint for the Human Rights Commission to act as the Thought Police – as a former Massey University Economist, Dr Greg Clydesdale found out.
The Commission got so worked up about a research paper he had prepared from Statistics New Zealand data, showing that Polynesian immigration was fuelling an underclass, that a 69 page report was compiled on his case – without a single complaint about his paper ever being received.
Such investigations, supposedly to prevent discrimination, can not only destroy reputations and careers, but they create an atmosphere of fear and intimidation that seriously undermines our fundamental right to free expression – a freedom, that is especially critical in an academic environment.
There also remains an on-going concern that these government officials are overly biased in favour of minorities. This was certainly the case back in 1988, when a scandal over a Maori activist’s call to ‘kill a white’, forced the government to change the law.
According to the Hansard of the Parliamentary debates at the time, the Race Relations conciliator refused to censure Hannah Jackson, who made her inflammatory statement at the University of Auckland marae – he only censured a newspaper editor for reporting the event.
The incident was considered to be so serious, that it caused Parliament to repeal section 9A of the Race Relations Act, which made it illegal to publish, broadcast or make public statements “likely to excite hostility or ill-will against, or bring into contempt or ridicule, any group of persons on the ground of their colour, race, or ethnic or national origins”, since it did not apply on a marae.
As Winston Peters, then MP for Tauranga, explained in the debate;
“The Race Relations Conciliator, when asked to consider an offensive statement – ‘Go out and kill a white and be a hero’ – did nothing.
He said that he had no role whatever to play. He then attacked the Auckland Star. A person in Auckland made a totally outrageous statement that offended 99 percent of New Zealanders, and said that someone should go out and kill a white and be a hero.
The Race Relations Conciliator could not be moved to say one word of opprobrium about it… The view and the myth that if one belongs to a minority one cannot be guilty of racist behaviour are being reinforced, and they are rubbish.”
As a result of that controversy, Section 9A of the Race Relations Act was eventually replaced by Sections 61 and 131 of the Human Rights Act 1993.
Section 61 addressed the “kill a white” issue by prohibiting the use of “words which are threatening, abusive, or insulting or likely to excite hostility against any group of persons on the ground of race”, not only in public places, but also in “any place” where “the person using the words knew or ought to have known that the words were reasonably likely to be published…”
In addition, the new law clarified the fact that the media can legally report on such matters.
Section 131 of the Act established the fact that inciting racial disharmony is a criminal offence – punishable by a fine of up to $7,000 or imprisonment of up to 3 months. As a safeguard, however, under Section 132, the consent of the Attorney General is needed before any prosecution can be instituted.
However, in spite of there being a high threshold for prosecution, the activities of the Race Relations Commissioner continue to have a chilling effect on free speech – especially their media monitoring project, aimed at naming and shaming news outlets critical of Maori rights.
Over the years, vested Maori interests have learnt to use human rights laws to seek advantage, by using accusations of racism or intolerance to close down the debate, whenever anyone speaks out against their agenda.
The New Zealand Centre for Political Research has been the subject of such accusation when commenting on important matters such as the government’s plan to establish iwi control of the country’s fresh water. More recently we have been criticised for publishing details of where local body candidates stand on the vexed question of unelected representatives with voting rights being appointed onto Councils.
As an independent organisation we remain undeterred, and congratulate our newsletter readers, who are also standing up to the racism being expressed by iwi and the likes of Dame Susan.
Our Local Government Election Project is a community service – thanks to the help of newsletter readers, the Vote 2016 index HERE provides details of which candidates around the country oppose the appointment of unelected representatives – who cannot be held to account by their local community – onto their councils.
With voting papers due to be sent out next week, we are encouraging readers to visit the website and vote for candidates brave enough to stand up against iwi control of councils. The direct link to this resource is www.nzcpr.com/local-body-elections-2016 – so please feel free to spread the word and help assist others in making their voting decisions.
Some iwi regard the notion that only elected representatives should have the right to vote on councils as “old world thinking”. They seem to believe that Treaty settlement money and resources gives them a supreme right to by-pass democracy and have their representatives appointed to sit and vote at council decision-making tables.
They are not only pressuring councils for this, but some are threatening them as well:
“If iwi are not valued by their local community and encouraged, rather than discouraged, to participate and invest in decision-making at all levels of council they will rightfully invest their economic and political influence in other regions.”
But in our view it is tribalism that is “old world thinking”, not democracy. A progressive society needs to respect cultural differences but move into the future as one society with one sovereign and common laws. That view will no doubt continue to attract the criticism of those who profit from a separatist agenda, and those like the Race Relations Office who are part of that industry.
Iwi are also pushing for seats on local councils through the Treaty settlement process – and central government is capitulating with legislation to that effect.
Probably the best known case is that of the Independent Maori Statutory Board, which was established during Auckland’s amalgamation in 2010. The legislation states that the nine member board was set up as an ‘advisory’ body – with “a maximum of 2 persons to sit as members on each of the Auckland Council’s committees that deal with the management and stewardship of natural and physical resources”.
The new Auckland Council however, appointed members onto many other Council committees and gave them voting rights.
The interesting question, therefore, is whether the candidates standing for the new Auckland Council would support a motion to return the Statutory Board to the advisory role envisioned by the Government when the legislation was drawn up. In other words, would they be prepared to take away the Board’s representation on many of the Council committees and their voting rights?
The reality is that New Zealand society does not want to be divided by race, even though this is being aggressively promoted by the Human Rights Commission – including putting increasing pressure on every local authority in the country to adopt Maori wards.
While this move might find favour with the iwi elite, it most certainly is not supported by the vast majority of communities, who simply want to keep race out of local politics.
So back to Lindsay Perigo’s question – should our Human Rights laws be axed?
It’s also question that is being asked in Australia and in Britain, where there is a growing recognition that there is no need to protect individuals from the actions of others through human rights legislation.
With New Zealand already having an established Bill of Rights to limit the power of the state and protect our freedom, surely it’s now time to abandon the legislative human rights approach, which is increasingly doing the opposite – expanding the power of the state and limiting our freedom!
The Transatlantic Trade & Investment Partnership (TTIP) Is Dead + Earthquakes
September 12 2016 | From: Geopolitics / VeteransToday This is one of those incremental changes that we can celebrate on, but it doesn’t mean that we can let our guards down already.
The enemy is very cunning and knows how and when to play dead only to rise at some opportune time in the future.
This has been the case of the banishment of the Jesuits in the mid-18th century. Look where in the pyramid they are now.
Mass actions against corporate tyranny should be decisive and perpetual. Even better, refuse all rigged political exercises, and legalized extortions.
Good News for the People of Europe: The Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership (TTIP) Is Dead. Negotiations have Failed.
The German Minister of Economy and Vice-Chancellor, Mr. Sigmar Gabriel, a few days ago has declared that the European Union should not submit to the demands of the United States, referring to the negotiations on the TTIP (Transatlantic Trade and Investments Partnership). He said the negotiations failed. By saying so, he joined French Prime Minister, Manuel Valls, as well as French Secretary of State for External Trade, Mr. Matthias Fekl.
Negotiations started in 2013. After 14 ‘rounds’ of talks dealing with 27 points, no agreement has been reached, none whatsoever, leading to the conclusion that the deal is dead. Even though Mme. Merkel defended the treaty with all her heart up to the end of July 2016, both Germany and France now request a definite end to the negotiations.
The collapse of the TTIP is one of the best news for Europe – and I mean the people of Europe – in recent times; an initiative of the two major players in the EU.
This decision has several meanings:
1. European countries are gradually taking back their sovereignty from Brussels and decide for themselves what is good for them and for Europe;
2. With a failed TTIP Europe escapes, or avoids, being enslaved by US corporatism, financial institutions – and US legislation;
3. Europe may now continue making its proper policies on socioeconomy, environment, food safety, agriculture - and
4. Europe is now freer to pursue its own monetary policy. Under the grip of the TTIP, it would have been difficult, say impossible, to adopt a monetary policy outside of the Euro which many countries would like, openly or covertly – some without making a lot of noise for fear of being ‘reprimanded’ by Brussels.
The fact that authorities of both, France and Germany, stated in unison that the negotiations failed, is a sign that there is still a spirit of autonomy in Europe.
What is called ‘negotiations’ were never really negotiations – a give and take between equal partners. It was from the beginning a one-way street, where the exceptional nation imposed its rules. There was no way of getting the slightest concession from them – not an iota.
No doubt Washington had no intention to share any of the benefits of this ‘Free Trade Agreement’ with Europe.
The exceptional people wanted it all. For example, the term ‘Appelation Contrôlée’ for wine and cheese in France and other European countries, used to protect the farmers of a given region – would have disappeared. The US wanted everything to be open for the ever dictating ‘market’.
Nothing was to be clearly defined, as far as Europe was concerned. No transparence – just a vast base for cheating, consumers and nations.
TTIP talks were held in top secret, behind closed doors. Not even politicians, let alone the public at large which eventually would have had to bear the consequences of the deal, had access to the documents being ‘negotiated’. – It showed the Machiavellian nature of empire at its best.
China knew very well why they were not even interested in participating in the TPP (Transpacific Partnership), a similar trade agreement with eleven Pacific nations and the US.
Let’s recall the key point that would have meant disaster for Europe:
A private corporate tribunal that would have had supremacy over sovereign government legislation. For example, the tribunal could have imposed ‘sanctions’ or fines on governments, whose legislation, say for health, environmental protection and other social reasons, would have reduced corporations’ profit margins.
Similar in the banking sector, monetary policy would have been firmly dictated by the FED, Wall Street (i.e. Goldman Sachs – see Greece and the head of the ECB, a former GS exec) and the European Central Bank. This for now is still the case, but with an unsustainable and unreformable EU and Euro, both are destined to disappear sooner or later. It is likely that many countries are already quietly and clandestinely arranging for “Plan B” – preparing exit strategies. Indeed, since BREXIT, there are numerous political movements to this effect under way – and this not only in the most devastatingly affected southern European countries, but also in northern Europe.
Agriculture policy would have been dictated by Washington, especially with regard to GMOs and ag-subsidies. Monsanto and the like would have had free access to all of Europe, and none of the EU members could have passed legislation prohibiting genetically modified seeds.
Standards for health and nutrition would have been imposed by Washington, i.e. by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA). Most of these standards are considerably weaker than European equivalents, potentially exposing European citizens to greater health risks than current EU standards foresee.
Labor laws would have been weakened in according to US standards which foresee virtually no protection for workers. The Brussels imposed new labor law in France, dubbed as the ‘El Khomri law’, after the French Minister of Labor, Myriam El Khomri, would reduce significantly French labor rights, fought for and attained with decades of efforts – literally sweat and tears – by French workers and unions.
The new French labor law, signed as a decree by PM Manuel Valls under a dubious special provision in the Constitution (instead of being passed through Parliament), was a precursor for things to come in the rest of Europe – had the TTIP gone forward.
This controversial law is currently at the demand of more than 60 French Parliamentarians being reviewed by the French Conseil d’Etat (equivalent to other countries’ Supreme Court) and may quite possibly be either canceled or sent to Parliament for a decision. Now that the TTIP is dead, it is possible that the law will be repealed.
The day the TTIP died was a great day for Europe. Although Europe is far from being out of the woods. Her own problems keep piling up, many of them also a direct or indirect consequence of empire.
To mention just a few:
Immigration from US-NATO war-destroyed countries;
The never ending financial cum economic crisis;
The complete absence of solidarity among EU nations;
The lack of EU countries’ sovereignty; the missing EU Constitution giving member countries a common perspective and political agenda;
The increasing (‘false flag’) terror attacks throughout Europe; – and not least NATO – which through its aggression towards Russia is increasingly becoming a risk of war – of WWIII – that would for the third time in 100 years devastate Europe.
This time the rest of the world would very likely not be spared. Many countries are conscious of this danger and would like to get out of NATO, but don’t dare say so, because of fear from the boots of Washington.
Let’s hope the death of the TTIP will bring a new breeze of fresh air and ideas into European sovereignty.
Italy, The Phillipines And Oklahoma Get An Earthquake
If the tsunami in Sumatra in 2004 and the earthquakes in the Pacific Rim during 2011- 2012 taught me anything, it is that tsunamis and earthquakes happen for a reason.
As a recap, with regard to the former. The northern part of Sumatra was going to break away from the southern part and nationalize their oil resources and free themselves from ExxonMobil. They were the worst hit in the tsunami of 2004. To quote from Wikipedia:
"Aceh has substantial natural resources, including oil and natural gas; some estimates put Aceh gas reserves as being the largest in the world. Aceh was the closest point of land to the epicenter of the 2004 Indian Ocean earthquake and tsunami, which devastated much of the western coast of the province.
Approximately 170,000 Indonesians were killed or went missing in the disaster. The disaster helped precipitate the peace agreement between the government of Indonesia and the Free Aceh Movement (GAM).”
A little bit too convenient don’t you think?
With regard to the latter, the Pacific Rim and the countries within it just happen to also be party to the TPP agreements which Obama is attempting to get signed and sealed before he leaves office.
Christchurch earthquake, New Zealand
I have to conclude that the earthquakes and tsunamis that hit this region, two examples being Christchurch in February 2011 and Fukushima in March and April of that year, were and in many instances still are weather warfare and methods of persuasion against those who have attempted to resist the Pivot to Asia and the Trans Pacific Partnership Agreement.
With regards to the Fukushima catastrophe, most people outside the loop cannot conceive or accept that such evil could be perpetrated against the Japanese people. Those within the loop, many considered to be the “tin foil hat brigade,” are fully aware that such evil intentions are not out of the realm of the global, corporate fascist’s agenda.
Japan, the only country who has experienced a full frontal nuclear attack, not once, but twice, in spite of being in the process of surrendering at the end of WW2, has no such illusions.
“Imagine a private, global super court that empowers corporations to bend countries to their will.
Say a nation tries to prosecute a corrupt CEO or ban dangerous pollution. Imagine that a company could turn to this super court and sue the whole country for daring to interfere with its profits, demanding hundreds of millions or even billions of dollars as retribution.
Imagine that this court is so powerful that nations often must heed its rulings as if they came from their own supreme courts, with no meaningful way to appeal. That it operates unconstrained by precedent or any significant public oversight, often keeping its proceedings and sometimes even its decisions secret.
That the people who decide its cases are largely elite Western corporate attorneys who have a vested interest in expanding the court’s authority because they profit from it directly, arguing cases one day, and then sitting in judgment another. That some of them half-jokingly refer to themselves as “The Club” or “The Mafia.”
And imagine that the penalties this court has imposed have been so crushing - and its decisions so unpredictable - that some nations dare not risk a trial, responding to the mere threat of a lawsuit by offering vast concessions, such as rolling back their own laws or even wiping away the punishments of convicted criminals.
This system is already in place, operating behind closed doors in office buildings and conference rooms in cities around the world. Known as investor-state dispute settlement, or ISDS, it is written into a vast network of treaties that govern international trade and investment, including NAFTA and the Trans-Pacific Partnership, which Congress must soon decide whether to ratify.”
On the 24th of August 2016 an earthquake hit central Italy.
My condolences and sympathies go out to the Italians. But what interests me more here is the political and economic background noise. On the 5th of July an Italian minister said:
"A free trade deal being negotiated by the European Union and the United States is at a dead end and an agreement with Canada is also at risk.
I think (the TTIP deal) will fall through, and the agreement with Canada is at risk of doing the same. We have been negotiating it for too long,” Carlo Calenda, Italy’s industry minister said at an event in Rome.
Calenda said confidence in the negotiations was lacking.”
The TTIP is the EU-US equivalent of the Pacific Rim/ Pivot to Asia/ TPP agreements.
"The TTIP approval would see European markets invaded by approximately 1,300 chemical substances which are forbidden by European law. In fact, there are more than 80 pesticides that are used in the US whose production was blocked by the European Commission for being hazardous.
Moreover, there are animal growth hormones and genetically modified organisms among the banned substances which are allowed in the US. Other EU banned practices, such as feeding antibiotics to animals or washing chickens with chlorine are also permitted in the US…
As the Italian Department of Economic Development pointed out, it entails the counterfeiting of Italian products in the US and pushing the consumer to associate such products with the Italian original ones. According to the official body, about 75% of Italian products abroad are not authentic, and it damages Italian production. The signing of TTIP would bring Italian sounding products to Europe: another blow to Italian agro-food producers.”
With regard to the Phillipines they have had ongoing weather disasters.
Philippines' President Rodrigo Duterte
Before Typhoon Hagupit struck in 2014, the government voted not to allow a US military base in their country. Shortly afterwards a US military base was established. Since then they have had a number of earthquakes. The most recent on the 4th of September 2016.
Newly elected President Rodrigo Duterte is a mixed bag. He is cracking down on illegal drug trafficking, possibly paving the way for Big Pharma patents on narcotics such as opium. Heroin junkies that are increasing world wide are not the only market for this commodity, opium is an essential component in health care medication and pain relief for those who really need it.
It is also big money for anyone with a patent on this product and when freely available through drug traffickers undermines their profit margins.
So you have to wonder about the Philippine government’s “war on narco-politics,” and the killing of over 400 drug dealers that has reportedly led to an additional 500,000 turning themselves in…
Duterte: “I’ll really have you killed… My order is shoot to kill you. I don’t care about human rights, you better believe me….my mouth has no due process.”
Duterte has also promised the voters free wi-fi (more opportunity for Google and social media brainwashing), lower taxes, polygamy being legalised, (will pedophilia and child marriages also be included considering that child sex trafficking is rife in Asia?) and higher wages for government employees.
“Duterte has expressed interest in granting foreign investors access to sectors currently restricted to Philippine nationals and allowing them to own at least 70 percent and possibly up to 100 percent of companies they establish in the country, up from the current limit of 40 percent. Getting rid of the so-called 60:40 rule should pose a challenge, however, as it requires amending the country’s 1987 constitution."
Sectors that are currently heavily restricted to foreign access include:
Mass media and broadcasting
Retail trade
Domestic shipping
Pharmaceuticals
Advertising
Public services
Small-scale mining
Private security
Utilization of marine resources
While there is no guarantee that all or even many currently restricted industries will be opened to foreign investment if Duterte successfully amends the constitution, there could still be significant opportunities on the horizon in these largely untapped sectors.
Further, Duterte has also indicated support for joining the TPP, which in itself could require altering the constitution due to foreign ownership restrictions. However, it appears that he will maintain restrictions on foreign ownership of land, which is currently limited to long-term leasing.
Which makes me conclude that Duterte is a Trojan Horse.
In many of his campaign promises he has said that he will make congress “illegal.” This would pave the way towards getting rid of major obstacles and politicians that currently block TPP agreements and getting rid of foreign investment limitations as they currently stand.
If the newly appointed President, who shows all the signs of becoming yet another CIA Kissinger–type dictator and Pinochet/ Videla/ Suharto clone, does not succeed in bringing the country into compliance with corporate fascist monopolistic globalist ambitions, then a few more earthquakes and a couple more tornadoes just might be needed in order to get the message across.
Weather Warfare
"The significant expansion in America’s weather warfare arsenal, which is a priority of the Department of Defense is not a matter for debate or discussion.
While, environmentalists blame the Bush administration for not having signed the Kyoto protocol, the issue of ‘weather warfare’, namely the manipulation of weather patterns for military use is never mentioned."
The US Air Force has the capability of manipulating climate either for testing purposes or for outright military-intelligence use. These capabilities extend to the triggering of floods, hurricanes, droughts and earthquakes.
In recent years, large amounts of money have been allocated by the US Department of Defense to further developing and perfecting these capabilities.
"Weather modification will become a part of domestic and international security and could be done unilaterally… It could have offensive and defensive applications and even be used for deterrence purposes.
The ability to generate precipitation, fog, and storms on earth or to modify space weather, … and the production of artificial weather all are a part of an integrated set of technologies which can provide substantial increase in US, or degraded capability in an adversary, to achieve global awareness, reach, and power."
-
US Air Force, Air University of the US Air Force, AF 2025 Final Report
“I think the reason that they do not want people to look too closely at Haiti is because Haiti is such a perfect example of what a Clinton administration would be. And I want people to keep in mind that we are heading toward a situation where we are going to have more planetary change disasters.
We are going to have more floods, we are going to have more hurricanes if Clinton becomes president and stays president for the next eight years.
We can expect that there might be a major hurricane that causes a major disaster in the Gulf for example and other kinds of disasters in the United States. In Haiti we have a pretty good idea how the Clintons would handle this…”
The strongest out of hundreds that have occurred since 2009. Other than their land what else does the Pawnee nation have that anyone could possibly want? Or have the Pawnee been too active in stopping the Dakota oil pipeline for comfort and is this an earthquake war?
“In what has become the largest gathering of Native Americans in more than 100 years, a coalition of dozens of tribes across the country oppose the pipeline’s construction, citing concerns that it would put the Missouri River – as well as the network of lakes and tributaries that the “Big Muddy” is connected to – at risk of contamination via oil spill and lead to the destruction of culturally significant sites for the Sioux tribes in the area.
Saturday’s clash began when a group of several hundred protestors gathered near construction crews on Saturday afternoon at a site close to the Standing Rock Sioux Reservation. The demonstrators aimed to act as a human shield against the pipeline’s further development, after the removal of topsoil from a 150-feet wide and 2-mile long portion of land caused “devastating” damage to the tribe’s sacred lands.”
“The Dakota Access pipeline is set to be constructed near the Standing Rock Sioux Reservation in North Dakota, crossing under the Missouri River which is the only source of water to the reservation. The pipeline is planned to transport approximately 470,000 barrels of crude oil per day. The potential of oil leaks would contaminate the only source of water for the reservation.
While Dakota Access claims oil leaks are unlikely, an oil leak from a separate pipeline in North Dakota was discovered (8/15/16) to have leaked over 500 barrels of oil since the leak began on July 19, 2016. You can read the article here: http://bit.ly/2aVm5cv. A leak like this from the Dakota Access pipeline would leave the Standing Rock Sioux without any clean water.”
Or - are we talking natural gas reserves and Fracking in Green County, which the Pawnee would be correct in resisting.
Space Weather makes an “oh so brief reference” to it when covering the earthquake in Oklahoma at 1.50 mins and if you are not up to speed on the damage that Fracking does to the groundwater, soil, air and contributes to health hazards causing cancer for one, here is what Bernie Saunders thinks of it.
The 5th Eye
September 11 2016 | From: NZIFF / CutCutCut This densely packed doco from the directors of Operation 8 questions the price of New Zealand’s involvement in the Five Eyes intelligence alliance, and relates the improbable tale of its 2008 sabotage by the Waihopai Three.
If our PM or the relevant public servants feel truly comfortable about New Zealand’s participation in the Five Eyes intelligence alliance, it doesn’t show when they are seen explaining it, defending it, or downright refusing to talk about it in this documentary.
The disavowals we see are a matter of public record, but filmmakers Errol Wright and Abi King-Jones (Operation 8) embed those TV interviews, parliamentary declamations and media ops in a concise history of New Zealand’s post war dependency on the United States.
For lucid, more confidently-held commentary, the filmmakers turn to inveterate watchdogs such as Nicky Hager, Jane Kelsey, Murray Horton and Paul Buchanan, but evolve a position of their own through the accumulation and agile juxtaposition of some very telling material.
They also thread an unlikely tale of protest through this scenario, following the actions of the three earnest bumblers who, against all odds, successfully damaged the Waihopai spy station in 2008. A priest, a subsistence farmer and a teacher, they acted out of Christian conviction, claiming Five Eyes implicated New Zealanders in the murder of children in Iraq.
When they ran that argument in court, the jury acquitted them. No Crown witness was summoned to contradict them. When the GCSB has been so often in the news, with Kim Dotcom frequently in tow, there’s likely to be an audience, less heroic perhaps, that’s simply grateful to this film for providing a blow-by-blow account of the GCSB’s misadventures – and their expanding powers to make suspects of all of us.
Jeremy Corbyn: 9/11 Was 'Manipulated' + Russia Presents Evidence Against US, UK And Israel As Being The Actual 9/11 Terrorists & RT Declares 9/11 An Inside Job September 29 2015 | From: TheTelegraph / MethodicalDeception / WorldTruthTV / RT
In comments that will raise questions about his suitability to lead the Labour Party, Mr Corbyn appeared to blame George Bush and Tony Blair for using the September 11 attacks in New York to allow them to go to war. Comment: If you are like me you are sick of the flogging of the 9/11 horse - however busting this wide open is a key necessity and the developments just keep coming...
Jeremy Corbyn has claimed that 9/11 was "manipulated" to make it look like Osama Bin Laden was responsible to allow the West to go to war in Afghanistan. [And he has the corrupt cabal-western governments crapping themselves].
Note: This article and the following article are archival
They have been reposted because of their importance and significance given the date today. Anybody who now cannot see that the events of September 11 2001 were visited upon the world by 'the cabal' is either in dential or they have rocks in their head.
Given the exceptionally grave nature of this admission and its repercussions, one would suppose that Baer has been questioned by other media and/or the FBI and made to discuss in detail precisely who it was who cashed out and how he knew about the 9/11 plot in advance. But one would be wrong. Since making this stunning admission to the cameras of We Are Change Los Angeles, no one has ever asked Baer for more information about the case.
In comments that will raise questions about his suitability to lead the Labour Party, Mr Corbyn appeared to blame George Bush and Tony Blair for using the September 11 attacks in New York to allow them to go to war.
In a series of further articles, Mr Corbyn also appears to endorse controversial conspiracy theories about a “New World Order”.
...
Mr Corbyn was heavily criticised in the days before winning the Labour leadership after suggesting that the [apparent] death of Osama Bin Laden was a “tragedy”. In the 2003 article for The Morning Star newspaper, Mr Corbyn wrote:
"Historians will study with interest the news manipulation of the past 18 months. After September 11, the claims that bin Laden and al-Qaida had committed the atrocity were quickly and loudly made.
This was turned into an attack on the Taliban and then, subtly, into regime change in Afghanistan.”
However, in previous years he wrote a series of articles which appear to have endorsed the conspiracy theory about the “New World Order”.
The “New World Order” conspiracy is frequently linked to theories about the so-called “Illuminati” and claims about a “totalitarian world government”.
In an article for “Labour Briefing” in 1991, Mr Corbyn wrote:
"We now know that the Gulf War was a curtain-raiser for the New World Order: the rich and powerful, white and western will be able to maintain the present economic order with free use of all the weapons they wish for.”
That same year, he said in Socialist Campaign Group News:
"The aim of the war machine of the United States is to maintain a world order dominated by the banks and multinational companies of Europe and North America.”
The following year, in a piece for Labour Peace Action, Mr Corbyn said:
"What is required now is a bold, democratic alternative to the New World Order. The US veto at the Earth summit in Rio... shows just who calls the shots in this New World Order and who will be asked to foot the bill.”
Mr Corbyn has previously shared a platform with Ken O'Keefe, who has alleged that President Bush was a member of The New World Order who had orchestrated the September 11 attacks for personal gain.
The phrase was also used in a speech by George H.W Bush. Mr Corbyn’s spokesman refused to deny that the new Labour leader was referring to the “New World Order” conspiracy theory in his articles.
On Thursday, September 9, 2015 author Rebekah Roth was interviewed about her new book 'Methodical Deception'. New information she has recovered about the 9/11 false flag event will shock you to your core. This bombshell evidence destroys the "official story", forever. Israeli Mossad involvement in the 9/11 false flag attacks can no longer be denied.
To watch the FULL 75+ minute SGT Report interview click here.
Russia Presents Evidence Against US, UK And Israel as Being The Actual 9/11 Terrorists
Undoubtedly the 9/11 attacks on New York City and Washington DC are the most misrepresented by officialdom in US history.
"9/11 was an Anglo-American black operation executed in collusion with Israeli Secret Services and Saudi Arabian financiers.”
- 9/11 Investigator
Whereas the assassination of John F. Kennedy is now understood to have been a classic CIA Execution Plan, it does not come close to 9/11 in terms of the number and magnitude of outright falsehoods, misleading statements, fake science and fraudulent facts submitted by officials and agents of the US Government.
The ‘official’ 9/11 Commission Report stands as the most fabricated document ever produced by US tax dollars. Not only did the investigation avoid every serious inquiry about how two steel frame building came down after being dustified in NYC, it also subverted every initiative to ferret out the truth.
It appears that Russia has been conducting systematic data dumps on 9/11, the release of which represents more factual information on the attacks than any US Government source. In the wake of the Anglo-American coup d’état conducted by the CIA and MI6 in Kiev, it appears that Russia has no more patience for Western interference.
Especially when nations are destabilized on Russia’s borders do the stakes in this highly consequential geopolitical chess match go up.
Since Vladimir Putin has no intention of starting World War 3, he can only respond to US-EU meddling by using asymmetric warfare on the internet. Were the American people to understand that the US Federal Government perpetrated the 9/11 destruction, everything would change in a heartbeat.
Because the Obama Administration has shown no sign of aborting its planned takeover of the Ukraine, Russia is left with very few, but still quite potent options.
Operation Terror
The 9/11 story you are not supposed to know.
Based on actual under-reported 9/11 events.
James McCullough from the mysterious "Council" gives a special assignment to CIA agent Aaron Delgado to attack the World Trade Center and the Pentagon and pin the blame on Muslim Terrorists.
Delgado and fellow agents, Phillip Singer and Chase Jordan, work with a group of unsuspecting engineers to develop unmanned jets that will hit their assigned targets.The Army and the FBI begin to uncover the plot, forcing Delgado to intervene.
The CIA agents also have to deal with an increasingly suspicious George Poole, the lead engineer working on the drones, who becomes skeptical on how the remote controlled planes will be used. A
battle between good and evil ensues as the plot to attack America becomes a hard-hitting reality.
See the trailer below and the full movie at: OperationTerror
The following excerpt recently appeared on an alternative news website - Veterans Today - under the subtitle “Too Classified to Publish”. Essentially this unprecedented release of ultra-secret and highly classified information illustrates Putin’s new tack toward Western intractability. Simply put, Russia will no longer stand by idly while the Anglo-American Juggernaut projects it power wherever it so chooses.
"Too Classified to Publish"
According to a retired FXX agent specializing in Israeli counter intel: The type of nuclear devices used on 911 were a modified version of the W-54 nuclear artillery shells that were covertly provided to the Israelis between 1988 and 1998 from US surplus stockpiles illegally exported during the Bush/Clinton era.
Chemical analysis done by DOE Sandi was able to identify the chemical/radiation footprint or fingerprint of the warheads based on samples taken after 911 of the fallout at ground zero. (Editor’s note: Nuclear weapon use at ground zero is confirmed from multiple sources)
All plutonium based warheads have a chemical fingerprint that can identify the type of design and where the PU was made and how old it is. This was the 911 blackmail on Bush 1 and 2, the illegal transfer of surplus US nuclear weapons to the Israelis and why the continued cover up, along with the stolen gold and stock fraud that was going on Wall Street etc. According to file ENW57.pdf on page 66. (Editor’s note: Document received and confirmed)
Only a 2 kiloton device was needed to drop the buildings. A 2 kiloton device will produce a fireball of apx 150 to 200 feet in diameter at over 4000 degrees Centigrade. Just large enough to melt the I beams of the central core of the building and drop them in place.
The light flash would last less than 1 second and primarily be in the UV light range. Overpressure would only be at 60PSI max and directed upwards with the blast. See underground effect.
Fallout would be minimal and located to within ground zero range only. Radiation would drop to acceptable levels within 72 hrs. after the blast. Most fall out was trapped in the cement dust thus causing all of the recent cancer deaths that we are now seeing in NYC amongst first responders. (Editor’s note: Consistent with site data)
High FluxIsotope Reactor Core – Cross Section
Melted steel and iron oxide or “nano thermite” is a byproduct of the very high gamma ray / Neutron flux induced into the central steel core. The radiation dissolves the steel into iron oxide consuming the carbon and silicone in the steel.
This explains the missing steel columns and the very important clue of the “vaporized’ 20 ton antenna tower atop the south tower. The upward blast of radiation literally vaporized it. Video evidence proves this to be true. (Editor’s note: Tower issue a vital one.)
The total XXOO data file from DOE Sandia on the 911 event is well over 72 MB. P.S. Snowden didn’t have a Q clearance so he missed this one. Carnaberry had a pretty good stash of documents on the subject. (All under the transit stuff.) The entire nuclear nonproliferation story of stolen nuclear material coming from Russia was an Israeli cover story to hide the original source of weapons material coming from the US stock piles. (Editor’s note: Fully confirmed)
Illegal distribution of US nuclear material to foreign allies was not limited to Israel. Virtually all NATO allies were in on this scam too. Dick Cheney was the bad guy on this one. Bush2/Cheney traded nuclear pits to foreign country as IOU’s in order to get what they wanted. Tom Countryman a well-known Israeli operative is curiously now in charge of N.N.P. at the State Department under Obama.(?) He was put there by Ram Emanuel.
Early Israeli core model
It appears that the weapon of choice for the Israelis were the W-54 and follow on series of nuclear pits taken from the Amarillo TX storage dump. This was what Carnaberry was working on for Bush senior in Houston.
A total of over 350 pits were transferred to the Israelis over a 10 to 20 year period of time. The W-54 type of pit design were the most desirable due to the 2 point implosion pit design.
This is the easiest to re manufacture and modify as compared to other circular pit designs.
The pill shaped design of the W-54 type weapon contains over 1.5 times more plutonium than a standard pit. This would allow enough Plutonium to be recovered that was still of weapons grade use even after 32 plus years of age.
Americium build up in the pit over time eventually makes the Pit unusable as a weapon so they have a limited shelf life based on how fast or slow the Plutonium was produce in the reactor at Stanford.
Usually it was about 150 days max. Irradiation time in the reactor during production determines the shelf life of the pit as weapons grade material. All of the micro nukes used by the Israelis are re-manufactured W-54 type series devices.
Khazelov confirmed this a micro nuke bombing
These devices were used in the Bali bombing and the London bombing and in Japan on their reactors. (Editor’s note: Nuclear weapon use in Bali confirmed) Also used in Damascus, Iraq and Afghanistan by the US. (Editor’s note: Multiple confirmation including site samples.)
These are stored in most Israelite embassies for ease of deployment. The one’s used on 911 were kept at the Israeli consulate in NYC until put in place. After 911 the FBI now checks all diplomatic pouches with a Geiger counter before entering or leaving the US.
The South African weapons were also surplus W-54 artillery shells acquired from Israeli and final assembly and testing was done in South Africa with Israel assistance. (Editor’s note: This explains Pelendaba production issues.)
Note the melted rock under the foundations of the WTC in the two images above - this can only be caused by the extremely intense heat generated in a nuclear detonation
This was done because the Israelis needed a testing ground in order to make sure that there rebuilt weapons would work as designed. (Editor’s note: Testing on Sept. 22, 1979 multiple confirmations.) The North Korean weapons are also of the 155 mm artillery design as provided by Israel.
The true North Korean nuclear weapons program is based on nuclear artillery use and not missiles. The plan is to use a massive artillery barge on South Korea if war breaks out this include the use of small nuclear artillery shells to counter US tanks rockets and artillery.
The Saudi’s also have a stash of W-54′s acquired from the US under Bush2. (Editor’s note: Confirmed) The Israelis have also provided them to India, Brazil, China, Taiwan, Japan, North and South Korea etc. (Editor’s note: All but South Korea confirmed. Canada had been believed to be the source of Brazilian nuclear weapons.) Dimona is a standard 75 megawatt thermal open top reactor as used in France for their plutonium weapons production program, their version of Stanford (Editor’s note: Probably “Hanford”).
Dismona, Israel
Due to over use as a fast breeder reactor by the Israelis, Dimona suffered a “steam explosion” IE a flash over indecent due to neutron criticality back in the late 1980′s under Bush 1. This shut down its operation for many years until repairs could be made.
It know only operates at very low power levels due to neutron absorption damage to the containment vessel. Now mainly use for isotope production. This forced the Israelis to turn to stolen nuclear stock piles from the US for the continuation of their nuclear program.
The Israelis knowing that the nuclear material that they had acquire only had a limited shelf life left before it was no longer usable as weapons grade then tried to dump it on the surplus market as fast as possible before it was of no use to them. So they dumped it on unsuspecting nations who would only sit on it and not be able to test it. These were the fissile tests in North Korea. (Editor’s note: Confirmed, multiple sources)
When everybody caught on to the scam such as Japan and Korea. (IE the Korean sub sinkings etc) they were angry because they paid big bucks for junk. This started a mini cold war with Israel and her old clients. However with micro nukes even as the plutonium ages it will still fissile producing a smaller size detonation well under 2 kiloton in size.
So they can still be used as small dirty bombs or as very small tactical nukes such as the nuclear artillery strikes on Damascus with rocket assisted W-54′s. (Editor’s note: Confirmed strike, May 4, 2013) On the W-54 pit design it is pill shaped and it is only about 4 inches in diameter and weighs about 24 pounds.
Most of the fuel is consumed in the plasma fire ball when detonated so there is very little plutonium fallout left to escape. If it is salted with other materials the fallout can be even reduced to lower levels such as in an enhanced radiation device or the so called neutron bomb. This is what was used on 911.
The primary purpose of the nuclear weapon used on 911 was to produce a massive Gamma ray / neutron flux that would vaporize about 150 to 300 feet of 6 inch thick steal I-beams that constituted the central core of the WTC buildings. This created a free fall event as seen on TV that day.
Evidence was also found of demolition charges being placed on an angle on key structural suports. This was confirmed by demolition experts as being a technique used to generate a free-fall demolition within a buildings own footprint
The flash would be hidden from sight due to the underground detonation. Most of the light was in the non-visible light spectrum any way. Over pressure would be reduced to 6 psi due to the blast traveling up the central core and neutron radiation vaporizing the TV antenna at the top of the building as see on TV.
The fallout would be mainly vaporized concrete cement and iron oxide. This is why after 911 they told everyone on TV that the beta radiation burns that people were getting were due to the caustic cement dust and not due to the radiation effects from the radioactive cement fallout. (Editor’s note: Fully confirmed)
The iron oxide found all over the place was what was left of the steel I beams. This was the so called Nano Thermite that was found everywhere. Fallout was limited to a 1 mile area around down town NYC. See charts. (Editor’s note: Received)
Radiation decay was reduced to safe low levels after 72 hrs., (Editor’s note: Fully confirmed) outside of ground zero its self. This is why the area was blocked off from the public for 3 days after the event, in order to let the radiation drop to safe levels.
If you read this excerpt closely, you can clearly see that Russia means business. It is what they did not say - directly - that makes this data-dump so poignant … and dangerous to the Anglo-American power structure.
If the story that the US government told us about 9/11 were true, why did the government destroy the evidence, lie to the 9/11 Commission, and prevent a real investigation?
The clear and indisputable answer is that if the evidence had not been destroyed and a real investigation had occurred, the conclusion would have been that 9/11 was an inside job designed to give the neoconservatives their “new Pearl Harbor” necessary to launch their wars in the Middle East.
The extraordinary gullibility of the American people is responsible for 15 years of warfare, destroyed countries, and millions of dead, maimed, orphaned, and displaced people, and for the rise of a police state in the United States. The ignorance and gullibility of the American people are responsible for these massive crimes against humanity and for Americans’ loss of their constitutionall protections.
Presumption of a Cover-Up …
Judges and lawyers know that – if someone intentionally destroys evidence – he’s probably trying to hide his crime. American law has long recognized that destruction of evidence raises a presumption of guilt for the person who destroyed the evidence.
So what does it mean when the US government intentionally destroyed massive amounts of evidence related to 9/11?
(The Defense Department has also farmed out most of the work of both prosecuting and defending the surviving 9/11 suspects to the same private company. And the heads of the military tribunal prosecuting the 9/11 suspects said that the trials must be rigged so that there are no acquittals.)
“Daniel Marcus, a law professor at American University who served as general counsel for the Sept. 11 commission and was involved in the discussions about interviews with Al Qaeda leaders, said he had heard nothing about any tapes being destroyed."
If tapes were destroyed, he said, “it’s a big deal, it’s a very big deal,” because it could amount to obstruction of justice to withhold evidence being sought in criminal or fact-finding investigations."
The 9/11 Commissioners concluded that officials from the Pentagon lied to the Commission, and considered recommending criminal charges for such false statements.
Soviet-Style “Minders”
The chairs of both the 9/11 Commission and the Official Congressional Inquiry into 9/11 said that Soviet-style government “minders” obstructed the investigation into 9/11 by intimidating witnesses (and see this).
In other words, the minders obstructed witnesses from openly and candidly talking about what they knew.
This executive director, who controlled what the Commission did and did not analyze, then limited the scope of the Commission’s inquiry so that the overwhelming majority of questions about 9/11 remained unasked (see this and this).
The administration then starved the commission of funds. The government spent $175 million – over $300 million in today’s dollars – investigating the Challenger space shuttle disaster. It spent $152 million on the the Columbia disaster investigation. It spent $30 million investigating the Monica Lewinsky scandal. But the government only authorized $15 million for the 9/11 Commission.
Moreover, as reported by ACLU, FireDogLake, RawStory and many others, declassified documents shows that Senior Bush administration officials sternly cautioned the 9/11 Commission against probing too deeply into the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001.
The 9-11 Commission took this warning to heart, and refused to examine virtually any evidence which contradicted the administration’s official version of events. As stated by the State Department’s Coordinator for Counterterrorism – who was the point man for the U.S. government’s international counterterrorism policy in the first term of the Bush administration – “there were things the [9/11] commissions wanted to know about and things they didn’t want to know about.“
Saudi Role
Investigation into Saudi government aid to 9/11 conspirators was also obstructed.
For example, Philip Shenon – the 20-year New York Times reporter who wrote a book on the 9/11 Commission – reports:
“The [911] commissioner said the renewed public debate could force a spotlight on a mostly unknown chapter of the history of the 9/11 commission: behind closed doors, members of the panel’s staff fiercely protested the way the material about the Saudis was presented in the final report, saying it underplayed or ignored evidence that Saudi officials – especially at lower levels of the government – were part of an al-Qaida support network that had been tasked to assist the hijackers after they arrived in the US.
In fact, there were repeated showdowns, especially over the Saudis, between the staff and the commission’s hard-charging executive director, University of Virginia historian Philip Zelikow, who joined the Bush administration as a senior adviser to the secretary of state, Condoleezza Rice, after leaving the commission.
The staff included experienced investigators from the FBI, the Department of Justice and the CIA, as well as the congressional staffer who was the principal author of the 28 pages.
Zelikow fired a staffer, who had repeatedly protested over limitations on the Saudi investigation, after she obtained a copy of the 28 pages outside of official channels.
Other staffers described an angry scene late one night, near the end of the investigation, when two investigators who focused on the Saudi allegations were forced to rush back to the commission’s offices after midnight after learning to their astonishment that some of the most compelling evidence about a Saudi tie to 9/11 was being edited out of the report or was being pushed to tiny, barely readable footnotes and endnotes.
The staff protests were mostly overruled.
***
But Kean, Hamilton and Zelikow clearly do not speak for a number of the other commissioners, who have repeatedly suggested they are uncomfortable with the perception that the commission exonerated Saudi Arabia and who have joined in calling for public release of the 28 pages."
Indeed, an FBI informant hosted and rented a room to two hijackers in 2000. Specifically, investigators for the Congressional Joint Inquiry discovered that an FBI informant had hosted and even rented a room to two hijackers in 2000 and that, when the Inquiry sought to interview the informant, the FBI refused outright, and then hid him in an unknown location, and that a high-level FBI official stated these blocking maneuvers were undertaken under orders from the White House.
“Senator Bob Graham, the Florida Democrat who is a former chairman of the Senate Intelligence Committee, accused the White House on Tuesday of covering up evidence.
The accusation stems from the Federal Bureau of Investigation’s refusal to allow investigators for a Congressional inquiry and the independent Sept. 11 commission to interview an informant, Abdussattar Shaikh, who had been the landlord in San Diego of two Sept. 11 hijackers."
The former head of fire science and engineering for the agency responsible for finding out why the Twin Towers and World Trade Center 7 collapsed on 9/11 (the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology) – who is one of the world’s leading fire science researchers and safety engineers, with a Ph.D. in mechanical engineering – wrote that evidence necessary to determine the cause of the collapse of the World Trade Centers was being destroyed. And see this.
The government has also refused to release the computer models showing how the trade centers fell, making it impossible for anyone to double-check its assumptions.
Whether you believe the Twin Towers and World Trade Center building 7 were brought down with explosives or by airplanes and fires, destroying evidence prevented engineers and scientists from figuring out what went wrong… to prevent skyscrapers from collapsing in the future.
9/11 Commissioners Disgusted… and Call For a New Investigation
The 9/11 Commissioners publicly expressed anger at cover ups and obstructions of justice by the government into a real 9/11 investigation:
The Senior Counsel to the 9/11 Commission (John Farmer) – who led the 9/11 staff’s inquiry – said “At some level of the government, at some point in time…there was an agreement not to tell the truth about what happened“. He also said “I was shocked at how different the truth was from the way it was described. The tapes told a radically different story from what had been told to us and the public for two years. This is not spin. This is not true.”
The Co-Chair of the congressional investigation into 9/11 – Bob Graham – and 9/11 Commissioner and former Senator Bob Kerrey are calling for either a “PERMANENT 9/11 commission” or a new 9/11 investigation to get to the bottom of it
9/11 Commissioner John Lehman says that a new investigation should be “vigorously pursued“
Planting False Evidence
Planting false evidence is another act which creates presumption of guilt.
Much of the 9/11 Commission Report was based upon the testimony of people who were tortured
At least four of the people whose interrogation figured in the 9/11 Commission Report have claimed that they told interrogators information as a way to stop being “tortured”
One of the Commission’s main sources of information was tortured until he agreed to sign a confession that he was NOT EVEN ALLOWED TO READ
The 9/11 Commission itself doubted the accuracy of the torture confessions, and yet kept their doubts to themselves
Pulitzer-prize winning reporter Seymour Hersh – who broke the Iraq torture and Vietnam massacre stories – writes:
“Many of the investigators believe that some of the initial clues that were uncovered about the terrorists’ identities and preparations, such as flight manuals, were meant to be found.
A former high-level intelligence official told me, “Whatever trail was left was left deliberately - for the F.B.I. to chase“.
I Am A Syrian Living In Syria: “It Was Never A Revolution Nor A Civil War: The Terrorists Are Sent By Your Government” September 10 2016 | From: GlobalResearch
"Your Obama and whoever is behind him or above him are supporting al Qaeda and leading a proxy war on my country. We thought you are against al Qaeda and now you support them."
Two years ago, “Majd” wrote these words on a Facebook posting:
“I am Syrian… living in Syria in the middle of everything. We have seen horrors. It was never a revolution nor a civil war. The terrorists are sent by your goverment.
They are al Qaeda Jabhat al Nusra Wahhabi Salafists Talibans etc and the like extremists jihadists sent by the West and the Saudis and Qatar and Turkey.
Your Obama and whoever is behind him or above him are supporting al Qaeda and leading a proxy war on my country. We thought you are against al Qaeda and now you support them.
The majority here loves Assad. He has never committed a crime against his own people…the chemical attack was staged by the terrorists helped by USA and UK etc..everyone knows that here. American soldiers and people should not be supporting barbarian al Qaeda terrorists who are killing Christians, Muslims in my country and everyone.
Every massacre has committed by them. We were all happy in Syria= we have free school and university education available for everyone, free healthcare, no GMO, no fluoride, no chemtrails, no Rothschild IMF- controlled bank, state owned central bank which gives 11% interest, we are self-sufficient and have no foreign debt to any country or bank.
Life before the crisis was so beautiful here. Now it is hard and horrific in some regions.
I do not understand how the good and brave American people can accept to bomb my country who has never harmed them and therefore help the barbarian al Qaeda . These animals slit throats and behead for pleasure… they behead babies and rape young kids.
They are satanic. Our military helped.by the millions of civilian militias are winning the battle against al Qaeda..but now the usa want to bomb the shit out of us so the al Qaeda can get the upper hand .
Please help us American people. They are destroying the cradle of civilization. Stop your government.
Impeach that bankster puppet ape you have as president… support Ron Paul or Rand or anyone the like who are true American patriots. but be sure of one.thing..
if they attack and I think they will….it will be hell.
Be sure that it be world war and many many will die. Syria can and will defend itself and will sink many US ships. Iran will go to war..Russia and China eventually if it escalates… and all this for what ? For the elites who created al Qaeda through the US gvt and use it to conduct proxy wars and destabilize countries who do not go along with their new world order agenda !!!?!!
American people…you gotta regain control of your once admirable country. Now everyone hates you for.the.death you bring almost everywhere.
Ask the Iraqis…the Afghans…the Pakistanis…the Palestinians…the Syrians…the Macedonians and Serbs…the Libyans…the Somalis…the Yemenis ….all the ones you kill with drones everyday. Stop your wars stop wars. Enough wars. Use diplomacy..dialogue…help..not force.”
Consistent testimonies from Syrians, as well as well-documented, open-source Western sources, and historical memory, all serve to reinforce the accuracy of the aforementioned testimony.
Syrians are living the horror brought to them by the criminal West. They can not afford the complacency of shrugging their shoulders in indecision, not when their lives and their ancient civilization is being threatened by Western-paid terrorist mercenaries of the worst kind.
“Our” proxies, slit throats, chop heads, and take no prisoners as we waffle in indecision, ignore empirical evidence, and take the comfortable easy road of believing the labyrinth of lies promulgated by Western media messaging.
The veil of comfortable confusion, nested in an unconscious belief that our government knows best or that it is patriotic to believe the lies and fabrications implicit in the hollow words of politicians (who no longer represent us) and the false pronouncements of Imperial messengers, is concealing an overseas holocaust.
Western societies are rotting from the inside out because of these lies and this barbarity. We are protecting a criminal cabal of corporate globalists who do not serve our interests and never will.
Our democracies, which we should be protecting, have long disappeared – except in the hollow words of newspaper stenographers. Instead we are supporting transnational corporate elites and their delusional projects.
Poverty and disemployment are all soaring beneath the fakery of government pronouncements, as the public domain evaporates beneath words like “efficiency” or the “economy” - all false covers that serve to enrich elites and destroy us. Internal imperialism at home is a faded replica of the foreign imperialism abroad.
As countries are destroyed, and its peoples are slaughtered - think Syria, Libya, Ukraine, and others - by abhorrent Western proxies - public institutions are contaminated, and ultimately replaced by parasitical “privatized” facsimiles.
Public banking is looted and destroyed in favour of transnational banksterism, World Bank funding, and IMF usury.
Food security is destroyed and replaced by biotech tentacles and engineered dependencies on cash crops and unhealthy food. Currencies are destroyed, sanctions are imposed, and the unknown, unseen hand of totalitarian control imposes itself, amidst the cloud of diversions and confusions, aided by comprador regimes, oligarch interests, and shrugging domestic populations.
Syria refuses to submit. That is why the West is taught to hate her, and the rest of the world learns to love and respect her.
Yet, Syria’s struggles are our struggles. Syria represents international law, stability, and integrity: the same values that western peoples overtly cherish but stubbornly reject, as our countries wilt beneath suffocating veils of lies and delusions.
I support Syria, because I respect what remains of international law.
I support Syria because I reject Wahhabism, Sharia law, and terrorism.
I support Syria because I reject the undemocratic, transnational oligarchies that are subverting our once flourishing, now dead, democracies.
I reject the lies of our propagandizing media, the hollow words of our politicians, and the fake “humanitarian” messaging that demonizes non-belligerent countries and their populations.
In the name of justice, humanity, and the rule of law, I support the elected government of Syria led by its President, Bashar al-Assad. Syria, an ancient cradle of civilization, is leading the way towards a better future for all of us.
The Tide Is Turning: The Official Story Is Now The Conspiracy Theory + A Conference To Clear The Mind Of The 9/11 Brainwashing September 10 2016 | From: PaulCraigRoberts
Tomorrow it will be the 15th anniversary of 9/11, and this November 22 will be the 53rd anniversary of the assassination of President John F. Kennedy in Dallas, Texas. These two state crimes against democracy destroyed American democracy, accountable government, and the Constitution’s protections of civil liberty.
Years after the damage done by these events the American people no longer believe the official stories. Neither does the government, but the government will never validate the distrust that Americans now share of the oligarchs’ government by acknowledging the truth.
The official explanation of the assassination of President Kennedy never made any sense. Videos of the assassination contradicted the official story, as did witnesses, and many credible people challenged the government’s story.
The CIA was faced with the official explanation becoming unglued and launched its media program stigmatizing doubters as “conspiracy theorists.”
Related:Are You A Mind-Controlled CIA Stooge? The CIA’s psych warfare against the public succeeded at the time and for a number of years during which witnesses had mysterious deaths and the trail grew cold. But by the late 1970s there was so much public skepticism of the official story that the US Congress took the risk of being labeled “conspiracy kooks.”
The House Select Committee on Assassinations reopened the inquiry into JFK’s murder. The House Committee concluded that the Warren Commission’s investigation was seriously flawed, that there was more than one person firing at President Kennedy and that there was a conspiracy to assassinate JFK.
The corrupt US Department of Justice (sic) contradicted the House Select Committee’s report. However, the American people believed the Select Committee and not the corrupt Justice (sic) Department, which never tells the truth about anything.
By 2013 polls showed that most Americans are “conspiracy kooks” who do not believe the official government line on JFK’s assassination. So with regard to JFK’s assassination, the “conspiracy theorists” are in the majority. The minority are the Americans who cannot escape their brainwashing. Related: Poll: 62 percent believe broader plot killed Kennedy In a few days it will be the 15th anniversary of the alleged al Qaeda attack on the World Trade Center and Pentagon, and we are witnessing the fading protection that the charge of “conspiracy theorist” provides for the officlal government story. Indeed, the official 9/11 story is collapsing before our eyes.
Europhysics, the respected publicaton of the European physics community has pubished an article by scientists who conclude that:
“The evidence points overwhelmingly to the conclusion that all three [World Trade Center] buildings were destroyed by controlled demolition.”
Few American scientists can admit this, because their careers depend on US government and military/security complex research contracts. Independent scientists in the US are a vanishing breed, an endangered species.
The scientists say that in view of their findings, “it is morally imperative” that 9/11 “be the subject of a truly scientific and impartial investigation by responsible authorities.
So now we are faced with a peculiar situation. The scientifically ignorant two-bit punk American presstitutes claim to know more than the editors of the journal of the European physics community and the scientists who did the investigation.
Don’t you think it farfetched that ignorant, corrupt, and cowardly American journalists who lie for money know more than physicists, chemists, 2,700 high-rise architects and structural engineers who have called on the US Congress to launch a real investigation of 9/11, firefighters and first responders who were on the WTC scene, military and civilian pilots and former high government officials, all of whom are on record challenging the unbelievable and physically impossible official story of 9/11?
What kind of a dumbshit moron does a person have to be to believe that the United States government and its media whores know better than the laws of physics?
The ability of the presstitutes to influence Americans seems to be on the decline. The media ganged up on Donald Trump during the Republican primaries, intending to deny Trump the nomination.
But the voters ignored the presstitutes. In the current presidential campaign, Hillary is not the run-away winner that the presstitutes are trying to make her. And despite the propaganda ministry, the legs under the official 9/11 story are wobbly, to say the least.
Indeed, the official 9/11 story already has lost credibility with the American public. Last April a Rasmussen Poll found that “Americans doubt they’ve been told all the facts about the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks on the United States and strongly believe the government should come clean.”
A YouGov poll in 2013 found that 50 percent of Americans “have doubts about the government’s account of 9/11,” which shows that the public is far more intelligent and less corrupt than the presstitutes who are paid to lie to the public.
This poll also found that as a consequence of the cover-up job performed by the American presstitutes, 46 percent of Americans were not even aware that a third WTC building, Building 7, collapsed on September 11. After viewing films of WTC 7’s collapse, 46 percent saw it as a controlled demolition.
By a margin of two to one, poll respondants support a new investigation of Building 7’s collapse.
So, in America today “conspiracy kooks” outnumber those who believe the official lies.
As the official lies are themselves conspiracy theories, Americans who disbelieve the official conspiracy theories outnumber Americans who believe official conspiracy theories.
The question is: who are the real conspiracy kooks, the majority who disbelieve the official lies or the minority who believe the official lies?
It is curious that the CIA’s psych-op mind-controll has broken down in the cases of the JFK assassination and 9/11, but is still effective in more recently orchestrated events, such as San Bernardino, Orlando, Paris, and Nice. Perhaps this is because not enough time has passed for the public to pay attention to the vast difference between the stories and the evidence.
The Internet offers many refutations of the official accounts. With regard to Nice, France, the Nice police officials themselves are having problems with the official story. The French Anti-Terrorist Sub-Directorate in Paris has ordered the public authorities in Nice to delete the video recordings from security cameras of the “Nice Terror Truck Attack.” The Nice authorities refused on the grounds that this would be destruction of criminal evidence.
This story has disappeared from the news. I have asked friends in France how this conflict was resolved and have not heard anything. The French like to live life well and faced with the refugees from Washington’s wars, they seem to be focused on living life well while it can be done. If I hear anything, I will pass it on.
Apparently, the order to delete the video evidence of the “attack” was not sufficient for the French Ministry of the Interior. According to a senior Nice police officer, Sandra Bertin, the Interior Ministry pressured her to falsify her police report on the Nice “truck massacre.”
Officer Bertin told the Journal du Dimanche that “he ordered me to put in [the report] the specific positions of the national police which I had not seen on the screen.”
The Interior Minister, Bernard Cazeneuve is suing the Nice police official for “defamation,” as if it is possible to defame any politician anywhere in the corrupt West.
Moreover, why would a senior Nice official make up a story about being ordered to change a report? It doesn’t make any sense, does it? Clearly, the central government is trying to hide the evidence against the official story.
Watch this video and ignore the narrator’s four-letter vocabulary.
What you will learn is that all those people you saw running in the presstitute TV reports had no idea why they were running. The presstitutes created the impression that they were running away from the truck.
However, as the interviews show, they were running because other people were running, because the police told them “terrorists, run,” and because they heard shots (apparently police firing blanks). Those interviewed reported;
“You run with them even though you have no idea what you are running from. You can’t help it, you run with them.”
None of those running away ever saw a truck.
According to the foul-mouthed narrator, the film of the people running away was taken prior to the time the truck allegedly mowed down 185 people, killing 85 of them.
The narrator appears to be correct if the time stamps on videos are correct. The narrator says the streets needed to be cleared for the crisis actors to put on their show that is used to control our minds about what happened.
I have pointed out that a truck that hit 185 people, killing 85 of them would be covered in blood and that bodies would be splattered all over the street with blood everywhere. Yet, the photos and videos that we are shown show no such evidence. The stopped truck on which police are directing gunfire is as white as snow.
Independently of the vast analysis online of the video evidence of the alleged “Nice attack,” I suspect the Nice “terror attack” for the same reason that the Pentagon attack is suspect.
Despite all the contrary evidence against the official stories, the authorities refuse to release the video evidence that, if it shows what the authorities claim, would shut up the skeptics and prove the official story.
When a government claims it has video evidence that proves its official story but refuses to release it, indeed, demands the destruction of the video evidence, we know for an absolute fact that the video evidence totally contradicts the official story. That is the only possible conclusion.
My readers will write to me asking how the government expects to get away with its faked, and in the case of 9/11 false flag, terror orchestrations?
The answer, perhaps, is that just as it took a long time for the JFK assassination and 9/11 lies to catch up with the government, the recent orchestrations will also take some time for a slowly awakening public to catch on.
In the meantime the orchestrated events will serve the agendas that they are intended to serve, and by the time that the public sees through the orchestrations, a new situation will be in place with new orchestrations.
Keep in mind that the public thinks it is shown evidence.
Newspapers need photos to give a visual dimension to their coverage, and TV needs videos of the events. News organizations are under a time pressure, and they have to use what they are handed or what is at hand. There is no time to scrutinize the visual material or to raise questions about it.
Most of the public thinks that the photos and videos shown to them are evidence or would not be shown and accepts the visual evidence without question. In an earlier column I linked to the vast array of Nice photos provided in the UK Daily Mail. The photos show a calm situation.
There are a few people lying in the street without any sign of bodily damage or blood and there are covered objects that the public assumes are dead people. But the streets are devoid of the splattered blood and mangled bodies that would be the consequence of a truck hitting 185 people.
Similarly, we have been shown very few videos and their origin is unknown except for the one attributed to Richard Gutjahr who was apparently pre-positioned to film inconclusively both the Nice and German “terror attacks.”
Online analysis of the videos shows that the videos are not evidence for the storyline. The real question is why the French Interior Minister has prevented the release and demanded destruction of the security camera videos that filmed the entire event, an order that brought the central government in Paris in conflict with the public authorities in Nice.
There has been no US media interest whatsoever in this very strange event. It is not a “conspiracy theory” to ask why the public cannot see the video evidence that shows what actually happened.
What agenda is served by the Paris and Nice attacks? This is the question everyone should be asking and the media, if we had one, should be investigating. With the information currently available to me, my answer is this. Of all the peoples of Western Europe, the French are the most independently minded. French independence has taken a number of recent hits from Washington:
The largest French bank was forced to hand over $9 billion to Washington for doing business with a country on Washington’s disapproval list.
Washington forced France to cancel a lucrative ship-building program for Russia, to the detriment of French companies and shipyard workers.
Washington has forced France into a diplomatic conflict with Russia that the French do not want and into a looming military conflict which the French want even less, as the conflict would mean the vaporization of France. As one Russian SS-18 can wipe out three-fourths of the state of New York, how many do you think it would take to wipe France off of the face of the Earth? Not even a handful.
Keep in mind that in 1966 President Charles de Gaulle pulled France out of NATO on the grounds that it was necessary to preserve French independence in world affairs. France did not again submit to Washington’s control until 2009 when Washington-owned Nicolas Sarkozy, put into the French presidency by Washington’s money, followed his orders and rejoined NATO.
The Paris and Nice orchestrated events serve to scare France back into Washington’s arms. Dreams of independence become nightmares when independence leaves the French people at the mercy of both terrorists and Russians. Washington, who owns Sarkozy, who is once again Washington’s candidate for president of France, intends to keep France in NATO.
The article in Europhysics pointing out the impossibility of the official 9/11 story could possibly lead to a rebirth of skepticism among Europeans. Only a skeptical media willing to investigate government storylines can bring a halt to the staged terror events that serve secret agendas.
Keep in mind that the US government has plentiful video evidence of the 9/11 attack on the Pentagon but refuses to release the evidence that it says support its story.
Similarly, the French federal government has prohibited Nice authorities from releasing the security camera videos of the Nice truck attack and has ordered the video evidence destroyed. How can we believe governments that refuse to show us the hard evidence?
A Conference To Clear The Mind Of The 9/11 Brainwashing
If any of my readers are still brainwashed about 9/11, they need to attend this conference. Tickets are still available.
A 2-Day Symposium | Sept. 10-11, 2016 | Cooper Union New York City
Fifteen years after the events of 9/11, wars and cultural conflicts caused by the U.S. response and questionable alliances continue to create global tensions. Furthermore, questions of how the attacks took place continue to surface. For these reasons, a historic event highlighting the blatant discrepancies of the official narrative will be held to critique science-based evidence of the most consequential event of our time.
A stellar lineup of credentialed experts will also review new evidence of a cover up such as is revealed in the declassification of the 28 pages, and raise the bar – literally, with an unprecedented level of legal analysis. As you’ll see, this event has an international component, since 9/11 was such a world-changing event. Full details and tickets are at www.911justiceinfocus.org.
The Day 1 Program will feature:
Keynote address by renowned public interest attorney, Daniel Sheehan, who litigated the Pentagon Papers case, the Karen Silkwood case, Iran/Contra scandal, and Three Mile Island.
Keynote address by Judge Ferdinand Imposimato, head of the Supreme Court of Italy, with experience prosecuting conspiratorial crimes, notably Operation Gladio.
Richard Gage, AIA, founder of Architects & Engineers For 9/11 Truth, which currently has over 2,600 professionals from the building trades as signatories
. Professor Leroy Hulsey, from the University of Alaska, who is conducting a unique, unbiased, independent modeling of the collapse of WTC 7.
Unique analysis of ISIS, the latest on the secret 28 pages and related legislation which has begun to reveal the official deceptions and questionable geopolitical alliances to the widest audience ever reached in this 15-year effort.
The 9/11 Truth Action Project – the next level of national organizing.
Speakers include:
Government whistleblowers – Wayne Madsen, former NSA analyst, and J. Michael Springmann, former State Department foreign services officer.
TV news personality, media critic, and attorney known as “Lionel.”
Bob McIlvaine, 9/11 family member.
Dylan Avery, creator of the globally renown 9/11 documentary “Loose Change.”
Master of Ceremony will be Mark Crispin Miller, professor of Media, Culture and Communication at New York University.
For the Day 2 Program there will be a sequence of legal presentations analyzing key strategies and many yet-unaddressed evidentiary issues. These include:
Presentation of Legal Standards and Key Evidence.
9/11 Related Litigation to Date.
Pending and Planned FOIA Requests, Appeals, and Litigation.
Future U.S. Litigation Options.
Potential for an International Investigation.
Speakers include:
Public interest attorney , Daniel Sheehan.
Judge Ferdinand Imposimato, Honorary President of the Supreme Court of Italy.
Mick Harrison, whistleblower litigation expert.
William Veale and Mustapha Ndanusa, attorneys for April Gallop, Pentagon survivor.
David Meiswinkle, New Jersey litigator and former police officer.
Barbara Honegger, State Department whistleblower, author of “October Surprise.”
Andrew Kreig, journalist and attorney.
Engineers – David Chandler, Jonathan Cole, Tony Szamboti.
Architect – Richard Gage, AIA.
Master of Ceremony will be Dr. William Pepper, international civil rights attorney, litigator for the family of Martin Luther King, and author of “Act of State”.
Why should you attend this powerful event? Since justice and rule of law is the foundation of any civilized society, the commitment to face all the facts of 9/11 will empower us as a culture to move forward and re-establish our position of trust and integrity in the world. In so many ways, our future depends on it. Make plans today.
Sept. 10 & 11, 2015 | 10am – 6:30pm | Cooper Union,
7 East 7th Street, Manhattan
(7th St. and 3rd Avenue)
Does John Key Run The NZ Meth Trade? September 9 2016 | From: MediaWhores
Meth has never been so big in New Zealand, and John Key is the man pretending to lead the Country – so this seems like a fair question in our view, does John Key run the NZ meth industry?
Lets look at the evidence: New Zealand now has one of the highest meth usage rates in the World.
Obviously meth was introduced here prior to the bankers putting their puppet John Key in power, but it has grown and grown under the John Key regime, presumably because the John key regime wants it that way.
New Zealand has very easy borders to protect, being a small island Nation. There is no cocaine flooding the streets of NZ, because the shadow Government/ bankers do not want cocaine flooding the streets.
Same goes for ecstasy and other drugs, if the shadow government do not want it here, it is policed and kept out.
They even do a pretty good job policing marijuana, a weed that can be grown in the backyard, investing 10’s of millions each year in helicopters and police pulling out those plants Nationwide.
Somehow though they just can’t seem to be able to keep out the meth, or the precursors to make meth. Strange isn’t it?
Meth is obviously a huge business, not just in the estimated $50 million each week generated in cash sales, but it also creates a huge state / Crown run business in terms of policing, mental health, WINZ (the government’s biggest business), courts and jails.
An estimated $900 million generated in burglaries, crime, policing, court and jails each year as a direct result of the meth trade in NZ. Not to mention the insurance companies who make a killing off the burglaries and ever increasing premiums.
Its big big business, and the last thing the Crown wants, is for it to end.
Indeed in recent years the Nazi like government of John Key, along with all the other puppet Zionist regimes controlling the Western World, have implemented sweeping new spy laws which gives them the ‘right’ to spy on their own citizens.
Cell phone towers in every neighborhood pick up all text messages and cell phone calls made in that region, and the police & GCSB now have software which can go through and pick up any keywords they plug into the system e.g. meth, bag, hundy bag, point, puff, fire, burn, pipe, gram etc etc.
Not to mention the ability to categorize and identify those who regularly send strange text messages all night – another indication of possible meth dealers. Yet with all of those new spy laws and technology, the Government can’t seem to get the problem under control.
Ridiculous isn’t it. They could be doing huge busts everyday with that technology and quickly clean up every major dealer in every town – but they clearly choose not to.
Because business is good!
So clearly the state is allowing the meth trade in NZ – if not directly encouraging it via their WINZ payments and by allowing the same dairies Nationwide to sell the glass pipes for the past 15 + years – but that alone is not evidence that John Key runs the meth trade.
So is there any real evidence of this?
The Government clearly allows the meth trade, but could John Key be the man actually running it?
Numerous stories have made it clear that the Auckland Casino is a central hub for meth trafficking and money laundering – the Casino being one of John Key’s favorite projects, giving them tax cuts, funding and special grants to build bigger and bigger. Key is also a regular to the place, where many of NZ’s biggest meth lords gather to buy and sell and launder their profits.
Many of these meth lords are Chinese of course, and we all know John Key does a lot of business with the Chinese, selling us out to them each week. We also see wealthy Chinese ‘businessmen’ paying off and bribing our pathetic corrupt Justice system these days.
Still- that is not hard evidence that John Key is running the meth trade in NZ. Lets look at more evidence.
The posts below came from a Facebook thread doing the rounds the other week (source withheld for obvious reasons - these bastards are very dangerous people).
“Meth in New Zealand: All the meth leaders who have gangs underneath are meeting in the elite VIP sky casino room like citizen tan in yesterday’s herald 11/20 of China’s most wanted are now in New Zealand like citizen tan.
Shun Key knows they are here because they pay $ to meet him and approve their visas.
Shun Key knows what they are doing also. You can’t tell me Shun Key didn’t know Dotcom existed. Why is shun key protecting Chinese meth leaders? The bust on northland beach was sacrificed to get people off what is really happening with meth and Chinese in VIP room at casino”
“Again Auckland VIP casino room is potentially the most powerful meeting room in the country because they own MPs politicians and control Chinese policy by buying national party!
So the national party not winston in my opinion set that meth bust up to get heat off with meth because you have to show the media some wins now and then Correct?”
“I don’t trust anything re Key – he knows about the Auckland vip casino – he knows about citizen bill spending $128m at casino in a year he could have shut him down and sent him to China then for extradition why didn’t he ? Because the govt is in bed with these meth pushers at VIP casino somehow.
A lot of them are China’s fugitives committing money fraud and cleaning their dirty money here in housing and meth ! Two very very profitably industries monopolized by these wealthy Chinese fugitives who use front men trusts etc and they are controlling it all, while the national government protect them and even represent them in the media.“
So that blogger seems pretty sure John Key is in with the Chinese meth gangs. Still - no hard evidence of such.
The record bust of meth in Northland mentioned in the above posts seemed to go nowhere didn’t it? There was talk of a few arrests, then no court trial we have heard of. If the police were doing their jobs they should have been able to clean up the whole ring, but don’t think they did.
Someone also reported that one of the cars pulled up during that accidental bust was registered to the Masala restaurant chain. Winston Peters is apparently a good mate of many of those Indian businessmen, who are also famous for running visa and illegal worker scams. Perhaps the Indians are into the meth business also?
Seems everyone is really. Also interesting Winston Peters never mentioned NZ’s largest meth haul in his own electorate (having taken over post Mike Sabin). Perhaps Northland is the main gateway for the meth trade, and the bankers just put Winston in there to keep things going? Certainly strange he never mentioned it.
Perhaps someone should have searched Winston’s boat also?
And let’s not forget the previous top cop in Northland, Michael Blowers – in charge of the region’s “organised crime unit” lol – who stole millions of dollars of meth from a police evidence room and tried to sell it. What a bloody joke.
It seems fairly clear that meth is here because the establishment is hooked on – both the money and the actual drug. Fucking meth heads running the country.
And what about Mike Sabin?- Mike Sabin was the Government’s lead man in the “war on meth” via MethCon a government subsidized company.
Probably no accident they called it “Meth Con” in our view. Sabin was also chairman of the government’s powerful “Law and Order Select Committee” which meets with police each month to discuss problems and strategy.
He then went on to become the National MP for Northland but suddenly stepped down under a cloud of allegations and court appearances, all the details of which were suppressed. There was then a secret trial, more name suppression and eventually a promotion to a job running an International/ luxury gold course in the Far North, for a Chinese company.
The judiciary, media and government all did a stellar job keeping that whole story suppressed. Still – no hard evidence linking Mike Sabin to John Key and the meth trade. Just speculation and name suppression really.
Oddly enough, it was NZ author Greg Hallett who first said the NZ police and judiciary run the meth trade in NZ. This was before John Key came along, so perhaps it is possible that Key just took over the management of the meth trade from’ Hellin’ Clark (another criminal posing as a leader)? Lets look at that video...
Greg Hallett has also claimed online that Winston Peter’s was involved with the real Mr Asia – that being Peter Williams QC, and his heroin trafficking operations. No mention of Winston or John Key and the meth trade though.
So no hard evidence that it is John Key running it all – it appears more that it is the judiciary, Criminal Bar Association and the police who run the meth trade in NZ, and have done so since before John Key was placed here by the foreign bankers as a smiling dictator.
Having said that – it is impossible to think that John Key doesn’t know how the trade works and who is running it. Perhaps he even smokes it himself? His son Max Key has lost enough weight to be on meth, and his favorite DJ track is called “Cut me another line” (by his own admission).
Our conclusion is that there is reasonable grounds to suspect John Key is very close to the meth trade and meth traffickers operating in NZ – giving them a free pass to operate here and destroy our communities and Kiwi lives, because it is all just good business at the end of the day.
But we have no direct evidence yet that John Key is actually running the whole business.
Much like the Opium Wars in China, where the Zionist controlled British Government used opium to take over China and destroy their royal family, it seems clear that meth is being used to do the same in NZ - wiping out Kiwis and their communities while John Key sells everything off to the Chinese, on the instruction of his Zionist handlers – the Zionists being the people who have run the illicit drugs trades around the globe for at least the past 200 years… and John Key himself being a Zionist puppet leader in NZ.
And why are the Zionists selling NZ off to China you ask? Because it fits their globalization agenda, destroying all sovereign nations around the world, bringing them all under their new global corporate (fascist) control.
RIP #SarahHiggins, poor girl was mixing with the mafia.
But don’t panic – John Key had an alibi – he got his Son Max Key to film him cleaning his cars and put it online as soon as he heard the news .so he clearly had nothing to do with her death.
Left: Sarah Higgins and John Key.
Did The Neocon Criminal Cabal Just Send A Message To President Vladimir Putin? September 9 2016 | From: MilleniumReport
Vladimir Putin’s official car is involved in a head-on crash in Moscow which killed the Russian president’s ‘favourite chauffeur’.
The offending Mercedes Benz S Class
It’s not very often that the head of state of a superpower nation is sent such a dramatic and violent message.
That appears to have just happened with the killing of Russian President Vladimir Putin’s favorite chauffeur while he was driving the president’s official automobile.
Such an audacious threat to the life of President Putin can only be coordinated by an inside group of foreign secret service agents who have proxies operating within Moscow. Moscow is so large that the agents themselves may have planned and carried out the attack from right inside of the city.
In any event it is quite clear that those who reside at the peak of the pinnacle of the Anglo-American Axis (AAA) power pyramid will stop at nothing to control Russia and its destiny.
They know that as long as Putin remains at the helm of the Russian government, there is very little they can do to stealthily usurp the sovereignty of that nation. Nevertheless, they have continued to attempt to chip away at Russian territorial integrity by employing Islamic extremism and ISIS terrorism in countries that are located on the outskirts of the Russian Federation.
Putin's BMW 7 Series
The AAA leadership has shown time and again that they are populated by a number of criminally insane psychopaths who will stop at nothing until they have taken back Russia (they owned it once under the rubric of Soviet communism as the USSR). Now the same misguided cabal wants to take ownership again by way of a capitalistic political economy.
Through a combination of predatory capitalism, economic sanctions, monetary sabotage, financial terrorism, weather warfare, as well as strategically located unprovoked wars of aggression and jihadi terrorism, they are focused on bringing down the present government.
Is There Anything The Criminal Cabal Will Not Do?
Because of the grave state of the Global Economic & Financial System (GE&FS), those who control the underlying control matrix are in an extremely desperate condition. Although they have somehow been successful at artificially propping up the whole House of Cards for decades, there is now a mathematical certainty of a global collapse.
There is simply no stopping it.
Given the enormity and profundity of the coming breakdown (economic, financial and social), this misguided crowd is looking to steal everything in sight before anarchy takes over.
They know that there is no bigger prize than the Russian Motherland. Even as it shrunk substantially from its previous boundaries delineated by the borders of the old Soviet Union, Russia is still a humongous landmass.
From the Pacific Ocean to the Gulf of Finland, from the Arctic Ocean to the Caspian Sea, Russia is by far the largest country on Earth at over 17 million square km. That’s almost twice as large as Canada, China and the USA.
Much of the Russian Motherland is uninhabited and rich in natural resources. Oil and gas, gold and silver, uranium and coal, diamonds and various precious gems, timber and granite, marine life and other wildlife, are all available in great abundance.
Each of these is greatly coveted by the AAA cabal since they have sold most of their natural resource assets off since the very beginning of the Industrial Revolution.
Hence, they are making extremely desperate moves in every direction at the present moment, from deepening the Second Great Depression to triggering World War III. Taking out their arch-enemy Vladimir Putin, then, pales in comparison to the vast amount of death and destruction that they have already caused around the world.
The ongoing cold phase of WW3 has, in fact, produced pain and suffering on a massive scale. Because the global population is larger than ever, it is fair to say that the planet has never seen so much adversity on every continent.
Conclusion
Putin and his Kremlin team represent the greatest obstacle [or one of them at least] to the ever-unfolding New World Order agenda.
In fact the current round of unlawful economic sanctions by the U.S., Canada, EU member nations and others were instituted in order to target many of the key players in Putin’s inner circle.
The cabal’s immediate goal was to soften up as many Putin loyalists as possible thinking that some might leave the Russian establishment. However, they greatly underestimated the determination of the people of Russia to reassert their sovereignty and take back their power from the Western banksters.
This is why the cabal has now gotten much closer to Putin himself with the premeditated car crash.
With each passing month the Russian president upstages the AAA leaders, as he just did at the G20 meeting in China.
Not only did Putin make Obama look like a foolish child, he has continually won the chess games being played out on the global geopolitical chessboard since he first became prime minister. While Putin plays world-class chess, his Western counterparts look like they are barely playing checkers.
The bottom line here is that the Neocon criminal cabal is always willing to do something very stupid, regardless of the consequences.
Few geopolitical analysts truly understand that a cabal of criminally insane psychopaths will only mutually reinforce each other’s psychopathology until they collectively do something really stupid like start WW3, after plunging the entire planetary civilization into an even deeper phase of the 2nd Great Depression - unless We the People unite, arrest them, try them by jury on land jurisdiction, and incarcerate them,
Welcome to 2016! The year of the grand finale of “The Greatest Show on Earth”, taking place in real time and in living color on a TV set or computer screen near you.
Notes:
The reality here is that the ruling cabal has had the entire planet hardwired for millennia. As such they can perpetrate any crime, any time, any where and get away with it. Taking out Putin’s own chauffeur and personal conveyance is quite easy for them.
They know it. Putin knows it. They know that Putin knows it, and Putin knows that they know it.
Therefore, the real $64,000 question that must be asked is just how far will these perps go? They know Putin has a conscience. They’re also aware of his unusual magnanimity which they continually exploit by creating desperate situations around the world.
In this way, Putin commits himself to putting out one fire after another. Now the fire is very close to home… right down the road from the Kremlin itself. Therefore, it’s quite likely that things will get very ugly, before they get better.
Let’s face it, during the final decline and fall of the Anglo-American Empire anything goes. From 2016 onward, things will get even more unpredictable and surprising.
Some of those surprises will be very good for the 99%. Many of them will be very disheartening for the 1%. After all, the wealthy elites have everything to lose and very little to acquire, whereas the 99% have much to gain since they have already lost practically everything.
The critical point here is that Vladimir Putin has been held up extremely high by the Universe itself as a glowing example of detachment and grace under pressure.
As President of Russia, he just puts his head down, charges ahead and does his work. Putin knows all there is to know about the existential threats that he faces, that Russia faces and that the whole of civilization faces.
Yeah, he’s got access to the best intel in the world since Russian technology can systematically hack the NSA, CIA, DIA, etc. And yet he seems unfazed and yogically dispassionate even knowing what he knows.
Putin is also standing up quite well to all the assaults and attempted takedowns that are aimed at him and his nation. Perhaps it’s about time that the rest of the world followed his exemplary self-sacrifice and enlightened leadership, unparalleled equanimity and ever-present equipoise.
“The Anglo-American Axis is represented, first and foremost, by the major English-speaking countries of the world: USA, UK, Canada, Australia, New Zealand and Israel.
The European member nations of NATO, such as Germany, France, Italy, Spain, Portugal, Belgium, Luxembourg and the Netherlands are also closely aligned with the AAA as are all the Scandinavian countries.
So are the Asian Pacific Rim nations of Japan, South Korea, Taiwan and the Philippines. Saudi Arabia, Turkey, Egypt, Pakistan, Kuwait, Jordan, Bahrain, United Arab Emirates, and Qatar also owe their allegiance to the AAA but some of these may be changing.
The World Shadow Government is an ultra-secret, supranational organization which completely controls the Anglo-American Axis, as well as the European Union, NATO, among many other institutional entities which constitute the Global Control Matrix."
Who Is Obama’s Boss? And Why It Matters September 8 2016 | From: JonRappoport
It’s called the Trilateral Commission, and its original stated goal was to create “a new international economic order"
Here is another question that has the same answer: who is in charge of destroying economies? Who keeps pushing new economy-destroying trade treaties, like the upcoming TPP? Who is in the business of killing jobs and hope? Who demands that these treaties must be ratified?
Who is breathing down Obama’s neck, as he stages a last-ditch effort to ratify the TPP and further bury US sovereignty under the weight of global corporations? Who demands that more US jobs disappear overseas and never come back?
One group has been virtually forgotten. Its influence is enormous. It has existed since 1973. It’s called the Trilateral Commission (TC).
Keep in mind that the original stated goal of the TC was to create “a new international economic order.”
In the run-up to his inauguration after the 2008 presidential election, Obama was tutored by the co-founder of the Trilateral Commission, Zbigniew Brzezinski.
Four years before birthing the TC with his boss of bosses, David Rockefeller, Brzezinski wrote:
“[The] nation state as a fundamental unit of man’s organized life has ceased to be the principal creative force. International banks and multinational corporations are acting and planning in terms that are far in advance of the political concepts of the nation state.”
Goodbye, separate nations.
Any doubt on the question of TC goals is answered by David Rockefeller himself, the founder of the TC, in his Memoirs (2003):
“Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the best interests of the United States, characterizing my family and me as ‘internationalists’ and of conspiring with others around the world to build a more integrated global political and economic structure - one world, if you will. If that is the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it.”
Patrick Wood, author of Trilaterals Over Washington, points out there are only 87 members of the Trilateral Commission who live in America. Obama appointed eleven of them to posts in his administration.
For example:
Tim Geithner, Treasury Secretary
James Jones, National Security Advisor
Paul Volker, Chairman, Economic Recovery Committee
Dennis Blair, Director of National Intelligence
Here is the payoff. The US Trade Representative (appointed by Obama in 2013), who is responsible for negotiating the TPP with 11 other nations, is Michael Froman, a former member of the Trilateral Commission.
Don’t let the word “former” fool you. TC members resign when they take positions in the Executive Branch of government. And when they serve in vital positions, such as US Trade Representative, they aren’t there by accident. They’re TC operatives with a specific agenda.
I’m now going to print a stunning piece of forgotten history, a 1978 conversation between a US reporter and two members of the Trilateral Commission. (Source: Trilateralism: The Trilateral Commission and Elite Planning for World Management; ed. by Holly Sklar, 1980, South End Press, Pages 192-3).
The conversation was public knowledge at the time. Anyone who was anyone in Washington politics, in media, in think-tanks, had access to it. Understood its meaning.
But no one shouted from the rooftops. No one used the conversation to force a scandal. No one protested loudly.
The conversation revealed that the entire basis of the US Constitution had been torpedoed, that the people who were running US national policy (which includes trade treaties) were agents of an elite shadow group. No question about it.
And yet: official silence. Media silence. The Dept. of Justice made no moves, Congress undertook no serious inquiries, and the President, Jimmy Carter, issued no statements.
Carter was himself an agent of the Trilateral Commission in the White House. He had been plucked from obscurity by David Rockefeller, and through elite TC press connections, vaulted into the spotlight as a pre-eminent choice for the Presidency.
The 1978 conversation featured reporter, Jeremiah Novak, and two Trilateral Commission members, Karl Kaiser and Richard Cooper. The interview took up the issue of who exactly, during President Carter’s administration, was formulating US economic and political policy.
The careless and off-hand attitude of Trilateralists Kaiser and Cooper is astonishing. It’s as if they’re saying;
“What we’re revealing is already out in the open, it’s too late to do anything about it, why are you so worked up, we’ve already won…”
NOVAK (the reporter): Is it true that a private [Trilateral committee] led by Henry Owen of the US and made up of [Trilateral] representatives of the US, UK, West Germany, Japan, France and the EEC is coordinating the economic and political policies of the Trilateral countries [which would include the US]?
COOPER: Yes, they have met three times.
NOVAK: Yet, in your recent paper you state that this committee should remain informal because to formalize ‘this function might well prove offensive to some of the Trilateral and other countries which do not take part.’ Who are you afraid of?
KAISER: Many countries in Europe would resent the dominant role that West Germany plays at these [Trilateral] meetings.
COOPER: Many people still live in a world of separate nations, and they would resent such coordination [of policy].
NOVAK: But this [Trilateral] committee is essential to your whole policy. How can you keep it a secret or fail to try to get popular support [for its decisions on how Trilateral member nations will conduct their economic and political policies]?
COOPER: Well, I guess it’s the press’ job to publicize it.
NOVAK: Yes, but why doesn’t President Carter come out with it and tell the American people that [US] economic and political power is being coordinated by a [Trilateral] committee made up of Henry Owen and six others? After all, if [US] policy is being made on a multinational level, the people should know.
COOPER: President Carter and Secretary of State Vance have constantly alluded to this in their speeches. [a lie]
KAISER: It just hasn’t become an issue.
This interview slipped under the mainstream media radar, which is to say, it was buried.
US economic and political policy run by a committee of the Trilateral Commission - the Commission had been created in 1973 by David Rockefeller and his sidekick, Zbigniew Brzezinski.
When Carter won the presidential election, his aide, Hamilton Jordan, said that if after the inauguration, Cy Vance and Brzezinski came on board as secretary of state and national security adviser, “We’ve lost. And I’ll quit.”
Lost because both men were powerful members of the Trilateral Commission and their appointment to key positions would signal a surrender of White House control to the Commission.
Vance and Brzezinski were appointed secretary of state and national security adviser, as Jordan feared. But he didn’t quit. He became Carter’s chief of staff.
“The nation state as a fundamental unti of man's organized life has ceased to be the principal creative force: Internaiotnal banks and multinational corporations are acting and planning in terms that are far in advance of the political concepts of the nation-state.”
- 1972, 'Between Two Ages: America's Role in the Technetronic Era
Now consider the vast propaganda efforts of the past 40 years, on so many levels, to install the idea that all nations and peoples of the world are a single Collective.
From a very high level of political and economic power, this propaganda op has had the objective of grooming the population for a planet that is one coagulated mass, run and managed by one force. A central engine of that force is the Trilateral Commission.
How does a shadowy group like the TC accomplish its goal?
One basic strategy is: destabilize nations; ruin their economies; ratify trade treaties that effectively send millions and millions of manufacturing jobs off to places where virtual slave labor does the work; adding insult to injury, export the cheap products of those slave-factories back to the nations who lost the jobs and undercut their domestic manufacturers, forcing them to close their doors and fire still more employees.
And then solve that economic chaos by bringing order. What kind of order?
Eventually, one planet, with national borders erased, under one management system, with a planned global economy, “to restore stability,” “for the good of all, for lasting harmony.”
The top Trilateral players, in 2008, had their man in the White House, another formerly obscure individual like Jimmy Carter: Barack Obama. They had new trade treaties on the planning table. Obama was tasked with doing whatever was necessary to bring those treaties, like the TPP, home. To get them passed. To get them ratified. No excuses.
That’s why, over a year ago, when anti-TPP criticism and rhetoric were reaching a crescendo, when Obama was seeking Congressional fast-track authority for the treaty, he was in a sweat and a panic.
He and his cabinet were on the phones night and day, scrambling and scraping for votes in Congress. This was the Big One. This was why he was the President. To make this happen.
His Trilateral bosses were watching. These men run US policy, when and where it counts. They don’t like failure.
This is also why, after Obama was inaugurated for his first term, he shocked and astonished his own advisors, who expected him, as the first order of business, to address the unemployment issue in America.
He shocked them by ignoring the number-one concern of Americans, and instead decided to opt for his disastrous national health insurance policy - Obamacare.
Obama never had any intention of trying to dig America out of the crash of 2008.
That wasn’t why he was put in the Oval Office. He could, and would, pretend to bring back the economy, with fudged numbers and distorted standards.
But really and truly, create good-paying jobs for many, many Americans? Not on the TC agenda. Not in the cards.
It was counter-productive to the TC plan: torpedo the economy further.
Obama is on the move. He’s traveling to far-flung places, trying to shore up global consensus on the TPP treaty. His people are working around the clock to round up the necessary votes for TPP ratification in Congress.
Obama plans to sneak through the treaty during Congress’ lame-duck session after the November election, before newly elected Congressional members take office.
Pushing through Globalist trade treaties: this is why he was put in the White House. This is his appointed task. This is his real job. His bosses are watching.
“I pledge allegiance to the Trilateral Commission, and to the domination for which it stands, one planet, indivisible, with tyranny and poverty and top-down order for all…”
Xi’s Epic Snub Of Obama At G20 Summit + After Snubbing Obama, China Gives Putin Red Carpet Treatment, Warns Against Protectionism At G-20 September 7 2016 | From: Geopolitics / ZeroHedge
Xi’s Epic Snub vs. Obama at G20 Summit Reflects Asia’s Collective Wrath Over US Interference in the Region.
Every high-profile meeting like the G20 involves an elaborate preparation, from security down to the minutest detail of providing the red carpet welcome to every invited leader of member countries and guests.
It would be unthinkable to not provide a mobile staircase to stick onto the side of a presidential plane that would led the guests to the red carpet down below.
That’s exactly what happened to the arrival of the US president Barack Soetoro Obama.
China’s leaders have been accused of delivering a calculated diplomatic snub to Barack Obama after the US president was not provided with a staircase to leave his plane during his chaotic arrival in Hangzhou before the start of the G20.
But the leader of the world’s largest economy, who is on his final tour of Asia, was forced to disembark from Air Force One through a little-used exit in the plane’s belly after no rolling staircase was provided when he landed in the eastern Chinese city on Saturday afternoon.
Campaigners hail key moment in battle against global warming as presidents Obama and Xi announce deal on eve of G20 summit in Hangzhou
“The reception that President Obama and his staff got when they arrived here Saturday afternoon was bruising, even by Chinese standards,” the New York Times reported.
Jorge Guajardo, Mexico’s former ambassador to China, said he was convinced Obama’s treatment was part of a calculated snub.
“These things do not happen by mistake. Not with the Chinese,” Guajardo, who hosted presidents Enrique Peña Nieto and Felipe Calderón during his time in Beijing, told the Guardian.
“I’ve dealt with the Chinese for six years. I’ve done these visits. I took Xi Jinping to Mexico. I received two Mexican presidents in China. I know exactly how these things get worked out. It’s down to the last detail in everything. It’s not a mistake. It’s not.”
Guajardo added: “It’s a snub. It’s a way of saying: ‘You know, you’re not that special to us.’ It’s part of the new Chinese arrogance. It’s part of stirring up Chinese nationalism. It’s part of saying: ‘China stands up to the superpower.’ It’s part of saying: ‘And by the way, you’re just someone else to us.’ It works very well with the local audience."
“Why [did it happen]?” the former diplomat, who was ambassador from 2007 until 2013, added. “I guess it is part of Xi Jinping playing the nationalist card. That’s my guess.”
Bill Bishop, a China expert whose Sinocism newsletter tracks the country’s political scene, agreed that Obama’s welcome looked suspiciously like a deliberate slight intended “to make the Americans look diminished and weak”.
“It sure looks like a straight-up snub,” Bishop said. “This clearly plays very much into the [idea]: ‘Look, we can make the American president go out of the ass of the plane.’”
The pro-Western medium South China Morning Post [here] tried to attenuate the glaring snub by saying that it was the US delegation who requested to not provide the ramp in the first place.
“You have a lot of scuzzy sort-of thieves for whom this is a way to hit the jackpot.”
“It was Washington’s decision to have US President Barack Obama disembark from his plane through a small bare metal stairway instead of the usual rolling red-carpet staircase that state leaders get, a Chinese foreign ministry official has revealed.”
The truth of the matter is, there‘s now a consensus in Asia not to welcome anymore geopolitical inference from the United States government, or its Khazarian benefactors.
Indonesia has known early on that it was the US extortionists who caused the Indian Ocean Tsunami. It’s very consistent in its refusal against more Western company mining on it soil.
For Japan, it was a frontal extortion with Fukushima nuclear tsunami right from the start. That’s why it is now collaborating with Russia and other stakeholders in the establishment of a unified alternative energy grid in order to defeat the financial backbone of the Khazarian oil financiers causing wars for oil in the Middle East.
In late March, Russia’s Rosseti Company, the China State Grid Corporation, the Korea Electric Power Corporation and Japan’s Softbank Group agreed to establish and interconnected energy system to encompass the entire region of Northeastern Asia and eventually to build a number of separate energy bridges, including one between Russia’s Sakhalin Island and Japan.
Speaking on the sidelines of a GAZTECH conference earlier this year, the International Energy Agency’s former director Tanaka Nobuo said that after the disaster at Japan’s Fukushima nuclear power plant in March 2011, Japan shut down almost all its nuclear power stations, thus making the country dependent on energy supplies from abroad.
“Without nuclear energy we have become too dependent on fuel supplies, above all from the Middle East, but the current political instability there is a big risk, that’s why we are diversifying both our energy resources, such as oil, gas and coal, and the countries where we are buying fuel.
Staking on natural gas imports, we could shift our focus from the Middle East to suppliers in North America, Australia, the ASEAN countries and Russia, which could become a major supplier,” he said.
This level of cooperation ensures that no wars of aggression will ever be permitted just so another Khazarian oil pipeline is laid on anypart of Eurasia.
On the other hand, Duterte has acknowledged in one media ambush interview that he is “more excited of meeting Vladimir Putin” than Obama, when asked about his talking points with the latter once they met at the outset of the ASEAN Summit in Laos this month.
This statement came hours after he confirmed to have talked with the Chinese ambassador to the Philippines for 4 straight hours. Obviously, they were not talking about Pokemon Go.
It would be wrong to assume that terror and earthquake attacks could change the current Philippine geopolitical trajectory.
The Asian leaderships are now visibly standing up to the arrogance of the Exceptionalists who still think the rules do not apply to them.
Change is Ongoing!
After Snubbing Obama, China Gives Putin Red Carpet Treatment, Warns Against Protectionism At G-20
Roughly at the same time as China's infamous snub of Obama's arrival at Hangzhou for the G-20 summit, when the G-20 host nation's delegation first made sure there was no staircase for Obama to exit the plane and descend on the red carpet; forcing the president of the world's most powerful nation to use an emergency exit...
...followed by a shouting match by a Chinese official who unleashed on the US Press corps and national security advisor Susan Rice, blocking them from crossing a blue rope holding back press and saying "This is our country. This is our airport", Chinese officials had no such problems greeting Russian president Vladimir Putin with full honors, whose arrival - on the red carpet - took place without a glitch.
The favor was returned: according to RT, Putin brought a box of Russian ice-cream as a gift to Chinese leader Xi Jinping:
“I promised you I’d bring some ice-cream,” Putin said. “I’ve brought for you a box of it as a gift.”
Xi Jinping is a real fan of Russian ice-cream.
“Thank you very much for the gift, for the tasty ice-cream. In my every trip to Russia I always ask to buy Russian ice-cream. And then, at home, we eat it,” the Chinese leader said.
“You have the best cream, and it makes it so tasty. I like it very much. Thank you for this courtesy,” he added.
Having brought no ice cream of his own, and his embarrassing arrival in China making front page news over the weekend, Obama quickly tried to talk down the embarrassing incident, saying the tensions were the result of different approaches to the media, as well as the sheer scale of the US operation when he travels, according to AFP.
Obama pivoted away from the snub, instead accusing China of once again showing little respect for human rights:
“Washington stands up for press freedom and human rights and - whatever the fallout - does not leave our values and ideals behind when we take these trips" he said.
"It can cause some friction. The seams are showing a little more than usual in terms of some of the negotiations and jostling that takes place behind the scenes," Obama told reporters on Sunday.
The justification continued: "Part of it is we also have a much bigger footprint than a lot of other countries. And we've got a lot of planes, a lot of helicopters, a lot of cars, a lot of guys. You know, if you're a host country, sometimes it may feel a little bit much."
Obama said it was not the first time Washington's differences with Beijing had erupted during a visit, and that clashing values were also on display in his discussions with Xi.
Obama concluded by expressing hope the world would quickly move on and forget China's snub of Obama on his last official visit to the country:
"And so I wouldn't over-crank the significance of it," he said.
"None of this detracts from the broader scope of the relationship (with China)," he told a news conference.
"The bilateral discussions that we had yesterday were extremely productive and continue to point to big areas of cooperation."
Obama's "explanation" aside, China took the initiative to continue piling its critisim of the US, when Chinese President Xi Jinping said at the open of a two-day G-20 summit that the global economy is being threatened by rising protectionism and risks from highly leveraged financial markets.
He was referring to recent US trade war escalations, and Washington's recent response to Chinese dumping with duties on cold-rolled steel as high as 522%. As for highly leveraged financial markets, pretty much anyone could be at fault there.
His warning on Sunday followed bilateral talks with Barack Obama that the U.S. president described as "extremely productive", but which failed to bring both sides closer on thornier topics such as tensions in the South China Sea.
In addition to the previously leaked communique details, which as reorted last night will call for more fiscal and monetary stimulus, observers expect G20 leaders to mount a defense of free trade and globalization and warn against isolationism, eyeing Britain's vote in June to exit the
European Union and before the U.S. presidential election in November. The global economy has arrived "at a crucial juncture", Xi said, in the face of sluggish demand, volatile financial markets and feeble trade and investment.
"Growth drivers from the previous round of technological progress are gradually fading, while a new round of technological and industrial revolution has yet to gain momentum," he said.
As Reuters confirmed last night's report, G20 countries are set to agree in a communique at the end of the summit that all policy measures - including monetary, fiscal and structural reforms - should be used to achieve solid and sustainable economic growth, Japanese Deputy Chief Cabinet Secretary Koichi Hagiuda said.
“Commitment will be made to utilizing all three policy tools of monetary and fiscal policies and structural reforms to achieve solid, sustainable, balanced and inclusive growth," Hagiuda told reporters on the sidelines of the summit.
What he was really doing is hinting that the BOJ may no longer abide by the demands of the US Treasury to not engage in significant currency devaluations potentially leading to a major surprise announcement out of the BOJ in its September meeting.
Xi also called on G20 countries to match their words with actions.
“We should turn the G20 group into an action team, instead of a talk shop," he said.
Considering that the G-20 has been equated with the UN in terms of efficiency, we hope Xi isn't holding his breath.
Meanwhile, some of the G20 leaders have begun drawing battle lines in disputes over issues ranging from trade and investment to tax policy and industrial overcapacity, suggesting there was far less smiling by world leaders going on behind the scenes.
According to Reuters, Xi held talks with Australian Prime Minister Malcolm Turnbull and told him he hoped Australia would continue to provide a fair, transparent and predictable policy environment for foreign investors.
China was angered when Australia blocked the A$10 billion ($7.7 billion) sale of the country's biggest energy grid to Chinese bidders last month.
China has accused Australia of bowing to protectionist sentiment in blocking the bid for Ausgrid, as well as an earlier one by a China-led consortium to buy cattle company Kidman & Co. Beijing has also criticized Australia, a staunch U.S. ally, for running surveillance flights over disputed islands in the South China Sea.
Meanwhile, European Commission President Jean-Claude Juncker shot back at China saying the G-20 host nation must set up a mechanism to address its problem of industrial overcapacity, adding it was "unacceptable" the European steel industry had lost so many jobs in recent years.
“Overcapacity is a global problem but there is a particular Chinese element," he told a news conference.
Britain's future after its departure from the European Union was also subject to discussion. Obama reassured Prime Minister May that Britain's closest political, commercial and military ally would stand by her, tentatively backing off his infamous line that Brexit would leave the UK "in the back of the queue."
However, Obama did not shrink away from his stance that Brexit was a mistake and that London would not be able to jump the queue to arrange a bilateral trade deal.
Juncker said that if Britain wanted access to the European Union's common market, it needed to respect the rules of the common market.
Turnbull, meanwhile, said Australia wanted an early free trade agreement with Britain so markets could remain open between them when Britain formally left the European trading bloc.
Jean-Claude Juncker is a Luxembourgish politician who has been President of the European Commission, the executive branch of the European Union, since 2014
Snubbed or not, Obama held talks with Xi on Saturday that ran late into the night focusing mostly on the recent geopolitical tensions surrounding the disputed islands. He urged Beijing to uphold its legal obligations in the disputed waters of the South China Sea, and stressed U.S. commitments to its regional allies.
Xi responded by saying China would continue to safeguard its sovereignty and maritime rights in the South China Sea. But China is keen to keep the summit focused on economic issues and to prevent other disputes from overshadowing it.
According to a "fact sheet" on China-U.S. relations issued on Sunday, the two sides agreed on a range of issues, including avoiding competitive currency devaluations and not limiting deal opportunities for foreign information and communication technology providers.
Obama, in the last five months of his presidency, is using the visit to put a final stamp on his signature policy shift toward the Pacific, setting the tone for his White House successor, who will be elected in November and take office on Jan. 20. Judging by this weekend's incidents, Chinese opinion of the highest US political institutions has never been lower.
Perhaps just as bizarre as the now infamous Obama snub, however, was China's decision to convert parts of the city of Hangzhou, with its 9 million people, into a virtual ghost town as China sought to ensure that the G20 summit stays incident-free.
The Court That Rules The World September 7 2016 | From: Buzzfeed
A parallel legal universe, open only to corporations and largely invisible to everyone else, helps executives convicted of crimes escape punishment.
Imagine a private, global supercourt that empowers corporations to bend countries to their will.
Say a nation tries to prosecute a corrupt CEO or ban dangerous pollution. Imagine that a company could turn to this super court and sue the whole country for daring to interfere with its profits, demanding hundreds of millions or even billions of dollars as retribution.
Imagine that this court is so powerful that nations often must heed its rulings as if they came from their own supreme courts, with no meaningful way to appeal.
That it operates unconstrained by precedent or any significant public oversight, often keeping its proceedings and sometimes even its decisions secret.
That the people who decide its cases are largely elite Western corporate attorneys who have a vested interest in expanding the court’s authority because they profit from it directly, arguing cases one day and then sitting in judgment another.
That some of them half-jokingly refer to themselves as “The Club” or “The Mafia.”
And imagine that the penalties this court has imposed have been so crushing - and its decisions so unpredictable - that some nations dare not risk a trial, responding to the mere threat of a lawsuit by offering vast concessions, such as rolling back their own laws or even wiping away the punishments of convicted criminals.
This system is already in place, operating behind closed doors in office buildings and conference rooms in cities around the world.
Known as investor-state dispute settlement, or ISDS, it is written into a vast network of treaties that govern international trade and investment, including NAFTA and the Trans-Pacific Partnership, which Congress must soon decide whether to ratify.
These trade pacts have become a flashpoint in the US presidential campaign. But an 18-month BuzzFeed News investigation, spanning three continents and involving more than 200 interviews and tens of thousands of documents, many of them previously confidential, has exposed an obscure but immensely consequential feature of these trade treaties, the secret operations of these tribunals, and the ways that business has co-opted them to bring sovereign nations to heel.
The BuzzFeed News investigation explores four different aspects of ISDS. In coming days, it will show how the mere threat of an ISDS case can intimidate a nation into gutting its own laws, how some financial firms have transformed what was intended to be a system of justice into an engine of profit, and how America is surprisingly vulnerable to suits from foreign companies.
The series starts today with perhaps the least known and most jarring revelation:
Companies and executives accused or even convicted of crimes have escaped punishment by turning to this special forum. Based on exclusive reporting from the Middle East, Central America, and Asia, BuzzFeed News has found the following:
A Dubai real estate mogul and former business partner of Donald Trump [not that that means anything, he's had hundreds of business partners] was sentenced to prison for collaborating on a deal that would swindle the Egyptian people out of millions of dollars - but then he turned to ISDS and got his prison sentence wiped away.
In El Salvador, a court found that a factory had poisoned a village - including dozens of children - with lead, failing for years to take government-ordered steps to prevent the toxic metal from seeping out. But the factory owners’ lawyers used ISDS to help the company dodge a criminal conviction and the responsibility for cleaning up the area and providing needed medical care.
Two financiers convicted of embezzling more than $300 million from an Indonesian bank used an ISDS finding to fend off Interpol, shield their assets, and effectively nullify their punishment.
When the US Congress votes on whether to give final approval to the sprawling Trans-Pacific Partnership, which President Barack Obama staunchly supports, it will be deciding on a massive expansion of ISDS. Donald Trump and Hillary Clinton oppose the overall treaty, but they have focused mainly on what they say would be the loss of American jobs.
Clinton’s running mate, Tim Kaine, has voiced concern about ISDS in particular, and Sen. Elizabeth Warren has lambasted it. Last year, members of both houses of Congress tried to keep it out of the Pacific trade deal. They failed.
ISDS is basically binding arbitration on a global scale, designed to settle disputes between countries and foreign companies that do business within their borders. Different treaties can mandate slightly different rules, but the system is broadly the same.
When companies sue, their cases are usually heard in front of a tribunal of three arbitrators, often private attorneys. The business appoints one arbitrator and the country another, then both sides usually decide on the third together.
Conceived of in the 1950s, the system was intended to benefit both developing nations and the foreign companies that sought to invest in them.
The companies would gain a fair, neutral referee if a rogue regime seized their property or discriminated against them in favor of domestic companies. And the countries would gain the roads or hospitals or industries that those foreign corporations would, as a result, feel confident building.
“It works,” said Charles Brower, a longtime ISDS arbitrator. “Like any system of law, there will be disappointments; you’re dealing with human systems. But this system fundamentally produces as good justice as the federal courts of the United States.” [Not a benchmarch which should be aspired to.]
Charles Brower
He defended the lawyers who often serve as arbitrators, saying they:
"Are very aware of their responsibilities. Unlike politicians, we are up for election every minute of every day - somewhere in the world, somebody is trying to figure out whom to appoint in a case. We’re only as good as our reputations.”
As proof that ISDS delivers justice, Brower pointed to a wave of nationalizations by the Venezuelan government, many while Hugo Chávez was in charge, that led to:
"Huge awards against them for uncompensated expropriation.”
ISDS has not only put rapacious leaders on notice, its defenders say, but it has also encouraged investment, especially in poor countries, helping to raise overall economic development.
Some even say that it helps avoid gunboat diplomacy and tense international showdowns because countries have agreed on a forum where they can resolve disputes involving major investments.
But over the last two decades, ISDS has morphed from a rarely used last resort, designed for egregious cases of state theft or blatant discrimination, into a powerful tool that corporations brandish ever more frequently, often against broad public policies that they claim crimp profits.
Because the system is so secretive, it is not possible to know the total number of ISDS cases, but lawyers in the field say it is skyrocketing. Indeed, of the almost 700 publicly known cases across the last half century, more than a tenth were filed just last year.
Driving this expansion are the lawyers themselves. They have devised new and creative ways to deploy ISDS, and in the process bill millions to both the businesses and the governments they represent. At posh locales around the globe, members of The Club meet to swap strategies and drum up potential clients, some of which are household names, such as ExxonMobil or Eli Lilly, but many more of which are much lower profile.
In specialty publications, the lawyers suggest novel ways to use ISDS as leverage against governments. It’s a sort of sophisticated, international version of the plaintiff’s attorney TV ad or billboard: Has your business been harmed by an increase in mining royalties in Mali? Our experienced team of lawyers may be able to help.
A few of their ideas: Sue Libya for failing to protect an oil facility during a civil war. Sue Spain for reducing solar energy incentives as a severe recession forced the government to make budget cuts. Sue India for allowing a generic drug company to make a cheaper version of a cancer drug.
In a little-noticed 2014 dissent, US Chief Justice John Roberts warned that ISDS arbitration panels hold the alarming power to review a nation’s laws and “effectively annul the authoritative acts of its legislature, executive, and judiciary.” ISDS arbitrators, he continued, “can meet literally anywhere in the world” and “sit in judgment” on a nation’s “sovereign acts.”
That fate has not yet befallen the United States - but largely because of sheer luck, former government lawyers said.
In theory, ISDS arbitrators must follow the rules laid down in trade pacts.
But in practice, they have interpreted the vague language of many treaties as enshrining broad, unwritten rights far beyond protections against property seizures and blatant discrimination - even finding, in one case, a right to a “reasonable rate of return.”
Some entrepreneurial lawyers scout for ways to make money from ISDS.
Selvyn Seidel, an attorney who represented clients in ISDS suits, now runs a specialty firm, one that finds investors willing to fund promising suits for a cut of the eventual award.
Some lawyers, he said, monitor governments around the world in search of proposed laws and regulations that might spark objections from foreign companies.
"Huge awards against them for uncompensated expropriation.”
“You know it’s coming down the road,” he said, “so, in that year before it’s actually changed, you can line up the right claimants and the right law firms to bring a number of cases.”
The US officials who negotiated the Trans-Pacific Partnership have argued that it contains new ISDS safeguards, including opening up hearings and legal filings to the public.
The changes, however, have loopholes, and lawyers at some big firms are already advising clients how they might use the new deal to their benefit.
Opposition to ISDS is spreading across the political spectrum, with groups on the left and right attacking the system.
Around the world, a growing number of countries are pushing for reforms or pulling out entirely.
But most of the alarm has been focused on the potential use of ISDS by corporations to roll back public-interest laws, such as those banning the use of hazardous chemicals or raising the minimum wage.
The system’s usefulness as a shield for the criminal and the corrupt has remained virtually unknown.
Reviewing publicly available information for about 300 claims filed during the past five years, BuzzFeed News found more than 35 cases in which the company or executive seeking protection in ISDS was accused of criminal activity, including money laundering, embezzlement, stock manipulation, bribery, war profiteering, and fraud.
Among them: a bank in Cyprus that the US government accused of financing terrorism and organized crime, an oil company executive accused of embezzling millions from the impoverished African nation of Burundi, and the Russian oligarch known as “the Kremlin’s banker.”
Some are at the center of notorious scandals, from the billionaire accused of orchestrating a massive Ponzi scheme in Mauritius to multiple telecommunications tycoons charged in the ever-widening “2G scam” in India, which made it into Time magazine’s top 10 abuses of power, alongside Watergate.
The companies or executives involved in these cases either denied wrongdoing or did not respond to requests for comment.
Most of the 35-plus cases are still ongoing. But in at least eight of the cases, bringing an ISDS claim got results for the accused wrongdoers, including a multimillion-dollar award, a dropped criminal investigation, and dropped criminal charges. In another, the tribunal has directed the government to halt a criminal case while the arbitration is pending.
Of course, there are governments that don’t have clean hands themselves, and some claims by businesses have been justified. The legal systems of some countries are flagrantly unfair or riddled with corruption.
Moreover, authoritarian or kleptocratic regimes sometimes do use their justice systems as political weapons. For example, arbitrators ordered Russia to pay compensation after finding that Vladimir Putin and his administration had used criminal and tax proceedings to destroy his political rival Mikhail Khodorkovsky’s oil company.
Lawyers say that some governments, faced with a legitimate ISDS claim, will even trump up a criminal charge to deflect from their own wrongdoing. For example, arbitrators found there was evidence suggesting that Bolivia had launched a fraud case against mining-company executives as a ploy to get the company’s ISDS claim thrown out.
But even some members of The Club said they were concerned by how often credible allegations of criminality arise. Many ISDS lawyers say that the system helps promote the rule of law around the world.
If ISDS is seen as protecting criminals, they fear, it could delegitimize a system that is working well for many others.
One lawyer who regularly represents governments said he’s seen evidence of corporate criminality that he “couldn’t believe.”
Speaking on the condition that he not be named because he’s currently handling ISDS cases, he said;
“You have a lot of scuzzy sort-of thieves for whom this is a way to hit the jackpot.”
Read the full accounts of what happened in the cases of Egypt, El Salvador and Indonesia at: Buzzfeed
Be advised: If the TPPA / TTIP et al were ratified, it would be these pricks coming to rape our countries.
1080: NZ Animals Killed For No Reason In $80m Yearly 1080 Drops September 6 2016 | From: Various
Over 80 million dollars, including farmers hard earned cash, is spent every year eradicating a disease, that by World standards, doesn't exist...
“The Agency considered that acute exposures to 1080 in humans and animals may give rise to irreversible adverse, target organ [heart and brain] effects. These effects are severe.”
“Continued presence of predators (rats, mice, cats, stoats) [on Rangitoto Island after 1080 cereal operation]..ongoing predation..less than expected bird population recoveries” (2004)
"The recent post about 89 dead Kiwis that DOC didn’t bother to test for 1080 poisoning relates to this report of birds that actually were tested. Thanks to the person with a conscience who let the public know what is going on!"
More 1080 videos + If you have your pets, farm stock, deer, trout or eels, native wildlife (including birds), poisoned on or near your property or have any information to share with regard to aerial 1080 poison drops taking place near you, please let us know
Monsanto Promoting Worldwide Infertility? + Academic GMO Shills Exposed: Fraud And Collusion With Monsanto September 6 2016 | From: Sott / NaturalNews
Monsanto has a long and infamous history of manufacturing and bringing to market such chemicals as DDT, Agent Orange, aspartame, Roundup and dioxin - chemical compounds from which society continues to feel the effects.
In an effort to distance the current corporation from past deeds, Monsanto refers to the company prior to 2002 as "the former Monsanto" in their news releases. However, nothing has really changed aside from their PR machine.
While Monsanto has branched into genetic engineering (GE) of plants, the sale of patented GE seeds simply feeds the need for the company's pesticides. Monsanto is STILL primarily a purveyor of toxins, not life.
Monsanto began forging a unique and financially advantageous relationship with the U.S. government starting with the company's involvement in the Manhattan Project that produced the first nuclear weapons during World War II. During the Vietnam War they were the leading producer of Agent Orange.
The specialization in the production and distribution of toxic chemicals continues today.
Their influence over government runs so deep that despite the fact 64 other countries have been labeling genetically engineered (GE) foods for years, the U.S. now has the distinction of being the first country to un-label GE foods at the urging of a company producing mass amounts of GE seeds.
Monsanto and Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)
In the latter part of the 1920s, Monsanto was the largest producer of PCBs. This chemical was used in lubricant for electric motors, hydraulic fluids and to insulate electrical equipment. Old fluorescent light fixtures and electrical appliances with PCB capacitors may still contain the chemical.
During the years PCB was manufactured and used, there were no controls placed on disposal. Since PCBs don't break down under many conditions, they are now widely distributed through the environment and have made the journey up the food chain.
Between the inception and distribution of the product and its subsequent ban in the late 1970s, an estimated 1.5 billion pounds were distributed in products around the world.
Monsanto was the primary manufacturer of PCBs in the U.S. under the trade name Aroclor. Health problems associated with exposure to the chemical were noted as early as 1933 when 23 of 24 workers at the production plant developed pustules, loss of energy and appetite, loss of libido and other skin disturbances.
According to Monsanto's public timeline, it was in 1966 that "Monsanto and others began to study PCB persistence in the environment." However, seven years earlier, Monsanto's assistant director of their Medical Department wrote:
“... [S]ufficient exposure, whether by inhalation of vapors or skin contact, can result in chloracne which I think we must assume could be an indication of a more systemic injury if the exposure were allowed to continue."
In 1967, Shell Oil called to inform Monsanto of press reports from Sweden, noting that PCBs were accumulating in mammals further up the food chain. Shell asked for PCB samples to perform their own analytical studies.
With full knowledge of the devastation expected to the environment and humanity, it wasn't until 11 years later, in 1977, that Monsanto reportedly pulled production on PCB.
PCBs Are Probable Human Carcinogens
The International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC), the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the National Toxicology Program, and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIEHS) have identified PCBs as either probable, potential or reasonably likely to cause cancer in humans.
If it seems like these agencies are couching their words, they are. Human studies have noted increased rates of liver cancer, gall bladder cancer, melanomas, gastrointestinal cancer, biliary tract cancer, brain cancer and breast cancer when individuals had higher levels of PCB chemicals in their blood and tissue.
However, the EPA limits the ability of researchers to link a chemical as a carcinogen unless there is conclusive proof. While this proof is evident in animal studies, you can't feed these chemicals to humans and record the results. Thus PCBs are a "probable" carcinogen in humans.
Other health effects from PCBs include:
Babies born with neurological and motor control delays including lower IQ, poor short-term memory and poor performance on standardized behavioral assessment tests
Disrupted sex hormones including shortened menstrual cycles, reduced sperm count and premature puberty
Imbalanced thyroid hormone affecting growth, intellectual and behavioral development
Immune effects, including children with more ear infections and chickenpox
Once PCBs are absorbed in the body they deposit in the fat tissue. They are not broken down or excreted. This means the number of PCBs build over time and move up the food chain. Smaller fish are eaten by larger ones and eventually land on your dinner table.
Chemical Poisoning Begins Before Birth
A recent study at the University of California demonstrated that PCBs are found in the blood of pregnant women. Before birth, the umbilical cord delivers approximately 300 quarts of blood to your baby every day.
Not long ago, researchers believed the placenta would shield your developing baby from most pollutants and chemicals. Now we know it does not.
The umbilical cord is a lifeline between mother and child, sustaining life and propelling growth. However, in recent research cord blood contained between 200 and 280 different chemicals; 180 were known carcinogens and 217 were toxic to the baby's developing nervous system.
The deposits of chemicals in your body or the body of your developing baby are called your "body burden" of chemicals and pollution.
A steady stream of chemicals from the environment during a critical time of organ and system development has a significant impact on the health of your child, both in infancy and as the child grows to adulthood.
Tracey Woodruff, Ph.D., director of the University of California San Francisco Program on Reproductive Health and the Environment, was quoted in a press release, saying:
“It was surprising and concerning to find so many chemicals in pregnant women without fully knowing the implications for pregnancy. Several of these chemicals in pregnant women were at the same concentrations that have been associated with negative effects in children from other studies.
In addition, exposure to multiple chemicals that can increase the risk of the same adverse health outcome can have a greater impact than exposure to just one chemical."
Butyl Benzyl Phthalate - Another Monsanto Product
Butyl benzyl phthalate (BBP), also manufactured by Monsanto, was recently implicated in cell fat storage. This specific phthalate was found in human fluids and had an effect on the accumulation of fat inside cells.
BBP is used in the manufacture of vinyl tile, as a plasticizer in PVC pipe, carpets, conveyer belts and weather stripping in your home and office.
Like other phthalates used in the production of plastics, BBP is not bound to the product and can be released into your environment. It may be absorbed by crops and move up the food chain. The biggest source of exposure is food.
Drive-through hamburgers and take-out pizzas may be increasing your intake of phthalates. The danger is not in the food itself but in the products used to handle it. The study analyzed data from nearly 9,000 individuals, finding the one-third who had eaten at a fast food restaurant had higher levels of two different phthalates.
Potentially, BBP may adversely affect your reproductive function. However, at lower doses it also has an effect on your kidneys, liver and pancreas. Increased risks of respiratory disorders and multiple myelomas have also been reported in people who have exposure to products manufactured with BBP. An increasing waistline from BBP exposure may also reduce your fertility.
Low Sperm Count and Infertility Affecting Animals and Humans
A 26-year study of fertility in dogs, published recently, has distinct similarities to infertility rates in humans. In this study, researchers evaluated the ejaculate of nearly 2,000 dogs. Over the 26 year period, they found a drop in sperm motility of 2.4 percent per year.
Additionally, both the semen and the testicles of castrated dogs contained by PCBs and phthalates, implicated in other studies to reduction in fertility. Phthalates have been implicated in both decreased sperm motility and quality of your sperm, affecting both fertility and the health of your children.
Researchers used dogs in this study as they live in the same environment as their owners, and often eat some of the same food. This correlation between sperm function and concentration, and environment and food in dogs and humans is significant.
In those 26 years there was also a rise in cryptorchidism in male pups (a condition where the testicles don't descend into the scrotum) born to stud dogs who experienced a decline in sperm quality and motility.
Cryptorchidism and undescended testicles, occurs at a rate of 1 in 20 term male human infants and 1 in 3 pre-term babies.
Problems with infertility are also affecting marine animals at the top of the food chain. In the western waters of the Atlantic, the last pod of Orcas are doomed to extinction. High levels of PCB have been found in the fat of over 1,000 dolphins and Orcas in the past 20 years. Now taking a toll on the animal's fertility, this pod of Orcas has not reproduced in the 19 years it has been under study.
Orcas were living in the North Sea until the 1960s. At that time PCB pollution peaked in the area and the Orca whales disappeared. The same happened in the Mediterranean Sea, where the whales flourished until the 1980s. This pod off the coast of the U.K. is the last living pod in that area.
Monsanto's Argument in PCB Lawsuits
Although Monsanto denies culpability and knowledge of the danger behind the chemical PCB, you'll discover internal documentation in this video that they did, in fact, know of the danger while manufacturing and distributing the product. Monsanto is currently embroiled in several lawsuits across eight cities and the argument is over who owns the rain. The cities are suing Monsanto in Federal Court, saying PCBs manufactured by Monsanto have polluted the San Francisco Bay.
Monsanto attorney Robert Howard argues that because the city does not own the water rights, the city does not have the right to sue. And, because the PCBs have not damaged city property, such as corroding pipes, Howard claims it is a state problem. Scott Fiske, attorney for three cities, countered with the city's regulatory interests in management of storm water as a fundamental function of the city.
While Fiske claims he can prove Monsanto knew the product was hazardous as early as 1969, Howard maintains the company should not be liable for the use of the chemicals it produced.
In 2001, Monsanto attorneys in the Owens v. Monsanto case, acknowledged only one health threat from exposure to PCBs: chloracne, and instead argued that since the entire planet has been contaminated, they are innocent of all liability. The attorney for Monsanto was quoted in the Chemical Industry Archives, saying:
“The truth is that PCBs are everywhere. They are in meat, they are in everyone in the courtroom, they are everywhere and they have been for a long time, along with a host of other substances."
The cities currently engaged in lawsuits against Monsanto for damage to the environment and waterways include Berkley, Oakland, San Jose, Portland, Spokane, Seattle, Long Beach and San Diego. All eight cities attempted to combine their cases against the agrochemical giant but were unsuccessful when one judge found the issues were different enough to warrant separate cases.
Monsanto's Deep Pockets
Monsanto petitioned the Federal Court to dismiss Portland's lawsuit, claiming it would countersue, adding years to the process. It is likely Monsanto would increase the scope of the case and include companies who used the product and released the PCBs.
Meanwhile, three plaintiffs in St. Louis received better news in May 2016 when a jury awarded them a total of $46.5 million, finding Monsanto negligent in the production of PCBs.
This suit claimed Monsanto sold PCBs even after it learned about the dangers, bringing to court internal documents dated 1955, which stated: "We know Aroclors [PCBs] are toxic but the actual limit has not been precisely defined."33 To date this win over Monsanto has been rare. Williams Kherkher, attorney for the plaintiffs, explained in EcoWatch:
“The only reason why this victory is rare is because no one has had the money to fight Monsanto."
Kherkher and other firms pooled their resources in this case and expect wins in upcoming lawsuits. The firm has accumulated the names of approximately 1,000 plaintiffs with claims against Monsanto and PCBs.
The House passed a compromise to the DARK Act that will force food distributors to disclose the presence of genetically engineered (GE) ingredients with a smartphone scan code. President Obama has signed the bill that removes states' rights for labeling GMOs. The bill is full of loopholes, which may allow genetically modified ingredients to slip through unannounced.
Genetically modified organisms (GMOs), aka GE foods, are live organisms whose genetic components have been artificially manipulated in a laboratory setting through creating unstable combinations of plant, animal, bacteria and even viral genes that do not occur in nature or through traditional crossbreeding methods.
GMO proponents claim that genetic engineering is "safe and beneficial," and that it advances the agricultural industry. They also say that GMOs help ensure the global food supply and sustainability.
But is there any truth to these claims? I believe not. For years, I've stated the belief that GMOs pose one of the greatest threats to life on the planet. Genetic engineering is NOT the safe and beneficial technology that it is touted to be.
The FDA cleared the way for GE Atlantic salmon to be farmed for human consumption. Thanks to added language in the federal spending bill, the product will require special labeling so at least consumers will have the ability to identify the GE salmon in stores. However, it's imperative ALL GE foods be labeled clearly without a smartphone scan code because not everyone owns a smartphone.
The FDA is threatening the existence of our food supply. We have to start taking action now. I urge you to share this article with friends and family. If we act together, we can make a difference and put an end to the absurdity.
When you see the QR code or so-called Smart Label on a food product, pass it by. Products bearing the Grocery Manufacturer's Association's (GMA) Smart Label mark are in all likelihood filled with pesticides and/or GMO ingredients.
The GMA's 300-plus members include chemical technology companies, GE seed and food and beverage companies. Monsanto, Dow and Coca-Cola are just some of the heavy-hitters in this powerful industry group, which has showed no qualms about doing whatever it takes to protect the interest of its members.
Don't waste your time searching through their website, which may or may not contain the information you're looking for. If they insist on wasting your time and making your shopping difficult, why reward them with a purchase?
A little known fact is that the GMA actually owns the "Smart Label" trademark that Congress has accepted as a so-called "compromise" to on-package GMO labeling, and that's another reason why I believe the Smart Label mark is the mark of those with something to hide, such as Monsanto.
Will you financially support a corrupt, toxic and unsustainable food system, or a healthy, regenerative one? There are many options available besides big-brand processed foods that are part of the "GMA's verified ring of deception."
You can:
Shop at local farms and farmers markets
Only buy products marked either "USDA 100 percent Organic" (which by law cannot contain GMOs), "100 percent Grass-Fed" or "Non-GMO Verified"
If you have a smartphone and you don't mind using it, download the OCA's Buycott app to quickly and easily identify the thousands of proprietary brands belonging to GMA members, so you can avoid them, as well as identify the names of ethical brands that deserve your patronage
Last but not least, encourage good companies to reject QR codes and to be transparent and clear with their labeling. This will eventually ensure that all GMO foods can easily be identified by the GMA's "verified ring of deception" mark that is the Smart Label.
Campbell's, Mars, Kellogg's, ConAgra and General Mills all vowed to voluntarily comply with Vermont's GMO labeling law by labeling all of their foods sold across the U.S.
Will their plans change now that the law has been passed by Congress and signed by the President? That remains to be seen, but if you like these companies, I would encourage you to reach out to them and ask them to remain steadfast in their promise.
Non-GMO Food Resources by Country
If you are searching for non-GMO foods, here is a list of trusted sites you can visit:
Few corporations in the world are as loathed - and as sinister - as Monsanto. But the threat it poses to people and planet could be reaching new heights, as the World Health Organization has recently upgraded Monsanto's main product as carcinogenic to humans. With protests against the agrochemical giant held in more than 40 countries in May, learn why the global movement against Monsanto is of critical importance to our future.
In this episode of The Empire Files, Abby Martin issues a scathing expose on the corporate polluter, chronicling it's rise to power, the collusion of its crimes by the US government and highlighting the serious danger it puts us in today.
Academic GMO Shills Exposed: Once-Secret Emails Reveal Gross Collusion With Monsanto, Academic Fraud At The Highest Levels Inside U.S. Universities
U.S. Right to Know (USRTK), a non-profit organization dedicated to exposing the fraud and corruption surrounding the food industry, launched an investigation into the intimate and unethical relationship between the biotech industry and university faculty and staff, which is used to manipulate public opinion about GMOs and to coerce the government into passing legislation supportive of Big Ag's patented seeds and pesticides.
The investigation, which is still ongoing, reveals how biotech industry giants Monsanto, DuPont, Syngenta, Dow AgroSciences and others, buy academics employed by taxpayer-funded universities to push GMOs and lobby Congress to pass legislation favorable of their products, with one of the most high-profile examples including attempts to derail states' rights to enact GMO-labeling laws.
The collusion between Big Food, its front groups and university staff has been exposed through thousands of emails and documents obtained through a USRTK Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) request, which was meticulously filed over a six-month period.
USRTK: Public deserves to know about flow of money and level of coordination between Big Ag and public university scientists
The FOIA request sought to obtain emails and documents from 43 public university faculty and staff to learn more about the biotech industry's public relations strategies. Records were requested from scientists, economists, law professors, extension specialists and communicators, all of whom are employed by taxpayer-funded public institutions and steadily promote GMO agriculture under the "independent" research.
Currently, USRTK has received thousands of documents in nine of their requests; however, much more information is expected to be released as FOIA requests continue to be answered.
The documents received thus far expose how the biotech industry funds expenses for university faculty to travel the globe promoting and defending GMOs and their associated pesticides, highlighting the shift that scientists have made from being researchers to being actors in Big Ag PR campaigns.
Named the "Biofortified boys" by Alicia Maluafiti, executive director of Hawaii Crop Improvement Association (HCIA), a biotech front group, the academics were awarded thousands, and in some cases, hundreds of thousands of dollars in unrestricted grant money.
Dr. Kevin Folta, professor and chairman of the Horticultural Sciences Department at the University of Florida, Gainesville, is one of the biotech industry's most cooperative "Biofortified boys." Emails show that Folta was enlisted to travel to Hawaii and later to Pennsylvania to "testify to government bodies to oppose proposed mandatory genetically modified labeling measures."
Folta has repeatedly denied ties to Monsanto or having accepted funds from them; however, newly released documents prove otherwise, exposing him as a bald-faced liar and attack dog for the biotech industry.
Sponsored and organized by the HCIA, which includes Monsanto, DuPont, Dow AgroSciences, Syngenta and BASF, Folta and others were recruited to meet with local business execs to lobby against Hawaii's proposed GMO-labeling law.
HCIA's Maluafiti writes:
"So please know that you are part of our overall public education strategy and specifically – how do we use your valuable time wisely while you are here in Hawaii (besides hitting the beaches!) I'd love to hear your thoughts. Aloha!"
A second email authored by Renee Kester, wife of Dow AgroSciences R&D Leader Kirby Kester, who is also president of the HCIA, thanks them for their support:
"First off I would like to thank you for all of the support you have given us over here in Hawaii with regards to our recent legislative battles, it means a lot to all of us over here."
Monsanto asks academics to author articles promoting GMOs
In an effort to influence "thought leaders and influencers," Monsanto reached out to Dr. Folta and other academics, asking them to author a series of pro-GMO policy briefs to be used for "outreach and engagement with policy makers and consumers." The briefs were to be promoted as being authored by "independent scientists."
Eric Sachs, the chief of Monsanto's global scientific affairs group wrote:
"The key to success is participation by all of you – recognized experts and leaders with the knowledge, reputation and communication experience needed to communicate authoritatively to the target groups."
"You represent an elite group whose credibility will be strengthened by working together."
Recognizing participants' careers are at stake, Sachs offers the academics assurance by promising that he will protect their "independence," as well as their reputations.
Some of the topics the academics were asked to write on include:
Meeting World Challenges (discuss how GMOs will save the world by addressing shrinking agricultural resources, food security, food affordability and environmental sustainability).
Stifling Innovation (discuss how GM crop regulations stifle technological advancements and prevent GMOs from improving overall quality of life).
Holding Activists Accountable– assigned to Kevin Folta (discuss how anti-GMO activist campaigns spread false information and if left unchallenged will limit consumer choice, increase food prices, decrease farmer viability and undermine global food security).
GM Crop Safety (address consumer and policy maker concerns that GM crops aren't tested for safety, convince public that they are proven safe).
Consequences of Rejecting GM Crops (address public health fears and political resistance and concerns about biodiversity and biological safety and intellectual property rights that create barriers to GM acceptance).
Sustainable Crop Systems(discuss how GM crop technology provides environmental benefits, increases yields and improves productivity).
Responsible Choice(highlight the role GM crop technology plays in ensuring increase production and how it balances our needs for food, feed, fiber and fuel). Academics were asked to include a "call to action," which would be used in the briefs to influence the public on a variety of platforms including social media, blogs, websites and allied organizations.
Montano enlists university scientists to pressure EPA to abandon proposed pesticide regulations
Documents reveal that Monsanto also used academics to put pressure on regulatory agencies like the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) – in one instance pressuring the EPA to abandon its proposal to tighten regulations regarding pesticide use on insect-resistant crops.
"Is there a coordinated plan to maintain pressure and emphasis on EPA's evolving regulations?" asked Sachs in an email to Dr. Bruce Chassy, a professor emeritus at the University of Illinois at Urbana - Champaign.
Sachs continued, "Have you considered having a small group of scientists request a meeting with Lisa Jackson [referring to the EPA's administrator at the time]?"
With the help of an industry lobbyist, Chassy was eventually able to set up a meeting with Jackson, after which the agency's proposal was ultimately dropped.
Stay tuned for more as Natural News continues to dissect documents exposing the incestuous relationship between the biotech industry and university scientists.
Related Articles:
The sheer volume of information exposing Monsanto is overwhelming - yet where are the mainstream media on this?
Owned and censored is where - impotent to report on anything but PR spin, lies, fluff and sports.
How The Frankfurt School Changed American / Western Culture September 5 2016 | From: GarretGalland
How many times have you heard someone lament how much the world has changed from the good old days? You know, the simpler pre-PC period when the world operated according to fairly predictable principles.
But then we woke one day in a world with every bastion of what some might call normalcy under attack. Institutions that 100 years ago appeared unassailable - marriage, for example - are increasingly seen as antiquated. Even the idea of a national character is viewed as wrong-minded and, in the successful societies of the West, as exclusionary and even racist.
How did all this come about? Or, more colloquially, what was the number of the bus that hit us? This article shines the light on the Frankfurt School, an insidious movement that set down roots in the early 1900s.
As you’ll read, it is at the feet of the Frankfurt School that we can lay much of the blame for setting the modern world culturally adrift. After reading, please pass this edition along. People need to understand the agenda behind much of what is now accepted as the new normal.
How the Frankfurt School Changed American [Western] Culture
The 1950s were a simple, romantic, and golden time in America. California beaches, suburbia, and style. Atlas Shrugged was published, NASA was formed, and Elvis rocked the nation. Every year from 1950–1959 saw over 4 million babies born. The nation stood atop the world in every field.
It was an era of great economic prosperity in The Land of the Free. So, what happened to the American traits of confidence, pride, and accountability?
The roots of Western cultural decay are very deep, having first sprouted a century ago. It began with a loose clan of ideologues inside Europe’s communist movement. Today, it is known as the Frankfurt School, and its ideals have perverted American society.
When Outcomes Fail, Just Change the Theory
Before WWI, Marxist theory held that if war broke out in Europe, the working classes would rise up against the bourgeoisie and create a communist revolution.
Well, as is the case with much of Marxist theory, things didn’t go too well. When war broke out in 1914, instead of starting a revolution, the proletariat put on their uniforms and went off to war.
After the war ended, Marxist theorists were left to ask, “What went wrong?”
Marx
Two very prominent Marxists thinkers of the day were Antonio Gramsci and Georg Lukács. Each man, on his own, concluded that the working class of Europe had been blinded by the success of Western democracy and capitalism. They reasoned that until both had been destroyed, a communist revolution was not possible.
Gramsci and Lukács were both active in the Communist party, but their lives took very different paths.Gramsci was jailed by Mussolini in Italy where he died in 1937 due to poor health.
In 1918, Lukács became minister of culture in Bolshevik Hungary. During this time, Lukács realized that if the family unit and sexual morals were eroded, society could be broken down.
Lukács implemented a policy he titled “cultural terrorism,” which focused on these two objectives. A major part of the policy was to target children’s minds through lectures that encouraged them to deride and reject Christian ethics.
In these lectures, graphic sexual matter was presented to children, and they were taught about loose sexual conduct. Here again, a Marxist theory had failed to take hold in the real world. The people were outraged at Lukács’ program, and he fled Hungary when Romania invaded in 1919.
The Birth of Cultural Marxism
All was quiet on the Marxist front until 1923 when the cultural terrorist turned up for a “Marxist study week” in Frankfurt, Germany. There, Lukács met a young, wealthy Marxist named Felix Weil. Until Lukács showed up, classical Marxist theory was based solely on the economic changes needed to overthrow class conflict. Weil was enthused by Lukács’ cultural angle on Marxism.
Weil’s interest led him to fund a new Marxist think tank - the Institute for Social Research. It would later come to be known as simply The Frankfurt School.
Freud (above) was the uncle of Edward Bernays who was an Austrian-American pioneer in the field of public relations and propaganda, referred to in his obituary as "the father of public relations". Bernays' public relations efforts helped to popularize Freud's theories in the United States. Coincidence?
In 1930, the school changed course under new director Max Horkheimer. The team began mixing the ideas of Sigmund Freud with those of Marx, and cultural Marxism was born.
In classical Marxism, the workers of the world were oppressed by the ruling classes. The new theory was that everyone in society was psychologically oppressed by the institutions of Western culture. The school concluded that this new focus would need new vanguards to spur the change. The workers were not able to rise up on their own.
As fate would have it, the National Socialists came to power in Germany in 1933. It was a bad time and place to be a Jewish Marxist, as most of the school’s faculty was. So, the school moved to New York City, the bastion of Western culture at the time.
Coming to America
In 1934, the school was reborn at Columbia University. Its members began to exert their ideas on American culture.
It was at Columbia University that the school honed the tool it would use to destroy Western culture: the printed word.
The school published a lot of popular material. The first of these was Critical Theory. Critical Theory is a play on semantics. The theory was simple: criticize every pillar of Western culture - family, democracy, common law, freedom of speech, and others. The hope was that these pillars would crumble under the pressure.
The schedule of damaged created by Marx. Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Next was a book Theodor Adorno co-authored, The Authoritarian Personality. It redefined traditional American views on gender roles and sexual mores as “prejudice.” Adorno compared them to the traditions that led to the rise of fascism in Europe.
Is it just a coincidence that the go-to slur for the politically correct today is “fascist”?
The school pushed its shift away from economics and toward Freud by publishing works on psychological repression. Their works split society into two main groups: the oppressors and the victims. They argued that history and reality were shaped by those groups who controlled traditional institutions. At the time, that was code for males of European descent.
From there, they argued that the social roles of men and women were due to gender differences defined by the “oppressors.” In other words, gender did not exist in reality but was merely a “social construct.”
A Coalition of Victims
Adorno and Horkheimer returned to Germany when WWII ended. Herbert Marcuse, another member of the school, stayed in America. In 1955, he published Eros and Civilization.
In the book, Marcuse argued that Western culture was inherently repressive because it gave up happiness for social progress. The book called for “polymorphous perversity,” a concept crafted by Freud. It posed the idea of sexual pleasure outside the traditional norms.
Eros and Civilization would become very influential in shaping the sexual revolution of the 1960s.
Marcuse would be the one to answer Horkheimer’s question from the 1930s: Who would replace the working class as the new vanguards of the Marxist revolution? Marcuse believed that it would be a victim coalition of minorities - blacks, women, and homosexuals.
The social movements of the 1960s - black power, feminism, gay rights, sexual liberation - gave Marcuse a unique vehicle to release cultural Marxist ideas into the mainstream.
Railing against all things “establishment,” The Frankfurt School’s ideals caught on like wildfire across American universities.
Marcuse then published Repressive Tolerance in 1965 as the various social movements in America were in full swing. In it, he argued that tolerance of all values and ideas meant the repression of “correct” ideas.
It was here that Marcuse coined the term “liberating tolerance.” It called for tolerance of any ideas coming from the left but intolerance of those from the right.
It was here that Marcuse coined the term “liberating tolerance.” It called for tolerance of any ideas coming from the left but intolerance of those from the right.
One of the overarching themes of the Frankfurt School was total intolerance for any viewpoint but its own. That is also a basic trait of today’s political-correctness believers.
To quote Max Horkheimer, “Logic is not independent of content.”
Recalling the Words of Winston (Not That One)
The Frankfurt School’s work has had a deep impact on American culture. It has recast the homogenous America of the 1950s into today’s divided, animosity-filled nation.
In turn, this has contributed to the undeniable breakdown of the family unit, as well as identity politics, radical feminism, and racial polarization in America.
It’s hard to decide if today’s Western culture is more like Orwell’s 1984 or Huxley’s Brave New World.
Never one to buck a populist trend, the political establishment in America has fully embraced the ideas of the Frankfurt School and has pushed them on American society through public miseducation. Barack Obama and Hillary Clinton, the beacons of progressivism, are both disciples of Saul Alinsky, a devoted cultural Marxist.
And so we now live in a hyper-sensitive society in which social memes and feelings have overtaken biological and objective reality as the main determinants of right and wrong.
Political correctness is a war on logic and reason.
To quote Winston, the protagonist in Orwell’s dystopia, “Freedom is the freedom to say that 2+2=4.” Today, America, and the West, are not free.
Ever wish you were a child again? Well, now it is possible. Just attend adult playschool in NYC! Prices range from $333–$999 per class. A bargain!
How To Stay Rich In Europe: Inherit Money For 700 Years September 5 2016 | From: Bloomberg
The richest Florentine families in 1427 still are: New research shows Europe leads the world in inherited wealth.
Lamberto Frescobaldi sets two wine glasses atop a wooden barrel in the spacious cellar of his company's winery in a 1,000-year-old castle not far from Florence. Uncorking a bottle of Nipozzano, he takes a sip and nods. The red that his family supplied to Michelangelo and Pope Leo X still tastes pretty darn good.
To Frescobaldi, 53, directing the family business is something of a trust. It’s a way to preserve a dynasty that began with wool traders in about the year 1000 and made its money financing the English crown almost 200 years later.
“You have to feel that what you have inherited, you actually do not own,” he said, seated on a wine cask.
“You only have to run it properly, and to carry on to something else.”
Maintaining inherited wealth has worked for generations of Frescobaldis over 700 years, and it has let the descendants of Jakob Fugger in Germany continue to run the social-housing complex the Emperor’s banker founded almost half a millennium ago.
It’s less of a blessing for Europe as a whole, where family fortunes are more prevalent than in the U.S. or Asia [not correct regarding Asia]. Their relatively high level is a sign of the continent’s low social mobility, keeping education, income and social connections from evolving over generations.
Lamberto Frescobaldi
The richest Florentine families today were already at the top of the socioeconomic ladder almost 600 years ago, according to a recent study by the Bank of Italy.
And research by the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development shows that in many European countries, not only wealth and income but even occupations tend to be “sticky,” passed on from generation to generation.
More than one-third of Italy’s richest people inherited their fortunes, compared with just 29 percent in the U.S. and 2 percent in China, according to a 2014 study of the world’s billionaires by the Peterson Institute for International Economics. Germany has the highest share of inheritor-billionaires among developed economies, 65 percent. Overall, heirs and heiresses make up about half of Western Europe’s billionaires.
Europe’s income classes aren’t much more rigid than in the U.S. The lack of social mobility is more of a concern, though, because economic output and the number of available jobs are smaller.
The U.S. has grown 9.9 percent in real terms since 2007; the comparable figure for the European Union over the same period, based on Eurostat data, is 2.8 percent. Gross domestic product per capita in the EU is almost one-third lower than in the U.S when adjusted for purchasing power; the unemployment rate is nearly twice that of the U.S.
Because America’s economy is expanding, “they need more engineers, more chemists, more economists, more analysts, more bankers than in Europe,” said Antonio Schizzerotto, professor emeritus of sociology at the University of Trento and scientific director of the Research Institute for the Evaluation of Public Policies in the same city. “The number of positions open is higher than the number of ‘sons and daughters of.”’
At a time when some European economies are stalling, wealth and social inheritance must be closely watched because if inequality reaches a certain limit, it can further constrain countries' ability to revive growth, Schizzerotto said.
For Frescobaldi, the family patrimony can be summed up in one word: wine. His first experience with red came at the age of six, when he got drunk and fainted at a summer party with vineyard workers.
“I almost feel a little bit more like a trustee,'' said Fugger-Babenhausen, head of one the three surviving family branches that still run the housing complex through a foundation.
As for the family business, “I become very frugal in what I take for myself.”
“They couldn’t give me water, I was the son of the boss!” he said.
Today, after getting a degree in viticulture at the University of California, Davis, he chairs a company, Marchesi Frescobaldi Group, that produces 11 million bottles a year, one of the biggest in Italy. He even named his dog Brunello, after the Brunello di Montalcino the company makes.
Nipozzano Castle, owned by the Frescobaldi family
Before entering winemaking in 1308, the Frescobaldis were wool traders and bankers, financing King Edward I’s wars in Wales and France. The family - which also built Florence’s first-ever bridge, Santa Trinita -- also includes Girolamo Frescobaldi, one of the main composers of keyboard music in the late Renaissance and early Baroque periods, as well as poet Dino Frescobaldi.
The latter collected and conserved the first seven Canti of the Divine Comedy for Dante Alighieri when he was sent to exile, allowing him to complete the work.
The Frescobaldis’ long lineage is hardly unique in Florence, Tuscany’s capital. Bank of Italy researchers Guglielmo Barone and Sauro Mocetti compared tax records of Florentine taxpayers in 1427 and 2011 to track inter-generational mobility, and found that there was meaningful persistence of socioeconomic status across the centuries.
Piazza di Santa Croce in Florence
“The huge political, demographic and economic upheavals that have occurred in the city across the centuries were not able to untie the Gordian knot of socioeconomic inheritance,” the authors wrote.
Germany may be prone to even more concentrations of inherited wealth, research shows.
“In hardly any other country does social origin influence one’s income as much as in Germany,” wrote Marcel Fratzscher, head of the Berlin-based German Institute for Economic Research, in a recent book.
“The richest citizens are also those with the highest income. For to everyone who has, more shall be given.”
Count Alexander Fugger Babenhausen
Germany’s high share of family wealth is in part a consequence of a tax system that until this year allowed family-owned businesses - including a large proportion of the medium-sized companies that are the backbone of its economy - to pass on their financial assets while paying almost no estate tax.
Count Alexander Fugger-Babenhausen, a descendant of arguably Europe’s richest man in the 16th century, says maintaining the fortune’s integrity is a responsibility. The 34-year old returned to Germany to manage the family’s wealth and charitable activities after working in investment banking and private equity in London.
“It’s not the fast-lived, dynamic sector that forces you to take high risks,” he said at the Fuggerei, the affordable-housing complex founded by Jakob Fugger in 1521.
“In every decision we make for the Fuggerei, we try to consider that and be prudent. It would be disastrous if a mistake brought sustainability to an end after 19 generations.”
The Fuggerei social housing complex in Augsburg, Germany
Jakob Fugger ordered the construction of the Fuggerei to give back to his city, and try to save his soul in the meantime. Those living in the complex of cozy, two-story terrace houses pay a yearly rent of 0.88 euros, as per Fugger's decree that the cost be one Rhenish florin, and must make three daily prayers for the founder’s soul and family.
Similarly, the Frescobaldis, who since the Renaissance have commissioned works from artists such as Filippo Brunelleschi, have introduced a contemporary art award called “Artists for Frescobaldi.” For this project, 999 special bottles are produced every year and some of the proceeds are reinvested to support contemporary art.
A bronze bust of Jakob Fugger, founder of the Fuggerei social housing complex, stands in a communal garden area in Augsburg, Germany
The Fuggerei’s 140 apartments have survived innumerable wars and partial destruction during World War II. While they have been renovated, they still follow the original floor plans and feature some unique Renaissance decor, such as a lever-activated door-opening mechanism that in the past let tenants allow visitors in without leaving the apartment’s only heated room.
“I almost feel a little bit more like a trustee,'' said Fugger-Babenhausen, head of one the three surviving family branches that still run the housing complex through a foundation. As for the family business, “I become very frugal in what I take for myself.”
Wealth confiscation: The War on Cash and negative interest rates are radical and insane measures. They are a sign of desperation.
They are also huge threats to your financial security. Central planners are playing with fire and inviting a currency catastrophe. Most people have no idea what really happens when a currency collapses, let alone how to prepare.
Throughout the Western world the financial system has become an exploiter of the people and a deadweight loss on economies. There are only two possible solutions. One is to break the large banks up into smaller and local entities such as existed prior to the bank deregulation. The other is to nationalise them and operate them solely in the interest of the general welfare of the population.
However, the TBTF-banks are too powerful for either solution to be allowed to occur. But the greed, fraud, and self-serving behaviour of Western financial systems, aided and subsidised by governments, could be leading to such a complete breakdown of economic life, that the idea of a private financial system will become as unacceptable in the future as Nazism is today.
Meanwhile, it should be clear that the RKM-cabal want you to use money that they can easily control, tax, and confiscate and paper currency is getting in their way. Governments are instructed to confiscate your wealth, by steadily debasing the currency via printing money or in other words inflation. It’s a stealthy way to confiscate from savers and hard working people.
Imagine the car you have paid to someone before driving off. Imagine the rent to be paid to someone before moving into a home. When you pay someone to take their claim off your hands, you experience how much your money really is worth.
Eliminate Paper Currency:
Governments might collectively attempt to eliminate paper currency in favour of an electronic currency – transferred from party to party solely through licensed banks. Sound farfetched? Well, maybe, but what if the U.S. and EU agreed on an overall plan, and then suggest it to other governments?
On the face of it, this may seem like a conspiracy theory, but all governments would benefit from this control and would be likely to get on board. They might say that this will prove to be the only way out of their present economic problems.
And when your bank – the RKM-cabal – wants to confiscate your money, who will stop them from implementing the P-R-S myth: Problem – Reaction – Solution, that links the free movement of cash to terrorism, creating a consciousness that any movement of large sums of money suggests criminal activity?
– Designate a maximum amount of money that may be moved without reporting to some government investigatory agency; Periodically lower these limits; Accustom people to making all purchases, however small or large, with a bank card; Create a consciousness that the mere possession of cash is suspect, since it’s no longer necessary.
And thus start; the “War on Cash.”
Running out of Time:
Governments are running out of time. The one reason why they’d rush a programme that normally would be given more time for people to accept, is that they see a crash coming before the completion of their new programme to be implemented.
The next step is the intent of creating a definitive false flag event that demonstrates how physical cash is the primary means of funding evil acts in the world so that they can declare a date on which paper currency will become illegal. Until that date, it may be deposited into a bank.
Thereafter, it will become criminal to possess it. Once all cash has been deposited in the banks, negative interest rates will be increased, as interest rates can only be lowered further if cash currency is banned; Confiscation of deposits can then be implemented, as desired by banks, because recently the confiscation of deposits has been legalised in Canada, the U.S., New Zealand, the EU and other countries.;
Confiscate contents of selected safe deposit boxes; End voluntary taxation. All taxation will in future be by direct debit; Declare money to be the property of the State that issued it, as people are only allowed to trade with it, but it is not truly theirs. The State therefore can freeze or confiscate the funds in any account, if any crime is suspected.
Once completed, state wealth control will exist. This may seem a mere fiction. But then, less than a year ago, the War on Cash was regarded by only a few as being even within the realm of possibility, let alone right around the corner. Now it is accepted as being an unsettling reality.
If you have cash in a bank, don’t think of it as your own. This is not the case. It is wealth that you have loaned to the bank. In the near future, the bank, with governmental approval, will have the power to decide if and when they return all, or a part of this cash to you. They will set the rules as to how this decision will be determined and the rules will be changed periodically.
At least if you possess your money in cold, hard cash, they will have to come and physically get it from you. When it is ‘in the bank’ – existing in the form of electronic account balances – all they have to do is push a button.
That’s what happened in Cyprus. The banks were about to fall off the cliff so they confiscated deposits to help make themselves whole again. Who will stop the same thing from happening again wherever you may reside?
The judge is RKM appointed. The police are on the RKM’s payroll. The politicians are RKM bought and paid-off to do what is required by them. When cash is outlawed, only outlaws will have cash. And the best advice to you is; intend to be among them.
Escape Confiscation:
Seek alternatives, the’ War on Cash’ will be international, but it won’t be fully global. There will still be jurisdictions that, following tradition, will not fall in line with the world’s foremost powers. They will not wish to go off the same cliff as the others and will take a different course. They will be the safe havens for those people who seek to escape the collapsing system.
If you’re a resident of any country that’s presently going down this anti-cash road, move your money to a jurisdiction that has a consistent history of a stable government, low, or no direct taxation, and minimal interference or regulation of wealth; Convert your wealth into those forms of assets that are most difficult for greedy governments to confiscate, like ‘foreign-held’ precious metals and real estate.
Only a tiny fraction of the population owns gold. This wasn’t the case in 1933, when the U.S. was still on a variation of the original gold standard. This is why the government will probably not repeat the 1933 rip-off. It’s simply not worth the effort.
If governments want to confiscate wealth, it’s far more likely they will go for the easy option, by steadily debasing the currency by printing money, in other words: Inflation. It’s a stealthy way of confiscating from savers. This does not mean gold owners are invincible.
This time, governments are likely to try a new scam: taxing windfall profits on gold. This would make it much easier for governments to accomplish something similar to its 1933 heist. In short, they will apply a windfall taxation on profits they don’t like.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
The whole concept is a scam. It is camouflaged, legalized theft. – If the price of gold explodes, Parliaments will pass a Fair Share Gold Windfall Profit Tax Act, levying a tax of 80%, to 90%, or more on gold profits.
Fortunately, there are some practical steps be taken in order to protect yourself from this form of politically motivated expropriation. When such a law is discussed in Parliament, it’s time to sell your gold, or better still, move your gold beforehand into a tax-free jurisdiction zone.
What is most important is that governments cannot destroy gold’s value with reckless policies. Their destructive actions only lead people to buy more gold.
Ousting the Cabal:
Germany, after Turkey has turned its back on the Khazarians and NATO, with its largest European base in Ramstein, now the 2nd closure is, after the NATO base in Turkey, both of which are actively used by the Bushes and Clinton for drugs smuggling activities – include opium from Afghanistan into Western markets to prop up finances.
Good willing leaders in Germany decided to refuse this request and to allying themselves with the Russians. Effectively, joining the UK and Turkey in a Western led move against the RKM controlled US-government, while ordering citizens to stockpile 10 days’ worth of emergency food supplies in preparation for a war of independence, for which the German government is mobilising 600,000 militias.
So the good news is; Germany separates itself as a Khazarians vassal state.
Schnell! Schnell!
That is a huge blow to the RKM, after the first failed coup in Turkey earlier on. Expect similar moves in many other countries during this autumn, watch France, Italy, Japan, Saudi Arabia and Brazil among other countries that are going to follow.
Russia is aware of all this, and has mobilised itself too. Merkel appears to have lost effective power, accordance to statements made by her vice president on Sunday, and the Minster of Trade who said that TTIP is finished and off the table.
‘Mr. Brexit’ Nigel Farage Speaks at Donald Trump’s Rally in Jackson, MS - USA:
There is hope, as the ordinary people stand up and fight the big banks. We did it on June 23rd when we smashed the establishment. Not wanting to be run by a bunch of unelected old men in Brussels. They told us our economy would fall off a cliff. We might even well get WW3.
We reached those people that felt let down by government. We have taken back our country and our borders and self respect.
Obama came to tell the Brits not to leave. If I was an American citizen, I wouldn’t vote for Hillary Clinton, not even if she paid me. You can defeat Washington, by doing what we did in Britain by voting for change, and remember anything is possible, if enough decent people are prepared to stand up against the establishment.
U.S. Elites Are Losing All Their Power:
In the video below, Dr Willie explains that not if, but WHEN the United States Dollar loses its status as the Global Reserve Currency, the U.S. government will be forced to increase its activities in an area most don’t like to talk about: its narcotic sales.
The United States government does a tremendous amount of narcotic trafficking around the world, but it will be forced to do even more so, because their economy is already in a shambles, and their military still devours over $800 BILLION per year to be maintained.
Under Obama the economy has grown at an average of 1.5% annually, and that is using the numbers Obama provides, which means in all likelihood, that the economy has actually been shrinking throughout his entire term. It is known that Obama tends not to be honest about much of anything.
– Turkey has quietly turned East, and Germany is slowly following suit, frustrating NATO in the process, eliminating the largest NATO base in Europe, in Ramstein, Germany. This will be the second base to be withdrawn after Turkey, both bases heavily involved in drug trafficking for the Bushes and Clintons.
The Politics Of Negative Interest Rates
Yanis Varoufakis: Objects of desire come at a cost. Only bad things, like toxic waste, have a negative price, the equivalent of a fee payable to anyone willing to make them disappear. Does this mean that negative interest rates embody a new perspective on money – that it has gone “bad”?
In market economies, money is the measure of the value of goods and services. And the interest rate is the price of that metric – of money itself. When the price is zero, it makes no difference whether money is kept under a mattress or lent, because there is no cost to holding or borrowing cash.
But how can the price of money – which, after all, makes the world go round, or, as Karl Marx put it, “transforms all my incapacities into their contrary” – be zero? And how can it possibly ever become negative, as it now is in much of the global economy, with the world’s moneyed people “bribing” governments to borrow from them more than $5.5 trillion?
The answer can only be of a type that economists loathe: philosophical, political, and thus irreducible to neat positivist explanation. In other words, the answer must concern the essence of money.
In a farmers’ market, sellers with many unsold potatoes start dropping the price until a level is reached (possibly very low, but still positive) at which all of the potatoes are bought. In contrast, since the 2008 global financial crisis, every time the price of money has been reduced, demand for it falls and excess savings rise. Clearly, money is not like potatoes or any other well-defined “thing.”
To understand how money can be our societies’ supreme good while fetching a negative price, it helps to start with the realization that, unlike potatoes, money has no intrinsic private value. Its utility comes from what its holder can make others do. Money, to recall Lenin’s definition of politics, is about “who does what to whom.”
Imagine you are an entrepreneur with money in the bank, or have a bank eager to lend large sums to invest in your business. You spend sleepless nights wondering whether you should invest in a new product – that is, whether you should exploit your access to money to cause an array of others to work on your behalf.
In our current Great Deflation, what worries you most is your customers’ future purchasing power and sentiment. Will they be able and willing to buy your new product at high enough prices and quantities?
Suppose that, sleep-deprived, you then switch on the radio or TV only to hear that US Federal Reserve Chair Janet Yellen and European Central Bank President Mario Draghi are considering reducing interest rates further. Will you rejoice at the prospect that your financing costs will fall? Will you be motivated to invest your own money now that it earns lower (perhaps even negative) interest?
No and no. Your reaction is most likely to be one of alarm: “Oh, my God! If Janet and Mario are considering another interest-rate cut, they must have good reason to believe that demand will remain low!”
So you abandon your investment plan. “Better to borrow money at almost no cost,” you think, “and buy back a few more of my company’s shares, boost their price, earn more on the stock exchange, and bank the profits for the rainy days that are coming.”
And so it is that the price of money falls, even as the supply of it burgeons. Central bankers who never predicted the Great Deflation are now busily trying to find a way out with economic and econometric models that could never explain it, let alone point to solutions.
Unwilling to question the political dogma that central banks must be apolitical, they refuse to think of money as more than a “thing.” And so they continue the search for a technocratic fix to a problem crying out for a philosophically astute political solution.
It’s a futile quest. Once the price of money (interest rates) hit zero, central banks tried buying mountains of public and private debt from commercial banks to give them an incentive to lend freely. The ECB went so far as to pay banks to lend to business while, at the same time, punishing them for not lending (via negative interest rates for excess reserves).
But bankers and businesses, viewing these measures as desperate responses to self-fulfilling deflationary expectations, went on an investment strike, while using the central-bank money to inflate the prices of their own assets (stocks, art, real estate, and so forth).
This did nothing to defeat the Great Deflation; it only made the rich richer, an outcome that somehow reinforced central bankers’ belief in central bank independence.
Not all central bankers, thankfully, are incapable of responding creatively to the Great Deflation. Andy Haldane, Chief Economist at the Bank of England, has courageously suggested that all money should become digital, which would permit real-time negative interest rates to be imposed on all of us, thus forcing everyone to spend at once.
John Williams, President and CEO of the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco, recently argued that the Great Deflation could be beaten only by targeting the price level and nominal national income simultaneously – a New Deal-like approach featuring joint action by the Fed and the government.
What separates these central bankers from the herd is their readiness to jettison the myth of independent monetary policy, to accept that money is the most political of commodities, to challenge the sanctity of cash, and to concede that defeating the Great Deflation requires a progressive policy agenda.
Simone Weil once said, “If you want to know what a man is really like, take notice of how he acts when he loses money.”
Likewise, if we want to know what our societies are really like, we must take notice of how they react to negative interest rates.
Farage: Establishment Losing Control Over The People September 3 2016 | From: Infowars
The Empire didn’t believe Brexit was possible, Farage pointed out.
Brexit leader Nigel Farage said the globalist establishment is bewildered over Brexit and clueless on how to regain control.
“The Empire is befuddled,” he said on The Alex Jones Show Tuesday. “The Empire doesn’t get Brexit because the Empire didn’t believe Brexit was possible. Now the Empire’s problem is that it’s fighting this argument on several fronts at once.”
“We’ve got the American elections going on, we’ve got a big referendum coming up in Hungary on migrant quotas from Germany, we’ve got a rerun of the Austrian presidency where the right-wing candidate was cheated by false votes,” Farage said.
“So they’ve got a real problem, they’re fighting us now on a whole series of fronts. What will they do to fight back? I don’t know the answer to that yet, and you know something? Nor do they.”
And the real takeaway from Brexit? It’s the first victory, Farage pointed out.
“Brexit is the first strike-back against this phenomenon of the big banks, the big businesses, effectively owning politics, willfully destroying nation-state democracy, getting rid of that thing our forbearers actually fought and shed their blood to create and to preserve our liberties and our freedoms,” he continued.
“All of that being taken away and suddenly in a referendum that no one said we could win, and we’ve done it.What we’ve done is given inspiration to freedom fighters right across the Western World.”
Farage then broke down how Hillary is aligned with the globalist agenda and how the US elections are crucial to the fight against globalism.
“Hillary represents everything that has gone wrong in our lives over the last couple of decades,” he said. “She is part of that phenomenon where all that seems to matter now is corporatism.
The big, global companies who want to set the rulebooks to effectively put out of business any small or medium-size competitors.”
And Hillary loves the supranational global-type bodies which are accountable to nobody, Farage continued.
“I think she sees the European Union as a prototype for an even bigger form of world government,” he stated.
“If you want nothing to change at all, if you want to continue with the kind of cronyism that we see with the Clinton Foundation, if you want things to stay the same, vote for Hillary.”
Farage went on to clarify his decision to leave UKIP and take the fight for national sovereignty worldwide.
“I’m not retiring, I’m not living in a tin shed, but I’m going to step back from leadership and it’s going to leave me free to make this argument not just in the United Kingdom, not just in the EU Parliament, but around other parts of the Western world.”
Farage also commented on Hillary’s public criticism of his recent US visit to speak at a Trump rally in Mississippi.
“Can I please use this opportunity to thank Hillary Clinton from the bottom of my heart for doing what she’s done?” asked Farage with a chuckle. “She’s raised my profile massively in this presidential election. So Hillary, thank you.”
New Zealand Intelligence And Security Bill September 3 2016 | From: TheContrail
This draconian Bill, currently in the process of being passed by our Parliament, effectively merging the GCSB and SIS intelligence agencies, and giving them greatly increased surveillance powers with the police - operating independently of the normal judicial system; has all happened before and is further linked to the Kim Dotcom appeal trial at the High Court in Auckland at present.
Basically it is transferring the entire country into a police surveillance state, such as was previously operated in Nazi Germany.
New Zealand Intelligence and Security Bill - First Reading
While this process is happening in many other countries at present as well, that is no excuse for us here in NZ to be indifferent about it.
I thought I would briefly summarize what is happening using a brief timeline of short YouTube clips:
On September 2012, after Kim Dotcom had been illegally arrested through the SIS and GCSB spying on him on behalf of the American NSA, he attended the New Zealand Parliament hearing on a new intelligence Bill grilling John Key about it.
In July 2013, Kim Dotcom, while his extradition battle was continuing, spoke to Parliament’s Intelligence and Security Select Committee & NZ PM John Key arguing against the increased draconian extension of GCSB powers.
Here is a brief clip of the Kim Dotcom Protest and his speech July 27, 2013:
Here is the Campbell Live TV program dissecting the GCSB Bill with Kim Dotcom Scandal. (This is in part why John Campbell is no longer employed on NZ public television!):
Hitler’s police state gained so much evil power by merging the SS and Gestapo (secret intelligence agencies and private police) (as is recommended in this evil NZ Bill).
This allowed them
to arrest anyone SEPARATE from the normal judicial system which, was allowed to continue to operate and coexist making Germans think they were still living in a democracy when the truth was it was a brutal dictatorship.
Following the merger of the intelligence agencies under the SS, they were then linked with the Gestapo (private secret police) who arrested anyone they liked, and brought them before a new, special court called the People’s Court (Volksgerichtshof) in Berlin.
This court wickedly condemned thousands of good people to death as “Volk Vermin” for even briefly criticizing Hitler. That is what they are trying to do with Kim Dotcom and his colleagues now by having them extradited to the United States where they will be tried by a kangaroo court.
Fascism is very cunning isn’t it? We often think Germans en mass were incredibly stupid to follow Hitler and Fascism. But now, we, the WW2 victor nations, are doing it ourselves. What a pack of idiots!
The New Zealand Prime Minister, John Key, is the son of a Jewish Holocaust Survivor [supposed son, supposed holocaust]. What a disgrace. He, above all of us, should know more about the full implications of what he is doing!
In Nazi Germany, the great paradox was that many of those who were most loyal to the Fuhrer were the first to get a bullet in the back of the head, not only the Jews.
On both counts, the New Zealand Prime Minister should know better. This is what a career in banking does to the mind. Other than filthy lucre – severe amnesia!
So yes. Just carry on watching the football on TV you men, and Soaps on TV you women and one chilling evening [should they have their way] there might be a brisk knock on your door from the new resurrected SS or New World Order Gestapo to take you or your children away forever, for being a threat to “national security” using the new GCSB / SIS draconian warrants.
This is the option they want to be able to exercise.
Inquisition 2.0: The Internet Is Being Taken Hostage By The NWO September 2 2016 | From: Infowars
The globalists may have officially obtained total control of the internet?
Let’s go over the mounting evidence that the internet as we know it will be commandeered by globalist censors beginning midnight October 1st, when an entirely new era of the internet will begin.
Originally, President Obama promised that the Fed’s handover of the antitrust protected Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers or ICANN would not involve the United Nations.
Was this, yet again, a naive move by an incompetent President of the United States?
Or has this been the plan all along?
Are You A Mind-Controlled CIA Stooge? + The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories September 2 2016 | From: PaulCraigRoberts
Do you smirk when you hear someone question the official stories of Orlando, San Bernardino, Paris or Nice? Do you feel superior to 2,500 architects and engineers, to firefighters, commercial and military pilots, physicists and chemists, and former high government officials who have raised doubts about 9/11?
If so, you reflect the profile of a mind-controlled CIA stooge.
The term “conspiracy theory” was invented and put into public discourse by the CIA in 1964 in order to discredit the many skeptics who challenged the Warren Commission’s conclusion that President John F. Kennedy was assassinated by a lone gunman named Lee Harvey Oswald, who himself was assassinated while in police custody before he could be questioned.
The CIA used its friends in the media to launch a campaign to make suspicion of the Warren Commission report a target of ridicule and hostility. This campaign was “one of the most successful propaganda initiatives of all time.”
So writes political science professor Lance deHaven-Smith, who in his peer-reviewed book, Conspiracy Theory in America, published by the University of Texas Press, tells the story of how the CIA succeeded in creating in the public mind reflexive, automatic, stigmatization of those who challenge government explanations.
This is an extremely important and readable book, one of those rare books with the power to break you out of The Matrix.
Professor deHaven-Smith is able to write this book because the original CIA Dispatch #1035-960, which sets out the CIA plot, was obtained through a Freedom of Information Act request. Apparently, the bureaucracy did not regard a document this old as being of any importance.
The document is marked “Destroy when no longer needed,” but somehow wasn’t. CIA Dispatch #1035-960 is reproduced in the book.
The success that the CIA has had in stigmatizing skepticism of government explanations has made it difficult to investigate State Crimes Against Democracy (SCAD) such as 9/11.
With the public mind programmed to ridicule “conspiracy kooks,” even in the case of suspicious events such as 9/11 the government can destroy evidence, ignore prescribed procedures, delay an investigation, and then form a political committee to put its imprimatur on the official story.
Professor deHaven-Smith notes that in such events as Kennedy’s assassination and 9/11 official police and prosecutorial investigations are never employed. The event is handed off to a political commission.
Professor deHaven-Smith’s book supports what I have told my readers: the government controls the story from the beginning by having the official explanation ready the moment a SCAD occurs. This makes any other explanation a “conspiracy theory.” This is the way Professor deHaven-Smith puts it:
“A SCAD approach to memes assumes further that the CIA and other possibly participating agencies are formulating memes well in advance of operations, and therefore SCAD memes appear and are popularized very quickly before any competing concepts are on the scene.”
The CIA’s success in controlling public perception of what our Founding Fathers would have regarded as suspicious events involving the government enables those in power positions within government to orchestrate events that serve hidden agendas.
The events of September 11 created the new paradigm of endless war in behalf of a Washington-dominated world. The CIA’s success in controlling public perceptions has made it impossible to investigate elite political crimes. Consequently, it is now possible for treason to be official US government policy.
Professor deHaven-Smith’s book will tell you the story of the assassination of President Kennedy by elements of the US military, CIA, and Secret Service. Just as the Warren Commission covered up the State Crime Against Democracy, Professor deHaven-Smith shows why we should doubt the official 9/11 story. And anything else that the government tells us.
Read this book. It is short. It is affordable. It is reality preparation. It will innoculate you against being a dumbshit, insouciant, brainwashed American. I am surprised that the CIA has not purchased the entire print run and burned the books.
Perhaps the CIA feels secure from its success in brainwashing the public and does not believe that American democracy and accountable government can be restored.
The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories
The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented by the CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief of Official Government Stories
Ron Unz reports on the cold shoulder given to an extensively researched book that concludes that World War II hero General George Patton was murdered by the CIA because he became a powerful critic of Washington.
The book was ignored because the US media and public have been programmed to regard the US government as a truth-teller and those who expose government crimes as “conspiracy theorists.”
In 2013 Professor Lance Dehaven-Smith in a peer-reviewed book published by the University of Texas Press showed that the term “conspiracy theory” was developed by the CIA as a means of undercutting critics of the Warren Commission’s report that President Kennedy was killed by Oswald. The use of this term was heavily promoted in the media by the CIA.
It is ironic that the American left is a major enforcer of the CIA’s strategy to shut up skeptics by branding them conspiracy theorists.
Kim Dotcom Wins Bid To Livestream On YouTube His Extradition Appeal September 1 2016 | From: TVNZ
Internet entrepreneur Kim Dotcom has won a bid to livestream on YouTube his battle against extradition to the United States.
The 42-year-old Megaupload founder has this week returned to court to appeal a decision allowing him to be extradited from New Zealand over criminal copyright charges.
Comment: The final outcome of this court case here in New Zealand right now ultimately will decide the freedom of the entire global Internet as we know it!
On top of that, at issue is national sovereignty, and whether multinational corporations can be allowed to manipulate the sovereign laws of one country or through international trade agreements etc. to take precedence over the sovereign laws of another independent country – in this case New Zealand.
Incredibly, against strong opposition from the US Government yesterday, the judge is allowing this appeal trial to be live-streamed to the world on YouTube, starting today, but as yet, I haven’t been able to find it.
So all this means, if the live-streaming goes ahead, the multinational corporate media cannot CENSOR the truth about the case as they have been.
Today, the presiding judge gave permission for the entire six weeks of the appeal hearing to be broadcast on YouTube by a cameraman hired by Dotcom.
Between the direct effect on millions of Megaupload users as well as the precedent the case would set, the public interest merited complete coverage standard media channels could not provide, Dotcom's lawyer, Ron Mansfield, had argued at the High Court in Auckland.
Advertisement
“This is a case of the internet age," he said.
Lawyers for the United States oppose the livestream, saying Dotcom was not sufficiently accountable for the coverage - as a media organisation would be - and that the footage could prejudice a criminal case in the US if the extradition went ahead.
But Justice Murray Gilbert allowed the stream to go ahead, on the grounds the comments and live-chat features for the video were disabled, the video was taken down after the trial and the broadcast was delayed for 20 minutes to avoid publishing of sensitive material.
"This is breaking new ground. New Zealand at the forefront of transparent justice! Leadership!" Dotcom tweeted moments later.
The livestream will start tomorrow. In December, Judge Nevin Dawson ruled Dotcom and his three associates - Mathias Ortmann, Finn Batato and Bram van der Kolk - had criminal charges to face in the US over their part in running file-sharing website Megaupload.
The four men face charges of conspiracy to commit racketeering, conspiracy to commit money laundering, wire fraud and two kinds of criminal copyright infringement based on an FBI investigation going back to 2010.
If extradited and found guilty in the US, the men could be up for decades in jail.
Australia Becomes First Country To Begin Microchipping Its Public August 31 2016 | From: NeonNettle
Australia is to become the first country in the world to microchip its public. NBC news predicted that all Americans would be microchipped by 2017, but it seems Australia may have beaten them to the post. These idiots must be some of the most stupid people alive.
News.com.au reports: It may sound like sci-fi, but hundreds of Australians are turning themselves into super-humans who can unlock doors, turn on lights and log into computers with a wave of the hand.
Shanti Korporaal, from Sydney, is at the centre of the phenomenon after having two implants inserted under her skin.
Now she can get into work and her car without carrying a card or keys, and says her ultimate goal is to completely do away with her wallet and cards.
“You could set up your life so you never have to worry about any password or PINs” she told news.com.au.
“It’s the same technology as Paypass, so I’m hoping you’ll be able to pay for things with it.
With Opal you get a unique identification number that could be programmed into the chip. Any door with a swipe card... it could open your computer, photocopier. Loyalty cards for shops are just another thing for your wallet.”
The microchips, which are the size of a grain of rice, can act like a business card and transfer contact details to smartphones, and hold complex medical data.
Shanti has had some messages from ultra-conservative Christians on Facebook telling her she’s going to hell, but the reaction has mainly been one of intrigue.
“My nana wants one,” laughs Shanti. “I’ve had more opposition to my tattoos than I’ve ever had to the chip. My friends are jealous.”
When the 27-year-old realised just how coveted the implants were, she set up an Australian distribution service called Chip My Life with her husband, Skeeve Stevens.
It costs between $80 and $140 depending on the sophistication of the technology, and (while you can do it at home) they work with doctors who charge $150 to insert the implant.
“They do minor surgery, Botox and so on,” says Shanti. “They give you a local, an injection and a quick ultrasound to make sure it’s in place.”
The biohacking couple both have RFID (radio-frequency identification) chips in their left hands and NFC (near-field communication) chips in the right. The implant is almost impossible to spot, leaving a mark as small as a freckle.
The Pioneer
Shanti is appearing at today’s Sydney launch of cyborg-themed video game Deus Ex Mankind Divided alongside US implantable technology pioneer Amal Graafstra.
Amal considers himself a guinea-pig for human augmentation, making headlines in the US last week with a prototype of the world’s first implant-activated smart gun.
He became one of the world’s first RFID implantees in 2005, and has since founded an online store to sell the “at home” kits to people who want to “upgrade their body”. He’s written a book, spoken at TEDx and appeared in documentaries.
“On a psychological level, this is completely different to a smartphone or a Fitbit, because it goes in you,” he told news.com.au.
“Your kidneys are working hard but you’re not thinking about them, it’s not something you have to manage.
It’s given me the ability to communicate with machines. It’s literally integrated into who I am.”
He is aware of the ethical and security concerns, but points out that the data is encrypted, and most of your access cards are not secure anyway. This is simply a case of “computing in the body.”
Rather than worry about people being forced to be microchipped, he’s now busy advocating for the rights of citizens who use them.
He believes the destruction of the chip could in some cases classify as assault (as with a pacemaker) and other dangers might be governments forcibly extracting implants or data from them.
“I want to make sure it’s treated as part of the body, like an organ,” he says.
One firm in Sweden has allowed employees to choose chips over a work pass, with 400 taking up the offer, but Amal says he more often hears from interested individuals who want to try it out.
“At the moment, it’s mainly access - house, computer motorcycle. But in the future there’s the potential to use it for transit, payment. You could get rid of your keys and maybe your wallet.”
Other uses might include children tapping to let parents know they are at school safely, refugees checking in at camps or women at shelters.
It can share diet, exercise and sleep inform
ation with you and your doctor, and the next generation could even release medicine as and when you need it. For Shanti, adding an extra dimension to life is a childhood fantasy come true.
“Ever since watching movies like the Terminator, Matrix and Minority Report I wondered if we could actually live like that. I always wondered why we all weren’t living as ‘super-humans’.”
5 Damaging Lies Advertisements Desperately Want You To Believe August 31 2016 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
Every single day we are bombarded with thousands of advertisements, whether we realize it or not.
Being accustomed to their constant presence, we don’t consciously pay attention to them and can’t realize the tremendous negative impact they have on us and the world.
Below are five quite damaging lies that advertisements want you to believe and which you should be aware of so as to avoid falling into their trap.
1. You are incomplete. Advertisements do their best to convince you that you are not enough as you are. Once they achieve to make you feel bad about yourself, they provide you with a solution to make you feel well again: that of buying the products they sell.
2. Everything you need is on sale. Advertisements want to persuade you to think that anything you desire can be bought. Do you want to feel confident? Then buy this shiny car! Do you feel you’re not attractive to the opposite sex? Then get yourselves some hip shoes! Are you stressed? Then consume these magic pills!
3. Material possessions are all that matters in life. Another damaging lie promoted through advertising is that acquiring material things is the key to living well. You needn’t search anywhere else for happiness and fulfillment, such as in pursuing your passions or building healthy relationships with people - there’s always a product that can substitute for all those things.
4. Success is measured by the stuff you own. Advertisements try to fool you into believing that if you have less and worse stuff than those around you, then you are a person to be looked down upon, and that the only way to prove your importance is to get more and better stuff than others.
5. Consuming without end is normal. Lastly yet perhaps most importantly, advertisements are trying to convince you that your purpose in life is to consume, and that only by doing so will you fit in society. As a result, they can immensely complicate your life by stressing you to constantly hunt for the next best thing, regardless of how wasteful that behavior is and the negative consequences it has on the planet.
As you can understand, the sole purpose of advertisements is to sell you stuff so that companies and corporations can make an economic gain, and the tactics they use to achieve that are hideous and deceptive.
The quicker you realize this fact and stop buying into their lies, the more you’ll be able to live free, without feeling the constant pressure to mindlessly waste your time, energy, and the earth’s finite resources to satisfy your artificial needs.
When Plutocrats Own The Weather & Nobody Is Buying The “Climate Change” Hoax Anymore August 30 2016 | From: MyEClinik
There are at least two notable human pursuits that have endured across the ages, i.e. physical immortality and the ability to tame nature.
The hunt for the fountain of youth and the ability to please and summon the gods to alter the weather so that rain may fall and crops may grow, have encouraged barbaric rituals, propelled sciences to greater heights, and motivated wars and conflict causing the rise and fall of empires.
Such is the frailty of man, ignorant about his own spiritual immortality, oblivious about his being part of Nature, herself immortal and godly. So, he ventured upon the complete control of Science and all the technological advancements only for himself and himself alone.
At least 100 years ago, humanity has already acquired the ability to control all planetary parameters, e.g. weather engineering, longevity, fuel less engines and light speed travel, which should qualify us as a Type 1 civilization.
But, as the old adage says, “a little knowledge is very dangerous,” his incomplete understanding of himself and Nature pushes him to misuse the ability to control the weather to eliminate others as if his eventual exclusive reign on the planet would make him immortal.
The present empire is far resilient than its predecessors combined. That’s because it has mastered the art of controlling the mind above all other sciences.
We, too, are equally irresponsible to have allowed the reign of these plutocrats who have not toiled to make these scientific achievements a reality. We fall for the deceptive excuse of climate change, overpopulation, silly concept of god’s will, and the unbreakable limits of dogmatic science.
We consented to the madness of the unwise.
"Here is the Bureau of Reclamation’s promotional video entitled “ Mountain Skywater” discussing the effectiveness of the US. government program.
Weather Warfare, March 20, 1967 - July 5, 1972
Operation Popeye first came to public light in March 1971, when reporter Jack Anderson published a story based on a secret 1967 memo from the Joint Chiefs of Staff to President Johnson. The memo read: “Laos operations – Continue as at present plus Pop Eye to reduce the trafficability [sic] along infiltration routes & Authorization requested to implement operational phase of weather modification process previously successful tested and evaluated in some area”. (US Senate, Subcommittee on Oceans and International Environment; 26 July 1972; p. 5).
Members of Congress pressed the Pentagon to unveil details of the weather modification program. Senator Claiborne Pell, chairman of the Senate Subcommittee on Oceans and International Environment, and later chairman of the Foreign Relations Committee, was the engine behind that effort, although there were others, both in the Senate and the House, who devoted energy to it.
Rainmaking operations were a source of concern not only because the impact of the operations themselves, but because they were seen as opening the door to a new and dangerous type of warfare. Severe rains and typhoons in North Vietnam in 1971 added to concern, a link to the U.S. cloud seeding operations was suspected. According to Pell:
Rainmaking as a weapon of war can only lead to the development of vastly more dangerous environmental techniques whose consequences may be unknown and may cause irreparable damage to our global environment. This is why the United States must move quickly to ban all environmental or geophysical modification techniques from the arsenals of war.
(US Senate, Subcommittee on Oceans and International Environment; July 26, 1972; p. 4)
On 23 September 1971, Pell sent a letter to the Defense Department requesting information on Operation Popeye. After waiting 4 months to answer, the Defense Department declined to reply on the basis that it would threaten national security. (US Senate, Subcommittee on Oceans and International Environment; 26 July 1972; p. 4). Testifying to the Senate on 18 April 1972, Secretary of Defense Melvin Laird denied any weather modification in Northern Vietnam, saying “we have never engaged in that type of activity over Northern Vietnam.”
(Quoted in: US Senate, Subcommittee on Oceans and International Environment; March 20, 1974; p. 109.).
Laird wasn’t the only official whose 1972 weather modification testimony was untruthful.
Benjamin Forman, a senior Department of Defense lawyer, reiterated Laird’s denial later that year: “We have not, as Secretary Laird has previously said, ever engaged in weather modification activities in Northern Vietnam.”
At the same hearing, the Deputy Director of the US Arms Control and Disarmament Agency had similar difficulties. Asked by Senator Pell if rainmaking projects had been approved by Laos and Thailand, Philip Farley replied: “I don’t wish even to admit, sir, that there were such projects.” [13]
International Ban on Weather Warfare and (some) transparency in Weather Modification
As a result of the weather warfare over Vietnam and the lies told by top brass at the U.S. military during Congressional testimony, an international ban on weather warfare was drafted and signed in 1978 and numerous weather modification reporting laws were passed in the United States of America.
Weather Modification Reporting Act of 1972 – Public Law 92-205 “AN ACT To provide for the reporting of weather modification activities to the Federal Government” [14] 15 CFR Part 908 — “Maintaining Records and Submitting Reports on Weather Modification Activities” [15] – NOAA reporting forms [16][17]
National Weather Modification Policy Act of 1976 – Public Law 94-490 “AN ACT To authorize and direct tlie Secretary of Commerce to develop a national policy on weather modification, and for other purposes” [18] 15 U.S. Code Chapter 9A – “Weather Modification Activities or Attempts; Reporting Requirement” [19]
In addition, Congress ordered a full accounting of weather modification activities across the United States of America.
Weather Modification: Programs, Problems, Policy, and Potential – Prepared at the Request of Hon. Howard W. Cannon, Chairman Committee on Commerce, Science, and Transportation, United States Senate [21]
Summary of Weather Modification Activities Reported in 1979, U.S. Department of Commerce, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration Office of Research and Development [22]’
Cloud seeding went from invention, to nationwide experimentation, and finally weaponization in less than thirty years.”
While they manipulate the weather to support the global warming, or climate change false narratives, they are also establishing trillion dollar industries that would reduce carbon emissions, on top of the the carbon taxes floated before, all purposely to siphon funds from UN member countries into their pockets.
Of course it does. What else explains the convergence of interest in the organizations, structures and mechanisms for global governance that the magical global thermostat narrative affords?
Heck, it’s why EDF, Engie, Air France, Renault, BNP Paribas and a host of other oiligarch companies footed 20% of the bill for the Paris conference itself (and why the French government bent over backwards to point out their “green” credentials).
Take just one structural element of the climate swindle: the Green Climate Fund. Never heard of it? Hardly surprising. It’s just the facility through which the UN is expected to be clearing $100 billion in climate funding per year by the end of the decade. That’s right: $100 billion per year. Every year.
The Fund was established at the 2010 edition of the UN Climate Conference (COP16) in Mexico in order “to support concrete mitigation actions by developing countries that are implemented in a transparent way,” which is UN Newspeak for “create a bottomless trough of pork for corrupt kleptocrats, bureaucrats, kakistocrats and tyrants to siphon off before funneling some loose change into some makework projects.”
And it brags that it represents “a new and equitable form of global governance to respond to the global challenge of climate change” which you hardly need the globalist decoder to figure out.
The Fund is headquartered in the Songdo Business District of Incheon, South Korea, because the Korean Secretary-General of the UN and the Korean President of the World Bank probably just threw darts at a map (since, as we all know, blatant political nepotism never happens at those institutions).
Even the Fund’s biggest supporters are criticizing the “transparent way” it is handling its first disbursement. The Fund claims it consulted indigenous communities before approving $6.2 million for a Peruvian wetlands resilience programme, but there is no verification that this ever took place. Worse, details of the projects it has decided to fund so far have not been publicly released, only proposal documents (and in two cases, only a summary).
But for those who still believe this money is being handled by angels with nothing but the best interests of humanity in mind, note this passage from the Nature article on the Fund’s shadiness:
“For some, another contentious issue is that the GCF is flowing its money mainly through international organizations, such as multilateral or private banks such as the World Bank and Deutsche Bank — rather than sending it directly to institutions in developing countries where the projects are taking place.”
For some? You mean, for people with their head screwed on straight?
Oh, and the kicker? The Fund’s Executive Director just happens to be an ex-Citibank investment banker. Who woulda thunk it?
Yes, the global climate swindle is well under way, brought to you by the same trustworthy folks in the banking industry and in the Fortune 500 / CFR / globalist jetset who have been steering us into the happy economic, political and environmental conditions that we enjoy today…”
Not only that they’ll gain considerable “liquidity,” but also justify the need to reduce the population, the number one source of carbon emissions according to vaccine advocate Bill Gates.
All is well and good in Kleptoland until the non-aligned nations on Earth, together with the BRICS Collective, started planning for the systematic downfall of the Bilderbergers, by moving away from fiat dollar, among other strategic covert measures now forcing the Western Oligarchy to sit on the table with Russia about the Syrian issue, and the successful conclusion of the Iran Nuclear Deal.
This is the cause why those who have expressed commitment to the Paris Climate Conference last year are not about to put substance to the “save the planet” rhetoric yet.
“If there’s any bright spot in all of this it’s that so far the Fund has only managed to raise just over $10 billion in pledges from the developed countries. And even that is an inflated number which includes the $3 billion which Obama made a big show of pledging in 2014 but so far hasn’t actually delivered. It’s a long way to go to get to that $100 billion/year mark they’re hoping to reach by 2020.
Don’t feel too sorry for the globalists, though. Their game is a war of attrition, and as long as people continue to buy into the narrative that all of this money is going to help the poor and downtrodden (by way of the UN and the World Bank and their corporate crony Wall Street financial institutions) then it’s only a matter of time before this thin edge of climate cronyism turns into the full wedge of global kleptocracy.”
They are now waiting for the unfolding of something big, hopefully within the next quarter, or the second half of this year.
The recent defeat of the Rothschild Khazarian Mafia in the Middle East, the global crime syndicate that controlled world finance and corporate governments around the world for the last 80 years, or so, has also crippled its ability to control the “climate change” narrative as the coercion factor dissipates.
Although, there’s still a lot of work to be done before the formal announcement of the global reset, it’s still good to know that we are now moving towards a more positive future for humanity.
One of the suppressed technologies that will soon be released has to do with longevity.
We’ve been here before. Countless archaeological evidences are showing we have undergone so many cycles of decays and repopulations, because we have never learned yet that passivity, too, is a disease which needs to be cured.
Never forget that the enemy still has access to weather weapons, and carbon is not the culprit, but an essential component of life on this planet.
We can mitigate the effects of any chemicals and neutralized all types of parasites without using highly toxic drugs and expensive procedures, but only with a very simple and complete protocol that defeats all known and unknown diseases for good, without any long-term side-effects. Find more about it here.
The Overthrow Of America - By Its Enemies Within August 30 2016 | From: Sott
My recent article exposes a brand new propaganda infomercial starring Angelina Jolie and 15 other high profile card-carrying members of the treasonous elitist "think tank" the Council on Foreign Relations.
I outed the its obvious attempt at an image makeover, upgrading its Mr. Burns-David Rockefeller image of wrinkled, old white men ruling the world to a new generation of bright young stars brilliantly working together to solve the planet's most daunting challenges and problems facing humanity in the 21st century.
Yet a brief US history of the last 100 years with a more detailed focus on the last decade and a half since 9/11 reveals the true story in plain sight of how infiltrated traitors within our own government have long had scheming eyes on their sinister prize of one world government tyranny.
But the story could just as easily begin the same year America's Founding Fathers signed the Declaration of Independence in July 1776. Another historically significant figure in Bavaria in southern Germany barely two months earlier was busy founding the secret Order of the Illuminati.
The son of a rabbi but trained in Jesuit tradition he later came to despise, German philosopher Adam Wieshaupt dabbled in Freemasonry and the Cabbala before developing his own secret society. With fellow Jewish [read: Khazarian Zionist] Rothschild money, they plotted an ambitious, highly subversive plan for their anti-Catholic secret society of elitists to implement global governance.
Influenced by both ancient Talmudic roots and Egyptian occult nearly two and a half centuries ago, prior to the United States even becoming a sovereign, independent nation, Weishaupt and his "illumined" order already identified the three major barriers deemed the true enemy of one world government.
For well over a century traitors within the US federal government have persistently sought to undermine and vanquish Weishaupt's three declared enemy obstacles to one world government - American citizens' love of God and their predominant Christian religion, patriotic love of country and national sovereignty, and love of family and parents that include private property inheritance.
What is striking is that Karl Marx in his Communist Manifesto also calls for abolishment of family, private property, countries/nationalities and religion as well. One world government is the fait accompli umbrella that unites Marxists, Zionists, Fabian Socialists, the United Nations, the EU, the Parliamentary Group for World Government, Trilateral Commission, CFR, Bilderberg Group, Trans-Pacific Partnership, the TTIP, the Vatican and the World Council of Churches.
Obviously this globalist agenda has been winning on all accounts, overcoming aforementioned barriers targeted centuries earlier. Subsequently with the direction this nation has taken since 9/11 under the Bush-Obama regime, the US populace is more confused, polarized and conflicted than ever before.
The ruling elite has historically used US Empire to do its dirty bidding as both global bully and nation exterminator. From behind a thinly veiled curtain, the CFR's been the Intel handler directing all US wars in a nonstop foreign policy conquest of global unipolar hegemony for the last 95 years now.
The same founders of the 1921 Council on Foreign Relations a few years earlier had deceitfully snuck through their secret Jekyll Island masterplan called the Federal Reserve Act as its financial WMD on the eve of Christmas Eve 1913 right after most Congress members had already left Washington on holiday break.
Thus a band of powerful thieves was stealthily successful in infiltrating the government and hijacking America on their way to destroying our democratic republic. For good measure, during that same fateful year that our republic took it first fatal blow, they also finagled passage of their unconstitutional "1%" Federal Income Tax Act when they took license to begin stealing, misappropriating and bleeding working class Americans dry while monopolizing mega-giant corporations enjoy tax-free, corporate welfare subsidies.
The US government oligarchy squeezes ten times more out of overburdened taxpayers for obscene corporate welfare programs than for welfare for America's most poverty-stricken families. The rich get richer while a growing disenfranchised class of Americans are thrown to the Wall Street wolves as purged useless eaters as part of the elite's eugenics endgame.
Once their Ponzi schemed 1913 Federal Reserve Act was in place, it took the parasitic traitors only a few months to began what was to become history's deadliest "war to end all wars" killing 17 million people. Little more than a decade later the bankers' intentionally manipulated the Great Depression and the treasonous failed coup of 1934 that "war is a racket" General Smedley Butler heroically stopped and exposed.
Then the banking vultures like George W's grandpa Prescott Bush turned to financing Hitler's rise to power in order to cause history's bloodiest of all wars in WWII killing over 60 million, followed immediately by the elite's contrived cold war against their next bankrolled enemy the Communists that included both the Korean and Vietnam Wars.
Fact based evidence clearly shows time and time again that all of America's wars have been brought to us exclusively by the bankster gangsters who hijacked our government a century ago and been in the driver's seat ever since.
In 1913 private bankers were able to seize control over America's money supply, allowing them to print it out of thin air and over the years loaning the government trillions of dollars the US taxpayers would forever be footing the bill to pay off interests on all those war loan debts and big government pork barrel spending that keep mounting into the colossal, unpayable US debt (standing at near $20 trillion that's doubled under Obama to match all previous presidencies combined!).
The corrupt system of thievery has taxpayers paying for wars that bankers create, always financing both sides as in Germany's pre-WWI militarization and the Bolshevik Revolution and later Hitler's prewar rise to power. Washington and its allies have been busted for all along secretly funding America's so called war on terror enemy - the al Qaeda/ISIS terrorists.
By elite design, virtually every military conflict in US history has been intentionally started by bankers using false flag operations as their deceptive pretext for nonstop war 93% of the time.
After inventing al Qaeda (then mujahedeen) as paid CIA mercenaries that proved instrumental in breaking up the Soviet Empire in the "graveyard of empires" Afghanistan throughout the 1980's, and again throughout the 90's balkanizing a shattered Yugoslavia into a half dozen broken pieces, Washington's Zionist neocons in control of foreign policy then decided to reinvent al Qaeda and their hitherto proxy war ally Osama bin Laden as the latest post-Soviet era bogeymen - Islamic terrorists.
Their inside 9/11 job along with their anthrax terrorism (produced in a federal lab) was then used to rush through their Patriot Act, already pre-penned by the Bush-Cheney-Rumsfeld war criminal chain gang to finish the task begun back in 1913 to destroy the US as a democratic republic . The same secret societies like the Freemasons, Skull and Bones disciples and CFR lifers that infiltrated and hijacked our federal government a century earlier are even more firmly in control today.
The Bush-Clinton-Obama crime cabal dynasty has been calling the shots ever since the assassination of John F. Kennedy, and they're currently in the final stages of implementing their long awaited one world government tyranny. Recognizing that Americans are finally catching on to their endless crime cabal debauchery, the globalists are rushing to their NWO finish line.
A year after 9/11-Patriot Act inside job, the Department of Homeland Security artificially emerged to ostensibly protect Americans, but like all things Orwellian, does exactly the opposite. As part of the bloated, self-serving, bureaucratic security state apparatus, and terminal cancer to our lost democratic republic, it's done little to none in stopping terrorism.
What it does do is purge any records linking the Muslim Brotherhood to terrorism. Local San Bernardino and nearby Orlando Fort Myers mosques that had connections to the alleged false flag shooters were ordered erased. DHS has been repeatedly caught bussing unvetted illegal aliens from Somalia and who knows where else.
The Orlando shooter was employed for nearly a decade at the world's largest private security company GS4 that's under contract with DHS transporting illegals from the border into America's heartland as part of its catch and release policy.
An eyewitness video captured a UPS plane under the cover of darkness flying in human cargo presumably from the Middle East, loading them onto 30 busses and whisking them away from the Harrisburg, PA airport. State governors are complaining Obama is secretly sending refugees into states without even notifying the governors.
With 6,227 Syrian refugees arriving this year as of July, Obama promised the UN he'd take in an additional 10,000 Syrians by the end of next month. Fulfilling promises to the global elite and UN obviously mean everything, unlike all his broken campaign promises like transparency to the American people. During Obama's first five years in office alone, green cards were issued to 680,000 immigrants arriving from Muslim nations.
Each year the US admits a quarter million Muslim migrants. Thanks to our treasonous commander-in-chief, unvetted and set free, ISIS cells in America are alive and well.
For the first time in a decade, near half the total refugees arriving in the US this year are Muslims outnumbering Christians. Obama's open border policy has DHS ordering Border Patrol officers to stand down, permitting known drug traffickers and MS13 criminal gang members to freely enter and commit crimes against Americans.
DHS is treasonously working with the UN to allow criminals and potential terrorists into our country at the same time DHS is targeting law abiding citizens who happen to be patriots, veterans, gun owners, constitutionalists and dissidents as its homegrown enemy.
Meanwhile, returning to those three sworn Illuminati enemies, through mass media propaganda and the likes of fourth wave feminism and the LBGT-PC agenda, the elite's been busily engaging in social engineering that has globally undermined male-female relations, confused gender roles and sexuality, and subsequently by design seriously weakened the family bond.
As a former licensed therapist working within the child welfare system, I can attest to deep state authoritarianism perpetrated by overzealous child protective services Nazis that wrongfully break up families and further abuse children who were my victimized clients.
Oppressive overreach in both education and social services at federal, state and county levels has clearly usurped autonomous rights of America's parents. The "progressive" idea being pushed nowadays insists that children no longer belong to their parents but the globalized community.
Much has been written about the subversive forces of social indoctrination heavily tainted in communist and socialist ideology now being so aggressively deployed by the so called progressive left. As an example, the Obama administration coerced 46 out of 50 states into accepting Common Core standards as a condition to receiving much needed federal aid funding.
The systemic brainwash of today's youth through a purposely dumbed down public education system is insidiously polluting impressionable young minds with Common Core garbage.
The collectivist dogma frowns upon individuality and individual achievement as one's value is only as good as one's contribution and benefit toward the collective group. Unthinking conformity, group mindset and the Political Correctness agenda have suppressed, stifled and supplanted critical thinking, innate creativity and natural inquiry in pursuit of truth that dare questions authority.
The brainwash factory in America goes to work early on in our schools to churn out mindless little robots who simply do what they're told as zombified cogs in the factory wheel, only to find out that when they graduate the factory's been closed, outsourced overseas for cheaper slave labor.
For over a decade US Homeland Security Department and FEMA have been recruiting and training America's clergy to align as deep state propagandist oppressors during a national emergency under martial law. Many religious leaders have sold out on both God and their flock of worshippers to covertly join forces with the feds' treasonous authoritarian tyranny.
In order to retain their 501c3 IRS tax-exempt status, churches, synagogues, temples and mosques across America have been co-opted into nefariously leading their religious followers to the eugenics slaughterhouse, consequently forcing pastors and clerics to betray their own spiritual principles and teachings as taught by Jesus, Muhammad, Buddha.
Per a whistleblowing pastor, FEMA enlisted the biblical passage Romans 13 as the preaching talking point to use in sermons to brainwash their congregations into blindly obeying both them and the federal authorities as preparation for the [intended] coming crises.
It's an over-the-top, all too obvious government ploy to turn community religious leaders into secret police enforcers, rehearsing preparedness for potential bio-terrorist attacks, natural as well as unnatural disasters, declared national emergencies and martial law.
Religious leaders will be counted on by the feds to help tame the "cowboy mentality" of American citizens determined to stand up for their property and Second Amendment rights when by executive order under martial law forced relocation, gun confiscation and property and livestock confiscation will be enforced.
The training sessions call upon the religious community to preach subservience well in advance of what's coming and that the planned forced relocation of citizens will be "for their own good," evoking benevolent Orwellian Big Brother assurance of guaranteed safety and protection as the lure to foster sheep-like obedience.
FEMA trainers emphasize that the program is part of a nationwide preparedness directive under the umbrella of the National Voluntary Organizations Active in Disaster (NVOAD) and ten years ago already had over 13,000 counties in the US on board. FEMA reps also reassure the religious leaders that they will receive full backup and cooperation from law enforcement at all levels when and where citizen resistance is encountered.
A year after this story broke mainstream television station KSLA 12 confirmed the existence of these Clergy Response Teams operating as extensions of the federal government to help quell civil unrest and rebellion under national emergency conditions.
Meanwhile while the feds have been brainwashing pastors to become martial law pacifiers, Obama's practically made it a sin to be a Christian in America. In the US military it literally is against the law to openly share your Christian faith, punishable by court martial. Obama has destroyed troop morale and devastated retention rates in the armed forces.
Biblical scenes and Merry Christmas greetings as an annual Americana tradition has been outlawed in communities across America, replaced by the contrite PC cliché "happy holidays." Daily prayer and a "God"-less Pledge of Allegiance has been surgically removed from every public education classroom across America.
The rigid intolerance enforced in the name of PC radicalism that's taken hold of America today shuns any display remotely Christian while going to extreme lengths not to offend Muslims seems oddly hypocritical, one-sided and unfair.
And to those who succumb to ignorance and hate toward 2 million plus Muslims around the world because the US hired a few Godless mercenary thugs to commit heinous atrocities for the US Empire of Chaos and Destruction of course makes no logical or moral sense either.
Obama's bizarre reaction last year to a Jordanian pilot burned alive by the Islamic State terrorists that he and Hillary created and the slaying and selling of children by ISIS is very telling.
He told Christians to "get off your high horse" in response to the ISIS savagery, adding that Christians committed terrible deeds in the name of Christ referring to the Crusades and Inquisition against Islam and hanging blacks during Jim Crowism.
But an astute critic asked, "Has he ever said ISIS has committed terrible deeds in the name of Muhammad?"
Despite his repeated actions that indicate otherwise, Obama insists that he's a Christian. But he has many doubters. In a poll taken last September, 29% of Americans (43% of the Republicans) think Obama is a Muslim while 43% of Americans believe he's a Christian.
Having been caught telling over a thousand proven lies, Obama is a pathological liar and psychopath. His notorious character is shady from the get-go, a complete fraud demonstrated by his refusal to produce a valid birth certificate to illegally using a dead immigrant's social security number issued in Connecticut where he's never lived. But then psychopaths lie all the time.
Barry and Micheal
It's their second nature, their Modus Operandi and a primary symptom of their mental illness that only feeds their self-serving drive for power, advantage and self-aggrandizement. Incapable of possessing either empathy or a moral conscience, hence Obama the actor's only capable of shedding those crocodile artificially induced tears.
As a condition of his and others like the Clintons and the Bushes, their callous, coldhearted, destructive actions that have harmed and murdered millions of humans produce zero guilt or remorse.
So no matter how many times Obama attempts to explain he's really a Christian, people pay far more attention to his actions speaking louder than any of his deceitful words. In a C-SPAN speech last year in Turkey as well as a 2008 ABC interview with George Stephenopoulos, Obama momentarily let his guard down and rare honest words slipped out. The 2008 "my Muslim faith" admission was immediately corrected by Democratic faithful George.
In addition to these faux pas, Obama once assured an Egyptian foreign minister that "I am a Muslim" and at another Islamic State dinner he uttered, "I am one of you." And once a Pakistani government minister asked Obama to be the world leader for all Muslims.
His alleged Kenyan biological father was Muslim and in his youth from 6-10 he lived as Barry Soetoro in the most Muslim populated country on earth Indonesia with a Muslim stepfather. His third grade teacher told the LA Times he was a Muslim, stating that he registered as such in school and attended Muslim classes.
Obama repeatedly omits Christian references to God and Creator when reciting historic passages like the Declaration of Independence. On a number of occasions he has mocked biblical scripture but even more frequently defends Islam. Before speaking at Georgetown and Notre Dame Universities, he ordered that the cross and religious symbols be covered yet whenever he visits mosques, he never requests a décor adjustment where Allah is posted everywhere.
Vatican court's highest ranking Cardinal Raymond Burke accuses Obama of being "hostile toward Christian civilization" and "promotes anti-life and anti-family policies." Recall Illuminati and Marxist foremost NWO enemies - family and religion.
If that's not enough to question where Obama's loyalty lies, his Kenyan half-brother Malik Obama is a known Muslim Brotherhood member affiliated with a group the State Department classifies as terrorist. That might also explain why Obama's DHS is wiping clean all incriminating records linking terrorism to Muslim Brotherhood.
Additionally, Obama's longtime senior advisor perhaps exerting the most influence and control over the president is Iran-born Muslim Valerie Jarrett.
Through a freedom of information request, Judicial Watch obtained FBI investigative files showing that Jarrett's father, father-in-law and maternal grandfather are/were Communists.
Fellow Chicagoan Valerie Jarrett and her family also have ties to Obama's old mentors terrorist Bill Ayers and Communist Frank Marshall Davis as well as the Muslim Brotherhood.
Last year former Admiral James "Ace" Lyons, Jr. went public accusing Barack Hussein Obama as anti-American, pro-Islamic, pro-Muslim Brotherhood, outing both Valerie Jarrett as well as CIA director John Brennan as Muslims.
According to a former FBI agent, Obama's choice of CIA director John Brennan converted to Muslim while stationed in Saudi Arabia years ago. A military intelligence whistleblower also outed the Muslim Brennan while he was CIA station chief in Jeddah maintaining that Brennan approved visas for the [supposed] 19 alleged 9/11 terrorists.
A couple of other credible sources have also come forth to further corroborate the veracity of these Muslim claims, among them former naval intelligence officer turned investigative journalist Wayne Madsen. Madsen contends that there's "growing evidence" the CIA director's a Wahhabist convert.
Also recall the highly suspicious death in June 2013 of muckraking journalist Michael Hastings who at the time was writing an expose on Brennan and US intelligence when his car was very likely remotely hacked and accelerated up to 80 MPH on an LA surface street before it suddenly exploded blowing the engine 100 feet from the charred body and vehicle.
A WikiLeaks leak from Stratfor, a CIA linked global intelligence firm, mentioned how Brennan was on "a witch hunt" against snooping journalists. A nervous Hastings knew he was being investigated by the FBI and even had asked a friend to borrow her car earlier that same day. Michael Hastings had written two very high profile, unflattering Rolling Stone articles on two prominent generals in charge of the Afghanistan War.
General Stanley McChrystal lost his job over Hastings' revealing portrayal and then a second piece on General David Petraeus who seven months earlier was forced to resign as Brennan's CIA predecessor after Petraeus' scandalous affair with his biographer broke. Again, truth becomes the enemy to dark evil forces.
Having a standing US president and US head of intelligence both treasonous Muslims covertly promoting terrorism around the world amounts to the worst breach of both national as well as global security this planet's ever known.
Understanding the profound damage being done to the world by these two partners-in-crime working in tandem, this The New York Times article noting how close Obama and Brennan are suddenly makes more sense:
"In the 67 years since the CIA was founded, few presidents have had as close a bond with their intelligence chiefs."
Other deeply disturbing influences on Obama's life are his mentors. His longtime mentor Bill Ayers who first got him started in politics is a well-known terrorist from the Weather Underground back in the 1960's and 70's that somehow managed to avoid jail time. Ayers told an FBI informant that had infiltrated his group that once Weather Underground overthrew the US government, 50 million Americans would need to be rounded up and taken to re-education camps.
With his white mother a CIA employee, his grandparents CIA assets and raised among CIA handlers in both Hawaii, Indonesia and perhaps his entire life, Obama was carefully groomed as the Manchurian president selected by the elite to suddenly catapult out of obscurity onto the national stage.
Early in Obama's life from adolescence into young adulthood his closest mentor (and possibly his biological father) was African American Communist, poet and journalist Frank Marshall Davis. Davis was a victim of racism and hated it and America for that reason. As an alternative to the racist pecking order of imperialistic elitism, Frank Marshall Davis turned to Communism Soviet Stalinism style where he believed a black man would be on a more equal footing.
During the time Obama knew him he'd become old and bitter. How much of that resentment and political ideology rubbed off on the young impressionable mulatto Barack struggling to find his blackness growing up in a white family without a black father? Probably quite a bit.
Obama mentions Frank (only by his first name) in his autobiography Dreams from My Father 22 times. But when it came time for his book to go audio in 2005 leading up to his run for presidency, Obama cunningly chose to totally erase Frank the Communist out of his life.
With a violent subversive white radical terrorist and an angry bitter black Stalinist Communist most influential in making him the man he is today, steeped and bred in Manchurian CIA candidacy to become the most "powerful" front man in the world as long as he on cue successfully destroys racist Christian America for his ruling masters, I'd say he's followed his script like the dutiful puppet he is to the T.
His horrendous track record at deceit speaks volumes that only his demonic handlers can be proud of.
By the way, as power hungry puppets spawned from the same criminally psychopathic pond, the Muslim Brotherhood waters still run deep in crime boss Hillary's shady world as well. Look no further than her right hand Muslim gal-pal who's been her top aide the last 20 years - Huma Abedin. When Huma was two-years old her family moved from Michigan to Saudi Arabia where she lived until 18, returning to America to attend college.
It turns out all the while Huma was working for Clinton, she also had a gig as assistant editor of the Journal of Muslim Minority Affairs from 1995 through 2008, a radical Sharia law publication where her Pakistani-born mother is editor out of offices in Jeddah. Mama Abedin also sits on the staff of an organization run by the leader of the Muslim Brotherhood.
The New York Post just ran a detailed article uncovering the family's extremist views endorsing female circumcision, opposing women's rights, attributing domestic violence to men's stress in the world and blamed 9/11 on the US. This shocker is just the latest from the scandal-ridden Clinton campaign.
While using a private internet server, Abedin helped Hillary sell off America to dangerous foreign interests. For more than a dozen years Huma Abedin worked for an organization whose stated objective is to infiltrate and conquer the West in the name of Islam.
The elite has seen to it that all its major players are in place to destroy the United States from within by traitors who secretly hate America. Welcome to New World Disorder [but it won't be allowed to run it's course].
While practicing Christianity openly under Obama's watch is becoming criminalized, or even displaying the American flag in front of your home on Flag Day can get you arrested, Obama and his Attorney General Loretta Lynch are making the politics of Political Correctness the new American law and religion.
Uttering statements that may potentially offend someone in the universe is fast becoming a crime. Being critical of Muslims, apartheid Israel, the LGBT agenda or the federal government are increasingly construed as so called hate crimes that could land you in prison, especially if uttered by potential "homegrown extremists" deemed enemies of the state.
The assault on free speech and flagrant violations of the US Constitution that they took sworn oaths to uphold and protect is overwhelming. The First Amendment right of free speech, freedom of religion, freedom of assembly for peaceful protest are no longer recognized as our rule of law, and exercising those rights increasingly runs the risk of being beaten, thrown in jail or even killed. Freedom of press amongst the 6-oligarch owned MSM mega-media corporations is completely nonexistent.
MSM puppets on each network read from the same disinformation script. And if the Trans-Pacific Partnership passes, the last vestige of a free press and free speech that still can be found on the internet will be totally censored, banned and lost. In this age of tyrannical deceit, truth becomes the enemy.
Our Fourth Amendment rights to unreasonable search and seizure as well as the right to privacy have been completely obliterated with electronic tracking and storing our every move, communicated utterance and transaction. Through civil asset forfeiture laws, police are able to legally rob us blind without warrants or probable cause, literally stealing our cash with no connection to any crime.
But now since May law enforcement has taken it a step further with new scanning devices electronically capable of snatching money right out of our bank accounts. Cops took more assets from Americans in 2014 than all the burglars combined. Eminent domain allows the government at any level from local to federal to steal our home and property not always for public use but for private development as well.
Executive Order 13603 authorizes Obama and his traitors to confiscate our 2nd Amendment right to bear firearms, to confiscate our stored food and water, our vehicles and all our property. Without pay until further notice, the presidential dictator can also literally conscript Americans into slavery.
2012 NDAA ended the 1878 Posse Comitatis law that prohibited US military from interfering in civil affairs. It authorizes military troops to break into our homes without warrant, without charges, arrest and imprison citizens without due process, without legal representation and without trial for an unlimited length of time... Gulag USA.
Bail-in laws give the criminal banksters the right to literally steal all our life savings right out of our "private" unsecured bank accounts. We're now living in a lawless age of New World Disorder where grand theft rape and pillaging everything American citizens always cherished as our freedoms are gone.
The treasonous traitors from within our own government have openly declared an apartheid war on Americans of every persuasion, color, creed, criminalizing anyone who demands accountability for the egregious acts of treason committed by agents from the federal as well as state and municipal levels.
After decades of war in the Middle East and North Africa, the globalists manufactured the migration crisis of near two million and counting (1.3 million in 2015 alone) in Europe and per Obama many more to come to America. The globalist plan is to weaken and destroy the West, creating such a clash of civilizations that a volatile enough racial and religious divide will foment race/religious civil wars.
Speaking of race war, in addition to being a top financier of Hillary's crooked path to a rigged presidency, billionaire George Soros first helped fund her and her assistant Nuland's illegal 2014 Ukraine coup, singlehandedly ushering in cold war 2 against Russia.
Backing the fascist corrupt Kiev regime, Soros, Hillary and Obama have caused the bloody civil war still raging in eastern Ukraine that could easily ignite World War III that Hillary promises to deliver. And in recent weeks the war in the Donbass region is intensifying.
A recently released CIA report has surfaced pointing the finger at Soros financing a series of bombing attacks in Czechoslovakia during 1986 and 1987 in efforts to overthrow the then Communist government. Meet the terrorist behind the terrorists who's been free to operate his paid for violence evil with impunity throughout the world now for 30 years.
Let us not forget Soros' evil misdeeds in America with his intention to incite race wars on US soil. He dropped 33 million in a single year to deploy his paid army of bussed in agitators and co-opted Black Lives Matter protesters to invade inner cities whenever Obama's coldblooded police force murder another unarmed black man.
With near weekly incidents now of police killing unarmed Americans and Intel handled MK Ultra patsies killing police, at this point Obama, Hillary and Soros' wet dream has almost been fulfilled. While racism exists in America, deep state is using it as an exploited, divide and conquer weapon to intentionally cause such out of control civil and racial violence that it will then be used as the convenient trigger for dictator Obama or dictator Hillary to declare martial law.
Comment: While it is true that police state USA is exacerbating racial tensions we would be doing BLM an injustice if we were to paint its existence with one Soros-dipped brush stroke. See this.
With ma and pa neighborhood stores selling made-in-America products long dead now, and America's malls fast becoming dying ghost towns minus a disappearing, once vibrant middle class, times ahead look mighty grim for America. All 133 Target stores in Canada were closed last year and 154 Walmarts in the US are boarded up under contract with Homeland Security, most likely waiting to be reopened when the SHTF as FEMA roundup processing centers.
With Obama dropping doom and gloom hints ominously warning Americans to be prepared for impending coming disasters, get ready for a series of rapid fire false flag crises, like a so called massive cyber-hack attack breaching America's bank security declaring on Friday a banker's holiday and inaccessibly frozen ATM's and private bank account assets on Monday.
Or an EMP attack that's been waiting to happen on America's extremely vulnerable power grid that the feds have known about for years but refuse to invest in infrastructure to protect the 90% of Americans who would likely die without electricity within 12 months.
Or the highly amplified weaponized cell towers capable of delivering non-thermal, radioactive heat that could fry us in our own backyard neighborhoods. Or the black ops Tesla inspired pulsar weapons technology related to HAARP weather warfare through diabolically staged unnatural disasters like earthquakes, volcanos, tsunamis, floods and droughts, combined with towers that resonate with brain frequencies for massive mind control using heavy metals as EMF conductors from geoengineered chemtrails.
Nuclear weapons could begin disappearing in Turkey into unaccounted hands potentially with ISIS fingerprints on them. After all, the US has consistently been the main supplier of terrorists' weapons - always "mysteriously" ending up in their hands.
Speaking of weapons and supplies, recent sightings of massive movement of UN military vehicles and weapons in the US have been sighted perfectly timed with recent authorization for UN troop deployment on US soil under backdoor stipulation to "protect" civilians but could just as easily kill us under martial law orders when they come to lock us up and confiscate our guns.
Or another flimsily veiled executive order signed on July 1st that authorizes new rules of engagement for deadly drones eradicating declared combatants moving amongst civilian populations that under Obama's loose definition could easily be applied to homegrown civilians believing in the sanctity of our US Constitution and national sovereignty.
The most eminent danger of them all posed by the elite's meticulously planned perfect storm of global economic collapse co-timed with World War III against Russia, China and Iran carrying the very real threat of nuclear annihilation [but again, this is very unlikely to eventuate].
This growing collection of extremely plausible doomsday scenarios seem as endless as the globalists' war on terror, except the terror being perpetrated on us is nothing short of premeditated human genocide by a Satan worshipping, pedophilia-addicted, trans-human elitist crime cabal syndicate.
When history keeps repeating itself, more than convincingly demonstrating that the ruling elite possesses both the criminal means and willful intention to purge 90% of the global population, while enslaving the rest under absolute tyrannical one world government control, it's time to wake up from this nightmare and start fighting back for our very lives.
Comment: Ultimately - the wost case scenario simply will not be allowed to happen. There are far too many contingency plans in place - BUT the masses need to be awakened to the full gravity of the situation and what was planned for them.
Joachim Hagopian is a West Point graduate and former US Army officer. He has written a manuscript based on his unique military experience entitled "Don't Let The Bastards Getcha Down." It examines and focuses on US international relations, leadership and national security issues. After the military, Joachim earned a master's degree in Clinical Psychology and worked as a licensed therapist in the mental health field with abused youth and adolescents for more than a quarter century. In recent years he has focused on his writing, becoming an alternative media journalist. His blog site is at: empireexposed.blogspot.co.
Does The Local Government Act Amendment Bill Result In Amalgamation By Stealth? Local Body Developments August 29 2016 | From: KiwiWatch / NZPCR
After Amalgamation failures in Northland, Hawke’s Bay and Wellington is the National government attempting to do this via the backdoor while everyone was watching the Rio Olympics?
At the recent local government conference widespread concern was expressed about the potential loss of “local democracy” if a revamped Local Government Commission (LGC) is authorised to amalgamate various bodies and require the establishment of commercial agencies with little if any elected directors.
Discussion almost entirely ignored the most radical proposal now before the House: to make the LGC a Crown agent (that is, subject to explicit direction by a minister) and to exempt from the Official Information Act any information from or about the process leading to a decision of the LGC, for example, to amalgamate.
Perhaps the bill is just provocative; perhaps fears of making local government a creature of the central executive are groundless. If not, this is a significant constitutional change.
Judith Aitken
Retiring Wellington Regional Councillor
Te Aro
I do not recall seeing anything in the HB Today about submissions which have, of course, closed. The bill is before parliament on its second reading before reaching a Select Committee.
This is of great concern because, once again, our democracy is being challenged BEHIND CLOSED DOORS and the unwanted result will be presented to us as fait accompli – too late for us to do anything, again.
"If at first you don’t succeed, try, try again. Then quit. There’s no point in being a damn fool about it!" - W.C. Field, American comedian
Not content with the failure of the Local Government Commission to merge councils in Northland, the Hawke’s Bay, and Wellington, National is now proposing to put their amalgamation agenda into effect via the back door, by using a new local government bill to increase the power of the Commission, while removing important democratic rights.
The Local Government Act 2002 Amendment Bill (No 2) is now in front of Parliament’s Local Government and Environment Select Committee and is open for submissions until Thursday 28 July – full details can be seen here.
The Bill’s preamble explains that it aims to lift local authority performance, as part of the Government’s overall objective of improving public services and building a more productive and competitive economy. It does this by streamlining the process for combining and co-ordinating services, infrastructure and resources across regions and towns, through a greater use of Council-Controlled Organisations (CCOs).
As the Local Government Minister Sam Lotu-Iiga explained in his first reading speech:
"Communities in Northland, Hawke’s Bay, and Wellington have told us that they do not want full-scale amalgamation, but this bill provides a middle ground. Communities will retain their elected councils; the councils, in turn, will be able to work more collaboratively to manage infrastructure and services across our regions. This will deliver more joined-up, cost-effective services and better value for our ratepayers.”
So while the present legislation promotes council amalgamations as the way to gain the scale required to combine services, the new Bill facilitates the sharing of services between councils, without the need for amalgamation – unless it is agreed by all councils.
While under the present law only individuals, groups, councils, and the Minister can propose amalgamations, the Bill extends that power to the Local Government Commission. To balance that, the Bill includes an automatic poll of citizens over any Commission-led re-organisation proposal, including the transfer of water, transport, or Resource Management Act functions from one local authority to another.
However, there’s a catch. The Bill removes an important democratic safeguard, namely the automatic right of residents and ratepayers to petition councils for a binding poll on any amalgamation proposal – if supported by 10 percent of electors.
As a result, under the new Bill, if a number of councils jointly agree on amalgamation, local citizens will have no right to call for a poll. This has already led to speculation that councils might be encouraged to collude in order to circumvent a public poll.
We strongly recommend that the ability of residents and ratepayers to petition their local authority for a poll on any amalgamation or reorganisation proposals should either be re-instated, or the provision for an automatic poll on Commission-led changes should be extended to cover all amalgamation and re-organisation proposals.
The point is that local ratepayers have a fundamental right to have a say in the structure of representative decision-making in their communities, since they are the ones who fund council infrastructure and assets.
There is also a concern that a central requirement in the current law, that there must be “demonstrable community support” for an amalgamation proposal to proceed, has been removed. Instead, the new Bill focuses on “the likelihood of significant community opposition to any reorganisation…”
In effect, this change in presumption from an amalgamation needing community support to proceed, to the lesser hurdle that it should go ahead, unless there is significant opposition, dramatically lowers the threshold.
We suggest that the old standard is the correct one – new local government re-organisation proposals should have to demonstrate that they have the support of their community in order to proceed.
When community support was used as a benchmark by the Commission in the last three amalgamation attempts, the results were conclusive: in Northland, 93 percent of submitters opposed a single council, in Wellington, 89 percent were opposed, and in the Hawke’s Bay, where a poll was held, 66 percent of voters were opposed.
In defence of the new Bill, the Local Government Minister explained:
"The projected costs of maintaining and building core infrastructure such as water, sewerage, flood protection and roading are growing exponentially faster than the ability of local ratepayers to bear.
The bill enables the development of shared infrastructure ownership and management across regions. This is essential for developing regions and communities”.
But this is also a key reason why communities should remain closely involved in the reform process – the creation of CCOs for the delivery of water and roading services, could remove a major part of the budget of many small councils, signalling their radical downsizing into largely regulatory agencies.
Further, since concerns remain that the Commission, on behalf of the Minister, could create CCOs, without the approval of the council or the community, it is imperative that community involvement and support remains a priority in the Bill – especially given the dreadful problems that are still evident in Auckland, where residents and ratepayers had amalgamation forced upon them.
Meanwhile, the Local Government Commission is wasting no time. Although their plans for Auckland-style super cities and Maori Statutory Boards in Northland, Wellington and the Hawke’s Bay were rejected, they are now informing councils that they intend to reconsider other restructuring options to promote greater efficiencies in the regions. They plan to progress their re-organisation proposals under the new law.
If you are concerned about the potential erosion of local democracy, and the failure of the proposed law to adequately safeguard public involvement in major council reorganisation decision-making, we would urge you to send in a quick submission on the Bill outlining your concerns by Thursday.
With local body elections just weeks away, local government reform is not the only thing being dumped on councils.
This week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator, Fiona Mackenzie, an Auckland-based political commentator, outlines how councillors in the region are having to battle against a power grab by tribal interests for control of the crucial Hauraki Gulf.
The Hauraki Gulf is a massive coastal area covering 1.2 million hectares from Mangawai in the North, to Waihi in the South, and Great Barrier Island in the East, encompassing Auckland, the Hauraki Plains and the Coromandel Peninsula. It includes the Ports of Auckland, shipping routes, marinas, fisheries, marine farms, and other commercial and recreational facilities.
At the present time, as Fiona explains, the area is controlled by the Hauraki Gulf Marine Park Act:
"Since 2000, the Gulf has been managed by the Hauraki Gulf Forum with Auckland Council as its administering authority. Its 21-member board includes Ministry bureaucrats, elected representatives of all the region’s councils, plus 6 self-nominated tribal representatives appointed by the Minister of Conservation.”
She outlines how, at their meeting last month, iwi tried to force through a re-organisation proposal for a new 16-member Board, constituted on the 50:50 Maori sovereignty co-governance model, whereby 8 members would represent Maori and 8 members would represent everyone else, giving tribes unassailable control of the Board and the Hauraki Gulf.
Under their scheme, the number of iwi representatives on the new Forum would be increased from 6 to 8. The number of councillors representing the vast Auckland region would be cut from 7 to 1. Representatives of the five other councils in the area – the Hauraki District Council, the Matamata-Piako District Council, the Thames-Coromandel District Council, the Waikato District Council, and the Waikato Regional Council – would be cut from 5 to 2.
And the number of public servants representing the Minister of Maori Affairs, the Minister of Conservation, and the Minister of Fisheries, would be increased from 3 to 5.
All in all, only 3 of the 16 representatives on the proposed new governance body would be elected to represent the public interest and the almost 2 million people who live in the area.
Under the proposal the new iwi-controlled Board would demand statutory authority to enact legislation over the entire area.
Why, in a democracy based on equal rights and the rule of law, such a racist proposal could have progressed to the point where it is being seriously considered, is hard to fathom – although it’s not altogether surprising, given that the long-term agenda of Maori tribal leaders is to gain sufficient status and power to control the country’s major resources.
According to Fiona:
"The meeting became rather acrimonious when some expressed concern at this attempt to shove the recommendations through. Understandably, they wished to have it reviewed by their respective organisations and obtain a mandate before voting. The inevitable claims of ‘racism’ were made.”
She is concerned that those in positions of power on the Auckland Council, who support the sovereignty cause, might manipulate the process so the proposal may not be decisively defeated, as it should be:
"At the time of writing, the Forum’s Auckland City Councillors did not yet know if this Report would be reviewed and voted on by their Council’s governing body. There’s a chance it could be directed to a sub-committee for an easier passage from carefully selected participants, plus the two votes from the unelected, unaccountable and totally conflicted members of the Independent Maori Statutory Board.”
It is clear that the group wanting control of the Gulf were pushing Forum members to approve their new governance model on the spot, ahead of the local body elections, as they clearly believe they have the numbers to get their proposal through and do not want to risk having their compliant representatives replaced by others who might oppose their plan.
If they succeed in gaining support for their 50:50 Maori sovereignty-style co-governance proposal, the next step in their march for tribal control of the Hauraki Gulf, will be to seek the approval of the Government for a change to the Act. With the National Party’s history of caving in to iwi demands, whether they would stand up against this blatant power grab is anyone’s guess.
This whole debacle shows only too clearly how important it is that our local body representatives are prepared to act on principle and stand up for the public interest against radicals.
By offering themselves for office, candidates are pledging to work in the best interests of their community. That means opposing anyone threatening the principle of one person one vote.
With an on-going campaign underway to pressure councillors to support the appointment of un-elected iwi representatives with voting rights onto local authorities, it is important that potential candidates are well prepared. Standing up to iwi and their supporters is not always easy, so we suggest the following questions should be asked:
If you are elected would you oppose iwi representatives being appointed onto your Council with voting rights?
If you are elected and a proposal to appoint iwi representatives with voting rights onto your Council wins majority support, would you propose that the final decision should be made by local electors through a public referendum process?
If your Council has already established iwi representatives with voting rights, will you move that the positions be disestablished so they can be reconsidered by the new council?
If you send email responses from candidates to us, we will add the details to our website here – as a public service in the run up to the elections.
New Zealand needs strong local government politicians. But be warned – as Fiona’s article indicates only too clearly, you need to be prepared to stick to your principles and not cave in to bullying or intimidation.
Most of all you must never forget that you are there to represent the best interests of your community – and those who voted you into office.
Largest Pedophile Ring In History, 70,000 Members, Heads Of State, The Rats Scramble August 28 2016 | From: VeteransToday
VT and Keshe take the lead in breaking the most insidious human trafficking gang on the planet
Millions read the news today, the pedophile ring “busted” or the earlier article about how the FBI actually ran it for several weeks, expanding it, drawing in tens of thousands. Those who read it thought they knew, thought they were getting the story but as is so often the case, the truth goes so much further.
When Veterans Today tied the murder of Supreme Court Justice Anthony Scalia to a White House blackmail plot and a strange tale involving the Keshe Foundation, it became clear that the highest and most powerful in Europe, the US and around the world, were tied together in a web of ritual child abuse on a massive scale. For the Scalia tale, refer to Appendix I.
Today’s story is one more aspect of this. VT’s involvement goes back to 1991 when key VT staffers worked for America’s intelligence community. A GOP high level staffer approached the CIA claiming that President George H.W. Bush was being blackmailed.
It was said that the President was at a political fundraiser in St. Louis where, unknown to the President, top GOP campaign donors were having sex with young males, some of whom had been spirited away from Boys Town in Nebraska of Father Flanagan fame.
The rumors became more than rumors when Bush 2 took office and brought with him, according to a high level White House informant, a virtual army of Neocon pedophiles and “nancyboys” who set the tone for 8 years of crushed civil liberties. staged economic crashes and the dirtiest wars in America’s history.
The door didn’t open again until Iranian physicist, Mehran T. Keshe came to us with his own story. Invited to Belgium, sponsored by the Royal Family, Keshe was introduced to internet guru Sterling Allen and Belgian “fixer,” Dirk Lauressens.
Mehran T. Keshe
Within a short time, it became clear that he was there as a prisoner, not a guest, having fallen into a web of pedophiles that control public life in Belgium and the Netherlands, control corporations, courts, the police and do so rather publicly.
With Keshe’s story, we traced Sterling Allen, through his work with Belgium’s Royal Family, to his questioning by the FBI, to the seizure of his computers and eventually to his real task in life, webmaster for a massive pedophile ring that supplied children for the members of secret societies that control our daily lives through suppression of technology and the waging of endless war.
From NBC News:
"Massive pedophile ring busted; 230 kids saved – US news – Crime & courts | NBC News
An Internet pedophile ring with up to 70,000 members — thought to be the world’s largest —has been uncovered by police, a security official said Wednesday.
The European police agency Europol said in a statement that “Operation Rescue” had identified 670 suspects and that 230 abused children in 30 countries had been taken to safety. More children are expected to be found, Europol said."
A pedophile ring, 70,000 strong, has been identified and hundreds arrested, an organization run on the internet, centered in the Free Energy Community, including websites run out of Paris, the Netherlands and Belgium.
What isn’t being told is that this same organization, also known as the Red Circle, runs through secret societies around the world:
Bilderberg
St. Hubertus
Federalist Society
Knights of Malta (Rome, not KMFAP in Budapest)
Council on Foreign Relations
Federal Reserve Bank
NATO
Royal Families of Belgium and Netherlands
SCOTUS (Supreme Court of the United States)
So much of this story revolves around Mehran T. Keshe, whose plasma related defense technologies, threaten the military balance of power, disabling American stealth drones and even leaving an AEGIS destroyer floating, dead in the water, in the Black Sea.
Anti-Keshe “troll” and convicted pedophile Sterling Allen, former Rense Radio host, now serving a life sentence, is said to have supplied the encryption keys that allowed the FBI to take over the Netherlands based site. From NBC:
"The website operated from a server based in the Netherlands and, at its height, boasted up to 70,000 members worldwide,” it added.
“It attempted to operate as a ‘discussion–only’ forum where people could share their sexual interest in young boys without committing any specific offences, thus operating ‘below the radar’ of police attention,” Europol said.
Police infiltrated site
The Europol statement said U.K. and Australian police infiltrated the site to identify the members who posed the greatest danger to children. Police also sometimes posed as children online as part of the investigation.
Law enforcement authorities from 13 countries, including the United States, Australia, Canada, Italy, Spain and the U.K., were involved in the case, Europol said.
The statement said Europol analysts had cracked the security features of a key computer server at the center of the network which uncovered the identities of suspected child sex offenders.
And, after his arrest, the forum’s Dutch administrator helped police break encryption measures that shielded users’ identities, allowing police to begin their covert investigations.
“Europol subsequently issued over 4,000 intelligence reports to police authorities in over 30 countries in Europe and elsewhere, which has led to the arrests of suspects and the safeguarding of children,” Europol said.”
In September 2015, Iranian physicist Mehran T. Keshe met with the FBI in Rome, a meeting set up by VT. From a source at Europol:
"It was this from Veterans Today that helped push this forward:
“It was Keshe’s information given to the FBI in Italy that led to the seizure of Sterling Allan’s computer back in January of 2016, which led to the Obama White House getting files tying Justice “Tony” Scalia to a child sex ring and demonstrating that it was Scalia that had protected Allan.
With Justice Scalia exposed to Obama blackmail, his own friends smothered him to death with a pillow, and walked past police, while the world moved on, no autopsy, no investigation."
That explains why Hollande (President of the French Republic) was scared he is linked to child abuse in France, via Belgium as well. Abdessalem (Foreign Minister of Tunisia) was traded by the FBI so Hollande can stay in power, sign the tafta and much more allow American military presence in France, which is now turning against him…
That explains why the US military unit near Milan was behind us to see what we had in stock against Bibi (Netanyahu) and Hollande now that they have Hollande, they are pushing him to the edge, using pressure on Sarkozy, right hand of Bibi, they moved in Tripoli, blackmailing Roma.
Thus, what begins as a hundred arrests, when you peel the levels, involves the French elections and even the recent Bataclan attack in Paris now tied to, if you can imagine it, a police informant smuggled into France through Italy by Tunisia, who out of curiosity runs an anti-Keshe website. Why do they hate Keshe?
Appendix I
- From March 1, 2016
[Editorial note: Revelations on the Allan case, which led to Scalia now lead into the entire Koch network, including the Federalist Society, said to be operating not simply in law schools but America’s high schools as well, and into the Heritage Foundation.
We don’t know when it began, maybe at the Presidio under Michael Aquino and the Temple of Set or before. We do know it has victimized thousands of children around the world, not only in America but channeling children through Belgium and the Netherlands into sexual slavery and death.
What is it that makes the powerful desire what is so hurtful and obscene? When we ignored the Franklin Coverup, we opened ourselves to this.]
Justice Antonin Scalia was surprised when he was ordered to the White House. This was not a man you gave orders to, especially not President Obama. It was Justice Antonin Scalia who vacated the long sacrosanct immunity from civil lawsuits, opening the door for a weakened presidency.
Sources say that Scalia was the single actor behind the impeachment of Bill Clinton. President Obama was aware of this and had ordered the FBI to set out traps for Scalia. We will now outline the downfall of Antonin Scalia.
Yes, this is a story of secret societies, operating worldwide and ritual Satanic child abuse that permeates Washington.
When Scalia left the White House after a meeting with the president just before flying to Texas, the manila envelope he was carrying had printouts from a computer seized by FBI Special Agent Jeff Ross of the Salt Lake City, Utah field office, or so informants tell us.
Scalia left the White House carrying “slam dunk proof” that would lead to the arrest, conviction and, of course, impeachment of a seated Supreme Court Justice, files that contained names of victims and details on sex acts, preferred “types” along with dates and places. All of this was on the seized computer and these files went “up hill” from the FBI to the Department of Justice and directly over to the White House.
"There, political advisors leapt on them, seeing a chance to leverage a justice and, in this case, and this is very important, bring down Scalia in such a way that conservatives would be forced to accept virtually any Obama nomination."
When Scalia arrived in Houston and chartered a plane after ditching his US Marshall protection detail, Scalia and his companion, C. Allen Foster.
Foster heads the Order of Hubertus and is co-owner with John Poindexter of the Cibolo Creek Ranch, 25,000 plus acres free for anyone to use, according to John Poindexter, “free of charge,” so long as they are a supreme court justice, “A list” celebrity like Mick Jagger or billionaires, others need not apply.
St. Hubertus ritual mask taken from Cibolo Creek ranch
"The crux of the story is how they got Scalia. According to sources, Scalia had been providing protection for an international pedophile ring and was murdered by “friends” who he had informed of the nature of his visit with Obama and the doom it signaled for those around Scalia, prosecution, ruin and Citizens United reversed."
The mechanism Scalia used to provide this protection was the Federalist Society which chooses the judges throughout the US judiciary system so should any unfortunate pedophile find himself in court, the judge was under Scalia’s control, thus making a successful prosecution difficult to achieve.
The Federalist Society grooms and recruits candidates to become judges at a young age – college age kids; they specifically seek out suitable candidates who have certain moral ambiguities that can be exploited.
Thus a stranglehold is placed on the judicial system of the United States by a group which serves the interests of big business – corrupt corporations, big pharma, the oil and coal barons; this is how their interests are, time and again, placed ahead of those of we, the people with the result that our environment and our bodies are polluted by the products of these corporations, be it poisons like aspartame and GMO crops in our food, toxins in our ground water (see Flint, MI) or just plain old exploitation of poor people such as the coal miners of West Virginia and Kentucky.
Scalia met with the Order of Saint Hubertus, the patron saint of million dollar dude ranch hunting.
As of yet, no one has identified who was there, it seems that Supreme Court justices are found all the time with pillows over their faces and nobody asks a thing, but this was Texas and they make their own rules down there.
"We remember former FBI director and founder, J Edgar Hoover, the man who said ritual satanic child abuse was a conspiracy theory. He is also the man who said the mafia didn’t exist.."
Scalia’s talk in Texas was said to have gone like this: “They have us, we are all going down unless we can give them what they want and they are holding all the cards, they have everything.”
There was no negotiation with the White House, instead Scalia got, we are told and multiple sources confirm, a pillow over the face and a heroic funeral, one that President Obama refused to attend. Now we know why. For a seated president to not attend the funeral of a pedophile is unthinkable.
The computer itself belonged to a Sterling David Allen, arrested and charged with child rape and sodomy by the FBI after an investigation that began with a meeting in Rome, Italy. The FBI had known about Allen for some time, had wanted to arrest him since 2014 but had been blocked, they just didn’t know why or who was behind it, not until Justice Scalia died.
Within 9 days, Allen was jailed, and the evidence he held began to yield gold.
Allen is being held on these charges with bail set at $250,000.
We were shown an email from Allen where he tells of his January 15, 2016 meeting with Agent Ross at which time his computers were seized by the FBI.
What we are told was on Allen’s computer and what Allen told agents is astounding. Allen confessed, we are told, not only to his own sex crimes but to being recruited by a powerful international organization that provided him broad protection from prosecution.
From Ian Greenhalgh:
"It is very sick, but if you really want to watch and hear the ramblings of a mad man just watch this video where Sterling D. Allan says he is GOD in the flesh, admits to being a paedophile, admits he has committed sexual abuse with an underage child, and says that he is waiting to be arrested.
Mr. Allan claims he chose this life before coming to Earth to be a “scapegoat” which of course is all foretold in his insane “alphabetics.""
We are told that Allen became increasingly unstable as his own feelings of guilt and his own public confessions of child sex crimes were inadequate to bring about his own arrest, an arrest he openly asked for time and time again.
Allen, who using his computer skills helped fellow pedophiles scour the internet for vulnerable children.
High level sources confirm that Supreme Court Justice Antonin Scalia was murdered, that in itself is neither an original claim nor beyond the realm of likelihood based on circumstances allegedly tied to his death. By that, we are speaking of the “pillow over the head” and allegations of a “cover-up autopsy,” well outside legal requirements for someone of Scalia’s position.
Sources in the White House confirm that immediately prior to his flight to Texas, ostensibly for a hunting trip with 35 “close friends,” many of whom are members of the highly secret Order of Saint Hubertus.
As is being reported, initially in the Washington Post with broader allegations made on the InfoWars website, tying the Hubertus Order to Bohemian Grove antics, long subject to speculation in the alternative media.
We became aware of the case in August 2015 when we were shown correspondence between Allen and representatives of the Keshe Foundation. Allen ran several popular websites on alternative energy and was a popular speaker, often appearing on the Coast to Coast radio show with Detroit native, George Noory.
Increasingly it became obvious that Allen had been using these venues for sexual trafficking of children. It wasn’t hard to figure out, he did it openly spoke of it constantly (as seen in the YouTube above) and lived as though he were above the law.
Over the next few months, particularly when confronted by Iranian born physicist MT Keshe, who ordered Allen and those around him banned from all Keshe forums, Allen openly flaunted his criminal activities.
What made this particularly insidious is that it was obvious not only that Allen was not acting alone but that he had broad support not only in his home state of Utah, where he was able to avoid prosecution, but in Belgium as well. There, Allen and associates Hans Bracquene, Dirk Laureyssens and Ad Van den Elshout moved against the Keshe group, securing against Keshe’s wishes technologies with defense related applications and passing them on to MI5 in Britain.
When Keshe moved against this group and tried to secure his patents, he found himself being chased down the highway, shots fired, his car run off the road.
Police arrested and soon “misplaced” the culprits, and soon thereafter, representatives of Belgium’s “royals” told Keshe to leave Belgium or be buried there.
On the European end of the FBI investigation, the trail, all of which is easily followed by the “breadcrumbs” Sterling David Allen has left, leads to the highest and most powerful of the scientific communities where blackmail, kidnapping and torture, threats against families and in particular, threats against children, have placed members of secret societies in positions of power at universities, think tanks, police and counter-terrorism agencies and even the European Space Agency.
The Real Reason Your Rural Banks Are Closing Kiwis - It’s Not Lack Of Funds August 28 2016 | From: EnviroWatchRangitikei
Recent reports tell us that in spite of $1 billion Profit, Westpac is still looking to close 19 rural Branches. So it isn’t because they’re not making money.
Same scenario with Housing NZ. Those homes are being hocked off by the thousands currently, not because they are an encumbrance, in fact the Housing Corporation is/was running at a profit.
Cast your eye back to the late ’80s and the new Neoliberal rip-off economy that promised us they were working smarter amidst a whole palaver about restructuring aka structural adjustment that seemed to mysteriously only affect the workers and equally as mysteriously fatten the purses of the already wealthy. The gap is getting wider, watch.
These closures began back in the aforementioned late ’80s when banks, hospitals, pharmacies, postal, transport and medical services and so on, collapsed slowly, one by one, like a house of cards. Folks at the time put up a huge fight to retain these services and were successful for a time, however, they eventually closed.
The seemingly inevitable. And back then, like now, they were simply decisions from the top echelon in Wellington – economic priorities, not inevitabilities at all.
And slowly, as was the intended effect, folks drifted to the cities in order to support themselves and their families. Kiwis are resourceful and not lazy like the current regime would have you believe. We had full employment before the new banking / corporate government took control.
Slowly, as services were closed, the result of economic decisions in Wellington, people moved to the cities in order to support their families
If you would like to know the agenda behind those decisions you need to look at the UN Long Term Plan, called specifically Agenda 21 and Agenda 2030. It is very long hence few will have read it. However there are many commentaries / exposes / critiques of it online fortunately, by those who have read it cover to cover, notable people like ex Aussie politician, Anne Bressington.
This is the forward thinking plan that superficially looks great and touts sustainability and global cooperation. Be assured it is everything but. Look now at our District Councils, our Local Governing bodies and see how they flout the term sustainability (in practice that is).
Their websites however have all the right spin. People are now waking up to the fact and the reality that our nation is being in fact, severely polluted to the extent we can only swim safely in 40% of our rivers.
And so in line with this change of regime that has been creeping on us since the late ’80s
Mangaweka in the central North Island, a once thriving town, drastically affected historically by the closure of servicesand Rogernomics, the closure of facilities in rural areas is designed to drive us to the cities. Friends tell me their rates in the rural towns are far dearer than city rates … with less amenities.
If you take the time to research Agenda 21/30 you will see the long term plan – in short – is for us to live in high rise city apartments and riding bicycles for transport. That is the general shift that is in motion.
For a local expose of the plan visit our Agenda 21 / 30 in NZ pages. Dr Naomi Jacobs has written an ebook about it (downloadable from that page), triggered by the rising rates scenario (an increasingly familiar theme) in Kaipara in the North. No this is not conspiracy theory, it is a documented UN Agenda fact. You owe it to yourself to read it. It concerns you & your descendants.
Core Edicts Of The Khazarian Zionist Mafia Top Command (Part III) August 27 2016 | From: VeteransToday
A core edict of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia Top Command is to transform the masses into self-hating, self-defeating, mind-kontrolled dupes who can never understand what is being done to them by the Khazarian Zionist Mafia.
The Khazarian Zionist Mafia (KM) has an age-old inter-generational agenda, and it us necessary for the KM to maintain abject secrecy otherwise the masses will revolt with pitchforks:
We now know for certain there is a method and an age-old inter-generational agenda behind the seeming madness and unimaginable evil of the KM’s Top Chieftains, the soulless criminal psychopaths that control the Khazarian Mafia and set USG policy.
"Yet the individual is handicapped by coming face to face with a conspiracy so monstrous he cannot believe it exists. The American mind simply has not come to a realization of the evil which has been introduced into our midst.
It rejects even the assumption that human creatures could espouse a philosophy which must ultimately destroy all that is good and decent.”
-
FBI Director J. Edgar Hoover, The Elks Magazine, August 1956.
The Khazarian Zionist Mafia agenda is specific:
It is now known that the KM has a specific Agenda. That agenda is to establish the KM’s desired end state, a One-world Global NWO system governed by Lucifer. These Top KM Chieftains believe they will be regenerated to immortality upon the arrival of their descended master Lucifer.
And the Khazarian Zionist Mafia has a select set of methodologies deployed to attain this evil agenda:
And it is now known that the KM has a set of select methodologies used over the last 1,000 years to attain their agenda which is now close to attainment.
And these methodologies include sophisticated mind-kontrol, deployment of synthetic terror and manufactured wars, induced drug addiction slavery, Fiat debt slavery, and a general strategy of “divide and conquer” to create ongoing chaos.
They would perhaps already have attained their unimaginably evil agenda but for recent blockages due to the alternative news of the Internet and a spontaneously emerging populism inside America and Europe because of it.
In their quest to always improve their ability to spy on the masses, the Secret Shadow Government (SSG) which is a KM creation, set up the Internet, believing it would be the greatest spy tool yet devised.
That turned out to be true, but there was a serious side-effect that the Top Chieftains of the KM never expected. That was the quick emergence of the alternative media on the Internet and the steady increase in its users who left their Controlled Major Mass Media (CMMM) to habitually use it to get the news and to start researching current events as well as historical events of the past.
The KM countered this by setting up hundreds of misinformation websites. However, in order to gain any following at all they had to play the “limited hangout” game. They had to include a fair proportion of truth in their stories or no one would use their sites or be subject to any of their propaganda as “bad payloads”.
A lot of these misinformation websites supported by KM Cutouts and proprietaries would put out about 70-80% good info with a periodic very bad misinforming payload. Glenn Beck has been fingered by some as a typical example, others identify Alex Jones too, but there are likely many others. It is known that both periodically do carry some good stories too.
Top of the Pyramid kissing their god of the black sun Satan
What ended up happening with many users was that they became so sophisticated in their processing and understanding of how the world really works that they were not fooled by this”limited hangout” strategy.
Many of these alternative news website users have been able to ignore the bad payloads and select the truth nuggets and connect these dots from many different websites in their heads, and come up with composites of what is really happening that are fairly accurate.
Plus, there are some alternative media websites like Veterans Today or Rense.com which are often the first to dump serious hidden facts and Intel out there for all to use as they wish.
What is the specific end game for the Top Chieftains of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia?
These Select Few KM criminal psychopaths believe that as they seat Lucifer in their NWO temple in Jerusalem to be their ruling world master, they will personally be transformed into eternal gods, and will rule the universe forever with their master Lucifer.
The sad fact is that this Khazarian Mafia is just the current expression of this secret sect of Luciferians, going back all the way to ancient Babylonia and beyond. It is the Order of the Snake, but has many other names and is ancient Baal worship driven by a set of root beliefs called Babylonian Talmudism, but it is also known as Luciferianism, Satanism, High Freemasonry, OTO, and many more.
The big problem the KM’s top Chieftains now face is the fact that slowly but surely the masses are finding out about who they are specifically and what their evil agenda is.
Should these KM Top Chieftains be surprised when Goyim find out about this and want them indicted, arrested, jailed and executed for a whole laundry list of unimaginably evil capital crimes including mass-murder, war crimes, terrorism and crimes against humanity, and before the KM can complete its notoriously anti-human, anti-Goyim Globalist NWO Agenda?
More actual core belief patterns of the KM Top Chieftains
The actual core belief patterns of the KM Top Chieftains are based on their deep Babylonian Talmudic (Luciferian/Satanic) values which they use to determine their Core Edicts by which they establish policies while sitting at the top of their pyramidal Establishment Hierarchy.
The actual core belief patterns of the KM Top Chieftains is an age old secret of these inbred “bloodline” families that form the nexus of the Khazarians and old black nobility. It is allegedly all based on their common secret occult network which insiders call the “Order of the Snake”.
Others have called it the Black Sun, the Reich of the Black Sun, the Great Dragon (the alien ET beast, Draco), the Serpent”, but they all represent the Order of the Snake and ancient Babylonian Talmudism, aka secret Baal worship.
It has been reported that this occult network which covers most of the world, is nothing more than the deep secret of the worldwide Satanic Cult network that is centered in the USA, the UK and Europe that serves up little kids to pedophiles to abuse and more than rarely tortures and sacrifices them.
Here is a secretly recorded, later leaked video clip from a High Freemason ritual in which the first part involved hired women to provide “special” entertainment. You can only guess what is not included in this video clip, former High Freemasons who have attended such special meetings have suggested that these events ended up getting pretty spicy with top floors of expensive hotels rented and prepaid high class hookers for all.
The UK is run by High Freemasonry top to bottom, the police, the courts, the government and this is a poorly kept secret.
In America a lot of these institutions are run by smaller numbers of High Freemasons and OTO members, but this is a closely guarded secret. Some are openly members of the Satanic / Pedophile network that traffics in child sex victims over the whole western world and much of the rest of the world too.
Hitler and his top Nazi command were deeply involved in the Reich of the Black Sun, believed by some researchers to be covert Satanism. Some researchers believe human sacrifice rituals were done in the basement pit of Wewelsberg Castle. And during a short time, it was reported that 17,000 political prisoners were sacrificed in a special building that had hydraulically operated guillotines.
"The only reference I could find was a UK story that documented 16,500 executions by guillotine, but no mention of the hydraulic guillotines."
The Core Edicts of the KM Top Chieftains are oriented to managing Western institutions and culture in such a way to mind-kontrol and manipulate the masses and We The People become dirtied up with drugs and alcohol and self-defeating, shameful behaviors.
But these destructive behaviors also appear to cause individuals to self-hate, self-abuse further, and can lead also individuals to become self-defeating enemies of themselves, their families and society. This of course makes the KM’s attainment of their evil Globalist NWO Agenda so much easier.
In order for the Khazarian Zionist Mafia to attain it Globalist NWO Agenda, the KM must attain its goals:
Destruction of normal male female sex roles;
Diversity, perversity and political correctness as the “new normal”;
Loss of American borders, culture and language;
Out of control medical costs and costs of living due to inflation built created and mandated by the private Federal Reserve System;
No more living wages for employment;
The destruction of the family unit;
No more interest on saving and investments that will match the inflation caused by FRS FIAT “fake money”;
Massive unemployment and no more job security;
The end of unions;
And massive taxation, massive debt slavery and usurious credit card loans;
Corruption of the Judiciary and discarding of the US Constitution by the USG and the Judiciary at all levels;
Proliferation of weird occult networks and sometimes secret promotion of strange blood practices to extend the life of the rich super-elites;
Massive weapons and drug trafficking into American Urban centers by the CIA and the promotion of gangs and use of terror entrapment ops to gain more central power and taxpayer financing;
Socially engineered massive addiction to legal and illegal drugs and alcohol to promote gangs, foment massive chaos, and to destroy the general morality and character of the American Masses;
A generally poor and completely irrelevant public education system secretly designed inside the beltway to dumb kids down and make them good KM mind-kontrolled debt-slaves;
To poison the food and water with GMOs and endocrine disruptors;
To over-vaccinate with toxic vaccines that often cause mini-strokes and autism spectrum disorders in alarmingly high rates in innocent children unable to give adequate consent for themselves with parents too dumbed-down to know better; and
To entrain the masses through super high tech psychotronic induction means, including orbital based Helium 3 powered scalar transmitters, use of cell phone systems and WI-FI, mass-mind-kontrol through TV “programming”, as well as certain secretly deployed ELF ground wave systems and the little understood Lilly waves which can be transmitted through the power grid.
But all these KM curses being deployed against the American Masses have only been able to be deployed because they first got control of almost every single institution, including those of the Federal and State governments, the Judiciary, the Congress, private business, the NGOs and private foundations and think-tanks, the Administration, the High Military Command, American Intel and a now largely militarized LE system absorbed by the new KM-created and -run Homeland Security (DHS).
"Unless people wake up soon and start standing against these KM monsters en masse at every level inside and outside the governments and even within the KM itself, the West will be soon destroyed, depopulated by 90% and there will be no future for our young children at all."
Your mind is always the main target of the Top Command of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia, then your assets and then your very life...
Without the Earth shattering disclosures made by Gordon Duff at the International Counterterrorism Conference in 2014, you would never be reading about the Khazarian Mafia by name anywhere on the Internet, even here.
It was VT Chairman Gordon Duff that first disclosed that the root cause of so-called “world terrorism” was actually the world’s largest organized crime syndicate.
Gordon Duff did not specifically name this world’s largest organized crime syndicate in the first part of his speech which was unclassified and made public. Within minutes of its delivery, this historical ground-breaking speech was scrutinized by every major government and Intel agency, and sent shock-waves around the world.
A short time later it was VT’s Financial Editor and Talk Show host Mike Harris that named this world’s largest organized crime syndicate publicly for the first time ever, and referred to it specifically by its proper name as the Khazarian Mafia.
Without these bold first-time disclosures of Gordon Duff and Mike Harris, VT readers would not have been able to connect the dots and begin to understand what the Khazarian Mafia (KM) is or how it has parasitized America and most of the world.
Comment: Some of these statements are a bit blow-hard, as many have been aware of the 'New World Order' agenda for some time now. All these people really have done is to identify the Khazarian / Zionist element.
Nor would they be able to understand what the KM has done to rise to such world power and where it is within striking distance to take down the whole world and complete its evil Globalist NWO one-world agenda.
And without these bold disclosures you would continue seeing and feeling the negative effects of this world’s largest organized crime syndicate the KM everywhere in your daily life, but you would not know its name, its history, its composition, what empowers it.
Nor would you understand what the overall agenda of this world’s largest organized crime syndicate is. And this syndicate’s agenda just happens to be asset stripping, induced death, war and destruction for profit, power, and world domination, all intended to produce Globalist NWO one-world government end-state run by this world’s largest organized crime syndicate.
And it is now pretty clear that without the emergence of some very high level, very informed and very disgusted Intel Cowboys from all over the world, there would be no major leaks of the secret evil that the Khazarian Mafia (KM) has been perpetrating all over the world and in America, their home economic and military base.
The KM has always known that if various renegade Intel disclosed their secret evil this could be a serious threat to their syndicate’s power.
"That is why they set up so many advanced procedures to compartmentalize all areas of Intel - the higher you go, the more narrow the scope."
This has all been done in an effort to keep high ranking Intel from connecting the dots and understanding that they are working as part of system to destroy their own nation, their own families and humankind itself.
Because when some Intel gain too much information about the KM crimes committed under the cover of invoked “national security” a certain percentage will secretly rebel. That secret rebellion can take the form of sandbagging (working hard but producing little) or leaking damaging information through various complex means.
In recent years Intel Cowboys from all over the world have rebelled because they could not accept the big picture they discovered in their jobs. Some have organized into groups which have become such powerful factions that are able to openly speak out and resist the evils of the Khazarian Zionist Mafia.
It is now known beyond any shadow of a doubt that the KM Top Chieftains who sit at the top of the pyramidal Establishment Hierarchy are the top policy-makers and maintain a set of Core Edicts upon which they base their policy mandates on. These are reflected in USG Laws and most large corporate policies.
This series of articles has disclosed many of their Core Edicts. It’s a fact that the Top Chieftains of the KM control the CIA and other Intel agencies and use so-called “National Security” as cover for their crimes.
The KM cannot continue to exist without their ability to maintain abject secrecy and everyday the Internet, the world’s New Gutenberg Press is eroding that secrecy.
Use of National Security as cover for these serious RICO and International crimes by the KM is itself a most serious crime against the USA, We The People and the World.
The KM is the biggest RICO crime syndicate in America and commits the most serious US and International crimes ever.
Some of these crimes are so serious that they are almost unimaginable such as engineered staged wars with millions of dead and wounded with many are innocent civilians, women and children.
Right now the main Intel agency used by the KM inside America is the Central Intelligence Agency. The CIA is bifurcated and employs many innocent analysts and agents who collect Intel by various means but do not engage in evil, anti-human covert operations.
But there is an evil covert part of the CIA which engages in frequent wetwork, abroad and inside the USA, massive mind-kontrol operations against We The People using super high tech Psychotronics, working with the US Military to traffick in trillions of dollars of illegal narcotics and weapons to raise “off the books” black ops money.
Limitless off-the-books Black Ops money underwrites synthetic terror and advances fascistic agendas
"But the most important function that the CIA and the other Intel agencies that are completely controlled by the KM are the covert operations deployed to create synthetic terror, fake enemies, which are needed to start wars and justify huge military deployments. Mercenaries are hired for this, but there are even more sinister methods used."
Saudi Arabia has always provided a great deal of funding to pick up young orphans off the street and place them in special schools to raise them and mind-kontrol them to function as crazed, suicidal terrorist bombers, painted as Islamic extremists.
These mind-kontrolled subjects can then be triggered anytime they are needed to sacrifice themselves and produce the mass terror needed to start wars and justify more and more centralization of KM power exhibited as invisible Secret Shadow Government (SSG) power and visible USG power.
The Khazarian Zionist Mafia Top Chieftains love to consolidate institutions, and industries in order centralize power and make it much easier for themselves to exert control over the USG and We The People.
That is why they used their Gladio-style, inside-job false-flag attack on America on 9-11-01 as an excuse to consolidate all American Alphabets and Law Enforcement into one centralized hierarchy they labelled Homeland Security (DHS). The name “Homeland Security” itself a mockery of the US Constitution and everything our Founding Fathers fought for in the Revolutionary War.
This new Centralized hierarchical control of all such agencies by the KM’s Top Chieftains makes it easy for the KM to implement their Core Edicts as USG policies (many remaining secret, some made public).
These Top Chieftains of course installed perverted, deeply compromised doofuses at the head of DHS to run it, soulless dupes who will do whatever the KM Top Chieftains mandate, no matter the US Constitution and common decency.
Anyone who crosses them significantly gets whacked by their soulless wetboy teams, usually “arkencided”, a term that arose because of all the Dixie Mafia murders for the CIA surrounding the Mena operation and the Clintons.
The term “arkencide” is when the CIA wetboys murder a whistle-blower or someone deemed as a potential threat for knowing too much that they could become an unnecessary risk later on, or someone who has stepped outside allowed parameters.
In the typical arkencide, it is customary for local police to stand-down at the request of Intel and for a crooked coroner and mortuary to be used. Absurd circumstances are knowingly created to serve as a warning message to anyone else who might be tempted to step outside of allowed parameters.
Here is the bottom line of the Core Edicts of the KM Top Chieftains: To foment large criminal operations to make vast fortunes by which they plan to buy up the whole world and run it themselves, step by step.
These operations include: massive counterfeiting (their own private Fiat Currency rented out to the American users); massive illegal drug trafficking; massive illegal and legal arms trafficking; massive money laundering; bust out schemes against the American People using color of law like the S&L scam, the Enron Scam, the Mortgage Bubble/MERS scam, and the “Bailouts”; Wall Street Plunge Protection Street scam where the USG has acquired about 1/2 of all US stocks through proprietaries, thus driving the stock prices up synthetically; sophisticated eugenics programs to promote obesity, disease and mass death in order to thin the herd by 90%; a secret space war program and secret alliances with certain Alien ET groups; electronic weather control and warfare; and last but the most important operation, large scale psychotronic mind-kontrol.
This Jesse Ventura interview with Dr. Robert Duncan can not be embedded in this article, but for the time being can be watched here.
Conclusion
The bottom line is that the KM is driven by an unimaginably evil inter-generational Globalist NWO Agenda to create a one-world government run by them alone.
Their power is gained and exercised through their counterfeit FIAT Money Power. They have been able to capture most of the world in their spider web of fake money which is nothing but printed and issued debt notes.
And the rest of the world is now catching on, especially the Russian Federation and China. Khadafy caught on, and the KM murdered him and plundered his nation through US Dept. of State doofus Cutouts.
Assad and Syria have caught on and the KM is working overtime trying to depose Assad and destroy Syria’s infrastructure and Putin and the Russian Federation have now completely checkmated the KM in Syria and have decimated the KM/Israeli/USG created ISIS mercenaries.
Iran has caught on and you can bet that the Russian Federation will also protect this ally from KM destruction like they have Syria. The whole world is now closing in on the KM, and it’s going to be a battle to the end; the KM is going to go down hard, but it will go down.
The KM’s game has always been to take over the whole world and rule it themselves as kings running a feudal kingdom, with everyone else their serfs and slaves – at least those remaining 10% who have not all been mass murdered by the time they plan to exercise complete world control.
To complete their evil Globalist NWO one-world Agenda, the KM must continue creating massive wars and running large scale international organized crime scams. They must control the lives and hearts and minds of We The People and convince us that our serfdom is desirable, or at least we are powerless to do anything about it.
Every day the KM’s control is waning, as more and more of their Colossal lies are revealed. We are now all in a race to the finish point, there is only room for one victor, We the People or the Top Chieftains of the Khazarian Mafia. You can be sure of this one thing however.
"If the KM were to have won and complete their agenda they would whack all their doofus Cutouts because they would no longer need them. None of these folks would ever expect such a result, but it’s a given if the KM would have won this battle for Planet earth."
Looking at you John - you are just "the help" - no matter what your higher-up psychopaths have sold you in on
Yes, it’s now a major race between the KM’s efforts to control the people and the people’s public activism to expose these large scale KM crimes anstop them before they mass-murder most of us.
If We The People lose this battle, darkness will ded scend completely over America and the rest of the world.
Putin and the Russian Federation and the Chinese are now hip to this KM evil Agenda and have created a major financial firewall against the KM consisting of the BRICS Nations, the AIIB and new Chinese money wire system and the coming silk road railway and commerce lanes.
In time, this will likely produce an end to the US Petro Dollar as the world’s exchange currency, and may push America over a financial cliff. That alone could mean the end of the KM hegemony.
How much better it would be if We The People rose up at every level and organized to take control of our government before that happens.
Why Are Prices So High In New Zealand? + Homeless In New Zealand - Thousands Living In Garages And Cars August 27 2016 | From: MediaWhores / Aljazeera
Dear Leader Knows Best – and the Stats (Satanists) don’t lie.
Luciferian Zionists are incapable of speaking the truth
The media today are ‘debating’ why prices are so high in New Zealand. They have decided to ask the experts. The experts are all pretty sure there is no inflation. The Government told us so. And the experts all work for the Government – or for the banks, who run the Government.
Sounds like a story out of Soviet Russia doesn’t it?
Prices in NZ have in fact risen by at least 200% since the 2008 Global financial crisis. 400+ % on my favorite cheese, and my honey for example. 200% plus on housing, and power bills some say also. Yet somehow the ‘Government’ and the corporate media all agree that there hasn’t really been any inflation at all in the past 10 years.
It should be noted that wages and salaries are almost unchanged in that same period – in economics speak, this translates to “lower real wages” or the amount of purchasing power of your money / pay.
If prices are 200% or more up, and your wages remain the same – you might be experiencing budgeting problems.
And the bottom 5% will all be living in their cars. Which is precisely the case under this Soviet like John Key regime – who pose as “capitalists”.
We need to explain why those prices have been rising (money counterfeiting by the banks essentially) but first, lets consider the other thing putting upwards pressure on our prices – exports.
New Zealand is now feeding upwards of 60,00, 000 people overseas. That is how much food we produce – a massive amount. One of the biggest food producers per capita in the entire World.
We are a giant farm really, with some traffic jams in the middle. All of the very best food is exported to the likes of 5 star hotels across Asia and Europe, and thousands of tonnes more to supermarkets and chain stores all over.
You can of course buy anything you want here – but you just have to pay the same price as top corporate executives are offering for it in Tokyo and London.
If that makes you feel a little queasy, also keep in mind that most of the corporates shipping all of our food and resources overseas, are paying almost no tax these days. They all have advanced offshore licensing fees and trusts to launder the profit through to.
Assholes like Graeme Hart (above) are held up for us as some kind of hero – when he is in fact one of the single biggest causes of poverty in our modern day history.
In fact - Kiwis are now not only dealing with 100-200 % lower real wages these days but are also paying around 65% net taxes on their salaries and wages. That includes 20-30% income tax, 15% GST, ACC rates, petrol taxes, tobacco taxes, alcohol taxes, local rates, and on and on. Then thanks to “privatisation” you have to pay for most “Government Services” anyway.
It is in fact beyond madness – it is looking more and more like some type of Corporate Fourth Reich. A corporate holocaust being run by our Government in conjunction with their Corporate partners.
The Corporate Fourth Reich is apparently well underway in New Zealand – and under a Prime Minister who claims to be Jewish oddly enough. Zionists I hear some people refer to them as. Which looks suspiciously like the word Nazi to me.
Turns out now “the experts” in the media want to tax sugar as well. The poor can only afford cheap foods full of sugar these days. So the new tax is clearly designed to make their lives even harder. Fact is, if they had any interest in keeping people healthy, they would simply remove taxes off fruit and vegetables.
That is the reality of New Zealand these days – a small handful of apparently very well connected and financed people are doing just great, overseas trips, baches, overseas homes, etc – and everyone else is being slowly killed off via a scientifically designed and deployed corporate extermination program.
‘The others’ have nice large distilled water (h2o) treatment plants for them and their family, and everyone else is drinking sodium fluoride and chlorine – if they are lucky – the unlucky rate payers are actually dying from preventable diseases in their water supplies. This is apparently the new standard.
Interesting to note that no one has been held responsible for the Havelock North Water Crisis – these ‘leaders’ are now poisoning everyone and still get to keep their jobs.
Hapless sellout idiot and Mr. Agenda 21 New Zealand, Lawrence Yule expects to be re-elected and he cannot even tell 5,000 + people why they are sick for weeks from a poisoned water supply
One wonders how bad it is going to get?
One thing is for sure – the amount of crap that Kiwis are prepared to put up with has increased exponentially in just 25 years. Probably at the same rate as the size of their TV screens.
And why do we have inflation on our remaining food ? Mostly due to the money printing / counterfeiting operations of the foreign banks – that money you sign for and they lend you, at interest?
Yeah, it came out of thin air... a very sophisticated magic trick, that only certain qualified magicians are apparently allowed to do.
Homeless In New Zealand - Thousands Living In Garages And Cars
Once a pioneer of the social welfare state, New Zealand now has over 40,000 people who are homeless, forced to live in their cars and in garages as a result of rapid house price and rent rises and a shortage of social housing.
Al Jazeera correspondent Tarek Bazley visits South Auckland and meets two families – one with six children living in a derelict garage, the other who lived with three teenagers for months in their car – and charts the country’s fall from and egalitarian society to one with deep divisions of wealth.
Finally, The CIA Admits Covering Up JFK Assassination August 26 2016 | From: TrueActivist / Politico
Yes, the CIA Director Was Part of the JFK Assassination Cover-Up: Even if you have to wait over 50 years, eventually the truth will out. [While they have not admitted to everything - the redlinks below fill in the gaps.]
Suspicions that the CIA covered up JFK‘s murder have finally been confirmed, according to an explosive Politico report (further below) out this week.
Fifty-two years after the President’s death, declassified documents show that the CIA were in communication with alleged assassin Lee Harvey Oswald before JFK’s murder in 1963, and they were monitoring his mail since 1959.
Not only that but John McCone, who was Chief of the CIA at the time, allegedly hid evidence from the Warren commission, set up by Lyndon Johnson to investigate JFK’s assassination. The spymaster and other senior CIA officials are accused of withholding ‘incendiary’ information from the commission and therefore perverting the course of justice.
The CIA has admitted this.
The Politico report is based on evidence given by CIA historian David Robarge. He has claimed the cover-up was intended to keep the commission focused on:
"What the agency believed at the time was the best truth - that Lee Harvey Oswald, for as yet undetermined motives, had acted alone in killing John Kennedy.”
McCone directed the CIA to provide only “passive, reactive and selective” assistance to the Warren commission, meaning the investigation was severely compromised and did not follow up any other leads which may have been crucial in the search for truth.
Robarge also believes that John McCone, who died in 1991, withheld vital information relating to various CIA plots to assassinate Fidel Castro. The historian points out that these plots may well be linked to JFK‘s assassination - there’s a strong chance his murder was a revenge attack for CIA operations in Cuba - but McCone’s unwillingness to explore other potentialities outside of prime suspect Lee Harvey Oswald could have resulted in a grave miscarriage of justice.
JFK was America’s youngest ever and most charismatic President, and his death shocked the nation. Alternative murder theories are popular across the States:
A 2013 poll found that only 30% of Americans believe Oswald shot JFK, and that he acted alone. 61% believed that others were involved in a conspiracy (see the embedded video to find out why).
David Robarge first published these exclusive claims in a secret internal CIA magazine in 2013. His claims have now been declassified and can be publicly accessed here on the George Washington University’s National Security Archive.
Robarge has also written a biography of John McCone, but his book continues to be classified. What else might the historian have uncovered? Here’s hoping that the full truth of what happened in Dealy Plaza on that fateful day will very soon be common knowledge.
Yes, The CIA Director Was Part Of The JFK Assassination Cover-Up
John McCone was long suspected of withholding information from the Warren Commission. Now even the CIA says he did.
John McCone came to the CIA as an outsider. An industrialist and an engineer by training, he replaced veteran spymaster Allen Dulles as director of central intelligence in November 1961, after John F. Kennedy had forced out Dulles following the CIA’s bungled operation to oust Fidel Castro by invading Cuba’s Bay of Pigs.
McCone had one overriding mission: restore order at the besieged CIA. Kennedy hoped his management skills might prevent a future debacle, even if the Californian - mostly a stranger to the clubby, blue-blooded world of the men like Dulles who had always run the spy agency - faced a steep learning curve.
After JFK’s assassination in Dallas in November 1963, President Lyndon Johnson kept McCone in place at the CIA, and the CIA director became an important witness before the Warren Commission, the panel Johnson created to investigate Kennedy’s murder.
McCone pledged full cooperation with the commission, which was led by Chief Justice Earl Warren, and testified that the CIA had no evidence to suggest that Lee Harvey Oswald, the assassin, was part of any conspiracy, foreign or domestic.
In its final report, the commission came to agree with McCone’s depiction of Oswald, a former Marine and self-proclaimed Marxist, as a delusional lone wolf. But did McCone come close to perjury all those decades ago?
Did the onetime Washington outsider in fact hide agency secrets that might still rewrite the history of the assassination?
Even the CIA is now willing to raise these questions.
Half a century after JFK’s death, in a once-secret report written in 2013 by the CIA’s top in-house historian and quietly declassified last fall, the spy agency acknowledges what others were convinced of long ago:
That McCone and other senior CIA officials were “complicit” in keeping “incendiary” information from the Warren Commission.
According to the report by CIA historian David Robarge, McCone, who died in 1991, was at the heart of a:
"Benign cover-up” at the spy agency, intended to keep the commission focused on “what the Agency believed at the time was the ‘best truth’ - that Lee Harvey Oswald, for as yet undetermined motives, had acted alone in killing John Kennedy.”
The most important information that McCone withheld from the commission in its 1964 investigation, the report found, was the existence, for years, of CIA plots to assassinate Castro, some of which put the CIA in cahoots with the Mafia. Without this information, the commission never even knew to ask the question of whether Oswald had accomplices in Cuba or elsewhere who wanted Kennedy dead in retaliation for the Castro plots.
While raising no question about the essential findings of the Warren Commission, including that Oswald was the gunman in Dallas, the 2013 report is important because it comes close to an official CIA acknowledgement - half a century after the fact - of impropriety in the agency’s dealings with the commission.
The coverup by McCone and others may have been “benign,” in the report’s words, but it was a cover-up nonetheless, denying information to the commission that might have prompted a more aggressive investigation of Oswald’s potential Cuba ties.
Initially stamped “SECRET/NOFORN,” meaning it was not to be shared outside the agency or with foreign governments, Robarge’s report was originally published as an article in the CIA’s classified internal magazine, Studies in Intelligence, in September 2013, to mark the 50th anniversary of the Kennedy assassination.
The article, drawn from a still-classified 2005 biography of McCone written by Robarge, was declassified quietly last fall and is now available on the website of The George Washington University’s National Security Archive.
In a statement to POLITICO, the CIA said it decided to declassify the report “to highlight misconceptions about the CIA’s connection to JFK’s assassination,” including the still-popular conspiracy theory that the spy agency was somehow behind the assassination. (Articles in the CIA magazine are routinely declassified without fanfare after internal review.)
Robarge’s article says that McCone, quickly convinced after the assassination that Oswald had acted alone and that there was no foreign conspiracy involving Cuba or the Soviet Union, directed the agency to provide only “passive, reactive and selective” assistance to the Warren Commission.
This portrait of McCone suggests that he was much more hands-on in the CIA’s dealings with the commission - and in the agency’s post-assassination scrutiny of Oswald’s past - than had previously been known. The report quotes another senior CIA official, who heard McCone say that he intended to “handle the whole (commission) business myself, directly.”
The report offers no conclusion about McCone’s motivations, including why he would go to lengths to cover-up CIA activities that mostly predated his time at the agency. But it suggests that the Johnson White House might have directed McCone to hide the information.
McCone;“shared the administration’s interest in avoiding disclosures about covert actions that would circumstantially implicate [the] CIA in conspiracy theories and possibly lead to calls for a tough US response against the perpetrators of the assassination,” the article reads.
“If the commission did not know to ask about covert operations about Cuba, he was not going to give them any suggestions about where to look.”
In an interview, David Slawson, who was the Warren Commission’s chief staff investigator in searching for evidence of a foreign conspiracy, said he was not surprised to learn that McCone had personally withheld so much information from the investigation in 1964, especially about the Castro plots.
"I always assumed McCone must have known, because I always believed that loyalty and discipline in the CIA made any large-scale operation without the consent of the director impossible,” says Slawson, now 84 and a retired University of Southern California law professor.
He says he regrets that it had taken so long for the spy agency to acknowledge that McCone and others had seriously misled the commission. After half a century, Slawson says, “The world loses interest, because the assassination becomes just a matter of history to more and more people.”
The report identifies other tantalizing information that McCone did not reveal to the commission, including evidence that the CIA might somehow have been in communication with Oswald before 1963 and that the spy agency had secretly monitored Oswald’s mail after he attempted to defect to the Soviet Union in 1959.
The CIA mail-opening program, which was later determined to have been blatantly illegal, had the code name HTLINGUAL.
"It would be surprising if the DCI [director of central intelligence] were not told about the program” after the Kennedy assassination, the report reads.
“If not, his subordinates deceived him. If he did know about HTLINGUAL reporting on Oswald, he was not being forthright with the commission - presumably to protect an operation that was highly compartmented and, if disclosed, sure to arouse much controversy.”
John McCone
In the 1970s, when congressional investigations exposed the Castro plots, members of the Warren Commission and its staff expressed outrage that they had been denied the information in 1964. Had they known about the plots, they said, the commission would have been much more aggressive in trying to determine whether JFK’s murder was an act of retaliation by Castro or his supporters.
Weeks before the assassination, Oswald traveled to Mexico City and met there with spies for the Cuban and Soviet governments - a trip that CIA and FBI officials have long acknowledged was never adequately investigated. (Even so, Warren Commission staffers remain convinced today that Oswald was the lone gunman in Dallas, a view shared by ballistics experts who have studied the evidence.)
In congressional testimony in 1978, after public disclosures about the Castro plots, McCone claimed that he could not have shared information about the plots with the Warren Commission in 1964 because he was ignorant of the plots at the time. Other CIA officials;
"Withheld the information from me,” he said. “I have never been satisfied as to why they withheld the information.”
But the 2013 report concluded that “McCone’s testimony was neither frank nor accurate,” since it was later determined with certainty that he had been informed about the CIA-Mafia plots nine months before his appearance before the Warren Commission.
Robarge suggests the CIA is responsible for some of the harsh criticism commonly leveled at the Warren Commission for large gaps in its investigation of the president’s murder, including its failure to identify Oswald’s motive in the assassination and to pursue evidence that might have tied Oswald to accomplices outside the United States.
Dealey Plaza
For decades, opinion polls have shown that most Americans reject the commission’s findings and believe Oswald did not act alone. Four of the seven commissioners were members of Congress, and they spent the rest of their political careers badgered by accusations that they had been part of a coverup.
"The decision of McCone and Agency leaders in 1964 not to disclose information about CIA’s anti-Castro schemes might have done more to undermine the credibility of the commission than anything else that happened while it was conducting its investigation,” the report reads.
“In that sense - and in that sense alone - McCone may be regarded as a ‘co-conspirator’ in the JFK as sassination ‘cover-up.’”
If there was, indeed, a CIA “cover-up,” a member of the Warren Commission was apparently in on it: Allen Dulles, McCone’s predecessor, who ran the CIA when the spy agency hatched the plots to kill Castro.
"McCone does not appear to have any explicit, special understanding with Allen Dulles,” the 2013 report says. Still, McCone could “rest assured that his predecessor would keep a dutiful watch over Agency equities and work to keep the commission from pursuing provocative lines of investigation, such as lethal anti-Castro covert actions.”
(Johnson appointed Dulles to the commission at the recommendation of then-Attorney General Robert Kennedy.)
In fact it is doubtful that Castro had anything to do with the assassination of JFK other than being used as false flag cover. See the red related links for more detail
The 2013 report also draws attention to the contacts between McCone and Robert Kennedy in the days after the assassination. In the wake of the Bay of Pigs disaster in 1961, the attorney general was asked by his brother, the president, to direct the administration’s secret war against Castro, and Robert Kennedy’s friends and family acknowledged years later that he never stopped fearing that Castro was behind his brother’s death.
"McCone had frequent contact with Robert Kennedy during the painful days after the assassination,” the report says. “Their communication appears to have been verbal, informal and, evidently in McCone’s estimation, highly personal; no memoranda or transcripts exist or are known to have been made.”
“Because Robert Kennedy had overseen the Agency’s anti-Castro covert actions - including some of the assassination plans - his dealings with McCone about his brother’s murder had a special gravity,” the report continues.
“Did Castro kill the president because the president had tried to kill Castro? Had the administration’s obsession with Cuba inadvertently inspired a politicized sociopath to murder John Kennedy?”
The declassification of the bulk of the 2013 McCone report might suggest a new openness by the CIA in trying to resolve the lingering mysteries about the Kennedy assassination.
At the same time, there are 15 places in the public version of the report where the CIA has deleted sensitive information - sometimes individual names, sometimes whole sentences. It is an acknowledgement, it seems, that there are still secrets about the Kennedy assassination hidden in the agency’s files.
Hollywood Sci-Fi Filmmakers Tapped To Dramatize Fictional Climate Change To Scare Everybody Into Voting For Climate Totalitarians August 26 2016 | From: NaturalNews
I'm almost rolling with laughter watching all this unfold: Because democrats refuse to face the real threats facing America - Islamic terrorism, debt spending, illegal immigration and job-crushing federal mandates like Obamacare - they have to invent their own fake emergencies to try to win the votes of people who don't have any clue about the real world.
So-called "climate change" - previously known as "global warming" but renamed after the data revealed no warming trend at all - is entirely rooted in false mythologies, official narratives and creative storytelling.
That's precisely why democrats had to hire James Cameron, Arnold Schwarzenegger and Sigourney Weaver to present a climate change scary in a new short film. These are the very same people whose films depict time-traveling Terminator robots, interplanetary aliens with green acid blood, and poltergeists that could be captured with vacuum cleaners (the original "Ghostbusters" movie... the one that didn't suck).
If you believe in time-traveling robots from the future, you might also believe in the climate change narrative, too.
That narrative is based entirely on ridiculous, absurd, make-believe notions such as:
The hilariously ignorant idea that polar bears can't swim (or even that their numbers are plummeting). In truth, polar bears are champion swimmers, and their population numbers are on the rise.
The scientifically illiterate notion that carbon dioxide is bad for the planet. In reality, it's the No. 1 nutrient source of all forests, food crops, herbal plants and green zones across the planet. CO2 reforests deserts and amplifies food production.
It's also impossible for humans alone to raise CO2 levels much at all for the simple reason that plants are starving for it and keep consuming it as fast as we can make it. (This is Botany Science 101.)
The laughably anti-science narrative that says oceans are going to rise so quickly, they'll drown out coastal cities and devastate human civilization. In reality, even during warming periods of Earth's history, oceans barely creep up at the pace of only about 1-2mm per year. That's about 1-2 DECADES for a single inch of ocean level rise. (Yep, not exactly the tidal wave apocalypse depicted in climate change scare films, is it?)
There is no man made climate change
You have hopefully realized by now that everything the democrats invoke in their political campaigning is based on lies. Man made climate change is a cult science myth rooted in a convenient political narrative, not scientific facts.
That's why their climate change scare film had to be made: to stir up the imagination of climate change and make it seem visually real even though it is scientifically false. It sort of reminds me of the original "Reefer Madness" film which was also created as a propaganda political film to scare people away from medical marijuana.
That film was also based on quack science hysteria, just like the climate change films being made today.
Yep, you heard me right: There is no legitimate scientific evidence whatsoever to support their climate change narrative. The data that have been presented to the public are all "corrected" (i.e. fraudulent altered) to artificially insert new "data points" that fit the political narrative we're all being spoon fed by the corrupt democrats.
Remember: The climate changing pushing politicians are all exactly the same people who lie to us all about vaccines, GMOs, fluoride, government debt and antidepressant drugs.
Why on Earth would anyone believe they are magically and selectively telling the truth only about climate change when we all know they are constantly lying about everything else?
The pro climate change position is truly just climate superstition masquerading as science. It should be obvious at this point, but everything the democratic establishment insists is TRUE is almost certainly FALSE.
It states, "Climate alarmists are no different from 16th century Europeans who burned 15,000 witches for 'cooking the weather.' They observe ordinary events, and convince themselves that it is unprecedented and somebody's fault."
"Planetary temperatures have remained largely stable throughout the past several decades, according to new data released by the Remote Sensing Systems (RSS) satellite.
Mean temperatures gauged across multiple measurement platforms including GISS, HadCRUt4, NCDC, UAH and RSS definitively show that the planet has not been warming for nearly 18 years, taking the wind out of the sails of the global warming fallacy.”
"The US government's Global Historical Climate Network reversed the results of temperature recordings to suggest that the temperature was rising through 60 years of research. These recordings were amplified by two official surface records.
The Goddard Institute for Space Studies and the National Climate Data Center amplified surface records to estimate temperatures across entire regions of the Earth where temperatures aren't even recorded. By falsifying records and then amplifying the data, these large data centers misrepresented temperatures records across an entire region of the earth.”
"Now, in what might be the largest scientific fraud ever uncovered, NASA and the NOAA have been caught red-handed altering historical temperature data to produce a "climate change narrative" that defies reality.
We now know that historical temperature data for the continental United States were deliberately altered by NASA and NOAA scientists in a politically-motivated attempt to rewrite history and claim global warming is causing U.S. temperatures to trend upward.
The data actually show that we are in a cooling trend, not a warming trend (see charts below).
This story is starting to break worldwide right now across the media, with The Telegraph now reporting, "NOAA's US Historical Climatology Network (USHCN) has been 'adjusting' its record by replacing real temperatures with data 'fabricated' by computer models."
Because the actual historical temperature record doesn't fit the frenzied, doomsday narrative of global warming being fronted today on the political stage, the data were simply altered using "computer models" and then published as fact.”
Here's the actual scientific temperature data BEFORE the data were altered:
And here's the "official narrative" version of the data AFTER they were altered for political reasons:
And here is the EPA's own chart depicting heat waves throughout U.S. history. Notice that the heat waves were far, far worse in the 1930's than they are today?
How to counter the climate change narrative with actual logic and real data
From RealClimateScience.com (go there to see all the graphs and charts that accompany this text):
1) There is no 97% consensus of scientists. In a 2013 survey of the professional members of the American Meteorological Society, only 52% believed that global warming was primarily man-made – much less dangerous. No group in the survey came anywhere close to reaching 97%.
2) Heatwaves are not getting worse. According to the EPA, the worst heatwaves in the US (by far) occurred during the 1930's - when the Midwest commonly saw temperatures over 110 degrees, and as high as 120 degrees.
3) Droughts are not getting worse. According to NOAA, the US has been getting steadily wetter over the past century. In the 1930's, drought covered 80% of the US, as poignantly described by John Steinbeck in "The Grapes of Wrath."
4)Scientists say that California has had much more severe droughts in the past, lasting as long as 200 years. The past 100 years was the wettest century on record in California.
5) Hurricanes are not getting worse. The US is experiencing a record quiet period for hurricanes.
6) According to the Danish Meteorological Institute, the Arctic Ocean is full of thick ice. There is more ice on the Russian side than there has been in years, and a group of global warming sailors are currently blocked by impenetrable ice in the Northeast Passage.
7) Polar Bear populations are not decreasing. (They are steadily rising, year after year.)
8) Sea level has been rising for 20,000 years, since the end of the last ice age. Most of that time much faster than now. It has nothing to do with humans.
9) According to NOAA, sea level is only rising 1.7 to 1.8 mm/year. At that rate, it will take thousands of years for Manhattan to drown.
10) According to NOAA, sea level at Manhattan has been rising at about the same rate (2.8 mm/year) since the 1850's. There is no indication that humans are affecting the rate of sea level rise.
11) Glaciers have been melting for a very long time. In 1879, John Muir (founder of the Sierra Club) found that Alaska's largest glacier had retreated 48 miles since 1794. Twenty thousand years ago, Chicago was buried under a mile of glacial ice.
12) Forest fires are not getting worse over the long term. According to USDA, the US had five times as much burn acreage in the 1930's as we do now. The New York Times confirmed this.
13) Climate models have failed, and greatly over-predict warming.
14) Our most accurate systems for measuring global temperature, satellites, show that this year is no warmer than 1998.
15) NASA shows that global surface temperatures have fallen 0.54 degrees C over the last four months. The largest drop on record in such a short time.
Sites to visit where you can get educated about climate change:
In fact, the biggest threat to our climate is Geoengineering.
Western Propaganda - So Simple But So Effective August 25 2016 | From: JournalNeo
When some time ago Noam Chomsky and I met at MIT, in order to write a book “On Western Terrorism: From Hiroshima to Drone Warfare” and to produce a film with the same title together, the topic we mainly aimed at discussing was that of the countless genocides the West has committed all over the world since the end of the WWII. The second topic was impunity.
But no matter what atrocities we re-visited, our conversation kept slipping towards one crucial theme: the propaganda that has been manufactured in media centers like New York, Paris, London and other North American and European cities; the propaganda created in order to twist both the past and the present.
Without such brainwashing and the almost total indoctrination of the Western general public and the ‘elites’ in all of the ‘client’ states, no imperialist and neo-colonialist policies would have become truly successful.
We spoke about US commercial advertising and its influence on German Nazi propaganda, and about Nazi propaganda influencing by return both the US and European propaganda-makers.
Noam kept asking me about my childhood in socialist Czechoslovakia, and I explained to him, honestly, how indoctrinated I was as a teenager: not by the Communist dogmas, but by the BBC, the Voice of America and the Radio Free Europe – all of them relentlessly spreading the Western political and market gospel to all corners of the socialist world.
Both Noam and I have created dozens of essays on the topic, as well as several books. My latest one, basically written about all the corners of the world where the Empire is spreading destruction and followed by indoctrination, has more than 800 pages, and is called “Exposing Lies of the Empire”.
And I always feel that even this massive book just touches the tip of the iceberg, that it is only a beginning!
Western propaganda is actually a perfect apparatus! It is effective and it is almost fully ‘bulletproof’. It ‘works’! European empires have been refining it for many long centuries, and the European offspring – the United States – has elevated it to almost total perfection.
One precondition for its success is, of course, that the Western political and economic regime owns almost all the major media channels and distribution outlets of the world. Diversity can never be tolerated. It could smash the idiocy! Once this prerequisite is completed, things get relatively relaxed and cozy for the demagogues in Washington, London and Paris.
Here is just an example of how easy it is to smear a world leader who resists the imperialist designs of the Empire:
Imagine that one sunny morning, some 10 major newspapers and television stations declare that various anonymous but highly reliable sources in Moscow have informed them that the Russian President Vladimir Putin is a vampire!
This ‘news’ would fly all over the world. Many readers and viewers would at first roll around on the floor laughing, but some would not. And even several of those who found the information thoroughly bizarre and unbelievable would at some point realize that seeds of doubt were beginning to grow inside their brains: “OK, it is absurd, of course, but what if? What if? How awful that would be!”
But how can one really prove that he or she is not a vampire? Or how can one prove that he or she has not been visited by some evil extra-terrestrial flying saucers on several occasions?
At some point, the Russian President would feel that he had enough of the charade. He’d go to the best university clinic in Moscow, and ask for a certificate that clearly stated that he is not a vampire. Several leading academics and doctors would get involved and produce a complex and thorough scientific conclusion, resolutely stating that President Putin is not a vampire.
Shocked by and reacting to the vulgarity demonstrated by the Western propaganda tsars, most of the Russian media outlets would offer some commonsense and logic:
"Can’t we all see clearly that he cannot be a vampire? All his teeth are of approximately equal length, he socialized during the day, he does not sleep in a coffin, he eats garlic and he is not scared of crosses; be they Orthodox, Protestant or Catholic ones!”
Others would argue that there are actually no real vampires inhabiting our Planet.
This is when the Western mass media would go into overdrive. Sarcastically it would declare that the Russian academia, Russian doctors and Russian media cannot be trusted – they are all under the heel of the state, and on top of it they have been infiltrated by nation’s secret services and former KGB agents.
"And doesn’t ‘Vlad’ sound somehow similar to ‘Bran’, which is the castle in Romania, which in turn used to be the home base of the commander-in-chief of all militant vampires - Count Dracula?”
There would still be some rational resistance: “No, ‘Vlad’ does not really sound like ‘Bran’, and anyway, nobody in Russia calls Mr. Putin ‘Vlad’ – only the Western media does.” But such voices of reason would never reach the general public all over the world! And on it goes.
In the end, a few billions of human brains would register and subconsciously store the ‘vampire theory’, and they would never again look at the President of Russia, or at his country, with the same eyes!
Of course the Russian leadership is not the only one that the West is targeting. There is a relentless flow of ‘shocking’ rumors and derogatory remarks made by the mainstream media against the President of China, of Byelorussia, against the leadership of Iran, South Africa, Eritrea, Zimbabwe, Syria, and North Korea as well as against all the left-wing governments of Latin America.
After being repeated hundreds of times, the rumors, at least for many people, get confused with facts, and get accepted as facts.
When still leading Cuba, Fidel Castro was constantly ‘dying’ or ‘disappearing’. The North Korean government has been relentlessly portrayed as a desperate gang of bloodthirsty sexual maniacs, executing and raping all that moves.
The ANC and especially President Zuma have done ‘nothing to close that staggering social divide in South Africa’. In South America, the pro-Western media outlets invented and then perfected a new lucrative industry: manufacturing corruption scandals and implicating in them virtually all of the popular socialist leaders.
Nihilism, darkest ‘news’, and scenarios have been force-fed to the public, in order to eradicate all zeal and optimism that comes when one is building a great independent and egalitarian nation.
"I never forget that day,” an Eritrean cameraman exclaimed, during my visit to his country. “I had just finished an assignment inside the Presidential Palace. Then I met my friends and we were having coffee in front of the main gate. Suddenly the Western networks began broadcasting that ‘there is a coup in Asmara’.
Social media went bananas. It was the “Breaking News” story everywhere. And here we were, right there, on a lazy sunny afternoon, in front of the Palace… I had just seen the President…. All was quiet!
They just invented it, in order to get people out onto the streets! They were trying to manufacture a coup via their media outlets.”
It is mainly fear, implanted into the brains of its subjects and slaves; fear that allows the Empire to control almost the entire Planet. Often it is subconscious fear, but it is fear nevertheless. Fear can be that of the Empire as a whole, or of its might and brutality, or even of the alternatives, portrayed in the most unsavory and frightening colors by the propaganda.
In order to rule unopposed, one has to be feared! And one has to smear the alternatives. The task to spread fear, slander diversity and dissent, was given to the official media, academia and ‘artists’.
Of course the biggest ‘threat’ to the Empire has been the two sisters who were born under the same star, from the same mother called Humanism. Their names are Communism and Socialism. And I am not only talking about the Western Marxist concept. There are many great concepts that put life and the well-being of the people first, all over the world!
In fact, a few decades ago, it was becoming crystal clear that Western colonialism, imperialism and capitalism were finished. Their time was up! Socialism was the natural and logical way forward for most of humanity.
But then the West and its Empire fought back. They employed extreme violence and brutality, as well as cunning ‘divide and rule’ tactics. Tens of millions died, and progress was stopped, although hopefully, only for a limited period of time. And not everywhere!
One of many reasons why Russia is perceived as a great ‘threat’ is because it inherited the humanist and internationalist foreign policy of the Soviet Union. But, also because it itself is actually becoming socialist again (although it is moving in that direction by taking extremely short steps). Russia is recovering irreversibly from those dark days of the free marketer and West’s lackey, Boris Yeltsin.
Russia is also hated because it is setting the ‘wrong example’; proving to the world that one can develop and prosper without taking orders from the West, without serving its governments and corporations. Or more precisely: it can do it exactly because it broke itself free!
The demonization of Russia is relentless. Every little negative detail is multiplied and magnified by the mainstream media and film industry. The world’s public is being nourished by bizarre stereotypes and fabrications. And so one of the most compassionate, deep, artistic and passionate nations on Earth, Russia, is depicted as being cold, robotic, heartless and inherently evil.
Massive NATO military forces are now dispatched along Russia’s western border, and they include German troops. Periodically there are maneuvers and exercises, not far from the borderline.
It is clearly a provocation, and it all brings back the horrific memories of the years right before World War II, the war in which the Russian nation lost between 25 and 30 million lives. A few hundred kilometers south, an old ally, in fact a Slavic sister, Ukraine, is being forced to confront Russia by its Western handlers, something that is being done against the will of the great majority of the Ukrainian people.
The US is heavily involved in the destabilizing of Central Asia, including a group of nations that used to form part of the Soviet Union. But thanks to Machiavellian Western propaganda, it is actually Russia that is being portrayed as the aggressor and a danger to world peace!
And it is China, which is being depicted as some kind of a ruthless and unpredictable monster that is now ready to swallow the world! In fact China is an extremely predictable country, and any unbiased student of world history would clearly see how peacefully it has been behaving, for centuries!
But to ‘prove’ that China is not a Communist country, anymore, and at the same time that it is one of the greatest threats to world peace and ‘stability’ (read: to Western control of the World), is one of the most important tasks given to the Western media, academia and propaganda tsars by the Empire.
And they are succeeding! Indoctrination tactics are working flawlessly. The Western pubic is by now thoroughly brainwashed (at worst) or confused (at best) when it comes to China.
In recent years I engaged hundreds of French, Italian, Spanish, German, British and Czech people in discussions about China, just to receive (with extremely few exceptions) a barrage of standardized, patronizing, mass-produced ‘opinions’.
It often felt like talking to the people who were forced to live for decades under the Taliban or under the ‘spiritual guidance’ of some fundamentalist evangelical Protestant sect.
In fact, China is both Communist (Communism or Socialism, but with Chinese characteristics) as it is breathtakingly successful! Analyzing this marvelous country, together with my China-based colleagues and comrades, I am coming to the conclusion that Beijing often uses “capitalist means in order to achieve socialist goals” (to borrow a quote from Jeff J Brown, which is actually the sub-title’ of his latest book).
And an enormous, independent, successful Communist or Socialist country – that is absolutely the worst nightmare for the Empire! It is something that has to be stopped, derailed, destroyed, isolated and demonized by all means! China’s Communist success…
You would never hear about that on CNN, BBC or Fox TV! Just as you would never hear that Indonesia, India, Rwanda and any of the other Empire’s allies and client nations, are in fact the most brutal fascist ‘failed’ states, and that the genocides in Papua, Kashmir and the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) are the bloodiest extermination campaigns anywhere in the world.
I have worked in all these countries, intensively, I can testify. As this is being written, the people of Kashmir are being murdered and tortured. Right at this moment! I am wondering how many of my readers are aware of it?
Perhaps I’m obsessed with “exposing lies of the Empire”. A second volume will soon follow my 820-page long book. I cannot stop travelling, investigating and amassing the evidence. Because I am shocked; because I am outraged and because there are so few, so desperately few people that are actually working in the most desperate parts of the world!
Virtually all stereotypes about the world that have been domesticated in the West are wrong, terribly wrong.
The story of the Russian Revolution is told in the most twisted way, and so is the story of the Ukrainian famine and of the gulags. Not everything is wrong, of course, but the facts and numbers are twisted. I will soon resume my work in the Russian Far East, to write on this subject.
The story of China is grotesquely wrong, from the Great March to the present day!
The story of Cambodia’s “Commie slaughter” under the Khmer Rouge is a thoroughly idiotic manipulation! The slaughter was there, but more people died from the US carpet-bombing, and then from being displaced from their farms by US mines and cluster ‘bombies’, than from Pol Pot’s atrocities.
The great majority of Khmer Rouge men and women had nothing to do with Communism. They were just settling scores with the capital, which they saw as responsible for selling the country to the US, and for the bombing of the countryside. In the jungle, I recently met Pol Pot’s personal guard.
He told me frankly that he was simply pissed off (the bombing killed his relatives), and had no clue what Communism was:
“Pol Pot came and said ‘Communism! Let’s fight the traitors!’ And we did. How could someone call us a Communist country if we did not even know what Communism was?”
What we hardly ever hear is the most important story of mankind: the story of Western colonial plunders, of imposed slavery, genocides that lasted for centuries, of British-triggered famines that killed tens of millions in the Sub-Continent, of virtually the entire Europe and Christianity systematically committing global holocaust.
We are not told that it actually happened, and that it is still going on and on and on! In order to ‘shelter’ the Western public from the horrendous truth about the past and the present of their countries and culture, new and newer stories about those “evil others” are being invented and circulated.
Perhaps, soon, we will be really told that Mr. Putin is a vampire, or that Kim Jong Un is eating Korean virgins for breakfast. We may not be far from such a new wave of propaganda zeal. It all makes sense: the more evil the Empire becomes; the more it has to smear its adversaries.
The mass media and Hollywood are asked to perform. And they do! Reality and fiction are now being systematically mixed, and everything gets blurred and finally the great confusion and intellectual chaos are managing to overwhelm both reason and logic.
The Empire is killing millions and destroying countries and continents. But California is falling off a cliff, and clouds of huge insects are invading the entire North America. While millions of alien terrorists are now engulfing the ‘tolerant’ and ‘democratic’ Europe! So what is more terrible?
Plus there are those sinister monsters like Count Vlad and Comrade Kim, waiting with their daggers behind a corner! Therefore, The Empire and its people have to ‘protect’ themselves. They have to be tough, even tougher than before! And to put their interests first! America (North America) first! Germany first! France first!
Primitive? Does it all sound primitive? Yes, certainly. But it works! At least for the Europeans and North Americans it does. And the rulers don’t give a damn what works or doesn’t for the rest of the Planet.
The Eradication Of Natural Alternatives: Big Pharma Wants To Eliminate The Competition August 25 2016 | From: Sott
Everyone has the simple desire to find happiness within themselves - to find a state of well-being that can be carried throughout their lives. Sara is no different. Sara is a teacher who struggles with mental conditions for which she has been prescribed a bevy of medications.
Over the years she has struggled, as most in her situation have, with addiction and the unbearable side-effects of her FDA-approved "safe" medications.
Her absolute passion in this life is for the children whom she molds and develops with an unrivaled dedication. As she began to grapple further with the unexpected effects and growing addiction to her medications, she began to see it affecting her ability to be present in her responsibilities, while also stealing her creativity that she so greatly treasured.
So when she discovered kratom, which successfully replaced not one, but all of her medications, with zero side-effects, she thanked God for providing this miracle and natural alternative.
In a time when much of what Westerners thought they knew about themselves and their health has begun to prove unfounded, the ever-present natural and homeopathic alternatives are once again gathering attention.
Due largely in part to the continual effort of the pharmaceutical industry, many are unaware that the majority of natural alternatives to the overwhelming amount of different pharmaceutical medications are not only very effective, but in many cases, a far better option.
Big Pharma has been caught in kickback schemes, exposed for bribery, fraud, and price-fixing, and has made it quite clear to the American people that their primary concern is not the health of the nation, but their own bottom line. Yet the pharmaceutical giants march on, increasing their profit with every passing year.
To think that this or any other company would not attempt to stomp out competition that threatened to rival their products is just naïve. This is seen in business every day.
Yet people seem to cast Big Pharma in a light of righteousness, as if they are some benevolent caregiver providing the country with loving healthcare; as if they are somehow exempt from the cutthroat nature of big business simply because their efforts are incorrectly seen as a public service, even though Big Pharma is not concerned with anything above and beyond its own profits.
What is being witnessed is an all-out assault on any possible natural alternative to Big Pharma medications; and currently in their crosshairs, being heralded as a miracle drug, is the natural root extract kratom.
Just as the nation is witnessing with cannabis, the pharmaceutical industry is beginning to wage war against this natural substance because it threatens to expose the simple fact that natural remedies actually work; and work well.
Kratom has shown to work wonders for pain relief, anxiety, insomnia, and much more. In addition to its list of uses, it has a long and respected history; kratom has been used in Southeast Asia for centuries and is perfectly safe, especially when compared to the obvious dangers known to exist with opiate use.
Opiates are an epidemic in this county, causing more 16,000 deaths a year, and according to the National Institute on Drug Abuse, an estimated 36 million people abuse opioids worldwide, with an estimated 2.1 million Americans suffering from opiate addiction.
The number of unintentional overdose deaths from prescription pain relievers has soared in the United States, more than quadrupling since 1999.
The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention report that more Americans now die from painkillers than from heroin and cocaine combined. This is due in large part to the industry's efforts to over-prescribe opiate based medications; and this is not a hypothetical.
Americans now consume more than 84 percent of the world's supply of oxycodone and almost 100 percent of hydrocodone opioids.
These "painkillers," which most doctors will tell you do a poor job of living up to that title, are currently listed as a Schedule II controlled substance.
Currently cannabis, the plant being shown to have more health benefits than all of Big Pharma's medications combined, is listed as a Schedule I controlled substance, implying that the plant has zero medical value and is highly addictive - both of which are categorically untrue.
To add insult to injury, the Federal government has a patent on the medical use of cannabis, all while arresting those who use cannabis for its medical value. It's laughably absurd.
To the resounding cheers of the American people, Big Pharma has been losing the battle to keep cannabis in the dark shadowy recesses of the illegal drug world and out of the hands of those in desperate need of its healing properties.
That in itself is a perfect example of how the industry is not focused on the needs and desires of the people they claim to help, but rather on telling them what they need and creating a situation in which that need becomes a reality; and their profits soar at the expense of real cures as opposed to prolonged treatments.
As kratom continues to rise and its value begins to be clearly demonstrated, Big Pharma has now made it their number one enemy.
It may seem illogical and unnecessary to label a natural root extract that has been used for thousands of years as dangerous while this country's number one prescribed medication is killing people in the millions, yet that is exactly what's happening.
The stark contrast between painkillers and a natural substance such as kratom is painfully obvious.
It's clear that opiates are the real problem; so all should be asking themselves why law enforcement chooses to focus on the natural substances alone: It always comes back to money.
There are billions of dollars in profit that the government stands to lose with the rise of natural substances such as cannabis, kratom, or kava, on both a medical and an industrial level. This is why Americans are exposed to fast-tracked drugs with countless known (as well as unknown) side-effects that fly through the FDA, only to be pulled years later due to terrible and often terminal results.
This has almost become an accepted practice. Yet there are drugs with the potential to cure and not just treat that get shelved at the FDA for decades, shrugged off as just the backlogged efforts of the FDA. They can only do so much, right?
The FDA just approved a new super-Vicodin type drug called Zohydro. This drug contains up to five times the amount of hydrocodone and does not have time-release protection, so it can be easily crushed up and snorted or injected by those who would abuse it.
This drug was approved after only one twelve-week trial in which five of the people involved died as a result.
Yet kratom, which has been used for centuries and is widely accepted as extremely safe, is dangerous and unlawful in the eyes of the Feds.
“When you talk to pain specialists in our field, they will all tell you one indisputable fact: opiates are lousy drugs to treat chronic pain" said one FDA committee member who voted against Zohydro approval.
The hypocrisy within this country's medical field, as well as many others, has become something of an established American business model. Lie long enough, with enough confidence and with enough force, and the Truth no longer matters.
This is becoming business as usual, and it is at the expense of the nation's health. They are bogging down drugs that can cure while fast-tracking highly addictive treatments, producing the perfect return customer.
With Alabama's new law deeming kratom illegal and with other states soon to follow, Sara is left falling back into her old rut of addiction and mental fog brought on by the prescribed "healthcare" that so often left her feeling lost in a world full of potential.
So many fall victim to the pacification and addiction almost certain to rear its ugly head when being subjected to daily and prolonged pharmaceutical drug use. Kratom was the one natural substance that gave her zero side-effects and completely relieved her of her anxiety while rendering her other drugs unnecessary.
It is not hard to see why Big Pharma saw this substance as a threat to its ongoing domination of the drug trade in the United States.
The Truth Of ISIS Exposed In Four Minutes + Leaders On Both Sides Have Already Exposed The Truth - Where Is The Mainstream Media On This? August 24 2016 | From: GlobalResearch / AustralianNationalReview / Geopolitics / Various
They never attack Israel. The evidence that ISIS is a Zionist creation of the cabal that runs the US (and the Western allies) and Israel (using radical Islam as a scapegoat) is overwhelming - And here's a data dump.
British Labor Leader Corbyn: “ISIS Created by UK and US”: British Labor leader Jeremy Corbyn has risked sparking fresh controversy after blaming the rise of ISIS on Britain and the United States.
Corbyn, 66, said attacking the fanatical group would only make things worse and instead claimed Britain would be safer it if declared that it supported the “diversity of faith and diversity of aspirations around the world.”
Corbyn was roundly condemned on for refusing to sing the national anthem at a memorial to Battle of Britain heroes. The veteran socialist, speaking to the obscure website ‘Middle East Eye,’ said Labor needed to stick to its ‘principles’ and vowed to stay on as Labor leader for the next five years.
But he risks a major rebellion over a proposed vote on extending the military action against ISIS into Syria.
In 2013 Cameron was left humiliated after MPs – including Corbyn – rejected airstrikes. Speaking in 2015, Corbyn said he would not change his position.
Corbyn said:
"ISIS did not come from nowhere. They have got a lot of money that’s come from somewhere. They’ve got a huge supply of arms that have come from somewhere. They are – not in total, but in part – a creation of Western interventions in the region.
What I would do is try to economically isolate them. And also try to unite the other groups in the region by supporting autonomy for the Kurdish groups and recognize the vast amount of arms that we have sold – particularly to Saudi Arabia – end up somewhere and those are now being used.
Bombing by the West in Syria now would create more mayhem. It’s very unclear who the alliances would be with and it would make the situation worse. I opposed the bombing of Syria in that historic 2013 vote and would continue that position."
Despite his position Corbyn insisted he would keep Britain safe. He said:
"We make ourselves safer by not being part of US foreign policy at every single turn. We make ourselves safer by saying we understand the diversity of faith and diversity of aspirations around the world. And also by becoming a force for human rights rather than military interventions around the world. I think that would make us safer.”
Corbyn has previously sparked fury by comparing ISIS brutality to US military action in Iraq; Daily Mail reported.
In early 2015, Yousaf al Salafi, a man believed to be the Pakistani commander of the Islamic State, confessed during investigations that he has been receiving money through the United States.
"Captured" US military hardware
A few months after al Salafi revealed the funding he was receiving was routed through the United States, Michael Flynn, former director of Obama’s Defence Intelligence Agency, said he warned the Obama administration three years ago that the groups they were funding in Syria were actually Islamic jihadists.
Now, a group of 50 intelligence analysts working out of the U.S. military’s Central Command have complained that their reports on Islamic State and the Syrian branch of Al-Qaeda were being incorrectly changed by senior officials.
On January 22, law enforcing agencies in Pakistan claimed they arrested not only al Salafi, but also two other people during a raid in the city of Lahore. A source familiar with the investigation told Daily Express that during the investigation al Salafi admitted he received funding to run the organisation in Pakistan and “recruit young people to fight in Syria.”
The Pakistani-Syrian entered Pakistan via Turkey last year, but it was previously reported that he crossed into Turkey from Syria, was caught there but managed to escape and went to Pakistan to establish ISIS in the region.
Daily Express cited sources as saying that John Kerry, the U.S. Secretary of State was familiar with al Salafi’s revelations and so was CENTCOM chief General Lloyd Austin. Al Salafi confessed he was recruiting people with a Pakistani accomplice to send them to Syria and was receiving around US$600 per person.
ISIS was created by the CIA and Mossad
A recently declassified 2012 document shows that “Salafist, the Muslim Brotherhood and AQI [Al-Qaeda in Iraq]” were listed as the “major forces driving the insurgency in Syria.” The document also revealed that “the West, Gulf countries and Turkey support the opposition while Russia, China and Iran support the regime.”
According to the declassified document, the Obama administration was warned in 2012 that these Islamic jihadists wanted to create a:
"Salafist principality in eastern Syria” and that ISI [Islamic State of Iraq] could declare an Islamic State through its union with other terrorist organizations in Iraq and Syria, which will create grave danger in regards to unifying Iraq and the protection of its territory.”
Now, over 50 intelligence analysts have formally claimed their reports on Islamic State and al-Qaeda’s branch in Syria were altered by senior officials, The Daily Beast reported. An investigation into the alleged manipulation of intelligence has been opened.
More "Captured" US military hardware
A couple of months ago, two senior analysts at CENTCOM claimed in a written complaint to the Defence Department inspector general that the reports described the terror groups as weaker than they believe they are.
The reports, some of which were briefed to the U.S. president, were altered by CENTCOM senior officials to make sure it adheres to the presidential administration’s public line that the United States is winning the fight against Islamic State and an al-Qaeda branch in Syria named al-Nusra, the analysts told the publication. The written complaint was supported by 50 other intelligence analysts.
In recent months, members of the Obama administration have tried to convince the population that the fight against ISIS may soon be over. “ISIS is losing,” John Allen, retired Marine general charged with coordinating the Islamic State campaign said in July.
Former CIA contractor Steven Kelley has said on record that ISIS/ISIL are a fabricated terrorist group made and funded by the CIA in the United States.
According to the video description: “This is a completely fabricated enemy,” he said in a phone interview with Press TV from Anaheim, California on Thursday.
"The funding is completely from the United States and its allies and for people to think that this enemy is something that needs to be attacked in Syria or Iraq is a farce because obviously this is something that we created, we control and only now it has become inconvenient for us to attack this group as a legitimate enemy,” Kelley added.
He made the remarks as US President Barack Obama is under pressure to seek congressional approval before expanding Washington’s military air campaign against ISIL targets from Iraq into neighboring Syria.
The Pentagon has already launched at least 100 airstrikes on ISIL positions in northern Iraq since Obama authorized the use of force against the terrorist group earlier this month.
The White House insists it does not need explicit congressional authorization for those operations because they are intended to protect American personnel and interests inside the Arab country.
White House press secretary Josh Earnest said Monday that Obama “will not hesitate to use his authority” to keep Americans safe, but added that the president was “committed to coordinating and consulting with Congress” on a decision to hit ISIL targets in Syria.
“If you want to get to the root of the problem and remove this organization, the first thing they need to do is to remove the funding and take care of entities responsible for the creation of this group,” Kelley said.
“I believe that this ISIS group would probably go away, would be easily defeated by the armies of [Syrian President] Bashar Assad,” he said.
Obama Tries To Sneak Through TPP In Lame-Duck Congress / Trade Deals Getting Derailed August 24 2016 | From: JonRappoport / TheGuardian / Various
First: know that the TPP (Trans-Pacific Partnership) is a huge Globalist trade deal among 12 nations that would a) “phase out thousands of tariffs” (NY Times, 6/1/16) and b) set up corporate tribunals to punish nations that refuse to import goods (e.g., toxic pesticides, toxic medical drugs, GMOs).
In short, it’s a nightmare. Wiping out tariffs is the cornerstone of the Globalist agenda. It allows companies in industrial countries to move their factories to Third World hell holes, pay slave wages, ignore environmental conditions, and then export their products back to the countries they abandoned—with no tariffs. No taxes. No penalties.
The absence of tariffs is the gift that keeps on giving. It’s the ONLY way these corporations can exports products from their factories in the Third World and make a profit. It’s the un-level playing field. It creates a world run by and for mega-corporations.
Obama is the Rockefeller Globalists’ man in the White House. He’s tasked with pushing through Congressional ratification of the TPP, come hell or high water.
He sees hell on the horizon and the water is rising. If Trump wins, the TPP is likely toast. If Hillary wins, who knows what’ll happen? Her latest flip-flop was to come out against the TPP. That was her strategy as she tried to win over Bernie Sanders supporters. Sanders was virulently against the TPP treaty.
In other words, during the lame-duck session, all members of Congress who occupy office at this current moment will still be there, before the newly elected Congress (whoever they are) takes over. Obama calculates his best chance of passing the TPP is with the present membership of Congress.
Twilight Zone? You bet. Here’s the picture: the election is over, the newly elected Congress is ready to take charge in January, but in November, with the old Congress still there (the lame ducks), Obama will make his last-ditch stand to leave the US and 11 other Pacific nations with one final exploding disaster, as he moves to a lavish home near one of his favorite golf courses.
As we speak, he’s on a nationwide tour, drumming up support among recalcitrant Congressional members and fence sitters, offering whatever he can to turn the tide in his favor.
Imagine this: you’re a member of Congress who’s just been voted out of office. You’re still there in November, though, one of the lame ducks sitting in chambers, sipping good scotch, watching Law&Order reruns, boxing up mementos, playing poker, running out the string on your expense account. One of Obama’s people drops by to convince you to vote for the TPP.
What can he offer you? You’re done in Congress.
So whatever the deal is, chances are it’s going to be sleazy. Maybe you’d like a cushy gig with a big pharmaceutical company. Maybe you’d like a seat on the board of a Wall St. firm. Maybe you can score a great price on a house in the Bahamas. Maybe your ne’er-do-well son can get into Harvard, once he’s out of drug rehab. Maybe the video of you and that three-thousand-dollar hooker in a DC hotel will vanish… Whatever it takes.
Because of these Globalist trade deals, good jobs in the US have been running away like marathon runners from the starting line. But who cares? The sinking US economy is “a fact of life.” You’re a lame duck. You need comfort and gifts in the next phase of your life. Inside the Beltway, it’s make-a-deal all the time. Nothing new.
You need to grab whatever is on the table before you go out the door. By the process of Washington DC alchemy, lame ducks can become vultures and buzzards and even eagles.
Thank you, Mr. President. Your mission is nearly done. Thank you for this one final messianic miracle. The American worker is in your debt. Literally.
Protest Never Changes Anything? Look At How TTIP Has Been Derailed
People power has taken on big business over this transatlantic stitch-up and looks like winning. We should all be inspired
For those of us who want societies run in the interests of the majority rather than unaccountable corporate interests, this era can be best defined as an uphill struggle.
So when victories occur, they should be loudly trumpeted to encourage us in a wider fight against a powerful elite of big businesses, media organisations, politicians, bureaucrats and corporate-funded thinktanks.
Today is one such moment. The Transatlantic Trade Investment Partnership (TTIP) – that notorious proposed trade agreement that hands even more sweeping powers to corporate titans – lies wounded, perhaps fatally. It isn’t dead yet, but TTIP is a tangled wreckage that will be difficult to reassemble.
Those of us who campaigned against TTIP – not least fellow Guardian columnist George Monbiot – were dismissed as scaremongering. We said that TTIP would lead to a race to the bottom on everything from environmental to consumer protections, forcing us down to the lower level that exists in the United States. We warned that it would undermine our democracy and sovereignty, enabling corporate interests to use secret courts to block policies that they did not like.
Scaremongering, we were told. But hundreds of leaked documents from the negotiations reveal, in some ways, that the reality is worse – and now the French government has been forced to suggest it may block the agreement.
The documents imply that even craven European leaders believe the US demands go too far. As War on Want puts it, they show that TTIP would “open the door” to products currently banned in the EU “for public health and environmental reasons”.
As the documents reveal, there are now “irreconcilable” differences between the European Union’s and America’s positions. According to Greenpeace, “the EU position is very bad, and the US position is terrible”.
The documents show that the US is actively trying to dilute EU regulations on consumer and environmental protections. In future, for the EU to be even able to pass a regulation, it could be forced to involve both US authorities and US corporations, giving big businesses across the Atlantic the same input as those based in Europe.
With these damning revelations, the embattled French authorities have been forced to say they reject TTIP “at this stage”. President Hollande says France would refuse “the undermining of the essential principles of our agriculture, our culture, of mutual access to public markets”. And with the country’s trade representative saying that “there cannot be an agreement without France and much less against France”, TTIP currently has a bleak future indeed.
"David Cameron is [was] happy to undermine British sovereignty and democracy, as long as it is corporate interests who benefit"
There are a number of things we learn from this, all of which should lift hopes. First, people power pays off. European politicians and bureaucrats, quite rightly, would never have imagined that a trade agreement would inspire any interest, let alone mass protests.
Symptomatic of their contempt for the people they supposedly exist to serve, the negotiations over the most important aspects of the treaty were conducted in secret. Easy, then, to accuse anti-TTIP activists of “scaremongering” while revealing little of the reality publicly.
But rather than give up, activists across the continent organised. They toxified TTIP, forcing its designers on the defensive. Germany – the very heart of the European project – witnessed mass demonstrations with up to 250,000 people participating.
For all President Obama’s hope-change rhetoric, his administration – which zealously promoted TTIP – has all too often championed corporate interests. However, though Bernie Sanders is unlikely to become the Democratic nominee, the incredible movement behind him shows – particularly among younger Americans – a growing desire for a different sort of US.
Protesters wear masks of Barack Obama and Angela Merkel as they demonstrate against TTIP free trade agreement
In the coming months, those Europeans who have campaigned against TTIP should surely reach out to their American counterparts. Even if TTIP is defeated, we still live in a world in which major corporations often have greater power than nation states: only organised movements that cross borders can have any hope of challenging this unaccountable dominance.
From tax justice to climate change, the “protest never achieves anything” brigade have been proved wrong. Here’s a potential victory to relish, and build on.
The NSA Leak Is Real, Snowden Documents Confirm August 23 2016 | From: TheIntercept
Last Monday a group calling itself the “ShadowBrokers” announced an auction for what it claimed were “cyber weapons” made by the NSA. Based on never-before-published documents provided by the whistleblower Edward Snowden, The Intercept can confirm that the arsenal contains authentic NSA software, part of a powerful constellation of tools used to covertly infect computers worldwide.
The provenance of the code has been a matter of heated debate this week among cybersecurity experts, and while it remains unclear how the software leaked, one thing is now beyond speculation: The malware is covered with the NSA’s virtual fingerprints and clearly originates from the agency.
The evidence that ties the ShadowBrokers dump to the NSA comes in an agency manual for implanting malware, classified top secret, provided by Snowden, and not previously available to the public.
The draft manual instructs NSA operators to track their use of one malware program using a specific 16-character string, “ace02468bdf13579.” That exact same string appears throughout the ShadowBrokers leak in code associated with the same program, SECONDDATE.
Its release by ShadowBrokers, alongside dozens of other malicious tools, marks the first time any full copies of the NSA’s offensive software have been available to the public, providing a glimpse at how an elaborate system outlined in the Snowden documents looks when deployed in the real world, as well as concrete evidence that NSA hackers don’t always have the last word when it comes to computer exploitation.
But malicious software of this sophistication doesn’t just pose a threat to foreign governments, Johns Hopkins University cryptographer Matthew Green told The Intercept:
"The danger of these exploits is that they can be used to target anyone who is using a vulnerable router. This is the equivalent of leaving lockpicking tools lying around a high school cafeteria. It’s worse, in fact, because many of these exploits are not available through any other means, so they’re just now coming to the attention of the firewall and router manufacturers that need to fix them, as well as the customers that are vulnerable.
So the risk is twofold: first, that the person or persons who stole this information might have used them against us. If this is indeed Russia, then one assumes that they probably have their own exploits, but there’s no need to give them any more. And now that the exploits have been released, we run the risk that ordinary criminals will use them against corporate targets."
The NSA did not respond to questions concerning ShadowBrokers, the Snowden documents, or its malware.
A Memorable SECONDDATE
The offensive tools released by ShadowBrokers are organized under a litany of code names such as POLARSNEEZE and ELIGIBLE BOMBSHELL, and their exact purpose is still being assessed. But we do know more about one of the weapons: SECONDDATE.
SECONDDATE is a tool designed to intercept web requests and redirect browsers on target computers to an NSA web server. That server, in turn, is designed to infect them with malware. SECONDDATE’s existence was first reported by The Intercept in 2014, as part of a look at a global computer exploitation effort code-named TURBINE. The malware server, known as FOXACID, has also been described in previously released Snowden documents.
Other documents released by The Intercept today not only tie SECONDDATE to the ShadowBrokers leak but also provide new detail on how it fits into the NSA’s broader surveillance and infection network. They also show how SECONDDATE has been used, including to spy on Pakistan and a computer system in Lebanon.
The top-secret manual that authenticates the SECONDDATE found in the wild as the same one used within the NSA is a 31-page document titled “FOXACID SOP for Operational Management” and marked as a draft. It dates to no earlier than 2010. A section within the manual describes administrative tools for tracking how victims are funneled into FOXACID, including a set of tags used to catalogue servers. When such a tag is created in relation to a SECONDDATE-related infection, the document says, a certain distinctive identifier must be used:
The same SECONDDATE MSGID string appears in 14 different files throughout the ShadowBrokers leak, including in a file titled SecondDate-3021.exe. Viewed through a code-editing program (screenshot below), the NSA’s secret number can be found hiding in plain sight:
All told, throughout many of the folders contained in the ShadowBrokers’ package (screenshot below), there are 47 files with SECONDDATE-related names, including different versions of the raw code required to execute a SECONDDATE attack, instructions for how to use it, and other related files.
After viewing the code, Green told The Intercept the MSGID string’s occurrence in both an NSA training document and this week’s leak is “unlikely to be a coincidence.”
Computer security researcher Matt Suiche, founder of UAE-based cybersecurity startup Comae Technologies, who has been particularly vocal in his analysis of the ShadowBrokers this week, told The Intercept “there is no way” the MSGID string’s appearance in both places is a coincidence.
Where SECONDDATE Fits In
This overview jibes with previously unpublished classified files provided by Snowden that illustrate how SECONDDATE is a component of BADDECISION, a broader NSA infiltration tool. SECONDDATE helps the NSA pull off a “man in the middle” attack against users on a wireless network, tricking them into thinking they’re talking to a safe website when in reality they’ve been sent a malicious payload from an NSA server.
According to one December 2010 PowerPoint presentation titled “Introduction to BADDECISION,” that tool is also designed to send users of a wireless network, sometimes referred to as an 802.11 network, to FOXACID malware servers.
Or, as the presentation puts it, BADDECISION is an “802.11 CNE [computer network exploitation] tool that uses a true man-in-the-middle attack and a frame injection technique to redirect a target client to a FOXACID server.” As another top-secret slide puts it, the attack homes in on “the greatest vulnerability to your computer: your web browser.”
One slide points out that the attack works on users with an encrypted wireless connection to the internet.
That trick, it seems, often involves BADDECISION and SECONDDATE, with the latter described as a “component” for the former. A series of diagrams in the “Introduction to BADDECISION” presentation show how an NSA operator “uses SECONDDATE to inject a redirection payload at [a] Target Client,” invisibly hijacking a user’s web browser as the user attempts to visit a benign website (in the example given, it’s CNN.com).
Executed correctly, the file explains, a “Target Client continues normal webpage browsing, completely unaware,” lands on a malware-filled NSA server, and becomes infected with as much of that malware as possible - or as the presentation puts it, the user will be left “WHACKED!” In the other top-secret presentations, it’s put plainly: “How do we redirect the target to the FOXACID server without being noticed”? Simple: “Use NIGHTSTAND or BADDECISION.”
The sheer number of interlocking tools available to crack a computer is dizzying. In the FOXACID manual, government hackers are told an NSA hacker ought to be familiar with using SECONDDATE along with similar man-in-the-middle wi-fi attacks code-named MAGIC SQUIRREL and MAGICBEAN. A top-secret presentation on FOXACID lists further ways to redirect targets to the malware server system.
To position themselves within range of a vulnerable wireless network, NSA operators can use a mobile antenna system running software code-named BLINDDATE, depicted in the field in what appears to be Kabul.
The software can even be attached to a drone. BLINDDATE in turn can run BADDECISION, which allows for a SECONDDATE attack:
Elsewhere in these files, there are at least two documented cases of SECONDDATE being used to successfully infect computers overseas: An April 2013 presentation boasts of successful attacks against computer systems in both Pakistan and Lebanon.
In the first, NSA hackers used SECONDDATE to breach “targets in Pakistan’s National Telecommunications Corporation’s (NTC) VIP Division,” which contained documents pertaining to “the backbone of Pakistan’s Green Line communications network” used by “civilian and military leadership.”
In the latter, the NSA used SECONDDATE to pull off a man-in-the-middle attack in Lebanon “for the first time ever,” infecting a Lebanese ISP to extract “100+ MB of Hizballah Unit 1800 data,” a special subset of the terrorist group dedicated to aiding Palestinian militants.
SECONDDATE is just one method that the NSA uses to get its target’s browser pointed at a FOXACID server. Other methods include sending spam that attempts to exploit bugs in popular web-based email providers or entices targets to click on malicious links that lead to a FOXACID server.
One document, a newsletter for the NSA’s Special Source Operations division, describes how NSA software other than SECONDDATE was used to repeatedly direct targets in Pakistan to FOXACID malware web servers, eventually infecting the targets’ computers.
A Potentially Mundane Hack
Snowden, who worked for NSA contractors Dell and Booz Allen Hamilton, has offered some context and a relatively mundane possible explanation for the leak: that the NSA headquarters was not hacked, but rather one of the computers the agency uses to plan and execute attacks was compromised.
In a series of tweets, he pointed out that the NSA often lurks on systems that are supposed to be controlled by others, and it’s possible someone at the agency took control of a server and failed to clean up after themselves. A regime, hacker group, or intelligence agency could have seized the files and the opportunity to embarrass the agency.
CURRENT AFFAIRS
Saddam Hussein had no weapons of mass destruction. Assad did not use chemical weapons. 
How the Media and Democrats Rig the Perception of Trump
Democratic heads roll after video shows agitators planted at Trump rallies
SHOCKING Report Documents Massive Election Theft by the Democrats
This Video Could Win The Election For Trump
1. A constitutional amendment to impose term limits on all members of Congress.
1.
We emphasize teaching children that media use means more than just entertainment. It can also involve connecting with others: Videochatting, for example, is fine at any age, although infants need their parents’ help to understand it. Another great use is for creating and learning together – letting the child take photos and record videos or songs, as well as looking up craft ideas. We hope parents will feel comfortable seeing digital media as a tool to meet their parenting needs, and not the thing-in-itself that controls us or our children 
Hacking Democracy in Less than 60 Seconds
Shop at local farms and farmers markets
Course introduction